AC13 Help

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide
Printable PDF version
GRAPHISOFT
Visit the GRAPHISOFT website at http://www.graphisoft.com for local distributor and product availability information.

Copyright 2009 by GRAPHISOFT, all rights reserved. Reproduction, paraphrasing or translation without express prior written permission is strictly prohibited.
Trademarks
ArchiCAD is a registered trademark, Virtual Building and GDL are trademarks of GRAPHISOFT. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Contents
Contents
Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13 _____________________________________ 29 ArchiCAD 13 New Features _______________________________________ 35
Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Client-Server Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 On-Demand Reservation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Remote Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Data Safety, Project Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Interactive Schedule Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Annotated Schedule Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Improved Curtain Wall Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Library Improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Objects Saved into the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Model View Options for Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Selected New Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Fill Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Symbolic Soft Insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Image Fill as Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Gradient Fill Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Improved Find & Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Boundary Contour Options for Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 DWG Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Contents
Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 _________________________________ 75

Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Migrating from ArchiCAD 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lost Criteria Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 No Automatic Home Story Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Review New Model View Options for Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Configuration __________________________________________________ 111

Start ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close a Solo Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Opened by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Types Saved by ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Template Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backup Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archive Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . License Borrowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening Projects through a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merging Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-Ons and Goodies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 112 116 118 119 120 124 132 133 135 136 138 140 141 143 145 146 147 150 151 152
Contents
Quick Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155 Layer Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods) . . 163 Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Define a Custom Composite Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Components of Composite Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Pen Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Apply a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Redefine a Pen Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179 About Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Assign a Material to a Construction Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Align 3D Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Display of Materials in the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Display of Materials in Renderings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Attribute Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Custom Attributes of GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 About Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 About Library Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Add Objects to Embedded Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Manage Embedded Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Add a Linked Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Add BIM Server Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Remove Library Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Library Container File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Library Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Contents
Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Favorite Settings as Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Favorite Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Favorite Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apply Favorite to Placed Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Favorites Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ArchiCAD User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customizing your Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work Environment Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Your Customized Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer . . . Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oriented View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fit in Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing 3D Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Explore Model (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orbit (3D Navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Preview (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Dconnexion Enabler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Navigator Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Display the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
209 210 211 212 214 216 217 219 220 222 224 225 226 227 229 230 233 235 237 239 241 243 246 247 248 251 258 259 260 262 263 264 266 267 270 271 273 274 275
Interaction ____________________________________________________ 245
Contents
Project Workflow in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Organizer Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Navigator Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Navigator Project Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Navigator View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Clone a Folder in the View Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Setting up a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Saving a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 Modifying View Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Quick Options Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 Navigator Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Navigator Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 External Projects in the Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Origins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 About Origins in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Create a User Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 User Origin in the 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 About Elevation of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Elevation Values in the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 Reference Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Selecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 Quick Selection of Surface Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 Selection of Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Selection Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Selection Dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Selection Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Element Information Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 The Intelligent Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Deselecting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Find and Select Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Edit Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Store and Access Selection Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Marquee Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 About Marquee Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Marquee Area Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334 View Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Contents
Removing a Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Editing Operations within the Marquee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen Input Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters Shown in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Tracker Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input in Tracker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ruler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Snap Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turn Guide Lines on or off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Guide Lines During Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place an Orthogonal Guide Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples for Using Guide Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinate Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relative Construction Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Bisector Constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snapping to Existing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Snap Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cursor Snap Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Editing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
338 339 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 350 351 352 353 355 356 357 358 359 361 362 363 364 365 368 369 370 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 380 382 384 386 387 388
Contents
Cancel Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391 Pet Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 Move Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 Nudging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Dragging Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Rotating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Mirroring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Elevating Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 About the Align function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 How to Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 Special Align . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Distribute Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Special Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Modify Element Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Overview of Modifying Element Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Stretching Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Modifying Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 Modifying Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Stretching with the Marquee Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Stretch Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Splitting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Adjusting Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Intersect Two Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Create a Fillet or Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Adding Element Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Move Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Curve/Straighten Element Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 Explode into Current View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Create Element Duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Multiply Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444 Drag & Drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Parameter Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 Group Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Lock/Unlock Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Contents
Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459 About the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460 How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Using the Magic Wand in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Magic Wand Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings . . . . . . . 466 About Trace References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Access Trace Reference Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Show/Hide Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Choosing a Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Move Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477 Rebuild Trace Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Compare Reference with Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Why Consolidate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Linework Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Fill Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Virtual Building ________________________________________________ 489

ArchiCAD Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Model Views in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigate Among Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create or Delete Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Story Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Home Story . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show On Stories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Elements Floor Plan Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 490 491 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 501 504 506 507 510 512 514 516
Contents
3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Show All in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Show Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Show Stored Selection in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524 Show Marquee Area in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Default Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Filter Elements in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528 Save Contents of 3D Window as a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 3D Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531 3D View Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 3D Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 3D Navigation Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 3D Cutaway Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 About Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 Create a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Define Marker Reference for Source Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545 Assign Section Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Model Display in the Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Open a Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554 Place a Linked Section Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 Place an Unlinked Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Create an Independent Section Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559 Updating Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560 Summary of Rebuild Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Display of Section Lines and Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564 Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Interior Elevations (IE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 About Interior Elevations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568 Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 Create Multiple IE Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Interior Elevation IDs and Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577 Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578 Interior Elevations and Zone Shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .580 Display of Elements in Interior Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
11
Contents
3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Redefine the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model Display of the 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Detail Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Detail Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet vs. Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contents of the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing in the Worksheet Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Linked Worksheet Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Markers in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Marker Range Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Source Marker Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Marker Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigation Using Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Find Linked Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check Markers Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interactive Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing and Updating Schedule Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
582 583 585 587 588 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616 617 618 619 620 621 622 624 625 626 627 629 631 632
Contents
Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Sort Schedule Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Format a Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 Schedule Headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640 Add Annotations to Schedule Previews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643 Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 About Project Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Index of Published Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651 Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652 How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654 About Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655 Create a Straight Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Create a Curved Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Create a Chain of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Create a Rectangle of Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Create a Trapezoid Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664 Create a Composite Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668 Create a Log Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669 Create a Gable Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Wall-Wall Intersections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 Column Display on Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681 Column Display in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683 Creating Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685 Create a Slanted Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687 Columns and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689 Beam Reference Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690 Beam Display on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691 Create a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 Create a Hole in a Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Beams and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697
13
Contents
Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Complex Profile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Simple Roof in 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Dome-Shaped Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Hole in a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Roof Slant Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Roof Level Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersect Roof Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Element to Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Holes in Slabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display of Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create a Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add New Points to the Mesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Display of Zone Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Stamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Display of Zone Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trim Zone to Another Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain Wall: A System Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
699 700 702 706 708 712 713 715 718 719 721 722 727 728 729 730 734 736 744 750 751 752 753 754 756 757 758 759 761 762 765 766 767 769 770 771 774 775 777 779
Contents
About Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780 Working with Curtain Walls: Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 781 Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783 Create a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787 System-Level Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813 Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 815 Curtain Wall Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 817 Curtain Wall Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818 Edit Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830 Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 832 Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834 Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836 Curtain Wall Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 838 Curtain Wall Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 846 Curtain Wall Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 851 Curtain Wall Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 855 Curtain Walls and Other Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858 Free-Rotate Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 867 Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 868 Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869 About Parametric Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 870 Object Settings of Library Part Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 872 Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874 Locating a Library Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 875 Placing an Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878 View-Dependent Display of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880 Global Options for Object Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881 Selecting a Placed Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 882 Stretching Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 883 Customizing Object Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884 Parameter Transfer Between Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 886 Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 888 Create Patch Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889 Graphic Creation of Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 890 Saving Library Parts from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 891 Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 892 Saving 3D Models as Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 893 Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 896 Saving Custom-Shape Holes or Niches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 898
15
Contents
Scripting Custom Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anchoring Sill or Header Heights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Doors or Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Empty Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Wall Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corner Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skylights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stairs with StairMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . StairMaker Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure and Landing (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Railings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Listing Settings (StairMaker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Check and Save Stair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TrussMaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Trusses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Solid Element Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid Operation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Model View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Model View Options Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . On-Screen View Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
900 902 908 909 910 911 913 915 916 917 921 922 923 924 925 928 929 930 932 941 945 946 951 953 954 955 958 959 960 961 962 964 965 967 968 969 974 975 976 978
Contents
Partial Structure Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 980 Choose Partial Structure Display Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 981 Save Partial Structure Settings by View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 983 How to Define Composite Structure Components as Core or Finish . . . . . . 984 Visualizing the Entire Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 985 Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 987 Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker . . . . . . 990
Documentation _________________________________________________ 993

Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994 Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 995 About Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .996 Assign a Cut Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998 Assign a Cover Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999 Draw a Drafting Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001 Available Fill Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002 Fill Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004 Create New Solid Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1006 Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007 Display of Vectorial Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1008 Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1010 Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014 Create a New Symbol Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1015 Adding Area Text to a Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1016 Using Gradient Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1017 Create or Edit Image Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1018 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1021 Line Categories in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1022 Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1023 Stretching or Shrinking Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024 Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1025 Stretching Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1027 Editing an Arc Using its Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1029 Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1030 Convert Ellipse to Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1032 Drawing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033 Editing Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1035 Drawing Freehand Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1036 Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1037 Decompose a Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1039 Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1040
17
Contents
Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings in Model Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary of Dimensioning Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Overlapping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Wall Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angle Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Dimension Chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify the Witness Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Text Type and Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move or Edit Dimension Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document . . . . . . . . Secondary Dimensions (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Exterior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Interior Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Grid Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility of a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Straight Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Curved Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Grid Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place a Grid System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resizing Text Graphically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Favorite Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1041 1043 1044 1046 1047 1049 1051 1052 1053 1054 1059 1062 1063 1065 1066 1067 1069 1071 1075 1076 1077 1079 1080 1081 1084 1086 1087 1089 1090 1092 1093 1095 1096 1099 1100 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106
Contents
How to Insert Autotext . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107 Autotext Reference Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1110 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1113 Placing Independent Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114 Placing Associative Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1116 Tool-Specific Default Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1117 Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118 Define Default Text Content of Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1119 Symbol Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120 Text Editing in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1121 Search and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1122 Spell Checker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1123 Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1124 The Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1126 Layouting Work Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1127 Layout Book Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1128 About the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129 Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1132 Master Layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1134 Subsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1137 Drawings in the Layout Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1138 Placing Drawings Onto the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139 Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144 Importing PDF Files As Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145 Modifying Drawings on the Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1146 Drawing Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147 Managing and Updating Placed Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150 Deleting a Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154 Layout and Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155 Simple Layout Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156 Automatic Layout ID Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1157 Custom Layout/Subset IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1159 Drawing IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161 Layouting Workflow Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162 Layouting Workflow: Smaller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1163 Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1164 Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1167 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1170 Publisher Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1172
19
Contents
Planning to Publish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Publisher Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Output Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing and Redlining DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create PDF Output Using the Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Document in PDF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Content in PDF (WIN only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Displaying Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ID Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Export Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete Teamwork Project from Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manage Users on the BIM Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Administrator Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Access Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize User Roles for a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Schedule Project Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1174 1175 1177 1178 1181 1182 1183 1184 1186 1189 1192 1193 1196 1197 1199 1201 1204 1210 1211 1213 1214 1217 1221 1224 1226 1227 1228 1231 1232 1236 1240 1241 1244 1245 1253 1255 1257 1259 1261
Collaboration _________________________________________________ 1209
Contents
Force User to Leave a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1264 Join or Leave a Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1265 Open Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267 Close Teamwork Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1269 Working Online/Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1271 Accessing Your Teamwork Project from Different Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1272 Teamwork Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1274 Reserving Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276 Overview of Teamwork Reservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1277 Reserve Elements by Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1278 Reserve Elements by Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280 Reserve Library Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1288 Feedback on Element Ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1289 Element Reservation Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294 Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1295 List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296 Feedback on Ownership of Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1297 Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298 Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1300 Reserve Publisher Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302 Reserve and Delete Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1303 Reserve Find and Select Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304 Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306 Reserve Mark-up Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1307 Review Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1308 Creating and Sending Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309 Assign Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1310 Request Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1311 Release Elements or Project Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1313 Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1315 Request Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1318 Create a New Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1320 Receive and Open Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322 Ask for Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1323 Add Comment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1324 Libraries in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1326 Library Management Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1329 External Files Linked to Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1330 Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1331
21
Contents
External Drawings in Teamwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Hotlinked Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module(s) from Multistory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Module Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Order of Hotlinked Module Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Hotlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules: Multiplatform Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREFs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREFs and the Layer Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using XREFs in Round-Trip Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Opening DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving DWG/DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge a DXF/DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consultation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Reviewer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Version Management with Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teamwork and Project Mark-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Expert LightWorks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exterior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior LightWorks Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualization Extras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1332 1333 1334 1335 1339 1341 1343 1345 1346 1347 1350 1351 1357 1358 1359 1361 1362 1363 1366 1369 1370 1372 1373 1374 1380 1381 1382 1386 1387 1388 1390 1392 1394 1397 1402 1407 1410 1411 1413
Visualization __________________________________________________ 1389
Contents
VR Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1415 Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1418 Align View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1419
User Interface Reference ________________________________________ 1425

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426 Navigator Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427 Project Chooser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1428 Project Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1429 View Map Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1430 Layout Book Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1431 Publisher Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1433 Organizer Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1435 Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1437 The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1441 The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1442 Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1444 Coordinates Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1447 Search and Replace Text Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1448 Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 Trace & Reference Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1453 Project Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1456 Project Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1458 Project Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1459 Report Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1460 Edit Targets and Operators (Solid Element Operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1461 Library Loading Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1463 Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1465 Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467 Work Environment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1470 Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1471 Scheme Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1473 Dialog Boxes and Palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475 Selection and Element Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1477 Tracker and Coordinate Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1479 Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1481 Guide Lines Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482 Imaging and Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1484 Publisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1486 More Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1487 Advanced Redraw Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1489
23
Contents
On-Screen Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network And Update Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shortcut Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbox Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Info Box Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Customization Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Preferences Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculation Units and Rules Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zones Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Construction Elements Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Levels and Project North Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Types Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Appearance Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fill Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Composite Structures Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pens & Colors Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Exposure to Light Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Vectorial Hatching Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Material Texture Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightWorks Shader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone Categories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Profile Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add-On Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Story Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create New Story Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1491 1493 1496 1498 1500 1503 1505 1506 1507 1510 1513 1515 1516 1518 1522 1524 1526 1529 1533 1536 1538 1539 1540 1541 1543 1544 1548 1551 1552 1554 1555 1558 1562 1563 1567 1569 1571 1573 1574 1576
Contents
Grids & Background Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1578 Linework Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1580 Fill Consolidation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1582 Model View Options Combinations Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1584 Model View Options for Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1585 Model View Options Override Fill Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1586 Model View Options for GDL Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588 3D Document Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1590 Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1595 3D Window Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1596 Open GL Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600 3D Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1601 Parallel Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1602 Perspective Projection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1605 Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1607 Set Cities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1609 RoofMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611 TrussMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1620 Grid System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1622 GDL (Geometric Description Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1626 GDL Master Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627 Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1638 About GDL Object Subtypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1640 Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1641 Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1642 Format Options (Interactive Schedule) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645 Index Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650 View Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1652 Book Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1655 Subset Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1656 Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1658 Import Views from ArchiCAD Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659 Master Layout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1661 Drawing Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1665 Pasting Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1667 Paste Options Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1668 Print 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669 Print 3D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1671 Print Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1672
25
Contents
Print Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header/Footer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot 2D Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating PDF Output in MacOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Dialog Box (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlotFlow for MacOS X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PhotoRendering Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z-Buffer Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketch Rendering Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotlink Manager Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Place Module Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XREF Management Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attach XREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DXF/DWG Translation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Save Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pens & Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Font-Style Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge DXF-DWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Import Options for Elements on Paper Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smart Merge Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mark-Up Tools Palette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1673 1675 1676 1678 1680 1681 1682 1683 1684 1685 1686 1687 1688 1689 1692 1696 1697 1700 1701 1705 1707 1708 1711 1713 1716 1717 1720 1723 1725 1728 1731 1732 1734 1735 1736 1737 1738 1740 1742 1746
Contents
Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1750 Project Reviewer Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1755 Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757 Wall Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1761 Door/Window Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1767 Skylight Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1773 Roof Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1774 Beam Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779 Column Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1783 Slab Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788 Stair Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1792 StairMaker Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1799 Mesh Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1810 Zone Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813 Curtain Wall Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818 Curtain Wall Settings: System Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819 Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825 Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) . . . . . . . . . 1828 Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1831 Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1833 Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1834 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837 Object/Lamp Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1839 Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843 Linear Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1844 Elevation Dimensioning Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1847 Radial Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1849 Angle Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851 Level Dimension Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1853 Dimension Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1854 Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1856 Text Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1857 Label Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1860 Fill Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1864 Line Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1869 Arc/Circle Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871 Polyline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1872 Drawing Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1873
27
Contents
Section Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Worksheet Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wall End Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spline Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspot Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera/VR Tool Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create VR Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VR Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create VR Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Fly-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create Sun Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1880 1889 1896 1902 1904 1906 1909 1910 1911 1912 1914 1915 1918 1919 1920 1921 1923 1925
Index ________________________________________________________ 1927
28
Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Context-Sensitive Help Finding a Help Topic Navigating in Help For More Information Context-Sensitive Help
ArchiCAD is equipped with a context-sensitive Help system. To launch the Help: Press F1 Or right-click on any particular ArchiCAD user interface element and choose the Whats this command The Help will open to a topic relevant to the ArchiCAD interface item you have clicked. (In some cases, the Help will open to the ArchiCAD main page.) You can also select Help from the ArchiCAD Help menu to bring up the Help main page.
29
Finding a Help Topic

From the Help main page, you have several ways of navigating to the topic you need: Use the Contents tab page in the left pane to browse the hierarchical list of topics. You can extend the tree-view by clicking on a topic to see sub-topics. Click on your topic of choice to open it in the right-hand pane. Click the book icon to close an open topic.
Click the Index tab, then click the first letter of the topic you are interested in. The list of matching topics will be instantly displayed. Select from the list to access the topic you wish to open.
30
Click the Search tab, then enter your search term in the field. Use the * key (asterisk) as a wildcard to denote any string of characters in the search criteria. Hit Enter or click the Go button to bring up search results. Click on a selected topic to display it in the right panel.
Navigating in Help
Use the buttons at the top of the Help page to navigate.
31
Go to the next page in the Help
Click the right-arrow button to move forward to the next topic in the hierarchy.
Go to the previous page in the Help
Click the left-arrow button to move backwards to the previous topic in the hierarchy.
Go back to the Help page you were before

Use the Back button of your Internet browser application. (This button may vary depending on your browser.)
Locate the current Help topic in the Table of Contents
Click the circling arrows button to highlight the location of the currently open topic in the Contents hierarchy.
Print out the current Help topic
Click the print button to open the print dialog box to print the current topic from ArchiCAD Help. (Make sure you click with the cursor in the opened Help topic which you want to print.)
32
Access Drop-Down text

Some Help topics include drop-down subheadings: to display the text under the subheading, click the arrow.
Access Related Topics
Some Help topics include links to Related topics. If the currently open topic has such Related topics, the Related Topics button at the top of the screen is active. Click to display, or click the Related Topics caption at the bottom of the current html page to display the links.
Print PDF
Click the PDF icon to display the Help pages in PDF format and to access Adobes commands for printing the pages using PDF format. To return to viewing it in HTML format again, click anywhere in the Helps Table of Contents.
Write to GRAPHISOFT
Click the email button at the top of any Help page to send your comment on ArchiCAD Help to GRAPHISOFT. The current topic will be automatically shown as the subject of your email.
For More Information

To access additional sources of information about using ArchiCAD: See the links in the ArchiCAD Help menu See the Getting Started booklet.
33
34
ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution Oriented View Interactive Schedule Enhancements Improved Curtain Wall Editing Library Improvements Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows Fill Enhancements Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D Ruler Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views Improved Find & Select Boundary Contour Options for Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation DWG Exchange Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software License Borrowing
35
Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution

The new Teamwork in ArchiCAD 13 represents an entirely new approach to collaborative project work, and is specifically designed to meet the demands of a modern, international team effort. This next generation Teamwork solution is based on a client-server architecture and is designed to ensure maximum flexibility, speed and data safety to enable teams - even those spread out around the world - to collaborate on large projects. Highlights of the new Teamwork:
Client-Server Technology On-Demand Reservation System Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication Remote Project Management Data Safety, Project Reliability Performance
36
Client-Server Technology
This new collaboration solution is based on a client-server technology, in which one or more server applications are connected through the network to many client applications. The clients: architects using ArchiCAD. The server: a new application called Graphisoft BIM Server. This technology ensures Fast, simultaneous access to projects for multiple clients Low network traffic featuring DELTA-Server technology: only the changes since the last Send&Receive will be sent through the network and processed by the server or clients High level of data integrity Access to project data via Internet (even without VPN) A single user can work on several projects with different Roles and permissions levels Always up-to-date information about project and users Offline work support Server-based control via remote access to project settings and user roles This system is scalable, and can be tuned to fit the needs of either a small office or large multinational operations. The number of server clients is unlimited; several server computers can be used in tandem to ensure top performance. The Graphisoft BIM Server application is a new, multithreading, object-oriented database application. Graphisoft BIM Server is available in 32 and 64 bit versions.
37
On-Demand Reservation System
In Teamwork 13, users can reserve or release elements or other data quickly and easily, anywhere in the project. Reserve or release elements individually by selection or criteria Reserve or release other data using simple Control Light interface (See Overview of Teamwork Reservation) Request data in case of a reservation conflict (See Request Elements or Project Data) Assign elements to users with an attached message (See Assign Elements) Use this dynamic reservation approach to: Continuously keep track of which project areas other users are working on (ownership information is always up to date - no Send & Receive necessary) See who owns what at a glance: reservation by user is displayed on screen with different colors (See Colored Workspaces.)
38
Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication
Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 introduces an efficient, easy way for users to instantly communicate and manage workspaces. Teamwork Messaging is integrated with the ArchiCAD project: its functions are tied to elements and actions within the project, so that many messaging functions are automated. Send instant messages to other users about project-related tasks (e.g. Send changes to the Server, Release these elements) Request specific elements reserved by others Ask for review of selected elements Flyover appears on screen when a new message arrives; messages set to high priority will stay on screen until handled Follow up on your pending requests and to-do tasks in separate lists Check online/offline status of users before sending a message Undeliverable messages will be stored on the server, then delivered as soon as the recipient is online again See Messaging.
39
Remote Project Management
In Teamwork 13, the company user list, project list and company-specific permissions (Roles) are managed centrally for all projects by the Graphisoft BIM Server application. All data can be accessed remotely via Internet with the BIM Server application, so the Server Administrator(s) can, for example: Start a new project or modify the settings of existing projects Add or remove Teamwork users or modify their permissions/settings Define or modify the company-specific Roles Create project archive at any time See BIM Server Manager.
40
Data Safety, Project Reliability

A priority goal of the new Teamwork: to preserve data integrity in all cases. This is achieved with the following methods: Client-server technology: the BIM Server double-checks the data received from the client and handles the action only if the data fits the needed conditions (user permissions and reservation status) Transaction management: the BIM Server refuses and revokes all actions which are faulty for any reason (e.g. hardware failure, network split or power cut) Automatic creation of project backups at scheduled intervals Better control over user access helps further ensure data integrity: Administrator can tailor user rights to match user responsibilities and knowledge Project log accessible - even from a remote location - providing list of key project-related actions
41
Performance
Teamwork 13 sets the standard for high performance: not only in terms of the speed of different hardware and software components, but also in terms of team effectiveness and flexibility. Functions that speed up the workflow include: The ability to work on the project from anywhere, with a simple internet connection The sophisticated send and receive process decreases the time needed to synchronize with the server - so users are willing to send in their modifications more often Faster local save Dynamic reservation system meets user needs immediately; no need for exclusive access
42
Oriented View
To simplify editing and documentation when working with models at odd angles, use this technique to rotate the project view (in Floor Plan, Worksheet, Detail, or 3DD) while keeping project coordinates constant. The rotation angle is saved with the view, which is published as shown on the screen that is, in its rotated position Annotation elements (texts, labels, markers, zone stamps, etc.) can be adjusted automatically to match the oriented view See Oriented View.
43
Interactive Schedule Enhancements

Annotated Schedule Drawings More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules
44
Annotated Schedule Drawings
In the Interactive Schedule window, annotations (e.g. associative or static dimensions, text, fills, lines) may be added to any object/door/window preview. For doors/windows, dimensions can be placed automatically. See Add Annotations to Schedule Previews.
45
More Flexible Setup/Display of Interactive Schedules
In Scheme Settings, nested parentheticals and user-defined and/or conditions enable any combination of logical relationships among criteria Previews can be aligned along their top or bottom; or can be positioned in the cell to reflect the elements elevation from the story/project zero level or any reference level Manually adjust the height or width of any row or column individually, using rulers at top and side of the window See Interactive Schedule.
46
Expanded Listing Options Using Calculation Rules
Interactive Schedule criteria now include Conditional criteria for certain listing parameters involving the calculation of walls, slabs, roofs, and beams. Define these criteria using the new Calculation Rules options: for example, specify which fill types used in your project should be calculated as insulation and air space. This way, these quantities will be calculated in the Interactive Schedule and other list outputs. See Calculation Rules.
47
Improved Curtain Wall Editing

Direct Editing of Curtain Wall Reference Line
The Reference line of a selected Curtain Wall can now be edited directly on the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation, or 3D windows using familiar pet palette commands, without needing to enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. See Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line.
Editable Curtain Wall Height/Angle Parameters

After Curtain Wall is placed, its height and slant angle parameters will appear in the Selection Settings dialog box. The user can modify these parameters numerically from the settings dialogs or the info box, or graphically, using pet palette commands. Curtain Walls with horizontal Reference lines will behave the same way as walls; they will have the following parameters: - Base height - Height of Curtain Wall - Offset of Reference Line from base - Slant Angle
48
For a Curtain Wall with a non-horizontal Reference Line: - Length of extrusion - Vertical position from the Curtain Walls lowest point - Offset of Reference Line from base
See Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall.
49
Library Improvements
Objects Saved into the Project Model View Options for Library Parts Selected New Library Objects
50
Objects Saved into the Project
Project-specific GDL objects (such as StairMaker Stairs and Patch objects) can be automatically saved as part of the project file. Such embedded objects will behave the same way as regular library parts, but it will be impossible to lose them. Thus, all linked libraries can be uniform for every project. All newly created objects are stored in the Embedded Library by default, and can be organized into folders. Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 13. See Libraries.
51
Model View Options for Library Parts
Model View Options now include options for the global display of certain library parts in the project. (e.g. Show Opening Lines; Show/hide Door handles) Model View Options will vary depending on the loaded libraries, to enable specialization for local requirements (e.g. scale-dependent display of window components according to local documentation standards). See Model View Options for GDL Objects.
52
Selected New Library Objects

Some of these objects may not be available in all localized libraries.
Pivot Door
D1 Pivot door leaf turns around a vertical axis that can be offset to any distance from the center.
Sliding Folding Multipanel Door

D Sliding Folding Multipanel door has optional outside/inside/middle stacking. In closed position, access is through a panel at one end that behaves like a normal door.
53
Asymmetric Curtain Wall Door Panel

CW Door 2 Asymmetric object. Double door with asymmetric leaf width option.
Enhanced Curtain Wall Anchor Object

Possibility to place it on the frame side, and to rotate it at 0, 90, 180, 270 degrees.
Enhanced Options for Curtain Wall Panels at Corner Positions

Mitred and butt-joint options for connecting panels.
New Steel Pan Stair

Stair stringer can be channel, tube or bar. Metal riser is optional.
54
Swimming Pool
Vary number of lanes (4-10) and length (25, 33 and 50 meters).
Bowling Alley
Standard competition size.
Bed Layout
Several variations for design aid, plus 3D model.
55
Trapezoid Bathtub
Freely resizeable.
Space Saver Toilets

New WC High Seat Corner and WC LT Corner space saver toilets for corner positioning.
Minimal Space for Wheelchair Access

New design aid and symbol: Wheelchair man. Define and check minimal space for disabled access; display it on 2D and section. Display disabled person symbol on 2D and section.
56
Enhanced Automatic Dimensioning Options for Doors/Windows
The Automatic Exterior Dimensioning function now gives you full flexibility in defining the Door and Window values you wish to dimension. New options enable you to dimension the wallhole, the reveal, the window/door unit, and/or the doors egress or leaf size. See Automatic Exterior Dimensioning.
57
Fill Enhancements
Symbolic Soft Insulation Image Fill as Cover Fill Gradient Fill Enhancements
58
Symbolic Soft Insulation
New Symbol Fill representation makes it easy to model insulation in a composite or complex structure, including curved elements, and ensures proper display of the insulation, even as the skin thickness varies. This option is available for any symbol fill, so its use is not limited to insulation: you can apply it to display any directional fill, e.g. when modeling wood sheathing or metal decking. See Orientation at: Composites Edit Selected Item (Composite Structures), as well as at: Components - Default/Selected Panel (Profile Manager) .
59
Image Fill as Cover Fill
To display surfaces more attractively in 2D views, you can now apply an image fill to any Roof, Slab or Mesh with a cover fill.
60
Gradient Fill Enhancements
Transparent background available for Gradient fills Accurate output of Gradient fills in various 2D formats including PDF and DWG. DWG Translator option to explode Gradient fills to separate components (including the transparent fill background)
61
Slab/Roof Edge Custom Settings
To match the slope angle of the connecting building structures, you can slant a slabs edges individually. For an even better match, modify the material of any slab or roof edge. For Roofs, you can also assign an edge type (e.g. gable, eaves, etc.) which will classify the roof for calculation purposes. See Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material and Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material.
62
Improved OpenGL Display for Smooth Edges in 3D
Sharp contour lines and improved shading colors in 3D views using OpenGL will enhance the quality of every 3D drawing, reducing the necessity to fine tune the images in 3rd party graphical applications.
63
Ruler
New editing aid gives instant, dynamic feedback on cursors vertical and horizontal position. Available in every ArchiCAD window, except the 3D Window and Schedules. Create Guide Lines by clicking and dragging on the Ruler See Ruler.
64
Dynamic Fit in Window Zooming when Navigating Among Views
New Fit in Window option in View Settings ensures that this view will always display the entire project contents on screen, subject to Layer status. This setting is also applied when drawings from this view are updated or published. See View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.
65
Improved Find & Select
More sophisticated Find & Select interface, analogous to criteria lists for Interactive Schedule, enables more complex searches. Add multiple search values to a single criterion Use stored Find & Select criteria to reserve elements in Teamwork Store Find & Select criteria sets locally or share them in Teamwork See Find and Select Elements.
66
Boundary Contour Options for Section/ Elevation/Interior Elevation
Display of element contour lines at the place where they are cut by the Section boundary can now be controlled precisely. Define the contours visibility, pen colors and line types from Section Settings. See Boundary Contours.
67
DWG Exchange
Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer
68
Export Multiple Layouts into Single DWG
New option enables you to merge the entire Publisher Set contents into a single DWG file. Merge all Layout items plus the model to which they refer into a single DWG Resulting DWG file will contain as many Paper Spaces as the number of Layouts that have been used as Publisher Set items. Resulting DWG file will be in Paper Space, and the same translation options apply for all published Layouts. See Defining Output Format.
69
Filter DWG Elements by Layer when Opening as ArchiCAD File
Filter elements by layer to restrict DWG conversion to just the elements that you need. This function enables faster conversion speed and reduced file size when opening DWG file in ArchiCAD. See Enable Partial Open in Open Options in DXF/DWG Translation Setup.
70
Improved Options for Saving to Custom Layers

Improves the quality of your projects converted to DXF/DWG, providing greater control over which elements and sub-elements should be assigned to their own layers. New Custom Layers now available in DXF-DWG Translator Setup dialog box: - Zone Background (any visible zone cover fills) - Zone Outline - Zone Stamp (geometry of zone stamp) - Zone Texts (textual content of zone stamp) Insert AutoText into Custom Layer name with a single click. - While editing the Custom Layer field, click the Insert Source Layer button to insert an AutoText for the elements Source Layer. This way, the name of each elements ArchiCAD layer will automatically appear as part of the layer name of the saved element. See Custom Layers (in DXF/DWG Translation Setup.)
71
Keep Exploded DWG Drawings on Single Layer

This new option helps you avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. If you place a Drawing in DWG format to ArchiCAD, then explode it, the Explode follow-up dialog includes a new option: to keep all drawing primitives on their original layer (that is, the same layer as the Drawings layer). See Explode into Current View.
72
Improved Data Exchange with Structural Software

Standard Steel Column/Beam Profiles
You can access thousands of standard profiles from a worldwide industry standard profile database. These profiles can then be used when placing Columns or Beams. During the data exchange process, structural engineering programs will recognize and identify such standard elements accurately and completely, without requiring any settings adjustments. See Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile.
Define Load-Bearing/Non-Load-Bearing Structure for Construction Elements

Walls, Beams, Columns, and Slabs can now be defined as either Load-bearing or Non-loadbearing. This is useful when exchanging data with structural programs. See Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings.
73
License Borrowing
License borrowing allows you to continue working in ArchiCAD with a network license, even when the license server is not accessible - e.g. when you are visiting the client or on a business trip. The user can borrow a license with a single click from the ArchiCAD interface, and return it before it expires so that other users can access it. Administrator determines the number of borrowable licenses and borrowing period Administrator monitors who has borrowed the licenses and when they will expire Expired licenses stop functioning and are returned to the Server, even if the user is not connected to the server
See License Borrowing.
74
Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13

To use this Migration Guide, click on the subtitle below that corresponds to the project version you wish to migrate. This will take you to a checklist of migration issues you should consider.
Migrating from ArchiCAD 12 Migrating from ArchiCAD 11 Migrating from ArchiCAD 10 Migrating from ArchiCAD 9 Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1
To review a list of Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13 (compared to ArchiCAD 12), click here:
Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13
75
Interface Changes in ArchiCAD 13

Note the following interface changes in ArchiCAD 13:
File > Open

The commands used to open existing projects have been redesigned. To open a solo project, use File > Open > Open... to access a file directory dialog box. To open an existing Teamwork project, use File > Open > Open/Join Teamwork Project... to access a server and a list of projects.
Recent Documents
Recently opened ArchiCAD solo projects are now listed at the bottom of the File > Open submenu, rather than under a separate File menu command.
Story Settings
The Story Settings dialog box controls are unchanged, but they are now divided between two separate dialog boxes: Story Settings contains the controls for inserting, deleting, and naming stories. Edit Elements by Stories allows you to copy and move elements among the stories of your project. These commands are available from the Design menu; by right-clicking any story in the Navigator Project Map; and/or by customizing your menu structure to include these commands.
Library Manager Tab Pages

Following a re-design of the Library Manager, the FTP and Web Objects tab pages have been eliminated.
Simplified Icons in Navigator Project Map

Regardless of type (e.g. independent or project-based; Floor Plan or Section-based; linked or unlinked), all Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, Detail and Worksheet viewpoints are displayed in the Navigator with uniform icons.
76
Publisher Set Interface

The Publisher Set controls work the same as in earlier versions, but to enable reservation of individual Publisher Sets by Teamwork users, Publisher Sets have a new listing option in the Publisher maps (Organizer and Navigator): click the Up One Level button to view the full list of Publisher Sets and to choose and manage them. In this view, use the command buttons at the bottom of the list window to manage Publisher Sets.
Fill Types Setting

The setting for solid fills in the Fill Types dialog box is now called Opacity. (In earlier versions, this setting was called Translucency.)
Hotlink Management
The Open in single-story mode checkbox has been eliminated from the New Hotlink directory dialog box. This function is now merged into the Choose Story dialog box that appears when you first place a multi-story module file. The option to Skip Nested Modules can now be set separately, in the Module Settings of each placed instance of a hotlinked module. You can also skip or include nested modules for all instances of a module, using the general control in Hotlink Manager.
Project Preferences Changes

Options > Project Preferences is now a sub-menu. The following Project Preferences screens have been eliminated and their controls moved elsewhere. (See table below.) Layout Preferences Miscellaneous
Working Units a Separate Project Preference

Working Units is now a separate dialog box, in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. This is a user-specific preference and (unlike other Project Preferences) cannot be shared or reserved in Teamwork. (In earlier versions, these controls were grouped under the title Working Units and Levels and constituted one tab page of the Project Preferences dialog box.)
Renamed Project Preferences: Levels and Project North

The Levels and Project North controls (formerly Working Units and Levels) have their own Preferences tab page. This page now also includes the editable control for setting Project North.
Renamed Project Preferences: Calculation Units and Rules

The former Calculation Units page of Project Preferences is renamed as Calculation Units and Rules to reflect the additional settings on listing rules.
77
Network and Update Options Replaces Web Options (Work Environment)

The new name of the Web Options Work Environment dialog page is Network and Update Options. Here, the old Web Objects Folder location controls have been eliminated. The new option on this dialog page is: Teamwork Discovery Port.
New Work Environment Dialog Page

On-Screen Options is a new page of the Work Environment dialog box. Many of these settings have been moved here from other parts of the Work Environment dialog box (primarily from More Options). See table below.
Preference, Command or Option Name Working Units Reference Levels Display of Master Layout Items (now called Display Master Layout) Color of Master Layout Items (now: Use uniform color for Master items...) Show Ghost Bounding Box Autohide Special Snap Points Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment Special Snap Point Color Feedback Graphics Color Source Marker Color Line Type/pen color of Marker Elements on-screen-only parts When placing model views onto Layouts, adjust each drawing frame to show only zoomed area of model view Update Auto-rebuild Model viewpoints continuously Create Detail/Worksheet Boundary in Detail/Worksheet Window Auto ID Increase New Location Options > Project Preferences > Working Units Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North Master Layout Settings Work Environment > On-Screen Options
Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > On-Screen Options Work Environment > More Options
Options > Work Environment > More Options Options > Work Environment > More Options Options > Work Environment > More Options
78
Migrating from ArchiCAD 12

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12
79

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display Review New Model View Options for Fills DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills
80

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets No Automatic Home Story Settings Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display Review New Model View Options for Fills DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills
81

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills
82
Migrating from ArchiCAD 8.1

Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13 Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13 Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Lost Criteria Sets Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13 Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills
83
Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13

The active libraries of older-version projects will be loaded in ArchiCAD 13 as linked libraries. (They will be listed in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager.) Other Objects items in the older versions will appear in the Embedded Objects folder of ArchiCAD 13. Any library missing in the Library Manager of the older version will be listed as unavailable in the Library Manager of ArchiCAD 13. Locate these libraries and add them as linked libraries, using the Library Managers Add command. Missing objects in the older-version project are also listed as missing in ArchiCAD 13, both in the Library Manager as well as the Library Loading Report. To solve the problem, locate the source files of these missing objects and add them to Library Manager.
Subset Library/Migration Library

If you are migrating earlier-version ArchiCAD projects, some of your library parts will be incompatible with new library parts in ArchiCAD 13. If you want to keep the old library objects, but also use the new library objects, do the following: load the ArchiCAD 13 library (use Add in Library Manager) load the migration libraries from AC 10, 11 or 12, as appropriate. - For projects migrated from ArchiCAD 10, 11, or 12, these are called ArchiCAD Migration Libraries and are available as .lcf files available from the GRAPHISOFT website. Note: Available migration libraries may vary, depending on your localized version. - For projects migrated from ArchiCAD 9: certain localized versions delivered an ArchiCAD 9 Subset Library. In this case, you should load all of the following libraries: ArchiCAD 9 Subset + ArchiCAD 10/11/12 Migration Library. This way, the compatible old elements will be automatically replaced by AC 13 library elements. The incompatible old elements will remain in place, and will not conflict with the AC 13 objects. If you want to continue working on your project using the new objects: load the ArchiCAD 13 library (use Add in Library Manager) The non-compatible elements in your migrated project will be shown as Missing library parts; you must replace them one by one, and you must reset their parameters. The compatible elements will be automatically replaced by AC 13 library parts.
84
Open Older Teamwork Files in ArchiCAD 13

1) Open the Teamwork project in its original, older-version ArchiCAD. 2) After all changes have been sent, all users should sign out (except the Administrator). Then save the .plp file. 3) In ArchiCAD 13, go to File > Open > Open. 4) In the appearing file directory dialog box, select the .plp file you saved in Step 2. Click Open. 5) Share the project to a BIM Server. (Teamwork > Share). As part of the Share process: - Project-specific libraries from earlier ArchiCAD versions will be transformed into Embedded Libraries in ArchiCAD 13. - You should upload the Linked Libraries to the BIM Server. Important: All users and workspaces will be lost! Users and roles must be created and assigned for this project on the BIM Server, using the GRAPHISOFT BIM Server Manager. If the older Teamwork project contained Hotlinks and Drawings referring to external content, these will function without any problems in ArchiCAD 13. - However, if the older Teamwork project was created in ArchiCAD 11 or earlier, these Hotlinks and linked Drawings cannot be updated from their original sources. In this case, follow the migration procedure described at Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks. If the older Teamwork project is the source project of Hotlinks and Drawings placed into other projects, then those links will be broken when the older Teamwork project is opened in ArchiCAD 13. Thus, these hotlinks and drawings must be relinked to the host project. (In the host projects, use the relink commands in the Hotlink Manager and Drawing Manager.)
85
Rebuild Sections when Back-Saving to ArchiCAD 12

If you are back-saving an ArchiCAD 13 project to ArchiCAD 12, and if your project contains sections that display composite walls whose patterns are set to Fit to Skin, then you must rebuild the Sections in ArchiCAD 12 to avoid distortions in display.
86
Lost Criteria Sets

Find & Select criteria sets from earlier versions will be lost when you open the older-version projects in ArchiCAD 13.
87
Review Object-Type Element Criteria in Interactive Schedule

Interactive Schedule criteria from earlier versions may create unexpected results in ArchiCAD 13 if you are listing Object-type elements: The Object value in earlier versions listed objects from all Object subtypes. The Object value in ArchiCAD 13 lists only those objects that are placed using the Object tool. All other object subtypes are listed only if you add those subtypes as separate Element Type criteria.
88
No Automatic Home Story Settings

There is no Automatic Home Story setting in ArchiCAD 13. Elements from older projects whose Home Story was set to Automatic will now be assigned Home Stories that correspond to the story they were placed on. In ArchiCAD 13, during editing operations that affect the elements elevation (e.g. elevate, multiply with vertical displacement), you have the option to automatically re-assign those elements home stories accordingly.
89
Doors and Windows in Partial Structure Display

As of ArchiCAD 12, Door/Window objects have been reprogrammed to display correctly in light of the partial structure display feature. Doors and Windows migrated from older-version projects (version 11 and earlier) into ArchiCAD 13 will not be displayed properly if you use Partial Structure Display. These Door/Window objects are incompatible for the purposes of Partial Structure Display. To address the issue of incompatible library parts, see Libraries and Objects in ArchiCAD 13.
90
Migrating PlotMaker Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13

This chapter contains detailed information about how to migrate your ArchiCAD 8.1 or ArchiCAD 9 project files and PlotMaker 8.1 or PlotMaker 9 Layout Books into ArchiCAD 13. Note: In this description, version 9 should be understood as either version 8.1 or version 9. In version 9, the Project Model is always located in a PLN file, and the layouts in an LBK (Layout Book) file. ArchiCAD 13 (and every ArchiCAD version from 10 up) contains both Model Views and Layouts in an integrated environment in a single file. Since ArchiCAD 13 Projects can be divided among multiple ArchiCAD PLN files, there are two basic ways to migrate your ArchiCAD 9 Projects and PlotMaker 9 Layout Books to ArchiCAD 13: 1) Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 13: The ArchiCAD 9 Project file should be placed into its own Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (this file would contain only Model Views, plus the default Layout Book), and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book should be placed into a second, separate Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (this file would contain all Layouts with no Model information). 2) Create a Single File in ArchiCAD 13: If the Project is small enough, both the ArchiCAD 9 Project File (PLN) and the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book (LBK) can be merged into a single file in ArchiCAD 13. The following sections outline how to carry out both options.
Option 1: Create Two Separate Files in ArchiCAD 13

1) To migrate the ArchiCAD 9 Project File, simply open the PLN file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it. Although there are several settings which can affect how elements are displayed on the Floor Plan, these are all automatically set during the conversion so that the same look is preserved in ArchiCAD as far as possible. Because of new settings in ArchiCAD 13, it is possible that some elements will look slightly different than they did in ArchiCAD 9. For detailed information, see Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues for a detailed list.
91
2) To migrate the PlotMaker 9 Layout Book, use the File > Open command. In the Dialog, select PlotMaker Layout Book (*.lbk) as File Type and select the desired LBK file. Click the Open button to start opening it.
3) Since Title Types of PlotMaker 9 have become GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 13, the program will convert all Title Types defined in the Layout Book File into Library Objects (GSM Files). ArchiCAD will place these created Library Parts into its Embedded Library; they will be listed in the Library Manager. Please note that these generated Title Types have become non-parametric GDL Objects in ArchiCAD 13, displaying the same information as the source Title Type in PlotMaker 9. However, if you used default Title Types in PlotMaker 9, you will find the counterparts of these in the ArchiCAD 13 Library and you may change the generated Title Types into parametric ones shipped with ArchiCAD 13.
92
4) When ArchiCAD is finished converting the Layout Book data, an Information Dialog will alert you to data that could not be converted because of essential differences between the features of ArchiCAD 13 and PlotMaker 9. For more detailed information, press Show Detailed Report in Browser to launch your default web browser containing a fuller explanation of what could not be converted and why, plus what you can do about it.
For example, in PlotMaker 9, you could define custom line weights for each individual drawing element (e.g. Lines, Fills, etc.). In ArchiCAD 13, you can define line weights only for Pens, and all elements using a certain Pen will be drawn using the line weight defined for that Pen. Because of this difference, specific line weights defined in PlotMaker 9 will be converted back to their line weights as specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog of ArchiCAD 13. Please see Conversion Warnings for a detailed list of conversion warnings. 5) Now your new ArchiCAD 13 Documentation Project File (a file containing only Layout Book information) is ready for use. One Story will be created as default, but no model data will exist in any Model Views. All Layouts will be displayed in the Navigators Layout Book.
Option 2: Create Single File in ArchiCAD 13

Use this option for relatively small projects, to merge both the Layout Book from PlotMaker and Project File from ArchiCAD 9 into a single project file in ArchiCAD 13. When creating a single PLN file in ArchiCAD 13, you will merge Layout Data into a Project File. In ArchiCAD 13, every Project File must contain both Model Views and a Layout Book as default. This means that the PLN file into which Layout Book data is merged will already contain one or more Layouts, with their own attributes and settings. For this reason, the procedure follows the usual rules of merging, which means that if a particular setting already exists in the receiving file, existing data are used, and are not overwritten by merged data. Therefore, when merging Layout Book data into a PLN file, the following settings of the Layout Book are not merged:
93
Book settings Project Info Grid settings Default Master Layout setting Also, Layout-specific settings in the Work Environment of ArchiCAD 13 will not be modified by data of the imported Layout Book. The program will compare the names of the Attributes and Master Layouts of the merged file and the host ArchiCAD 13 file. Please note that the program compares only the names (but not content or definition) when checking for matching Attributes/Master Layouts. If the Attribute or Master Layout names in both files are identical, they will be considered identical by the program, and the existing files in ArchiCAD 13, along with their settings, will be kept. The structure of the merged Layout Book (its Layouts, Subsets, Master Layouts and placed Drawings) is inserted into the existing Layout Book structure of the ArchiCAD 13 PLN file.
Follow these steps:

1) Open the PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it as an AC 13 PLN file. 2) Open the ArchiCAD 9 PLN file in ArchiCAD 13 and save it as another AC 13 PLN file. You now have two new ArchiCAD 13 files; these two must now be merged. 3) In the latter active Project File (the one containing model data), use the File > File Special > Merge command to merge data from the other saved ArchiCAD 13 file (the one containing Layout Book data). In the appearing dialog box, choose Layout Book to merge Layout Book data of the file into your active Project File. Click the Merge button.
94
If you open the Organizer from the Navigator, you will see that all Layout Book data has now been merged into the Project File.
Note: You should follow the route specified in this guide, that is, merge the PLN File containing Layout Book data into the PLN File containing Model data, and not the other way around. This is because of the rules of merging, and because Views and certain other data would not come through if you merged the Model data into the file containing Layout Book data. In case you do not wish to merge the Layout Book in its entirety, only some of its Layouts, do the following: 1) Open the ArchiCAD 13 PLN File containing the Model data. 2) Open the ArchiCAD 13 PLN File containing the Layout Book data.
95
3) In the PLN file containing Model data, open the Organizer in such a way that you see the Layout Book of both files. In the illustration below, the PLN File containing the Model data is on the right.
4) Using drag-and-drop, move the desired Layouts from the Layout Book PLN file (on the left) into the Model PLN file (on the right). If you have Drawings placed into the Layout Book PLN which point to the Model PLN as their source, then the Drawing references will automatically switch from external file references to internal references after the Layouts are merged. Note: Such drawing links will not be redefined as internal references if the name of the source project file has changed since the drawings were placed. In this case, you should select all such drawings in the Drawing Manager and use the Link To button to re-link these Drawings to their source PLN (the renamed project file).
Conversion Warnings
When you migrate a PlotMaker 9 Layout Book file, ArchiCAD 13 may warn you of some project elements that will not be reproduced in ArchiCAD 13, due to changed feature sets. The following is a list of all warnings that may be displayed by the program during conversion. The warnings displayed always apply to the file currently being converted. 1) Printing/Plotting Publisher sets should be reviewed Some Print/Plot Options in PlotMaker 9 have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so these settings need reviewing before Printing/Plotting them. 2) Original output color of Elements drawn or pasted into Layouts has been restored In PlotMaker 9, in the Book Settings Dialog box, output color of elements on Layouts may be set to grayscale or black. This option has no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so elements will appear in their original color.
96
3) Fill-related display and output options could not be converted In PlotMaker 9 you may apply global settings to Fills. These options have no equivalent in ArchiCAD, so they cannot be converted. Therefore, all fills are displayed as defined in the Fill Settings Dialog Box. 4) OLE Drawings could not be converted ArchiCAD does not support OLE technology, so OLE drawings within the LBK file cannot be converted properly. (If the OLE drawing was embedded in the LBK file, with no live link to the source application, you will see the drawing, but you cannot update it.) You can identify OLE drawings using the Drawing Manager palette: look for the OLE icon in the Type column. It is recommended to replace these OLE Drawings with PDF files in ArchiCAD 13. 5) Edited drawing Layers are restored In PlotMaker you could modify the show/hide status of Drawing Layers. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so these drawing Layers will be displayed according to their original show/hide status. 6) Text and Markers size changes In PlotMaker, you could set the size of Texts and Markers to retain their original size even after the Output Scale was modified. (You checked the Fix Size option for Text and Markers in the Drawing Settings dialog box.) This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so Text and Markers will be resized according to the scale change, just like any other element in the drawing. 7) Custom line weight is restored to pen line weight In PlotMaker you could assign a custom line weight to lines, circles and splines. In this case the color of the line came from the assigned pen, but the weight was custom set in the element's settings dialog box. This option does not exist in ArchiCAD, so the line weights of lines, circles or splines will be set to values specified in the Pens & Colors Dialog.
Conversion of Other Attributes/Settings

Layers, Pens, Fills: The ArchiCAD 13 PLN file will inherit the Layers of the LBK Layout Book. The PlotMaker Layer will be renamed to ArchiCAD Layer. Pens and Fills come through unaltered. Autotext items: All Autotext entries are converted. The name of some of these items will change. The following Autotext items (located in PlotMaker 9s Book Info Dialog) are now found in the Project Info Dialog of ArchiCAD 13: Client Project Name Street City State/Country Postal Code Company Project Number Architect
97
Draftsman (CAD Technician in ArchiCAD 13) Project Status Date of Issue Custom1 Custom2 Custom3 The following Autotext items are also converted. They are available in ArchiCAD 13 while editing a Text Block in either a Model View or on a Layout. Some names have changed. Some no longer apply, so these are converted into their closest match: Layout Name Layout Number (Layout ID in ArchiCAD 13) Subset Name Subset Number (Subset ID in ArchiCAD 13) Page Number (Layout Number in ArchiCAD 13) Number of Pages (Number of Layouts in ArchiCAD 13) Book Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 13) Book Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Name Drawing Name with Extension (Drawing Name in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Number (Drawing ID in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Drawing Scale (Original Scale in ArchiCAD 13) Output Scale (Drawing Scale in ArchiCAD 13) AC File Name (File Name in ArchiCAD 13) AC File Path (File Path in ArchiCAD 13) Last saved at Last saved by Long Date Short Date Time Master Layout: Layout size is defined differently in ArchiCAD 13. In PlotMaker 9 and earlier versions, the size of the Layout means the printable area of the page (the full size of the paper minus margins on all four sides). In ArchiCAD 13, the size of a Layout means the full size of the paper. This change does not affect either the full size of the Layout (printable area + Margins on all four sides) or the sizes of the printable area or any of the Margins. They will be the same as in previous versions; only the names have changed to better approximate real-world practice, where a Layout is the whole paper used for printing/plotting. So Master Layout sizes are converted accordingly. The Grid for Drawing Numbering and Master Layout default come through unaltered. Layout settings: comes through unaltered. Subset settings: comes through unaltered. 98
Book settings: comes through unaltered, except Output Color settings, which does not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13 - see Warning 2 above). Drawing settings: all settings come through (Title is converted into GDL Object), except for Attributes Update Rules, which have no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13. Layer changes are not carried through (see Warning 5 above). If the Text and Markers option in PlotMaker has been set to Fix Size, Warning 6 above is displayed. If a placed Drawing had its own Pen Set, the same Pen Set will be created in ArchiCAD 13 and the Drawing will continue using it. The Output Scale setting will be converted into Drawing Scale. Note: In ArchiCAD 13, Drawing Scale is the scale of the Drawing on the Layout, which will be output, while Original Scale is that of the Drawings source view. If several Drawings in PlotMaker 9 used the same Pen Set, ArchiCAD 13 will create only one Pen Set for all the Drawings. This Pen Set will have the same name as the first converted Drawing which uses this Pen Set, but all the converted Drawings which used it in PlotMaker 9 will use it in ArchiCAD 13. Publishing Contacts: If you have saved your Publishing Contacts from PlotMaker into a file, you can open that Contacts file in ArchiCAD 13 after opening the PlotMaker 9 LBK file. Grids: come through unaltered. Project Preferences: Working Units, Mouse Constraints, Publisher preferences, Uniform Pens and Colors setting, Miscellaneous settings come through. (Since there is no Uniform Pens and Color settings checkbox in ArchiCAD 13, this means in effect that all Drawings will refer to the same Pen Set). If cache data was stored in the Layout File in PlotMaker 9 (the option is in Preferences > Cache Folder), the Drawings will be stored in the Project File in ArchiCAD 13 (see Drawings placed on Layout below). Custom line weights do not come through (no equivalent in ArchiCAD 13 - see Warning 7 above). Drawings placed on Layouts: In PlotMaker 9, Project links are saved with the Layout Book File (Preferences > Cache Folder > Include Cache in Layout Book). By default, external links (e.g. PMK files, bitmap files) are not saved with the Layout Book File. If a Drawing was saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 13 will be set to be a manual-update Drawing, and will be saved with the ArchiCAD 13 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog). If a Drawing was not saved with the Layout in PlotMaker 9 (Include all linked files checkbox of the Save as Dialog in PlotMaker 9 is not checked), the Drawing generated from it in ArchiCAD 13 will be set to be an auto-update Drawing, and will not be saved with the ArchiCAD 13 Project File (the Store Drawing in the Project file checkbox will not be checked in the Drawing Settings Dialog).
Drawing Status
It is recommended that you perform an update of all placed Drawings after opening or merging a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13. Background: The modification status checking of Drawings is significantly enhanced in ArchiCAD 13, compared to PlotMaker 9. In PlotMaker 9, the program monitored the last
99
modification date of the Drawings source files. If the last modification date of the file had changed, the program assumed that all Drawings coming from that file would need updating. In contrast, ArchiCAD 13 can monitor the modification status of each Drawing with a PLN source separately. When opening a PlotMaker 9 LBK file in ArchiCAD 13, a transitional state exists: the LBK file does not contain all information necessary for ArchiCAD 13 to decide the modification status of Drawings in the Layout Book file. (This transition state can cause Drawings with OK status in PlotMaker to have Modified status in ArchiCAD.) In this case, the status checking will be performed according to the old method (which assumes all drawings from a modified PLN source require updating). Only after the first update performed in ArchiCAD 13 will the status checking mechanism run on the drawing level instead of the file level.
Drawing Name and Drawing ID

Not all Drawing Names and Drawing IDs coming from a PlotMaker 9 LBK file will have their exact equivalent when opened in ArchiCAD 13. Therefore it is recommended to review Drawing Names and Drawing IDs to make sure everything came through correctly. For checking Drawing Names/IDs and updating Drawings, it is highly recommended to use the Drawing Manager of ArchiCAD 13, which has many customizable columns listing information about Drawings. Background: In PlotMaker 9, the Drawing Name was always the same as the name of the View from which it was created. In ArchiCAD 13, a View Name consists of two parts: View Name and View ID. For this reason, Drawing Name can be either View Name or View Name + View ID (or Custom). In PlotMaker 9, the value of Drawing ID (which was called Drawing Number in PlotMaker 9), could come from the Layout or from the ArchiCAD Viewpoint, or it could be set to a custom value. In ArchiCAD 13, the ArchiCAD Viewpoint option is not available. Instead, the View ID value is used.
Library Objects
When merging an LBK file into ArchiCAD 13, all elements placed on Layouts, including library parts, are merged. However, the libraries used by the merged project are not automatically loaded into the ArchiCAD 13 project. Thus, if after a merge you find that any library parts (such as Drawing Titles) are missing, you should load any missing libraries to resolve the problem.
Converting Model Views to AC13: Floor Plan Display Issues

ArchiCAD 13 offers more sophisticated Display Options for elements than ArchiCAD 9, but predefined settings will ensure that files migrated from ArchiCAD 9 will have compatible displays in ArchiCAD 13. While display options have changed since ArchiCAD 9 (they are now called Model View Options), the following information should help you recreate the same display in ArchiCAD 13 for migrated projects. 100
In ArchiCAD 13, options for Doors and Windows are set separately in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options, Options for Construction Elements Panel, giving you more flexibility in applying model views: If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, but leave the with Markers checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Show on Plans option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show On Plans radio button, and check the with Markers checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Show with Dim. option in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, but leave the with Contours checkbox unchecked, it will achieve the same result as the Hide on Plan options in ArchiCAD 9. If you choose the Show Opening Only radio button, and check the with Contours checkbox, it will achieve the same result as the Reflected Ceiling options in ArchiCAD 9. The Hide on Floor Plan radio button is a new choice: it means that Doors/Windows will not be shown on the Floor Plan at all, just as if there were no Doors/Windows in Walls. In Section, Elevation, and Interior Elevation, the Door/Window hole will be visible. Regarding the display of Cut Fills (Document > Set Model Display > Model View Options > Override Fill Display), you will notice that there is no option to set Bitmap Patterns. A bitmap display is available for on-screen display only: Bitmap or Vectorial is set globally using the Show as Vectorial Hatching option of On-Screen View Options.
When you check Override Cut Fills and the Show Skin Separator Lines box, you will achieve the same result as the Separators Only option in ArchiCAD 9. If you check Override Cut Fills and click Solid Foreground, it will achieve the same result as the Solid w/o Separation Lines option in ArchiCAD 9. Also, the Show Skin Separator Lines checkbox is enabled. Check this to achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the lower left corner is for Drafting Fills. If you check Override Drafting Fills and click the Solid Foreground option, you will achieve the same result as the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. The next area in the upper right corner is for Cover Fills.
101
To adjust Cover Fill display, check the Override Cover Fills box and choose one of the following options: Solid Foreground: This replicates the Solid option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: A new option; this creates a cover fill over the element, displayed in the background color defined for the elements cover fill. No Fill: A new option; this draws no fills at all, and displays only the contour if any. The last area is for Zone Fills and Zone Stamps. The options in this area achieve the same as the Zone Polygons Display Options and Zone Stamps fields achieved in ArchiCAD 9. Zone Stamp: Check Hide Zone Stamp to hide it. If you leave the Override Zone Fills box unchecked, this corresponds to the Cover Fill Display Option for Zone Polygons from ArchiCAD 9. To adjust Zone Fill display, check the Override Zone Fills box and choose one of the following options: No Fill: This replicates the None option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Category: This replicates the Category Color option in ArchiCAD 9. Solid Background: This replicates the Solid Background Colored Fill option in ArchiCAD 9. Category Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern on Category option in ArchiCAD 9. Hide Background: This replicates the Fill Pattern Only option in ArchiCAD 9.
102
Adjust Section/Elevation Marker Display

For both Section and Elevation Markers, the Marker appearance is set in the Tool Settings Dialog Box for each individual Section and Elevation. (Place Marker at either or both ends of the S/E line, or place one Marker in the middle.) The Section/Elevation Marker display option is no longer a Model View Option, so a given S/E Markers appearance will be uniform throughout the project, regardless of which view it is saved in. When migrating an older-version file in which you used any Section/Elevation Marker Model View Option other than As in Settings, you should adjust individual Markers as needed.
103
Review New Model View Options for Fills

The Model View Options panel, formerly called Options for Fills and Zones, is now called Override Fill Display. As in earlier versions, this panel is used to globally define the Fill Backgrounds, the display of Cut, Cover, and Drafting Fills, and the display of Zone Fills in the project. The various options have changed somewhat, but when you migrate an older-version file (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 13, the program will assign corresponding Model View Options to ensure that fills are displayed correctly in ArchiCAD 13. However, you should doublecheck the fill display in ArchiCAD 13 and make any adjustments necessary.
104
DXF/DWG Translator Changes in Converting ArchiCAD Fills

When saving an ArchiCAD 13 file to AutoCAD-compatible format, the results may vary from earlier version conversions (ArchiCAD 11 or earlier). You should check these converted files and make any changes necessary. Possible Differences in Fill Conversion within ArchiCAD 13: When converting ArchiCAD fills, a new option in the DXF/DWG Translator enables you to manually set up a custom Fill Conversion table. Also, Fill types in ArchiCAD 13 are converted by default as follows: - Image: converted to a solid fill (technically a background-color hatch) - Gradient: converted to a solid fill (technically a foreground-color hatch) - Symbol: if you chose Convert all fills as Solid, symbol fills are converted into Blocks. If you chose Convert Fill Backgrounds as Additional Solid Hatches, they are converted into Blocks plus a Background-color Solid fill.
105
Migrate Projects Containing Hotlinks

Note: This process is applicable when migrating older-version projects (11 or earlier) to ArchiCAD 13. When you open a project in ArchiCAD 13 which contains hotlinks to source files saved in versions 11 or earlier, you will see the following warning:
Open Hotlink Manager to View Hierarchy of Project's Hotlink Sources

To get a list of all the files that are hotlinked to the current project, open the project in ArchiCAD 13. Go to Hotlink Manager (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager). The Hotlinked Modules list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules hotlinked into the current project. The Hotlink Sources list displays the sources of the hotlinked module files together with their status.
106
For a more comprehensive and printable display of the hotlinked source files, click the Show hierarchy in browser button. This will open your default internet browser in a separate window, showing the hotlinked source files in a hierarchical format, together with file locations that are hyperlinked.
Conversion of a project with Hotlink Source files available in their original location
In this workflow, you will open the hotlinked source files one by one and save them in ArchiCAD 13. Suppose you have the following hotlinks linked into Project A:
1) Open the project (A.pln) 2) In the warning dialog which appears, choose the Open Hotlink Manager option.
107
3) The Hotlink Manager contains a list of Source files.
4) For each Source file shown as Legacy or Missing - B.pln, C.pln and D.pln in our example you must open the file in ArchiCAD 13, making sure to use the Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD checkbox as part of the Open process. Then save the opened file (File > Save.) We recommend that you save the files in this order: go through the hierarchy file by file from bottom to top in the hierarchy. (In our example, start with D.pln.) Note: It is possible that the opened source files contain other hotlinks that are not used in A.pln. (for example, if the module is placed on a story that is not shown in A.pln, or if B.pln contains nested modules, yet the Hotlink Manager for A.pln has checked the Skip Nested Modules box). If these nested modules are in legacy format, ArchiCAD will display a warning when they are opened. In this case, you should continue the conversion process, treating B.pln as a separate project that contains legacy hotlinks: you must save those hotlink sources in ArchiCAD 13 as described in this document - by resaving the files, locating missing sources, resaving nested legacy source files, etc. 5) In the Hotlink Manager, click the Refresh Status button. If you have successfully re-saved all the Legacy files from the Source list (as described in Step 4), then the Source list should not show any files in Legacy status.
108
6) Click Update.
109
110
Configuration
Configuration
Start ArchiCAD Create New Solo Project Open a Solo Project Close a Solo Project File Types Opened by ArchiCAD File Types Saved by ArchiCAD File Compression Template Files Backup Files Archive Files License Borrowing Opening Projects through a Network Merging Files Add-Ons and Goodies Working Units Project Preferences Scale Attributes Libraries Favorites The ArchiCAD User Interface Customizing your Work Environment
111
Configuration
Start ArchiCAD
Double-click on the ArchiCAD icon in your program folder to start the program. The Start ArchiCAD dialog box appears.
In the top section, What would you like to do?, choose either:
Create a New Project

or
Open a Project Create a New Project

Creates a new blank project in ArchiCAD. If you choose this option, the Set up Project Settings section below offers two choices for the new Projects settings.
112
Configuration
1) Use a Template: Click the pop-up to choose a template.
At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location. 2) Use Latest Project Settings Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.
113
Configuration
Open a Project
If you choose Open a Project, the You can section below gives you three choices:
1) Browse for a Solo Project. Choose this button, then click the Browse button at bottom left to bring up a file directory dialog box. 2) Browse for a Teamwork Project See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project. Note: If you want to open a Teamwork project from ArchiCAD 12 or earlier (file extension .plp, .bpn, .plc), you must first open it as a solo project. Thus, use the first radio button above, Browse for a Solo Project, for if you are opening an older Teamwork Project. See the Migration Guide for more information on converting older Teamwork projects.
114
Configuration
3) Select a Recent Project. Choose this button, then select a recent project from the list below and click the Open button at bottom left to open it. Note: Another way to open a recent project is by selecting from the list at the bottom of the File > Open > Open... submenu.
Set up Work Environment

Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13 and Customizing your Work Environment.
Do not Display this Dialog Next Time

If you dont want to see the Start ArchiCAD dialog box every time you start the program, disable it by checking this box. To enable it again, use the File > New & Reset All command.
115
Configuration
Create New Solo Project

Use File > New > New to create a new solo project (file extension .pln).
Note: If you press Alt (Opt) key when choosing the New command, its name changes to New and Reset All, and ArchiCAD will automatically use the default project settings. The New Project dialog box appears. Click either Use a Template, or Use Latest Project Settings.
Use a Template
Click the pop-up to choose a template. At the top of the list is the default template shipped together with the current version of ArchiCAD. (It is saved to the Defaults folder when you install ArchiCAD.) Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD Note: A template is a read-only project file, which contains all preferences settings, placed construction and drawing elements and tool default settings of the project. (When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled). The next section contains any additional template files saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. 116
Configuration
In the next section of the pop-up list, you will find up to three of the last template files chosen. Or select Browse Template to choose a template file from any other location.
Use Latest Project Settings

Choosing this means that you will continue working with all the project-specific options, and a few general preferences, that were in effect when you last quit ArchiCAD. Note: This can be the perfect solution for you, if you always work with the same standard definitions. However, if you last opened and worked on a project that was created by another person, you may find that your preferred settings are off. If you do not wish to return to the programs default settings, open a project that you are familiar with, then close it and start the new project again: this time, Latest Project Settings will mean the settings you are familiar with.
Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD

Use File > New to create a new project. From the New Project dialog box, check the Launch a new instance box if you want to open an additional ArchiCAD in addition to the currently running program, if any.
Setup Work Environment

Use this option to choose a profile to use as the Work Environment for the project you are creating or opening. Last Profile Used: This option will apply the profile that was in effect when you last closed ArchiCAD, including any unnamed Custom schemes and undefined schemes. Default Profile: This is either the factory-shipped default profile, or else the profile you have manually set to be the default using the controls of the Work Environment Dialog Box. For more information, see Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13 and Customizing your Work Environment.
117
Configuration
Open a Solo Project

Use File > Open > Open... to open a solo project.
The Open file directory dialog box appears. Browse for the project you need.
To open a recent project, select from the list at the bottom of the File > Open > Open command.
File Types Opened by ArchiCAD Join or Leave a Teamwork Project

118
Configuration
Close a Solo Project

If you use File > Close to close the Floor Plan, you close the entire Project. You will be prompted to save recent changes, if any. External files (GDL Object windows, pictures) will remain open. When you save and close a project with many windows open simultaneously, ArchiCAD will reopen these windows the next time you open the project. Re-opening all these windows may take time, especially if they must be rebuilt. If the number of windows to be re-opened exceeds 20 (not including PhotoRendering windows, which are not saved with the project), then ArchiCAD will show a warning dialog in which you can opt to re-open just the frontmost window (plus the Floor Plan), instead of all of the previously open windows.
File Types Saved by ArchiCAD Close Teamwork Project
119
Configuration
File Types Opened by ArchiCAD

Use File > Open to open a project. (See Open a Solo Project.) The File > Open command allows you to open documents of the types recognized by ArchiCAD. This command is not available if the active window belongs to an open GDL Object.
ArchiCAD Projects (.pln, .pla, .bpn)

ArchiCAD 13 can open projects saved as ArchiCAD 8.1, 9, 10, 11 and 12. Solo Projects (.pln) are the main native document type of ArchiCAD. A .pln file includes all model data and the views generated for the project, as well as the default settings, attributes and library references.
Archive (.pla)
Archive files are similar to Solo Projects, but these include all the library parts, background images and linked textures used in the Project, not just references to them. For more information, see Archive Files.
Backup Project file (.bpn)

Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the last saved version of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety.
ArchiCAD Teamwork (AC12 and earlier) file formats (.plp, .plc, .pca, .bpc)
Note: To open a Teamwork file saved in earlier ArchiCAD versions (12 and earlier), use the Open Project command (not the Open Teamwork Project command). For information, see the Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 for ArchiCAD 13.
ArchiCAD Project Template (.tpl)

For details, see Template Files.
ArchiCAD 2D Lines (.2dl)

These files are vectorial drawings saved from ArchiCADs 3D Window or a Section/Elevation/IE window. These drawings contain no model information and can be touched up in the Floor Plan with 2D tools. Important note: In the 3D Window, this option is only available with the Internal Engine not available in OpenGL mode.
Module File (.mod)

For details, see Hotlinked Modules.
120
Configuration
PlotMaker Layoutbook (.lbk) PlotMaker Drawing (.pmk) Windows Enhanced Metafile (.emf) Windows Metafile (.wmf) All Images (.sgi, .psd, .bmp, .gif, .jpg, .jpeg, .jfi)
Various types of picture files can be opened as model pictures, but they will appear in their own separate windows, not the ArchiCAD main window. All QuickTime based image files and a number of additional formats are available.
DWF File (.dwf)

Drawing Web Format, a 2D vector graphics format created by AutoDesk for use on the World Wide Web which supports hyperlinks, layer information and views. This is also the recommended format when publishing views that will be redlined through the Internet or on an Intranet. The DWF file will contain all drawing elements with some exceptions and limitations: Pictures: due to format limitations, only straight pictures can be written to a DWF file. Cameras will not be included
DXF/DWG File (.dxf, .dwg)

DXF and DWG files are the most widely used CAD file formats. If you choose this file type, the Settings button appears in the Open dialog box, which opens the DXF-DWG Translation Setup dialog box. For details, see Opening DWG/DXF Files. However, in most cases you need not adjust these translation settings, because the default setup will give you the desired result when opening a DXF/DWG file.
IFC 2x2, 2x3 (.ifc), IFCXML (.ifcxml)

IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/ downloads/
HPGL File (.plt)

For details, see Plot.
3D Studio File (.3ds)
121
Configuration
MicroStation Design File (.dgn)

If you choose this option and select a DGN file, the DGN Open dialog box lets you specify the unit conversion factor, the name of the configuration file (optional) and whether you would like to use the level symbol correspondence defined in the DGN file. Options and Notes Dimension elements are converted only if you break them up in MicroStation before the conversion using the Drop Dimension command. The conversion of associated dimensions cannot be completed because their internal structure is not known. Tag elements are not handled at all because of lack of information. Custom lines are not converted in the current version, as MicroStation can use more elements than ArchiCAD in this type of element. Shared cells become library parts in ArchiCAD. They are placed in a folder called DGN_filename.LIB (where DGN_filename is the name of the original DGN file), which is created and saved by the conversion process. If such a folder exists, it will be emptied first. Image files assigned to the DGN file are not converted. The reference point for text elements is always located in the bottom left corner of their box, because the text measurement algorithms of MicroStation are not known. This can lead to problems for associative points. As the Spline generation algorithms are very different in the two applications, the shapes of the converted splines will differ somewhat from the originals. During conversion, all elements on all levels are converted, regardless of the visibility of the level in the DGN file. You have the option of using a configuration file. For the text to be positioned correctly, use a monospaced font both in MicroStation and ArchiCAD. Files referenced by the DGN file can be also converted.
122
Configuration
Sample Configuration File

#-----------------------------------------------#ArchiCAD <--> MicroStation conversion config file #-----------------------------------------------# Config file syntax: # # Comment # [Section name]: [Layers], [Fonts], [Linestyles], [Pens], [ColorTable] #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Layer name = MicroStation Level number #-----------------------------------------------[Layers] Electrical = 27 Dimensioning = 28 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Pen weight = MicroStation weight number #-----------------------------------------------[Pens] 0.1 = 2 0.5 = 7 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Font name = MicroStation Font index #-----------------------------------------------[Fonts] Courier New Western = 2 Arial New Western = 3 #-----------------------------------------------# ArchiCAD Linetype Name = MicroStation Linetype index # For Custom defined linestyles you have to give either a negative index, # or the line style's name in MicroStation, or both #-----------------------------------------------[Linestyles] Solid Line = 1 Double = -3 Rail Road
See also Save as MicroStation Design File (.dgn).
123
Configuration
File Types Saved by ArchiCAD

Use File > Save to save your project. Choosing File > Save as allows you to save the Project under a new name, archive it or save the current windows contents in a variety of file formats. Some of the available options may depend on the set of currently loaded Add-Ons. Some file formats are 2D-only or 3D-only formats.
ArchiCAD Projects (.pln)

ArchiCAD 13 can back-save project files in ArchiCAD 12 format only (among previous ArchiCAD file formats). ArchiCAD supports unicode file names of essentially unlimited length.
Archive (.pla)
For details, see Archive Files.
ArchiCAD Project Template (.tpl)

Choose this option if you want to save the current project settings for future use as a template. For details, see Template Files.
Archive Options
See Archive Files.
Project (.pln) in an earlier ArchiCAD version format

ArchiCAD 13 projects can be saved as projects of ArchiCAD version 12. Important: When saving an ArchiCAD 12 project in an earlier version, an alert will appear warning you that elements and information not supported by ArchiCAD version 12 will be discarded.
Module File; Module File from Clipboard (.mod)

For details, see Create Module.
GDL Script (.gdl)

This option will save your model in GDL script. For details, see GDL Master Window.
PDF (.pdf)
Click Page Options and Document Options to set output preferences. These options will vary depending on the active window from which you are saving. For details, see Save Document in PDF Format.
124
Configuration
Windows Enhanced Metafile (.emf)

Click Options to set output preferences.
Windows Metafile (.wmf)

SGI Image (.sgi)

Photoshop Image (.psd)

Windows BMP Image (.bmp)

JPEG Image (.jpg)

PICT Image (.pct)

PNG Image (.png)

TIFF Image (.tif)

Truevision TGA Image (.tga)

JPEG 2000 Image (.jp2) QuickTime Image (.qtif)

DWF File (.dwf)

You can save Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document views in DWF (Drawing Web Format):
125
Configuration
Activate the required story or Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window and choose the Save as command in the File menu. Select the DWF file format from the list, click the Save button and choose one of the following options: ASCII - readable and editable ASCII text file. May be rather long. Binary - binary file with a smaller size than the ASCII version. Compressed Binary - smallest, most easily transportable compressed binary file. When you have made your choice, click the OK button to save the DWF file. You can view the saved DWF file with any web browser that supports the DWF Plug-In. You can download a DWF viewer from http://www.autodesk.com/products/. A Java-based public domain viewer - with some limitations - can be found at http://www.cadviewer.com.
DXF/DWG Files (.dxf, .dwg)

For details, see Saving DWG/DXF Files.
MicroStation Design File (.dgn)

The ArchiCAD to MicroStation converter exports 2D views (plan, elevation and section windows) from ArchiCAD into 2D MicroStation format. All elements are exported as drawing primitives (points, lines, arcs, texts, polylines, triangles, and polygons). During the output, you are prompted to designate an optional configuration file (.txt), which controls the layer assignment, font and color conversion. MicroStation is limited to 64 layers. If the ArchiCAD file contains more, then it rolls around. The configuration file can control the correspondence between layers. In the absence of the configuration file, the default order is alphabetical. Pen color conversion can be defined in the configuration file. Otherwise, the Add-On will use the default assignments. You can also define the line type conversion in the configuration file. The specified ArchiCAD line types will be replaced with the MicroStation line style having the given index. The default MicroStation line styles are in the range [0-7]. The configuration file can control the font conversion. If the configuration file is missing, the add-on will default to the international vector font (always present in MicroStation). If you define a Chicago-Chicago translation, make sure that the Chicago TrueType font is loaded into MicroStation (with the Element/Text/View/File/Import command). If it is not loaded, it will revert to the default. If you would like the text to look the same in both files, use monospaced fonts (e.g., Courier) on the plan. Symbol hatches and linetypes are not exported in this version. You can specify the background color for the exported file at the top of the dialog box. The desired output unit can also be changed here. If you loaded the original file from a MicroStation file, then the units specified there will appear. After the DGN file is loaded into MicroStation, you must use the Full View command to see the entire drawing; it will not adjust the scale automatically.
126
Configuration
MicroStation elements: Line Polyline Shape Arc Ellipse Text Complex chain Complex shape Shared Cell Cell Multiline Spline
Saving From a List Window

Basic Element, Component and Zone Lists can be saved as Plain Text, Tabulated Text, HTML tables or PDF. Click either radio button to include the files Used Column only or All Columns in the file. Formatted lists including graphic information can be saved in .rtf (Rich Text Format), ArchiCAD Project format, or PDF.
Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule)

Schedules can be saved in the following formats: Tabbed text, DWF, and PDF. From a PC, with MS Office, you can also save in .doc and .xls formats.
IFC 2x2, 2x3 (.ifc), IFCXML (.ifcxml)

IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/ downloads/
Additional Formats Available When Saving from 3D Window

WaveFront File (.obj)
You can save 3D models and the surface materials used in 3D models of your projects in the WaveFront format, a photorealistic rendering/animation system. Two output files are generated: one for the geometry and one for the surface material definitions, according to the WaveFront standards. The .mat file is automatically created in the same folder that was selected in the Save as dialog box for the .obj file.
127
Configuration
The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry (.obj file): All surfaces. No edges in the WaveFront format. ArchiCAD surface materials (.mat file): All materials used in the model, identified by name, with full characteristics. After choosing the .obj file format, click Save. The WaveFront dialog box opens: Layers-Materials: Click this radio button to create groups in the WaveFront file for each ArchiCAD layer, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Elements-Materials: Click this radio button to create a group in the WaveFront file for each ArchiCAD construction element, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Set drawing unit to: In this field, you can define the distance in the WaveFront project that will be translated into a drawing unit in ArchiCAD or vice versa. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion.
3D Studio File (.3ds)

With the 3D window in front you can save 3D models of your projects in AutoDesks 3D Studio 3DS photorealistic rendering and animation file format. The resulting document will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces and all edges. Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and the characteristics. Light sources: Both the sun and the additional light sources are included. Sun will be handled as a spotlight very far away from the project. 3D projection: The current perspective settings and Fly Through paths are included. Shadow casting information: The current shadow casting setup in the PhotoRendering Settings/Effects dialog box of ArchiCAD is included. Smooth (welding) information: The smoothing setup in the PhotoRendering Settings/ Effects dialog box of ArchiCAD is included. After choosing the .3ds file format, click Save. The Save 3D as 3D Studio object dialog box opens: Construct 3D Studio objects according to ArchiCAD objects: Click this button to create a 3D Studio file without grouping. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Element types and Materials: Click this button to create a group in the 3D Studio file for each ArchiCAD construction element, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Layers and Materials: Click this button to create groups in the 3D Studio file for each ArchiCAD layer, and within these groups, create internal groups for each surface material. Construct 3D Studio objects according to Materials: Click this button to create a group in the 3D Studio file for each surface material.
128
Configuration
Drawing Unit: In this field, you can define the distance in the ArchiCAD project that will be translated into a drawing unit in 3D Studio. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion. Colors: You can choose either the ArchiCAD pen colors, or match the ArchiCAD colors to a similar 3D Studio color. ArchiCAD texture information: You can select whether to include material texture information in the 3D Studio file. Object = Group Name: You can select whether the objects name should be a generated unique ID or the groups name. Note that 3D Studio works with names up to 10 characters. For names generated by ArchiCAD the convention is the following: Chars 1 to 7: unique ID or clipped layer/material name. Chars 8 to 9: used for a distinctive number to avoid identical names generated by clipping. Up to 100 variations of the same name are allowed this way. Char 10: used for slicing information. 3D Studio can handle up to 65,536 polygons by object. If an object has multiple polygons, ArchiCAD will split the object into several objects and put the segment number into Char 10.
ElectricImage File (.fact)

You can save 3D models of your projects in the FACT format for ElectricImage Animation System (EIAS), a photorealistic rendering/animation system. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces. (No edges in the FACT format.) Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and characteristics. Light sources: Both the sun and the additional light sources are included. 3D projection: The current perspective settings are included. With the 3D window in front, choose File > Save as, or Document > Creative Imaging > Create Fly-Through. The Save 3D FACT Document dialog box will appear: Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Layers: Click this button to create groups in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD layer. Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Elements: Click this button to create a group in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD construction element. Do NOT use this grouping option for large models. EIAS is not very efficient when working with a large number of groups. Grouping hierarchy according to ArchiCAD Materials: Click this button to create groups in the FACT file for each ArchiCAD surface material. Color Blend, Super Sample, Self Shadowing: Of the numerous FACT group attributes, these three can be controlled from within ArchiCAD. To learn more about these and other group attributes, see the EIAS documentation. Output Format: You can choose to save your file in either ElectricImage 2.1 or 2.9 format.
129
Configuration
Set Drawing Unit to: In this field, you can define the distance in the ArchiCAD project that will be translated into a drawing unit in ElectricImage. As ArchiCAD works with metric data internally, setting the drawing unit to 1 meter (=1000 mm) will result in a 1:1 model after the conversion. Note: You do not need to use the Transporter application required for previous versions. ArchiCAD automatically transforms the coordinate system to match the EIAS specification.
VRML File (.vrl)

You can save 3D models of your projects in the VRML format. VRML is an acronym for the Virtual Reality Modeling Language. Using VRML you can build your own three-dimensional virtual worlds and link them together on the World Wide Web. To view VRML worlds, you need a VRML helper application (or plug-in) called VRML browser. Check both your HTML and VRML browsers manual to see how to configure them. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces as IndexedFaceSet elements including surface attributes. Surface materials: All materials used in the project. Texture data is included; texture coordinates will be computed by the VRML browser. Check your browser manual to see what texture image file formats it supports. Light sources: Additional light sources are included. If no additional lights are placed you have to use your VRML browsers default headlight. 3D projection/Animation path: The current perspective settings are included. Set up a 3D view and with the 3D window at the front, choose Save as from the File menu and choose the VRML format, or place any number of cameras on the Floor Plan and choose Create Fly-Through and set the Result to VRML File, then click Save. The Save VRML 3D Document dialog box will appear: Copy textures to destination folder: Check this box to export the material textures used by the ArchiCAD model. Write vertex normals: Check this box to export normal vectors. With these options active, you can export a sophisticated and complex model. If the viewer application does not display the model correctly, try exporting again with one or more checkboxes inactive.
Lightscape File (.lp)

You can save 3D models of your projects in the native file format of Lightscape, a visualization system for generating lighting simulations of three-dimensional models using a radiosity algorithm. The document you save will include the following information: 3D model geometry: All surfaces. Surface materials: All materials used in the project, including the name and characteristics. Textures: Exported surface materials will refer to the appropriate texture according to the current settings of the material dialog. Texture images are not included in the output file: however, the path of the first texture file is included. If all the image files are collected into a 130
Configuration
single ArchiCAD library folder, the visualization system will automatically locate them. Otherwise, you will have to collect and copy these image files into the appropriate folder of the visualization system. Note: Use DOS filename conventions for naming texture image files when working with Lightscape. Before saving the Lightscape model, open the Materials dialog box, check the image names and make the necessary changes. Light sources: All light sources used in the project, except the sun. Shadow casting information is also exported according to the current settings of the PhotoRendering effects dialog box. Projection information: 3D projection data exported as the default view in Lightscape. Only perspective views can be used. If you choose an axonometric view, the saving process will report an error. Set up a 3D perspective view in ArchiCAD, generate the view, then choose File > Save as. In the list, choose the Lightscape document format, and click the Save button. The Save as 3D Lightscape Object dialog box appears: Construct Lightscape objects according to Layers: Click this radio button to create groups for each ArchiCAD layer in the Lightscape file. Materials: Click this radio button to create groups for each ArchiCAD material in the Lightscape file. Decompose elongated triangles: Check this box if you want to decompose elongated triangles into smaller triangles. This will generate a more detailed mesh, which is useful for Lightscapes radiosity algorithm. Note that in the case of very large scenes, it may excessively increase the number of polygons (and the file size).
U3D File (Windows Only)

See 3D Content in PDF (WIN only).
131
Configuration
File Compression
When saving certain file types from ArchiCAD (.pln, .tpl, .pla, .mod), the Options button in the Save dialog box presents you with the option to Compress file. This option is enabled by default, and is recommended in most cases, since file compression reduces file size considerably (by 60-70%). Using this option also increases download speed if you are working from a slow network, because the files are smaller. However, note that using the Compress file option means increased file saving time (about 30% longer), as a consequence of increased calculation needs. If the saving procedure takes too long, try turning this option off. Note: If you are using a computer with dual processors, file saving time should increase by only 5-10%.
132
Configuration
Template Files
A template is a read-only project file with extension tpl. It contains all project preferences settings, placed elements and tool default settings of the project. ArchiCAD 13 is shipped with a default template file together with the default library. Upon installation, the default template is located in the Defaults folder. Defaults folder locations: On PC: C:\Program Files\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD On MacOS: \Applications\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD 13\Defaults\ArchiCAD When you create a new project in ArchiCAD using a template file, this default template is at the top of the pop-up list when you choose a template:
See also Create New Solo Project.
To create a customized template:

1) Open a new empty project file. 2) Edit your project preferences, set up the project structure and/or place elements. 3) Save this project file as a template: use File > Save as, and choose ArchiCAD Project Template (*.tpl) as the file type. These files are saved to the Templates folder, located here: On PC: Documents and Settings\user\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates. On MacOS: Library\Application Support\Graphisoft\ArchiCAD Templates.
133
Configuration
To open a template:
1) Choose the File > New command 2) Select the Use a Template option 3) Select the desired template file. When starting a new project based on a template, you are in fact opening a copy of this template file as Untitled. Note: Settings of the Work Environment Profile used to open your project will override Template file settings.
134
Configuration
Backup Files
Opening a Backup Project file (.bpn) allows you to recover the latest backup copy of a damaged project file, provided that the Make Backup Copy checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Data Safety.
Data Safety Managing Backup Options in Teamwork
135
Configuration
Archive Files
Documents saved as Archives are stored together with their Library Parts (in a Library Container File, with extension lcf), and properties contained in and defined with the Project. The Archive format is recommended if you want all files referenced in the Project to be included, as when: Moving a Project to another computer Storing a completed Project
To save a Project in the Archive format:

1) Use the File > Save as command. 2) From the appearing Save dialog box, choose ArchiCAD Archive Project (*.pla) from the Save as type drop-down. 3) Click the Options button to access the Archive Options dialog box to choose which library parts to include in the Archive file.
Include All Drawings: This will include all drawings placed on layouts, even those which are NOT marked as Store Drawing in the Project file in its Drawing Settings dialog box.
Important Notes about Archive Files:

If any Library Parts are missing from your Project at the time you save the Project as an Archive, these missing parts will not be included in the Archive document either. If you add a .pla file to your Linked Libraries folder using Library Manager, make sure you add the explicit .pla file itself, not a folder that contains the .pla. Otherwise the parts located within the .pla will not be read. Because of the larger volume of information it stores, an Archive file size is somewhat larger than the corresponding Project document. Archives store the font information used in the project, but not the fonts themselves. This means that if you wish to display textual information the same way as it appears in the original environment, you have to install the appropriate fonts. Archive files do not store Add-Ons. Therefore, if your project contains elements affected by Add-Ons, these elements may lose certain features or behavior if these Add-Ons are not present.
136
Configuration
To Open a File in Archive format:

When you open an Archive type document, the Open Archive Project dialog box appears.
Choose one of the three options: Read elements directly from archive: this means that the library parts will not be extracted from the archive file. You can place Objects referring to the elements in the Archive file, but you cannot edit the Library parts themselves (unlike the elements in an .lcf file). This also applies to list schemes used in calculations. This method saves a lot of disk space, but limits the modification possibilities. Extract elements to a new folder: the external library parts required for the project will be extracted from the archive and placed in a new folder that you can name. This solution is recommended if you need to actually work on the project objects. (You cannot extract objects to the Embedded Library.) Select a library: instead of extracting the library parts saved with the project, you can indicate a folder that houses the required elements. This solution is recommended if you wish to update the Projects objects with their latest versions.
137
Configuration
License Borrowing
If your firm has multiple (network) licenses to use ArchiCAD or other GRAPHISOFT programs, the License Borrowing feature allows individual users to borrow a license key temporarily if they will be going offsite, to enable use of the software even without being connected to the network. License borrowing is available if your firm uses the CodeMeter network protection. To access this feature, ArchiCAD 13 must be running on your machine with a network license. Do one of the following: Click on Help > License Information From the Help > About ArchiCAD Dialog, click on License Information. In the License Information dialog box, the Available Products section lists the relevant installed GRAPHISOFT products, by Product Name and License.
Note: It is possible that you have installed MEP Modeler on your machine without a license key. (This means that you can view MEP elements correctly in ArchiCAD, but you cannot create or modify them.) In this case, the License Information dialog box lists MEP Modeler product as Disabled. You can click Enable Product here to start using a license for MEP Modeler: this way, you will have full access to MEP functions.
Below, the Product Information section displays language version and other license information, including expiration date if you have borrowed a license.
138
Configuration
In any case, borrowing is available only if the selected products License is Network (CodeMeter). Click Borrow to borrow a license for that product.
If the process is successful, the program lets you know that you have borrowed a license for the product, with a particular expiration date. In the License Information dialog box: The selected products License information is listed as either Borrowed (CodeMeter Stick) or Borrowed (License file), depending on the form of protection used. (This can vary by country.) The selected product is now shown with a Return button: click here when you are ready to return the license. The expiration date of the borrowed license is shown in the Product Information section. If your license expires before you return it, the program will automatically return it for you, even if you are not online.
139
Configuration
Opening Projects through a Network

If the file that you wish to open is already in use by someone else on the local network, ArchiCAD will warn you about this and let you know the name of the user, that is, the name defined in the Sharing Setup Control Panel (MacOS) or as the User Name (Windows).
You have the following choices: Open the file as read-only Open the file with exclusive access Cancel opening the file If you choose to open the file as read-only, you can see and modify the whole file, but you can only save it under a different name or into another location. If you try to overwrite the original file, you will again be notified that it is in use and that you cannot replace it with your modified Project. You can also choose to open the file with exclusive access. However, you should be very careful about using this option. There are a number of reasons why ArchiCAD may state that a file is in use although it actually is not: The person who last used the file did not properly open and close the file in ArchiCAD, e.g., because of a system crash. You have made a copy of a file that was in use at the moment, and the copy of the file also includes the name of the person who was using it during the copying operation. Note: If you do open a file with full access while another person is using it, you will both overwrite each others work without getting any further warning message from ArchiCAD. Therefore, be extremely careful when opening a file with exclusive access in any situation other than the emergencies mentioned above.
140
Configuration
Merging Files
Use the File > File Special > Merge command to paste the elements of another ArchiCAD Project, or a Module, DWF/DWG/DXF, PLT or image file into ArchiCAD. Files can be merged into either the current Floor Plan, the currently open Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. Note: When merging a Module into a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, only 2D Elements will be pasted. The elements of the merged files will become independent of each other after being placed. You can place the same elements repeatedly with the Paste command. When merging a Project or Module, you can drag, rotate and mirror it before placing it to the final location. Until the file is placed, its elements will be surrounded by a dashed rectangle. Click within the rectangle to move the elements to the desired position. Click outside the rectangle, or click OK from the context menu (or the Control Box) to place the elements.
Merging and Story Structure

When merging a Project or Module file, ArchiCAD matches the stories of the merged (imported) file to the current (open) one. When you merge a multistory building into your current Floor Plan, ArchiCAD will ask you to define which story from the imported file will match the story you are working on, and it will also suggest a possible match. If you do not have enough stories in your current plan to accommodate all the merged ones, ArchiCAD will automatically create the missing stories. Note: You cannot merge multistory elements or modules into 2D windows other than the Floor Plan. Note: There is a difference between merging a multistory project, and placing a multistory Hotlinked Module. If the host project contains fewer stories than Hotlinked Module you are placing, the module stories which do not fit in the host project will not be placed.
Merging and Attributes

Since attributes (Layers, Materials, Line Types, Fill Types, etc.) are identified by their names, the following rules are observed: If the name of the attribute is the same in the two Projects, the merged (imported) elements will inherit the attributes of the current Project. If the name of an attribute for the merged Project is not present in the current one, this attribute is appended to the current Projects attribute set to accommodate the new names.
Merge DXF/DWG File

If you merge a dxf/dwg file, the Merge DXF-DWG dialog box appears.
141
Configuration
Merging Image-Type Files

You can merge an image-type file into your ArchiCAD Project. (These include documents created in drawing or painting programs; 3D views and elevations saved in picture format; PhotoRenderings saved only in picture format.) Before choosing Merge for an image-type file, you can define its size on the plan in advance: Choose the Marquee tool and draw a Marquee of the desired size and position. See also Marquee Area.
The merged image will fit into this rectangle.
Note: Be careful to draw the Marquee with the same proportions as the original picture, otherwise the figure will be distorted.
142
Configuration
Add-Ons and Goodies

Add-Ons are small applications that extend ArchiCADs core functionality. Many add-ons are integrated as ArchiCAD menu commands. Goodies are other Add-Ons that are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface.
Managing Add-Ons
Open the Add-On Manager using Options > Add-On Manager command.
Use the Add-On Manager to Load Add-Ons from any location. They will be loaded after the next startup of ArchiCAD Permanently remove Add-Ons while ArchiCAD is running Control which Add-Ons should load automatically when ArchiCAD is started Show information about the loaded Add-Ons
143
Configuration
Menu Location of Add-On Functions

You can freely customize visibility and the menu and toolbar location of these integrated add-ons in the settings dialogs of Options > Work Environment > Menus/Toolbars. The location of these additional add-ons in the menu structure depends on where the Add-On Anchor Point is located for that menu. You can move this Add-On Anchor Point to any menu location, again using the controls in Options > Work Environment > Menus and Toolbars.
If the Add-On Anchor Point is not part of your customized menu structure, then the additionally loaded Add-Ons will not be displayed in the menu either.
Goodies
Goodies are another source of ArchiCAD Add-Ons. They are not integrated into ArchiCADs default interface. To access them, go to ArchiCADs Help menu and choose the Goodies command, from which you can access a web page containing information on available add-ons and how to install them. Once you have installed a Goody into the program, you can then customize the location of the associated menu commands as described above, and manage it with the Add-On Manager.
144
Configuration
Working Units
To set working units for the current project, use the dialog box at Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.
If you open a Teamwork project from the server, its Working Units will have default values based on the template used to create the Teamwork project. However, you are free to change these Working Units while you work on the Teamwork project. Your Working Units preferences specific to each user, and are not saved to the server when you Send or Receive changes. For details on each of these controls, see:
Working Units
145
Configuration
Project Preferences
The Options > Project Preferences menu contains the Project Preferences tab pages where you set standards and working methods specific to the project you are working on, and which are saved along with the project. Note: Working Units are in a separate dialog box, also opened from the Options > Project Preferences menu. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. In Teamwork, you must have access rights and must reserve the Project Preference dialog box in order to change these preferences. The Project Preferences dialog box contains a pop-up menu at top left listing each preference category (which you can also access directly from Options > Preferences). Clicking the Next and Previous buttons allows you to go from one screen to the other
For details on each of these controls, see:
Dimensions Preferences Calculation Units and Rules Preferences Zones Preferences Construction Elements Preferences Levels and Project North Preferences
146
Configuration
Scale
To set the scale of the currently active window, choose the Document > Floor Plan Scale command. (The name of the command varies depending on which window is active.) You can have a separate scale in effect for each window.
Select either a standard scale from the pop-up list or type a nonstandard scale into the input field. The name of the given window is displayed in the caption of the dialog box.
Standard scales are shown according to either metric or US standards, depending on the Length Unit setting made in the Working Units dialog box.
You can also use the Scale pop-up from the Quick Options Palette to reset the scale of the current window.
147
Configuration
After setting a scale, what you see is a preview of the Project if it were printed or plotted at that scale. To make a zoomed view match the view at the currently set scale, choose View > Zoom > Actual Size (or click the zoom button) after setting the scale.
Actual Size is the equivalent of the 100% scale value. The 2D Symbol of some GDL Objects (see the 2D Detail Level parameter) can be set to be sensitive to the current scale: the symbol varies depending on the current scale.
Model Size vs. Paper Size Elements

Model Size elements are rescaled along with the model whenever you change the project scale. Model size elements include all construction elements such as walls, objects, slabs etc. Paper Size elements are printed or displayed on the screen at the size you specify, regardless of the scale selected for the Project. For elements that do not have any real size, such as dimensions and arrowheads, you can specify a fixed size defined in either points or millimeters. Either Model Size or Paper Size: The following elements may be either model size (scaled with the plan) or scaled (scale independent): Text Blocks created with the Text tool: Choose Model or Paper size in Text Tool Settings Dashed and symbol line types: Choose Model or Paper size in Line Types Dialog Box Vectorial, symbol and image fill types: Choose Model or Paper size in Fill Types Dialog Box
Set a Different Scale for Each View

As you save views of your project, the scale is saved along with the view. Naturally, you will vary the scale as your project develops and you save multiple views at different scales for different purposes, using the Scale option in View Settings.
148
Configuration
Set a Separate Printing Scale for 2D Document

The Scale options in the Print 2D Document and Plot 2D Document dialog boxes allow you to specify a Custom printing scale each time you print or plot your work from a Floor Plan or other 2D window. The Text and Markers options enable you to reduce/enlarge text and markers as the printing scale is changed, or keep them at a fixed (paper) size.
Drawing Scale
Drawings based on an ArchiCAD view have a Drawing Scale. By default, this Drawing Scale is the same as the Original Scale (the scale of the Drawings source view), but you can customize the Drawing Scale in Drawing Settings.
Customizing the Drawing scale has no effect on the scale of objects within the drawing; it is equivalent to a graphical resizing of the Drawing, like the effect of magnifying a document with a copy machine.
149
Configuration
Attributes
ArchiCAD Attributes are groups of defined settings available to your project. For example, Line Types and Materials are Attributes which you can apply to many project elements as you create them. You will access these attributes in the appropriate dialog boxes: for example, when assigning Wall Settings, you will choose from the projects Fill set and Line Type set, using the appropriate pop-up menus in the Wall Settings dialog box. What you see in these pop-up menus are defined in Options > Element Attributes.
ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Attributes. For most users, these default attribute sets are amply suited to their design needs. If you wish, you can customize Attributes or create new ones. For example, you can draw a new fill type, or customize a default material to give it a new look. Attributes are saved with your project, so if you open the project on a different computer, your customized Attributes are available. To open and (if needed) edit Attribute sets, use the commands from Options > Element Attributes. Each attribute type is described in detail here:
Layers Line Types Fill Types Composite Structures Pens & Colors Materials Zone Categories Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box Profile Manager Dialog Box Attribute Manager Custom Attributes of GDL Objects
150
Configuration
Layers
About Layers Layer Settings Dialog Box Quick Layers Layer Combinations Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods)
151
Configuration
About Layers
Layers are used to separate elements logically. Related groups of elements, such as dimensions, furniture, electrical symbols and so on, are placed on common Layers. An element can only belong to a single layer. For each layer, you can define the following settings: lock/unlock show/hide 3D view mode layer intersection group ArchiCAD comes with a predefined set of layers. Each tool has a default Layer assignment, so if you place an element using that tool, the new element is automatically placed on the corresponding layer (e.g. External Wall, Column, Beam). Note: Doors, Windows, Wall Ends and Corner Windows do not have separate layers; they are handled together with the layers of the wall into which they are placed. Cameras do not have layers. Layers can be deleted; in this case, you will delete all the elements on it. However, the ArchiCAD Layer is a special layer that cannot be deleted, hidden or locked, since an ArchiCAD project must always contain at least one layer. In case of a file error, any elements that may have lost their layer definitions will be placed on the ArchiCAD layer. Each ArchiCAD project has a single layer set, managed in the Layer Settings Dialog Box, which is accessible from: Options > Element Attributes > Layer Settings Document > Layers > Layer Settings (shortcut: Ctrl+L) Layer Settings icon in the Info Box of any ArchiCAD tool.
The Quick Layers palette contains shortcuts for changing layer states for multiple layers quickly and easily.
152
Configuration
Layers are global, which means that the same layers are available on all stories and in all windows. However, layers used in the Layout book can have different settings than those used in Model views. (The title bar of the Layer Settings dialog box reflects which type of window is active in ArchiCAD - a Model View or the Layout Book.) See Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book.
Use Layers to Lock Elements to Prevent Editing

Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the lock icon to toggle between locked/unlocked status for the selected layer.
If a layer status is locked, then elements on that layer cannot be edited - this is useful if you want to prevent unintended changes.
Use Layers to Show/Hide Elements

Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. To show/hide a layer, toggle the eye icon open or shut for the selected layer. If a layer is in hidden status, elements on that layer are not displayed on your plan.
153
Configuration
Use Layers to Show 3D Elements in Wireframe Mode
Go to the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Click the shaded/wireframe icon for the selected layer to toggle between these display mode options for 3D. This setting is independent of the current 3D mode set in the View > 3D View Mode menu.
154
Configuration
Quick Layers
The Quick Layers palette lets you quickly change the state of the Layers in your Project without having to open the Layer Settings dialog box. To display this palette, choose the Window > Palettes > Quick Layers command. Select the element(s) whose layers you wish to manage. (You can select elements using both explicit selection and Marquee areas.) The toggle buttons, from left to right:
Show/Hide Toggle: inverts the visibility of all layers. Lock/Unlock Toggle: inverts the state of all protected and unprotected layers. Hide Selections Layer: Hides the layer of the selected elements. Lock Selections Layers: Locks layer of the selected elements. Unlock Selections Layers: Unlocks layer of the selected elements. Hide Others Layers: Hides the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be hidden.) Lock Others Layers: Locks the layer of the elements that are not selected. (If nothing is selected, all project layers will be locked.) The Undo Quick Layer Actions command undoes the last Quick Layer action (up to 10 actions). The Redo Quick Layer Actions command redoes the last undone QuickLayer action (up to 10 actions).
Quick Layers Example

Suppose you want to edit this roof in the Floor Plan:
155
Configuration
You dont need the Section and Elevation markers; to temporarily hide them, select all the Section/Elevation markers...
... then click the Hide Selections Layers command.
Now the unneeded markers and lines are hidden.
Once you are done working on the roof and want to show the hidden layers again, click the Undo Quick Layers button.
All Section and Elevation markers are now shown again.
156
Configuration
Layer Combinations
Layer Combinations are named sets of Layer settings. For example, you can set up a Show All, Lock 3D Elements Layer Combination, in which all the layers are visible, yet all Layers assigned to 3D model elements are locked, making those elements uneditable. You might use this Layer Combination when working with 2D only functions, such as dimensioning, to prevent inadvertent modifications to the building elements. Each view can have a different Layer Combination. (Assign a Layer Combination the View Settings Dialog Box.) ArchiCAD comes with a default set of Layer Combinations. Layer Combinations are listed on the left panel of the Layer Settings Dialog Box; individual Layers are listed on the right. The currently active Layer Combination is shown as selected.
Apply a Layer Combination

To apply a Layer Combination to the project, do one of the following: Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. Select a Layer Combination from the list in the left panel, then click OK to close the dialog box. Use the Layer Combination pop-up control in the Quick Options Palette.
Go to Document > Layers and click on any of the Layer Combinations listed there. 157
Configuration
Create New Layer Combination

To create a new Layer Combination: 1) Open the Layer Settings Dialog Box. 2) As needed, set the state (locked/unlocked, shown/hidden, solid/wireframe) of the individual layers, listed on the right. Use the sorting and selection controls to set the state of several layer at the same time. (See Layer Settings Dialog Box for details on these controls.) 3) Click the New button (below the list of Layer Combinations) and give the new set a unique name in the appearing dialog box.
Modify Layer Combination

To modify an existing layer combination: 1) Select the Layer Combination from the list on the left 2) Make the necessary adjustments to individual layers on the right 3) Click the Update button.
158
Configuration
Modify Layers Status in Multiple Layer Combinations

By selecting an individual Layer from the Layer list (on the right side of the Layer Settings dialog box), you can modify its state in the various defined Layer Combinations (on the left). For example, below we selected the Foundation Layer on the right. In the left, you can now see the layer states for the Foundation Layer as defined for each Layer Combination.
On the Layer Combination side, you can directly change the Foundation layers state (e.g. from Show to Hide) in any or all Layer Combinations: just go down the list of Layer Combinations one after the other, and click the Foundation Layers status icons as necessary. The Layer Combinations are now redefined accordingly. (You dont have to click Update.)
159
Configuration
Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections

You can work with Layer states to control Wall/Column/Beam intersection display in 2D. To do this, you can vary their Layer Intersection Group numbers. Intersecting elements that belong to the same Layer Intersection Group will be joined to each other, provided they are drawn correctly. Elements on different Layer Intersection Groups will not be joined.
The numbers under the intersection icon in the Layers panel (Document > Layers > Layer Settings) indicate the number of the intersection group the elements on that layer belong to.
Only elements on the same intersection group will connect to each other. By default, every layer is set to Group 1, so all intersecting elements will be joined according to the regular intersection rules for ArchiCAD. You may want to prevent this intersection - for example, to show the details of composite walls that have not been joined. In this case, place the intersecting walls on different layers, and then give one of these a layers a different Layer Intersection Group number. Wall Layers Have Identical Intersection Group Numbers:
Wall Layers Have Different Intersection Group Numbers:
160
Configuration
Note on Intersection with Hidden Layer: Elements having identical intersection groups will intersect even if one of the layers is hidden. This may result in missing lines, indicating an intersection with an element on a hidden layer. To avoid this, go to Layer Settings, select one of the layers, and assign it any different intersection group. Exception for Level 0: Elements which are both on intersection group 0 (whether on the same or different layers) will NOT intersect.
161
Configuration
Use Separate Layer Settings for the Layout Book

While each ArchiCAD project has only one Layer set, the settings of any particular layer (for example its show/hide or locked/unlocked status) can be different in the Layout Book and in Model Views. The settings variation you see in the Layer Settings Dialog Box (either Layout Book or Model Views) depends on which window is active when you open Layer Settings. Both the Layer Settings command and the dialog box are labeled accordingly.
Important: Layer settings for the Layout Book serve to show/hide elements directly placed on layouts, such as lines, texts and drawings as a whole. Layout Book layers do not affect the drawing content, which is determined by the layers of its associated view.
162
Configuration
Place All Elements on a Single Active Layer (Simulate Autocad Work Methods)
If you wish to simulate AutoCAD work methods, the Active Layer command is an easy way of assigning a single default layer to all tools, instead of than using ArchiCADs default layer set-up. Choose Document > Layers > Layer Extras > Active Layer from the menu and choose the One Active Layer for all Element Types option from the appearing palette.
This will set the default layer of all element types to the layer of the currently active tool (regardless of any selection). All Tool Settings dialog boxes will now use the same default Layer definition and successive elements will all be placed on that layer, regardless of type. You can override this setting manually for selected elements. If you wish to return to the previous layer state, choose the Individually Set Layers option. The last set of manually defined layers will be used.
163
Configuration
Line Types
Line types are assigned to each ArchiCAD construction element in its own Tool Settings dialog box, depending on the element type. For example, when defining how a Column should be displayed in a 2D window, you will apply different line types for its core outline, for its overhead display and for its crossing symbol.
The line types available in the element Settings dialog boxes are defined and managed as the projects Line Type attributes, in Options > Element Attributes > Line Types. Use the Line Types Dialog Box to modify the standard line types (solid, dotted, dashed, etc.) and define customized line types.
164
Configuration
Line Weight Display

By default, all lines will be displayed at Hairline width, at one pixel wide. In addition, you can enable Bold Cut Lines (View > On-Screen View Options); this will show all Cut lines as bold (two pixels wide, regardless of the lines true pen weight). All other lines will be shown at Hairline width. The alternative to Hairline weight is display each pens True Line Weight: enable Line True Weight in View > On-Screen View Options. Each lines pen weight (depending on its pen weight value as defined in the Pens and Colors dialog box) will be displayed accurately.
165
Configuration
Fill Types
ArchiCAD includes a predefined set of default fill patterns, or fill types. You can access them from the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types Dialog Box where you can define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete them. Fill types are assigned to ArchiCAD construction elements in their own Settings dialog boxes. Related topics:
Fill Types Dialog Box Fills
166
Configuration
Composite Structures
Walls, Slabs and Roofs can be defined as composite structures. Related topics:
Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab Define a Custom Composite Structure Components of Composite Structures Composite Structures Dialog Box
167
Configuration
Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab

1) Select the element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2) In the Floor Plan & Section panel, open the Structure pop-up list, and click on Cut Fills. The Structures Cut Fills pop-up list of Wall, Slab and Roof Settings includes a number of predefined Composite Structures (in addition to the uniform structures).
Note: Composite Structures are defined for specific element types: Wall, Slab, and/or Roof, by the Use With control, in the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box. Therefore, a composite element available from the Walls Structure - Cut Fills pop-up may not be available in the Roof Settings Structure - Cut Fills pop-up. 3) Choose the desired composite structure. This composite structure will be applied to the currently selected or created element.
168
Configuration
Define a Custom Composite Structure

Customize any composite structure, or create a new one, using the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.
169
Configuration
Components of Composite Structures

The layers of the composite element are called skins; a composite structure can have up to 8 skins. The skins are separated by separator lines; and the outline of the composite is the contour line. All composite elements include structural skins called Core, which play an important role when connecting Walls and Columns. See Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan. The skins you define as Core or Finish will also affect views in Partial Structure Display. Assign these definitions in the Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.
Note: A Wall skins Core or Finish status has no relation to its 2D intersection priority (which is set separately in Wall Settings).
170
Configuration
Pens & Colors

Each Pen has a specific color and line weight. You assign pens to ArchiCAD elements in their own tool settings dialog box. Note: Your current On-Screen View Options (Bold Cut Lines, True Line Weight) may affect the on-screen display of your lines. To assign a pen to an element, open the pencolor pop-up (in the element settings dialog box or in the Info Box of a selected element) and choose the desired pen for the element or one of its components - such as the cut line pen assigned to the slab in the following image:
The available pens in these pop-ups are derived from the Pen Set currently applied for this project. See Pen Sets.
171
Configuration
Pen Sets
ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. These are listed and managed Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. You can just use the default pen set, or you can apply a different Pen Set for your project, depending on the purpose of the current output.
Apply a Pen Set Redefine a Pen Set Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions Pens & Colors Dialog Box
172
Configuration
Apply a Pen Set

To choose and apply a pen set, use: Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors or Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors. Both commands open the identical Pens & Colors Dialog Box.
Select a pen set from the Available Pen Set list and click OK. For a quick way to change the pen set of your model view, use the Pen Set pop-up in the Quick Options Palette.
Apply a Separate Pen Set for the Layout Book

You can use a separate pen set for your Model Views and your Layout Book: the name of the dialog box includes either Model Views or Layout Book, depending on which type of window is active.
The Pens & Colors (Layout Book) settings are applied only to items placed onto the Layout (such as Autotext and Master Layout items), but not to the content of placed Drawings.
173
Configuration
Apply a Pen Set to a Drawing

When you place a view onto a Layout, it becomes a Drawing. By default, the Drawing placed in the Layout Book uses its own pen set (the one saved in the source views View Settings - by default, the pen set defined for the projects Model Views). However, you can override this pen set in Drawing Properties Panel of Drawing Settings: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only.
Drawings that have their source in external files - such as DWG/DXF/PDF files placed using ArchiCADs Drawing tool - can be assigned pen sets the same way: click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set, for this drawing only. Alternatively, you can change the source views pen set: go to its View Settings Dialog Box and choose a different Pen Set from the pop-up:
174
Configuration
Redefine a Pen Set

The predefined Pen Sets shipped with ArchiCAD are based on common workflows. See Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions for an overview of the logic behind predefined pen sets. However, you can use the Pens & Colors Dialog Box to redefine or rename any pen set together with its description redefine any pens line weight or color, using the Edit Color control
Pen numbers remain constant even if you change pen sets. After redefining a color or changing the Pen Set, the ArchiCAD construction elements immediately change to the new colors on the Floor Plan. The 3D window, 3D Document and Section/Elevation/IE/Worksheet windows may require that you rebuild the view.
175
Configuration
Transfer a Pen Set to Another Project

Pen Sets are attributes, and can be transferred among different ArchiCAD projects using the Pen Sets tab page of the Attribute Manager (Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager). Similarly, each pen set's individual definitions can be copied among projects in the Attribute Manager (Pens and Colors tab page).
176
Configuration
Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views

When the luminance value of a particular background color falls below a threshold value - that is, if your background is sufficiently dark - black pens will be shown as white on your ArchiCAD screen. (This is useful if you use a dark or black background to imitate AutoCAD methods.)
However, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. Non-black pens that would be difficult to see against a particular background will automatically shift to a similar, but more easily visible color. On a white background, elements in white pens are adjusted to a light gray to enhance visibility. Again, when printed, pen colors will print according to their actual settings in the pen set. To disable this automatic color adjustment, uncheck the Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
177
Configuration
Predefined Pen Sets for Specific Functions

Architects often wish to output the same model in several versions, using different pen colors or pen weights each time to meet different requirements for scale, color or emphasis. To aid users in this effort, ArchiCAD comes with several predefined Pen Sets. This way, you can switch pen sets for the entire project with a single click: you might prefer to use the architectural plans pen set when outputting plans for approval, then switch to the electrical pen set to output layouts for a subcontractor. When you change the pen set of a given project, the pen index numbers assigned to individual elements remain the same, but the colors and line weights associated with those pen indexes may change in accordance with the definitions in the new pen set, and your display and output will get a whole different look. When you assign a pen to an element, you are assigning a pen index number to that element. ArchiCADs default pen indexes assigned to element parameters correspond to the element function. For example, slabs are assigned a default cut line pen with index 29, which corresponds to the function Slabs - Cut Structural. Note: Depending on your localized version of ArchiCAD, your default pen sets and pen index assignments may vary. For more information on pen sets in ArchiCAD, see http://www.archicadwiki.com/Pen_Sets. Since each pen index number has a distinct function definition, it is worth paying attention to the pen function when assigning a pen to an element. (Or you can simply use the default element pens that are shipped with ArchiCAD.) If you assign pen index numbers consistent with the function of the element, then switching from one pen set to the other will ensure a consistent display that is in line with the purpose of your output.
178
Configuration
Materials
About Materials Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window Display of Materials in the 3D Document Display of Materials in Renderings Material Settings Dialog Box LightWorks Shader Settings
179
Configuration
About Materials
To display your plan realistically, you can apply materials to your elements. Materials contain color, texture and light effects. Materials can be displayed in the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/ IE and 3D Document windows, and in PhotoRenderings.
Materials can be created or modified in the Material Settings Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Materials). Materials defined here can then be assigned to elements in their Element settings dialog boxes (Model panel). Some materials have vectorial hatching and/or textures as part of their definition, as indicated by icons. This material, for example, can display either a vectorial hatching or a texture:
Important: Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. Textures are displayed only when using the OpenGL 3D engine. To switch between 3D Engines, use the commands in View > 3D View Mode.
Assign a Vectorial Hatching to a Material

Vectorial Hatching is a vectorial fill pattern used with a Material. In the Material Vectorial Hatching Panel, choose a vectorial hatching from one of the projects defined vectorial fill types. Note: When assigning a 3D Vectorial Hatching in the Materials dialog box, you can access only fills defined as Cover Fills.
180
Configuration
Assign a Texture to a Material

Textures are image files that can be assigned to materials to give them a more realistic look and feel. They are displayed in PhotoRenderings, and in the 3D window using the OpenGL 3D engine. By default, many ArchiCAD materials have textures assigned to them (such materials will have a texture icon next to their name.) You can load additional textures from the ArchiCAD library, or load other custom images. Textures are assigned and edited in the Material Texture Panel.
Suggested Workflow for Using Materials

1) Edit the default set of materials and/or create new materials. (This step is optional and recommended for advanced users.) 2) Choose a material for each construction element, using the material pop-up in the Model panel of the elements Settings dialog box. (For Wall Ends, materials are set in the 3D Representation section of the Parameters panel.) 3) In the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, choose a Rendering Engine, then adjust the relevant settings (transparency, effects, background, etc.) to define how the materials will be displayed in the final rendering.
181
Configuration
Assign a Material to a Construction Element

1) Select a placed element, or open the Default Settings dialog box for the element type. 2) Use the Model panel to access the available materials for the elements top, bottom and side surfaces in the 3D window. 3) Choose the desired materials to apply them to the current element. (Apply a single material to all surfaces using the Chain icon, or apply separate materials, as needed.) Note: Wall geometry and the direction of its reference line affect the assignment of materials to each surface of the Wall. For more information, see Wall Model Panel.
Note: Clicking the Chain icon (Link Materials) in this or other element settings dialog boxes means that the group of materials next to the chain icon are linked: each of the linked surfaces will use a single material; changing the material for one surface will change the material for all surfaces. To set a separate material for each surface, unlink them by clicking the chain again.
182
Configuration
Display of Materials and Textures in 3D Window

The 3D Window displays the materials colors, vectorial hatching and applied textures, if any. To display vectorial hatchings, the Vectorial 3D Hatching control in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings must be On. Vectorial Hatching is only displayed when using the Internal 3D engine. 3D Textures are visible only when using the OpenGL 3D engine, and if the Textures box is checked in OpenGL options as in the image below:
To switch between 3D Engines, use the commands in View > 3D View Mode. You can customize the orientation and origin of textures in 3D views: see Align 3D Texture.
183
Configuration
Align 3D Texture
Use the commands at Design > Align 3D Texture to set the orientation and origin of construction element textures in 3D views. These commands are only available in the 3D Window on selected construction elements whose Material attribute includes a Texture assignment (Options > Element Attributes > Materials).
Set Texture Origin

Use Set Origin, the first command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to define the origin of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1) Select one or several elements. 2) Enter a 3D location by clicking on an element hotspots, or typing coordinates into the Tracker. In this example, the brick wall texture originally looks like this:
To reset the texture origin to the corner of the wall - so that the brick pattern starts from the corner - select the wall; then use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Origin. Click on the corner and view the result.
The texture origin will affect all of the elements surfaces. You cannot, for example, use a different origin for the inside and outside surfaces of a wall.
184
Configuration
Set Texture Direction

Use Set Direction, the second command in the Design > Align 3D Texture menu, to change the orientation of the Texture applied on the surface of a construction element. 1) Select one or several elements. 2) Use Design > Align 3D Texture > Set Direction. 3) Click on a surface of a selected element. You must click a surface. (Clicking a Wall, Slab or Roof edge will cancel the action.) 4) In the dialog box that opens, choose to either define the textures angle graphically or numerically. Then click OK.
5) If you chose to define the angle graphically, draw the desired vector for the texture orientation. You can snap to element hotspots. 6) If you define the angle numerically, it will be applied relative to the default orientation of the Texture and measured counterclockwise.
185
Configuration
Reset Texture
To return to the default Texture settings, select the element, open its Settings dialog box and go to the Model panel. The Custom Texture information text is active. Click the Reset Texture button to discard the customization. You can also select several elements and choose the Reset command in the Design > Align 3D Texture hierarchical menu. To remove all customization of the elements of the 3D Window, do not select any of them and choose Reset All.
186
Configuration
Display of Materials in Section/Elevation/IE Window

The Section/Elevation/IE window can display an elements materials colors and/or vectorial hatching on the elements uncut portion. To display material colors: 1) Open the Model Display panel of the Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog box. 2) Choose Fill Uncut Surfaces and activate one of these two options. Elements Own Material Colors (Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects, as in the image below.
Elements Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Surfaces will display the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface.
3) Check Vectorial 3D Hatching to display the materials vectorial hatching, if any. Material colors and vectorial hatching can be displayed only on uncut surfaces of elements in the Section/Elevation/IE windows.
187
Configuration
Display of Materials in the 3D Document

A 3D Document has its own Settings dialog box. Use the 3D Document Model Display Panel to define how materials will be displayed. Unlike for a Section-type window, the 3D Documents Model Display settings enable you to choose materials, element-specific fills and shaded or non-shaded colors to display cut surfaces, for the current 3D Document only.
The Vectorial Hatching in 3D and Transparency options for the 3D Document are specific to the 3D Document, and are not connected to the same options set for the 3D Window.
188
Configuration
Display of Materials in Renderings

Different Rendering Engines have different capabilities for displaying materials. Thus, when editing a Material in the Material Settings Dialog Box, some of the available controls may not have any effect on the materials rendered appearance. To streamline the process, choose your intended Rendering Engine as the Preview Engine in the Material Settings dialog box and check the Disable unrelated Controls box.
This way, only those controls will be available in Material Settings that will actually affect the final rendered appearance. If you intend to render with LightWorks, choose the LightWorks Rendering Engine in Material Settings, and check Disable unrelated controls. The LightWorks Shader Settings panel is now the only one you need to edit in Material Settings.
Renderings display all material characteristics except vectorial hatching. The general appearance of your renderings is defined in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, whose settings apply to all materials in the rendering.
189
Configuration
Attribute Manager
Open the Attribute Manager from Options > Element Attributes > Attribute Manager. Displaying the dialog box might take some time, since it has to list all the attributes of the project. This dialog box allows you to copy (append, overwrite) attributes (Layers, Layer Combinations, Pens & Colors, Pen Sets, Line Types, Fill Types, Composite Structures, Materials, Profiles, Zone Categories and Cities) between two opened files. It can also duplicate or delete attributes in either of the two files:
On the left, the attributes of the currently opened ArchiCAD file are shown. On the right you can either open a second ArchiCAD file (Project, Archive or Module) or create a new one in a special format that belongs to Attribute Manager. The buttons between the two parts of the dialog box allow you to copy attributes in either direction, and delete, append or overwrite them. Appending an attribute will add it to the list of the other file under a new index. Overwriting an attribute will replace it with another attribute from the other file that has the same index number. On top of the dialog box, the attribute types icons represent tab pages that display one type of attribute at a time. The last tab shows all types of attributes in a single list.
190
Configuration
At the bottom of the dialog box a number of buttons allow you to perform different operations on the files: The Purge Unused button deletes all attributes of the selected type that are not used by any element of the Project. Note: Unused attributes referred to in GDL Scripts of Library Parts are considered unused and will be purged. The Revert button restores the attributes to their previous state. (The Cancel button has the same effect, but also closes the dialog box.) The Apply button applies the changes you have made without closing the dialog box. To sort an attribute list by a particular criterion, click the top of the desired column. For example, you can display pens by line width or cities by latitude. In the row below the list, it is possible to partly edit the attribute selected in the list. Layers: You can modify the visibility and locking state as well as the name of the selected layer. Layer Combinations: You can rename the selected layer combination. Pen Tables: You can copy, delete, append or overwrite pen tables among the selected projects. Pens & Colors: You can modify the color, the RGB components and the line width of the selected pen. Line Types: You can modify the name and the scale factor of the selected line type. Fill Types: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for the various fill categories. Composite Structures: You can modify the name of the selected item as well as its availability for different element types. Profiles: You can modify the name of the selected profile as well as its availability for different element types. Materials: You can modify the color, name and texture assignment of the selected material. Zone Categories: You can modify the code, color, name and zone stamp assignment of the selected item. Cities: You can modify the name, latitude and longitude values and time zone settings of the selected location. All: You can display all the attribute types of the current project and sort them by types, numbers and names, or edit the attribute that is selected in the list.
191
Configuration
Custom Attributes of GDL Objects

Some GDL object scripts include custom attributes. These attributes may be defined either as part of their individual object scripts or defined in the MASTER_GDL script. When you load such objects into a project, their custom attributes are automatically merged into the projects attribute set as follows: If the Attribute definition is contained in the MASTER_GDL script, then once the library containing the MASTER_GDL script is loaded, the attributes are merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes. Attributes with the same names are not replaced. If the Attribute definition is contained in the individual library part scripts, then - Fills and Line types are merged into the ArchiCAD project. - Material and Texture attributes are not merged into the ArchiCAD project attributes.
192
Configuration
Libraries
About Libraries Library Manager Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette Library Container File Library Updates Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts
193
Configuration
About Libraries
Libraries contain the external or embedded files used by ArchiCAD or referred to by construction elements. View and manage your projects libraries in the Library Manager (File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager). When creating a new project, ArchiCAD will load the library contained in the template used for the new project. When opening a project, the projects already added libraries and embedded objects will be listed in the Library Manager. You can use specialized Libraries for different applications (e.g., residential Projects and industrial building design). There are different Libraries corresponding to different national standards. Libraries contain geometric library parts, or Parametric Objects. ArchiCAD is shipped with a standard object library containing hundreds of preconfigured, editable objects (also known as GDL objects or Library parts). For the most part, you will use ArchiCAD tools to place objects from this standard library. In addition to objects, the Library also contains files of different formats that are referred to by ArchiCAD elements: Listing Templates are plain text files that are used to customize the content and the look of quantity calculations. Textures are picture files that can be attached to Materials to provide added realism in rendered views, and in the 3D Window when using the OpenGL engine. Background images are additional picture files used to provide the 3D model with a lifelike environment. Macros, Zone stamps, Property Objects
194
Configuration
Library Manager
About Library Manager Add Objects to Embedded Library Manage Embedded Objects Add a Linked Library Add BIM Server Library Remove Library Folder
195
Configuration
About Library Manager

Use the File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager command to open this dialog box. This dialog box displays the projects libraries and objects.
The Embedded Library contains all object files that are saved directly into the project. These may be: any object file that you browse for, choose and add to this library, including Web Objects downloaded through GDL Web Control object files you create and save yourself (e.g. Patch, Stair, Custom Object) loaded .txt files that function as macros image files loaded for use as Material textures or other purposes Note: List Schemes (from the Calculation function) will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the Embedded Library. Embedded object files are housed within the project; they are not linked to any outside location. Linked Libraries include the standard ArchiCAD library loaded by default, as well as any other libraries you add. In contrast to the objects of the Embedded Library, these libraries are linked folders, or .lcf or .pla files. BIM Server Libraries are additional linked libraries located on a server. All the files in these libraries are thus available to your project, provided that you are authorized by the BIM Server Manager to access the server. In Teamwork mode, the Linked Libraries category is replaced by BIM Server Libraries; there are no linked libraries. 196
Configuration
Add Objects to Embedded Library

From Library Manager:
To add any object file to your Embedded Library, go to Library Manager do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired object file, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) The chosen object file will now appear in the Embedded Library in Library Manager. Click Browse for Embedded Objects from the Add buttons pop-up list.
Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the file into the Embedded Objects folder of Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.
By creating a custom Object:

Most objects created by you (e.g. using Stairmaker, TrussMaker, RoofMaker) will be added to your projects Embedded library automatically: For example, if you create a custom Stair with Stairmaker and click OK to place it, the Save Library Part dialog box appears automatically and prompts you to save the new stair to the Embedded Library:
Similarly, objects saved with the Save Selection as GDL Object will save the resulting files as embedded objects. With custom-created objects drawn by you and saved from the 3D window, you can either save the object to the Embedded library or to a folder of your choice.
197
Configuration
By loading an object file:

Individual objects not part of the project libraries can be used in your Projects via the Load Other Object commands in the corresponding tool settings dialog boxes (Window, Door, etc.). Such objects are automatically stored as Embedded Objects.
See also Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD.
198
Configuration
Manage Embedded Objects

Select any object file from the Embedded Library folder of Library Manager. Use the four icons below to: Duplicate the object. The new object, with a new name and assigned a separate GUID, appears alongside the original object in the Embedded Library folder. Export the object. Browse a folder location on your machine to which to save the object. Add new folder to the Embedded Library folder. Delete the object. Important: Deleting an object from the Embedded Library folder deletes that object file for good; you cannot retrieve it unless you earlier saved it to another location (in that case, you can Add it again to the Embedded Library). Deleting an object from the Embedded Library means that all placed instances of that object file will disappear from your project and be replaced by an orange-colored dot.
The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if an Embedded object is selected, gives you feedback on the file name, the object type and file size. If desired, change the file name by typing into the Name field. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.
199
Configuration
Add a Linked Library

To add a linked library to your project, go to Library Manager and do one of the following: Click Add. Browse for the desired library file, select it, then click Choose. (To view and choose items within a folder while browsing the directory dialog box in Windows, you must double-click the folder.) Click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, to narrow the available files to Library files. Library files include .pla, .ppa, .pca and .lcf, and any folder. Note: If you add a .pla file to your Linked Libraries folder, make sure you add the explicit .pla file itself, not a folder that contains the .pla. Otherwise the parts located within the .pla will not be read. Use Drag and Drop. From any location on your computer, drag and drop the library file into the Linked Libraries folder of Library Manager. The chosen library file or folder will now appear in the Linked Libraries folder of the Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager. The Properties panel, shown at the bottom of the Library Manager if a Linked Library (file or folder) is selected, gives you feedback on items Path and (in case it is a file) its Last Modified date.
200
Configuration
Add BIM Server Library

You can access Libraries on BIM Servers even if you are currently working on a solo project. However, you must be authorized by the Server Administrator to gain access to the server and its libraries. Teamwork users must have the appropriate access right in order to add or manage BIM Server libraries. The BIM Server Libraries folder may already list one or more libraries which were added when the Teamwork project was first created. To add an additional library to the BIM Server, click Use BIM Server Library from the Add buttons pop-up list.
The Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box appears. The currently loaded libraries are shown for all available servers by default. To narrow the list of libraries shown here, choose any one server from the server list.
Choose the library you need, then click Add. The chosen library will now appear in the BIM Server Libraries folder of the Library Manager. When you are finished, click Reload to reload project libraries and close the Library Manager.
201
Configuration
Refreshing the Server Library

When you add a library to the BIM Server Libraries folder, a copy of the library will be created on your machine (regardless of whether you are working in solo or Teamwork mode). If you are working in Teamwork mode, this copy is synchronized with the server data every time you Send or Receive changes. If you are working in solo mode, this copy is refreshed every time you click Reload in the Library Manager. Note: The operating system has a limit on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. Consequently, you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM server library, because the library path is too long. For details, see Library Path Too Long. See also Libraries in Teamwork.
202
Configuration
Remove Library Folder

Select any Linked Library or BIM Server Library from the Library Manager. Click the Remove button at the center of the Library Manager. You can remove all Linked or BIM Server libraries at once by selecting the top folder name (e.g. Linked Libraries or BIM Server Libraries). If you place objects into the project from a library, and then remove the library, then the placed objects will be listed in the Missing Objects folder of Library Manager, and their location in the project shown by green dots. Removed libraries can be re-linked to your project at any time; then the missing objects will be found.
203
Configuration
Unavailable Libraries
If you have modified the name of a library folder, or changed its location in the file hierarchy, then the next time you open ArchiCAD, the Library Manager dialog box will be displayed. The library folder is shown as Unavailable. Placed objects from unavailable libraries are listed in the Missing Objects folder; in the project, their location is marked by non-descript green dots.
The solution is to click Link Library from the Add buttons pop-up list, and browse for the library file under its new name or location.
204
Configuration
Missing Library Parts and the Library Loading Report Palette

Items in the Missing Objects folder of the Library Manager are missing from the project either because they were embedded objects, and have been deleted (you cannot retrieve them, since they no longer exist) or because they were located in libraries that have been deleted from the project or moved to a different location (to retrieve these objects, re-Add these libraries to Library Manager).
Missing Objects are also listed in the Library Loading Report, which appears when you reload the Library Manager, if any items are missing.
205
Configuration
The Library Loading Report Palette shows you the names of the Library Part files that present problems and the download status of web objects. (To view the palette if it doesnt appear automatically, activate Window > Palettes > Library Loading Report.)
The missing items cannot be displayed on the plan. (The place of missing library parts is indicated by nondescript spots: the place of a deleted Embedded object is an orange dot; the place of an object from a missing linked library is a green dot.) The problem of missing library parts usually occurs when you open the Project on a different computer. To make sure that no files are missing, it is recommended to save Projects in Archive format before moving them to another computer. Another solution - within a single office - is to use a common standard library that is continuously updated on each computer. For more information, see Archive Files.
206
Configuration
Library Container File

The extension .lcf identifies a Library Container file. The default ArchiCAD 13 Library is stored in an .lcf, but you can also create your own Library Container file, or extract its contents, using the File > Libraries and Objects > Create/Extract a Container command. Since the Library Container file is a single file, yet contains all the objects used in your project, it lets you keep all the objects used in your projects in one place, while keeping hierarchies intact within the .lcf.
207
Configuration
Library Updates
GRAPHISOFT updates its standard library parts on a regular basis. To check for the latest library updates, you should enable the Check for Updates option in Options > Work Environment > Network And Update Options. This means you will be notified, upon starting ArchiCAD, if a new library version matching your ArchiCAD language version is available, which you can then choose to download if needed.
208
Configuration
Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts

ArchiCAD uses an internal identifier system to track the evolution (creation, modification, and/or renaming) of each library object. Each object is assigned a Global Unique Identifier (GUID) consisting of two sets of 36 characters each. Every time you load a project containing library parts, the program will search the loaded libraries for an exact match based on the objects GUID. This means that even if two or more library objects of the same name are loaded, if they are actually different objects, ArchiCAD will use the correct one based on its GUID. This way, library parts having identical names but different GUIDs do not conflict. Such objects are listed in the Status Report Dialog as Duplicate Names. Since duplicate names dont cause problems, work on the project can be continued. Library parts having identical GUIDs conflict; these items are actually identical, and are listed under Duplicate Library Parts. To avoid conflicts in the project, you must remove one of the two identical parts from the library. For a more detailed description of how GUID works, see http://www.ArchiCADwiki.com/guid. If you use newer versions of a library, the objects will be matched based on their GUID. Objects placed from libraries of ArchiCAD 7.0 or earlier do not have GUIDs. Consequently, the system will identify library parts based on name only. If the loaded libraries contain two objects with the same name as the placed version, the object to be used will be randomly selected from the two possible locations.
209
Configuration
Favorites
The Favorites feature allows you to save sets of configured tool settings by name. Load these Favorite settings as the current default for the active tool to recreate a specific element at any time. Favorites are saved with your Project file. A Favorites stored settings include: The elements attributes, including the line type, fill pattern and pen color, as well as surface material choices In the case of Library Parts, the name of the Library Part All of the elements dimensions that can be entered in the settings dialog boxes for the element, e.g., wall thickness and height (but not length) If the Favorites refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, those attributes will be missing. If the Favorites refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project.
Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette
210
Configuration
Load Favorite Settings as Default

1) Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). The Favorites Palette lists the Favorites for the active tool only, as for the Column tool shown here:
Note: If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.
Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. 2) Double-click the Favorite name to load its settings as default tool settings. The Default Settings now shown in the Info Box are those of the Favorite you just loaded. Note: You can opt to exclude certain Favorite parameters from being loaded: see Customize Favorite Parameters.
Favorites Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette
211
Configuration
Save Favorite Settings

Save Favorite Settings by using either the Favorites Palette, or the Tool Settings dialog boxes.
Save Favorite Settings using the Favorites Palette:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. Use the Info Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. Optionally, place element(s) in the project using these settings. Open the Favorites Palette (Window > Palettes > Favorites). Click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.
6) Choose Save Current Default Settings to store these settings as a Favorite. (Alternatively, select the placed element and choose the Save Last Selections command from this pop-up.) 7) Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette.
212
Configuration
Save Favorite Settings using the Tool Settings dialog box:

1) Activate the Tool for which you wish to create Favorite Settings. 2) Use the Tool Settings Dialog Box to configure the Default Settings as needed. 3) Click the Favorites button, at the top of the Settings dialog box, to open the Apply Favorites dialog box.
4) Click the Save Current Settings as Favorite button. 5) Enter a name in the New Favorite dialog box that appears. Your new Favorite is now listed in the Favorites Palette.
Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Customize Favorite Parameters Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette
213
Configuration
Customize Favorite Parameters

Use the Favorites Preferences dialog box to if you want to ignore certain parameters when loading Favorite Settings. The Favorites Preferences dialog box controls which of the different element types parameters are NOT to be saved with Favorites. 1) Choose Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.
2) Use the Parameter Exclusion list (in the bottom half of the dialog box) to check the names of the parameters that you DO NOT want to apply with Favorites.
For example, if you check the Height parameter for Walls in the Parameter Exclusion list, then every time you load a Wall Favorite as the default settings, the saved Height of the Favorite Wall will be disregarded, and the default Wall Height will remain unaffected, even after you load the Favorite Settings.
214
Configuration
Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Favorites Palette
215
Configuration
Apply Favorite to Placed Element

To apply Favorite settings to a placed element: 1) Select the element. 2) Open its Settings dialog box. 3) Click the Favorites button to display the Apply Favorites dialog box.
4) Choose the Favorite you need, then click Apply. 5) Click OK to close the Settings dialog box and apply the Favorite settings.
Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Customize Favorite Parameters Favorites Palette
216
Configuration
Favorites Palette
Access this palette from Window > Palettes > Favorites. The Favorites Palette lists the favorites for the active tool only, by default. (If the Arrow or Marquee tool is active, then all favorites are listed.) If you want the Favorites Palette to list the Favorite Settings of all the tools, go to Favorite Preferences from the Favorite palettes pop-up menu.
Uncheck the Show Favorites of active Tool only checkbox. Sort Favorites by Name or Type: Click the corresponding caption to sort the list of favorites. To save and manage Favorites, click the Favorite Options pop-up from the top right of the Favorites Palette.
Delete the selected Favorite (one at a time). Rename the selected Favorite (enter a new name in the appearing Rename Favorite dialog box). Save Current Default Settings: Saves the currently loaded default settings as a Favorite (regardless of the currently selected Favorite in the Favorites Palette). This command is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. Save Last Selection: Stores the settings of the last selected elements current settings as a new Favorite. If nothing is selected, this command is inactive. Redefine with current Default: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the default settings of that tool. This item is inactive if the Arrow, Marquee or Camera tool is selected in the Toolbox. Redefine with Last Selection: Changes the selected Favorites definition to the settings of the last selected element.
217
Configuration
Save Favorites: Exports the whole set of Favorites in a separate file. The file will be saved with the *.prf extension. Load Favorites: Load or merge a saved Favorites file. You can either merge it, or replace the current Favorites list.
When merging the two sets, if any Favorites have identical names, you will be prompted to skip or overwrite the original definition. Favorites Preferences. Use this dialog box to define the exclusion of parameters. See Customize Favorite Parameters.
Favorites Load Favorite Settings as Default Save Favorite Settings Apply Favorite to Placed Element Customize Favorite Parameters
218
Configuration
The ArchiCAD User Interface

This section introduces the main customizable palettes and menus in ArchiCAD.
Toolbox Info Box Menus Toolbars Shortcuts Palettes Pet Palettes
219
Configuration
Toolbox
The Toolbox shows a variety of tools for selection, 3D construction, 2D drawing and visualization. By default, the Toolbox is divided into Tool Groups -Select, Design, Document and More - to make it easier to locate the tool you need. Besides the standard set of tools, additional tools can appear in the Toolbox depending on the installation and the available Add-Ons.
Display the Toolbox

If the Toolbox is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Toolbox command.
Customizing the Toolbox

Use the Toolbox Customization Dialog Box controls of the Options > Work Environment > Toolbox page to customize the contents and arrangement of your toolbox. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Toolbox context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Toolbox, then click the icon representing the Toolbox customization page.
. Specifically, you can customize your toolbox by organizing the tools into groups. Then store your customized Toolbox settings as part of a Tool Scheme in your Work Environment. (A Tool Scheme includes your work environment settings for the Toolbox, Info Box and Tool Settings dialog boxes.) See Saving Your Customized Work Environment.
How to Open and Close Tool Groups Within the Toolbox

By default, the Toolbox shows all tools in all Tool Groups simultaneously. If the Toolbox becomes too unwieldy, use the open/close arrows at the top of each Tool Group to temporarily open and close these groups as needed. If the open/close arrows are not displayed, go to Options > Work Environment > Toolbox.
220
Configuration
Click on Tool Group Options, then uncheck the Always Keep Tool Groups Open option.
Now you will be able to open or close each Tool Group in the Toolbox separately.
221
Configuration
Info Box
An Info Box is available for each tool in the toolbox. When you activate a tool or select a placed element, its Info Box palette will display current settings for that tool/element. If several elements are selected, the Info Box displays the controls for the last selected element. The Info Box contains a condensed collection of input and parameter controls that are specific to the selected tool/element. While some of these controls are also available in the Tool Settings dialog box, the Info Box is a quicker way to access these controls, because it stays on screen while you work. By default, the Info Box is docked at the top of your workspace in a horizontal position. To show it vertically, dock it at either side of your screen. Let your cursor hover over an Info Box item to provide a Tool Tip if you are not sure what the icon represents.
You can use a scroll-mouse or the scrollbar to scroll through the contents of your Info Box. Selected/Editable: The current Info Box gives you feedback on the number of Selected Elements, as well as how many of those are Editable. Changes made to Info Box settings will affect the Editable elements. On the Floor Plan below, all Walls are selected; four of them have been locked for editing, as reflected in the Info Box:
Default Settings. If there is no selection, the Info Box displays the active tools Default Settings.
Displaying the Info Box

If the Info Box is not visible on screen, activate the Windows > Palettes > Info Box command. The Info Box will show controls specific to the active tool or the selected element.
222
Configuration
Customizing the Info Box

You can customize the order and visibility of panels in each Tools Info Box: go to Options > Work Environment and open the Info Box Customization Dialog Box. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open the Info Box context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Info Box, then click the icon representing the Info Box customization page:
Also available from this Info Box context menu: click a display preference for the Info Box Header location: at the left edge of the palette, or on top.
223
Configuration
Menus
About Menus Menu Customization Dialog Box
224
Configuration
About Menus
When starting ArchiCAD 13 with default settings, you will load the Standard Profile, which along with other Work Environment settings - defines the default menu structure.
See Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13. However, there are some commands and menus in ArchiCAD 13 which are not displayed as part of this standard profile. Use the settings in the Options > Work Environment > Menus dialog box to customize the content of your menus.
Customizing Menus
Use the Menu Customization Dialog Box dialog box to customize any ArchiCAD menu. Any command or menu can be placed into or removed from any menu; the order of the commands within any menu is entirely customizable. Exception: Context menus are not customizable. You can store your customized menu command settings as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.
225
Configuration
Toolbars
About Toolbars Toolbar Customization Dialog Box
226
Configuration
About Toolbars
A toolbar is a collection of commands and/or menus displayed in icon or text form and grouped by topic.
Displaying Toolbars
To display a toolbar, choose its name from Window > Toolbars; or right-click the title bar of any toolbar on screen to display the list of defined toolbars. Click any toolbar in the list to display it.
227
Configuration
Creating or Customizing Toolbars

Use the Toolbar Customization Dialog Box, accessed from Options > Work Environment > Toolbars, to create a new toolbar, or customize any of the available ones. You can also set whether a given command is represented on a toolbar by its name, its icon, or both. An easy way to access this dialog box is to open any Toolbars context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the Toolbar, then click on Toolbars...:
You can store your customized toolbars as part of a Command Layout Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment. The content of named toolbars are saved as part of a Command Layout Scheme. The on-screen display of toolbars is saved in a Palette Scheme.
228
Configuration
Shortcuts
ArchiCAD is shipped with several predefined shortcut schemes. To view or print out a list of the shortcuts of the Work Environment, go to Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts, and click the Show Shortcut List in Browser button at the bottom of the Keyboard Shortcut Preview Panel.
To customize a shortcut command, use the Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts: choose a command from the list on the left, then enter the desired shortcut combination in the field at the right, then click Assign. For details, see Shortcut Customization Dialog Box. Apart from a few non-customizable shortcuts (listed at the bottom of the Show Shortcut list), all shortcuts in any scheme are customizable. Changes to the selected Shortcut scheme are applied when you press OK and close the dialog box. You can store your customized Shortcut settings as part of a Shortcut Scheme in your Work Environment. For details, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.
229
Configuration
Palettes
ArchiCADs palettes help you construct, modify and locate elements. Each palette can be shown or hidden separately using the Window > Palettes command. The main palettes (Toolbox, Info Box, Quick Options and Navigator) can be enabled all at once, using the Window > Palettes > Show Main Palettes Only command. Each of these palettes is described in detail in the ArchiCAD documentation:
Toolbox Info Box Quick Options Palette Navigator Palette Control Box Coordinates Palette
Two of these palettes - the Control Box and Coordinates - may be familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD. They are not displayed by default, because their commands are available from other parts of the interface. To display either of these palettes, go to Window > Palettes and choose the desired palette(s).
Customizing Palette Schemes

To customize your palette scheme (a saved configuration of palettes), set up your palettes manually in the ArchiCAD workspace by doing any or all of the following: Show or hide palettes as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Palettes) Show or hide toolbars as needed (click its name on or off from Window > Toolbars) Change the shape of a palette by choosing a shape option from its context menu. The Info Box, Coordinates Palette and Control Box palettes have shape options - for example, extended or compact - that you can set using the context menu opened by right-clicking the palette on screen.
Change the position and size of a palette by dragging the palettes to a desired position. Dock palettes as needed (Windows only) Use the Palette Schemes Scheme Options page to manage (Store, Rename, Delete, Redefine, Export, Import) and apply Palette Schemes: go to Options > Work Environment > Palette Schemes. 230
Configuration
Palette Schemes differ from the rest of the Work Environment schemes: the settings they contain are defined not in the Work Environment dialog box; instead, Palette Schemes settings reflect the way you manually set up your palettes in your workspace. Note: While the show/hide status of a toolbar is saved in a palette scheme, its content is defined as part of a Command Layout Scheme.
Docking Palettes (Windows Only)

Palettes can float over your workspace, and if a floating palette is in the way, you can either close it or drag it away. However, many ArchiCAD palettes can also be docked (in Windows only) at an edge of the workspace. A docked palette is fixed at the edge of your screen, with no workspace underneath it: this way, if you maximize the active window, the entire workspace is visible. A docked palette can be made to float again at any time. To dock a palette, click on its title bar (the drag symbol will appear) and drag it to one side or the top or bottom of the screen until the drag symbol hits either the side or the top/bottom limit.
Release the cursor to dock the palette. Note: When dragging a palette in Windows, its anchor point is the drag symbol (not a palette edge).
How to Un-Dock a Palette

To pop a palette out of its dock and into a free-floating position, just click and drag on its header. Alternatively, double-click the palette; double-click it again to re-dock.
Docking Groups of Palettes

You can dock several palettes at either side of the screen and snap them to each other, forming a palette group. Click and drag to dock the first palette. To insert a second palette above the first, click and drag the second palette onto the title bar of the first. To insert a second palette below the first, click and drag the second palette to the line at the bottom of the first one. You can also place two (or more) palettes side by side, sitting atop a single palette (or vice versa), as part of the same group. If you resize any palette that is part of a palette group, the rest of the palettes in the group will be resized automatically.
231
Configuration
The width of all palettes in the group are resized simultaneously (by dragging the edge to the right or left).
To set how much of each palette should be visible on screen, drag the splitter bars up or down, for palettes stacked on top of each other, or right/left, for palettes grouped next to each other. (The splitter bars are the lines which divide each palette from the others.)
Limitations on Docking Palettes

Not every palette can be docked to all sides of the screen. The following palettes/dialog boxes cannot be docked: Mark-Up Tools; Selections; Library Loading Report; Pet Palettes; Element Information; Find and Select; Roofmaker; Solid Element Operations; Sign in; Text Formatting; Profile Manager; Quick Layers.
Suspend Docking Function

To suspend the docking function while dragging a palette, press Ctrl (Windows).
Snapping Palettes (MacOS Only)

On a MacOS, you can snap ArchiCAD floating palettes to each other, to the edge of the screen. Palettes will snap to each other if you pull them within a given range of each other. The palette edge (not the cursor) is the docking anchor. If a palette is snapped to the bottom or to the right of another, then both palettes can be dragged as a single object. If a palette is snapped onto the top or to the left of another palette, then they will not stick together when you move them.
Suspend Snapping Function

To suspend the snapping function while dragging a palette, press Cmd (MacOS).
232
Configuration
Pet Palettes
A pet palette is a collection of icons (representing commands and relevant options) which pops up during graphical input and editing operations. In some cases, the pet palette appears during input (as when inputting a polyline), but in most cases the pet palette appears after you have placed an element, then selected the element for further editing. To access the pet palette, place your cursor on an editable edge, node, or surface, and left-click. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge, node or surface) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need. Use the shortcuts F and Shift+F (Opt+F) to move to the next/previous icon in the current pet palette.
You cannot customize the contents of a pet palette. You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. The pet palette will either follow your cursor around on screen as you work (like a pet on a leash), or be placed in a preferred spot (and told to stay), depending on which pet palette movement option you specify.
233
Configuration
To set these preferences, go to Pet Palette Movement at Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes.
You can store these Pet Palette settings as part of a User Preference Scheme in your Work Environment.
234
Configuration
Customizing your Work Environment

As you get used to working with ArchiCAD, you will develop personal preferences for using the programs features and arranging the various palettes, toolbars and menus on screen. You will set most of these options using the Options > Work Environment dialog box. For a brief description of every available setting in the Work Environment Dialog Box, see Work Environment Dialog Box.
You can customize any of these settings while you work: just open the Work Environment dialog box, change the setting you need, and press OK. The setting will take effect.
235
Configuration
Use the splitter bars within each page to display the text as needed.
Work Environment settings are saved not as part of the project, but in a local folder on your computer.
Work Environment Schemes Saving Your Customized Work Environment Profiles How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer
236
Configuration
Work Environment Schemes

Work Environment settings (Options > Work Environment) are divided into six self-contained schemes. Each scheme is a thematic collection of settings.
1) User Preference Schemes. These include a wide variety of your preferences for functions such as Guide Line functions, coordinate input, and how certain dialog boxes should appear. 2) Company Standard Schemes. These settings are typically standardized within a firm. See details at: Data Safety Network And Update Options Special Folders See also Creating a Custom Install Package in Getting Started, accessible from ArchiCADs Help menu. 3) Shortcut Schemes For more information, see Shortcuts. 4) Tool Schemes. A tool scheme includes settings for the Toolbox, the Info Box and the Tool Settings dialog boxes. 5) Palette Schemes. These settings are defined outside the Work Environment dialog box; a palette scheme saves the current on-screen status of your Palettes. 6) Command Layout Schemes. Command Layout Schemes include settings for your Toolbars and Menus. Click on the name of the settings you wish to alter (for example, Selection and Element Information).
237
Configuration
As soon as you make a change to any Work Environment setting, the scheme name at the top of the settings page changes to Custom:
When you finish making changes, press OK to close the dialog box and apply current settings. The latest Custom settings will remain intact even after you close and restart ArchiCAD. However, every new settings change redefines the Custom scheme according to your latest change. If you want to keep your modifications saved on the long term, it is advisable to store the settings of your Custom scheme in a named scheme. For more information, see Saving Your Customized Work Environment.
238
Configuration
Saving Your Customized Work Environment

If you have customized a number of settings in Options > Work Environment, you may wish to save them for future use in other projects, so that your personalized Work Environment is ready for you when you start to work. Individual settings are organized into six Schemes; saving your settings occurs at the Scheme level. Unlike Project settings, which are saved with the project file, Work Environment Schemes are saved in a local folder on your computer. The Scheme Options screen appears in the Work Environment dialog box if you have selected one of the six scheme sets from the tree structure at the left side of the dialog box. There is one Scheme Options page for each of the six schemes.
You can store any or all of the schemes by name; you can also combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface (Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles), you can export and import Schemes and Profiles: this enables you to transport your favorite settings to other computers, or to keep them after installing a new version of ArchiCAD. See Profiles for more information. It is entirely possible to use ArchiCAD successfully without saving schemes and profiles; you can just adjust settings as you work. However, the option to save settings according to named schemes, and then to combine schemes into profiles, is useful for CAD managers, for offices working in teams, and for individual users who might want to alternate among several different sets of customized settings.
Store a Customized Scheme

To store the settings of a Scheme, choose the scheme set whose settings you want to store, using the left-hand tree structure of the Work Environment Dialog Box. (For example, if you have changed shortcuts and want to save them, click on Shortcut Schemes.) This brings up Scheme Options, where you can store, rename, delete, redefine, export, or import schemes.
239
Configuration
Apply a Scheme
To apply a stored scheme, choose the desired scheme from the Apply Scheme pop-up at the top of any of Work Environments settings pages.
You can also apply a scheme using the Scheme Options page of Work Environment: choose one of the defined schemes, then either double-click it, or click the Apply Scheme button.
Once you apply the scheme and press OK to close the Work Environment dialog box, your ArchiCAD program will adjust itself to reflect the settings you have stored in that scheme.
Creating an Office-Standard Work Environment

The ability to save and rename any combination of Work Environment Settings can be useful not only for the individual user, but also for encouraging consistency among multiple users on a particular project. CAD managers can create office-standard Work Environment Profiles and install them as defaults when installing the ArchiCAD program at multiple workstations. For more information, see the Getting Started booklet, available from the ArchiCAD Help menu.
240
Configuration
Profiles
If you have customized and saved multiple schemes, you may want to store and apply them together: in this case, combine any of the schemes into a Profile, and store the Profile under its own name. Using the ArchiCAD interface, you can export and import Profiles to use on other computers. For details on configuring and applying profiles, see Profile Options. Notes about Profiles: Profiles themselves do not contain settings; they are just a collection of schemes. A profile does not have to contain all six scheme possibilities. Once you start working, you dont have to apply entire profiles at once; you can apply schemes one by one. You can save a Custom scheme as part of a profile, but the Custom scheme will be given a name when the profile is created. Schemes named Custom cannot be exported.
Define and Store a New Profile

To assemble any combination of schemes into a profile, go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page. See Profile Options for details.
Apply a Profile
1) Go to Options > Work Environment and click Work Environment Profiles (the top item in the list at the left.) This opens the Profile Options dialog page.
2) From the list of Stored Profiles, choose the desired Profile. Double-click to apply the profile, or click the Apply Schemes of Profile button. 3) Click OK to close the Work Environment dialog box.
241
Configuration
Default Profiles in ArchiCAD 13

ArchiCAD 13 is shipped with three default Profiles: Standard, Visualization and Layouting. When you first start ArchiCAD, the default Work Environment Profile is set to Standard. These predefined profiles are designed to get you up and running with ArchiCAD 13. Naturally, you or your office CAD manager can reconfigure these profiles as needed. The Standard profile is designed to reflect the workflow in common architectural practice. Menus, commands, palette layout, and toolbar visibility are optimized to give you easy access to the tools and functions you need to build up your Virtual Building. The Standard toolbar and Mini-Navigator toolbar (for easy switching between windows) are visible, and your Toolbox displays each tool individually. The Layouting Profile places commonly used layouting and publishing commands within reach. The Layout Book menu now appears, the Toolbox is minimized to show only the Documenting tools, and the Navigator/Organizer is located at the left edge of the screen. Two specialized toolbars are now visible: Layouts & Drawings, and Standard for Layouting. The Visualization Profile is useful when you reach the stage of setting up and creating output from 3D images, such as Fly-Throughs and PhotoRenderings. The 3D Visualization menu now appears, so that all commands related to the 3D window, 3D navigation and 3D output are collected in a single menu. The 3D Visualization toolbar provides quick access to many of these same commands. In this profile, the Navigator is not displayed, and the Toolbox displays only Selection and Design tools.
242
Configuration
How to Use Your Personalized Work Environment Settings on Another Computer

To make your schemes or profiles available to a network or other users, or to transfer them to another computer, you can export them. Use Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles to export and import profiles to/from folders of your choice. In this operation, profiles are .xml files which refer to the schemes (also .xml files) contained within them. For details, see Profile Options. Use Options > Work Environment > Scheme Options to export and import schemes (as .xml files) to/from folders of your choice.
243
Configuration
244
Interaction
Interaction
Navigation Origins Elevation Selection On-Screen Input Aids Editing Elements Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings
245
Interaction
Navigation
How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows Zoom Oriented View Fit in Window Pan Navigator Preview (2D) Navigation in the 3D Window Navigator Palette
246
Interaction
How to Navigate Among ArchiCAD Windows

1) The easiest way to switch among the different windows is to use the maps in the Navigator Palette. Just double-click on the item you want to see. 2) The predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar (available from Windows > Toolbars) is another way to quickly switch windows
3) Or use the View > Navigate hierarchical menu.
Navigation Shortcuts
You can also use keyboard shortcuts to navigate among windows: go to Floor Plan Window: F2 go to 3D Window: F3 go to 3D Window (Perspective): Shift+F3 go to 3D Window (Axonometry): Ctrl+F3 go to last Section window: F6 go to last opened Layout: F7
247
Interaction
Zoom
In 2D and 3D windows, you can zoom in on details, or use zoom out to display more elements. The Zoom control on the bottom scrollbar gives you feedback on the current zoom.
To return to Actual Size (zoom at 100%), double-click the Zoom button. When you save the current contents of the screen as a view, the current Zoom value is also saved among the View Settings. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) There are several techniques you can use to achieve Zoom effects:
Zoom with Mouse Scroll Button

If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, use it for zooming in on (or out of) the area where the cursor is located. If you dont have a scrolling button on your mouse, you can still emulate its operation: First click the Scroll-Zoom button on the bottom scrollbar.
Then then click anywhere in the window; move the cursor upwards to zoom in, downwards to zoom out. The greater distance you move the cursor, the greater the scope of the zoom. Click again to activate the zoom.
Zoom with Keyboard

You can use numeric keypad shortcuts to achieve the scrolling zoom effect: press the + key for zooming in and the - key for zooming out.
Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons

Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window to activate the corresponding shortcut.
Draw a rectangle around the detail you want to enlarge with the Zoom In cursor. The area enclosed by the rectangle is enlarged to the size of the current window. With Zoom Out, the entire current view is squeezed into the rectangle that you have defined. The operation is optimized so that no distortion will result. To rotate the current view in addition to zooming in/out, click Ctrl + Zoom In or Ctrl + Zoom Out. Draw a rotated rectangle at the desired angle. When you click again to complete the rectangle, the program will not only zoom in/out according to this rectangle, but will also rotate the view to reflect the rectangles rotation angle. See also Oriented View. Note: To double the current magnification or reduction level, double-click the appropriate icon. 248
Interaction
Zoom with Menu Commands

Choose View > Zoom > Zoom In or Zoom Out. Note: If these commands are not available in the View menu, you can use Options > Work Environment > Menus to add them. For more information, see Customizing Menus. Zoom to Selection: Use this command (View > Zoom > Zoom to Selection) to move in on only selected elements. Previous/Next Zoom: If you wish to move one step back from your previous Zoom In, Zoom Out, Pan, Home Zoom or Fit in Window operations, you can click its shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window.
Up to 20 previous steps are stored. To go to the next zoom, use the Next Zoom command or shortcut button.
Home Zoom
If you need to return frequently to a part of your project, you can define it as the home zoom by choosing the View > Zoom > Set Home Zoom command. You can return easily to this view by choosing the View > Zoom > Home Zoom command. This home zoom is saved with the project.
Predefined Zooms
Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose one of the predefined zoom values.
The pop-up menu commands allows you to save, access, rename and delete predefined zooms. Home Zooms are not included in the list of saved zooms.
249
Interaction
Save Zooms
You can save different zooms for future use: Click the arrow pop-up button in the bottom scrollbar of the active window, then choose Save Current Zoom.
In the appearing dialog box, give the saved zoom a name.
By default, this zoom will be available only for the current story (here, 1. Story). To have this zoom available in all stories, click Across All Stories. (A views saved Zoom value includes the Pan and the Oriented View, if any.) Custom-saved zooms you name here can be applied to any view, from the Zooming pop-up list in the View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.
250
Interaction
Oriented View
Use the Oriented View function to rotate the entire view on your screen to a preferred position. For example, if you are working on the wing of a building that is at an angle to another one, you can orient the view so that the wing you are working on lines up with your screen, rather than at an angle.
Orienting the view does not rotate the project as such; the project coordinates remain unchanged. It just turns the window contents so that they are displayed at a more convenient angle on your monitor. (You get the same effect if you rotate your monitor.)
How to Rotate Window Contents Zoom and Rotate Grids in Oriented View Text in Oriented View Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position
251
Interaction
How to Rotate Window Contents

1) Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen.
2) On screen, draw a rotation vector with two clicks.
3) Drag your mouse to rotate the screen contents to the desired angle, or enter a numerical rotation angle into the Tracker. Click a third time to complete.
4) The degree of rotation is shown on the Reset Orientation button at the bottom of your screen, next to the Rotate Orientation control. To reset the rotation degree to zero, click this button.
The pair of arrows in the lower left corner also indicates the rotation.
252
Interaction
In the Navigator Preview, only the frame representing the monitor rotates; the preview itself does not.
Oriented View is available in the Floor Plan, Worksheet, Detail and 3D Document windows. The rotated orientation value is saved as part of the Zoom value of every saved view, and on the published output created from that view.
Zoom and Rotate

To rotate the view and zoom in or out at the same time: 1) Click the Zoom In or Zoom Out button from the bottom of your screen. (See also Zoom In/Out with Scrollbar Buttons.) 2) Press Ctrl. 3) Using three clicks, draw the zooming rectangle on screen at the desired angle.
253
Interaction
When you complete the rectangle with the third click, the view will zoom in/out and be rotated simultaneously.
Grids in Oriented View

The on-screen Grid, if it was orthogonal to begin with, remains orthogonal after the rotation. If it was a rotated Grid, that Grid will rotate along with the view, its project coordinates remaining unchanged after the rotation.
Text in Oriented View Text blocks

The way a Text Block behaves in a rotated view is set in Text Tool Settings in the Text Block Formatting Panel (pictured below) or with the corresponding controls in the Text Tool Info Box.
If you place a Text Block at an angle, the Fixed Angle option means that the Text Block will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. The Always Readable option (on by default) means that the program will automatically flip the text to make it legible on screen (as opposed to upside down) regardless of the views orientation. This automatic flip occurs if the text is at an angle between 90 and 270 degrees.
254
Interaction
Text Labels
The Label Settings Text Panel (for a Text-type Label) also contains the Fixed Angle option:
This means that the Label will retain this angle relative to the screen even if the view is rotated. If Fixed Angle is checked in the Text Label panel, you can also check Optimize Position. This means that ArchiCAD will reposition the Labels arrow if it ends up in an awkward position after the view is rotated: Not optimized Label, after rotation:
Optimized Label, after rotation:
255
Interaction
Dimension text
Dimension text is automatically adjusted to ensure that it will remain easily legible regardless of the views orientation. (If you set a custom angle for dimension text, however, that angle will prevail.) For dimensions whose text is set to Horizontal in Dimension Tool Settings, the text will remain horizontal with respect to the screen regardless of any rotation of the view.
Fill Area text

Will always be displayed horizontally on screen, regardless of the views orientation. (See Adding Area Text to a Fill.) (If you set a custom angle for fill area text, however, that angle will prevail.)
Text of GDL Objects in Rotated View

GDL Object-type elements may contain text that is affected by a rotated orientation. Many such objects have new parameters. For example, options for Text Orientation on Symbol include: Readable: As the view is rotated, the object text rotates too, but is flipped as necessary to ensure text readability. Align with Symbol: Text rotates together with the symbol, with no other adjustments. Always Horizontal: Text remains fixed in a horizontal position on screen, regardless of the views orientation.
Marker Text in Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet

The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Always Horizontal and Always Vertical values will display text horizontally/vertically on screen, regardless of the views orientation. Align with Section Line will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, and will flip the text if necessary to ensure readability. 256
Interaction
Align with Section Line - No Flip will keep the text lined up with the Section line, following any view rotation, without any flip adjustment for readability.
Text of Door/Window Markers

The relevant parameter is entitled Marker Text Rotation and may include the following values, depending on the marker type: Standard: Text is always parallel to the wall, and is automatically readable (that is, flipped if necessary after rotation of the view). Align with Marker Line: Text remains fixed in line with the marker line and is automatically readable. Horizontal/Vertical Width/Height/Sill/Fire Rating/Acoustic Rating texts are automatically readable.
Rotate Window Contents by Selected Edge to Orthogonal Position

1) Click the Rotate Orientation icon at the bottom of your screen. 2) Move the cursor to the edge of a project element, such as a slab, which you want to rotate to an orthogonal (horizontal or vertical) position on the screen. (The cursor will change to a Mercedes to indicate you have located the edge.) 3) Ctrl+click on the edge. 4) The window contents will rotate so that the clicked edge moves to either at 0 degrees or 90 degrees, whichever is nearer.
257
Interaction
Fit in Window
You can resize your view to accommodate all elements placed in the project. This provides a good way to check whether you have placed something in the far corners of your window by mistake during numeric input or a multiply operation. Choose the View > Fit in Window command or click the corresponding shortcut button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window.
If the current view has been rotated (see Oriented View), the rotation remains intact. Another shortcut: Double-click the middle mouse button to Fit in Window. If you wish, you can save a windows Fit in Window setting as part of any views View Settings: choose Fit in Window from the Zooming pop-up in the View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel.
Listing windows have an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.
258
Interaction
Pan
Use the Pan function to scan the project as a whole, usually to see elements that do not currently fit on the screen. Enable the Pan function, then move the cursor to move the view around in the window along with the cursor. With Pan Button: Click the Pan button on the bottom scrollbar of the active window. Click into the active window and pan it by moving the Hand cursor with your mouse. The whole on-screen area will move, while the current zoom level is preserved.
If you have a three-button mouse, you can use it for panning by pressing down the middle button while moving the Hand cursor in the window. With Mouse Scrolling Button: If you have a mouse with a scrolling button, you can use it for panning by pressing the scrolling button continuously while moving the Hand cursor over the window. With the numeric keypad (Windows only): Press the following keys: 4 (left), 2 (downwards), 6 (right), 8 (upwards). (Make sure Numbers Lock is off.) The up/down and left/ right keys achieve the same result. With the Navigator Preview Palette See Navigator Preview (2D).
What to Do if Panning Produces Jumpy Screen Effect

When panning a large and complex project in a 2D window, you may experience fits and starts in model display. To remedy this, try switching among the choices in Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options: Model Display in 2D Navigation.
259
Interaction
Navigator Preview (2D)

The Navigator Preview Palette makes it easier to locate and zoom in on certain parts of your project, especially when working on larger projects. For details on these controls, see The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls. To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.
For 2D Windows, the Preview Palette displays a miniature copy of the entire contents of the current view. The frame inside the Preview Palette represents the active window at its current zoom. Use this frame to zoom and pan within the Preview Palette; this has the same effect as zooming and panning in the active window, while simultaneously giving you an overview of the entire window contents. If the current zoom of the active window includes a rotated orientation (see Oriented View), the preview shows the project in its original view, but the frame is rotated to match the angle of orientation. (The two heavier arrows of the frame indicate the bottom left corner of the screen.)
When previewing a 2D window in the Navigator Preview, you have the following zooming and panning options: To change the location of the frame, drag its enclosed area with the Hand Cursor (this lets you pan in the active window).
260
Interaction
To change the size of the frame, drag its sides or corners (this has the effect of zooming in and out within the active window).
At the bottom of the palette, the plus and minus buttons and a sliding switch are additional zooming techniques: they allow you to zoom the current view in and out. Clicking the buttons increases the zoom level in about 10% increments.
At the bottom right corner, a pop-up menu contains three options for controlling the zooming techniques of the Navigator Preview. The default is Real-time zoom: as you move the cursor, the zoom is adjusted. Auto zoom will adjust the zoom after you finish moving the cursor. Double-click to zoom means you must double-click or press the Go button at top right to execute the chosen zoom.
Use Redraw Preview if you have made changes in the current window that are not yet reflected in the Navigator Preview.
261
Interaction
Navigation in the 3D Window

Note: For general information on accessing the 3D window, and how to set up Perspective and Axonometric (Parallel) views, see 3D Window. The 3D window can be navigated using most of the basic 2D navigation methods. The keyboard, mouse scroll button, Fit in Window, Pan and command-based Zoom techniques work the same way as in 2D. The 3D window also contains unique navigation possibilities for exploring the model and orbiting around in it. These are described in the following sections.
Accessing 3D Navigation Commands Explore Model (3D Navigation) Orbit (3D Navigation) Navigator Preview (3D) 3Dconnexion Enabler
262
Interaction
Accessing 3D Navigation Commands

Special commands for navigating in 3D are displayed in the 3D Visualization and the Simple 3D toolbar, and can be assigned shortcuts. Choose Window > Toolbars > 3D Visualization or Simple 3D to display these toolbars as needed. If the 3D window is active, its bottom scrollbar contains icon shortcuts to 3D Navigation commands.
Note: The 3D Navigation controls familiar from earlier versions of ArchiCAD can be accessed by choosing Window > Toolbars > Classic 3D Navigation toolbar. The 3D Navigation commands are available only in the 3D Window.
263
Interaction
Explore Model (3D Navigation)

In Perspective views only, you can explore the model either by choosing the View > Explore Model or access the same command from a toolbar, or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.
In Explore mode, use the mouse and the arrow keys of the keyboard for navigation (as when playing a video game on a PC.) When in this mode, you cannot edit the model or use any of the commands. The Fly option and speed slider also appear at the bottom of the screen as long as you are in Explore mode.
To exit Explore mode, click with the left mouse button or use the Esc key. Note: Exploring the model is optimized for the OpenGL engine. When choosing the Explore Model command, an informational dialog box opens to give you a visual prompt on what you can expect from your various actions with the mouse and the keyboard. Note: If you dont need to see this information every time you enter Explore mode, check Do not show this information next time at the bottom of the dialog box. To enable this or any other dialog box you have marked as do not show, use the Enable all informational messages command at Options > Work Environment (bottom of menu).
264
Interaction
Rotate camera in Explore mode

Moving the mouse around will rotate the camera in the directions indicated by the arrows next to the camera on the picture above.
Walk forward and backward in Explore mode

Pressing the arrow keys, or the W-A-S-D keys, will walk you forward/backward and laterally in the directions indicated by the arrows in the picture above. Note that the Up arrow brings the model closer to you while the Down arrow moves it further away.
Fly around the model

In Explore mode, click F for Fly mode. Again, use the arrow keys or the W-A-S-D keys to move around, but this time the Fly mode combines the lifting effect with the rotating and lateral movements to simulate a walking movement on a horizontal plane or in space.
Lift the model up and down

Use the PageUp (shortcut: spacebar) and PageDown (shortcut: C) keys to simulate a lifting effect.
Speed Up/Slow Down in Explore Mode

Click the Plus and Minus keys on your numeric keypad to change the speed in which you explore the model. For a temporary speed increase, press Shift, then release it to return to your basic speed.
265
Interaction
Orbit (3D Navigation)

For Orbit mode, choose View > Orbit, or access the same command from a toolbar or from the bottom scrollbar of the 3D window.
Once you enter Orbit mode, press the left button and drag the mouse to turn the model around its centerpoint (axonometry) or target point (perspective). If you are in Orbit mode, you cannot edit the model. Click ESC to exit Orbit mode and return to editing mode.
Temporary Orbit effects while in editing mode

While in editing mode (not in Orbit mode), you can temporarily simulate Orbit mode by pressing Shift together with the mouse scrolling button to orbit the model. Release the keys to stop orbiting. This type of temporary Orbit requires the model to be redrawn and can result in slowed-down navigation.
266
Interaction
Navigator Preview (3D)

To display the Navigator Preview Palette, click the shortcut button in the bottom scrollbar of any window; or use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview.
This palette allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projections, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric) The options of the Navigator Preview depend on whether you are looking at a Perspective or Axonometric view. For Perspective 3D views, edit the camera and target positions directly by clicking them in the Preview window and dragging them to a new location. Note: Make sure that Show from Top is chosen from the pop-up menu in the Previews lower right corner.
In the image below, we turn the building around simply by clicking and dragging the camera represented in the Navigator Preview Window.
267
Interaction
If you choose Show from Side view from the Preview options pop-up, you can easily re-set the camera height relative to the stories of the project: just click in the Navigator Preview and move the camera up or down.
Or you can change the view cone, using the sliding switch or the small icons at its ends, in 5 degree increments For Axonometric (parallel) projections, the 3D Navigator Preview has two pop-up menus at the bottom right. From the left button, choose one of the 12 predefined projections to quickly switch to that view.
(These are the same predefined axonometries available from 3D Projection Settings).
268
Interaction
To customize the projection, use the right-side pop-up button, then move the small camera icon inside the Preview window to set up a custom view.
For detailed information, see The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls and 3D Projections.
269
Interaction
3Dconnexion Enabler
The 3D connexion Enabler is an add-on functionality that allows you to use your 3Dconnexion device for navigating in ArchiCADs 3D window. If you are using a 3Dconnexion device, use one of the two options at View > 3D Navigation Extras > 3Dconnexion: Camera mode: Move the device to navigate in the model by moving the camera position. Object mode: As you move the device, the model is moved accordingly. The camera viewpoint is fixed, while the model moves.
270
Interaction
Navigator Palette
About the Navigator Palette Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows Project Workflow in the Navigator Organizer Palette Navigator Color Codes Navigator Project Map Navigator View Map Setting up a View Saving a View Modifying View Settings Quick Options Palette
271
Interaction
Navigator Layout Book Navigator Publisher External Projects in the Navigator
272
Interaction
About the Navigator Palette

The Navigator Palette (Navigator) is a tree structure that lets you build up the entire logical structure of your project and navigate within it. You can create folders, then copy, drag and drop views and other project items depending on their particular purpose. The Navigator also lets you access views and layouts from external ArchiCAD files and place them into the Layout Book of your current project. Finally, you can configure the outputs for publication using Navigator controls. The Navigator displays the whole projects tree structure in four different maps. The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. The View Map includes all the predefined and custom-created Views of the Project File. The Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project. The Publisher Sets map is a tree structure in which you define sets of views for various output purposes (printing, plotting, saving to a local disk or uploading to the internet or an intranet). To switch from one map to another, click among the four buttons at the top of the Navigator. The palettes title bar indicates which map is currently displayed.
The Navigator item currently open in the window is shown in bold. The Navigator has a special double-tree view, called the Organizer, which makes it easier to move items from one map to the other. Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable.
Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls Organizer Palette
273
Interaction
How to Display the Navigator

The Navigator is displayed by default.
If it is hidden, choose Window > Palettes > Navigator, or click the Navigator icon from the horizontal scrollbar at the bottom of the ArchiCAD screen.
274
Interaction
Using the Navigator to Open Project Windows

Double-click the desired item from any map of the Navigator. By default, ArchiCAD will open the item in existing windows, replacing the previous view in that window. To open a new view in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.
If you would rather open a new window by default each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options.
275
Interaction
Project Workflow in the Navigator

A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. Viewpoints are listed in the Navigator Project Map of Navigator Palette. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator View Map. The Navigator Layout Book contains the layouts defined for the entire architectural project, and can contain Drawings originating from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. Use the Navigator Publisher to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect, the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout). The following diagram summarizes the project workflow as reflected in the maps of the Navigator:
276
Interaction
Organizer Palette
The Organizer is related to the Navigator Palette; it is opened from the Navigator. It houses essentially the same controls, but has a double-tree structure to make it easier to move and copy views and files from one map to the other.
Display Organizer
To display the Organizer, choose Window > Palettes > Organizer, or the Show Organizer command from the Project Chooser at top left of the Navigator.
Both Navigator and Organizer Palettes have an Auto-Hide feature: if you turn this on, you can use the Navigator/Organizer as usual, but once you click outside the palette, it will disappear. The Auto-Hide command is found in the Navigator/Organizer palettes context menu (right-click in the gray area at the top of either palette.)
Organizer Modes
Click the desired map icons on both sides of the Organizer to bring up one of the three modes of the Organizer: The Organizers title bar shows the name of the right-side tree structure.
277
Interaction
View Editor mode (Project Map on the left, View Map on the right): Save views by selecting a viewpoint from the Project Map and clicking Save view , or drag and drop it into the View Map.
Layout Editor mode (Layout Map on the right): Place Drawings onto Layouts in the Layout Book by selecting a view from the Project or View Map (on the left), then clicking Place Drawing, or drag and drop it onto a Layout (on the right). Publisher (Publisher on the Right): To add a view or layout (on the left) to a Publisher set (on the right), select a view or layout and click Add Shortcut. If you select a Subset in the Layout Map, the Add Shortcut button will create a folder in the Publisher Set which corresponds to that Subset: if you change or add items in the original subset, the Publisher Set folder will reflect these changes automatically. However, if you drag and drop a Subset into the Publishing Set, a folder is created, but this folder is not linked to any subsequent modifications to the Subset. Note that the Project Map is available only on the left side. Certain combinations are not possible, and ArchiCAD will always adjust to one of the three possible Organizer modes. (For example, if you choose the Publisher on the right, then the left side will switch from Project Map to View Map, because you cannot place items directly from the Project Map to the Publisher.) It is possible to have the same map open on both sides of the Organizer; this enables you to make copies of items within a single map. When you click any item in the Navigator/Organizer, its preview is displayed in the Navigator Preview palette (if applicable). Double-clicking the item activates the corresponding window.
Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls

278
Interaction
Navigator Color Codes

A color-coding system makes it easier for you to identify items in the Navigator palette. Items of the Navigator Project Map are colored orange.
Items of the Navigator View Map are colored yellow.
Items of the Navigator Layout Book are colored white.
See also Navigator Icons in the Teamwork Section of ArchiCAD Help.
279
Interaction
Navigator Project Map

The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. See also Project Map Controls.
. A Viewpoint represents a window onto a particular part of your project, but its settings have not been saved yet. The Project Map Viewpoints are: Stories Sections Elevations Interior Elevations Worksheets Detail Drawings 3D Documents 3D Schedules Project Indexes Lists 280
Interaction
Info Help Double-click a viewpoint to open it in the project. Once you save a viewpoints settings, it becomes a view (listed in your View Map) and can then be placed onto a Layout for editing. At the top level of the project map hierarchy, the house icon represents the project and is followed by the project name. (The project gets a name once you save the project file, but if you assign a Project Name in File > Info > Project Info, that is the name that will be shown in the Navigator.) Below, folders store the available viewpoints of the project (one folder named for each type of viewpoint). Project Map folders are a fixed list of item types; you cannot add or delete folders here. You can display the contents of each folder by clicking the plus sign in front of it (in Windows) or the little arrow (in MacOS). In Windows, double-clicking the folder icon or name also opens the folder. The Stories folder contains all the Stories defined for the project. When you first start a new project, your Stories folder contains three items, whose names will vary depending on the local version of ArchiCAD being used. The Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations, Worksheets, Details and 3D Documents folders contain the list of corresponding windows. If there is no plus sign in front of a folder, this means that no such viewpoint has been created yet in the project. See ArchiCAD Model Views for information about each of these viewpoint types. The 3D folder contains five types of elements for the various projection and camera types. By default, two items are present on starting the project: Generic Perspective and Generic Axonometry. When you place Cameras in the Project, their names appear in the 3D folder of the Project Map, grouped under the Path. The Path can be renamed in the Camera/VR Tool Settings, and more Paths can be added. All these additions and changes are updated in the Project Map. Creating a VR Object-type Camera automatically adds its name to the Project Map. All the created VR Object type Cameras are listed one by one. Creating a new VR Scene automatically adds its name to the Project Map. Placed panoramic Cameras names appear below the name of the VR Scene, and more Scenes can be added. All changes are updated in the Project Map. The Schedules folder contains the interactive schedules (Elements and Components) created as part of the project documentation. The Interactive Schedule serves as a basis for ordering doors, windows, and other construction elements from the manufacturers and for checking the consistency of elements based on a set of criteria. The Project Indexes folder contains three sets of table of contents type items. Project indexes include view list indexes, layout sheet indexes and drawing list indexes based on a set of filtering criteria. The Lists folder contains three items: Elements, Components and Zones. When opened, all three show the list of predefined list schemes available for the project. All these items also appear in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. For more information, see Calculation.
281
Interaction
The Info folder contains two items: Project Notes and Report Window. They represent the corresponding windows also available from the Window menu. If you click an item with the right mouse button, a set of relevant commands appear in a context menu (for example story-related commands for Stories or 3D-related commands for Perspectives).
Double-clicking any of the items of the Project Map activates the corresponding window and shows its contents with its last used zoom and display settings. (These zoom and display settings can be checked in the Quick Options Palette.) Remember, a viewpoints settings change along with edits in the window. When you have set up the viewpoint settings as desired, you can save it as a view. You can make this process automatic - saving Project Map viewpoints as views with specific settings - using the Clone Folder function.
282
Interaction
Navigator View Map

With the second button in the Navigator Palette, you will display the Navigator View Map: the list of saved Views available in your project file.
See also View Map Controls. A View is a stored version of a Viewpoint; each view is defined by its adjustable View Settings that you configure for a particular purpose as you construct your Virtual Building. Every saved view is listed in the Navigator Palettes View Map. The Properties section at the bottom of the View Map provides feedback on the settings of the selected view. To modify view settings, select the view and click Settings at the bottom of the View Map to access the View Settings Dialog Box. Views can be created within the active project or imported from other ArchiCAD projects. For more information, see Saving a View. In the View Map, several view folders are predefined; you can rename or delete these, and add new folders as needed. To gain an overview of View Map items or to sort them by criteria, use the Project Indexes function. Even if the project content changes, the settings of your saved views - will remain unchanged unless you expressly modify them. Note: You can create a dynamic connection between project viewpoints and views if you clone a folder.
283
Interaction
Clone a Folder in the View Map

Cloning a folder means that you recreate a Project Map folder inside the View Map. Consequently, for each new viewpoint you create in the Project Map, a counterpart new view will be created in its cloned folder in the View Map. For example, if you have cloned the Project Maps Stories folder, then the cloned folder in View Map will always show all Stories of the Project, even new ones added after the creation of the clone folder. Moreover, every view in the cloned folder will have identical View Settings - the settings you define when creating the cloned folder.
How to Clone a Folder

Click the Clone Folder at the bottom of the View Map. This opens the Clone a Folder dialog box.
The top of the Clone a Folder dialog box lists all the folders of the Project Map; choose the folder whose clone you want to create in the View Map. 284
Interaction
The rest of the controls are identical to those of the View Settings Dialog Box. The settings you define here will be applied to every view in the cloned folder. Click Clone to create the cloned folder. The resulting cloned folder in the View Map will be identified by a special clone folder icon, rather than a regular folder icon.
Another way to create a clone is to drag the folder from the Project Map to the View Map, using Ctrl+Shift (Windows) or Opt+Cmd (MacOS) within the Organizers View Editor. The following two diagrams illustrate the difference between views in regular folders in the View Map (which are not affected by changes in the Project Map structure), and views in cloned folders in the View Map (whose contents change in tandem with changes in the Project Map viewpoints.)
Views in regular View Map folders:
285
Interaction
Views in Cloned View Map folders:
286
Interaction
Setting up a View
To set up a new view, open the project in the appropriate window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/ IE, 3D Document, Detail, Worksheet, 3D, Interactive Schedule, or List) and adjust any or all of its settings as needed. For example, you can change the scale and layer combination to fit your output needs, in one of the following ways: in the active window, using the usual editing commands changing the options of the Quick Options Palette, which always show the settings of the currently active (frontmost) window in the Organizer, using the View Settings and Storing Options at the bottom of the Project Map
View Settings
The View Settings stored with each view are accessible in the View Settings Dialog Box.
Once you save the view, it will store the combination of the following settings: Layer Combinations Scale Partial Structure Display Pen Set Model View Options Combinations Floor Plan Cut Plane See Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting).
287
Interaction
Dimensions See Dimensioning. Zooming (including the Zoom value, the Pan, and the Oriented View) Image Settings (for 3D Window views): these include 3D projection settings (including zooming), filtered elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D Cutaway and PhotoRendering Settings. Existing selection (3D only)
288
Interaction
Saving a View
To save the view, do one of the following: Use the Organizer to drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the View Map. The current settings are saved as view settings. Click the Save Current view button at the bottom of the View Map. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.)
Select the Viewpoint in the Project map, then right-click and execute the Save Current View command. (The View Settings Dialog Box appears, allowing you to modify the settings before saving the view.) Drag and drop the viewpoint from the Project Map into the Layout Book. The current settings are saved as view settings.The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book. Use the Save View and Place on Layout command, available in the active windows context menu, the items context menu in the Navigator/Organizer, and as a command in the Document menu. The current settings are saved as view settings. The new view will appear both in the View Map and in the Layout Book.
289
Interaction
Modifying View Settings

To change the settings of an already saved view, do one of the following: Open the View Settings Dialog Box and make any changes needed Click Get Current Windows Settings to overwrite the original view settings with the current viewpoint settings (i.e. those of the active window).
If you have opened a saved view from the View Map, and if, while working in the active window, you have changed any of its View Settings, a triangular yellow warning icon will appear at the bottom of the Navigator, next to the changed settings, alerting you that The settings in the frontmost window no longer correspond to the original view settings. For example, the image below indicates that the current windows zoom and layer settings are different than in the saved view.
If you wish, you can save the current window settings as a view: Click Settings to open the View Settings dialog box, then click Get Current Windows Settings.
290
Interaction
Quick Options Palette

The Quick Options Palette is displayed by default at the lower right corner of your screen. (You may have to drag the palette to a new position or stretch it to see all six of the Quick Options.) To hide/show this palette, use Windows > Palettes > Quick Options Palette or the corresponding button in the bottom scrollbar of the model window.
The Quick Options Palette displays the current settings of the active (frontmost) window. The current window settings as reflected in Quick Options are the currently effective project settings, but they have not necessarily been saved as part of any view; they merely provide feedback on what you are currently seeing in the active window, and offer a quick way to apply changes among these settings.
. Use these six sets of pop-up controls as a quick way to change the settings of the project or of the currently active (frontmost) window: Layer Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Layer Combination to the whole project. See Layer Combinations. Scale: Changing this setting applies a new scale to the currently active window. See Scale. Partial Structure Display: Changing this setting applies a new Partial Structure Setting to the currently active window. Pen Set: Changing this setting applies a new pen set to the model. (Not available in the Layout window.) See Pens & Colors. Model View Options Combination: Changing this setting applies a new Model View Options Combination to the whole project. See Model View Options Combinations. Dimensions: Changing this setting applies a new Dimensioning standard to the whole project. (Not available in the 3D window) See Dimensions Preferences.
291
Interaction
Navigator Layout Book

The Layout Book is a tree view of the Layouts defined for the entire project, plus the Drawings on the Layouts. Drawings in the Layout Book can originate from multiple ArchiCAD project files and other source files. A view placed on a Layout is called a Drawing. You can view the Layout Book in two formats: Tree by Subset or Tree by Master. Click the popup button above the tree to choose a format.
Tree by Subset (the default display) lists layouts according to the Subsets you have created - a freely defined logic. (The primary function of Subsets is to enable you to assign a customized numbering system. ) Tree by Master lists the Layouts in categories according to their Master Layouts. At the bottom of the Layout Book, the Properties section displays the settings of the current Layout, some of which are editable directly. See also The Layout Book and Layout Book Controls. To access the Layout Settings of the selected Layout, or the Drawing Settings of the selected Drawing, click the Settings button at the bottom of the Layout Book. Drawings are accompanied by icons that correspond to their file type. Views imported from ArchiCAD project files retain their icons (for example, floor plan or detail) but are shown in white.
292
Interaction
Navigator Publisher
Use this map of the Navigator/Organizer to set up the items you want to publish, and set the publishing method and format. Access the Publisher in one of these locations: the Navigator Palette the Organizer Palette the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command.
Publisher Function Publisher Controls
293
Interaction
External Projects in the Navigator

By default, the Navigator and the left side of the Organizer display the tree structure of the active ArchiCAD project which you are working on. You may wish to place views or Layouts from another ArchiCAD project into the Layout Book of your active project. To do this, you will use the Project Chooser , accessed by clicking the icon at the top left corner of the Navigator or Organizer.
To place Layouts or views from an external ArchiCAD projects onto a Layout of the active project, do the following: Open the Organizer of the active project. Click the Browse Project or Browse Teamwork Project command in the Project Chooser.
Choose an ArchiCAD project whose content you want to use in the active project. Note: If you choose Browse Teamwork Project, you will be prompted to choose a server on which the Teamwork Project is found. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) Click Open. The external project is now displayed on the left side in the Organizer tree structure, and the active projects Layout Book on the right:
294
Interaction
The external project name is now also listed in the Project Chooser. (If this project is also open, it is shown as Running.)
Drag the desired item into the Layout Book of the active project, shown on the right side of the Organizer. Once your active projects Layout Book contains views/layouts from an external project, the Project Chooser will list this project as linked. Note: You can access external projects the same way by using the Project Chooser with just the Navigator open (without the Organizer). In this case, once you have browsed the desired external project and see its tree structure, add any of its views or layouts to the active project by dragging and dropping it directly onto the Layout in the active window. To open the external project in a separate ArchiCAD, double-click any of its items in the Navigator.
295
Interaction
Origins
About Origins in ArchiCAD Create a User Origin User Origin in the 3D Window
296
Interaction
About Origins in ArchiCAD

In ArchiCAD, as in any coordinate system, all measurements are made in reference to an origin. The location of the origin is always interpreted as (0, 0). ArchiCAD defines three coordinate system origins:
Project Origin
1) The Project Origin is a constant location which remains fixed for the life of your Project. The Project Origin of the coordinate system, marked with an X, is close to the lower left corner of the Floor Plan window, when using the default view of the default template. (The Coordinates Palette shows the coordinates as (0, 0).
User Origin
2) The User Origin is created manually by the user to act as a temporary aid to drafting and measurements. By default, the User Origin is located at the Project Origin. However, the User Origin can be moved to any location, allowing you to reset the zero point to any location. This is often helpful when you need to draw elements with respect to existing walls, slabs or other components. For details, see Create a User Origin.
Edit Origin
3) The Edit Origin is also temporary; it appears only during drafting and editing operations and is used to display the distance and angle of a rubberband line from the starting point of a drawing operation. In Floor Plan and other 2D views, the origin is always marked by a bold X. In 3D Views, the origins and their X, Y and Z axes are displayed with bold black lines. The lines are 1 meter (approx. 3 ft.) long.
Note: When a User or Edit Origin appears, the Project Origin remains visible in the same color as the construction grid.
297
Interaction
Create a User Origin

There are two ways to create a User Origin: At any construction node by using the keyboard. Hold down both the Alt and Shift keys (MacOS: Opt + Shift) and move the cursor to the construction node where you want the origin located.
At any location by using the User Origin button from the Standard toolbar (or the Coordinates palette, if it is displayed). This method allows you to move the origin where nothing is currently drawn.
Click the User Origin button, then click at any point in the window. The origin is instantly relocated there. To return the User Origin to the Project Origin, double-click the User Origin button in the Standard Toolbar.
298
Interaction
User Origin in the 3D Window

When placing a new element in the 3D window, its elevation is measured from the User Origin. Use the Tool Settings dialog box to enter the desired elevation (or Base Height, in the case of a Wall) for placement.
To redefine the User Origins elevation in 3D: Activate the User Origin button (Standard toolbar) Then click on an element surface (this is only possible in Hidden Line or Shading mode). Creating the User Origin in blank space places it without changing its elevation. Note: If you are using Gravity, a newly placed element will gravitate onto the Roof/Slab/ Mesh below it - and it will be placed at that elevation.
299
Interaction
Elevation
About Elevation of Elements Elevation Values in the Tracker Reference Levels
300
Interaction
About Elevation of Elements

ArchiCAD offers several ways to determine the elevation of elements and to set the height at which new elements should be created. When placing a new element in a 2D model window, its elevation value can be set in the Tool Settings dialog box or the Info Box. This elevation can be measured in several ways: from the level of the current story (Story 0, in the image below):
from the elements Home Story. See Set Home Story. When placing a new element in the 3D window, its elevation, defined in the Tool Settings dialog box, can be measured either from the Home Story, or from the User Origin.
. For more information, see User Origin in the 3D Window. You can reset the User Origin to any elevation, then place a new element whose elevation is measured from this level. Note: The elevation of wall openings is strictly determined by the current values in the Door/ Window Tool Settings dialog boxes.
301
Interaction
Elevation Values in the Tracker

During input, refer to the Trackers Z field to check the elevation of the newly created element. You must activate Show Z in Tracker from the Trackers drop-down menu in the Standard toolbar. (This command is available during editing/input.).
If you are inputting a Wall, Column, Beam or Object using the Gravity function, the Z value will reflect the elevation of the underlying Slab/Roof/Mesh. If you switch the Show Tracker control to Always in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input, then the Trackers Z field will display elevation values even if input is not yet underway; just move the cursor to get feedback. The Tracker can display elevation values in one of three different forms depending on your choice: from the Project Zero from the current Story (or in 3D, the User Origin) or one of the two optional Reference Levels defined in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. To determine which reference level the Trackers elevation (Z) feedback should use: 1) Open the drop-down menu of the Tracker icon from the Standard toolbar. 2) Go to the Elevation Value Origin sub-menu.
3) Choose the desired reference level.
Elevating Elements Set Home Story by Elevation
302
Interaction
Reference Levels
You can define optional Reference Levels that will help you position elements when using the Tracker. (See Elevation Values in the Tracker.) Define Reference Levels at: Levels and Project North Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North).
303
Interaction
Selection
Selecting Elements Selection Feedback Element Information Highlight Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) The Intelligent Cursor Deselecting Elements Find and Select Elements Edit Selection Set Store and Access Selection Sets Marquee Area
304
Interaction
Selecting Elements
With the Arrow tool active: Point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. With any other tool active: Press Shift, then point at the desired element and click; or drag the mouse to draw a rectangle around the element you want to select. For more information on cursor shapes, see The Intelligent Cursor.
Select All Elements (in Window or in Marquee)

To select all elements on screen (either in the entire window or inside a previously defined Marquee area) with the Arrow or Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All command. Note: Select All will only select elements on the currently displayed story.
Select All Elements of a Single Type

To select all elements of a single type (for example, all Walls, or all Windows), activate the corresponding tool, then use the Ctrl+A shortcut. To learn about additional Arrow tool selection options, see Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon. To learn how to highlight an element before selecting it, see Element Information Highlight.
Select Elements Based on Multiple Criteria

Use the Find and Select Elements function to select elements defined by a wide variety of criteria.
Add/Remove Elements to/from Selection

You can add elements to the selection by shift-clicking them. Shift-clicking an already selected element will deselect it.
Quick Selection of Surface Areas Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/Polygon Selection of Overlapping Elements
305
Interaction
Quick Selection of Surface Areas

Quick Selection is the easiest way to select single elements which have a surface area (such as slabs and roofs). To activate Quick Selection as the default working mode, turn on the Quick Selection icon in the Arrow tools Info Box.
Now, to use Quick Selection, either the Arrow tool must be active, or you must press the Shift key. Move the cursor over any surface of the element you want to select. You will note that every time the cursor hovers over a selectable element, it will change shape. Click to select.
As shown in this image, you need only move the cursor over any part of the roof area; (if the Arrow tool is not active, press Shift to change to the Quick Select cursor), and click to select the roof.
Quick Selection works on all construction and text elements, fills and objects. To temporarily suspend the Quick Selection method while the icon is activated, press the Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active, or Shift-spacebar if any other tool is active. Quick Selection is active by default, but it can be deactivated in the Arrow tools Info Box by releasing the button. To use Quick Selection on a temporary basis (while the Quick Selection icon is deactivated in the Arrow Tools Info Box), press Spacebar with the Arrow Tool active (or Shift+Spacebar with any other Tool).
Click and Drag with Quick Selection

With the Arrow Tool and Quick Selection active, you can drag any element by clicking on it and holding down the button while you drag it, without having to use the Drag command. (With any other tool active, press Shift, then click and drag.) Note: All selected elements will be dragged simultaneously.
306
Interaction
Select Multiple Elements Using a Selection Rectangle/ Polygon

A useful method for selecting multiple elements is by drawing a selection polygon or rectangle around the items. These will be explicitly selected items, displaying selection dots. To use this method, activate the Arrow tool and a geometry method for the selection rectangle/polygon. Note: To select an area instead of explicitly selecting elements, use the Marquee tool as detailed at Marquee Area. Click on the screen and draw the selection rectangle/polygon.
This will select all the elements inside the area and deselect all other currently selected elements. If you keep the Shift key pressed, enclosed elements will be added to the selection while already selected ones will be subtracted from it. If you want to use a selection rectangle or polygon within a quick-selectable area, press the spacebar to temporarily suspend Quick Selection, then draw the selection polygon - keeping the spacebar pressed.
Selection Methods for Selection Rectangle/Polygon

The Arrow tools Info Box offers a number of selection methods when using a rectangular or polygonal shape.
307
Interaction
With the first (default) Selection Method any element that has at least one of its nodes, edges or curves in the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected.
With the second method, only elements that are entirely within the selection polygon or rectangle will become selected.
Area Shape Options for Selection Rectangle/Polygon

In the Arrow tools Info Box, you can choose among three selection area shapes. The options are Polygonal, Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular.
Double-clicking while drawing the polygon automatically closes it if at least two segments have already been defined manually. The double-clicked point becomes the last apex of the polygon.
308
Interaction
Selection of Overlapping Elements

When the nodes of several elements overlap at a single point, the Element Information Highlight indicates which element will be selected, and the Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags) shows its type and main properties. Note: The element information highlight pops up if the cursor is over any element (with Arrow Tool active). If any other tool is active, press Shift to see the element information highlight. To cycle the highlight among multiple elements which overlap or join, press Tab until the desired target element is highlighted. When you are satisfied that the appropriate element will be selected, click with the cursor.
309
Interaction
Selection Feedback
Selection Dots Selection Highlight
310
Interaction
Selection Dots
Explicitly selected elements display selection dots (or reference points). Selection dots represent the points of the element by which you can modify the element. Note: Elements selected by Marquee Area do not display selection dots. The location of the selection dots depends on the type and the geometry of the element.
In the case of GDL Object type elements, the number of selection dots depends on the number of hotspots defined in the object.
Selection Dot Variations

Single elements have small solid selection dots which are black by default.
To change the color of selection dots, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information.
311
Interaction
Editable selection dots are diamond-shaped and appear on objects whose parameters can be edited using an on-screen parameter palette.
For more information, see Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots. Grouped elements display larger circles, whose color is automatically assigned.
Elements that belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF are shown with hollow squares, whose color is automatically defined.
Locked elements selection dots appear in faded form.
Elements are locked (and display locked selection dots) in four cases: The element is placed on a locked Layer. The element has been explicitly locked with the Edit > Locking > Lock command. The elements belong to a Hotlinked Module or an XREF. In all cases, locked elements can be selected, but they cannot be edited. (You will be informed of this if you try to edit a locked element.) You can open the settings dialog boxes of these elements, but you cannot edit their parameters.
312
Interaction
Selection Highlight
Selected elements will be shown with a distinguishing highlight, in addition to selection dots. Selection highlight color (for both element surfaces and their contours) are configurable in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information, or you can turn off selection highlights altogether.
Even if you leave the Selection Highlight function on, you may want to disable it temporarily - for example, if you want to see the actual display colors of lines and fills. To suspend Selection highlight, use the Ctrl/Alt + spacebar shortcut. Note: Surface highlights in 3D are available only when using the OpenGL 3D engine.
313
Interaction
Element Information Highlight

ArchiCAD helps you identify elements by highlighting them before you select them (also known as element detection). Just place the cursor on an element node or edge, then press Shift. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the highlight appears on its own, without your having to press Shift.
When working in 3D, you will notice that the informational highlight acts on the entire outline of the element, that is, even hidden lines of its contour are shown. Grouped elements are highlighted individually. Element information highlights can be configured, or even turned off entirely, in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information dialog box. Element Information highlights also work when clicking to dimension an element, and with the Parameter transfer functions (Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters commands): the information highlight appears along with the eyedropper/syringe cursors right before you complete the parameter transfer. You do not need to press Shift to see the element detection highlight with Parameter Transfer. Note: These highlights (identifying related elements for Parameter Transfer and Dimensioning functions) will appear if the Highlight contours of related element(s) checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. For these highlights, you need not press Shift.
314
Interaction
Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags)

If you move the cursor over an element and press Shift, an element information pop-up appears. Note: If the Arrow tool is active, the element information pop-up appears on its own (along with the highlight), without your having to press Shift. The Element Information Pop-up displays the following information:
The elements type The elements basic properties (structural fill for Walls, name for Objects, thickness for Slabs, type for Lines, and so on) The elements elevation (for 3D shapes only) The elements Layer In 3D and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Story the element belongs to. In Teamwork, the reservation status of the element (e.g., Editable, Free for Reservation, Reserved by). Some additional information is displayed in the bottom section of the pop-up: If more than one element has a selectable part at the given location (node, edge, or surface if Quick Selection is active), the caption Multiple Elements (TAB) is shown in the Info Tag to inform you that you can cycle through selected and selectable elements by hitting the TAB key as many times as needed. See also Selection of Overlapping Elements. If the element is selected, the mention (Selected) appears in brackets. Element information highlights, including the time interval before it appears on screen, can be configured in the Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information dialog box.
315
Interaction
The Intelligent Cursor

The following section describes the various shapes of the intelligent cursor in different locations and situations in the project. The ArchiCAD cursor takes on the following shapes when drafting or editing elements, with any tool except the Arrow tool active: Crosshair in an empty area in the window.
Heavy Checkmark at a wall node on its reference line or a beam node at its reference axis.
Light Checkmark at any other node/hotspot of any element.
Heavy Mercedes on the reference line of a wall or the reference axis of a beam.
Light Mercedes at any other edge of any element.
Intersection at an intersection of edges.
316
Interaction
When you click to start drawing an element whose definition requires more than a single spot, the cursors shape changes to an empty pencil. It then changes its shape again depending on whether it encounters other elements. The possibilities are as follows: White pencil in an empty space or over any element where there is no hotspot or edge
Striped pencil with black top at a walls reference line or a beams reference axis.
Striped pencil at any other edge.
Filled pencil at a node on a walls reference line or on a beams reference axis.
Filled pencil with white top at any other node or hotspot.
Pencil point with intersection at an intersection of edges.
Pencil point with perpendicular sign at a perpendicular edge.
317
Interaction
Pencil point with tangent sign at a tangential edge.
When using the Arrow tool, the following shapes are available: Arrow at empty area in the window.
Quick Selection (Magnet) appears whenever you move the cursor onto a quick-selectable item.
318
Interaction
Arrow with Heavy Checkmark snaps to nodes on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.
Arrow with Light Checkmark snaps to Hotspots and nodes other than the ones on reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.
Arrow with Heavy Mercedes snaps to reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.
Arrow with Light Mercedes snaps to edges other than reference lines of Walls and reference axes of Beams.
Arrow with Intersection snaps to an intersection of edges.
Arrow with Perpendicular sign snaps perpendicularly to an edge or arc while dragging an element
Arrow with Tangent sign snaps tangentially to an arc while dragging an element.
Some cursor shapes only appear in special situations: Cloud indicates empty space over the horizon in perspective views.
Magic Wand used for tracing the contours of existing elements for creating new elements with the active tool. It has three different shapes for identifying nodes, edges and empty space (including surfaces).
319
Interaction
Scissors trims elements (hold down the Ctrl/Cmd key while clicking on an element). The Black Scissors appear on top of element edges, while the White Scissors indicate empty space.
Eyeball defines the direction of Roofs slope, the side that remains selected when splitting elements, the depth of Limited Sections and the orientation of Doors/Windows. It is also used to set the position of curved walls and Curtain Walls placed with the tangential method, when more than one placement possibility exists.
Double Eyeball locates position of edge-placed Door/Window.
Sun appears during Curtain Wall input to define the outside part of the Curtain Wall.
Eyedropper appears when picking up parameters from an element as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.
The Eyedropper is: Full, when snapping to a Reference Line or axis node;
Half full, when snapping to Hotspots, general nodes or selectable area;
Part full, part striped when snapping to a reference line;
Striped, on top of a normal edge;
Empty, when the cursor is in an empty workspace area (visual feedback only).
320
Interaction
Syringe appears when transferring parameters of one element to another as part of Parameter Transfer shortcut.
Plus when dragging, rotating or mirroring a copy of an element.
Double-Plus when dragging or rotating multiple copies of an element.
Fill Handle prompts you to draw a vector orientation after a fill is placed.
Hammer places Dimension chains, Angular Dimensions, the Elevation Dimension array, Zone Stamps and Fill areas; it also appears when closing polygons.
Trident moves Marquee area or the Clipboard contents after pasting.
During a dimensioning operation: Magnet plus dimension-line icon: In a 3D Document, after clicking the points to be dimensioned, this cursor allows you to choose the plane in which to dimension the clicked elements.
Mercedes plus parallel dimension icon: During a linear dimensioning operation using Any Direction, allows you to choose a line or edge. The dimension will be created parallel to this clicked line/edge.
321
Interaction
Deselecting Elements
To deselect one or more selected elements, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with any tool (including the Arrow) on an empty part of the project to deselect all the selected elements at once. Click a selected element while holding down the Shift key. With the Arrow tool active, hold down the Shift key, and click or draw a selection rectangle around the elements you want to deselect.
322
Interaction
Find and Select Elements

Use the Find & Select Palette to select and deselect elements based on defined criteria. Open this palette from Edit > Find & Select; or click the Find & Select shortcut from the Standard Toolbar:
The Find & Select palette can remain open as long as you wish on top of all windows. Elements will be selected on the visible layers of the currently active window. The Selected and Editable values at bottom left give you feedback on the currently selected elements in the project. To find and select elements by criteria, follow these steps: 1) In the Criteria list, the first line is always Element Type, since the Find & Select function finds only elements.
2) Select this first line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose a value for this criterion from the pop-up (that is, the element type you want to find).
323
Interaction
3) Click Add to define additional elements (such as Columns) to search for simultaneously.
4) Click the Plus button to find and select all elements that fit your defined criteria. Note: The two Criteria (Element is Wall, Element is Column) are joined as an or statement, so that when you click the Plus sign, ArchiCAD will Find and Select every element that is either a Wall or a Column.
Add Additional Criteria

To narrow the scope of your search, add more criteria. 1) Click the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box.
2) Select the new line, then click the black arrow at the end of the row to choose the desired value from the pop-up.
3) Click the Plus button to select all the elements that fit these criteria. Note: Different criteria types (e.g. Element Type, Layer) are joined to each other by and statements.
324
Interaction
Deselect Elements
Click the Minus button to deselect all the elements that fit the current criteria in the Find & Select Palette.
Use Predefined Criteria Sets

The Find & Select Palette (Edit > Find & Select) has several built-in Criteria Sets.
If you choose one of these, you dont have to define any criteria yourself. Just choose the desired Criteria Set from the Criteria Set Name pop-up list, then click the Plus button. Predefined Criteria Sets cannot be modified.
Define and Store Your Own Criteria Sets

In many cases, you will define simple Find & Select criteria for one-time use. However, it is possible to store these criteria sets for later use, if you will need to select the same set of elements repeatedly, or in other projects. Note: Your stored Criteria Sets can be made available in Teamwork projects, both to Find & Select elements and to reserve elements by criteria. (See Define Reservation Criteria in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) To store a Criteria Set: 1) Set up the criteria as desired. The Criteria Set name is now Custom. 2) Next to the Criteria Set Name field, click the pop-up button to access the relevant commands. Click Store as.
325
Interaction
3) In the appearing dialog box, give a name to the Criteria Set and click Store.
Your customized Criteria Sets are now stored in the Criteria Set pop-up, under My Criteria Sets.
Use the commands from the pop-up to manage your Criteria Sets: Rename, Delete, Export or Import them (as .xml files).
Pick Up Settings from Selected Elements

Use this feature if you have added a number of criteria (e.g. Element Type, Layer, Material) in the Find and Select dialog box and want to define their values based on an existing element. This is a quick way to define a Find & Select criteria set. 1) In the Find & Select dialog box, define the criteria you want to search by (e.g. Element Type, Layer). 326
Interaction
2) Click the Pick up Settings button to activate it.
3) In the project, Alt+click an element whose settings you want to load. 4) The Element Type and Layer values of the clicked element are now loaded in the Find & Select dialog box.
Copy Settings
If any elements are selected, the second button - Copy Settings - becomes active. Click the button to load the settings of the last selected element into the Find & Select dialog box.
327
Interaction
Edit Selection Set

The Edit Selection Set dialog box from Edit > Element Settings > Edit Selection Set makes it possible to edit specific attributes (layers and pencolors) for a collection of dissimilar element types simultaneously without affecting any other settings of these elements. Every element in ArchiCAD shares two basic attributes with all others: a Layer assignment and one or several Pencolors. If you explicitly change either or both of these attributes in the Edit Selection Set dialog box, all the selected elements will take on the new values.
Modify Associated Window & Door Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Window and Doors contained in any selected Walls. Note: If not checked, the openings will retain their individual Pencolors/Penweights. Modify Auto-Labels Layer & Color: Check this box to also modify the Pencolor/ Penweight of Auto-Labels (i.e. associative labels assigned in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box Listing & Labeling Panel) assigned to any selected elements. For information on associative labels, see Listing and Labeling Panels. Note: If not checked, the labels will retain their individual attributes. The pencolors of GDL Object-type elements can only be changed if the object is not set to be displayed with its own Symbol Pens (defined in the 2D symbol of the GDL Object). When editing the object, the standard Pen Color radio button will be preset to the edited Pen Color. All components of composite elements, such as Walls, Dimension chains or Markers made up of lines, Arrowheads and Text, are modified together. Selected/Editable: This area displays the number of elements of each type currently selected on the Floor Plan and in 3D. The bottom of the dialog box shows the type of selected elements and whether they are currently editable (that is, not locked).
328
Interaction
Store and Access Selection Sets

Use the Window > Palettes > Selections palette to recall previously saved, frequently accessed sets of selections that are stored with the Project. The controls of the Selections Palette allow you to save any selection made on the Floor Plan, in a Section/Elevation/IE window, or a Detail/Worksheet drawing. You can delete a selection or sort saved selections by name or by window of origin, using the pop-up menu at top right of the dialog box.
Use the commands in the pop-out menu at top right to manage sets of selected items. If you have selected items in the project, use Add Selection to save this selection (you will be prompted to name it.) The same pop-up contains commands to let you Rename or Delete any of these saved Selection Sets. Sort by Name: Choose this option to sort the items by their name. Sort by Original Window: Choose this option to sort the items by the windows they originate in The bottom part of the palette displays the contents of the selection set, broken down by element type. The three operation signs (x, -, +) affect the current, on-screen selection status of the stored selection set you have highlighted in the Palette (e.g., in the image below, NW Living):
329
Interaction
The X function means that only the highlighted selection set will be selected on screen. Any other element which is not part of this selection set is deselected. The - function means that the elements of the highlighted selection set will be deselected. The + function will select all the elements of the highlighted selection set. The operation is always performed on the currently active window.
330
Interaction
Marquee Area
About Marquee Areas Marquee Area Definition Options View Marquee Area in 3D Removing a Marquee Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool Stretching with the Marquee Tool Other Editing Operations within the Marquee
331
Interaction
About Marquee Areas

The Marquee tool is used to define areas for selection, editing and visualization purposes.
The capabilities of the Marquee tool complement those of the Arrow tool, and are particularly useful in selecting and moving groups of ArchiCAD elements. A Marquee area does not display selection dots on the included elements; the marqueed area is shown by a dashed line of marching ants. The color of the Marquee is the same as that of Selection dots: set this color at Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information > Selection Dots and Marquee color.
. Marquee selection is often used when: You wish to define a smaller area in which to select all of the elements of a given type. You want to visualize a particular part of the design in 3D. You need to move or resize a number of elements of different types at the same time: for example, you can stretch all polygonal and linear elements of a building simultaneously. The Marquee tool is available in the Floor Plan, the 3D Window, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation windows, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, Layout windows, and the 2D Symbol window of GDL Objects. In image-type windows (PhotoRendering or picture windows) or the GDL Objects 3D view, the only operation available for a marquee selection is Copy. To use the Marquee tool for selection and editing, you must first define a rectangular or polygonal Marquee area. All construction aids are available.
If you inadvertently start to draw the Marquee area at an unintended point, press Esc (or the Cancel button in the Control Box). If you click a node or an edge inside the Marquee area, with the Marquee tool active, the cursor will assume the Checkmark or Mercedes shape. If you then move the cursor, the Marquee area will be moved with all the nodes or edges included in it.
332
Interaction
All polygonal or linear elements with a node included in the Marquee area can be stretched simultaneously. For a detailed description, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. If you click inside the Marquee area without touching a node or an edge, the cursor will assume the Trident shape.
In this case, moving the cursor will only move the marquee, leaving all enclosed elements unchanged.
Select All Elements in a Marquee

To select all elements inside a previously defined Marquee area with the Marquee Tool active, use the Ctrl/Cmd+A shortcut or the Edit > Select All in Marquee command.
Use Marquee in Find&Select

If you have placed a Marquee, then the Find & Select includes the Marquee criterion automatically. You can then opt to search either inside or outside the Marquee. See Find and Select Elements.
333
Interaction
Marquee Area Definition Options

The Marquee tool has two definition methods available in the Info Box.
With the thin dashed line contour representing the Single Floor method, you can select elements on the current Story.
With the thick dashed line contour representing the All Floors method, you can select elements on all the Stories of the Project.
Note: These controls are dimmed when not viewing the Floor Plan. To draw a Marquee, select the Marquee tool from the Toolbox. Choose one of the Geometry Methods from the Info Box. (If you are working in the 3D Window, four options are available; otherwise there are three options).
The Polygonal method defines a Marquee area consisting of any number of segments. Completing a segment automatically begins the next one. Close the Marquee by doubleclicking the last endpoint, by clicking OK in the context menu to close the polygon, or by drawing the last endpoint on top of the first one and clicking when the Hammer cursor appears. At least two segments must be defined manually, since the area must have a minimum of three sides. Only straight segments are possible.
334
Interaction
The Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle at right angles to the window. After the first click, a rubberband line rectangle will follow the cursor, allowing you to see the area. After the second click at the diagonally opposed corner, the Marquee rectangle will appear. The Rotated Rectangle method defines a Marquee rectangle placed at any angle. You first draw one side of the rectangle with two clicks, and then, with a third click, you define the length of the perpendicular sides.
The first three methods available in the 3D Window are extensions of the Polygonal, Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle methods. First the base of the marquee area is defined with the same steps as on the Floor Plan. (In perspective view, the marquee base must be underneath the horizon.) Then you define the height of the selected space. The coordinate axes are continuously present on screen to help you.
335
Interaction
The fourth option (3D window only) allows you to draw a 2D marquee in order to copy elements from the 3D Window in the form of pictures.
For more information, see Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window.
336
Interaction
View Marquee Area in 3D

You can use the Marquee to view a selected area of your project in the 3D window. Define the Marquee area, then use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command; or select the same command from the context menu. Any part of an element that falls inside the Marquee area will be included in the 3D view, even if there is no selection node or hotspot on this part of the element. Note: If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. To further define how Marqueed elements are shown in 3D, use the Marquee Effects controls of the View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. For more information, see Show Marquee Area in 3D.
337
Interaction
Removing a Marquee
To remove a drawn Marquee area, do one of the following: Press Esc. Click with the right mouse button or Ctrl-click (MacOS), and choose the Remove Marquee command in the appearing context menu. Begin drawing a new Marquee. Double-click in the window outside the marquee area with the Marquee tool selected. If you have explicitly selected further elements within the Marquee, pressing Esc will deselect these elements in reverse order, and finally remove the Marquee. If you choose another tool, the Marquee area will not be removed, in order to save the recent Marquee area for further use.
338
Interaction
Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window

You can use the Marquee tool to copy and paste an area of the 3D Window, a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, or a Model Picture Window. 1) Generate the view you need. 2) Use the Marquee tool to select the area you wish to copy (if you are selecting from the 3D window, make sure that the 2D Marquee option is active).
3) Choose Edit > Copy. If you are copying from the 3D window using the OpenGL engine, all images will be pasted in pixel format. If you are copying from the 3D window using the Internal Engine, a dialog box appears during the Copy operation giving you options for how the image will be displayed on the screen.
For more information, see Copy Dialog Box. Note: If you are copy-pasting construction elements, they will be placed as 2D elements (points, lines and fills.) You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. 4) Move to the Floor Plan and choose Edit > Paste. Note: You can paste into other 2D model windows, but the pasted elements will behave as 2D drawing elements only, not model elements. 5) Position the image on your Floor Plan using the Trident cursor.
339
Interaction
6) Click outside the selection rectangle to complete the operation. - Elevations are pasted to the Floor Plan as full-sized 2D elements. - Parts of Model Pictures are pasted as screenshots.
340
Interaction
Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool

You can insert a cropped part of any image file into your ArchiCAD plan. With your ArchiCAD project file open, open any image format file. Click and drag (only the Marquee tool is available) to select the desired image area, then copy it to the clipboard. Close the image file, then paste the clipboard contents into the open project. You can modify it like any other figure. For more information, see Figures.
341
Interaction
Other Editing Operations within the Marquee

If you wish to Cut, Copy, Clear, Drag, Mirror, Rotate, Elevate or Duplicate elements, they must have at least one node inside the Marquee area in order to be selected. The edit operations will act on the whole element. To use Edit commands on a placed Drawing, include at least one node of the Drawing (i.e. one of the Drawings corners) inside the Marquee. Note: In Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail and Worksheet windows, some editing commands are available only for 2D drawing elements.
Stretching with the Marquee Tool
342
Interaction
On-Screen Input Aids

Tracker Ruler Measure Tool Grid System Grid Snap Function Guide Lines Gravity Mouse Constraints Coordinate Constraints Relative Construction Methods Snapping to Existing Elements Special Snap Points Cursor Snap Range
343
Interaction
Tracker
About the Tracker Parameters Shown in Tracker Defining Tracker Coordinates Coordinate Input in Tracker Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options
344
Interaction
About the Tracker

Coordinate values are displayed in the Tracker, which follows your mouse movements and is available in any editable window type. Note: This section describes coordinate input using the Tracker function. If you prefer to use the Coordinates box familiar from older versions of ArchiCAD, consult Coordinates Palette. The Tracker gives you a dynamic and constant feedback on such values as edited lengths, angles, and hotspot values for GDL Object editing. To use the Tracker, you must activate the Tracker toggle button on the Standard toolbar
or activate the Show Tracker checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.
By default, the Tracker only appears On -demand: that is, during coordinate input and editing operations. Another way to show the Tracker if you have not yet begun element input: use the n shortcut. The Tracker will pop up and display the cursor position. Alternatively, choose the Always option to display the Tracker continuously. This means that the Tracker will follow your cursor even if you are not inputting anything, providing feedback on the cursor position. To deactivate the Tracker, deselect the Tracker toggle icon on the Standard toolbar, or hit the n shortcut. Tracker options (including colors, contents and behavior) can be set in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Some Tracker options are commands accessible from the pop-up arrow next to the Standard toolbars Tracker toggle.
345
Interaction
Parameters Shown in Tracker

The parameters appearing in the Tracker vary depending on the type of editing action that is underway. For example, if you select a straight segment and choose the Curve edge command from the pet palette, then the Tracker shows the Arc Radius parameter.
The Tracker always shows one of its parameters in bold; this is the default parameter. Depending on your choices in the Tracker pop-up menu in the Standard Toolbar, the Tracker will display only the XY or the DA (distance/angle) coordinate pair (switch from one to the other by clicking Prefer XY Coordinates/Prefer Polar Coordinates during editing/input), and will show or hide the names of the coordinates (Show/Hide Parameter Tags).
Hint: To switch between DA and XY coordinates on the fly, use the / (slash character) shortcut. As a rule, the parameters in the Tracker will be listed in order of relevance, with D/A coordinates followed by X, Y and Z coordinates. By default, the coordinate values are Relative values. (If you prefer Absolute values, deselect the Relative Coordinates in Tracker toggle command; this command is enabled by default, except during editing/input.) If you have activated the Expand Tracker Automatically option from the drop-down Tracker menu, then all the parameters will be shown as soon as you enter the Tracker (by entering a value or by pressing Tab). Note: The same option, Expand Tracker automatically during numeric input, is also available as a checkbox in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Otherwise, if you want to expand the Tracker, enter the Tracker by pressing Tab, then click the arrow at the bottom of the Tracker to expand it.
346
Interaction
Defining Tracker Coordinates

You can enter numeric coordinates directly from the keyboard or use a combination of mouse and keyboard. The horizontal and vertical values correspond to the X and Y coordinates (also called Cartesian coordinates), while the radial and angular values are called polar coordinates. Coordinates can take on absolute and relative values. By default, they are shown as relative values in the Tracker. Use the Tracker menu from the Standard Toolbar to toggle the Relative Coordinates in Tracker preference on or off.
Relative values are measured from the Edit Origin, that is, they display horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the last edited point in the window.
Absolute values are measured from the User Origin (see Origins). This means that they always display the horizontal (X), vertical (Y), distance (D) and angular (A) distance or position of the cursor from the User Origin. A temporary dashed line is drawn between the origin and the cursor to indicate that you are using absolute coordinates.
For information on Elevation values, see Elevation Values in the Tracker.
347
Interaction
Coordinate Input in Tracker

As long as the Tracker is shown during input, just type a number for the default parameter (the one shown in bold.) The cursor will automatically jump to the Tracker and enter the value. Note: This input method works if the Enable direct input into Tracker fields box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. Another way to enter the Tracker is to press Tab. The cursor jumps to the default field of the Tracker (the one shown in bold). Click Tab as many times as needed to activate the required Tracker field. Type in the desired number.
You can also activate fields by clicking them or typing the shortcut of the corresponding field. If the Tracker is displayed in its compact form, typing the shortcut for a hidden parameter will display it. To enter numeric coordinates, type the shortcut of the desired coordinate (X, Y, Z or D/R or A) immediately followed by the value you intend to assign to it, for example X3 or Y-4. The + prefix is optional for positive values. You can type coordinate values in any order. Note: This input method works if the Coordinate Shortcuts prefer Tracker box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. This is the default setting. The other way to enter coordinates is through the Coordinates Box (enable it using Window > Palettes > Coordinates). The selected value is highlighted. At this point, you have several options: To enter another coordinate value, type another shortcut for the desired coordinate, then enter a value. To complete the element you are drawing, press Enter or click the checkmark icon in the Tracker. To fix the value of a coordinate, click the crosshair icon in the Tracker. The edited element will then jump into this position and, if Guide Lines are active, this will also display Guide Lines of the currently available type at this location to help you continue the input. To cancel the last operation, press Esc. Return to graphic input by typing the name of the edited coordinate again or by mouseclicking anywhere in the window. You can also perform additions or subtractions from the current value by typing a + or sign after the value. For example, typing x3+ will add 3 to the x value shown in the Tracker box. Notes for users of U.S. dimensions: Two dashes are required for subtraction of whole feet because the first dash is interpreted as an indication that inches are to follow. 348
Interaction
When 3 is entered, ArchiCAD assumes you mean three feet. Typing 36, 36", or 3-6 will enter three feet, six inches. Coordinates can be copied and pasted using the clipboard. The Cut, Copy and Paste menu items are inactive during numeric input, so you must use the standard shortcuts or the context menu. It is possible to enter a whole series of coordinates one after the other in the Tracker when drawing chains of elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, etc.). As soon as you have finished drawing the first element, the Edit Origin is immediately transferred to this endpoint, which becomes the starting point of the second element and is therefore given the x=0, y=0 value when working with relative coordinates.
You can combine coordinate input by fixing the value of a field and then editing the value of another one.
349
Interaction
Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options

Special Tracker options are available to let you further customize the Tracker function, using the Coordinate Input Logic checkboxes in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input.
Show X-Y Coordinates relative to User origin in Tracker: If you check this box, the XY coordinates will always be shown as Absolute cartesian values, even if you have activated the Relative Coordinates toggle button. This means that X-Y coordinates are shown as absolute values, and the RA or DA values are shown as relative values. Use relative angle measures: If you check this box, angle measures in the Tracker will be shown either: relative to the previous input segment, in case of polygon input, or relative to the grid, with the horizontal grid line as the zero value, and angle values shown relative to this line, up to 180 degrees. If this box is unchecked, angle values are shown from 0 to 360 degrees. Use angle relative to the active Guide Line: If you check this box, angle values in the Tracker will be shown relative to the active Guide Line. (You must first activate a Guide Line for this to work.) For information on all these options, see Tracker and Coordinate Input.
350
Interaction
Ruler
The Ruler is an editing aid available at the top and left side of the screen in every ArchiCAD window, except the 3D Window and Schedules. Use the Ruler as an aid in navigation: it lets you know where you are in the project, at the current zoom. To show/hide the Ruler, use the View > Ruler toggle command. You can also hide a ruler by right-clicking it and clicking the Ruler toggle. As you move the cursor on screen, feedback on the ruler shows you the vertical and horizontal position of the cursor relative to the User Origin (or, if no User Origin has been created, relative to the Project Origin). See Origins. Every time you create a new User Origin, the measurements shown on the Ruler change accordingly. The measurement units are the Model Units you set in Options > Preferences > Working Units.
Place Orthogonal Guide Line Parallel to Ruler

At any time, click on the Ruler, then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler will be created. See Guide Lines.
Ruler Commands
The Rulers context menu (right-click anywhere on the Ruler) gives you a quick way to access related commands:
Click the Ruler toggle to hide the Ruler Click Cursor Projection toggle to include projection lines from the Ruler to the cursor position. (This will also turn on Cursor Projection in the 3D window.) Click Working Units to access this dialog box, where the Model Unit option determines the Rulers measurement units.
351
Interaction
Measure Tool
The Measure tool, located in the Standard toolbar, allows you to measure distances and areas in the project.
It is a temporary, on-screen function for quick feedback. To use the Measure Tool, activate its icon in the Standard Toolbar, or use the M shortcut. Click on a starting point (the top left corner of the rectangular wall, in the image below) and start to trace the wall. The Tracker displays the horizontal, vertical and radial distance measured from the starting point, as well as the angle.
You can Measure any number of segments in sequence: each click represents a new starting-point from which the next distance will be measured. After two or more clicks, the Tracker also shows a cumulative distance and the area (shown by a temporary gray area on screen). The image below shows the Measure tool feedback after three clicks, as you approach the last corner of the rectangular wall.
You can also use the Measure tool while creating elements. When you start drawing a Wall, for example, you can activate the Measure tool on the fly, measure (or even edit) a value with the fields it displays and then hit Enter to transfer this value into the appropriate field of the Tracker.
352
Interaction
Grid System
Two grid systems are provided to help you make drafting easier: the Construction Grid and the Snap Grid. You can set these up in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. For more information, see Grids & Background Dialog Box. As a shortcut, many of these controls are available in the Standard toolbar and the Coordinates palette. Grids can be defined separately for the Floor Plan and any individual Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, or Layout window. Note that, in Floor Plan window, the same Grid settings will be used for all Stories. Grids are not available in the 3D Window. Note: You can also create, place and use custom local structural grids of different sizes and shapes using The Grid Tool. The Construction Grid is used to reflect any characteristic spacing of your Project. The Construction Grid can also be used to define the foundation footings or the column grid of a building. Like the printed grids on traditional graph paper, the Construction Grid adds a visual orientation and sense of scale to the Floor Plan and the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/ Worksheet windows. The Construction Grid is normally visible on the Floor Plan, but you can turn it off with the Grid Display toggle command in the View > Grid Options hierarchical menu or in the Standard Toolbars Grid pop-up menu.
Depending on your projects layout, a rotated version of the construction grid may be more helpful than the default orthogonal one. Define the Rotation Angle in the View > Grid Options > Grids and Background dialog box.
353
Interaction
You can also define a rotated grid by hand: first, choose Set Rotated Grid from the Standard Toolbar, then draw a vector on screen or click on an existing straight segment: this vector will represent the rotated grid angle relative to the horizontal axis.
To display the rotated version of your Construction Grid, click the Rotated Grid button in the Standard Toolbar grid menu or the Coordinates Palette. The Construction Grid can be optionally enhanced with an Auxiliary Grid, which is also visible on the screen and is defined in View > Grid Options > Grids and Background. The Auxiliary Grid is often used to indicate the thickness of concrete walls or foundation footings, and can be used to create periodic or stepped grids.
The Snap Grid is an invisible grid - if you enable the Grid Snap Function, you can make the cursor snap to the nodes of this Snap Grid. When defining your Snap Grid in the Grids and Background dialog box, you will usually enter the smallest unit of measurement relevant to your Project. You can set different horizontal and vertical Snap Grid increments, allowing you to reflect the unique geometry of your Project. The Snap increments you define here can also be used for the Nudge shortcut - to easily move any element by a small defined factor, using a keyboard shortcut. See Nudging Elements. If the Grid Snap Function is enabled, the cursor will snap to the nodes of either your Construction Grid or your Snap Grid, depending on what you set as your preferred option.
354
Interaction
Grid Snap Function

The Grid Snap function allows precise graphic alignment of elements at consistent lengths and distances. When the Grid Snap function is active, you can only draw from one grid intersection to another; the grid pulls the cursor and makes it snap to the grid nodes. This allows you to position the cursor accurately, even at low zoom levels. When grid snap is active, it restricts the movement of the cursor to either Construction or Snap Grid nodes. A small dot jumping from grid-point to grid-point indicates the current cursor position. To disable this feature (for example, to position a piece of furniture at a non-grid location), you can suspend or activate the grid snap feature by pressing the S key. To activate the Grid Snap function, do one of the following: Use the S Shortcut. Use the View > Grid Snap menu command. The Snap function will use the last grid type used, either Construction or Snap grid. Select the Snap Grid or Construction Grid from the grid menu in the Standard Toolbar, or from the Coordinates Box.
Select Snap Grid or Construction Grid from View > Grid Snap Options. Select one of the Snap On buttons (either Construction Grid or Snap Grid) in the Grids and Background dialog box. To deactivate the Grid Snap function: Use the S shortcut key Use the View > Grid Snap menu command (deactivate the toggle).
355
Interaction
Guide Lines
About Guide Lines Turn Guide Lines on or off Types of Guide Lines Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines Placing Guide Lines During Input Place an Orthogonal Guide Line using Ruler Removing Guide Lines Examples for Using Guide Lines
356
Interaction
About Guide Lines

Guide Lines are 2D drafting aids which help the user find special points and projections while editing and drafting elements, using the geometry constraints of existing elements. The cursor can snap to Guide Lines, and special snap points can be placed on them. Some Guide Lines are extended from existing element edges/arcs; others pop up temporarily while you move the cursor. In some cases, multiple Guide Lines are offered, allowing you to choose your preferred Guide Line and have it remain on screen. Guide Lines are available in all 2D windows (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Layout, GDL Object 2D Symbol). Guide Lines are available with any tool. If a selection tool is active, they only appear when you start editing elements (Arrow) or when you are placing or moving elements (Marquee).
357
Interaction
Turn Guide Lines on or off

Use the Q key as a shortcut (toggle Guide Lines on and off) Use the toggle button in the Standard toolbar
Use the View > Guide Lines toggle command Guide Lines options are available at: Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines
and from the Guide Lines toggle command in the Standard Toolbar.
358
Interaction
Types of Guide Lines

Instant (temporary) guide lines appear during an input operation and disappear automatically after input is completed. They appear and disappear depending on the location of the cursor, and their geometry depends on which Guide Line settings you have switched on in Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines (including Main Direction, Relative Direction and Incremental Guide Lines). You can snap to these instant Guide Lines, but you cannot make them remain on screen. To constrain the cursor to the nearest instant Guide Line, press Shift during input (first, make sure that the Nearest Instant Guide Line box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.) Note: Context menu commands do provide a way to convert instant guide lines into lasting segments. See Placing Guide Lines During Input. Lasting guide lines are visible on the screen until the given editing operation is terminated (completed, cancelled or interrupted by a different type of operation such as the activation of another window) or until you choose to remove them. See Removing Guide Lines. To make Lasting guide lines appear (the temporary blue Guide Lines become orange in color), do one of the following: 1) Place the cursor on an edge or arc either before or during element input. (The cursor takes on the Mercedes shape.) Edge-extension guide lines will be projected. In the case of arcs, they will be extended to a full circle. If you have not yet begun the editing operation, you must move the cursor onto the Guide Line to make it a lasting Guide Line. To constrain the cursor to the nearest lasting Guide Line, make sure that the Lasting Guide Lines box is checked in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods.
To make a guide line active, place the cursor on it and wait until it becomes thicker. Only one Guide Line is active (shown in bold) at a time. Relative Guide Lines will be calculated relative to the active Guide Line.
359
Interaction
2) Place the cursor on a node (either before or during output). Multi-choice guide lines appear when several choices make sense in a given situation, for example the horizontal-vertical lines appearing at element nodes (as in the image below). You can choose to make any of these lines a lasting guide line by moving the cursor onto the chosen line.
At an element node, the multi-choice Guide Lines appear in fixed directions (Main Direction and Relative Direction) as defined in the Guide Lines panel of the Work Environment dialog box. Relative direction guide lines can be parallel, perpendicular or tangential to the active guide line or intersect guide lines. The relative guide lines are always relative to the active guide line.
The following image shows multi-choice relative Guide Lines that are parallel to and perpendicular to the active Guide Line (shown in bold). Note the parallel and perpendicular signs on the Guide Lines. To make either of these multi-choice Guide Lines remain on screen as an editing aid (i.e., to turn them into lasting Guide Lines), just move the cursor over it.
360
Interaction
Defining Your Preferred Guide Lines

On this Guide Lines tab page (Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines, you can define and activate/deactivate three categories of Guide Lines: Main Direction Guide Lines: Their direction/angle is determined based on the drawing environment (e.g. horizontal/vertical direction, rotated grid, etc.) If you check the Input Vector and Length box in this section, the direction and radius of the last input vector will also be offered as a Guide Line. Relative-direction Guide Lines: These are created relative to the active Guide Line. Incremental Guide Lines: These are displayed, during input only, at every increment of the specified angle (relative to the orthogonal coordinate system and originating from the current Edit Origin.) If you check the Relative to active Guide Line check box, these incremental Guide Lines, too, will always be displayed relative to the currently active Guide Line if any. Incremental Guide Lines are temporary (instant) only. Any of these Guide Line groups can also be activated/deactivated using the toggle commands from the Standard toolbar or from View > Guide Line Options.
You can also use Coordinate Constraints, with Guide Lines active, to display Guide Lines which constrain the cursor to particular directions. You can set default Guide Line colors for Multi-Choice Guide Lines and other Guide Lines separately (again, in the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines tab page). For more information, see Guide Lines Settings.
Time-Based Guide Line Appearance

For each category of Guide Lines (Main-Direction, Relative-Direction), you can set a time interval after which the Guide Lines will appear, so long as you keep the cursor still at an edge or node. Enter preferred time intervals in seconds on the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines tab page. However, you can override these wait-time intervals at any time using the Force Guide Line Display command (shortcut: ). This shortcut is useful if you are at a node with several sets of multi-choice Guide Lines available, and you want to see a different set without waiting the specified interval.
361
Interaction
Placing Guide Lines During Input

Independent of your default Guide Line definitions, you can place a Guide Line (or Guide Circle) at any time during input using the Place Guide Line/Guide Circle command from the context menu. After clicking on screen to begin input, choose the Place Guide Line (Circle) command from the context menu. A lasting Guide Line (circle) will appear. Similarly, you can use the Convert to Guide Line Segment command from the context menu. The current vector will be transformed into a Guide Line. In this case, the length of the Guide Line is limited to the length of the vector you drew and will not run across the whole screen.
362
Interaction
Place an Orthogonal Guide Line

At any time, click on the Ruler at the top or left edge of the screen, and then drag your cursor to anywhere in the window: a Guide Line parallel to the Ruler is created.
363
Interaction
Removing Guide Lines

Guide Lines are removed when you finish the editing action, or when you press Esc in succession (the first Esc will cancel the operation in progress; the next will remove all Guide Lines). To manually remove a guide line, place the cursor on it, activate the context menu and choose the Remove guide line command. To remove all guide lines manually, right-click anywhere in the window to activate the context menu and choose the Remove all guide lines command.
364
Interaction
Examples for Using Guide Lines

Guide Lines make it easy to create parallel walls. Before you start, make sure that the Grid Snap Function is disabled and that Guide Lines are enabled. Check that the Parallel to the active Guide line option is active in the Relative direction Guide lines section of Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines. For more information, see Guide Lines Settings.
Draw a simple straight wall in the Floor Plan, then place the cursor on its edge (the cursor will assume the Mercedes shape). The edge-extension Guide Line appears. Move the cursor over this Guide Line to make it a lasting Guide Line.
Now click to the point where you wish to start drawing the parallel wall. Start drawing a wall that is roughly parallel to the original wall. You will see a second Guide Line appear which is exactly parallel to the active Guide Line of original wall.
365
Interaction
Draw your new wall along the line that is parallel to the active guide line and click to finish. Note: You can also use the Relative Construction Methods provided by the Control Box to draw parallel, perpendicular, angle bisector and tangential elements. Let us now see a more complex example. Grid Snap still inactive, Guide Lines enabled, make sure that the following settings are active in the Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines dialog box:
For more information, see Guide Lines Settings. These settings will enable you to use Guide Lines to place a wall that is at a 30-degree angle from the perpendicular of the first wall. First, draw a simple straight wall and place the cursor on it until the guide line extending it appears. Move the cursor over the Guide Line to make it active. Then place the cursor at the end of the wall and wait until a new guide line appears, perpendicular to the active one.
366
Interaction
Move the cursor along this guide line and click at the point where you wish to start a new wall. Move the cursor at a roughly 30 degree angle from the permanent guide line. You will see a new guide line appear at exactly 30 degrees. Start drawing a new wall along that line and click to finish.
367
Interaction
Gravity
When placing a new Wall, Column, Beam or Object-type element, the Gravity function lets you place it directly on top of an existing Slab, Roof or Mesh, thus taking on the elevation of the element it is placed on. If Gravity is on (activate Gravity icon), newly created elements will be placed on top of (i.e., gravitate to) the Roof, Slab or Mesh beneath them, depending on which Gravity option you choose. Level Dimensions placed with Gravity On on top of Slabs, Roofs or Meshes are associated to them. To choose an option, use the Gravity controls in the Standard toolbar or the icons of the Coordinates palette.
Note: Gravity only affects newly created elements and cannot be used for editing existing ones. If you are using Gravity to place a Wall, Column, Beam or any Object-type element onto a slab, roof or mesh surface, you can monitor the changes in elevation (Z) values in the Tracker (or the Coordinates Palette). When several slabs, roofs or meshes overlap, the highest elevation value is displayed. In this image, a wall (with Gravity on) is being placed on top of a slab whose elevation is 400; the walls Z-coordinate in the Tracker, accordingly, is shown as 400.
If the Gravity function is on (activate Gravity icon) while you are placing a new element, but there is no underlying Slab, Roof, or Mesh, then the new element will be placed at the current storys zero level.
368
Interaction
Mouse Constraints
ArchiCADs Mouse Constraints are like having a computerized T-square and triangle available while drafting in the Floor Plan. They are editing aids that can be used as an alternative to Guide Lines, although most users will prefer to use Guide Lines in 2D windows. The angle pairs they define can be used to lock the cursor at a particular drawing angle, by pressing Shift during input. The mechanism can only be engaged while drawing or editing an element, as indicated by the thick rubberband line shown in the Floor Plan or the ghosted element contour shown in the 3D Window. It temporarily locks the cursors polar angle value in the Coordinates Palette using one of the angle pairs defined in the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box. Three orthogonal angles/angle pairs can be specified: The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the main grid The horizontal-vertical set aligned to the rotated grid The fixed angle set The fixed angle set can be set relative to the rotated grid or the main grid. A practical use for the fixed angle orthogonal set would be aligning multiple elements with a roadway. In addition, you can check one or both Guide Line constraint options: Nearest Instant Guide Line Lasting Guide Lines
Using Mouse Constraints Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints
369
Interaction
Using Mouse Constraints

Constraining the drawing direction helps you precisely align or connect new elements. To use the orthogonal direction sets for drawing a new element: 1) Make sure the Grid Snap Function is disabled. 2) Click to start drawing an element.
3) Move the cursor from this starting point and hold down the Shift key. ArchiCAD will search for the closest enabled constraint direction.
370
Interaction
4) If the constrained direction is not what you had in mind, release the Shift key and move the cursor to a position closer to the desired direction, then hold down the Shift key.
5) When you have chosen the appropriate constraint direction, click the cursor again to place the endpoint of the element. Since the direction remains locked, you can align this endpoint with other elements using the projection mode of the cursor.
371
Interaction
Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints

When the drawing direction is constrained by pressing Shift, a dotted line connects the unfinished element with the location of the cursor.
In the Control Box, you can vary the display of this dotted line among three possible settings (Cursor Snap Variants): Perpendicular to the constrained direction Horizontal from the constrained direction Vertical from the constrained direction These options allow you to best align the element under construction with other already existing elements. To switch among these options: 1) Display the Control Box. (Window > Palettes > Control Box) 2) Draw an input vector on screen. 3) Press Shift to enable a constraint. The Cursor Snap Variants pop-up is now active in the Control Box. Move your cursor to this popup and choose the cursor snap variant you need.
372
Interaction
Coordinate Constraints
You can lock a cursor coordinate and thereby restrict the movement of the cursor by pressing Alt (Windows) or Opt (MacOS) and either X, Y, A, or R/D on the keyboard. If Guide Lines are active: Alt/Opt + X produces a vertical Guide Line.
Alt/Opt + Y produces a horizontal Guide Line. Alt/Opt + A (having defined the Angle value numerically or drawing in a sample direction) produces a corresponding Guide Line. Alt/Opt + R produces a Guide Circle whose radius is determined numerically or graphically. To unlock the constraint, just press the same key combination (e.g. Alt/Opt + X) again. If Guide Lines are inactive, the locking function works the same way, but you will not see the Guide Lines. Another way to lock a coordinate during input is to choose the Lock to Guide Line command from the context menu, if you have already snapped to a Guide Line.
373
Interaction
Relative Construction Methods

In addition to the Guide Lines feature, the relative construction methods also constrain the element construction direction to a constant angle. They are accessed from the third button of the Control Box.
Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. These Relative Construction Methods are described below. Exception: The Special Snap Vector method is described at: Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector.
Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints Angle Bisector Constraint Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods) Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D
374
Interaction
Parallel and Perpendicular Constraints

The first two Relative Construction methods are Perpendicular and Parallel constraints.
1) Make sure that the Grid Snap Function is inactive. 2) Choose the Perpendicular or Parallel icon and click it to make it active. 3) Select a line or an element edge as a reference by clicking it, or draw a temporary reference line using the cursor. (The reference edge/line will not be shown as selected; a newly drawn reference line will not remain visible on-screen.) 4) Draw the new element. The new element you draw will be perpendicular or parallel to the reference line (depending on the method selected).
Note: You can also select the Perpendicular or Parallel method after you have started drawing an element. In this case, the drawing operation is frozen until you have either drawn or selected a reference line or edge.
375
Interaction
Angle Bisector Constraint

Using the Angle Bisector relative construction method, you can draw elements bisecting the angle formed by other elements or temporary reference vectors.
You can either start drawing the new element before activating the Angle Bisector method and defining the reference vectors, or the other way round. Before using Angle Bisector constraint, make sure that Grid Snap is disabled.
Click the Angle Bisector icon, then define the reference vectors by either clicking on two existing element edges or lines, or drawing two temporary lines. (The reference edges/lines will not be shown as selected; the temporary lines will not remain visible on-screen.) The mouse is constrained to the bisecting angle between the two reference lines. Before you actually draw the element, the cursor is already constrained, and you can see a small black dot move along the line that would be drawn at that angle.
As for any other constraint, you can use remote cursor snap to define the other endpoint of the drawn line.
376
Interaction
Offset and Multiple Offset (Relative Construction Methods)

The Offset and Multiple Offset methods help you create lines or polylines with a given offset to a drawn segment or polygon. These methods have no effect on elements defined by a single click. Either relative construction method can be activated from the Control Box.
To draw an offset segment or polygonal element: 1) Choose or activate the Offset method. (The active tool must support polygon shapes.)
2) Draw a line or an open or closed polyline. (You can, if you wish, create this polyline using the Magic Wand.) 3) The base polyline can be completed by a double-click. When it is completed, a rubberband outline will appear, starting from the endpoint of the polyline and running perpendicular to its last entered segment.
4) Click once to place the element. When using the Multiple Offset method, the same steps can be used, except that the process is not completed when placing the element with a click. You can continue placing offset copies until you choose to terminate input.
With a double-click, you terminate input by drawing a last offset element. When hitting the Cancel button in the Control Box, you terminate input by omitting the offset element you are just drawing.
377
Interaction
Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D

The Align to Surface relative construction method is only active when working in the 3D Window. It enables you to fit elements onto non-horizontal planes when working in 3D views.
This method automatically identifies the intersection of a selected plane and the working plane of the cursor. The working plane is often horizontal. However, in special cases, for example when moving a hole in a roof plane, the cursors working plane is angled. It is also possible to align to curved surfaces, for example when fitting an object to a curved wall. The limitation here is that if the cursor is moving in an angled plane, it is not possible to fit to a curved surface, only the tangential plane of the surface.
Using the Constraint when Creating New Elements

1) 2) 3) 4) To use the constraint, first activate the 3D Window. Choose the tool for the element you wish to add. Adjust your User Origin if necessary. Choose and activate the Align to Surface Relative Construction method in the Control Box.
5) Click on any surface in the 3D view you want to align your new element to. 6) A black dot will appear on the selected plane at the height of the current User Origin. The dot will follow the cursor constrained to the intersection line of your reference plane and the User Origin plane.
378
Interaction
7) Click where you want to start drawing your new element. The element will be constrained to the intersection line. Finish drawing the element in the usual way.
Using Align to Surface with Existing Elements

1) Activate the 3D Window. 2) Adjust the User Origin if necessary. For more information, see Origins. 3) Select the element you wish to edit. 4) Choose the Edit command you wish to execute, e.g., stretch an edge of a slab to the intersection of a roof and the User Origin. 5) Click a reference point or edge to start editing. 6) Select the Align to Surface modifier icon in the Control box and activate the constraint as described above. 7) Choose your reference plane. 8) Finish editing the element.
379
Interaction
Snapping to Existing Elements

In addition to the methods offered to create elements at a specified point relative to existing elements, or at specific points of your project, ArchiCAD also helps you to move or reshape elements by snapping them to existing ones as part of a move operation. The Element Snap function can be enabled and disabled using the Options > Element Snap toggle command. (This command is also available on the Standard Toolbar.)
Element Snap only works on selected elements and can be toggled on and off while you work using the E shortcut. Note: Element Snap can only be used when Grid Snap is disabled. If you select an element and then start moving it with Element Snap active, you will see that its special points change to small squares.
These special points include: The selection dot points of the element including anchor points The division points of the element (if Special Snap Points are enabled.) The tip of the cursor When one of these selection dots encounters a node, anchor point or edge of another element where the cursor changes its shape to indicate a special relation, that selection dot becomes larger showing that the element is attracted to the sensitive point. You can then click to join the two elements without having to place the cursor at the actual joining point.
380
Interaction
If more than one snapping point touches an eligible point on the other element, you will see that these turn black. You can use the spacebar to cycle through possible points. Click when the one you need is displayed with the larger empty square.
381
Interaction
Special Snap Points

Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector
Special Snap Points help you start drawing new elements from a specific point located on an edge of another element or to edit existing elements with reference to these specific points. Activating special snap points will place temporary nodes at the division points based on the current Special Snap Point commands in the Standard toolbar.
These controls are also available as commands in the Control Box. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. Special Snap Points can be defined either on the entire length of a linear or circular element or element edge, or on a segment closed by two intersections.
The temporary nodes behave as hotspots. The cursor will change to a Checkmark when held above them. Special points only appear temporarily and will disappear by default after about 5 seconds. You can start drawing new elements from these points or use them for editing other elements in relation to them. Note: Although Special Snap Points (if enabled) will disappear on their own after a set interval by default, you can opt to have the snap points remain visible until you either place an element or change to another view or story: disable the Autohide Special Snap points checkbox in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
382
Interaction
Special Snap Points include: Halving points Division points (up to 20, set manually) Points located at a given distance from an endpoint or at a specific percentage of the distance between two endpoints (entered manually) To define division points and custom distances, use the Set Special Snap Values command from the menu in the Standard Toolbar.
Distances and percentages are always calculated from the endpoint that is closest. The toggle commands in the Standard Toolbars Special Snap Points menu allow you to disable the feature or to enable it along the entire element, or between intersection points (Icons in the Control Box serve the same function.)
Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu.
383
Interaction
Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector

In addition, you can display Special Snap Points on a temporary vector used while drawing elements. The method can be activated with the Special Snap icon among the relative construction icons in the Control Box.
In the following example, you will draw a Wall that starts at one- fourth of the gap between two endpoints of two other Walls. 1) Start by choosing the Divisions option in Special Snap Point Settings, then type 4 as the number of Divisions.
2) Make sure that Grid Snap is inactive. Activate the Wall tool, then choose and activate the Special Snap Point icon in the Control Box.
3) Start drawing the reference vector from the endpoint of one of the Walls.
4) A dashed line is drawn indicating the reference vector, with small black dots at the locations of the special snap points. Click the endpoint of the other Wall to terminate the definition of the reference vector.
384
Interaction
The Edit Origin is relocated to the place of the generated special snap point.
You can start drawing the new Wall.
385
Interaction
Cursor Snap Range

To help locate hotspots on the screen, the cursor gravitates toward edges and nodes. The attraction of the cursor by elements is defined in pixels in the bottom section of the Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods dialog box.
Cursor Snap Range can be set between 1 and 9 pixels. 3-4 pixels is a comfortable setting, but at small zoom levels you may hit hotspots that you did not wish to snap to. If you have good pointing skills, use 1 pixel and you will not be forced to zoom in. Cursor Snap Range will also help you to automatically snap to special points including the section points of existing lines or edges, perpendicular projections from the Edit Origin to existing lines or edges, and tangential points of the rubberband line along existing arcs, splines, curved edges, etc. The cursors shape informs you about the type of special point ArchiCAD has found.
386
Interaction
Editing Elements
Basic Editing Operations Cancel Operations Pet Palettes Move Elements Align Elements Distribute Elements Modify Element Sizes Explode into Current View Create Element Duplicates Drag & Drop Parameter Transfer Group Elements Lock/Unlock Elements Display Order Magic Wand Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows
387
Interaction
Basic Editing Operations

Cut
The Edit > Cut command removes selected elements from a Project and places them on the Clipboard for future use via the Paste command. It can also be used for dialog box or Coordinates Palette numeric field contents. Note: The Cut command is not available in the 3D Window. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. If you cut a construction element from a Model-type Section/Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, the element is also cut from the Floor Plan. In Text type windows, you can use the Cut command as in any word processor.
Copy
The Edit > Copy command puts the selected construction or text elements on the Clipboard, but the selected elements are not removed from the original document. The selection can be made with either the Arrow or the Marquee tool, or by Shift+clicking. You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using Copy/Paste. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy command to move a Door/ Window, in a model-type Section window.) In the 3D window, the Copy command is only available with the Marquee tool. See Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool.
Paste
Use Edit > Paste command to insert the contents of the Clipboard onto the current Project or a text Window. When pasting cut elements into a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window, the elements are pasted as drawing primitives (points, lines and fills). You cannot create new construction elements in Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows using either Cut/Paste or Copy/Paste. The Paste command is not available in the 3D window. When you are pasting with a multiple story marquee, an alert appears asking you to identify the copied story to merge to the current one.
388
Interaction
If you Cut/Copy and then Paste a selection between stories at the same zoom level with no Panning operations in between, the contents of the Clipboard are pasted into the same position they were originally cut or copied from. If there are several possible options for locating the pasted Clipboard contents, the Paste Options Dialog Box appears. (The dialog box appears if the pasted elements cannot appear in their entirety in the Window at the current zoom level, or if it is possible to locate the pasted elements relative to either the Active view or a Reference view.)
Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories

The Story Settings Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story.
Copy/Paste Elements Between Projects

When pasting elements to another project, remember that element attributes are identified by name. If the pasted elements refer to attributes that do not exist in the target Project, the necessary attributes will be appended. If the elements refer to attributes that do exist in the target project but are different from those of the original project, they will take on the attributes of the target project. The Clipboard can be used not only to hold ArchiCAD elements for pasting, but also to import bitmap graphics and other types of information. You can paste multi-line texts from wordprocessing applications into ArchiCAD. If you have copied items from an external application, you have several options - depending on the type of copied item - for pasting them into ArchiCAD. For more information, see Pasting Dialog Box.
389
Interaction
Delete
The Edit > Delete command removes selected items from Project or text Windows. The deleted elements are not preserved on the Clipboard. They are easily retrieved by Undo. The keyboard equivalent of Delete is hitting the Backspace or Delete key. Deleting construction elements in any model window (Floor Plan, 3D, model-type Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document) will also clear these elements from all the other windows. Note: Deleting any additional (i.e. manually added) elements from a model-type Section/ Elevation/IE window or a 3D Document, or any elements from a drawing-type Section/ Elevation/IE window will leave all other windows unchanged.
Undo/Redo
The Undo and Redo commands allow you to undo (revert to a previous step) and redo a large number of construction operations. The name of the command to be undone is displayed in the menu along with the Undo or Redo command. This capability also allows you to test tentative solutions by trying them out until you arrive at the desired result. The number of steps that can be undone and redone (from 1 to 99) is set using in the Options > Work Environment > Data Safety dialog box (Undo Limit). The default value is 20. After redoing a series of steps, Undo will only be available when you complete a new undoable action. All model and drafting operations can be undone step by step, chronologically, regardless of the model or drawing view they were performed in. In text type windows, only the last editing step can be undone/redone. (Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function, GDL script windows, Project Notes, and Report windows.) Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable. Note: Each time you save the Project, your previously available Undo steps will be cleared. In case of a crash, Autosave will save your Project. Autosave does not clear the undoable steps.
390
Interaction
Cancel Operations
By successively pressing the Esc key, you will achieve the following actions: 1) Cancel current operation entirely (during input) 2) If nothing is selected: Remove Guide Lines, if any 3) Deselect selected item(s), if any 4) Remove Marquee selection, if any 5) If nothing is selected: Switch to Arrow tool During input, pressing the Backspace key will cancel the operation. Warning: Pressing Backspace with any items selected will delete those items!
391
Interaction
Pet Palettes
A pet palette with relevant commands appears with most on-screen editing operations. The contents of the pet palette depends on the following factors: The selected element The part of the element you choose to act on (edge or node) The active window Move your cursor over the icons to read the tool tip for each one, and click on the icon for the function you need.
You can change your mind and choose a different function from the pet palette as long as you have not completed the editing operation with a second mouse click. The pet palette automatically disappears when the operation is finished. For more information on customizing pet palette functions, see Dialog Boxes and Palettes.
392
Interaction
Move Elements
You can move elements individually or collectively. You can nudge them in increments; you can drag, rotate or mirror them along a horizontal plane and through vertical displacement, that is, by changing their elevation values. To move elements, you can: Select them and choose the corresponding menu command from the Edit > Move menu (with any tool active in the Toolbox) or the Move commands in the context menu of a selected element- as with the selected column in this image:
With any tool active, click on a node and then choose the desired shortcut in the appearing pet palette.
Nudging Elements Dragging Elements Rotating Elements Mirroring Elements Elevating Elements
393
Interaction
Nudging Elements
A quick way to move elements on the screen is to use the Nudge feature: select one or more elements, then use Shift + an arrow key to move the element left, right, up or down. The Nudge factor - the increment by which you will move the element - is the same as the distance entered for your Snap Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background. See Grid System.
In the 3D window, Nudge will move the element left, right, forward or backward on a horizontal plane. To Nudge a selected element in larger increments, use Shift + Alt/Opt + an arrow key. This will move the selected elements by the distance entered for your Construction Grid in View > Grid Options > Grids & Background.
394
Interaction
Dragging Elements
To drag an element, do one of the following: With Quick Selection: click on the elements surface and drag it to its new position. See Quick Selection of Surface Areas. Select the Element; select the Edit > Move > Drag command, and draw a temporary vector anywhere in the active window: the element will be dragged to its new location according to this vectors length and direction. Select the element, select the Drag icon from the pet palette, then drag the element.
Select the element, then access the drag command with the context menu or using the Drag command shortcut (Ctrl+D). To move a wall, select it, then take hold of it anywhere on its surface and drag it with the cursor to its new location. (The accompanying pet palette shows the Drag command activated.)
395
Interaction
All selected elements are moved to a new location. Single elements are accompanied by a ghost outline or boundary as you move them. Selections containing grouped elements appear as a greyed bounding box as you move them.
These functions will also work when several elements have been simultaneously selected. All of the selected elements will be dragged along the same vector. In the image below, we select a wall, table and chair, and drag them all at the same time to their new position.
Note: In 3D, dragging can also change the elevation of the selected elements. To constrain the movement of the elements to the horizontal plane, activate the horizontal-vertical angle pair in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box, make sure the Drag Horizontally icon is active in the appearing pet palette, and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the elements.
396
Interaction
Rotating Elements
To rotate an element: Select the Element.
Select the Edit > Move > Rotate command (or Move > Rotate from the selected elements context menu). Alternatively, click again on a node or edge of the selected element to bring up the pet palette, then choose the Rotate command.
Or use the Ctrl (Cmd) + E shortcut. Click to define the center of rotation of the selected elements. Click to define the starting point of the rotation arc and its radius.
Move the cursor and click to complete the rotation arc.
You can rotate selected elements in the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window, and drawing elements only in Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Detail/Worksheet windows. Even in the 3D Window, rotation is always performed across a horizontal plane.
397
Interaction
Mirroring Elements
Mirroring creates a mirror image of selected elements on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. To Mirror an element: Select the Element(s) you want to mirror. Here, we want to place the table and chairs in the facing direction, at the other side of the room.
Select the Edit > Move > Mirror command, or choose the Mirror command from the context menu or the pet palette.
Define the mirroring axis with two clicks, as if you were drawing a Line.
The mirrored elements will be placed after the second click.
398
Interaction
Notes: Any number of Doors and Windows can be mirrored at a time. The mirrored Door/Window will always be in line with the wall that contains the original. Select the Door/Window; click once. This click is the axis of the mirroring action. Text, Line arrowheads and Dimensions will not be mirrored, only their bounding box. Mirrored Text blocks, Labels, Dimensions and Fill polygon area labels are always readable from the bottom and the left side of the drawing. Zone stamps cannot be mirrored.
399
Interaction
Elevating Elements
The Elevate command allows you to move selected elements vertically along the Z axis. Use Edit > Move > Elevate. To elevate an element in the Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/IE windows: Select the element. Choose the Edit > Move > Elevate command, or the Elevate command from the pet palette.
This brings up the Elevate dialog box.
Type the value by which you wish to raise or lower all selected elements To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, check Set Home Story by Elevation; or choose By Elevation in the Tracker. Click OK. This command is well-suited to changing the elevations of large numbers of similar elements (i.e., walls, landscaping objects, floor tiles, and lighting fixtures). It is the best way to preserve the vertical relationships between objects while moving them. Note: In the Section/Elevation/IE window, you can also elevate elements simply by clicking and dragging. In the 3D Window, click an element node (Arrow tool active) and choose the Elevate icon from the appearing pet palette, and then graphically move the selected elements up and down.
400
Interaction
To allow the elements Home Story to be automatically reset to reflect its new elevation, choose By Elevation in the Tracker. Alternatively, use the Tracker controls to lock the elements Home Story. (See Set Home Story by Elevation.)
401
Interaction
Align Elements
About the Align function How to Align Elements Special Align
402
Interaction
About the Align function

Use this menu (Edit > Align) to align selected elements with each other, or to a custom-drawn target line, using a variety of criteria: Align elements right or left; Align elements to the top or bottom; Center elements vertically or horizontally; Special-align elements to any point on an existing element, or to a temporary line/arc drawn by you. The Align commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. When using the Align commands, the expression right refers to the rightmost element on the xaxis in the window you are looking at (e.g. Floor Plan, Section, 3D). The expression left refers to the lefthand direction on the x-axis. Similarly, top means the element with the highest y-coordinate in the current window, and bottom is the element with the lowest y-coordinate. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to align the following Corner Table object with other furniture:
ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):
Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are aligning, use the Special Align options (Edit > Align > Special Align).
403
Interaction
How to Align Elements

1) Select the elements you wish to align. 2) Go to Edit > Align and choose one of the following operations:
Left: If you choose Edit > Align > Left, all selected elements will be aligned to the leftmost bounding-box point of the element that is located farthest to the left. In this example, we want to align the three windows shown in Section view.
404
Interaction
Select all three windows and use Edit > Align Left.
Right: If you choose Edit > Align > Right, all selected elements will be aligned to the rightmost bounding-box point of the element located farthest to the right. In the illustration below, the arc wall is the rightmost element; the rest of the walls (their rightmost points) are aligned to the rightmost point on the arc walls bounding box.
Top/Bottom: If you choose Edit > Align > Top or Bottom, all selected elements will be aligned to the topmost (or bottommost) point on the element that is the top (or bottom) element of the selected group. In the example below, we want to move up the window on the left, so that it lines up with other two windows.
To achieve this, we select all the windows, then use Edit > Align > Top to obtain the desired result.
405
Interaction
Center Horizontally: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Horizontally, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements top and bottom y-coordinates, and then align all the elements horizontally (using each elements centerpoint), along a horizontal line halfway between the top and bottom elements. Center Vertically: If you choose Edit > Align > Center Vertically, ArchiCAD will determine the selected elements leftmost and rightmost x-coordinates, and then align all the elements vertically, along a vertical line halfway between them. For example, in the following Floor Plan, we will center the selected furniture vertically.
406
Interaction
Special Align
The options in Edit > Align > Special Align give you great flexibility in lining up selected elements. You can choose which point to align, and you can choose what to align the elements to: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.
In this example, we wish to align the selected tree objects to the edge of the garden path.
Go to Edit > Align > Special Align and choose the Nearest Point option: each tree will line up along the path using each trees bounding box point that falls closest to the path. Choose the Click an existing line or element edge option. Click OK to close the dialog box, then click the edge of the path (here, the edge of the mesh). The trees line up along the path.
407
Interaction
Distribute Elements
Use this menu (Edit > Distribute) to evenly distribute selected elements using a variety of criteria:
The Distribute commands are only active if you have selected at least two elements. ArchiCAD identifies an elements right/left/top/bottom/center point according to an (invisible) bounding box around the element. For example, suppose you want to distribute elements that include the following Corner Table object:
ArchiCAD will use the centerpoint of the tables bounding box (here, illustrated in red):
Note: If you want to use a different anchor point of the elements you are distributing, use the Special Distribute options (Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute). Along X: The two selected elements at either end will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you have three windows distributed evenly along a wall.
As a result of a design change, the wall is lengthened and you add two more windows.
408
Interaction
To ensure they are all distributed evenly, select all the windows and use Edit > Distribute > Along X.
Along Y: The two selected elements at either end (vertically) will remain in place; the rest will be evenly distributed between them. For example, suppose you want to distribute chairs evenly against the back wall of the room. Select them, then use Edit > Distribute > Along Y.
Along XY: The two selected elements at either end (at top left and bottom right) will remain in place, and the rest will be distributed evenly along an XY diagonal. For example, you have nine desks in the classroom placed roughly in a V formation.
To distribute the desks precisely, select a group of 5 desks and use Edit > Distribute > Along XY.
409
Interaction
First group:
Repeat with a second group of five chairs. Final result:
410
Interaction
Special Distribute
The options in Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute let you choose which point to distribute and along what to distribute the elements: a temporary line/arc drawn by you, or any existing line/edge.
Suppose you want to distribute potted plants in a circle around a hexagonal soil holder object:
Use Edit > Distribute > Special Distribute. Choose the Draw a line or arc option, then click OK to close the dialog box. Click to start drawing and choose the Arc by centerpoint pet palette option. You will create a temporary circle around the hexagonal object. As you complete the circle, the potted plants will be distributed around it.
411
Interaction
Modify Element Sizes

Overview of Modifying Element Size Stretching Walls Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns Modifying Beams Modifying Complex Profile Elements Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements Stretching with the Marquee Tool Stretch Height Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements Splitting Elements Adjusting Elements Intersect Two Elements Create a Fillet or Chamfer Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s) Adding Element Nodes Move Nodes Curve/Straighten Element Edge
412
Interaction
Overview of Modifying Element Size

Different element types have different characteristic dimensions: length, width, height, thickness, opening angle, etc. Some of these are easiest to modify numerically, by selecting the given element, opening its settings dialog box and adjusting the relevant values. Some dimensions, however, cannot be modified numerically (for example, the length of linear elements or edges), while some others need to be fitted exactly to other elements (walls to roofs, for example) which may make numeric adjustment a tedious calculation task. You may also need to change the overall dimensions of several elements at the same time while keeping their relative proportions. In such cases, ArchiCAD allows you to modify element sizes using splitting, stretching and trimming operations. Most of the operations can be performed in three ways: Edit menu command Keyboard Shortcuts Commands from Pet Palettes In some cases, only the pet palette is available. Some general considerations: You cannot stretch Hotspots, Cameras or Detail Markers. Some GDL Object type elements are programmed to allow only specific sizes, or include smart editing hotspots to edit their shape graphically. Stretch is available for most types of selected elements in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. Only drawing elements can be stretched in the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Stretch command cannot be used on polygonal elements, but you can stretch their edges or displace any of their nodes graphically.
413
Interaction
Stretching Walls
To stretch/shrink the length of straight Walls with the menu command: 1) Select a wall. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch menu command, or the Stretch command from the pet palette. 3) Click the reference line endpoint and move it. 4) Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The wall is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. Note: Multiple Walls, Lines and Arcs with overlapping endpoints can all be stretched at the same time with the Stretch menu command, or by using the Marquee. For more information, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. When using the pet palette: 1) Select a wall. 2) Click one of the walls reference line endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the stretch icon.
Click to define the new endpoint. You can stretch a curved wall by using a special angular or radial stretch commands. See Stretching Curves.
414
Interaction
To stretch a Trapezoid wall, you can use the special Stretch Trapezoid Wall command from the pet palette: this will increase/decrease the width of the wall proportionally as you stretch it from either end.
See also Stretching or Shrinking Lines; Stretching Objects.
415
Interaction
Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns

Slanted walls and columns can be stretched and/or their slant angle can be modified with pet palette commands in 3D and Section views. (Columns can also be modified in Floor Plan views.) In 3D, you can: Slant a wall/column or change the inclination angle of a slanted wall/column by selecting a corner point (for a wall) or the center of the top plane of the column, and dragging it along the horizontal plane. (Use Modify Angle in the pet palette) Note: You cannot slant a wall whose reference line is centered. Stretch a slanted wall/column by moving its top or bottom edge up or down along the wall plane (Use Stretch slanted height for walls, or Stretch height with fixed angle for columns, in the pet palette.) Stretch a slanted wall/column vertically. (Use Stretch height in the pet palette.) As you change the wall height, the wall thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly.
In Section view, you can use the same functions. (Modify Slant Angle is possible only if the walls reference line is perpendicular to the section line.) In Section view, the Trackers Distance field provides a way to edit the wall inclination using its offset (e.g. Distance) value.)
In addition, you can edit double slanted walls: If you elevate the top or bottom surface of the double slanted wall, the angles of both lateral surfaces will change 416
Interaction
If you elevate the height of one side of the wall, both lateral surface angles remain unchanged (and the top surface may be reduced to zero thickness)
The next two methods work on double-slanted walls in Section view only if the Section line is perpendicular to the wall. If you move the top surface horizontally, both lateral surface angles will change while the top thickness remains constant If you move one of the top nodes of the double slanted wall horizontally, the angle of the surface on that side of the wall will change as will the top thickness, while the opposite surface angle will remain unchanged.
You can modify the slant angle of Columns graphically on the Floor Plan as well as in 3D.
Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Slanted Column
417
Interaction
Modifying Beams
To stretch/shrink Beams using the pet palette: 1) Select a beam on the Floor Plan or in 3D. Note: Beams can also be stretched/shrunk in Section view, if the Beam reference line is perpendicular to the Section line. 2) Click one of the beams endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the appropriate stretch (or stretch length) icon:
Click to define the new endpoint. To stretch/shrink beams with the menu command: 1) Select a beam. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command. 3) Click the reference line endpoint of the beam and move it. 4) Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length or define an entire different new location. The beam is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. To modify the inclination (slant) angle of an inclined beam, select it on the Floor Plan or in the 3D Window. Choose the Modify Angle command from the Pet Palette. Drag the beam graphically to the desired inclination angle.
418
Interaction
Modifying Complex Profile Elements

Profile Walls, Columns and Beams have special stretch and rotate commands in the pet palette.
Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile
419
Interaction
Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements

Move Polygon Node
To move a node of a selected polygon (including a polygonal wall), click the node and use the pet palettes Move node option.
The two neighboring edges will follow the stretching movement and the shape of the polygon will change accordingly.
Offset Polygon Edge

To apply an offset on a whole side of a selected polygon, click an edge and use the pet palettes Offset edge option. This will stretch the neighboring edges. This offset feature is available for chained elements as well as polygons. Selected elements will be treated temporarily as a polygon, and all polygon reshaping pet palette options will be available.
In the example below, the chained Wall on the right needs to be moved a bit further away while keeping its connection to the two horizontal Walls. Select all three Walls, click anywhere on the edge of the Wall on the right and choose the appropriate icon from the pet palette. Click when you are satisfied with the new distance.
420
Interaction
When you offset a segment of a polygon perpendicularly, new segments are correspondingly created. This can be useful, for example, when tracing a terrace.
Offset All Polygon Edges

For polygonal and chained elements only, there is a graphic offset option available in the pet palette.
Select the polygon, and click a node (or reference line endpoint). Choose the offset option in the pet palette.
A ghost contour of the proportionally increased or reduced polygon follows the movements of the cursor. Click when you are satisfied with the new polygon size.
421
Interaction
Adding and Subtracting Polygonal Shapes

You can use the pet palette to add to the shape of a polygonal element, or subtract new polygons from it. To add a new polygon to the existing one: Select the polygon and click it either on an edge or a node. From the pet palette, choose the icon with the + sign (Add to Polygon).
Draw the new polygon shape. It must intersect with the selected one or at least they should have a common edge.
Click to finish drawing the new shape, which will be automatically added to the original one.
422
Interaction
The process is the same for subtracting a shape from a polygon, but you will choose the icon with the - sign (Subtract from Polygon).
You can also use the Magic Wand for adding/subtracting a polygon shape. See Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes.
423
Interaction
Stretching with the Marquee Tool

You can stretch multiple polygons or linear elements along a particular vector by using the Marquee tool. To stretch elements inside a Marquee area: Draw a Marquee so that the nodes or endpoints you want to stretch fall inside the Marquee. Any nodes you want to keep intact should be outside the Marquee. Define a stretch vector: with the Marquee tool active, click on a node or endpoint inside the Marquee area, then click on a second point. Alternatively, choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command, and then define the stretch vector by clicking any two different points. The shape of all linear elements that have one of their endpoints inside the Marquee area, and polygonal elements that have nodes inside the marquee area, will be stretched along this vector. Note: If you dont want to stretch an element whose node is inside the Marquee, lock the element (select it, then use Edit > Locking > Lock; or lock the elements layer.).
If all the nodes of a polygon are inside the Marquee area, the polygon will be dragged instead of stretched. Stretching nodes in a Marquee area is not available in the 3D Window. Columns, Objects and Lamps cannot be stretched with the Marquee. If any of their hotspots fall inside the Marquee area, the whole object/column will be dragged along when the Marquee area is repositioned. When stretching Arcs or curved Walls with the Marquee, their central angle (i.e. the arc/ chord ratio) will remain unchanged.
424
Interaction
Stretch Height
In the 3D, Section/Elevation and IE windows, you can modify the height of selected elements graphically with Stretch height command of the pet palette.
Click a node of a selected element and choose the vertical stretch icon in the pet palette. A ghost contour of the element follows the cursor. Click to set the new height of the element.
425
Interaction
Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements

The Edit > Reshape > Resize command lets you enlarge or reduce selected elements using numeric or graphical input. This feature is available only in the Floor Plan and 3D windows, and - for 2D drawing elements only - in the Section/Elevation, 3D Document and Detail/Worksheet windows. The Resize dialog box offers additional options for resizing the thickness of Walls/Columns, GDL Objects, text elements, arrowheads and markers. 1) Select the elements you wish to transform and choose Resize.
2) In the appearing dialog box, enter a value into any one of the resize ratio fields. (Make sure the Define graphically checkbox is unchecked.)
Resize ratio: Use any one of the three ways to define the resize ratio you want. (If you enter a value in one field, the other two will be filled in automatically.) Resize wall, column thickness: For walls, columns and beams, the thickness will be resized as well as the length/height. Resize library parts: Any selected library parts will be resized. Resize all text entities: All texts and labels are resized. Resize all arrows and markers: The size of all arrows/markers are modified. 3) Click OK.
426
Interaction
4) Click in the window to define which point or edge of the elements should remain in its original location. The transformation will be executed.
To perform the operation graphically: 1) Open the Resize dialog box. 2) Check the Define Graphically checkbox. 3) Draw a transformation vector to define both the resizing ratio and the location of the resized elements. Note: Resizing does not affect grouped elements. To resize grouped elements, ungroup them first or choose Suspend Groups. (See Group Elements for more information.)
427
Interaction
Splitting Elements
You can split many selected elements (Walls, Beams, Lines, Slabs, Roofs, Meshes, Fill and Zone Polygons, Lines, Arcs, Polylines and Splines) along a line segment, arc or element edge. The Split command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. Note: You cannot split a polygon - such as a Roof element - with an arc. Note: You can split a Curtain Wall with another Curtain Wall, but you must use the Split Curtain Wall command. See Split Intersecting Curtain Walls. 1) Select the elements you wish to split. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Split command.
3) Draw a temporary splitting line, or click on an existing Line, Arc, Wall or polygon edge. 4) Click on either side of the splitting line/arc/edge with the Eyeball cursor. Note: When splitting walls, the split takes place at the point where the splitting line intersects with the reference line(s) of the selected elements. 5) Elements on the clicked side will remain selected, while elements on the other side will be deselected. The selected group of elements can be edited in the usual ways. If the selected element is intersected by an element in several locations, the Split command will split the selected element at every intersection point.
428
Interaction
Splitting is also available in the 3D Window. You can split the selected element with a vertical plane into two segments. This feature works the same way as on the Floor Plan. The splitting line is drawn in the plane of the User Origin. Note: When no elements are selected, the Split command will let you split a wall at the clicked location along any of its sides or reference line.
429
Interaction
Adjusting Elements
Use the Adjust command to extend or trim the endpoints of selected Walls, Beams, Arcs and Lines to a Line, Arc segment or element edge. 1) Select the elements you wish to adjust. 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Adjust command. 3) Draw a line segment, or click an existing line, wall, polygon edge or arc/circle. The endpoints of the selected walls and lines will be adjusted (lengthened or shortened) to meet the drawn or clicked line or curve. Only those elements will be affected that intersect (or would intersect) with the chosen line/arc/edge.
The Adjust command is available in the Floor Plan and 3D Window, and - for drawing elements only - in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, and Details and Worksheets. In 3D view, you can adjust the selected Wall or Beam to a vertical plane.
Split and Adjust Shortcut

A simple shortcut lets you adjust short elements and split long ones by the same edge. 1) Select all the elements that you wish to split or adjust. The active tool must be one of those that created the selected elements.
2) Press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key and click the edge you wish to use for splitting/adjusting.
3) The operation is immediately performed. All transformed elements will remain selected.
430
Interaction
Intersect Two Elements

You can intersect two selected Lines, Walls or circular or elliptic Arcs with each other by having them meet at their endpoints nearest point. 1) Select the two elements (they must be of the same element type). 2) Choose the Edit > Reshape > Intersect command.
431
Interaction
Create a Fillet or Chamfer

Use the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command to fillet or chamfer the intersection of two straight lines or walls, or the corner(s) of a polygon element. To open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box: Select the two lines, or the polygon element. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, or if the selected element is a polygon, choose the Fillet/Chamfer icon from the pet palette.
Choose either Fillet or Chamfer: Fillet joins the endpoints of two straight segments endpoints with an Arc. Chamfer joins the endpoints of two straight segments with a straight segment, cutting off corners.
Enter a radius for the fillet/chamfer. (The chamfer does not have a radius, but it will be drawn as the chord of arcs of the specified radius.) Note: If filleting the arc with the current radius would extend any of the neighboring vertices, the radius will be limited automatically so that the filleting arc contains the closer neighboring vertex. Click OK. Note: The Fillet, Chamfer and Intersect commands are not effective on grouped elements, unless Suspend Groups is on (See Suspend Groups.) Lines are adjusted depending on whether or not they intersect; if they do not, a new length is determined in order to make an intersection or to meet the fillet or chamfer.
432
Interaction
Apply to All Corners

To apply the Fillet or Chamfer to all corners of the selected polygon, check the Apply to All Corners checkbox. Note: This checkbox is applicable only if the selected element is a polygon. It is not available if you have selected two separate elements. If you have selected a polygon and then the Edit > Reshape > Fillet/Chamfer command, the checkbox is selected by default and uneditable; the fillet/chamfer will apply to all nodes. To apply the Fillet/Chamfer to a single node of the polygon, click on that node and use the pet palette command to open the Fillet/Chamfer dialog box.
433
Interaction
Trimming Elements to Intersection Point(s)

You can trim an element by simply removing the part extending beyond its intersection point with another element, or even cut out a part of the element between two intersection points. Trimmable elements are: Walls, Beams, Lines, Circles, Arcs, Polyline and Splines. Note: Trimming elements to a roof is a separate function in ArchiCAD. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof. To trim an element take the following steps: Choose the Edit > Reshape > Trim command, or press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (MacOS) key. The Scissors cursor appears. Move it to a trimmable element and click the segment you want to trim. Note: In the 3D window, you can also click on a Wall or Beam surface for trimming. The clicked part of the element between the two nearest intersection points will be deleted. For example, here we will trim part of the beam - the part that falls between the first two walls on the left.
434
Interaction
Adding Element Nodes

You can add new nodes to elements using the pet palette. Adding a node to a straight linear element creates an additional element. Adding a node to a polygon-type element increases the number of its edges. In the 3D Window, you can add nodes only to polygonal elements. To add a node to an element: 1) Select the element. 2) Click an edge of the element to bring up the pet palette. 3) Choose the Insert new node icon.
4) Click to define the location of the new node.
To insert a new node without moving it, double-click on a polygon edge. (The Insert node option must be active in the pet palette.) Note: You cannot add a new node to a curved element or segment; if you click Insert new node on a curved element, the curved element will be straightened out.
435
Interaction
Move Nodes
With the Move node icon of the pet palette, you can reposition the node of a polygon type element.
The connected edges will follow. You can eliminate a node by merging it into one of its neighbors.
If you merge a node to a remote node (that is, not a neighboring one), the smaller part of the polygon will be deleted.
If repositioning a node eliminates one of the connecting edges, the other node of that edge will also be deleted, together with the corresponding part of its own other connecting edge.
436
Interaction
If you reposition a node so that the polygon edges intersect each other (but no connecting edge is eliminated), the polygon will be split.
When repositioning a bent edges endpoint, the arc segment will be stretched in a way that its central angle (the arc-chord ratio) remains the same.
With the Fillet function (use the Fillet/Chamfer pet palette icon), you can replace a polygon node by a tangential arc whose radius can be set in the Fillet/Chamfer Radius dialog box.
For a detailed description, see Create a Fillet or Chamfer.
437
Interaction
Curve/Straighten Element Edge

With the pet palettes Curve edge function, you can curve a segment of a straight element - such as a wall - by dragging its edge or reference line.
The resulting arc will cross the two endpoints of the clicked edge and the point that has been dragged.
Note: If the bent segment of a polygon intersects any of the other polygon edges, ArchiCAD will regularize the polygons shape, which may result in cutting the polygon into several parts.
To straighten a curved element edge, select the curved element, then select the Insert New Node command from the pet palette.
438
Interaction
Explode into Current View

Choosing Edit > Reshape > Explode into Current View will turn selected elements (Floor Plan and other 2D windows only) into basic elements (Lines without arrowheads, Circles, Arcs, Elliptic arcs, Splines, unframed Fills, single-line Texts). You have the option to delete or retain the original elements.
Note: If Autogroup is On, the exploded elements will be created in grouped mode. Note that exploding a construction element with the first option (Keep drawing primitives only) means that it no longer exists as a construction element. Consequently, it will disappear from other model views (model-type Sections, Elevations, IEs, 3D Documents). A third option appears if the exploded Drawing contains layers (that is, if it is a DWG file or if it is derived from an ArchiCAD view):
Keep Drawing primitives on elements original layers (Original layers are the same layer as the Drawings layer). If you uncheck this box, you may avoid creating large numbers of unneeded layers in ArchiCAD. After an Explode function, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. Some examples: Slabs, Roofs and Meshes are decomposed into lines Walls and Columns are decomposed into Lines and Fills (Doors and Windows inserted into Walls are also exploded). Doors and Windows (if selected without the Wall they are placed into) are decomposed like GDL Objects into 2D elements and are replaced by empty hole type openings.
439
Interaction
Dimensions are decomposed into Lines, Texts and the basic elements of arrowheads (Lines, Circles, Arcs, Fills). Polylines are decomposed into Lines and Arcs. GDL Objects are decomposed into basic 2D drawing elements. Explode has no effect in the following cases: In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, cut construction elements cannot be exploded Section/Elevation/IE lines and Cameras Basic 2D elements.
440
Interaction
Create Element Duplicates

You will often need to create exact duplicates of a particular element. Often, the simplest way to duplicate is to use Copy/Paste. See Basic Editing Operations.
Copy/Paste Elements Between Stories

The Story Settings Dialog Box provides a quick way to copy elements from one story to another without having to redraw them for each story. It is also easy to use graphical editing to drag, rotate, or mirror one or more copies of a selected element, or to use the multiply function. These are described in the following sections:
Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies Multiply Elements
441
Interaction
Drag, Rotate, Mirror Element Copies

You can also create exact duplicates of an element inside the same project by dragging one or several copies of the selected element. The selection can be made with either the Arrow tool or the Marquee tool. To Drag, Rotate, or Mirror one copy of an element, select the element and choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu.
Another way is to choose the plain Drag/Rotate/Mirror command from the pet palette, then press Ctrl (Windows) or Alt/Opt (MacOS). (This adds a small + sign to the cursor; press Ctrl again to undo the Copy feature). A copy of the selected element will be dragged, rotated or mirrored. Click to place the copy, which will now be selected instead of the original.
442
Interaction
To Drag or Rotate multiple copies of an element, select the element, choose the desired command from the Edit > Move menu or the context menu (or use Ctrl + Alt (Windows) or Cmd + Opt/Alt (MacOS) as a shortcut). You will see a ++ sign appear. Click the element to drag or rotate its copy to its new position. You can place any number of copies. Double-click to finish placing copies.
Note: When rotating copies, they will all be placed along the same rotation axis. This feature works in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. In Section/Elevation/IE windows, the feature works on added drawing elements and Doors and Windows (dragging only). In Detail Drawings, you can use it on any drawing elements. In the 3D Window, Drag/Rotate/Mirror is available only for added Drawing elements.
443
Interaction
Multiply Elements
If you need to create a number of identical elements inside the same project following a definite pattern, for example at equal distances from each other, use the Edit > Move > Multiply command, or the Multiply command from the pet palette. (In Section-type windows, you cannot create new construction elements, so the Multiply command is available only for 2D elements such as lines.) Multiply creates any number of exact copies of selected elements on the current story, using one the following methods: Drag multiplies the copies along a straight path defined by the reference line. Rotate multiplies the copies along an arc, using the angle specified in the reference arc. Elevate stacks the copies with a vertical displacement. Note that this option is grayed when working in a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document or Detail/Worksheet window. Matrix will place the copies of the selected element(s) to a matrix defined by two perpendicular reference lines. When choosing the Matrix option, you need to define the number of copies for both the first and the second stroke of the matrix. Two parameters for the vertical displacement can also be set.
In the lower half of the dialog box, set the following options: Number of copies: Enter the number of copies in the multiply operation.
444
Interaction
Vertical displacement: If you are multiplying an element in a 2D window, use this field to enter a value (if any) that is added to the elevation of each subsequent copy of the multiplied object, even during dragging, rotating or arraying the copies. If you want such a vertical displacement when multiplying the element(s) in the 3D window, click the Vertical Displacement: On radio button.
When you close the Multiply dialog box and then carry out the Multiply operation, you will define the vertical displacement vector graphically, as shown with this multiplied and rotated wall:
If you are using a vertical displacement (in either a 2D or 3D window) as part of the Multiply operation, the Set Home Story by Elevation checkbox appears: if you check it, newly created elements will be assigned a Home Story based on their respective story locations. See Set Home Story by Elevation. If you uncheck it, new elements will have the same Home Story as the original element you are multiplying.
445
Interaction
Increment spaces the copies by an incremental distance equal to the length of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute spaces the copies evenly between the start and endpoints of the reference line or reference arc. Distribute-1 will also space the copies evenly between the starting point and the endpoint of the reference line or arc, but the distance is divided by the Number of copies + 1 and no copy will be placed at the endpoint. Spread will place the copies of the multiplied element to equal distance from each other along the reference line or arc all the way until the reference is drawn. In this case, instead of defining the number of copies, you set the spacing in length or in degrees between two neighboring copies. When you have defined your choices, click OK in the Multiply dialog box and perform the operation by dragging the cursor to the desired location.
446
Interaction
Drag & Drop

The Drag & Drop technique is familiar to both MacOS and Windows users as a shortcut for opening files or for copying and pasting elements of different types into Windows of the same application or between applications. Since ArchiCAD has many different Window types, the smart implementation of Drag & Drop allows you to copy elements from Windows by pasting data in the receiving Window. You can also drag & drop GDL Objects (Library Parts) from GDL Object Web Plug-in enabled web pages directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or to the Embedded Objects list of the Library Manager dialog box. Data can only be dropped into a Window if the receiving Window can accommodate the dragged data type.
Dragging and Dropping Text

The following possibilities exist for transferring text: From any ArchiCAD Text Window or from a Text Window of any other Drag & Drop-capable application to any other ArchiCAD Text Window From any Text Window to any 2D Window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet, Library Part 2D Symbol) with the default parameters Moving or copying text within the same Text Window Creating text type clipping files in the File Manager Pasting clipping files into a text type Window Dropping plain text files into a text type Window (with some restrictions)
Dragging and Dropping Drawings

The easiest way to add a Drawing from an external ArchiCAD file is to open the external project structure in the Navigator, select a View or Drawing in the Navigator, and drag it onto the Layout in the Layout Window of the current project. For more information, see Placing Drawings Onto the Layout.
Dragging and Dropping Pictures

The following possibilities exist for transferring picture type data: Dropping a picture file into a GDL Object Preview Window Dropping a picture file into the Floor Plan to paste it as a Figure Creating picture type clipping files in the MacOS Finder Pasting clipping files into the GDL Object Preview Window
Dragging and Dropping GDL Object Files

You can drag and drop GDL Object files from the MacOS Finder or the file manager directly into ArchiCAD Projects, the Object Settings dialog box or the Embedded Objects folder of the Library Manager.
447
Interaction
Dropping an Object into the Floor Plan activates the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and the newly placed element becomes the default element for the given Object type. It is possible to place several GDL Objects at the same time using Drag & Drop. Windows and Doors can only be dropped into a Wall.
Dragging and Dropping Floor Plan Elements

If there is a selection on the Floor Plan defined either with a marquee area or through individual selection with the Arrow, pressing the mouse button and dragging the cursor out of the ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window will initiate a Drag & Drop operation. The following can be copied: Floor Plan elements (in module format) Selected elements on the Floor Plan in picture format (for example, into the Project Preview Window) The 2D and/or the 3D script of the selected elements in text format 3D GDL script is only generated if the drop is made into the 3D Script window. The 2D script of the selected element can be dropped into any other text type window.
Dragging and Dropping DWG/DXF Objects

Drag & Drop is available as a way to download DWG/DXF objects from the web. A special idrop technique is also available for Windows only. For more information, see Opening with i-Drop (Windows Only).
448
Interaction
Parameter Transfer
Use Parameter Transfer to: Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default Inject Default Settings to Placed Element Parameter Transfer is available: on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Document and 3D windows for most element types In Section/Elevation/IE and Detail/Worksheet windows, for drawing elements only You can also use a form of Parameter transfer between two library parts of the same type. See Parameter Transfer Between Objects.
Parameter Transfer Commands

Use the parameter transfer shortcuts: Pick Up Parameters: Alt Inject Parameters: Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS) Parameter Transfer commands are also available in the Standard Toolbar and at Edit > Element Settings > Pick Up Parameters and Inject Parameters.
Transfer Parameters From One Element To Another

Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to transfer. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 5) Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. Note: It makes no difference whether the eyedropper icon is full or half-full, as long as it is not empty.
6) Click the element. 7) Now move your cursor to the element to which you want to transfer these parameters.
449
Interaction
8) Press Ctrl+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) cursor.
9) Click to transfer the parameters.
Notes: The transferred attributes will also be loaded into the Find & Select Palettes corresponding fields, provided that the Find & Select Palette is open during the parameter transfer. (See Find and Select Elements.) The transferred parameters will be the default choices when opening any of the corresponding Attributes dialog boxes (Line Types, Pens & Colors, Fill Types, Materials, Composites, Zone Categories).
Pick Up Elements Parameters to Use as Default

1) Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to pick up. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 2) Press Alt. The cursor changes to the Pick Up Parameters (eyedropper) icon. The clicked elements parameters are now the Tools default settings. The next such element you place will use these settings.
Inject Default Settings to Placed Element

1) Move your cursor over the element whose parameters you wish to change to the default settings. (The Element Information Highlight gives you feedback on the element you are focusing on.) 2) Press CTRL+Alt (Alt/Opt-Cmd on MacOS). The cursor changes to the Inject Parameters (syringe) icon.
450
Interaction
3) Click the element. Its parameters now change to the elements Default Settings.
451
Interaction
Group Elements
To create a Group, select elements and do one of the following: Use the Edit > Grouping > Group command Use the shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd + G Click the Group command from the Arrange Elements toolbar.
Several groups can, in turn, be grouped together into a single higher-level group. Grouped elements can then be selected and modified as a group, (unless you temporarily suspend the group to allow editing of individual elements - see Suspend Groups). Grouped elements are distinguished by their large, empty selection dots. If you select several groups simultaneously, each groups selection dots will have a different color.
The following element types cannot be grouped: any of the Dimension types, Zones, Labels, Section/Elevation/IE lines, Cameras. Doors and Windows can only be grouped along with the Wall they are placed into.
Suspend Groups
You may need to perform only a single operation on a particular element in the group. In this case, ungrouping altogether is burdensome, since you will have to select all the elements again to recreate the group after you have finished the operation. The solution is to temporarily suspend groups by choosing the Suspend Group toggle icon in the Standard Toolbar, or at Edit > Grouping > Suspend Groups (shortcut: Alt/Opt+G).
(The Suspend Groups icon is also available in the Control Box.) By activating Suspend Groups, you can select and modify grouped elements separately. Activating Suspend Groups means that ALL groups are temporarily rendered inactive: single elements can be selected and edited individually, even if they are part of a complex group hierarchy.
452
Interaction
To re-activate the Group function, just toggle Suspend Groups to OFF again. Note: To change the settings of a single element in a group without using Suspend Groups, use Parameter Transfer (see Inject Default Settings to Placed Element). This parameter transfer will affect only the clicked element, and not the rest of the elements in the group.
Ungroup
To make all elements constituting a group independent again, choose Edit > Grouping > Ungroup (shortcut: Ctrl/Cmd+Shift+G). Ungroup is also available from the Arrange Elements toolbar.) Clicking Ungroup with Suspend Groups ON will detach any selected elements from their groups and break down all groups into single independent elements, no matter how complex the nested grouping is. Clicking Ungroup with the Suspend Groups toggle OFF, for a selection consisting of lowerlevel groups, the selected group will first be divided into the sub-groups it comprises. Thus, you may need to repeat the Edit > Grouping> Ungroup command several times before an element can be selected and edited individually.
Autogroup
Edit > Grouping > Autogroup, a toggle command (shortcut: Alt+G), lets you group elements at the same time you create them (instead of creating elements first and then grouping them). The Autogroup toggle command is also available in the Standard Toolbar and in the Arrange Elements toolbar. If the Autogroup command is on, chained polygonal and rectangular elements (such as PolyWalls, PolyRoofs, etc.) will automatically be created as a group. Components of exploded elements will also be grouped. Autogroup is activated by default.
Operations on Grouped Elements

The following operations can be performed simultaneously on all the elements constituting the group: Selection The following Edit menu functions: Drag, Rotate, Mirror, Multiply Other operations (such as Unify and Fillet/Chamfer) can be performed on individual elements only, after the elements are ungrouped or the group is suspended.
Groups and Layers

Grouping elements does not change their attribute assignments, which means that each element remains on its own Layer. If some elements of a Group are in an invisible Layer: Elements on the hidden Layer will be invisible. When editing the group (by drag, rotate, mirror, multiply) elements on hidden layers will also change their position along with the rest of the group.
453
Interaction
If some elements of a Group are in a locked Layer (see Lock/Unlock Elements): Elements on the locked Layer will be visible on the Floor Plan, but they will cause the entire group to be locked. The group will not be affected by drag, rotate, mirror and multiply. When selecting the group, all of its elements will be selected, but with grey dots. Use the Suspend Groups command to edit those grouped items that are not in a locked layer.
454
Interaction
Lock/Unlock Elements
The Edit > Locking > Lock command locks the selected items to prevent them from being accidentally modified. Locked elements can still be selected and used for relative construction; Guide Lines are still available; and you can pick up their settings through parameter transfer (see Parameter Transfer Between Objects). Note: Locking a layer will have the same effect - it locks all elements which are located on that layer. The Edit > Locking > Unlock command unlocks the selected item(s). With the Unlock All command, you can unlock all locked elements, even if they are not selected. You can also use the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar for these actions.
455
Interaction
Display Order
When drawing a Project with ArchiCAD, overlapping elements will be drawn according to a specified stacking order. By default, elements are stacked in an order typically used in architectural drawings. By default, stacking order is determined by element classes, of which there are six. Regardless of the sequence in which elements are placed, those in the first class will be placed in the foreground, second class in the level behind it, and so on.
The element classes are in descending order of class: 1) Annotation (Text, Labels, all Dimension types, Zone Stamps) 2) 2D artwork (Lines, Circles, Splines, Hotspots) 3) Library Parts (Objects, Lamps, Stairs) 4) 3D structures (Walls, Beams, Slabs, Doors, Windows, Columns, Roofs, Meshes) 5) 2D polygons (Fills, Zone Polygons) 6) Figures
Display Order of Overlapping Elements

Overlapping within the same class depends on the order in which you place the elements, although walls with the same fills will display clean intersections. When selecting overlapping elements within the same class, you can select them in sequence using Tab. See Selection of Overlapping Elements.
Custom Stacking Order

ArchiCADs default stacking order is appropriate in most cases, but you may wish to place elements in a different overlapping position. For instance, for a Fill to overlap a 2D element or an Object, a set of commands in Edit > Display Order hierarchical menu or the relevant buttons of the Arrange Elements toolbar let you override the default stacking order element by element.
456
Interaction
On newly placed elements, the commands work as follows: Bring Forward: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all the unchanged elements of their own and any lower classes, but will still stay below the elements of higher classes. Bring to Front: On this command, selected element(s) will overlap all other existing elements. Send Backward: On this command, selected element(s) will be overlapped by (sent behind) all the unchanged elements of their own and higher classes, but will overlap the elements of lower classes. Send to Back: On this command, selected element(s) will become overlapped by all other existing elements. Reset Default Order: This command restores the default overlapping order described previously.
Mechanism of the Stacking Order

Both the default stacking order and the customization commands are based on two ordering mechanisms: classes and stack levels. ArchiCAD places elements in 14 stack levels. Each level can contain any of the element types. The final stacking order you see on screen and on printouts is based on stack level and element class. All elements on a level will overlap elements on lower stack levels, regardless of class. New elements are always placed into the preferred stack level of their own class. Stack level preference is as follows: 1-4: Void by default 5: Annotation 6: 2D Artwork 7: Library Parts 8: 3D Structures 9: 2D Polygons 10: Figures 11-14: Void by default By default, the upper and lower 4 stack levels are empty. You can bring or send elements of any type into these stack levels with the Edit > Display Order commands detailed above. For example, bringing a Fill forward from level 9 to level 8, which is the default level of structures, means that the Fill will overlap all the unchanged fills remaining on level 9, but will still be overlapped by all the unchanged structures on level 8.
457
Interaction
If you bring it forward again, it will overlap all the remaining structures. However, it will still stay below all of the unchanged Library Parts on level 7. This way, you can move it forward until it overlaps the higher levels.
Of course you can bring other elements forward as well, which will again overlap the changed Fill.
The Bring to Front and Send to Back commands move the selected elements until they overlap (or are overlapped by) all of the existing elements. This is not necessarily the 1st or the 14th level, which means that in most cases it will still be possible to place other elements above or below them. Text or Dimensions brought up to the top stack level cannot be overlapped. For example, if you want a Fill to overlap them, you will have to send the Text one level backwards. If you attempt to move elements forward that are already placed on the top level, or to move elements backward from the bottom of the stack, you will be alerted. When moving several elements placed at different stack levels forward or backward, each element will only move one level. When bringing to front or sending to back elements of different types, they will overlap (or be overlapped by) all existing elements, and will retain their stacking order in relation to each other. Zones and Fills are compound elements consisting of components of two different classes (Zone Polygons and Zone Stamps, Fills and their area texts). These two components always keep their order according to their classes, for instance area texts always overlap their fills. Although you can change their overlapping order separately, Fills and Zone Fills can never overlap their own area texts and zone stamps and vice versa, forcing the other component to move with them if necessary. The stacking order will be preserved on printer or raster plotter output. In DXF/DWG output, all elements will be transparent, meaning that hidden or partially overlapped elements will be entirely visible.
458
Interaction
Magic Wand
About the Magic Wand How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings
459
Interaction
About the Magic Wand

The Magic Wand saves you work by finding and tracing a linear or polygon shape from among existing elements, and then generating a new element based on the polygon. The Magic Wand lets you create special shapes that are not available for that particular tool type or would be tedious to construct segment by segment. Since it creates polygonal shapes by nature, the Magic Wand will ignore geometry method settings (such as Rotated Rectangle) for the current tool. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. The Magic Wand works in both the 2D and 3D Windows and recognizes the following element types: Wall, Beam, Slab, Roof, Curtain Wall, Fill, Mesh, Line, Arc, Polyline, and Spline. (In Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows, the Magic Wand recognizes only 2D drawingtype elements). The Magic Wand recognizes elements that are locked, displayed from remote stories or a Trace Reference, reserved by others or outside your workspace.
How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand Using the Magic Wand in 3D Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes Magic Wand Settings
460
Interaction
How to Create an Element with the Magic Wand

1) From the Toolbox, select the new type of element you want to create. 2) Activate the Magic Wand. Press the Spacebar, or click the Magic Wand icon in the Control Box to make it appear. Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. The Magic Wand has three different shapes for identifying: nodes
edges
empty space and surfaces
3) Click the Magic Wand to find and trace a polygon shape. If you click on an edge or node, the Magic Wand creates a polygon by tracing that element and/or finding an element chain: it runs along that edge and traces the element chains whose endpoints fall within that edge.
If you click in empty space or on a surface, the Magic Wand searches for and traces the closed geometric area formed by the nearest elements (whether chained together or merely intersecting), and generates the resulting polygon.
461
Interaction
You can refine the Magic Wand function by selecting one or more elements. In this case, the Magic Wand will only take the selected elements into account when searching for chained elements or a bounded area.
4)
The new elements are generated. The new elements are not linked to the originals and can be manipulated independently. If the original shapes are superfluous, you can delete them. If Offset or Multi-Offset has been activated, you can complete the offset function after the Magic Wand has created the new polygon. If you are creating a single Roof, you must first draw a pivot line and define the slope before creating the polygon with the Magic Wand. If you are creating a Fill with a custom origin, you will first generate the polygon with the Magic Wand, then draw the fill orientation vector. All of the characteristics of the new elements are determined by the current default settings of the corresponding tool. You should always check that these are correct either before or after using the Magic Wand, especially if the elements are intended to have a specific relationship to each other, such as a roof resting on a Wall.
462
Interaction
Using the Magic Wand in 3D

In 3D, the Magic Wand feature works as in the Floor Plan, but instead of using only the top view of the elements, each element is considered the way it lies in space. When searching for the contours of the new element, ArchiCAD will only look at the elements that are actually intersected by the clicked plane. The clicked plane is always the horizontal plane through the clicked surface point or through the User Origin (e.g., when clicking inside polygon walls or beams into space).
463
Interaction
Using the Magic Wand to Add/Subtract Polygon Shapes

Instead of defining a new polygon, you can use the Magic Wand tool to add or subtract the shape of an existing polygon (of the same or a different element type). 1) Select the polygon from which you wish to subtract another shape. In this example we want to subtract a complex polygonal shape from a slab. 2) Choose the Subtract from Polygon icon in the pet palette. 3) Move the cursor onto the polygon that you want to subtract and activate the Magic Wand (press the spacebar). 4) Click to complete.
Verify that the operation has been performed by deleting or dragging away the other polygon or viewing the shape in 3D. Or select the polygon and note the contour around its hole.
Note: Drawing a polygon hole by clicking inside the selected elements boundary with its tool active is similar to subtraction, but it lets you temporarily create a self-intersecting shape. Subtraction always creates a valid shape. For more information, see Magic Wand Settings.
464
Interaction
Magic Wand Settings

Use the Options > Magic Wand Settings command to open this dialog box. When creating curved Walls and polygon-type elements based on Arcs, Circles and Splines, the approximation is based on the state of the Magic Wand Settings dialog box. With the two radio buttons on the right, you can choose between two tracing methods. Best Match: Curved segments (when applicable) will follow as best as possible the natural form of Circles, Arcs and Splines. Prefer Linear Segments: Only linear segments are used. The four radio buttons on the left allow you to choose from a set of options to approximate curves with linear segments. Deviation from Curves: Enter a value to define the maximum deviation of the polygon from the original curved element. Segments Along Arcs: Define the number of segments along an Arc. Segments Along Circles: Define the number of segments along a Circle. In this case, arcs will be transformed into a number of segments corresponding to the part of the circle they represent. Segment Length: Enter a value to define the segment length for transformations resulting in segments of uniform length. Note: If you choose the Best Match method and real curves cannot be created, ArchiCAD will try to approximate curves in the hierarchical order represented in this dialog box.
465
Interaction
Virtual Trace: Using References to Edit and Compare Model Views and Drawings
About Trace References Access Trace Reference Commands Show/Hide Trace Reference Choosing a Trace Reference Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference Move Reference Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying Rebuild Trace Reference Compare Reference with Active Trace & Reference Palette
466
Interaction
About Trace References

In ArchiCAD, you can opt to display two different views concurrently in any model or layout window: the Active Content - the actual model or drawing you are currently working on (Active) the Trace Reference (Reference), optionally placed alongside, on top of or underneath the currently Active content. This acts as a kind of underlay, making it easy to compare multiple model views/drawings on the same screen. Any viewpoint, view or Layout can be a Reference beneath any active Model or Layout window: Typically, in Model Windows, you will use any of the following as a Reference: Floor Plan Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document Detail, Worksheet And in the Layout Window: Layout, Master Layout For example, you can draw a roof detail in a Detail window (the Active Content) while seeing the relevant wall section as a Reference. A Section shown as a Reference next to another Section:
A Floor Plan shown as a Reference beneath a Detail:
467
Interaction
Any given window can display only one Reference at a time. However, as you navigate among your project windows, you can display a different Reference in each: The Floor Plan window has a single current Reference for all stories Each Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet, Detail, Layout and Master Layout can have its own unique Reference. Reference settings are saved along with the window (for example, each Section in your project can have a Reference of a different color and filter different elements). References are also saved with the project file. The Trace Reference is essentially a temporary editing aid that is tied to the currently active window. When using the Print command to output a model window or a Layout, you can opt to print the currently visible Reference as well. However, when you place a Drawing onto a Layout, the Drawing content will not include the Reference. The user can offset and rotate the Reference as needed, though logical default Reference settings for each combination of Active/Reference views will usually align them correctly for the particular context. On-Screen View Options affect the Reference just as they affect the Active. The cursor is sensitive to elements in the Reference. Consequently: You can use the Pick Up Parameters command (Alt +C) on Reference elements, then transfer the parameters to an element in the Active. You can use the Trim command, the Magic Wand, and snap points with elements in the Reference to edit Active elements.
468
Interaction
Access Trace Reference Commands

Reference-related commands are easily accessible from several points in the interface. The Standard Toolbar contains the Trace toggle icon, plus a pop-up list of related commands.
Right-click any eligible item in the Navigator and choose Show as Trace Reference to show that item (e.g. viewpoint, view, Drawing or Layout) as the Reference for the current window.
Use the Trace & Reference Palette (Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference) to keep the Trace commands on screen if you use these commands often, or if you use several of the commands in sequence. Use the View > Trace Options command.
469
Interaction
Many Trace Reference-related commands are available from the context menu of an ArchiCAD window that shows a Reference: just right-click in empty space in the window, provided that no elements are currently selected.
470
Interaction
Show/Hide Trace Reference

The Trace button is a toggle command available in the Standard Toolbar. Click the button to show or hide the Trace Reference in the current window.
Click the sticky pop-up control of the Trace toggle icon to access Trace Reference-related commands.
471
Interaction
Choosing a Trace Reference

Three item types can be chosen as a Reference: 1) Viewpoints. Any item in the Navigator's Project Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference Viewpoint will always reflect the current settings of the active window. 2) Views. Any view in the Navigator's View Map (except 3D window items and list-type items) can be set as a Reference. The Reference's view settings are independent of the active window. For example, if you change the layer combination in the active window, the Reference wont change. If a view is deleted from the view map, its Reference is no longer available. 3) Layouts (and their drawings). To choose a Reference to display, do one of the following: Select the item from the Navigator and right-click to bring up its context menu. Choose Show as Trace Reference.
or Choose an item from the Choose Reference list. The Choose Reference list is accessible from: - the Standard Toolbars Reference commands
472
Interaction
- the windows context menu Reference commands
- the Trace & Reference Palette
The Choose Reference list is dynamic - the appearing choices depend on the content of the active window, and the most recent/most logical Reference choices will appear in the list. Recent References are listed at the top Other relevant References, if any, follow. If the active window is: - Floor Plan: the Choose Reference list includes three possibilities that are relative to the current story, so that the Reference will change as you navigate among stories: Above or Below Current Story will always show the story above (or below) the current story as a Reference. Previous Story will always show the last story you were on as a Reference. - Model-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). - Drawing-type Section/Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes the relevant Model Section/Elevation. - Interior Elevation: the Choose Reference list includes all viewpoints of the IE group (if any), plus the stories which fall into its vertical range (except if the range is unlimited). - Detail or Worksheet: the Choose Reference list includes their source viewpoints. Note: Independent viewpoints (e.g. an independent Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet) have no model source; their Choose Ghost list shows the viewpoint itself. - Layout: the Choose Reference list includes the source view (if available) of the placed Drawings. Entire Structure Display: This option will display the current view/viewpoint as a Trace Reference in Entire Structure Display form.
473
Interaction
Next in the Choose Ghost list: any Layouts containing drawings that originated with the current viewpoint. The chosen Reference appears in a predefined default position (appropriate to the type of the Active Content and the Reference item). You can move the Reference at any time. See Move Reference. If you choose a recent Reference, it will include any manual transformations (drag, rotate) which the user applied the last time he showed this Reference. All user-defined Reference-related parameters, such as the list of recent References and recently chosen Reference colors, are saved together with the project file.
474
Interaction
Set Color/Visibility Options for Trace Reference

To set the color of the Reference and the visibility of elements on the Reference, first open the Trace & Reference Palette. (Use Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference, or choose Trace & Reference from the list of Trace Reference commands.)
Use the controls in the top half of this palette to set the References color and element visibility options. Change you make here apply to the Reference of the current window only. However, to apply the settings in this pop-up to all References in the project, click the Apply Settings to All References button.
475
Interaction
Move Reference
These commands are accessible from the list of Reference commands; or from the Trace & Reference palette. Use this icon to drag the Reference to another location.
Use this icon to rotate the Reference.
Use this icon if you want to reset the Reference to its original default position after you have moved it.
Note: The same commands are available from the context menu by right-clicking into any window showing a Reference; and from the Standard Toolbars pop-up list of Reference commands. In the image below, a Section viewpoint is displayed as a Reference and rotated alongside the Floor Plan that contains the Section marker:
Drag/Rotate commands applied to the Reference will be reflected in the Tracker's coordinate data (coordinate data are calculated according to the Active's coordinate system, not the Reference's.)
476
Interaction
Switch Reference with Active: How to Access Elements within the Reference for Editing or Copying
Elements on the Reference cannot be selected or edited. However, by switching the Reference and Active views temporarily, you can select and edit elements in the Reference. For example, you can use the Switch Reference with Active command if you need to paste certain Reference elements into the Active view: 1) First, use the Switch Reference with Active command (from the list of Trace Reference commands, or the Trace & Reference palette.)
This changes the Reference into the Active (now you can edit its elements), and the Active into a Reference. Note: This command is not available if a Drawing Section is active and its own Model-based Section is the Reference. 2) Select, edit and/or copy the required elements. 3) Once again, use the Switch Reference with Active command and return to the original Active content. 4) If you copied elements to the clipboard, now you can paste these into the Active. This workflow can be used, for example, if you are working in a Worksheet window, while the Floor Plan model has changed. To update your Worksheet, display the Floor Plan as the Reference, identify the differences, switch Reference with Active, copy the updated parts you need, switch Reference and Active (again), and paste into the Worksheet window. Note: When pasting into a drawing-type window (such as a Worksheet), construction elements will be exploded into their 2D components.
477
Interaction
Rebuild Trace Reference

Use the Rebuild command (available from the Trace & Reference Palette or from the list of Trace Reference commands) to rebuild the Reference to reflect any changes in the source view.
The Reference will be rebuilt automatically as a result of certain other user actions, such as navigating to another window and panning inside a window. However, editing a model view will not automatically rebuild the Reference; you must use the Rebuild Reference button. Note the following: If the References source is a manual-rebuild model, then the Reference is rebuilt only when that model Section/Elevation/IE is manually rebuilt. Similarly, References containing manual-update drawings will be rebuilt along with the drawing. If the Reference is an Auto-Rebuild Model, it is possible that you make changes in the Active, yet these are not reflected in the Reference, even after you navigate or pan, because to avoid slowing down the program - you have unchecked Update Autorebuild Model Viewpoints continuously in Options > Work Environment > More Options. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed. If the Reference contains an Auto-update Drawing, such a Reference will not be continuously rebuilt, to avoid slowing down the program. Use the Rebuild Reference button when needed.
478
Interaction
Compare Reference with Active

ArchiCAD provides several functions to help you identify and understand differences between the Reference and the Active content, especially when the Reference is on top of the Active content, or vice versa, and you need additional help to see the differences clearly. The best way to compare the two will depend on your particular task. You can use several of these functions at the same time to get the most accurate information. All the Compare functions can be used on the fly while editing your Active content. They are on-screen only functions, with no effect on output. To access these functions, open Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference.
For details on each control, see Trace & Reference Palette. Each of the techniques below can be useful in visually comparing the Reference with the Active. Try them out to see which works best.
Tip 1: Use Separate Colors for Active and Reference

You can set separate display colors for the Reference and the Active content: a custom color for each, or else retain the original colors. You may want to set two sharply different, custom colors for each of the views - say, red and blue - to make it easy to distinguish one from the other. To set the colors, use the pop-up icons (one each for Reference and Active) in the middle of the Palette.
Note: Even if youve set separate colors, the background fills of one view may obscure the underlying elements in the other view.
479
Interaction
Tip 2: Make Fills and Zones Transparent

Note the Make Fills and Zones Transparent toggle at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette: activate this to make fills and zones transparent in both the Reference and Active views. This way you will uncover information that otherwise might have been covered up by a fill in the top view. This switch has only a temporary effect and does not affect the settings of the model elements.
Tip 3: Reverse Display Order of Reference and Active

When comparing the Reference to the Active, it may help to switch their display order. Click the Reference on Top button at the bottom of the Trace & Reference Palette.
If your Reference was previously underneath the Active, this command will change them around, placing the Reference on top of the Active.
480
Interaction
Tip 4: Optimize Intensity of Reference vs. Active

A simple way to make an initial visual comparison is to use the Intensity sliders of the Reference and Active. Note: This method works best if the Active is shown in its original colors, and the Reference in a different color.
Pull the Reference intensity slider back and forth. On screen, the effect will be to flash the Reference on and off, allowing you to identify places on screen where there are differences from the Active View. Then you can zoom in on these locations and analyze the differences.
Tip 5: Use the Splitter Bar to Turn the Page

This function is useful for identifying differences between the Reference and Active when they overlap. You will drag a Splitter bar across the window, with the Reference on one side and the Active on the other. The effect is like turning the page of an overlay to see what is beneath. To activate the Splitter function, click the Splitter icon from the Trace & Reference Palette.
481
Interaction
Four splitter handles appear, one on each edge of the screen. Choose any one of them and move it in a perpendicular direction, to create either a horizontal or vertical splitter bar.
As you drag it, the content on either side of the splitter changes dynamically.
Once you let go of the mouse button, the splitter bar returns to its original position.
Tip 6: Move the Reference Over Temporarily (Displace Reference)

Use this function when you have zoomed in to an area where the two views are different, and you want to quickly check what is on the view underneath. Click the Temporarily Displace Reference button in the Trace & Reference Palette.
482
Interaction
Click in the window. The cursor changes to the familiar hand shape, allowing the user to nudge the Reference temporarily (i.e. to move it out of the way). Click again, and the Reference jumps back to its original position.
483
Interaction
Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows

Why Consolidate? Linework Consolidation Fill Consolidation
484
Interaction
Why Consolidate?
Several ArchiCAD features involve the creation of exploded elements. Model-based Details, Worksheets and Drawing Sections create 2D elements (lines, fills) out of the model construction elements. Also, imported DWG drawings appear in ArchiCAD in 2D form, as a large collection of lines and fills. In these Drawing-type windows, you may wish to fine-tune the view before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded lines and fills often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. Line and Fill Consolidation are separate functions and are executed independently of each other. Select the elements, then execute either the Linework Consolidation or the Fill Consolidation command. (Edit > Reshape > Linework/Fill Consolidation).
485
Interaction
Linework Consolidation
In the window, select at least two line-type elements you wish to include in the Linework Consolidation process. Line-type elements are straight-lines, polylines, arcs and circles. Note: Linework Consolidation does not affect any line-type element having an arrowhead. The Linework Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation) brings up the Linework Consolidation Wizard. This command is also available from the Edit Elements toolbar.
Now page through the wizard (click Next at the bottom of every screen) and check the boxes of every Line Consolidation option that you wish to execute as part of the consolidation process. For details, see Linework Consolidation Settings. On the last screen, click Consolidate to execute Linework Consolidation. Following the linework consolidation, a report appears, listing the number of elements (if any) that have been deleted or merged for each type of line consolidation. At the bottom of this page, a checkbox gives you the option of using the simplified Linework Consolidations Settings (rather than the Wizard) the next time you issue the command.
486
Interaction
Linework Consolidation Settings contains the same options as the Wizard, but all options are accessible in a single dialog box.
487
Interaction
Fill Consolidation
In the current window, select at least two fills that you wish to include in the Fill Consolidation process. The Fill Consolidation command (Edit > Reshape > Fill Consolidation) brings up Fill Consolidation Settings. Check the options you wish to execute as part of Fill Consolidation.
488
Virtual Building
Virtual Building
ArchiCAD Model Views Construction Elements Parametric Objects Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs Custom Stairs with StairMaker Element Extras Model View Options On-Screen View Options Partial Structure Display
489
Virtual Building
ArchiCAD Model Views

About Model Views in ArchiCAD Floor Plan Window Stories Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan 3D Window Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) 3D Document Details Worksheets Managing Markers in ArchiCAD Interactive Schedule Project Indexes
490
Virtual Building
About Model Views in ArchiCAD

You can approach the Virtual Building model from several different model views. Model views have two main uses. First, you will work in model views to modify the Virtual Building. Second, saved model views are the basis for creating architectural drawings (placed onto Layouts) for the final documentation of the Virtual Building. As you will see, each model view shows a very different aspect of the same Virtual Building. In 3D perspective, you see the Virtual Building as it will look when actually constructed. In Floor Plan, the Virtual Building is shown as a two-dimensional blueprint. In the Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation (IE) windows, elements are generated from the 3D model; you cannot create new model elements here, but you can view and modify them. The 3D Document window is generated from the 3D window, but is a a 2D-type document that allows for annotations and dimensions, and can display the sections of composite elements in their 3D aspect. In the model window known as the Interactive Schedule, the Virtual Building is expressed in lists and figures - here, too, your input will modify the Virtual Building and can be output as documentation. When you work on each of these aspects of the model, you are working on a viewpoint. You can navigate among them, and save them as views. For more information, see Project Workflow in the Navigator. The available commands and functions vary depending on the window that is active. Every time you activate a window, its contents are rebuilt to reflect any modifications you made to the plan. The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands.
491
Virtual Building
You can have only one Floor Plan and one 3D window open at a time. While it is possible to keep several windows open for other types of viewpoints(e.g. several Section/Elevation/IE windows), by default ArchiCAD will open subsequent viewpoints in existing windows, replacing the previous one. To open a new viewpoint in a new window instead, use the context menu command from the Navigator item to be opened.
If you would rather open a new window each time you open an additional view or layout (from a menu or by double-clicking in the Navigator), change the window-opening default preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options:
You can pan and zoom the window within the full drawing space to obtain the best view of the work you are currently doing, by using the shortcut icons next to the bottom scrollbar or the commands of the View > Zoom menu. For more information, see Navigation. To maximize working space, use the Window > Full Screen command to have your active window, including palettes, occupy the entire workspace on your monitor. The Window > Full Screen & Hide All Palettes does the same, without showing any palettes.
492
Virtual Building
Floor Plan Window

The Floor Plan Window is the basic construction area where most editing operations take place. It shows a representation of the current project as a traditional architectural drawing. When you start ArchiCAD, the first window you see is the Floor Plan. Each story of the Virtual Building has its own Floor Plan. ArchiCAD gives you the freedom to replicate 3D-like aspects of construction elements in the Floor Plan window, using Cut Plane settings and element-level display and projection options. These options let you visualize parts of multi-story elements that are located on a different floor plan, or to project parts of the element that are above or below the cut plane. See the sections below for how these options work. Note, however, that these Floor Plan projections are not true 3D projections, but rather symbolic depictions. Consequently, the display and, especially, automatic intersection of complex or multi-story elements (on the Floor Plan only) may have some limitations in replicating the true model. The visibility and accessibility of elements on the Floor Plan depends on: chosen options in the elements Tool Settings dialog box, including multi-story display and projection settings;
the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting); Layers. The elements Layer Settings (elements on invisible layers will not be displayed; elements on locked layers cannot be edited). Modifications to the model in the Floor Plan window will be updated accordingly in the 3D, Detail/Worksheet and Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. The converse is also true: changes made in other windows are automatically displayed on the Floor Plan when activated. The updates can take place either manually or automatically depending on the Detail or Section/Elevation/IE update settings you choose. For more information, see Updating Sections and Updating the Detail Window.
493
Virtual Building
Stories
About Stories Set Home Story Show On Stories Navigate Among Stories Defining Story Display in 3D Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE Create or Delete Stories Story Settings Dialog Box Story Level Lines
494
Virtual Building
About Stories
Stories in ArchiCAD, just as in real buildings, serve to divide space vertically and replicate the story structure of your real building. Stories are typically used for drawing each Floor Plan of multistory structures separately. Each story in the project is displayed, by name and number, in the Navigators Project Map. Double-click on the story name to display it in the Floor Plan window. The current Story name appears in the title bar of the Floor Plan Window.
The elevation (or relative base height) of construction elements placed in 2D windows are calculated relative to a chosen Story: either the elements defined Home Story, or the current story. (See the Base Height setting in the Settings dialog box of construction elements, as in the following image.)
For more information, see Set Home Story.
495
Virtual Building
Navigate Among Stories

To navigate among stories, do one of the following: In the Navigator Project Map, double-click the Story you wish to open. Activate a story from the Story Settings Dialog Box at Design > Story Settings: click on its name, then click OK to close the dialog box and display the selected story on the Floor Plan. Use predefined keyboard shortcuts to jump among stories Use the Mini-Navigator (see below)
Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator

Use the story shortcuts located in the predefined Mini-Navigator toolbar.
Go Up a Story activates the Story above the current one on the Floor Plan. Go Down a Story takes you to the Story below the current one. If you attempt to go to a story that does not exist, the Create New Story dialog box appears.
The Go To Story command in the Mini-Navigator toolbar opens a dialog box allowing you to jump directly to an existing Story and provides you with a range indicator of how many Stories currently exist. If you enter a Story number outside the existing range, the field will revert to the top or bottom Story of the valid range.
496
Virtual Building
Defining Story Display in 3D

In the 3D window, all Stories are projected by default, but you can limit the projection using the Stories to Show in 3D controls at View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D. Choose the range of stories you wish to display in 3D.
The 3D Window always displays the range of Stories defined in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D, and there is no visual clue as to which elements belong to which story. The Trim Elements to Story checkbox (in the same dialog box) means that the model will be clipped at the story range boundaries. If this box is not checked, the model will not be clipped, and all elements that fall at least partially inside the story range will be displayed. The story display in the 3D window, as set in the Filter Elements dialog box, will naturally affect the 3D Documents that are created from this 3D source. For more information, see Filter Elements in 3D.
497
Virtual Building
Defining Story Display in Section/Elevation/IE

In Section/Elevation/IE views, you define a vertical range that can include entire Stories or only parts of them. Also, Story Level Lines can be optionally displayed in these views.
Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE
498
Virtual Building
Create or Delete Stories

Use the Design > Story Settings Dialog Box to create and delete stories. Story Settings and story-related commands are also available: from the context menu if you have selected a Story in the Navigators Project Map or View Map.
from the Mini-Navigator. See Story Shortcuts in Mini-Navigator.
Create a New Story

1) Go to the Design > Story Settings Dialog Box.
2) Click Insert Above or Insert Below to insert a new story above or below the story name selected in the dialog box list. Alternatively: 1) Select a Story in the Navigators Project Map. 2) Use the context menus Create New Story command.
499
Virtual Building
3) In the appearing dialog box, type a name for the new story. 4) Click an option for where the new story should be placed in the project structure: Insert Above: The story will be inserted above the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). Insert Below: The story will be inserted below the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). 5) Click OK. The new story appears above or below the selected story. The numbering is automatically updated. There is no limit to the number of stories.
Create New Story from the Mini-Navigator Toolbar

If you choose the Mini-Navigator toolbars Go up a Story/Go Down a Story command, and that story does not exist, the Create New Story Dialog Box appears, where you can add Name, Elevation and Height to Next values for the new story.
Copy/Move Elements Between Stories

When creating a new Story, you may wish to copy elements onto it which already exist on another Story. Go to Design > Edit Elements by Stories, or right-click a Story in the Navigator Project Map. (If this command is not available, use the Work Environment Menu Customization Dialog Box to add it to any menu.) In the appearing dialog box, use the commands to Cut, Copy, and/or Paste all elements or selected element types from one story to another.
For more information, see Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box.
500
Virtual Building
Story Level Lines

Story Level Lines indicate the vertical location of stories in Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. Story Levels can be set to appear in Section/Elevation/IE views. In this case, each story level line included in the Section/Elevation/IE range will appear in the window. The story line markers are library parts. The Story Marker parameters and position can be edited in Section/Elevation/IE Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see Section Story Levels Panel
Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE

For each individual Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, you can hide, show and/or output Story Level Lines. To set these options, open the Section/Elevation/IE Settings Dialog box, go to the Story Levels panel, and use the Show Story Levels pop-up.
Note: It is possible to turn off story level line display on a story-by-story basis. Go to Design > Story Settings, and for any selected story, uncheck the Story Level Line box. This storys level line will henceforth not appear in any model window in the project.
501
Virtual Building
Edit Story Levels
You can edit the elevation of any given story or set of stories using Story Editing Mode: 1) Choose the Design > Edit Story Levels command, or the same command from the context menu that appears by right-clicking inside the Section window. 2) The Story Editing Mode palette appears. As long as the palette remains open on screen, you are in Story Editing mode and can move the story level lines.
502
Virtual Building
3) 4)
Choose a mode from this palette by clicking one of the four buttons: Adjust only the selected story Adjust the selected story and all stories below Adjust the selected story and all stories above Adjust all stories Move the cursor onto the Story Level Line you wish to move. The cursor will assume the Mercedes shape. (Make sure you move the cursor onto the line itself, not the markers at either end.) Click and drag the story level line to edit its elevation. 5) Click OK to apply changes and exit Story Editing Mode. The elements that are on the given stories will retain their elevation respective to their home story, as you will see when the view is updated after you click OK.
503
Virtual Building
Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting)

3D construction elements on the Floor Plan (Walls, Curtain Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs) are displayed as if they were cut horizontally along a theoretical plane; this is the Floor Plan Cut Plane. The default height of the Cut Plane, measured from the base of the current story, depends on local architectural conventions, but you can set any Floor Plan Cut Plane for the current window using the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box. To set the Cut Plane, use Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane to open the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box.
Note: The Cut Plane does not affect the display of Mesh, Slab or Object elements, including Stairs. However, Stairs and other GDL Objects can be programmed to display themselves according to the Floor Plan Cut Plan Settings. Enter a value for Cut Plane Height to Current Story. If you wish to display all construction elements in their entirety, on all stories (the default settings for construction elements), the rest of the settings in the Floor Plan Cut Plane dialog box are not relevant. The Relative Floor Plan Range and Absolute Display Limit - the other Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings - are only relevant if any of your construction elements are defined as having a limited projection. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are global; the current settings apply to all the stories of the project. Once you set the global Floor Plan Cut Plane, you can further fine-tune the Floor Plan display of individual construction elements (Walls, Columns, Beams and Roofs only) in their element Settings dialog boxes. For more information, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.
504
Virtual Building
Set Separate Floor Plan Cut Planes in Different Views

For every view, you can define a unique Floor Plan Cut Plane, if required, using the Floor Plan Cut Plane controls accessible from View Settings.
505
Virtual Building
How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan

While the current Floor Plan Cut Plane settings are applied globally to the whole project, you can set a separate display preference for each individual construction element. The settings described below (Home Story, Show on, Floor Plan Display and Show Projection) are found in the elements Tool Settings Dialog Box.
Set Home Story Show On Stories Define Elements Floor Plan Display Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection) Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings
506
Virtual Building
Set Home Story

Each construction element and object-type element has a Home Story. In the Geometry and Positioning Panel of the elements Tool Settings, or the Info Box, you can define its Home Story. Once you place the element, it will be linked to this home story. Most often, an elements Home Story is the story on which it is located. An element is located on a story if its reference line, reference plane or other characteristic point is located on that story, as follows: Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Roof: pivot line Curtain Wall: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Beam: location of the reference line (at its lowest vertical point) Column: lowest point of its axis Slab: top surface of the slab Object/Stair: vertical location of its insertion point Mesh: location of its Mesh Reference Plane. (See Mesh Geometry and Positioning Panel.) The Home Story setting acts as a point of reference for: defining which parts of an element will be displayed (as defined in the Show On Stories control) defining listing criteria expressing an elements Relative Base Height (in the Relative Base Height field in Tool Settings) For example, you may have placed the base of a multistory wall on the subfloor, slightly below the current story level. Yet you want to measure its elevation from the current story, not the subfloor. In this case, you can define the current story to be the Home Story of this wall, rather than the story on which the walls reference line is located.
Home Story Controls

In each elements Tool Default Settings dialog box, or its Info Box, choose a home story setting for elements placed with this tool.
Current: The placed elements Home Story will be the current Story.
507
Virtual Building
Select Story: Use this option if you want to tie the element to a particular story. Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project.
Choose a home story to which to link the element when you place it. The Home Story dialog always shows the home story defined in terms of the Current story, as in the image below.
Note: The Current story in a tools Default Settings will vary, of course, depending on the story you are currently working on. Note: In some instances, a new elements home story doesnt exist in the project. For example, you define the default home story as Current + 2 in a 3-story project; then you go up a story before input. Now, the Current + 2 story doesnt exist. In this case, ArchiCAD redefines the elements home story as the topmost story.
Set Home Story by Elevation

If you change a placed elements elevation so that it is now located on a different story, controls in the Tracker allow you to either lock it to a particular home story regardless of the elements elevation (as in the first image below)...
508
Virtual Building
... or else let the home story change to match the elements new elevation, by setting the Trackers Home Story control to By Elevation, as in this image:
Similarly, you can automatically reset an elements Home Story as its elevation changes if you use the Elevate command, by checking the Set Home Story by Elevation box:
See also Elevating Elements. If you leave the box unchecked, the elements Home Story as set in the Tool Settings (Info Box) will remain in effect regardless of the elevation change.
509
Virtual Building
Show On Stories
Use the Show on Stories pop-up in the Floor Plan and Section Panel of Tool Settings to control the display of construction elements by story. Choose whether to show the element on every story it intersects, or only on selected stories. The available Show on Stories options differ depending on the construction element, as discussed below. For a Wall, Curtain Wall or Column, you have the following options:
All Relevant Stories: The element will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. When available, this will be your preferred option most of the time. Home Story Only: The element will be shown only on its home story. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its home story, then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut, Outlines only, Overhead all.) For a Roof:
Home Story Only: The roof will be shown only on its home story. (If the element is drawn so that it does not physically intersect its home story, then the only way the element will be shown on the Floor Plan is if you set its Floor Plan Display to one of the symbolic options: Symbolic Cut, Outlines only, Overhead all.) Home & One Story Up and/or Down: The roof will be shown on its Home Story, plus one story up and/or down. All Stories: The roofs outline - regardless of its actual location - will be shown on every story of the project. All Relevant Stories: The roof will be shown and editable on all stories which it physically intersects. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set separate display combinations for the roofs outline and fill. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the roofs outline and its fill. (Once you set these Custom Settings, use the Edit Custom option to edit them.)
510
Virtual Building
For a Slab or Mesh, the same options are available as for the Roof, except for All Relevant Stories (since there are no multi-story versions of these elements):
See also Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories. For Beams, the same options are available as for the Roof, except for Custom settings:
Objects and Stairs have a unique display option: One Story up and One Story Down. This way, you can opt to not display these elements on their Home Story at all.
Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories

For Slabs, Meshes, certain Library Parts and Stairs: The elements outline on remote stories will be displayed using the line type chosen in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements.
511
Virtual Building
Define Elements Floor Plan Display

Use the Floor Plan Display pop-up to display Walls, Curtain Walls, Beams, Columns and Roofs in one of several representations. This pop-up control is located on the Floor Plan & Section panel of the elements Tool Settings dialog box.
1) Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (e.g., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Note: Projected with Overhead is the default display setting for slanted or complex columns and walls, and for all roofs and beams. 2) Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. If you choose either of these projected options (Projected with Overhead or Projected), you can then further define the extent of the projection, using the Show Projection options. For more information, see Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection). 3) Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Some additional abstract display options are available: 4) Symbolic Cut: (Available only for non-slanted and non-complex walls and for vertical or complex columns.) The whole floor plan projection of non-slanted, non-complex walls or vertical (simple or complex) columns will be displayed as cut, using their cut line and cut fill attributes, regardless of the elements vertical position. This option is available only for simple straight walls or columns, or for complex columns, and only if the Show on Story control is set to Home Story only. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of these elements. 5) Symbolic with Overhead: This display option is available for Curtain Walls only. See Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel
512
Virtual Building
6) Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. (Uncut attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.)
7) Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. (Overhead attributes are set for each element using the Outline controls of the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings dialog box.) Note: When opening projects from an earlier format of ArchiCAD, the Floor Plan display of construction elements will automatically be set to predefined Floor Plan Display settings which correspond to traditional architectural standards for these elements. You can reset any elements Floor Plan Display setting as needed.
513
Virtual Building
Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection)

The Show Projection pop-up provides options for setting the range within which a multi-story element (Wall, Curtain Wall, Column, Beam, Roof) should be displayed. This control is therefore only available if the elements Floor Plan Display is set (using the Floor Plan Display pop-up) to either Projected or Projected with Overhead.
Entire Element (default setting): The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. However, you may prefer not to show the entire element. In this case, you have two other ways to set its display in the Show Projection pop-up: 1) by Relative Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it, and an optional offset.) If you choose this option, this element will be shown on the stories defined as the Relative Floor Plan Range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane. In certain situations, the current Floor Plan Cut Plane and Relative Floor Plan Range settings may conflict: The Cut Plane level may be outside the current Floor Plan Range (e.g. an extremely small story height as compared to the default Cut Plane level). In this case, the Cut Plane will be automatically relocated to the upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (or to its lower limit, if the Cut Plane would fall below the lower limit). The lower Floor Plan Range limit may be higher than the upper limit. In this case, the lower limit will be considered as both the lower and upper limit of the Floor Plan Range (which will also equals the Cut Plane level, as described in (1) above.)
514
Virtual Building
2) by Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. If you choose this option, then the Absolute Display Limit set in the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box determines this elements lower display limit.
515
Virtual Building
Examples of Floor Plan Display Settings

Suppose your settings are as follows: Show on Story: Automatic This means that each multi-story construction element will be displayed on each relevant story of the Floor Plan. Floor Plan Display: Projected with Overhead This means that each construction element will be displayed in its entirety, its cut portion, its overhead portion, and its uncut portion, with the line types and pen colors you set in the dialog box for each of these parameters Show Projection: Entire Element This means that the displayed projection is not limited by either an absolute display limit or by a defined vertical range. Consider the following building with slanted walls:
516
Virtual Building
As you view the building on its various stories, its Floor Plan appearance changes accordingly: although the entire wall is indicated on every story, the cut and overhead segments are different on every story.
517
Virtual Building
518
Virtual Building
Non-Standard Projections for Construction Elements

In the example below, the structure is shown on 3 stories: the Curtain Wall is set to Projected with Overhead and Entire Element the mullions - made of columns - are Cut Only the round structural columns are set to Projected with Overhead and Floor Plan Range (on each story, only their relevant section is displayed)
519
Virtual Building
3D Window
The 3D window displays your model in real perspective or axonometry: this gives the best overall view of what the final building will really look like, inside and out. In the 3D window, you can directly edit your model, and create new construction elements, in either perspective or parallel view, using any of the construction tools. The 3D window is directly linked to the Floor Plan and to the Section/Elevation/IE windows: any changes made on the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation/IE window will be visible in the 3D window and vice versa. All 3D Documents are derived from a 3D Window source. If you change the projection, the cutting planes, the zoom level or the selected/marqueed/filtered items of the 3D source window, you can redefine the 3D Document accordingly. Special navigation techniques in the 3D Window let you explore the model much more freely than in other windows. For more information, see Navigation in the 3D Window. The 3D display of individual construction elements is controlled by the options of the Model panel in their Settings Dialog box. General settings affecting the parameters for displaying the 3D window are in 3D Window Settings. The commands that affect the set of elements displayed in 3D are in the View > Elements in 3D View and the View > 3D View Mode hierarchical menus. These commands are also accessible in the 3D Visualization toolbar.
Open the 3D Window

To open or activate the 3D window, do one of the following: press the F3 key use the Window > 3D Window command press the 3D window control on the 3D Visualization toolbar or the Mini-Navigator toolbar.
520
Virtual Building
use context menu commands from right-clicking on blank space in the current window:
The following sections provide details on working with the 3D window.
Show All in 3D Show Selection in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Default Display in 3D Filter Elements in 3D Save Contents of 3D Window as a View 3D Engines 3D View Mode 3D Projections 3D Navigation Extras 3D Cutaway Sections
521
Virtual Building
Show All in 3D
To show the entire model in 3D, regardless of any current selection, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show All option. This commands shortcut is Ctrl + F5.
The full model display resulting from the Show All command may be limited by filtering criteria as set in the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box.
522
Virtual Building
Show Selection in 3D
For a 3D display of only the explicitly selected items, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command from any type of editable window. (Or use the 3D Visualization toolbar control for this command.)
If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements. Show Selection/Marquee in 3D also works if you are already in the 3D Window and make an explicit selection there, then execute the Show Selection command. The caption of the 3D Window will include the Selection mention and the name of the home story of the selected element(s). If the 3D Windows content is based on explicit selection and you add elements to it, these will be preserved in the 3D Window as long as you continue to work in it.
523
Virtual Building
Show Stored Selection in 3D

This command, also in the View > Elements in 3D View submenu, will display the last 3D view generated by the Show Selection/Marquee command.
524
Virtual Building
Show Marquee Area in 3D

To show only the marqueed element(s) in 3D, use the View > Elements in 3D View > Show Selection/Marquee in 3D command. The caption of the 3D Window will include the Marquee mention. For more information on defining a marquee area, see Marquee Area. If your plan includes both explicitly selected elements and a marquee selection, this command will disregard the marquee and show only the explicitly selected elements.
Marquee Effect: By default, the elements inside the Marquee will be displayed and they will be cropped to the marquee area. However, you can adjust the Marquee effect to show the elements outside the marquee instead of those inside: use the Marquee Effect controls in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D, and choose the Outside Marquee radio button.
See Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box. To show the entirety of elements that fall partly inside the marquee - without cropping them uncheck the Trim Elements to Marquee checkbox (also under Marquee Effect, in View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D).
Elements in a Marqueed 3D Window

If you create an element in the 3D Window which is delimited by a marquee, the new element will only appear in the 3D Window if you draw it inside the marquee area.
525
Virtual Building
If you place a new element outside the boundaries of a Marquee-based 3D view, or drag an existing element outside the Marquee boundaries, that element will disappear immediately from the 3D Window. When you go to the Floor Plan, however, you will see the elements. Change your marquee area (or remove it) and return to the 3D Window to check it. If you select one or more elements in a trimmed 3D view, resulting from either a Marquee area or a 3D Cutaway, some elements will be only partially visible, but selection dots of the whole element will be displayed and all the nodes and edges can be found with the cursor.
If edited, a temporary ghosted image of the whole element will be visible.
526
Virtual Building
Default Display in 3D
If you simply switch to the 3D window, without using any specific 3D display command, the 3D window will display the contents last shown in the 3D window, irrespective of what might be selected in any other window.
527
Virtual Building
Filter Elements in 3D
Use the Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box command, then activating or deactivating the checkboxes of the different types. Only those elements whose checkbox is active will be displayed in the 3D window. If you are displaying a Marquee area in 3D, the Marquee Effect part of this dialog box provides options on what to include in the 3D window. The Stories to Show in 3D part of this dialog box lets you define a range of stories for display.
528
Virtual Building
Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode, and all other elements types in wireframe mode. To achieve this effect (a default setting in previous ArchiCAD versions), apply the predefined Show 3D Zones as Solid Layer Combination.
529
Virtual Building
Save Contents of 3D Window as a View

If you save the contents of your 3D window as a view (see Saving a View), the 3D Only panel of its View Settings dialog box will provide feedback on whether that view is a result of a filter or a marquee selection. 3D view settings include: 3D projection settings (including zooming), filter elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D cutaway and photo rendering settings. You can redefine a 3D view by changing these settings in the 3D window, then use the View Settings 3D Only Panel to redefine the view accordingly.
530
Virtual Building
3D Engines
3D Engines are built-in configurations which control the generation of the 3D model in ArchiCAD. By default, two engines are offered: Internal 3D Engine OpenGL Engine To choose an engine, go to: View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings and use the 3D Engine pop-up, or use the Engine commands at the bottom of the View > 3D View Mode menu. 1) Internal 3D engine The internal 3D engine is most useful for working in the 3D window: views generated by the internal engine show vectorial patterns and are easy to print. It produces a simple, clean, navigable 3D view, without textures. The internal engine is optimized for simple, nonphotorealistic architectural representation, and for direct output from the 3D window without using photorendering. The internal engine features more visualization effects than OpenGL, but usually results in slower navigation and access to the model on most machines.
2) OpenGL engine The OpenGL engine for 3D is recommended if you have a high-performance OpenGL display card. Some effects, such as sun shadows, vectorial 3D hatching and saving the contents of the 3D window as a vectorial 2D drawing, are not available with OpenGL. Additional options for OpenGL can be accessed by clicking the Options button of 3D Window Settings.
531
Virtual Building
OpenGL is a bitmap-based technology. Consequently, 3D views created using the OpenGL engine will be placed as image files.
Important: Open GL is optimized for fast, smooth navigation during model development. It displays textures correctly, but features fewer model effects; it can be considered an interactive preview of the rendering. OpenGLs output capability is more limited than that of the internal engine, since it is based on bitmap technology. OpenGL will produce significantly faster on-screen navigation on most machines, provided that the supporting hardware is available. For more information, see Open GL Options.
532
Virtual Building
The following image uses OpenGL with the Transparency effect enabled in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings:
533
Virtual Building
3D View Mode
When using ArchiCADs Internal 3D engine, three 3D viewing modes are offered: Wireframe, Hidden Line, and Shading. They can be chosen from the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings dialog box or using the commands of the View > 3D View Mode menu. Note: When using the OpenGL engine, only the Wireframe and Shading modes are available. The icons of the 3D Modes are also accessible if you display the predefined Window > Toolbars > Simple 3D toolbar.
Choosing Wireframe mode creates a view showing all the edges and lines of your Project. Note that if you have many elements one behind the other, this type of view can be hard to interpret. In Hidden Line mode, those lines which are blocked from view by solid objects are removed. This type of view is the best choice for easy interpretation, if you do not want a shaded view. It is also suitable for hard copy output on a printer. Hidden Lines can be saved in many file formats, either as 2D or 3D files. Choosing the Shading method causes your 3D model to appear with all of its visible surfaces shaded according to the light direction set in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. The colors of the surfaces are determined by the material attributes of the construction elements (regardless of the color of light set in the Sun dialog box). Shading is recommended for: Fast on-screen feedback Easy checking of surface colors Any presentation for which photorealistic quality is not a requirement
3D Projection Settings Materials
534
Virtual Building
3D Projections
ArchiCAD can display parallel (axonometric) projections and perspectives. Axonometric projections automatically show the entire model in the center of your view. Perspectives are defined by a viewpoint and a specific target. When the 3D window is active, the 3D Navigator Preview Palette contains a miniature representation of the entire project view. This allows you a quick way to modify your 3D Projection Settings, whether perspective or parallel (axonometric); you can adjust the view cone or change the axonometry while retaining an overview of the whole project. See Navigator Preview (3D).
3D Projection Settings
The View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings command from the menu or from the MiniNavigators pop-up menu opens the dialog box that contains all the controls you need to define the 3D view. The name and contents of the dialog box depend on the projection type: Parallel Projection Settings or Perspective Projection Settings. You can easily switch from one settings dialog to the other with the button at the top right corner.
The projections that you define in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box remain valid only until the next time you open the dialog box and modify them.
How to Switch Between Axonometric and Perspective Views

You can switch between the 3D Windows Perspective and Axonometry views by using the: Predefined shortcuts: Ctrl+F3 = Axonometry Shift+F3 = Perspective commands available from View > 3D View Mode:
3D Visualization toolbar:
535
Virtual Building
Mini-Navigator toolbar:
Navigator Palette:
How to Store a 3D Projection

To store projections that you set up in the 3D Window, you can: Use the Save Current View command from the context menu of the Navigator palette. This will create a view (perspective or axonometric) based on the currently set up projection in the 3D window. The new view will be added to your Navigator View Map. Add the current perspective to your Project Map, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Place a Camera into the path command. A camera capturing the current perspective will also appear on the Floor Plan. Add the current axonometric (parallel) projection to the series of Pre-Set views, using the View > 3D Navigation Extras > Add Current Projection command.
Parallel Projection Settings Perspective Projection Settings Cameras Pre-Set Projections 3D Navigation Extras
536
Virtual Building
3D Navigation Extras
Other controls useful in modifying the 3D view are available from the View > 3D Navigation Extras (or a toolbar containing 3D window commands). These controls allow you to: Interactively set the target point for the perspective (Look to). Switch to a view perpendicular to a given point (Look to perpendicular). Reset the roll angle to zero to rapidly return from a bizarre view obtained during navigation (Reset Roll Angle). Return with a single command to a horizontal view of the model (Horizontal View). Edit pre-set projections and Add current projection: These commands are available if you are viewing an axonometric (parallel) projection. Put a camera into the path (for perspectives). This command adds the current perspective to the Project Map, if no camera is selected on the Floor Plan. If you have cameras on the Floor Plan already that define an animation path, the new camera will be added after the active camera in the active path, which is marked by its view cone on the Floor Plan. If you are in perspective view, with a camera selected, the following commands are also available from View > 3D Navigation Extras: Note: As you use these commands to change the camera selection, the selected item in the Navigator Project Map also changes accordingly. Go to the previous/Go to the next: Use these commands to navigate to the perspective views of the previous and next cameras in the active path, and to select the camera. Modify the selected: The selected camera will be updated to reflect the perspective view that you currently see in the 3D window. Use this when you have changed the view in the 3D window. Revert view to the selected: Discards all changes you made manually and shows the 3D model as the selected camera sees it. Insert a new camera after the selected one: A new camera is added to the path to define the current perspective view, and will be selected.
Cameras Pre-Set Projections
537
Virtual Building
3D Cutaway Sections
3D Cutaway is an imaging mode in ArchiCAD. With 3D Cutaway active, you can produce either ordinary cross sections or special sections to visualize the project in new ways. 3D Cutaway can be useful for special 3D visualizations allowing an insight into building spaces. The 3D section cuts you define are stored within the project document and can be recreated after opening the Project in a future session. Once the sectional 3D model has been created, you can save it in a variety of formats for additional work. 3D Cutaway settings will take effect in the 3D Document. Separate Model Display Settings for the 3D Document allow you to define materials for the surfaces cut by 3D Cutaway.
How to Create a 3D Cutaway

3D Cutaway works by applying cutting planes to the 3D model. These cutting planes are defined in the 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box. After defining 3D Cutting Planes in the dialog box, activate View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway. (To deactivate 3D Cutaway, press the command again.) If the View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutaway command is active, these cutting planes are applied to the model every time it is rebuilt.
538
Virtual Building
Sections
About Sections Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Open a Section Viewpoint Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Summary of Rebuild Commands Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines
539
Virtual Building
About Sections
The Section tool is used to place a Section marker. The Section marker can take one of three different forms: 1) a source marker, which generates a section viewpoint 2) a linked marker, which does not generate a section viewpoint, but acts as a reference to any other view, viewpoint or drawing. 3) an unlinked marker containing custom text Note: An easy way to distinguish between source-type and linked/unlinked markers is to use the Highlight Source Markers option, which is activated by default at View > On-Screen View Options. See also Source Marker Highlight. Note: It is possible to create an Independent Section (with or without a marker), without using the Section tool. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. To generate a Section, you draw a Section line on the Floor Plan and place a Section source marker, which generates a new viewpoint in ArchiCAD. You can set this marker to display a variety of reference information - such as the first drawing that is created out of this Section viewpoint - for easy navigation and identification. Each newly created Section viewpoint is listed in the Navigator Project Map, in the Sections part. Elements in the Section viewpoint depend on the Section Status, defined in Section Settings. A Model Section contains editable construction elements linked and updated with their counterparts on the Floor Plan, as well as any 2D elements. A Drawing Section contains drawing primitives, which are not linked to the Floor Plan and do not reflect its changes. In the Section window, you can view and modify elements but you cannot create new construction elements. (The only exception is if you use the Drag a copy command to move a Door/Window, in a model-type Section window.) If you paste an element into a Section window, it will be reproduced as drawing primitives (points, lines, fills). Sections can be saved as Views and placed on a Layout as Drawings; the contents of a Section window can also be published directly. To place a linked or unlinked Section marker, use the Section tool in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail, Worksheet. Such a marker is a linked marker, and you can use it to link it to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. A linked marker is for reference purposes only. See an example at Place a Linked Section Marker. You can choose and format the Section Line and Marker object in Section Settings.
540
Virtual Building
An unlinked marker can be useful in your published documentation, for example, if you want to refer (with a page number) to the location of an external drawing that is not integrated into the ArchiCAD project. See Place an Unlinked Marker.
541
Virtual Building
Create a Section Viewpoint

Note: The creation process is identical for Elevations. To create a section with its source in the model, you must place a section marker on the Floor Plan. (This is a source section marker.) Note: Another type of Section viewpoint is the Independent Section, having no model source. See Create an Independent Section Viewpoint. 1) Activate the Section tool. 2) In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Create new section viewpoint is selected.
3) Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the Floor Plan.
Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. The Eyeball cursor appears. 4) With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the Section. The place where you click also defines the Sections limit line, if you have chosen a Limited horizontal range in Section Tool Settings.
542
Virtual Building
5) The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed. (If you are placing a Section of limited horizontal range, the limit line is also placed automatically.) Note: Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Section viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. Other information about the new Section viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information, Model Display, and Story Lines - can be defined in Section Tool Settings.
543
Virtual Building
Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint

Note: This process is identical for Elevations. Use the controls in the General Panel of Section Settings to define the Section geometry.
Horizontal Range
An infinite Horizontal Range shows the full extent of the visible model from the Section line. A limited Horizontal range shows the model between the Section line and its limit, which is placed automatically. Once it is placed, you can select the limit line and move it, if necessary. A zero-depth range shows only the parts of the model cut by the Section line, at the cut location only. (For Elevations, there is no zero depth option.) For more information, see Horizontal Range (for Source Section markers only).
Vertical Range
A Section with an infinite Vertical Range shows all stories of the model. If you choose limited Vertical Range, enter the elevation values corresponding to the vertical range of the model you wish to include in the Section.
Editing a Sections Horizontal Range and Distant Area Limit

You can change the depth (horizontal range) of a selected section by moving the limit line: make sure that the Section tool is active, then move the line by clicking it and dragging to the desired position. You can also move the Distant Area limit line, if such a limit has been defined in Section Settings. Note: An optional distant area of your Section viewpoint, with separate colors/effects, is created if you check the Marked Distant Area box in Section Model Display Panel. The Distant Area limit line is then displayed as part of your Section. Both the Section limit line and the secondary distant line are on-screen-only elements. To show or hide the Section limit line (horizontal range) and the Distant Area limit line on the Floor Plan, use the toggle control in View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range. To change these line types/colors, use the control in Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. For more information, see Display of Marker Range Lines.
544
Virtual Building
Define Marker Reference for Source Marker

Follow these steps to define reference information for source-type Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. When placing a new source marker on the Floor Plan to create a viewpoint, the tools Default Settings gives you two choices for defining the Marker Reference:
the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint In other words, the marker will display information pertaining either to the viewpoint you are currently creating, or to the first drawing created from this new viewpoint. (First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book.) For example, the following Section has been defined to display the information of the first placed drawing created out of this viewpoint.
If you choose first placed drawing, and no drawing has been placed yet, the marker will display autotext (such as #DrgID), and once the drawing is placed, this autotext will be replaced by the relevant information. If you select an already placed source marker and open the tools Selection Settings or Info box, you have two additional choices, because the viewpoint may already have multiple drawings or views created out of it:
the selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected view
545
Virtual Building
Choosing either of these two options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the Navigator Layout Book or the Navigator View Map. Eligible drawings/views are available for selection (i.e., those which have been created from the selected Section viewpoint); other items are greyed and cannot be selected.
Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project's Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). See Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project. Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. The link information that will appear in the marker is previewed in the Reference to text field, as long as the referred item (such as a drawing) already exists in the project. Note: The same marker information is shown in the Marker Panel in the Section Settings dialog box.
546
Virtual Building
Assign Section Status

Note: The process for assigning a status is identical for Sections, Elevations and Interior Elevations. 3D Document status can be either Auto-rebuild or Manual Rebuild, but not Drawing. When creating each new Section, you assign it a status in the General panel of Section Settings. A Section can have one of three statuses: Auto-rebuild Model, Manual-rebuild Model, and Drawing.
Each Sections status defines the link between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan, and its rebuild method. In the two Model statuses (Auto-rebuild and Manual-rebuild), the window consists of construction elements; any changes made in a Model Section window can be updated in the Floor Plan window, as well as in the 3D window and in other Section windows, and vice versa. In a Section of Drawing status, construction elements are decomposed into 2D fills, arcs and lines. Changes made in this kind of window are not updated in other windows. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model. Construction elements are editable in both Autorebuild and Manual-rebuild Model status windows, but no new construction elements can be created within them, with the exception of duplicating existing Doors and Windows. Even by copying construction elements and pasting them back you can only obtain plain, additional drawing elements. Warning: Clearing a construction element from a Section Window of model status (either Autorebuild or Manual-rebuild) will also clear it from both the Floor Plan and the 3D model. Regardless of a sections status, you can add 2D graphics, annotation and dimensioning. For more information, see Updating Sections.
547
Virtual Building
Model Display in the Section Window

Note: The controls for the display of elements is nearly identical for Elevations and Interior Elevations. Controls of the Model Display panel in Section Settings define the appearance (fills, contours, materials) of: Cut Elements Uncut Elements Sun and Shadows Marked Distant Area Boundary Contours in the Section window. The following are brief descriptions of these display features. All related controls are described individually at Section Model Display Panel.
Section Model Display Panel Story Level Lines
548
Virtual Building
Cut Elements
By default, cut elements are shown using their element-level line and pen definitions. You can customize the appearance of cut elements in a Section window by checking the Uniform Pen for Cut Elements checkbox in the Section Model Display Panel, then assigning the lines and colors, for the display of cut elements in this Section only.
Uncut Elements
These options in the Section Model Display Panel enable you to apply materials (shaded or unshaded) to the uncut elements shown in the Section window:
Sun and Shadows

The following section window is displayed with Vectorial Hatching on (as shown by the roof tiles) and with Vectorial Sun Shadow on (as shown by the shadow cast by the roof overhang.)
549
Virtual Building
Another effect is to display the materials of uncut surfaces in shaded mode - that is, to reflect rounded contours:
You can combine the two effects (cast shadows and shaded effect) in a single Section display:
See Section Model Display Panel for details on these controls.
Marked Distant Area

Consider the following Section line on the Floor Plan:
550
Virtual Building
Note that this Section includes the west face of the building, close to the section line, as well as parts of the far end of the building that extends northward. In this Section view, the close and distant areas are displayed identically, so you cannot tell which is which:
To differentiate the close from the distance elements, reconfigure the section so that it contains a Marked Distant area. To do this, check the Marked Distant Area box in the Section Model Display Panel and specify a different color for the contours of the distant elements.
Return to the Floor Plan and notice that a new line segment representing the Distant Area has appeared. Select this line and drag it as shown (select the section marker, then choose the icon shown in the pet palette to make sure you drag the Distant Area line, not the Section line):
551
Virtual Building
Note: The Distant Area line is a Marker Range Line. For information on its display, see Display of Marker Range Lines. Now re-open the Section. The distant elements are distinguished from the closer ones.
Boundary Contours
Boundary Contours refer to elements shown in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation window which extend beyond the horizontal limits of the Section (in other words, the entire element does not fit in the section window). Use Boundary Contours in the Section Model Display Panel to define the display of this boundary. Here, the left edge of the wall on the left does not fall within the section, and the displayed parts are shown as unfinished, without contours.
552
Virtual Building
However, you can choose to display boundary contours - that is, to draw a line at the elements boundary as it is shown in the section, even though the element does not really end there. At Boundary Display, choose Uncut Contours to display these contours using the uncut pen chosen for these elements in their own Settings dialog boxes; or Override Contours to use a pen of your choice, like the blue dashed line in this example:
553
Virtual Building
Open a Section Viewpoint

To open a Section viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator, or use a menu command. (View > Navigate > Sections > Open Section). Another way to open the viewpoint is to select the Section line on the Floor Plan and use the Open Section command from the context menu.
By default, each Section is opened in a single window, replacing the previous opened Section. To open multiple Section windows at a time, open each new Section from the Navigator, using the Open in new window context menu command.
554
Virtual Building
Place a Linked Section Marker

Note: This process is identical for Elevations, Details and Worksheets. Linked section markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing whose information is displayed in the marker. You can place a linked Section marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail. For example, you might create a Wall Section that functions like a Detail: First, place a source Detail marker in the Section window;
then place a linked Wall Section marker on the Floor Plan which is linked to this Detail.
This linked Section marker points you to the Detail of this walls Section. To place a linked section marker: 1) Activate the Section tool. 2) In the Info Box or Section Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.
3) Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.
555
Virtual Building
4) Choose an input method (either Straight Line or Staggered Line) from the Info Box and draw a Section line on the plan.
Straight line: click twice to define each end of the line. Staggered line: click as many times as needed to define each segment of the Section line. Double-click to complete the input line. Note: The Staggered line option is not available for Elevations. The Eyeball cursor appears. 5) With the eyeball cursor, click on either side of the line to set the orientation of the linked Section marker. 6) The Marker is automatically placed after the section line is completed.
556
Virtual Building
Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker

Follow these steps to define reference information for linked Section, Elevation, Detail and Worksheet markers. For a new linked marker, or to redefine an already placed selected marker, you have these choices:
the selected viewpoint (i.e., the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the selected drawing (i.e., the drawing you select from the directory list after choosing Browse) the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint (i.e., the first drawing created from the viewpoint you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. the first placed drawing of the selected view (i.e., the first drawing created from the view you select from the directory list after choosing Browse.). First means the topmost eligible drawing in the Navigator Layout Book. Choosing any of these reference options will bring up a directory dialog box showing the relevant view of the Navigator (Project Map, View Map, or Layout Book). Choose the desired viewpoint, view or drawing. The chosen items information will be displayed in the linked marker. Thus, a linked marker can refer to any viewpoint, view or drawing in the project. If you are redefining a selected marker, click the Browse button to bring up the Define Marker Reference directory, and choose the item whose information you wish the marker to refer to.
Note: The option to refer to a view is available in case the desired Drawing is located in a different project's Layout Book (and is therefore not listed in the Define Marker Reference dialog box). Since you cannot refer to the actual drawing, you can refer to the View (in the current project) from which the Drawing was created (in the other project). The marker will display the drawing data of the first drawing created out of this view as autotext (e.g. #Drawing Name, #DrgID). Once the Layout Book that contains the reference drawing is opened alongside the project containing the marker, the marker will fill in the correct drawing data. See Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project. After the marker is placed, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time.
557
Virtual Building
Place an Unlinked Marker

Follow these steps to place an unlinked marker with the Section, Elevation, Detail or Worksheet tool. 1) In Default Settings or the Info Box, choose Placed Unlinked Marker. Such a marker displays no linked information. 2) Define any custom text for the marker using the Custom text fields in the parameter list in the Marker Panel of the Settings dialog box.
3) Draw a line or boundary (depending on the tool) and place a marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; Worksheet; Detail; 3D Document.
558
Virtual Building
Create an Independent Section Viewpoint

Note: This process is identical for Independent Elevation Viewpoints. Independent sections, with or without a marker, can be created in some windows. These viewpoints have no model source; they are listed as Independent viewpoints in the Navigator. In an independent section, you can use 2D tools to create or add new content . Use copy-paste to transfer selected items from a Trace Reference into the drawing window in 2D form for further editing. To create an independent Section without a marker, use the Create New Independent Section command. This creates an empty viewpoint without a marker, but listed in the Navigator. This command is accessible: from the Section part of the Navigator Project Map. Right-click on this folder and choose the New Independent Section command from the context menu
or from the Document > Documenting Tools submenu or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map; the selected Project Map item (in this case, a Section) determines which kind of new viewpoint will be created.
If you wish this independent Section viewpoint to be linked to a marker, place a linked Section marker into the project and link it (Marker Reference to) to the existing independent Section.
559
Virtual Building
Updating Sections
Note: The updating process is identical for Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations and 3D Documents. Each Sections status defines the link (and rebuild method) between the Section and the model on the Floor Plan. For further information, see Assign Section Status.
Updating an Autorebuild Model Section

An Autorebuild Model Section is linked to the Floor Plan model and can be edited interactively. If the Floor Plan has changed, a Section in Autorebuild Model status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen. Changes to existing construction elements in the Section window (including associative dimensions) will automatically be updated in the Floor Plan Window, and, when activated, in any other Section Window and the 3D Window. The update process works on construction elements only; 2D elements added to either the Floor Plan or Section window will not be reflected in the other window. If you are in Autorebuild status and you are editing elements inside the Section window, the rebuild function is continuous and immediate within this window. However, in large plans, continuous auto-rebuild can cause slowdowns. If you prefer that your Section window be rebuilt only when it is opened or brought to the front of the screen (the way it worked in ArchiCAD 9), go to the Options >Work Environment > More Options tab page and uncheck the Update Auto-rebuild Model... checkbox. If you nevertheless need to Rebuild manually, the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command is available. (The plain View > Refresh > Rebuild command, used to refresh 2D drawing elements, is not available for Autorebuild Model windows.) Note: Some complex changes to the plan (e.g., modifying a Library Part) do not appear automatically in Model Section Windows. For a Manual-rebuild section, use the View > Refresh > Rebuild command; for an Autorebuild section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model to see these changes reflected properly.
Updating a Manual-Rebuild Section

A Section having Manual-Rebuild Model status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command in the menu. In this case, any additional drawing elements you have added to the Section window will remain unchanged.
Updating a Drawing Section

Not applicable for 3D Documents, which are either Autorebuild or Manual-Rebuild type documents. To rebuild a Drawing-status Section, use View > Refresh > Rebuild. These commands refresh the view as a 2D drawing, fixing any potential temporary display errors. 560
Virtual Building
For a complete refreshing of a Drawing-status Section window, choose View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model. This will refresh the contents of these windows to fully reflect the current state of the Virtual Building model. In the process, all 2D elements originating from the model will be removed and an up-to-date view will be generated. This means that any previous manual editing of this artwork will be lost. 2D artwork added to the drawing manually will be kept intact.
561
Virtual Building
Summary of Rebuild Commands

The View > Refresh > Rebuild command is available in all construction windows. It rebuilds the model in the currently active window. Additional Rebuild commands in the View > Refresh menu are available if the active window is a Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, or a Detail or a Worksheet. Rebuild from Model: Use this command to rebuild the active window; this will refresh the window information to reflect modifications in the Floor Plan. Rebuild from Source View: This command is available only in the Detail and Worksheet windows. The following commands might not be visible in the View > Refresh menu by default. You can customize your menu (Options > Work Environment > Menus) to include these commands if needed. See Customizing Menus. Also, these commands are available from the context menu of the folders in the Navigator Project Map and View Map.
Rebuild All from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Section/Elevation/IE windows in your project. Rebuild All Model Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all the Section windows of Model status (either Autorebuild Model or Manual-Rebuild Model). Rebuild All Drawing Sections from Model: Use this command to rebuild all Drawing-status Section windows.
562
Virtual Building
Display of Section Lines and Markers

Note: This information also applies to Elevations. To customize the attributes of a Sections line marker, use the controls in Section Marker Panel and Section Marker Head Panel.
563
Virtual Building
Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines

Note: This process is identical for Elevations. However, Elevation lines cannot be segmented. To manipulate a selected Section line as a whole, you can use the Arrow tool, the Marquee tool, or Edit menu commands, as well as their counterpart commands from the pet palette. To change the length of a Section line, select it, then click the pet palettes stretch icon to stretch the line at either of its endpoints.
To break a Section line or line segment: Select the lines midpoint. Choose the Break Section/Elevation Line icon from the pet palette.
Click to break the segment in half, then move the newly created half-segment to a new position. Click to place. To move a segment of a Section line, select the Section Marker, then use the pet palettes Move Section line segment icon to move it.
To eliminate a break in a staggered Section line, select the Section line, then pull the break line (perpendicular to the Section line) out of the section range.
564
Virtual Building
Elevations
ArchiCAD has a separate tool for creating Elevation viewpoints and linked or unlinked Elevation markers. In contrast to Sections: Elevations generally do not slice through the structure, but rather create a cross-section view of the structure from a distant point. There is no zero depth option for the Elevations horizontal range. Elevation markers are conventionally different from Section markers; consequently, the Marker options in Elevation Settings vary from their counterparts in Section Settings. Unlike the Section Line, the Elevation line is an on-screen-only Marker item, and is not shown on the Layout. See Display of Marker Range Lines. In all other respects, the Elevation Tool works the same way as the Section Tool. To create an Elevation viewpoint, you must place a source-type Elevation marker on the Floor Plan. The resulting Elevation viewpoint has a Status (Model or Drawing) which determines its update process. The Elevation Settings Model Display Panel defines the display of the Elevation viewpoint, while the Marker and Marker Head panels determine the content and display of the Elevation marker. A linked-type Elevation marker, containing reference information only (without creating a viewpoint), can be placed in the Floor Plan, Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Detail or Worksheet Window. Unlinked Elevation markers can also be placed. For more information, see the following topics: Create a Section Viewpoint Define Horizontal/Vertical Range of Section Viewpoint Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Place a Linked Section Marker Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Section Viewpoint Updating Sections Display of Section Lines and Markers Adjusting or Breaking Section Lines
565
Virtual Building
Moving an Elevation Marker

This option is available only for Elevation and Interior Elevation markers.
Select the Elevation line; the marker will be selected and will display a node. Click on this node and choose the Move Elevation Marker command from the pet palette, then drag the marker to the desired position. The marker will retain this position even if the elevation is dragged or rotated to a new position.
566
Virtual Building
Interior Elevations (IE)

About Interior Elevations Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint Create Multiple IE Viewpoints Interior Elevation IDs and Names Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation Interior Elevations and Zone Shape Display of Elements in Interior Elevation
567
Virtual Building
About Interior Elevations

ArchiCAD has a dedicated tool that is optimized for creating interior elevations of interior spaces.
Interior Elevations (IEs) work similarly to Sections and regular Elevations: choose an input method; define the view and its limits graphically; and place a marker with custom-defined marker reference information. Each Interior Elevation is a separate viewpoint in the Navigator Project Map. Edits made on an Interior Elevation can be reflected in the Model, and vice-versa: model changes can be reflected in the Interior Elevation following an update. Dimensions are associative.
Unlike the Section and Elevation tools, the Interior Elevation tool is used to create new viewpoints only; you cannot place a linked, reference-only IE marker. Note: As source markers, IE markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this fill can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) An IE created using one of the polyline or rectangle input methods will have a separate IE view for each segment of the line; each view is created perpendicular to the segment.
568
Virtual Building
Since Interior Elevations are typically created in groups (e.g. four IE's created by placing a foursegment polyline around a single room), IE's are handled as a group for purposes of numbering, display, Trace functions, and placement on a layout. (Typically, you will use the Master Layouts Auto Arrange Setup options - in Master Layout Settings - to fine-tune the appearance of IE views on the Layout.) For more information, see Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout. These IE groups are automatically listed together in their own subsets in the Project Map. Each new IE viewpoint is assigned to an IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. You cannot move individual IE viewpoints from one Group to another.
569
Virtual Building
Create Single Interior Elevation Viewpoint

Draw the IE limit line using the single line method to create a single IE viewpoint.
1) 2) 3) 4)
Note: In contrast to Sections/Elevations, when creating an Interior Elevation you start by defining the limit of the view (e.g. the wall you want to see), then click to define view line (the place from which you view the wall). Click once to begin the limit line. Click a second time to complete the line. Move the cursor to the desired view position. Click a third time to place the IE marker.
To define the Marker style and position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 5) A new IE viewpoint is created and listed in the Project Map. It is assigned its own IE Group, even if there is only one viewpoint in the Group. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints. For more information, see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections
570
Virtual Building
Create Multiple IE Viewpoints

Use the polyline or one of the rectangle methods to create multiple viewpoints in a single IE Group.
The resulting Interior Elevation group contains the same number of viewpoints as the number of segments on the polyline/rectangle. 1) Click to begin drawing the limit line. With the polyline method, click once for each segment of the polyline; double-click to complete the polyline.
With the rectangular method, click a second time to define the opposing corners. With the rotated rectangular method, click to define the rotation vector; click again to define the length of the rectangle. The resulting line/polyline/rectangle represents the limit line of the Interior Elevation group. 2) Move the cursor to the desired view position.
571
Virtual Building
3) Click once more to place the IE marker(s).
Interior elevations use a dedicated IE marker, a GDL object with editable parameters. IE marker(s) are placed at the middle of each segment of the IE line or at the center of the room. To define the Marker style and Position, use the controls in the Marker Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. For any or all of the viewpoints, you can opt not to show a marker, by choosing the No Marker option in this panel. See Interior Elevation Marker Panel. 4) The new group of viewpoints is created and listed in the Project Map. 5) The Interior Elevation Group has its own Clone folder in the Navigator View Map. The viewpoints within a single IE group share certain settings (such as Show on Stories and Layer settings) which can be applied only to the group as a whole. However, the settings of any single segment are accessible individually. See Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints. Many other aspects of Interior Elevation viewpoints - status, display, marker reference, and updating - work the same as in Section viewpoints. For more information, see the following topics: Assign Section Status Model Display in the Section Window Define Marker Reference for Source Marker Updating Sections
572
Virtual Building
Interior Elevation IDs and Names

To assign IDs and names to IE Groups and their viewpoints, use the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings. The options in the General Panel vary depending on whether you are defining Settings for an IE Group:
or for an individual IE viewpoint:
Each new IE viewpoint is automatically assigned to an IE Group (even if there is only one viewpoint in the group). The IE Group is assigned a default ID of IE-01. Subsequent IE Groups receive their IDs accordingly. (IE-02, IE-03...)
In each individual viewpoints IE settings, the Reference ID and Name fields are set to By IE Group by default.
This means that each IE viewpoint will have the same ID and Name as its parent IE Group. ArchiCADs default IE Settings further define the ID and Name of each IE viewpoint to include Autotexts.
Use Autotext to Create Meaningful IDs/Names for Interior Elevation Group

You can define a logical naming convention for your IE Groups by including an Autotext in the parent IE Groups ID and Name. This way, each individual Interior Elevation contained in the group will display a logical Autotext value that can vary for each elevation. By default, ArchiCADs IE Group ID adds an Autotext of <Number> to the ID of each viewpoint in the IE group. In the image below, each viewpoint ID includes the Group ID (IE-01) plus an automatically assigned number (01, 02, 03...). 573
Virtual Building
Also, the default IE Group Name adds an Autotext of <Orientation> to each viewpoint Name. Consequently, each viewpoint name consists of its specific orientation, which automatically assigned using Autotext (North, South, East, West...).
Use the General Panel of IE Settings to define any other Autotext to include in the IE viewpoints name and/or ID. For example, you can set the Interior Elevation Groups ID to be the Zone Number: 1) Click the Autotext button next to the ID field in General Settings and choose Zone Number from the list.
2) In the Navigator, note that the ID of the Group is now equivalent to the number of the zone (007, in this case) contained in the Interior Elevation.
This ID is inherited by all of the viewpoints in the Group. (Naturally, assigning a Zone Number autotext works only if the Interior Elevation includes a zone.)
Customize IDs and Names

You can give a customized ID and/or Name to any IE Group or individual viewpoint: Select the IE limit line. Open Interior Elevation Settings. If it is an individual IE Viewpoint, make sure the pop-up is set to Custom.
Enter the desired ID and/or Name.
574
Virtual Building
You can also change IDs and Names for any IE Group or viewpoint in the Navigator.
575
Virtual Building
Editing Interior Elevation Viewpoints

Each viewpoint of an Interior Elevation group can be edited separately. First, select the viewpoint: select any individual Interior Elevation marker, or select any individual line segment of the Interior Elevation line.
The pet palette and context menu commands opened from this segment affect that viewpoint only. To edit the selected viewpoint: Open Interior Elevation Settings. (Use the context menu or the Info Box). Any changes you make here will apply only to the selected viewpoint. Note that certain options in IE Settings are greyed if you are editing a single viewpoint rather than an IE group. Use the pet palette's options to manipulate the selected IE segment or its marker.
Delete/Restore IE Viewpoint
If you have selected an individual IE viewpoint, you can delete that single viewpoint using the context menus Delete command.
You can restore this viewpoint even after deleting it: select the IE group to which it belongs (select any part of the IE Limit Line) and use the Restore all Interior Elevations in Group command from the context menu.
Note: This command regenerates the IE viewpoint, but any 2D edits you made in this viewpoint before deleting it have been lost. 576
Virtual Building
Editing the Interior Elevation Limit Line

Selecting any segment of the IE limit polyline selects the entire IE group. If the IE group uses a single, common marker, then selecting the marker also selects the entire IE group.
As when editing other polylines in ArchiCAD, use the pet palettes line editing options.
Inserting a node will create a new IE viewpoint in the IE group.
577
Virtual Building
Vertical and Horizontal Range of the Interior Elevation

Vertical Range
An IE viewpoints vertical range is set manually by the user in the General Panel of Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings or the Info Box.
Each IE view (i.e. each segment of the IE limit polyline) can have a separate, custom vertical range value, if desired: choose the Limited option as the Vertical Range and enter the desired elevation limits. Use the pop-up to define whether this vertical range should be measured from Project Zero, or from the Interior Elevations Home Story (the story onto which it was placed).
Horizontal Range
By default, the IE limit line represents the horizontal range of the resulting IE view. The Horizontal Range option of Interior Elevation Settings (see the General Panel) is set to By Limit Lines by default.
578
Virtual Building
To adjust the horizontal range, select the limit line and stretch or shrink it using the commands of the pet palette. (Stretch/shrink modifications to this segment will affect the neighboring line segments accordingly, as when editing any polyline.)
To include connected enclosed areas in the Interior Elevation viewpoint, choose Add bounded areas the Horizontal Range option in IE Settings.
This way, if the room contains an odd-shaped alcove, the IE viewpoint will include structures that fall beyond the Limit Line, but still fall inside the room, as in this image:
579
Virtual Building
Interior Elevations and Zone Shape

If you want the Interior Elevation to correspond to a zone, choose the Detect and Fit to Zones Vertical Range option from the General Panel of Interior Elevation Settings.
If a zone is detected, its height will be used as the vertical range of the selected Interior Elevation viewpoint. Note: The zones height is the difference between its Level value and its Height value as set in Zone Settings):
Zones edited by Solid Element Operations are also calculated accurately, provided that you also check the Consider Solid Operations box. For example, a single zone trimmed to a slanted roof will have several different zone heights. These are accurately reflected in each viewpoint of the Interior Elevation group.
580
Virtual Building
Display of Elements in Interior Elevation

Use the Model Display controls in Interior Elevation Settings to define the appearance of cut and uncut elements in the view. These options are largely identical to the Model Display in the Section Window and Interior Elevation Model Display Panel. Interior Elevations do not have a Marked Distant Area display option. Two special display options are available for the display of cut elements in Interior Elevations: Exclude View Blocking Walls: If this option is checked, any intervening walls which block the view in the Interior Elevation will not be displayed. Hide Cut Elements: If this option is checked, elements that are cut by the Interior Elevation Line will not be displayed.
581
Virtual Building
3D Document
About the 3D Document Create a 3D Document The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source Redefine the 3D Document Model Display of the 3D Document
582
Virtual Building
About the 3D Document

The 3D Document allows you to use the 3D view of the model as the basis for creating a document, to which you can add dimensions, labels and additional 2D drawing elements. For example, you can convert a 3D view of a building into a document that shows detailed structural information in 3D - such as intersection of composite walls in space. This is possible because the 3D Document can display cut surfaces in a 3D model structure, optionally using the cut fill and line attributes defined at the element level. To add dimensions, just use ArchiCADs dimensioning tools, plus certain dimensioning functions that are available only for 3D Documents.
The 3D Document is a viewpoint which appears in the Navigator Project Map. In many respects, the 3D Document is analogous to the Section viewpoint: it is an integral part of the ArchiCAD model, and its model elements are rebuilt automatically or manually, depending on its status. In the 3D Document, you can select model elements and access their settings dialog boxes to make changes in the model, but you cannot edit them graphically or create new model elements. The 3D Document has its source in the 3D window. Specific parameters and options affecting 3D window display (such as projection and filtering/selection of elements) will affect 3D Document display; you can redefine the 3D Document after adjusting these 3D window settings. However, like other model views, the 3D Document has its own 3D Document Settings dialog box, where you can set parameters that are specific to the 3D Document: these include fill/pen display of element surfaces (including cut composite elements) and contours, transparency, 3D hatching, shading, shadow and sun effects. Note: The display of composite elements in the 3D Document window also depends on the Partial Structure Display Settings.
583
Virtual Building
In particular, you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures:
3D Document Settings Model Display of the 3D Document Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source
584
Virtual Building
Create a 3D Document
1) In the 3D window, set up a 3D view of the model: the view you want to see in your 3D Document: Set up the perspective or projected 3D view; use 3D Cutting Planes; filter or select elements; use Marquee as needed, or perform solid element operations. 2) Create a new 3D Document by doing one of the following: With 3D window open: Use New 3D Document... command from the context menu of the Navigator's 3D Document folder
Use Capture Window for 3D Document command from the context menu of the 3D window (with nothing selected).
Use a menu command (Document > 3D Document > Create New 3D Document; or Document > Documenting Tools > Create 3D Document). 585
Virtual Building
3) The New 3D Document dialog box appears.
Enter a Reference ID and Name for the new 3D Document; click Create. 4) The 3D Document is created and opened in its own window. 5) The 3D Document is listed in the 3D Document folder in the Project Map of the Navigator.
586
Virtual Building
The 3D Document and its 3D Window Source

The contents of the 3D Document are defined out of the 3D Window; that 3D window is the source of your 3D Document. Although there is only one current 3D window at any given time (you cannot open multiple 3D windows simultaneously), each 3D Document can have its own 3D window source. In other words: each 3D Document stores the settings (projection, filtering, cutting planes etc.) of its own 3D window source. You can, at any time, edit certain settings of this 3D Window source, and then Redefine the 3D Document to reflect these edits. Redefine refers to specific settings of the 3D window that affect how the 3D Document appears in the window. These settings are: The current 3D projection, including zoom Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) Selection/Marquee limitations Cutting Planes Note the difference between Redefine and Rebuild. Rebuild refers to the model elements: their size, shape and relation to the rest of the model elements. Rebuild for a 3D Document works the same as for other model views (e.g. Section). Your 3D Document, if set to AutoRebuild, is rebuilt every time you open it. If it is Manual-Update, it is rebuilt only upon command. (View > Rebuild > Rebuild from Model). There is no Drawing-type 3D Document. For more information, see Assign Section Status.
3D Projections Filter Elements in 3D Show Marquee Area in 3D Show Selection in 3D 3D Cutaway Sections
587
Virtual Building
Redefine the 3D Document

There are three ways to redefine a 3D Document after you have created it. Each method is described below:
Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command Redefine Using 3D Document Settings Redefine 3D Document: Open and Edit 3D Source
If the 3D Document window is in front: use the Open 3D Source command from the context menu to open the source 3D window.
Or: right-click the 3D Document viewpoint or view from the Navigator, then click the Open Source View command:
588
Virtual Building
Make your changes in the 3D window: Edit elements Adjust the projection Change element visibility using Selection/Marquee Change the Filter Elements settings. Then use the Redefine command: Select the 3D Document from the Navigator Project Map and right-click to access the Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D command.
Alternatively, with the 3D window in front and nothing selected, use the Redefine 3D Document command.
589
Virtual Building
This brings up the Redefine 3D Document dialog box.
Choose the 3D Document which you want to redefine based on the current 3D window. A warning reminds you that this Redefine operation is not undoable.
Click Redefine Anyway to proceed.
Redefine 3D Document Based on Current 3D Window Command

This command will redefine your 3D Document based on the status of the latest instance of the 3D window (the one currently open, or the one that was last open). You do not need to open the 3D window. Note: The current 3D window is not necessarily the same as the original source of your 3D Document. Your 3D Document will be redefined according to the following settings of the current 3D window: The current 3D projection, including zoom Filter Elements to Show in 3D (View > Elements in 3D View) Selection/Marquee limitations Cutting Planes
590
Virtual Building
With the 3D Document in front, use the Redefine based on the Current 3D command from the context menu with nothing selected:
Another way to get the same result: In the Navigator Project Map, right-click the 3D document which you want to define and use Redefine 3D Document based on current 3D window.
591
Virtual Building
Redefine Using 3D Document Settings

If you want to redefine an existing 3D Document without having to open the source 3D window, an easy way to do it is to use its 3D Document Settings. Open 3D Document Settings (select the 3D Document in the Navigator Project Map; or click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator or from the context menu; or from the Document > 3D Document menu).
The controls in the General panel allow you to access dialog boxes to modify the 3D Document and its 3D window source, without having to open the 3D window itself:
592
Virtual Building
Make any or all of the following changes: Click Redefine 3D Projections to bring up the Perspective or Parallel Settings dialog box which reflects the 3D Documents source 3D window. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the projections dialog box. This is where you can redefine Sun settings for your 3D Document: click Redefine 3D Projections, then More Sun to adjust the sun position. Click Redefine Filter Elements to access the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. Make any adjustments needed, and click OK to leave the dialog box. Check the box to redefine the projection, cutting planes, and visible elements of the 3D Document based on the current 3D window. Changes in your 3D Document will take effect when you click OK to leave 3D Document Settings. For details on these controls, see 3D Document General Panel.
593
Virtual Building
Model Display of the 3D Document

While the 3D Document derives many of its settings from its 3D window source, several important settings for the 3D Documents model appearance are derived from the 3D Document Model Display Panel. In particular, you can display the materials of cut surfaces in a 3D-like display to graphically communicate composite structures. Use the 3D Document Settings Model Panel to set: Fills and pens for element surfaces and contours, and for cut elements Transparency Vectorial 3D hatching Shaded materials Sun and Shadow effects Important: These settings apply to the 3D Document and are independent of its 3D source window.
594
Virtual Building
Details
About Details Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source Contents of the Detail Viewpoint Place a Linked Detail Marker Place an Unlinked Marker Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Updating the Detail Window
595
Virtual Building
About Details
The Detail tool is used to generate a Detail drawing viewpoint from the model by placing a Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan; Section; Elevation; Interior Elevation; 3D Document; Worksheet; Detail window. It is also used to place linked Detail markers, as a reference to any viewpoint, view or drawing. The Detail Marker (a GDL object) is displayed according to the settings you made in the Detail Settings dialog box. You can also create an independent Detail drawing, with or without a marker. Detail viewpoints are displayed in a dedicated Detail Drawing Window and listed in the Details part of the Navigator Project Map. Detail viewpoints generated from existing elements in the project are 2D-only copies of these elements. The viewpoints can be updated to reflect changes in the plan. You can add additional 2D elements, text, labels and objects to a Detail Drawing. You may wish to fine-tune the Detail Drawing before final output. You will find, however, that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. To open the Detail Drawing in its own window, double-click the detail view name in the Navigator.
596
Virtual Building
Create a Detail Drawing Viewpoint with Model Source

To create a Detail with its source in the model, place an area-based Detail marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, 3D Document, Worksheet or Detail. 1) Activate the Detail tool. 2) In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Create new detail viewpoint is selected.
3) Choose an area-based geometry method from the Info Box: Polygonal, Rectangular, or Rotated Rectangular. (The first, No Boundary geometry method, creates a marker linked to an independent viewpoint having no model source.)
4) Draw the Detail boundary and click to complete. 5) After drawing the detail boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Detail Marker. The X represents the Details origin.
Note: Source-type Detail markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Detail Drawing viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Detail viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information - can be defined in the Detail Tool Settings dialog box.
597
Virtual Building
Contents of the Detail Viewpoint

The source-based detail drawing consists of only 2D lines/fills, including the 2D exploded representations of all construction elements inside the detail boundary. By default, only construction elements are transferred; annotations and dimensions are not transferred to the Detail viewpoint. (You can change this setting using a checkbox in the General Panel of Detail Settings.)
For information on what happens to annotation elements cut by the Detail boundary, see Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary. Only 2D tools are available in the Detail window. All types of 2D information can be added to the Detail Drawing: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. The Detail Drawing will include a line representing the Detail Boundary you drew on the plan. See Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary. Section Details (Detail viewpoints created from a Section) reveal the elevation of the original construction, which means that Elevation Dimensioning placed on Detail viewpoints shows correct elevation values, unless you displace drawing elements vertically. (The same is true for Elevation Dimensions in Details generated from Elevations and Interior Elevations.)
Worksheet vs. Detail
598
Virtual Building
Place a Linked Detail Marker

To place a linked detail marker without creating a viewpoint: 1) Activate the Detail tool. 2) In the Info Box or Detail Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected.
3) Define the Marker Reference using the appearing dialog box. See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker. 4) Choose any of the Detail geometry methods to place the marker.
If you use the No Boundary geometry method: click once to place the marker If you use any of the area-based methods: draw a Detail boundary, then click with the hammer cursor to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Detail marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.
599
Virtual Building
Create an Independent Detail Viewpoint

An Independent Detail drawing is one whose content you create yourself, starting with an empty detail viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An Independent Detail drawing is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. You may wish to create an Independent Detail for your documentation which depicts something that does not otherwise exist in the model - for example, detail of a fence. These independent Detail Drawings always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can be marked or unmarked: Independent marked details have a corresponding detail marker on the plan. Independent unmarked details do not have a detail marker on the plan, but they exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator.
Create an Independent Detail viewpoint with a marker

1) In Detail Settings or the Info Box, choose Create New Detail Viewpoint. 2) Define the Marker Reference: the viewpoint, or the first placed drawing of the viewpoint The link information of the chosen viewpoint/drawing will appear in the Reference to text field. After the marker is placed and the new Detail is created, you can still go back and change its marker information at any time. 3) Choose the single-click geometry method (the first icon among the Info Box geometry methods) and click to place a detail marker on the plan.
4) A new, empty Detail viewpoint is created (independent marked detail) and listed in the navigator. This viewpoint has no model source. To open the independent Detail viewpoint, double-click its name in the Navigator or access it with the Open Detail Drawing in the markers context menu. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the detail drawing window.
600
Virtual Building
Create an Independent Detail viewpoint without a marker

Use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Detail command. You can also access this command from the Detail folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator;
or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Detail or the Detail folder is selected. Independent unmarked details are listed in the Navigator, though they have no associated marker. Later, if needed, you can attach a Independent Detail viewpoint to a marker: place a linked marker and point the marker to your Detail viewpoint.
601
Virtual Building
Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary

When you create a new Detail or Worksheet viewpoint using a polygon input method, the resulting drawing will show the Boundary as a dashed line. If you do not want this boundary included in the Drawing window, disable the relevant checkbox in Options > Work Environment > More Options.
602
Virtual Building
Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary

If you redraw the boundary of a source detail or worksheet marker, any markers linked to this marker's viewpoint will not be updated until you issue the Update Linked Markers Boundaries command from the Detail/Worksheet viewpoint item's Navigator context menu.
This command affects the shape of marker boundaries only, not any associated model content.
603
Virtual Building
Updating the Detail Window

If the source view of a Detail viewpoint has been modified, update its contents with the Rebuild from Source View command (from context menu of the detail drawing listed in the Navigator, or from the View > Refresh sub-menu).
For more information, see Summary of Rebuild Commands.
604
Virtual Building
Worksheets
About Worksheets Worksheet vs. Detail Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source Contents of the Worksheet Window Editing in the Worksheet Window Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint Place a Linked Worksheet Marker Place an Unlinked Marker
605
Virtual Building
About Worksheets
The Worksheet window provides a dedicated environment for 2D model-based drawings, such as partial floor plans and partial sections, and for drawings created entirely in 2D. Worksheets can be used as a dedicated environment for finishing drawings using 2D tools, and for working with consultants limited to 2D methods. You might want use a Worksheet to add a diagram or organizational chart, which is totally independent of your model, yet useful for your documentation. As in the Detail window, elements on the Worksheet consist of 2D-only duplicates of any construction elements in exploded form (e.g. 2D lines and fills). Only 2D tools are available in the Worksheet window. You may find that the exploded 2D elements generated from the model often contain superfluous elements (extra line segments, overlapping or superfluous fills) that make such editing difficult. To make editing easier, first use the The Linework and Fill Consolidation functions on selected items in the window. For more information, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. The user can link any type of marker to the Worksheet. You can place a Section marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type section. You can also place a Detail marker onto a Worksheet to create a Drawing-type Detail. Such Drawing Sections and Drawing Details cannot be refreshed based on the content of the Worksheet window. The Worksheet tool is active in any window. It has marker and linking options similar to those of the other ArchiCAD marker tools (Section, Detail). To open a Worksheet window, double-click its name in the Navigator. Use the available 2D drawing tools, place objects, text, labels, or paste an existing drawing into the drawing window.
606
Virtual Building
Worksheet vs. Detail

While creating a Worksheet based on the source model is similar to creating a model-based Detail, the Worksheet is optimized for creating partial floor plans and partial sections. Unlike the Detail tool, the Worksheet tool has a single-click capture geometry method which reproduces the entire contents of the current window as 2D elements in the Worksheet viewpoint. Consequently, when transferring all or part of a source model view to a Worksheet window: Annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, appear in the resulting Worksheet, in addition to construction elements exploded into 2D components. (In contrast, a Detail viewpoint created from the model will - by default - contain the 2D-only copies of construction elements only, without the source model's annotation/dimension elements.) The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source. (In contrast, a Detail is created, by default, at half the scale of the original.)
607
Virtual Building
Create a Worksheet Drawing with Model Source

To create a Worksheet with its source in the model, place a Worksheet marker in any of the following windows: Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation, Worksheet or Detail. 1) Activate the Worksheet tool. 2) In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Create new Worksheet viewpoint is selected. 3) Choose any of the geometry methods from the Info Box.
Capture Screen input method: Use the single-click method: the first input method in the Worksheet info box. Choose this icon, then click anywhere in the active project window. You will create a Worksheet based on the entire contents of the window. Area-based input method: Use one of the polygonal or rectangular/rotated rectangle geometry methods to define the Worksheet area. 4) Draw the Worksheet boundary and click to complete. 5) After drawing the Worksheet boundary, click with the hammer cursor to place the Worksheet Marker. Note: Source-type Worksheet markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semitransparent fill. (Use View > On-screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers to enable or disable this distinguishing fill for all source markers. The color of this highlight can be set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.) 6) A new Worksheet viewpoint is created and listed in the Navigator Project Map. To define the reference information displayed in a source-type Worksheet marker. See Define Marker Reference for Source Marker. Other information about the new Worksheet viewpoint - its Markers and Reference information are defined in Worksheet Tool Settings.
608
Virtual Building
Contents of the Worksheet Window

A project-based Worksheet only contains drawing primitives, that is, lines and fills. These originate from the construction elements on the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D Document. Section/ Elevation and Detail/Worksheet markers within the Worksheet boundary are live markers: they continue to function as markers. When transferring all or part of a model view to a Worksheet window, annotation elements and dimensions will, by default, also appear in the resulting Worksheet. To copy construction elements only, without annotations/dimensions, check the Copy construction elements only box in Worksheet Settings. The resulting Worksheet will have the same scale as the source, if any. (If the source has no scale, the Worksheet will be shown at a default scale value.) If the Worksheet boundary intersects annotation elements, dimensions or marker-type elements (Section/Elevation markers; Detail/Worksheet markers), then these will be transferred to the Worksheet window if they meet the relevant criteria, as follows. Note: The following also apply to Detail drawings. (However, by default, Detail drawings do not include annotations or dimensions at all, unless you uncheck Copy Construction elements only in Detail Settings.) Figures and Drawings: if at least one reference point is inside the worksheet boundary, the entire Figure or Drawing will be included in the Worksheet. Labels: Arrowhead must be inside the boundary. Dimensions: The relevant reference point(s) or the dimensions endpoints must be inside the boundary. Dimensions with two endpoints must have both endpoints inside. Dimension chains will be transferred by segment: if both endpoints of any segment are within the boundary, that segment is included in the Worksheet. Door/Window markers: If any part of the Wall falls within the boundary, then all Doors, Windows, and Door/Window markers in that Wall are also included in the Worksheet. Detail markers: If a detail viewpoints origin (the X) or endpoint of a marker falls within the boundary, the entire marker is included in the Worksheet. Section and Elevation Markers: If any part of a Section or Elevation line is included in the boundary, the Section/Elevation marker (a GDL object) will be included in the Worksheet, although the lines geometry may be different (the line may be shorter) if the boundary includes only part of the Section/Elevation line. Note: Interior Elevation markers, unlike Section/Elevation markers, are cut by the boundary and appear in the Worksheet as exploded line/fill components.
Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary
609
Virtual Building
Editing in the Worksheet Window

Only 2D tools are available when the Worksheet window is active. All types of 2D information can be added to the Worksheet: Lines, Fills, Hotspots, Text, Figures, Drawings, Dimensions and 2D Symbols of Objects. You can add content to your Worksheet window in several ways: Select any element(s) from any window and paste them into the Worksheet window. All elements, including construction elements, will be pasted in 2D form. To transfer elements from a Trace Reference, first switch the Reference with the active window, then copy-paste from there into the Worksheet (in exploded form) Draw all new 2D elements into the Worksheet window.
610
Virtual Building
Create an Independent Worksheet Viewpoint

An independent worksheet is one which you create yourself, starting with an empty worksheet viewpoint. You can then use 2D drawing tools or paste an object or existing drawing. An independent worksheet is not generated from existing project elements and so is unlinked to any modifications that take place in your plan. These independent Worksheets always appear in the Navigator tree structure. They can either have a marker, or not. Independent worksheets without a marker in the project exist as viewpoints which you can open from the Navigator. To create an independent Worksheet without a marker, use the Document > Documenting Tools > Create Independent Worksheet command. You can also access this command from the Worksheet folder context menu in the Project Map of the Navigator; or by clicking the New Viewpoint folder at the bottom of the Navigator Project Map, if a Worksheet or the Worksheet folder is selected. Independent Worksheets without a marker are also listed in the Navigator. However, you can subsequently link a marker to such a Worksheet as needed.
611
Virtual Building
Place a Linked Worksheet Marker

To place a linked Worksheet marker without creating a viewpoint: 1) Activate the Worksheet tool. 2) In the Info Box or Default Settings, make sure that Place Linked Marker is selected. 3) Choose any of the Worksheet geometry methods to place the marker. Such a marker has no model source and does not generate a new viewpoint. To define the reference information displayed in a linked Worksheet marker: See Define Marker Reference for Linked Marker.
612
Virtual Building
Managing Markers in ArchiCAD

About Markers Display of Marker Range Lines Source Marker Highlight Changing Marker Type Transfer Marker Parameters Copying a Marker Navigation Using Markers Find Linked Markers Check Markers Palette Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker Deleting a Marker
613
Virtual Building
About Markers
Markers can be placed using any of the following tools: Sections Elevations Interior Elevations (IE) Worksheets Details With any of the Marker tools, you can opt to place a source marker. A source marker creates a new viewpoint (e.g. a Section, Elevation, Worksheet, Detail) involving the model as their source. Any of the Markers - except Interior Elevation - can optionally be defined as a linked marker. Such markers have no model source and do not generate a new viewpoint. Instead, they are placed in the project, then linked by the user to an existing viewpoint, view or drawing. This information is displayed in the marker, which can be used to navigate to the referred item. An unlinked marker has no model source and displays no linked information. You cannot use it to navigate among markers, but you can define any custom text for it.
614
Virtual Building
Display of Marker Range Lines

After you draw an input line or polygon with the any of the marker-type tools, these input lines will remain displayed on screen when you place the Marker. Marker Range items include: Elevation, Interior Elevation Line Section/Elevation Limit Line (for Sections and Elevations of limited depth) Distant line (for Sections and Elevations with a Marked Distant Area) Interior Elevation Limit lines Polygons defining area-based Details and Worksheets These Marker Range items are on-screen elements only; and never present on printouts. You can choose to show or hide Marker range items of all types using the View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range toggle. To customize the line type/color of these Marker Range lines, use the controls in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary
615
Virtual Building
Source Marker Highlight

Source markers are distinguished on screen by an optional semi-transparent fill. This option makes it easy to tell at a glance which of your markers on screen are source markers. To toggle this highlight on or off for all source markers, use the View > On-Screen View Options > Highlight Source Markers command. To change the color of the source marker highlight, use the color chooser in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
Display of Detail/Worksheet Boundary Update Detail/Worksheet Marker Boundary
616
Virtual Building
Changing Marker Type

You can change the type of an already placed marker, so long as all the Marker references point to items that originate with a Marker tool.
To change a linked marker to a source marker:

Select the marker.
Use the Set as Source Marker command from its context menu; or Open the marker's Settings dialog box and choose the Source Marker option The linked marker becomes the source marker, while the original source marker becomes a linked marker. This function is available for: Linked markers which are linked to a viewpoint/view/drawing that is located within the current project. The linked marker must have been placed using the same tool as the item to which it was linked (e.g. a Section marker linked to a Section viewpoint). Note: A viewpoints cut/model attributes are defined by its source marker. If a linked marker becomes the source of a section, that marker's cut/model attributes are now applied to the viewpoint. Note: If you change a linked detail marker into a source detail marker, the viewpoints defining polygon will change to reflect the new source detail markers polygon. Linked markers linked to an independent viewpoint of the same type. The independent viewpoint is deleted and replaced by a source viewpoint. (If the original linked marker had no boundary, the source will take on a default boundary value.) Markers linked to an external drawing cannot be changed to a source marker.
To change a source marker to a linked marker:

Select the marker. Use the Set as Linked Marker command from its context menu; or Open the marker's Settings dialog box and choose the Linked Marker option The original source marker becomes a linked marker containing the same reference information as before.
617
Virtual Building
Transfer Marker Parameters

You can use the Parameter Transfer commands (Pick Up Parameters/Inject Parameters) among markers. If you Pick Up Parameters from a source marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will take on all of the first markers parameters except its link information, and except for its geometry (e.g. the range of a section marker.) If you Pick Up Parameters from a linked marker and inject them into another marker, the second marker will become identical to the first: a second linked marker with the same parameters, and containing the identical reference information, as the first.
618
Virtual Building
Copying a Marker
Any interaction (Copy/Paste, Drag/Rotate/Mirror Copy/Copies) that results in creating a new copy of a marker will have the following results: Copying a source marker (Section/Elevation/IE or Worksheet) results in a second source marker, which creates a new viewpoint having the same parameters as the viewpoint associated with the original marker. The new viewpoint's name, however, will be different. Moreover, the Marker Link information is not copied. Copying a source Detail marker will create a new linked Detail marker, which is linked to the original detail viewpoint.
619
Virtual Building
Navigation Using Markers

To navigate using a marker, select the marker and open the context menu.
Use the Open command to go to the referred item. If the marker is linked to a Drawing, use the context menu (Go to Drawing) to open the layout containing the referred drawing.
From the same context menu, the Open/Open in new window commands will open the source viewpoint/view of the linked drawing. The linked detail marker in the image below refers to the first placed drawing of a selected Interior Elevation view. Its context menu allows you to Go to the Drawing Open the Interior Elevation view in the current or in a new window
620
Virtual Building
Find Linked Markers

To find all the markers linked to a particular viewpoint/view/drawing, select the item from the Navigator. Use the Find Linked Markers command from the item's context menu.
For Drawings placed on Layouts, the Find Linked Markers command is also available if you select the Drawing itself, then open the context menu.
The Find Linked markers dialog box lists all the linked markers: By marker subtype (shown as an icon) Placed to: ID and name of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed. (If it is a source marker, the viewpoint name is underlined.) Clicking either column header will sort the list accordingly. Click Marker Settings to open the Tool Settings dialog box of the selected marker. Click Go to Selected to zoom to the selected marker. (The button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.)
621
Virtual Building
Check Markers Palette

The Check Markers function lists which marker-referred items are missing from the project. The Check Markers Palette is available from Window > Palettes > Check Markers. To list undefined marker references, click the Check Markers button at the top of the palette.
The palette lists all the markers in the project which the user has automatically or manually linked a viewpoint, drawing or view, but whose referred viewpoint/drawing/view has since been deleted from this project. (In this case, the marker will display Autotext in place of the missing data.) If no such marker exists, the Palette will display this message: No undefined marker references in this project. Markers are listed, and can be sorted, according to the following: Marker subtype: Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet/Interior Elevation (shown as icon) Placed to: ID and Project Map path of the viewpoint in which the marker is placed Selected item: Name and ID of the markers referenced item (i.e. the viewpoint/view/ drawing one you chose when defining the marker reference). If this referenced item has been deleted from the project, this column will show N/A. Approve: Editable checkbox for each marker. You can sort items by any of these properties by clicking on its column header. You can then perform a secondary sorting function: clicking a second column header will further sort within the hierarchy obtained by the first sorting. An icon at the bottom of the palette allows the user to zoom to the selected marker. (The zoom button is disabled if multiple markers are selected.) For each problematic marker listed (or multiple selected markers), the user can click Marker Settings to re-link the marker(s) or otherwise modify them. The user may decide that the marker is OK the way it is (even though it continues to display undefined Autotext). In this case, the Approve checkbox can be used as a sorting criterion; check the box for these markers. (For example, if you know that the undefined Autotext refers to an external project that has not yet been loaded.)
622
Virtual Building
If you don't want the palette to re-list these approved markers as problems the next time you click the Check Markers button, use the Hide Approved Markers option from the pop-up at top right of the dialog box.
Otherwise, use the List all items option.
623
Virtual Building
Deleting a Viewpoint/View/Drawing with a Marker

If you delete a viewpoint, the program will first check whether its source/linked markers are located on a locked layer or in a different Teammate's workspace, or whether the marker elements themselves have been locked. These markers include: The viewpoint's source marker Markers linked to the viewpoint Markers linked to views created out of the viewpoint. If none of these markers is locked or reserved, then the program displays a Warning dialog box informing you that proceeding with the Delete procedure will delete all of the following: The viewpoint (even if its source marker displays the data of a different viewpoint) Any views created out of the viewpoint All the source/linked markers listed above.
If you delete a view, any markers linked to that view will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. These markers will be listed as problematic the next time you run the Check Markers function. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint. If you delete a drawing, any markers linked to that drawing will remain in place. However, they will no longer display any linked information, just an undefined Autotext. Markers linked to the deleted drawing with first drawing from view/viewpoint will henceforth be linked to the next drawing created out of the same viewpoint.
624
Virtual Building
Deleting a Marker
If you delete a source marker, a dialog box appears informing you that deleting a source marker will also delete the viewpoint and any markers linked to it. However, the same dialog box gives you a different option: delete the source marker, but keep the viewpoint as an independent viewpoint with no model source. Deleting a linked marker has no effect on any other element.
625
Virtual Building
Interactive Schedule
About Schedules Open a Schedule Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items Editing and Updating Schedule Items Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings Sort Schedule Fields Format a Schedule Schedule Headers Add Annotations to Schedule Previews Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts
626
Virtual Building
About Schedules
ArchiCADs Interactive Schedule function allows you to automatically generate schedules. Unlike simple lists created with the commands of the Document > Schedules and Lists menu, the Interactive Schedule not only displays quantities and other parameters - you can actually edit it. This makes it possible to notice and correct inconsistencies resulting from a data entry error or from the merging of the work of several people on different parts of the same project. For example, the schedule may allow you to detect that all but one of the thirty or forty doors placed in your building have the same height and width. You can then select this door directly from the schedule and check whether there is a reason for this inconsistency. If you find that this was a mistake, then you can correct the setting in the schedule and automatically update the door in all views. Similarly, its easy to double-check how many of the doors open to the right or the left. There are two categories of Interactive Schedules: Element Lists show characteristics of simple construction elements Component Lists are optimized to list information about each component of composite elements (composite walls, slabs, roofs and/or multi-component profile elements
627
Virtual Building
The content of the Schedule is based on Schedule Scheme Settings. To adjust these, you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Scheme Settings button at top right. For more information on defining schedule content, see Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings. The units of the listed values (e.g. length, volume) are set in Calculation Units and Rules Preferences. You can access Schedules from either the Navigator palette or the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules submenu. Click the name of a defined Schedule to open the Interactive Schedule window and update its contents. Schedules are viewpoints, which you can save as views and output as drawings on a Layout, or save in various other file formats. See Saving from a Schedule Window (Interactive Schedule). A formatted schedule can be placed into any 2D window (typically a Worksheet), by using Copy/ Paste. The contents of the schedule, after pasting, will consist of lines and text, which you can freely edit, but will no longer be associative to the model.
628
Virtual Building
Open a Schedule
ArchiCAD 13 comes with predefined Schedules, such as Door List; Wall List; Window List. To open any of these schedules to list the elements in the current project, double-click the Schedule name in the Navigator.
. (You can also access Schedules through the Go command of the Mini-Navigator Toolbar, or from the Window menu.) The Schedule window opens, showing the schedule, along with formatting options in the left column. To display the schedule only, without the formatting panel, click the black arrow on the dividing line.
For information on formatting the schedule, see Format Options (Interactive Schedule).
629
Virtual Building
The Interactive Schedule window, like other Listing windows, has an additional shortcut in their bottom scrollbar allowing you to Fit the Width of the generated list to the current window size.
To adjust individual row or column heights, manually drag the tabs on the top and left side of the schedule. Double-click any tab to fit the cell to its contents.
630
Virtual Building
Show Schedule Data for Selected Floor Plan Items

You may wish to view an Element Schedule for only certain items on the Floor Plan, for the purpose of interactively editing these elements. Select the desired elements (on the Floor Plan only), then find the desired Element Schedule in the Navigator Project Map or View Map. Right-click the schedule name and choose List Floor Plan Selection Only to view schedule data for the selected items only (as opposed to the items defined in the Schedule Scheme criteria).
This is a quick way to filter elements for editing as a group, by taking advantage of the Interactive Schedule capabilities. You cannot save a view out of the displayed data.
631
Virtual Building
Editing and Updating Schedule Items

To work on an item of the Interactive Element Schedule, click its column (or row). You will see that some of the cells of this column become editable, while others cannot be modified. In the example below, you can see that while the name field of the Door type library part is locked, it is possible to overwrite the sill and head height.
Any changes you make in these fields of the Schedule are automatically and instantly reflected in the Floor Plan and in other views, when activated. Conversely, all changes made on these elements in the Floor Plan or another editable view are updated in the Schedule when you return to it. If you have selected an item in the Schedule Window, use the Select on Floor Plan icon to go to the Floor Plan window and view the selected item.
The icon to its right, Select in 3D, takes you to the 3D Window and zooms onto the selected item.
632
Virtual Building
Define a Schedule Using Scheme Settings

The contents of your Interactive Schedule are defined in the Scheme Settings dialog box. Here, you define (1) the criteria for selecting the items to be listed in the Schedule; and (2) the fields (i.e. the particular information about the chosen items) to be listed in the Schedule. Choose the Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules > Scheme Settings command from the menu; or the Scheme Settings button from the opened Schedule window
. In the top Schemes Panel, choose the scheme you want to edit, or use the buttons at the right to create, rename, delete, import and export schemes. For details, see Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule).
633
Virtual Building
If you choose Create New, you must define whether the new Schedule will be an Element Schedule or a Component Schedule.
Define Schedule Criteria

In the Criteria panel, select the first line, then choose a criterion for the items you wish to include in the Schedule. For simple Element lists, choose Element type.
In the Value column, select the desired element. For example, to create a Door List we have chosen Element Type is Door as the only criterion.
634
Virtual Building
Add New Criteria

To add a new criterion, click the Add button.
You can now choose a second Element Type criterion, such as Window. The and/or field in the first row (Element Type is Door) is now editable: in this case, choose or.
The two values (Door, Window) are joined as an or statement, so that the resulting schedule will include every element that is either a Window or a Door. To narrow the scope of a schedule, add additional criteria. For example, if you want a schedule of only those doors and windows which are on Story 2 and above, add a new criterion by clicking the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box. Then choose Story from the Criteria list, and complete the row with the desired Story value (>=2).
In this example, the schedule will list all elements that fit either of the Element Type Criteria, and also fit the Story criteria: to be on the list, the element must be either a window or a door, and it must be located with the defined Story range.
635
Virtual Building
If you have chosen an object-type Element as an Element Type, and you want to use one of its particular parameters as an additional criterion, click the Additional Parameters button at the bottom of the dialog box. In the appearing dialog box, browse the loaded libraries to find the library part whose parameters you need. Choose the parameter, then click Add. This parameter will then be listed in your Criteria list.
Complex Criteria Definition

If needed, use the Open Parentheses and Close Parentheses columns of Scheme Settings to set up nested criteria for more complex schemes: in any selected row, click on the pop-up under the parentheses column to choose a parenthesis, or no parenthesis.
Each open must have a corresponding close in order for the scheme to be logical. If there is a mistake in your parentheses logic, the Criteria invalid! warning appears at the bottom of the panel.
Define Schedule Fields

In the Fields Panel of Schedule Scheme Settings, you will choose which fields should be displayed in your schedule. From the list of Available Parameters on the left, choose the desired items, and click Add at the bottom of the dialog box to add them to the Schedule Fields on the right. For example, in the Wall List scheme pictured here, we want the Wall Layer to be included in the schedule. Choose Layer from the Available Parameter, then click Add to add it to the Schedule Fields on the right.
636
Virtual Building
Sort Schedule Fields

To change the order in which fields are listed in the schedule, use the up/down arrows at the left edge of each row to move the field up or down.
See also Schemes Fields Panel. You can further set the order in which items are listed within each field, by using the three buttons at the right: Click the first button to sort walls in this field in ascending/descending order. (You can also leave this field blank, for None. None means that this field will not be taken into consideration when sorting.) In the example below, walls will be listed by Wall Type (the name of the schedule column that lists walls by Cut Fill type, the first schedule field); inasmuch as several walls are of the same type - such as Masonry Block- the walls will be listed in order of their volume.
Click the second button to add a schedule cell which displays the sum of the items in the selected field. Here, we will have the schedule add a sum to the schedules Volume column.
The second button contains an icon for a second option: to list a quantity for this field.
Here, we will have the schedule add a Quantity to the schedules Wall Type column.
637
Virtual Building
The result: Wall Type shows a Quantity at the bottom of the column (a total of 8 walls), and the Volume column shows a total sum of all the volumes at the bottom (65.19 m3).
Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sums/quantities, which is called Grand Total. If you choose Grand Total from the Apply to pop-up list, the formatting options will apply to this row/column of the schedule only.
The third button lets you add a flag to one of the fields in the list. (You cannot flag more than one field at a time.) The flagged field will display a separate sum or quantity for each group of identical elements in that field. For example, the Wall Type field already has a Quantity row, showing the total number of walls; to show a Quantity for each type of wall in that field, we have added a flag to the Cut Fill Type field.
The result: Wall Types show a separate quantity for each separate wall type. Moreover, the Volume column also lists the corresponding volume sub-totals.
Note: You can apply unique formatting options to this row of sum/quantity subtotals, which is called Total.
638
Virtual Building
Format a Schedule
Use the formatting controls at the left side of the Schedule Window to format the current schedule.
For more information on each of these options, see Format Options (Interactive Schedule).
639
Virtual Building
Schedule Headers
Each field of the schedule has a header. These headers are shown at the top of the schedule (for column-style schedules) or at the side (for row-style schedules). Each schedule also has a single main header. To show or hide headers and/or the main header, use the commands from Header Options, at the top of the Schedule window.
To change a header text, just click into the field and type. To format it, make sure that Header is selected from the Apply To pop-up, then choose text formatting options.
To select multiple fields, use Shift-click. You can add an additional header field above existing headers: 1) Select multiple headers (use Shift-click.) 2) Choose Insert Header Cell Above from Header Options.
3) A new cell is inserted above the selected cells, showing the text merged. Type in any header text and format as usual.
640
Virtual Building
Add Annotations to Schedule Previews

If your Interactive Schedule includes previews of objects, doors and windows, you can add dimensions to these preview pictures in the Schedule. 1) Double-click the cell of the preview which you wish to annotate, or Select the cell, then click on Annotate.
2) The preview picture opens in a separate 2D window entitled Element Preview. 3) Use the available 2D tools to annotate the preview picture: dimensions, labels, text. You can also add annotations from available libraries, using the Object tool.
641
Virtual Building
4) Click OK in the drawing windows menu to close this window and apply the annotations to the selected preview; or click Cancel to close the window without applying any changes.
Dimensions in the Interactive Schedule preview cells can be associative: if you modify the object size in the project, its dimensions as shown in the Interactive Schedule will be modified accordingly.
Automatic Dimensioning of Door/Window Previews

If the selected preview cell contains a Door or Window, the Schedule Options include the Add automatic dimensions option.
Check this box to add automatic door/window dimensions to the selected preview picture. Below the checkbox, click Dimension Settings to set dimensioning options for the preview picture, in the appearing Automatic Dimensions dialog box.
642
Virtual Building
Restructure Schedule to Fit Layout

Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. Use the Restructure Table command to automatically split large tables which exceed the Layout size into parts and lay them out next to each other. The Restructure Table command is available in the Pet Palette, from the node of a selected Schedule placed as a Drawing.
Click the command, then manually resize the Drawing frame. The following image shows a Window Schedule that does not fit onto an A4 sized sheet.
643
Virtual Building
The Restructure Table command is used to define a new enclosing rectangle for the Schedule table. In this case, ArchiCAD recalculates sizes and lays out the Schedule so it best fits the new geometry. The result: the Schedule is split in two portions which are placed under each other. Note: If the selected Drawing is set to Split Drawing into Multiple Layouts, then the Restructure Table command will enable you to define a new enclosing rectangle, but instead of placing the Schedule parts onto a single Layout, each new part will be placed onto an additional Layout. See Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts.
644
Virtual Building
Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts

Note: This function is also available for Project Indexes placed on Layouts. Use this feature to quickly and easily split up a long Schedule and place it onto multiple Layouts, so that all data on the Schedule can be published. This feature is available only for Drawings created from Element Schedules and Project Indexes. The feature works using the Split Drawing among Multiple Layouts checkbox, located on the Frame Panel of Drawing Tool Settings. Whenever you place a Drawing based on an Element Schedule onto a Layout, this checkbox becomes available, and is checked, in Drawing Selection Settings. (For Drawings with any other source, the checkbox is grey.)
If this Drawing does not fit onto a single Layout - as can easily happen with a long Schedule ArchiCAD will create as many Layouts as needed to display the entire contents of the Schedule. In this example, the Window List has been placed on the Layout. The Split Drawing feature has placed the total Window List onto two Layouts. In the Layout Window, Layout is drawn to indicate that it consists of multiple pages:
645
Virtual Building
In the Navigator Layout Book, only one Layout is shown, but it has a multi-page icon, different from the single Layout icon, and the total number of Layouts used for this Drawing is displayed after the Drawing Name.
If a Layout Window displays a multi-Layout Drawing, the Windows title bar shows the range of Layouts which display the Drawing.
In the Layout Book, you can navigate between Layout pages as usual, using the navigation arrows at the bottom of the Layout Window.
However, if you open a Layout Window which contains a multi-Layout Drawing, the navigation button at the bottom of the screen displays a small black arrow. Click this to access additional navigation options among just the Layouts that display the current multi-page Drawing.
First Page and Last Page here refer to the Layouts of the multi-page Drawing.
646
Virtual Building
Place Additional Drawings Next to Multi-Layout Drawing

It is possible to place several multi-page Drawings (Schedules or Indexes) alongside each other, on the same Layouts. For example, suppose you place a long Schedule onto a Layout; ArchiCAD generates a total of three Layouts to display the entire Schedule. Then you place another long Schedule onto the first of those Layouts. ArchiCAD fills up the three existing Layouts with the second Schedule (alongside the first Schedule), and generates any additional Layouts needed to display the full Schedule. If you place any other type of Drawing (i.e. which is neither a Schedule nor a Index) onto a Layout that contains a multi-page Drawing, then that Drawing will appear on every one of that set of Layouts. This can be an advantage if the additional Drawing serves as a Title on the Layout.
647
Virtual Building
Project Indexes
About Project Indexes Index of Published Items
648
Virtual Building
About Project Indexes

Project Indexes are table of contents type items listed in the Project Map of the Navigator palette. They allow you to display and access lists of views, layout sheets and drawings based on a set of filtering criteria. Project indexes are based on schemes defined with the Document > Project Indexes > Project Index Schemes command. The dialog box that appears allows you to: Create, rename, delete, import and export schemes Choose the filtering criteria (depending on the type of the index) Select the parameters and other information to display for the items that match the set criteria. For more information, see Index Settings Dialog Box. Once the new (or modified) scheme is defined, its name appears in the Navigator and you can use it like any other view, meaning that you can add it to a view map, publish it or place it on a layout. Project indexes have their own special icons in the Navigator.
View lists allow you to filter and list views by their location in the Project Map, their scale, model view option combination, layer combination, dimensioning standard and publishing status.
Layout sheet lists allow you to filter and list layouts by their master layouts, subsets and publishing status.
Drawing lists allow you to filter and list drawings by their location (layout and subset), update status and zoom information. To open an index, go to the Navigator palette and double-click its name. The format of the index (including fonts, colors, cell and heading styles) can be fully customized with the controls on the left of the displayed list.
649
Virtual Building
The content of the index is based on the choices you made in Project Index Schemes. If you need to adjust them, you can directly access this dialog box by clicking the Index Settings button top right.
Project indexes are interactive, which means that you can edit some of the fields: for example, you can change the scale or the layer combination of a view, the name or the ID of a layout or a placed drawing. The modifications are carried out immediately. You can move Index Settings among projects by exporting and importing them (use the Import/ Export commands in the Index Settings dialog box).
650
Virtual Building
Index of Published Items

Suppose you are publishing a number of Layouts in a Publisher Set, and you want to include a Sheet Index which indicates which items have been published. One way to do this is to add the field Published to the Index.
The checkboxes will be activated for those items which you have published, but only in the published copy of the Index (not while you work in ArchiCAD). For example, if you publish Foundation and Roof plans, as well as this Sheet Index, on a Layout, then the published Sheet Index Layout will look like this:
If you want the published Sheet Index to list only published items, add Published as a criterion to your Index Settings.
Note: As long as the Published criterion is set to On, the Index as viewed in the ArchiCAD window will be empty. Thus, set this criterion to Off while you format the list, then set it to On before you publish the Sheet Index. The published Sheet Index will then consist of a list of published index items. For more information, see Index Settings Dialog Box.
651
Virtual Building
Construction Elements
Construction Elements are the virtual equivalents of actual three-dimensional building components. They include Walls, Columns, Beams, Roofs, Slabs, Meshes, Zones and Curtain Walls. Each of these elements has a dedicated tool in the ArchiCAD Toolbox. Elements are displayed as solid building components in the 3D Window. Their cut or elevated view can be projected in Section and Elevation windows.
How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD Walls Columns Beams Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Roofs Slabs Meshes Zones Curtain Wall: A System Tool
652
Virtual Building
How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD

The typical steps in element creation using the Toolbox are: 1) Select the elements tool in the Toolbox and open its settings dialog box. 2) Adjust the settings offered by default to suit your particular situation or purpose. You can choose a Favorite - a predefined element configuration - using the button on top of the Tool Settings dialog box. 3) The panels of the Settings dialog boxes provide lists of pen, material and line options for the elements Core Structure, Cut Surfaces, Outlines, and other parameters where applicable. For more information, see the descriptions of individual panels for each Tool Settings dialog box in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. 4) Where applicable, choose a Geometry Method from the Info Box allowing you to create plain, curved, chained, rotated or polygonal variations of the elements. 5) Draw the element in the Floor Plan or 3D window. Other methods of element creation include: Use the Favorites Palette: double-click on stored Favorite settings for the relevant tool, then click to place an element with those settings. Use the Magic Wand to create irregularly shaped elements Create Element Duplicates of existing elements RoofMaker and TrussMaker from the Design > Design Extras menu. See Element Extras.
Positioning Construction Elements

For any of the construction elements, you define its absolute and relative base height in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of its Settings dialog box.
Positioning Construction Elements to a Custom Elevation Level

The actual elevation of elements is always calculated to Project Zero. However, in some projects you may want to define the input elevation to with reference to some other level. To do this, define one or two alternative Reference Levels in Options > Project Preferences > Reference Levels. These newly defined reference levels will then be available in the Geometry and Positioning panels of all elements Settings dialog boxes.
Gravitate Elements onto a Slab, Roof or Mesh

To make placement more accurate, you can use the Gravity function to place Wall, Column, Beam and Object type elements directly onto a Slab, Roof or Mesh.
653
Virtual Building
Walls
About Walls Create a Straight Wall Create a Curved Wall Create a Chain of Walls Create a Rectangle of Walls Create a Trapezoid Wall Create a Composite Wall Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall) Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall Create a Log Wall Create a Gable Wall Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Wall-Wall Intersections Walls and Other Elements Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On) Wall Tool Settings
654
Virtual Building
About Walls
In ArchiCAD, you can draw walls that are straight, curved, trapezoidal and polygonal. They can be simple, of a single material, or composite, composed of several materials. You can even go a step further, and create complex walls (Profile Wall) of any custom shape and with a combination of materials. Certain parametric objects such as Doors, Windows, and Wall Ends can only be placed into Walls. A Curtain Wall is constructed with a separate, dedicated Curtain Wall tool. See Curtain Wall: A System Tool.
Wall Reference Lines

Each Wall possesses a reference line at the base of the wall, and a direction. The reference line is a heavy black line (including the arrow that shows the Walls direction) that appears when you draw the Wall on the Floor Plan, provided that the View > On-Screen View Options > Walls & Beams Reference Lines feature is switched on.
The reference line helps you achieve the precise connection of Walls for clean intersections. It also establishes hotspots and edges for selecting, moving and transforming Walls. Some Pet Palette editing commands are accessible only from the reference-line side of the selected Wall, as shown in the two images here:
The reference line is also relevant for determining which side of the wall is which, for assigning materials to the 3D model (in the Wall Model Panel). Depending on the chosen Construction and Geometry Method, the wall body protrudes on either or both sides of the reference line. The direction of the wall is defined by the order in which you define the walls endpoints. Note: With the commands of the Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On), you can modify the thickness, the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements.
655
Virtual Building
Display of Walls
Use the panels of the Wall Tool Settings dialog box to choose attributes for the display of your wall in the various 2D and 3D windows. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed wall should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. Some aspects of Wall display depend on the current settings in View > On-Screen View Options. Wall & Beam Intersections can be set on and off. Fill patterns can be shown as Vectorial Hatching or bitmap. Other display options for a walls fill patterns are set in the Model View Options Override Fill Display Panel. In the case of composite walls, you can choose to display or hide the separator lines.
When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Wall Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Walls, in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.
656
Virtual Building
Create a Straight Wall

The Single Straight Wall method produces one straight wall element at a time.
With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Straight Wall Geometry method from the Info Box and draw the wall segment on the plan. In both Floor Plan and 3D, you define the length of Wall segments by clicking at their endpoints. Note: This CAD-like drawing method is the default method of drawing segments in ArchiCAD, but you can change it in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods. The moment you start drawing the Wall, a ghost contour appears and it follows the cursor until you click at the second endpoint.
Walls can be stretched using either menu commands or pet palette commands. See Stretching Walls.
657
Virtual Building
Create a Curved Wall

With the Wall Tool selected, choose one of the three Curved Wall Geometry Methods from the Info Box.
The first option defines the curved wall by the arcs or circles centerpoint and radius. Your first click defines the centerpoint. A ghost contour of the circular wall follows your cursor until you click a second to time to define the radius. After that, only a partial ghost curved segment is shown, until you click a third time to define the length of the arc walls circumference. If you need a full circular wall, double-click when defining its radius. When all three points are defined, the ghost contour is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches.
The second option defines the curved wall by three points on the arcs circumference. The first two clicks define two points that you will probably locate on points connecting other elements, grid intersections or special snap points. After that, a ghost circle follows the cursor until you click a third time to define the third point.
658
Virtual Building
A fourth click is needed to define the length of the arc segment. Double-click the third point to define a full circular wall. Note that the second and the third points do not need to be actually part of the arc wall.
When the arc length is defined, the ghost arc is replaced by the fully displayed wall contours and hatches.
The third option only defines full circular shapes based on three tangential edges or points. In this process, you select three initial points: these can be a tangent edge (indicated by the Mercedes cursor), a node (indicated by the Checkmark cursor), or a free-floating point (indicated by the Crosshair cursor.) An endpoint cannot qualify as a tangent edge when using this method, so a maximum of two endpoints are allowed. If more than two are selected, the process will revert to the second method described above. Only linear tangency is allowed: all tangent points must be on the straight edges of Slabs, Lines, Walls, etc. If you click a radial edge with the Mercedes cursor, the resulting Circle will pass through that point rather than being a tangent to the curve. The next step depends on the geometric situation. If there is only one solution, the circular Wall is automatically drawn.
659
Virtual Building
If there are two or four solutions, the Eyeball cursor appears and the ghost contour of the Wall flips from one position to the other as you move the cursor around. Click when it is at the right place to complete the circular wall.
If there is no solution, (for example, if you define three parallel edges for tangency), no circle will be made. Note: Since Walls need to have two endpoints, the fully closed circular Wall that you draw will in fact consist of two half-circles. Walls in the forms of full ellipses, elliptic arcs or splines cannot be created directly, but you can trace the shapes of plain drawing elements with the Magic Wand.
Stretching Curves Curve/Straighten Element Edge
660
Virtual Building
Create a Chain of Walls

A chained wall is a sequence of connected straight or curved wall elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Chained Wall method from the Info Box. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button.)
As soon as you start drawing the first Wall, a pet palette appears, offering you geometry options for drawing a straight or a curved segment.
The options are: A straight wall segment A curved segment tangential to the previous one (cannot be used for the first wall segment) A curved segment tangential to a line you define before actually drawing the segment A curved segment passing through two points A curved segment defined by its centerpoint, radius and length
Place the cursor on the option that suits you best and define the endpoint of the first segment using the methods described above for single Wall segments. This endpoint automatically becomes the starting point of the next Wall segment. When you want to finish drawing Wall chain segments, double-click the endpoint of the last segment. Throughout the process, a ghost contour of the Wall segments is shown. The full Walls are only displayed when you are finished. Clicking the Cancel button in the context menu or the Delete key at any time during drafting will abort the process, and no elements will be created. Choosing Edit > Undo command will remove the entire new chain of Walls, not just the last segment. Hitting the Backspace key allows you to undo the previous segment and continue the creation of the Wall chain. If you change the Walls attributes in the Info Box during the creation process, all created Wall segments will have the modified attributes (reference line position, line type, fill color, material, etc.).
661
Virtual Building
If necessary, you can switch methods on the fly with the pet palette. If the Edit > Grouping > Autogroup function is switched on, the chained Wall segments will be created as part of a group. For more information, see Group Elements.
662
Virtual Building
Create a Rectangle of Walls

The Rectangle Wall method produces four Wall elements with coincident nodes by defining the diagonal line of a rectangle. With the Wall Tool selected, choose the Rectangle Wall method from the Info Box. (Pop out the small black arrow on the Straight Wall Method button.)
Draw the diagonal of the rectangular wall and click to define its length. The rectangle wall is created. Its four sides are always aligned orthogonally with the Normal Grid and are not affected by the use of a Rotated Grid.
The Rotated Rectangle Wall method produces four wall elements as with the previous method, except that you first define a rotation vector for the rectangles base reference line. Then drag the cursor to define the rectangle.
663
Virtual Building
Create a Trapezoid Wall

The Trapezoid or Non-Parallel method allows you to draw straight Walls whose thickness is not constant.
You draw this type of Wall as a straight Wall, except that you will first enter the thickness of the Wall at its two endpoints, using the Wall Thickness fields in the Info Box or in Wall Settings.
Composite Trapezoid Wall

When drawing a trapezoid Wall with a composite fill, only the outermost Core skins thickness reflects the trapezoidal shape of the Wall. In the image below, two of the skins are marked as Core, but only the Insulation core skin - the outermost Core - has a trapezoid shape.
See also Composite Structures.
664
Virtual Building
Create a Composite Wall

You can apply or customize a composite structure for a wall. For more information, see Composite Structures and Assign a Composite Structure to a Wall, Roof or Slab. (Remember that the models Partial Structure Display settings will affect the display of composite walls.)
665
Virtual Building
Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall)

To define a polygonal wall block of free shape, choose the Polygon Wall Geometry Method in the Info Box. Polygon Walls can contain Doors or Windows. For Polygon Walls, only simple fills are available (no composites). Draw the contour of the Polygon Wall, using pet palette segment options as needed (as when drawing a chained wall). Both straight and curved edges are allowed.
Once you have closed the polygon, click with the hammer cursor to complete the wall. If you define a polygon whose edges intersect themselves, ArchiCAD will warn you about this, but the wall will still be drawn. The walls edges will include one reference edge (like a straight walls reference line).
To make another edge the reference edge, select an endpoint of the current reference edge. The pet palette contains a command with which you can move the reference edge endpoints to other nodes of the polygon wall.
When you assign materials to the surfaces of a polygon wall in the Model panel of Wall Settings, the materials are assigned depending on the location of the reference edge. The Left Material is the reference-edge surface; here, in red. Side Material are the two surfaces adjacent to the reference edge; here, in gold.
666
Virtual Building
Right Material surfaces are assigned to all other edges (those which are opposite the reference edge), here, in blue.
To edit polygon walls, click the nodes and edges of the selected Walls and use the pet palette.
When connected to other, plain walls, wall polygons keep their original contour by default. If you wish to override this setting, check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active in the Info Box). For more information, see PolyWall Corners.
667
Virtual Building
Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall

To draw a wall whose vertical axis is slanted on either or both sides, go to Wall Geometry and Positioning Panel, and click the desired Slanted Wall Icon, then enter the desired wall angle(s).
A slanted wall tilts in one direction; its two faces are parallel to each other. A double-slanted wall has faces which are not parallel; in Section view, the wall is trapezoid in shape. When setting the angles of a double-slanted wall, you are constrained by the minimum thickness of the top of the wall. For a simple structure (using a single material), this can be zero. The top of a composite wall, however, has to be wide enough to accommodate all of the skins. The height of either type of slanted wall is the distance between its lowest and highest point. When entering a height value of a double-slanted wall, you face the obvious constraint that the walls width at the top cannot be negative (i.e. once the two faces meet, you cant go any higher.) The thickness of a slanted wall is its thickness perpendicular to its slant vector (as indicated by the icon in the Info Box):
The thickness of a double-slanted wall equals the width of the wall base. If you switch from one kind of slant to another, the wall is transformed as follows: If you transform a single-slanted into a double-slanted wall, the new walls width (i.e. its wall base) will take on the width of the old, single-slanted wall. Similarly, if you have a double-slanted wall and change it to either a vertical or single-slanted wall, the new wall will have the same width as that of the old, double-slanted wall. For information on modifying slanted wall geometry, see Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns.
668
Virtual Building
Create a Log Wall

You can create straight walls constructed from logs. Log details appear in both the 3D Window and Section/Elevation/IE Windows.
Clicking the Log Details button in the Model panel of the Wall Settings dialog box opens the Log Details Dialog Box with a number of geometry and texture options. Note: Log construction is only available for simple straight walls. When determining the logs height, remember that if you enter a value that is larger than the walls width parameter, the logs will not rest on each other.
669
Virtual Building
Create a Gable Wall

When you need walls to fit a Roof or you want Walls with cutoff corners, you can obtain them by cutting regular Rectangular Walls with appropriate roof pitches as shown below. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof.
670
Virtual Building
Wall-Wall Intersections
The connection of walls and their fills on the floor plan and in 3D is determined first of all by their Wall Priorities. When walls of unequal priorities intersect, the element of higher priority will remain intact in 3D. (In 2D, the element of higher priority will be in front.) The element of lower priority will be cut, and the intersected part removed You can set a separate priority for each individual wall, on a scale of 0-16 (even numbers only), using the Wall Priority slider switch (Wall Settings > Floor Plan and Section panel). To make alignment of connecting walls easier, the intelligent cursor snaps to all sides and corners of wall segments. In the case of composite walls, the cursor snaps to each endpoint of the inner skin as well.
Display of Intersecting Composite Wall Skins (2D only)

When displaying an intersecting composite wall in 2D windows and the 3D Document window, you can control its display of skin by skin if you wish. Each skin of a composite wall has a separate intersection priority, which you can fine-tune in Options > Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.
These Walls intersect according to the following rules: Skins with higher priorities will block skins with lower priorities. Skins with equal priorities will form a mitered joint. (provided they have the same fill pattern)
671
Virtual Building
Wall Outlines and Overhead lines also intersect each other. Once you set these skin priorities for a composite wall, you must activate them with the Enable Skin Priorities checkbox (in Wall Tool Settings: Floor Plan & Section Panel).
However, if you want to set a single 2D intersection priority for the composite Wall as a whole, do not check Enable Skin Priorities; in this case, the Wall Priority slider switch (in Wall Tool Settings: Structure) will prevail for this wall in 2D as well as 3D.
Composite Wall Intersection Example

You can make good use of the priority options to fine-tune the appearance of connecting fills on your floor plan. In the example below, the Wall Priorities of both Walls are set to 8 in their Wall Settings dialog boxes. The skins of the wall core do not intersect the way we want.
672
Virtual Building
So, in Options > Element Attributes > Composites, we set Skin Priority numbers for the Composite used for these Walls. In this composite, we set the Core skins Priority to 12. Then we return to the Wall Settings dialog box and check the Enable Skin Priorities box.
Now, the skins intersect as desired.
Display of Intersecting Profile Wall Skins

Complex Wall skins are represented as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. A priority value is assigned to each component of a Complex structure, just as they are assigned to each skin of Composite Structures. For more information, see Components - Default/Selected Panel.
673
Virtual Building
For example, the predefined Brick Wall with Footing complex wall has three components. In the Profile Editor, select each of these components in turn to assign a separate intersection priority for each.
Note: Wall (and Composite Structure) and Column Intersection Priority Numbers are always even numbers; Beam Intersection Priority Numbers are always odd numbers. Thus, any time a Wall/Column intersects with a Beam in 3D, the program can determine which is dominant depending on their Priority Numbers.
674
Virtual Building
Wall Intersection Display in 2D

For best display of wall intersections in 2D, the reference lines of the intersecting walls must be joined together. Then the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections option (View > On-Screen View Options) will ensure that walls are joined correctly in 2D. Note: Wall intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. However, if intersecting walls are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups, then wall intersection will not take place. For more information, see Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections. When drawing a new wall to meet an existing wall, it is sufficient to click any edge or inside the hatching of the target Wall. You dont have to meet the target walls reference line manually; the new Walls reference line will be adjusted automatically for proper connection, and the walls will also be joined correctly in 3D. This feature is called Auto Intersection, and works only if the Options > Auto Intersection option is switched On.
Walls in an X Intersection
Two walls crossing each other in an X junction will automatically create a clean intersection. When making an X wall junction, the wall you place second will cut the wall that is already on the plan, provided that the two walls have equal intersection priority. The intersection sequence is visible in the 2D window (if Clean Wall and Intersections is off) as well as in the 3D window. You can modify this intersection sequence for X intersections using the Edit > Display Order command. The 2D Display Order affects the intersection sequence in both the 2D and 3D windows.
Walls in L or T Intersections
In the case of T intersections, if the connecting walls have equal priorities, then the running wall will prevail over the adjoining wall. In the case of L intersections, if the connecting walls have equal priorities and are of equal thicknesses, they will be joined in random order. To change the order in which they are joined, change their Wall Priorities. If two walls are connected in an L intersection and have equal priorities, the fill that is thicker has priority.
L or T intersections are not affected by Display Order modifications.

675
Virtual Building
If you need a more elaborate drawing detail at wall intersections, you can create a patch or a detail drawing.
Intersecting Walls in 3D
To improve the appearance of wall connections in 3D, especially when connecting walls of different heights, enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each wall has been cut. Intersections involving complex walls will always be calculated as if this function were active. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance. If your projects wall intersections involve simple walls of equal heights, you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked.
PolyWall Corners
When connected to other, plain walls, wall polygons keep their original contour by default. If you wish to override this setting, check the PolyWall Corners Can Change box in the Geometry and Positioning section of the Wall Settings dialog box (available when the PolyWall geometry method is active). In the following example, a Single Wall is connected to a Wall Polygon.
The first illustration shows you the situation with View > On-Screen View Options > Clean Wall & Beam Intersections turned Off. Turning Clean Wall & Beam Intersections On will give a different results depending on whether PolyWall Corners Can Change is active.
676
Virtual Building
Modify Wall Geometry (Add-On)

Note: This tool is not visible in the interface according to ArchiCADs Standard Work Environment profile. You can add it to the Edit menu (or any other menu) by customizing the menu scheme in Options > Work Environment > Work Environment > Command Layout Schemes > Menus. For more information, see Customizing Menus. With the commands of the Modify Wall hierarchical menu, you can modify the thickness, the Reference Line position and the direction of selected wall type elements.
With the Modify Wall Structure command, you can change the hatching of the selected Walls, and still keep the position of a desired part of the Wall. At the top of the dialog box, you can set the fill. If the chosen fill is not a composite, you can set its thickness, otherwise the thickness of the core layer is displayed. Click the radio button at the bottom to choose which part of the wall should keep its position after the modification. (If possible, this will be done by adding an offset to the reference line. If not, the reference line will be moved.) With the Modify Wall Reference Line command, you can move the reference line of the selected walls without changing the walls position on the Floor Plan.
677
Virtual Building
On the left side of the dialog box, you can change the reference line side of walls. On the right you can add an offset to the reference line to position it to the desired part of the wall.
With the Invert Direction command, you can change the direction of the reference line. (This is visible when the Clean Wall & Beam Intersections command toggle is Off.) See also Wall Reference Lines.
678
Virtual Building
Walls and Other Elements

Beams and Walls: Intersection priorities for walls and beams are set at the element level in their respective Settings dialog boxes. (Wall priorities are always even numbers; beam priorities are odd.) When a wall intersects a beam, the element of higher priority will remain intact. The element of lower priority will be cut in 3D, which means that the intersection part will be removed from it. Columns and Walls: see Columns and Other Elements. Roofs and Walls: The top or the bottom surface of Walls can be trimmed to Roofs: see Trim Element to Roof Walls and Curtain Walls: Walls can be connected to Curtain Walls using the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect Wall command. See Connect Wall to Curtain Wall. Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Wall settings, define how the Wall should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter), or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in, or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. See Relation to Zones.
679
Virtual Building
Columns
Columns in ArchiCAD are made up of two components: the load-bearing core and the optional veneer used to simulate fire proofing or any kind of sheathing around the core. The Columns section can be rectangular or circular, or they can be complex, as defined in a profile. Columns can stand free, or they can be smartly connected to walls. The columns axis can be either vertical or slanted. Double-click the Column tool icon to open the Column Tool Settings and set your preferences.
Creating Columns Create a Slanted Column Columns and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Column Tool Settings
680
Virtual Building
Column Display on Floor Plan

Attributes for each part of the Floor Plan representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the columns Settings dialog box. Use the panels of the Column Tool Settings dialog box to choose attributes for the display of your column in the various 2D and 3D windows. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed column should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.
Crossing Symbol
The Floor Plan Symbol options (in Column Tool Settings, Floor Plan and Section Panel) refer to the columns crossing symbol (Plain, Slash, X, or Crosshair). The display of all column floor plan symbols in the project can be turned on or off with the Show Column Symbol checkbox in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options for Construction Elements.
Core and Veneer

In Section view, the core fill pattern is shown, while in Elevations the Column is displayed with its contour only. The structure and cut attributes of the core and veneer are set in the Floor Plan & Section panel of Column Settings. The contour of Column cores with a slash or an X is always fully drawn, regardless of any other factors.
Unwrapped Columns on the Floor Plan

Unwrapped Columns (those placed with the Freestanding Construction method) do not modify the shape of the wall, just cut out a place for themselves, breaking through all wall skins.
The connection line between wall skins and the Column are removed where their fill patterns match.
681
Virtual Building
Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan

Wrapped Columns (those placed with the wrapped construction method) break through the core skins of composite Walls. The other (non-core) wall skins wrap around the column, thus adding this thickness to the column. Note: For composite walls, the skins that are core are defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composite Structures Dialog Box.
Wrapping on the Floor Plan will only occur if: the Column was placed using the Wrapped Method it intersects a composite Wall the composite Wall type has at least one skin that is non-core (which will wrap around) the Column touches or intersects the core skin(s) of the composite Wall Note: Wrapping is not available for curved or polygonal Walls.
682
Virtual Building
Column Display in 3D
The Model panel controls the walls material settings in 3D view. In 3D, a single material is used to display all their surfaces.
Columns in 3D Views
Columns placed with the Wrapped Construction Method will inherit the Surface Material of the connecting Walls, even if the wall is not a composite wall, and even if there are no wall skins configured to actually wrap around the Columns.
683
Virtual Building
Unwrapped columns retain their own materials in 3D.
If Column surfaces are connected to wall or slab surfaces or other Column surfaces within the same 3D plane, the connection lines are eliminated in 3D view when using the Internal 3D engine.
684
Virtual Building
Creating Columns
Use the Column tool to create new columns in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window. Choose the desired column attributes and geometry from Column Tool Settings, then click to place the column into the project. After placement, you can still stretch a columns height in the 3D window. See Stretch Height.
Column Placement Methods

There are three Geometry Methods (input methods) available in the Info Box for placing Columns.
Simple: Place the Column with one click. The Column axis will be projected vertically from the Floor Plan. Rotated: Your first click determines the position of the Columns Anchor Point at its Base, the second will define its rotation angle around a vertical axis. Revolved placement method: If your column is complex and/or slanted, this input method provides a three-step placement process. First, click to place the column. Second, rotate it around its vertical axis and click. Third, revolve it around its own, slanted axis (i.e. set the rotation angle), and click to complete.
Column Construction Methods

When placing a Column that will intersect a Composite wall, your choice of Geometry method wrapped or unwrapped - will affect the display of the wall/column in the Floor Plan. Use the wrapped/unwrapped (or freestanding) icons from the Column Info Box or the Column Settings dialog box to determine how the columns will be interact with composite walls.
685
Virtual Building
Wrapped Columns can only break through the core skins of composite Walls. The other wall skins wrap around the column, retaining their thickness.
For more information, see Wrapped Columns on the Floor Plan.
686
Virtual Building
Create a Slanted Column

From Column Tool Settings, choose the Slanted icon and enter a slant angle in degrees.
Choose a Placement Method from the Info Box, then place the column. (See Column Placement Methods.) See also Modifying Slanted Walls and Columns.
687
Virtual Building
Columns and Other Elements

Beams and Columns: When a Beam crosses a Column, the element of lower priority is cut in 3D. Column Priority vs. Beams is a global setting applicable to all columns; it is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Beam Priority is set in the Beam Tool Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). Walls and Columns: See Column Display on Floor Plan. Roofs and Columns: The top or bottom surface of Columns can be trimmed to roofs. See Trim Element to Roof. Relation to Zones: In the Listing and Labeling Panel of Column settings, define how the Column should behave in relation to zones: as a zone boundary (delimiter), or whether its area/volume should be subtracted from the zone it is in, or whether it should have no effect at all on a zone. See Relation to Zones.
688
Virtual Building
Beams
ArchiCAD Beams are horizontal or inclined construction elements with vertical end faces. They can be rectangular or complex in shape.
Beam Reference Axis Beam Display on the Floor Plan Create a Beam Create a Hole in a Beam How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces Beams and Other Elements Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile Beam Tool Settings
689
Virtual Building
Beam Reference Axis

Each Beam possesses a reference axis (center line) which serves the precise connection of Beams for clean intersections and establishes hotspots and edges for selecting, moving and transforming Beams. Its direction determines the beams left and right surfaces for the purpose of applying materials in the Beam Model Panel. The direction of the reference axis follows your cursor as you drag it to draw the beam. (To see the arrow on the beam that indicates the axis direction, turn on View > On-Screen View Options > Walls and Beams Reference Lines.) You can show/hide the reference axis (center line) of any individual beam using the Show Center Line checkbox in the Symbols part of Beam Floor Plan and Section Panel).
690
Virtual Building
Beam Display on the Floor Plan

When you create a beam with the Beam Tool, ArchiCAD generates its Floor Plan display according to your choices in Beam Tool Settings. These determine the individual beams structure and its fill and line attributes. Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting), combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed beam should be displayed. See also How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.
Global Settings for Beam Display

In Document > Set Model View > Model View Options (Options for Construction Elements panel), the Show Beam as options apply globally to all beams in the project. Choose to display beam in their entirety, or just the reference lines, or just the contours.
691
Virtual Building
Create a Beam
Define Beam settings in the Beam Tool Settings dialog box. When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Beam Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Beams. New Beams can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.
Beam Geometry
There are four Geometry Methods available for drawing Beams.
Choose one of these Geometry Methods from the Info Box. The Single Beam method produces a beam element by clicking twice, at the reference lines starting point and endpoint. The PolyBeam method creates a sequence of connected beam elements with automatically coincident reference line endpoints. The process for drawing chained Beams is the same as for Walls. Only straight beam segments can be drawn when creating a PolyBeam. When you click to end the definition of the first Beam, you automatically start drawing the second one, and so on, until you double-click to finish drawing the chained Beams. The Rectangle Beam produces four beam elements with coincident nodes and aligned to the X and Y axes. Define the rectangle by clicking the starting point and the endpoint of one of its diagonal lines. The Rotated Rectangle Beam method produces four beam elements with coincident nodes, the first side of the rectangle being defined by the first two mouse clicks at their endpoints and the perpendicular side defined by the third mouse click.
692
Virtual Building
Create an Inclined Beam

To create an inclined (slanted) beam, click the inclined beam icon (in either the Info Box or in Beam Settings). The slant angle field is now enabled. The slant angle of Inclined Beams must be between -89 and +89, and is measured from the starting point of the Beam. The Beam is inclined in the vertical plane defined by its Axis.
Inclined Beams are placed the same way as Horizontal Beams. The 3D body of an Inclined Beam is created so that the height of its section cut by a plane perpendicular to its Inclined Axis will be constant at every point (and equal to the Beam Height value). In the image below, the Beams height was set to 500 mm in its Settings dialog.
693
Virtual Building
Create a Hole in a Beam

All types of Beams can include Holes. Holes can be circular or rectangular, and Holes of different shapes and sizes can appear in the same Beam. Holes are defined after the Beam has been placed. The geometry of the Holes is defined in the Hole panel of the selected Beams Settings dialog box. Select the desired Beam and make sure that the Beam tool is active.
On the Floor Plan, create a hole by clicking on the Beams reference line. The pet palette appears with the possible editing choices. Click the Hole icon. The Beam Hole Settings dialog box will appear, letting you set hole parameters.
Click OK to apply the beam hole settings; the Hole will immediately appear in the Beam. In the 3D window, you can access the pet palette by clicking the Mercedes cursor on a top edge of the selected Beam element.
694
Virtual Building
Selecting and Modifying Holes

If you need a number of Holes in the Beam whose settings are dissimilar, you may wish to first create the series of Holes by multiplying them and then fine-tune some of the Holes shapes, sizes or positions. To select a hole, make sure the Beam tool is active, then Shift-click in the center of the hole.
Note that only one selected hole can be edited at a time, but if you select the Beam itself, you can modify the values of all holes simultaneously. To modify a selected Holes shape and size, use the controls in the Beam Settings dialog box or the Info Box. The position of the Hole can also be changed graphically. Selected Holes can be moved along the Beam in Floor Plan view. In 3D, the pet palette offers you the possibility of moving the Holes up and down.
695
Virtual Building
How to Change Angle of Beam End Faces

For end faces at free angles, use the following trick: 1) Draw your Beam. 2) Set Beam thickness to zero in the Beam Settings dialog box in order to draw a second (virtual) Beam. 3) Draw the zero thickness Beam starting from the end of the reference axis of the first Beam at the desired angle as shown in the figure below.
4) Click to complete the zero-thickness beam and view the result in 3D.
5) Touch up the floor plan symbol by adding a line segment to complete the gap.
696
Virtual Building
Beams and Other Elements

Beam Intersection Priority
A Beams intersection priority is set using the Beam Priority slider in Beam Floor Plan and Section Panel. When Beams cross Walls or Columns, the element of lower priority will be cut in 3D, which means that the intersection part will be removed. The element of higher priority will remain intact. This applies to volume calculations as well. Note: The priority of Columns vs. Beams is a global control set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Slabs and Beams: Beams always cut Slabs when the two elements join in space (provided that their Layers belong to the same intersection priority group). This applies to both the 3D Window and volume calculations. Roofs and Beams: Beams can be trimmed to Roofs using the Trim to Roof command. (See Trim Element to Roof.)
Auto-Intersection of Beams with Other Beams

When a Beam intersects another Beam, ArchiCAD automatically cleans crossings, T and L junctions of Beams if the Options > Auto Intersection feature is turned on. If one end of the joining Beam falls within the contour of the other Beam, the end of the joining Beam will automatically adjust to the reference axis. Their appearance in 3D will be cleaned up accordingly, provided that the beams have the same intersection priority.
697
Virtual Building
Beam junctions are also cleaned up if the crossing or joining Beams run at different elevations. If Beams pass each other in space, without intersecting reference lines, the junction will be cleaned up depending on their respective intersection priorities.
Beam Connections in 3D
To improve the appearance of beam connections in 3D, especially when connecting walls of different heights, enable the Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams checkmark in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each beam has been cut. Intersections involving complex beam will always be calculated as if this function were active. Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance. If your projects intersections involve simple beams at uniform elevations, you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked.
Note: Beam intersections are effective even if some of the intersecting elements are on currently hidden Layers. However, if intersecting beam are on layers with differing Layer Intersection Groups, then beam intersection will not take place. See Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections.
698
Virtual Building
Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile

About Complex Profile Elements Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile Profile Manager Dialog Box
699
Virtual Building
About Complex Profile Elements

If customizing a standard construction element gets very complicated, or you dont find a specialized construction object in the library, you can place a profiled Wall, Column or Beam, known as a Complex Profile. Complex Profiles are predefined and custom defined walls, columns and beams that can be edited by hand to take nearly any desired shape. For example, the following image shows a curved wall to which the Brick Wall with Footing profile has been applied.
A Complex Profile element is composed of a cross-sectional profile that is extruded perpendicular to the profiles plane. To place a complex element, you can use or modify a predefined profile, or create a new one. Note: You can also place a Standard steel Column or Beam profile from a catalog. See Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile. A saved Complex Profile element is handled as an attribute of the Wall, Column, and/or Beam element. Saved profiles will appear in the Settings dialog box of the respective tool. Alternatively, you can apply a custom profile to any selected element in the model window on a one-time basis without having to save it as an attribute.
700
Virtual Building
ArchiCAD ships a number of predefined profile elements for these tools. To use them, do the following: Open the Wall (Column, Beam) Settings dialog box. Choose Profiled Wall from the Geometry and Positioning panel.
The Structure section of the Floor Plan and Section panel includes a pop-up that lets you choose among saved profiles for the current element. The pop-up includes a preview to help you choose.
Choose the desired profile, then adjust the rest of the settings in the element Settings dialog box as you would for any other element. Click on the plan to place. Once you place a complex profile element, you can modify it graphically on-screen, similar to other construction elements. Special pet palette commands are available to stretch and rotate profile elements: see Modifying Complex Profile Elements.
701
Virtual Building
Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element

Choose Design > Complex Profiles > Profile Manager. The Profile Manager Dialog Box appears. Manage Profiles: Choose a command in this section of the Profile Manager depending on what you want to do. To create a new profile, click New. To create a new profile based on an existing profile: Choose an existing profile, then click Duplicate.
To create a new profile using the shape of a selected Wall, Beam or Column element in the active model window, click the Capture elements profile button in the Profile Manager (or choose Capture Profile of selection from the context menu of a selected element in the model window). To edit an existing profile, select it, then click Edit chosen profile. The Profile Editor window opens. In this window you will draw or edit the cross-section of the profile element, using the 2D drawing tools that are available. Use the Fill tool to draw the cross-section of the complex profile and edit it, with the usual 2D techniques, to achieve the desired shape. Your cross-sectional profile can contain multiple shapes; they will all be saved together as a single profile. The Origin shown in the Profile Editor window is a significant reference point: if the complex element is a Wall, the origin represents the location of the Walls reference line. In case of a Column or Beam, the origin represents the location of the elements axis. You cannot move this origin, but you can move the profile shape so that it correctly positioned with respect to the origin.
702
Virtual Building
Only hotspots and shapes drawn with the Fill tool in the Profile Editor window will be part of the saved profile. Other 2D elements added to the Profile Editor window (lines, dimensioning, etc.) can be used as local drafting aids, but will have no effect on the final appearance of the complex profile when placed into the model. (These drafting aids are located on the Drafting Design Layer; see below.) In Profile Manager, the Use with buttons, like those in other Attribute Settings dialog boxes, determine which ArchiCAD tools can be used to place the current profile. The rest of the Profile Manager settings are active only if the Profile Editor is open. Design Layers: The Design Layers section of Profile Manager contains layer settings that apply to the Profile Editor window only.
The layer of the active tool will be highlighted. For example, if the Fill or Hotspot tool is active, the Construction layer will be highlighted; all items drawn on the Construction layer will be saved as part of the profile. Other 2D elements in this window will be placed on the Drafting layer; while they will be saved as part of the profile attribute, they will not be visible in the placed profile. Note: Dimension elements placed in the Profile Editor window are not saved as part of the attribute; they are for drafting purposes only. The show/hide parameters for Design Layers affect the Profile Editor window only. Horizontal and Vertical Stretch (in the list of Design Layers) are an optional attribute of the profile. Check the boxes to switch on the stretch parameter in either or both directions. If you do not switch it on, you will not be able to stretch or resize the cross-section of the resulting profile once you place it on the plan.
If Horizontal/Vertical Stretch is switched on, the Profile Editor window displays dotted lines indicating the plane that can be stretched. Within the Profile Editor window, you can move these lines like any other drawing element to any part of the profile; these will serve as the stretch handles of the resulting profile element after it is placed in the model.
703
Virtual Building
If you switch on Opening Reference (in the list of Design Layers), the Profile Editor window displays a line representing the reference line at which doors/windows will be placed, once you place the profile wall on the plan.
If necessary, edit the line, like any other line, to conform to the shape of the profile so that openings will be in the right place. If you do not switch on Opening Reference, doors/windows will be placed along the profile elements bounding box.
Edit Profile Components

Use the controls in the Components panel of Profile Manager to set the attributes of each profile component (i.e., the solid body represented by each fill drawn in the Profile Editor window) individually. Select a component (represented by a fill) in the Profile Editor window. Edit its intersection priority as needed. Note: This setting will be applied to the placed profile element only if you check Enable Skin Priorities in the Structure/Cut Surfaces/Outlines part of the elements Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel).
Edge/Side Materials for Profile Element

Use the Materials pop-up under Side Material in Profile Editor to select a material for the 3D display of the sides of the profile element. This material will be applied to all sides of the selected component (Uniform).
704
Virtual Building
To apply a different material to one or more selected sides of this component, select a profile component fill in the Profile Editor window and execute the pet palette command Set parameters for profile edge, then edit the controls in the appearing Custom Edge Settings dialog box. These custom edge settings will be applied to the edge from which you opened the Pet Palette (Selected edge only), or to all edges. If needed, you can apply a different custom edge material/contour line to each individual edge.
Store or Apply a Modified Complex Profile

Click Store Profile to name and save the profile you have edited. If a newly stored profile is a modified version of an existing profile, and you do not rename it, then the modifications will be applied to all profile elements of this type that have been placed in the plan. If you do not want to store the profile, and need the profile only for a one-time use, you can apply it to a selected element in the model, using the Apply to selection button. The selected element will turn into that profile element. The unstored profile is called Custom until it is stored.
705
Virtual Building
Create Complex Profile from Parallel Elements

A quick way to create a complex profile is to use the Design > Complex Profiles > Merge Walls/ Columns/Beams. To use this command, draw multiple walls, columns or beams in the model window. The elements must be of the same type and must be parallel to each other. Executing the command will create a new profile element, which will replace the original elements. The new profile element will be as long as the longest original element, and will inherit the attributes of the original as well as any wall openings. By default, the new profile is named custom but can be opened in the Profile Editor, modified and renamed. To merge two or more parallel Straight Walls, use the Merge Walls command on them. The Walls will become the same length, and the cross section of the resulting Wall will be a unity of the cross sections of the two Walls. The bodies of the two Walls do not need to touch, they may be at a distance from each other. This command works only for Straight Walls (Vertical, Slanted, Double-Slanted, Custom Profile). It does not work for Trapezoid, Polygonal and Curved Walls.
The Merge Columns command allows you to merge two or more Columns whose axes are parallel to each other. If this condition is met, all types of Columns (Vertical, Slanted, Custom Profile) may be merged. More than two Columns may be merged at the same time.
706
Virtual Building
Use the Merge Beams command to merge two or more Beams whose axes are parallel to each other. If this condition is met, all types of Beams (Horizontal, Inclined, Custom Profile) may be merged.
Profile Manager Dialog Box
707
Virtual Building
Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile

If you exchange data with structural softwares, using the IFC standard, it can be helpful to use standard elements as your profile Columns or Beams. During the data exchange process, those structural engineering programs will recognize and identify such standard elements accurately and completely, without requiring any settings adjustments. Use the Options > Import Standard Steel Profile command. This brings up the Profile Database.
Profile Database
In this image, our list of Project Profiles (the list window on the right) is empty, so we must add selected profiles from the database. From the non-editable Available Profiles list on the left, you can access thousands of standard profiles. (If needed, sort the list columns by Name or by specific dimension.) Use the Country Code, Profile Types and Geometry controls to help find the profiles you need.
708
Virtual Building
Select these, then click Add Profile to the Project.
The selected structures now appear in the list to the right. (If needed, click Remove to remove a project profile.) Click Import. The selected profiles are now available for use in your ArchiCAD project.
709
Virtual Building
Place Structural Profile Element

Choose the Complex geometry method in the Geometry and Positioning Panel of Column or Beam Settings. In the Core Structure pop-up of the Floor Plan and Section panel of Column (or Beam) Settings, choose the profile you need.
710
Virtual Building
When placing the structural Column or Beam, note that its insertion point is the center of the objects bounding box. However, an additional hotspot is located at the elements center of gravity.
These predefined steel profile Beams and Columns can be listed by name in the Interactive Schedule: just include Cut Fill/Profile in the Fields panel of Interactive Schedule Scheme Settings.
711
Virtual Building
Roofs
About Roofs Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan Create a Simple Roof in 3D Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof Create a Dome-Shaped Roof Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof Create a Hole in a Roof Modify the Roof Slant Angle Create Roof Level Lines Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material Intersect Roof Planes Trim Element to Roof Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker Roof Tool Settings
712
Virtual Building
About Roofs
ArchiCADs flexible Roofs can be used to create both standard and abstract 3D shapes meeting a wide variety of needs. The roofs elevation is measured by the elevation of the pivot line, a horizontal non-printing line that you draw when creating the roof. In most cases, you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a wall Reference Line or a slab edge. Note: You can hide all pivot lines by disabling the Roof Pivot Lines option in View > OnScreen View Options. The Pivot Line elevation is shown in the roofs info box (the B value).
This is the same value as the Roofs Relative Base Height, in Roof Settings. The Roof Slope Angle (or pitch) is measured from this pivot line. The Roof Pitch value is also shown in the Info Box (the T value).
See also Modify the Roof Slant Angle. To aid in precise element placement, you can turn on the Gravitate to Roof command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Roof.
Display of Roofs
Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, overhead lines) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Roof Tool Settings dialog box. Use the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box, combined with element projection preferences, to determine which parts of the placed roof should be displayed. For Roofs, the default Floor Plan Display option is Projected with Overhead. For more information on Floor Plan display of roofs, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan.
Roof Geometry
The Roof tool has six geometry methods in the Info Box, allowing you to create both simple and complex roof shapes. The options are: Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle, Polyroof, Dome and Barrel-vaulted. Note that only four options are visible at a time. The remaining options can be viewed by holding down the button to pop out the additional icons.
713
Virtual Building
When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Roof Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Roofs. New Roofs can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window, although some options differ or are restricted.
Gravitate New Elements onto a Roof

Use the Gravity control to place Wall, Column, Beam and Object type elements relative to the elevation of a Roof.
714
Virtual Building
Create a Simple Roof on the Floor Plan

Choose one of the first three Geometry Methods in the Info Box (Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle), then define the position of the pivot line with two clicks. With the Rectangle method, the roof will always be orthogonal. In most cases, you will want the pivot line of the roof to coincide with a wall Reference Line or a slab edge. As an aid in drawing the pivot line, the cursor will change to a Heavy Checkmark/Heavy Mercedes when it hits a wall or beam reference line; it will change to a Light Checkmark/Light Mercedes when it hits any edge that is not a Wall or Beam reference line.
1) Draw the pivot line.
2) After you draw the pivot line, a cursor in the form of an Eyeball will appear. Use this cursor to click on the side of the pivot line where you want the roof plane to rise (or, in the case of a negative roof pitch, slope downward).
715
Virtual Building
716
Virtual Building
3) You can then draw the contour of the roof by clicking on each of the new roofs nodes. Or use the Magic Wand: click on an existing element to serve as the pattern for the roofs contour.
717
Virtual Building
Create a Simple Roof in 3D

1) Choose one of the first three Geometry Methods in the Info Box (Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle), then define the slope of the roof plane by clicking any three points. ArchiCAD will generate the Pivot Line for you. 2) Draw the contour of the roof. The Hammer cursor appears when you return to the first node. Click to close the polygon. ArchiCAD will then generate the Roof.
718
Virtual Building
Create a Polyroof or Curved Roof

By choosing the Polyroof geometry method, you can create equally sloped roofs on any polygonal or curved base. The result will be a set of individual roof planes. With the Autogroup function active, they will be automatically grouped when created. The process for drawing a Polyroof is the same on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Window. First, you draw a polygon of straight segments only. This defines the pivot lines of the elements of the Polyroof.
When you are finished, the Polyroof Settings dialog box appears. The final outline will be defined by the Eave Overhang value which is added as an offset to the pivot line polygon. Polyroofs can be made up of a maximum of four levels. The inclination and maximum height of each segment can be independently defined.
719
Virtual Building
To create curved or other shapes with the Polyroof method, draw the shapes with the 2D drawing tools, then use the Magic Wand to define the pivot line polygon. Make sure that the Polyroof Geometry Method is active when you do so. Note: ArchiCAD uses a crystal growth algorithm to calculate the best solution for any particular polygon base. The height defined in the settings dialog box is the maximum limit. If the roof meets another roof plane before it reaches that particular height, it will not go higher. If the roof has reached the maximum level allowed, and the roof planes have not met, a horizontal plane will be placed on top. Once the structure is completed, its parts are individually editable.
720
Virtual Building
Create a Dome-Shaped Roof
To create a Dome-shaped roof, select the Dome geometry method in the Info Box. A DomeShaped Roof is a set of individual roof planes. With the Autogroup function active, they will be automatically grouped when created. The process for drawing a Dome-shaped roof is the same on the Floor Plan and in the 3D Window. With the first click, you define the center of the arc. The second click marks the beginning of the outline; the third click is the end of the outline. Double-clicking the beginning of the arc will create a full circular dome. Once you have defined the outline, make your choices in the Dome Settings dialog box:
Enter the height of the Dome Roof as measured from its centerpoint. This value is set by default to the maximum allowed, i.e., the height of a semi-sphere structure. By entering a smaller number, you can flatten your dome. The next edit field contains the elevation of the domes base. The number of strips and segments that make up the dome can also be defined in this dialog box: they are limited to 90 and 360 respectively. The roof thickness measured perpendicular to the roofs elevation can also be set, while the roof edges trimming is controlled by the radio buttons.
The three options available are perpendicular, vertical and horizontal trimming. Once the dome is created, its parts can be edited as individual pitched roofs, but not as a whole.
721
Virtual Building
Create a Barrel-Vaulted Roof
Barrel-vaulted Roofs can be constructed in either Floor Plan or 3D view, but it is done through different steps. In 2D, a curve drawn on the Floor Plan is interpreted as the cross-section of the Roof. Draw a series of arcs (or trace a shape with the Magic Wand) and double-click when finished. When you have defined the curve, you will see a rubberband boundary, whose ends are connected to those of the cross-section curve. One of the sides of this boundary is the imaginary floor and, at the same time, the side of the barrel roof.
With a first click, you define the starting point and the shape, and with the second, the length of the barrel-vaulted roof. Then make choices in the Vaulted Roof Settings dialog box. You can set Vaulted Roof characteristics here.
Enter the elevation of the base point of the roof, its edge angle and, if using a simple fill pattern, its thickness. Press the OK or Cancel button when finished.
722
Virtual Building
The resulting roof planes are individually editable. If Autogroup is on, they are generated as a group. The curve drawn in the Floor Plan is clearly visible in the 3D view of the roof.
Note: ArchiCAD only allows the construction of curved roofs that can be hit by vertical rainfall. This avoids the construction of self-intersecting or reclinate roofs. This also means that the same curve may be valid for the generation of a roof from one angle of the boundary box, and invalid from another angle. This is because the shape of the roof is determined not only by the curve that it is constructed from, but also by the angle of the boundary box that it is associated to. The start and end points of the roof must be defined in such a way that the heavy line side of the rubberband boundary does not intersect the original cross-section curve. There are three possible methods available for drawing a Barrel-Vaulted Roof in 3D: Rounded, Symmetrical and Irregular. Draw the first side of the outline rectangle of the roof at the desired height. The pet palette appears. Defining the cross-section is different for the three methods.
Rounded Roof
To create a Rounded roof: Click on the first icon.
723
Virtual Building
Draw the geometry of the roof cross-section by defining its height and click.
Extend the roof to the desired length and click to place the roof.
Symmetrical Vaulted Roof

To create a Symmetrical vaulted roof, click on the second icon. The Symmetrical Vaulted Roof dialog box appears. Enter the number of roof planes to create.
724
Virtual Building
Draw the geometry of the roof by defining its height and click.
Note: This method creates roof planes of equal length in cross-section.
725
Virtual Building
Irregular Roof
To create an Irregular roof: Choose the third method from the pet palette and click.
Define the shape of the roof by clicking as many times as you wish to create new planes. Doubleclick to finish creating roof planes.
726
Virtual Building
Create a Hole in a Roof

1) Select a Roof pane 2) With the Roof tool active, draw a new contour within its boundaries. The new contour will be interpreted as a hole in the Roof. Note: If you create a hole whose outline intersects the host Roofs contour or the outline of other holes in the same polygon, ArchiCAD will display a warning message, but the outline of the hole will still be created.
Selecting Roof Hole
727
Virtual Building
Modify the Roof Slant Angle

Once youve drawn a roof and selected it, you can modify its slant angle in several ways. Change the roof slant angle in the Info Box or in Roof Settings. In the 3D window, select the roof, then select the Modify Slant Angle command from the pet palette and graphically adjust the roof angle (or enter a Slant Angle value into the Tracker.)
In the Floor Plan or 3D Window, select the roof, then Ctrl+click (MacOS: Cmd+Click) at any point on the roof plane to bring up the Roof Elevations dialog box. Enter a numerical value in the top field: this value will be the elevation value of the roof plane at the point at which you clicked it. Altering this elevation value has the same effect as modifying the roof slant angle.
728
Virtual Building
Create Roof Level Lines

The Design > Create Roof Level Lines command, available in the Floor Plan, will place a line on a selected roof at the height value you specify in the Roof Level Lines dialog box.
On Top/On Bottom: Choose whether you want to measure the height value to the top or to the bottom surface of the roof. Specify Roof Level Lines height level: Use either input field - the current story level or Project Zero - to define the height of the desired roof level lines. Omit Lines Outside Roofs: Check this box to omit level lines that fall outside the floor plan polygon of the roof they belong. If the checkbox is disabled, all resulting lines will be drawn. In this case, lines that fall outside the roof polygon will be drawn to be of equal length to the pivot line of the roof they belong to. Group with Roof: Check this box to group level lines with the roofs they belong to. Note: This option is greyed if the Suspend Groups toggle is active.
729
Virtual Building
Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material

To customize a roof edge angle and apply a separate material to the edge(s) of a roof and/or its holes, select the roof and click on an edge with the Mercedes cursor to bring up a pet palette. (For complex roofs, you must ungroup the Roof first to be able to select a single edge.) Select the Roof Edge settings icon to open the Roof Edge dialog box.
Apply on: Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (angle, material, edge type) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette. Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the roof only or the edges of the hole only, depending on which one is selected. (See Selecting Roof Hole below.) All Edges will apply the chosen options to all edges of the roof as well as all edges of its holes. (If the selected roof has no holes, then Selected Polygon and All Edges have the same effect.) Edge Angle: From this list, choose an angle (vertical, horizontal, perpendicular, custom) for the roof edge. If you choose custom, enter the desired angle value in the field below.
730
Virtual Building
If you have clicked an edge that is the common joint of two selected roofs, a fifth Mitred option is available. Choose this to create a mitred joint along the selected roof edges.
Non-mitred:
Mitred:
Side Material: Choose a material for the roof edge(s). Material will be applied as defined in the Applied to control above. If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the default roof edge material, the Roof Model Panel will indicate that a custom side material has been applied.
731
Virtual Building
Edge Type: Optionally, choose a type for the roof edge (either the clicked edge, the selected polygon, or all the edges, as chosen at the top of this dialog box).
The Roof Edge type you define here can be used as a parameter in all of ArchiCADs listing functions. For example, you can add Eaves Length and Gables Length as parameters to an Interactive Schedule listing the roofs in your project.
732
Virtual Building
Selecting Roof Hole

To apply options to the hole only, you must select the hole, rather than the entire roof, and then choose Selected Polygon from the Apply On pop-up. To ensure that you have selected the hole, make sure the Info Tag says Inner polygon of the selected Roof:
733
Virtual Building
Intersect Roof Planes

You may need to adjust simple roof panes to each other or to modify some of the panes of a complex roof, for example to accommodate a dormer. To have these two roof planes intersect:
Select the lower one on the Floor Plan, and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the other. Now select the other roof plane and Ctrl-click (Windows) or Cmd-click (MacOS) the ridge line of the lower one. The two faces have been adjusted to each other.
In this example, when the two ridge lines meet on the Floor Plan, this means that they are in fact intersected in 3D.
734
Virtual Building
For more complex intersections, when more than two roof planes meet (e.g., when a barrelvaulted roof meets a simple pitched roof), additional nodes should be added to accommodate the shape. However, the intersection process itself is similar.
735
Virtual Building
Trim Element to Roof

Using the Trim to Roof Function Undo Roof Trim Effect of Roof Trim on Wall/Column Height Settings Use Roof Trim to Create Complex-Shaped Walls, Beams and Columns Trimming Slabs with a Roof Trimming with a Remote Roof
Note: You can also achieve the effect of trimming with a Roof by using Solid Element Operations.
Using the Trim to Roof Function

Roofs can trim either the top or the bottom of Walls Beams Columns Slabs Doors Windows Objects This trimming is not done automatically: you must use the Design > Trim to Roof command. Elements are trimmed only if they intersect a roof at any point, and only if you check its element type in the Trim to Roof dialog box. It is usually easiest to use Trim to Roof in the 3D window, where you can see the spatial relationships of roofs to other construction elements. The Trim to Roof command is available only if at least one roof or one element of the above types is selected. To trim elements to a roof, follow these steps: 1) Do one of the following: Select the elements you wish to trim. (Remember, only elements which intersect a roof at any point can be trimmed); or Select the roof(s) to which you want to trim elements; or Select both elements and roof(s). Selection of roofs and/or elements narrows the scope of the Trim. If you select only a roof, all eligible elements are trimmed; if you select only elements, they will be trimmed to all the eligible roofs.
736
Virtual Building
2) Go to Design > Trim to Roof to bring up the Trim to Roof dialog box.
3) Check the element type(s) you want to trim. (If you have already selected certain elements before bringing up the dialog box, these checkboxes are greyed.) 4) Check either Trim Top or Trim Base, depending on which part of the eligible element(s) you want to trim. Trim Top will trim the part of the element(s) above the roof, and Trim Base will trim the part below the roof. 5) Click the Trim button.
737
Virtual Building
Undo Roof Trim

Trimming an element can either be temporary, for visual display only, or definitive. You can restore elements after a temporary trimming. If an element has been trimmed to a roof, the Undo Roof Trim button becomes active at the bottom of that elements Settings dialog box (Model section). The only exception is Slabs: their trimming can only be undone through the Edit > Undo command. The trim remains in effect even if you hide the Roof or the trimmed elements, move them away from each other or even delete the trimming Roof. This allows you to create special gable shapes from those construction element types. If you trim a wall with a roof that crosses the wall entirely, the original wall will be cut into two walls: one with a cutting at the end, while the other will be a separate wall without any cut.
Exception: If you have an opening that would have points in both parts of the wall after the trim, the wall will remain one piece.
Effect of Roof Trim on Wall/Column Height Settings

By default, trimming a Wall or Column to a Roof will also alter the trimmed elements height. The Set Wall/Column Top to highest (lowest) Point checkbox at the bottom of the Trim to Roof dialog box is active by default. This means that the height of a trimmed wall or column is recalculated to equal the maximum of its trimmed height (if you trimmed the top) or the minimum trimmed base height (if you trimmed the bottom). Regardless of whether the checkbox is active, the Trim operation will result in the same visual effect.
738
Virtual Building
In this example, the top of the wall will be trimmed to the roof.
In the first trim, the checkbox is checked. This means that the Walls actual height (as shown by the selection dots) has changed to the highest point of the trimmed Wall.
739
Virtual Building
In the second trim, the box is left unchecked. The Wall is trimmed as usual, but the selection dots indicate that its height remains at its original value.
Note: if you click Trim Base, the Set Wall/Column Top to highest Point box changes to Set Wall/Column Base to lowest Point. In this case, its the base elevation of the element that changes. However, the Undo Roof Trim command will have a different effect depending on the checkbox status: if you set the Trim operation to recalculate the Wall/Columns height value (if the checkbox was active), then the Undo Roof Trim will only recreate the wall/column up to the maximum trimmed height. If you did not check the box, then the Undo Roof Trim will recreate the original Wall height.
740
Virtual Building
Use Roof Trim to Create Complex-Shaped Walls, Beams and Columns

You can cut complex shapes into walls, beams and columns by trimming them to Roofs. The wall will always follow the shape of the roof(s) above them, no matter how many roof segments you have.
However, remember that any roof can only make parallel cuts into the walls.
741
Virtual Building
Trimming Slabs with a Roof

Slabs can also be trimmed by the lower or upper slope of roofs with the help of the Design > Trim to Roof command. However, there is a big difference between trimming slabs and trimming walls, columns or Library Parts. While other elements can be partly trimmed, slabs are always cut along the whole section line of the roof and the slab. Moreover, the trimmed edge of the slab is always vertical even after being trimmed by a slanted roof.
742
Virtual Building
Trimming with a Remote Roof

You can use remote roofs and even roofs on other stories whose outline is shown on the given story for trimming elements to the plane of that particular roof.
Just select the elements you intend to cut, then Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) an edge or a node of the roof you want to cut them with. The reverse procedure will also work: select the roof you want to cut with and Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) the individual elements you want to be cut. Note: The Wall/Beam/Column is cut whether it is under a roof or not. Be sure to set a sufficient height for the original rectangular Walls/Beams/Columns so that they are cut correctly.
743
Virtual Building
Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker

RoofMaker allows you to add GDL Object-based elements to specific parts of your design in order to enhance them in 3D views and Section/Elevation/IE windows. RoofMaker can be accessed from the Design > Design Extras menu. Technically, RoofMaker is an ArchiCAD AddOn and is loaded with ArchiCAD on startup. After placement, roof construction elements behave like ordinary Objects and can be modified. The Roof Wizard is a RoofMaker function that allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. For more information, see Using the Roof Wizard. We recommend that you begin modelling the roof construction with the purlins and continue with the hip rafters/valley rafters before placing the rafters. This way you can easily keep track of all the connecting elements. (When placing ridges, you already know the thickness of the purlin; when placing rafters you already know the thickness of purlins, hip and valley rafters, etc.)
To place rafters, ridges or purlins (beams), a single roof surface has to be selected. If multiple roof surfaces are grouped, you must first ungroup them using the Edit > Grouping > Ungroup. You will then be able to select roof surfaces individually. Although the placement of roof construction elements using RoofMaker works using other methods, we strongly recommend setting the reference line of the roof to the upper exterior edge of the wall beneath (as handled by ArchiCADs Complex Roof Placement Method). The definition of elements, with or without overhang, uses this reference line as a basis. We recommend setting the roof thickness equal to the general cross-section height of the rafters. This way, you can use the roof to cut elements that are standing upon the rafters (e.g., Posts). To place a trimmer (blocking), a collar beam or a tie beam, two corresponding rafters must be selected (opposite rafters for a collar beam or a tie beam, and rafters in the same roof surface for a trimmer). After choosing the command for the placement of an object, a dialog box opens in which certain parameters concerning the object itself can be set. Surface materials and a layer can be assigned to all elements. The current pencolor set for the Object is used by default. If you change the current pencolor, all the subsequently placed elements will have the new color. 744
Virtual Building
The object is then placed with one or more clicks, or is placed automatically, depending on the object type. To display the RoofMaker commands in a separate floating toolbox, choose Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker > Show RoofMaker Toolbox. The RoofMaker Toolbox opens, which contains shortcuts to all of the RoofMaker menu commands.
Create a rafter Create multiple rafters Create hip or valley rafter Create a trimmer Create a purlin Create an eaves purlin Create collar beams Create tie beams Using the Roof Wizard Create a rafter
When creating rafters, the bottom plane of the roof serves as a reference plane. Rafters will be automatically placed on top of it. Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. Choose Create a rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the first icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The Rafter Settings Dialog Box appears in which rafter parameters can be set. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click inside the selected roof surface. (If you click outside, an error message appears.) A rafter is placed with its axis going through the specified point. By definition, rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.
745
Virtual Building
After the rafter is placed, you can select it and open its Object Settings dialog box. Among others, the parameters include profile and profile thickness. The rafter may have a rectangular (default) profile as well as I-beam, L-beam or C-beam profiles.
Create multiple rafters

Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan. Choose Create multiple rafters from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the second icon from the RoofMaker toolbox. In the Multiple Rafters Dialog Box, set the desired parameters. You will set the same controls as for a single rafter, but the placement controls for multiple rafters are also active. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click twice inside the selected roof surface to define a placement line. (If you click outside, an error message appears.) Several rafters are placed along the placement line, with the axis of the first rafter going through the point defined with the first click, and the axis of the last rafter going through the point defined with the second click. By definition, rafters are perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.
Create hip or valley rafter

The hip rafter usually lies between two neighboring roof polygons. Select the roof surface where the hip rafter connects to a purlin instead of another hip rafter; other methods may cause errors. Choose Create a hip rafter or valley rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the third icon of the RoofMaker toolbox). The Hip or Valley Rafter Settings dialog box opens. After adjusting those settings, click OK to return to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click along one of the edges of the selected roof that is NOT parallel or perpendicular to the reference line. A Hip or a Valley Rafter (or a Valley Rafter without Overhang) is placed along the specified edge of the roof, depending on the position of the edge to the roofs reference line. Hip and Valley Rafters can also be placed with two roof surfaces selected previously. It is then not necessary to click afterwards to specify an edge; the object will be placed along the common edge of the two surfaces. The difference between the two methods lies in the shape of the resulting objects; the top cut in the latter method makes the object suitable for steeple type roofs.
Create a trimmer
In order to place a trimmer, you must first select the two rafters the trimmer is going to be placed between. The two rafters have to be within the same roof polygon. (This also means that they have the same pitch angle and they are both perpendicular to the reference line of the roof.) Choose Create a Trimmer from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu. The Trimmer Settings dialog box appears. For more information, see Create a Trimmer (or Blocking).
746
Virtual Building
A trimmer is placed at the same height as the rafters. It can be vertical or rotated to a position perpendicular to the pitch angle of the roof. The 2D symbol also shows the current position. Clicking OK, you return to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. Click between the rafters. (If you click outside them, an error message will appear.) A trimmer is placed between the two rafters, the axis going through the specified point. Trimmers are always parallel to the reference line of the roof and thus perpendicular to the rafters.
Create a purlin
Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create a Purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the fifth icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which purlin parameters can be set. For more information, see Create a Purlin (or Beam). By default, the purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof, since a purlin generally supports the rafters from below. However, an elevation value can be set for the purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. Set the values for the width and the height of the cross-section. The purlin can also be perpendicular to the rafters and be on the top of them as well. If the purlin is placed on top, the cross section height of the rafters has to be set. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the reference roof surface still selected. Click either an edge of the selected roof, or inside the roof polygon. (Clicking outside the polygon produces an error message.) If you click on an edge, a purlin is placed with its axis along the edge. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof, the endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights - as indicated in the Height difference parameter of the library part - and the purlin will be inclined. Clicking inside the roof polygon determines the position of only one side of the purlin; an additional click is needed to define the direction where the purlin extends. (For example, if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall, first you click to the interior side and then toward the exterior.) If you click inside the polygon, the axis of the beam will pass through the clicked point parallel to the reference line of the roof.
Create an eaves purlin

Select a reference roof surface on the floor plan and choose Create an eaves purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or click the sixth icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). The Eaves Purlin Settings dialog box appears in which eaves purlin parameters can be set. For more information, see Create an Eaves Purlin (or Plate Beam). This type of purlin is placed under the reference plane defined by the roof, supporting the rafters from below. However, an elevation value can be set for the eaves purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. You can also set the values for the width and the height of the cross section.
747
Virtual Building
Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan, with the reference roof surface still selected. You need to click either one of the edges of the selected roof, or inside the roof polygon. (If you click outside the polygon, an error message appears.) If you click on an edge, the purlin is placed inside the polygon, with its side along the edge. If the edge is not parallel to the reference line of the roof, the two endpoints of the axis of the purlin will be at different heights, as indicated in the Height difference parameter of the library part, and the purlin will be inclined. If you click inside the polygon, the axis of the purlin will pass through the clicked point, parallel to the reference line of the roof surface. An additional click is then needed to define the direction where the plate beam extends. (For example, if you want to place a rafter in line with the interior side of a wall, first click on the interior edge of the wall and then toward the exterior.) By default, a background fill is assigned to the 2D symbol of purlins because purlins usually have to cover posts placed underneath. These posts are generally displayed as a larger circle to indicate that there is some kind of supporting structure. You can use the Bring to Front and Send to Back commands to ensure the accurate positioning of elements.
Create collar beams

In order to place a collar beam you must first select two rafters to place it between. The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top, otherwise you will get an error message. Choose Create a collar beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the seventh icon in the RoofMaker toolbox). The Collar Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the collar beam can be set. For more information, see Create Collar Beams. A collar beam can be double- or single-sided. In addition to the dimensions of the cross-section, an elevation value must be set, calculated from the height of the insertion point of the rafters (which is usually also the height of the reference line of the roof). If the two rafters are not inserted at the same height, the collar beam is placed relative to the higher one. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. If a double-sided collar beam has been selected, it is placed automatically in the appropriate position. If a singlesided collar beam is selected, click once more to determine on which side of the rafters the collar beam will be placed.
Create tie beams

In order to place a tie beam, you must first select two rafters to place it between. The axes of the two rafters must be along the same line and meet at the top, otherwise you will get an error message. Choose Create a tie beam from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or eighth icon in RoofMaker Toolbox). The Tie Beam Settings dialog box appears in which different parameters of the tie beam can be set. For more information, see Create Tie Beams.
748
Virtual Building
In addition to the dimensions of the cross section, an elevation value must be set, calculated either from Project Zero or the current story elevation. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan with the two rafters still selected. The tie beam is placed automatically in the appropriate position.
Using the Roof Wizard

The Roof Wizard allows you to create entire roof constructions quickly and easily. You can place rafters, purlins, trimmers, collar or tie beams in one step. To begin, select all the roof surfaces in the project that you wish to add structural elements to. Choose the Roof Wizard command from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or the last icon in the RoofMaker Toolbox). The Roof Wizard Dialog Box appears. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan. The roof construction elements you have specified are placed automatically in the appropriate position.
The placement of the rafters is optimized to meet the specified requirements. The objects now behave as ordinary Objects and can be modified as such.
749
Virtual Building
Slabs
About Slabs Creating Slabs Placing Holes in Slabs Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material Slab Tool Settings
750
Virtual Building
About Slabs
Slabs are the basic horizontal building blocks in ArchiCAD. They are typically used for modeling floors or split levels. Attributes for each part of the slabs representation (e.g. cover fill, cut fill in Sections) are set using the pop-up options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Settings dialog box. Note: For Slabs and Meshes, their Floor Plan outlines on remote stories (if they are shown on stories other than their home stories) are displayed using the line type set in Construction Elements Preferences (Project Preferences > Construction Elements). Choose a separate line type to display slabs and meshes on stories Above and Below their home stories. In the Slab Model Panel, you can assign separate materials for each of the three slab surfaces (top, bottom and side).
It is also possible to assign a separate material and a separate edge angle to each edge of the slab: see Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material. For more information on Floor Plan display of slabs, see How to Display Individual Elements on the Floor Plan. Note: The default slab structure is a composite slab. The thickness of such a composite slab is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and equals the sum of the skins thicknesses. A composite slabs thickness cannot be edited in Slab Settings. If you want to edit the slab thickness in Slab Settings, choose a non-composite slab structure, or change the thickness of the composite skins in Options > Element Attributes > Composites. To aid in precise element placement, use the Gravity function: turn on the Gravitate to Slab command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Slab.
751
Virtual Building
Creating Slabs
When you are satisfied with your choices in the Slab Tool Settings dialog box, you can start drawing Slabs by applying one of the Geometry Methods in the Info Box. New Slabs can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.
Slab Geometry
There are three Geometry Methods available for Slabs from the Info Box.
With the first icon on the left, you can create a Polygonal Slab. Just like for Walls, the pet palette appears and allows you to draw straight and curved segments for the Slabs outline.
If the Slabs polygon intersects itself, a warning appears, but the Slab will still be drawn. A self-intersecting Slab polygon will be fixed automatically if you edit the polygon later using any of the pet palettes editing methods. The second and third icon allow you to create a Rectangular or a Rotated Rectangular Slab. The rectangle is defined by placing two opposing corner nodes. A rectangle Slab is always aligned orthogonally with the normal grid. The Rotated Rectangular method requires that you first define a rotation vector, then drag the cursor in a perpendicular direction to complete the slab.
752
Virtual Building
Placing Holes in Slabs

You may need to make holes in Slabs to accommodate objects such as staircases, or for an open atrium space. Select a Slab and activate the Slab tool, then draw a new contour within the Slabs boundaries. This new contour will be interpreted as a hole in the Slab.
If you forgot to select a Slab before starting to create a hole in it, the new contour will be interpreted as a new Slab, even if it lies inside another Slab. (In 3D, this will not be apparent until you select either of the two slabs. You can then delete the inadvertently created slab). If you create a hole whose outline intersects the host Slabs contour or the outline of other holes in the same polygon, ArchiCAD will display a warning message, but the outline of the hole will still be created.
Selecting Slab Hole
753
Virtual Building
Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material

To customize a slab edge angle and apply a separate material to the edge(s) of a slab and/or its holes, select the slab (or just its hole) and click on an edge with the Mercedes cursor to bring up a pet palette. Select the Edge settings icon to open the dialog box.
Apply on:
Clicked Edge will apply the options you choose below (angle, material) only to the edge you clicked when bringing up the pet palette. Selected Polygon will apply the chosen options to the edges of the slab only or the edges of the hole only, depending on which one is selected. (See Selecting Slab Hole below.) All Edges will apply the chosen options to all edges of the slab as well as all edges of its holes. (If the selected slab has no holes, then Selected Polygon and All Edges have the same effect.) Edge Angle: From this list, choose an angle (vertical or custom) for the slab edge. If you choose custom, enter the desired angle value in the field below.
754
Virtual Building
Side Material: Choose a material for the slab edge(s). Material will be applied as defined in the Applied to control above. If you apply a material here to any edge that is different from the slab side material defined in the Slab Model Panel, that panel will indicate that a custom side material has been applied, using the yellow triangle. If you have applied a custom edge angle, the Various radio button is active.
To return this slab edge to its perpendicular default, click the perpendicular edge icon.
Selecting Slab Hole

To apply options to the hole only, you must select the hole, rather than the entire slab, and then choose Selected Polygon from the Apply On pop-up. To ensure that you have selected the hole, make sure the Info Tag says Inner polygon of the selected Slab:
755
Virtual Building
Meshes
About Meshes Display of Meshes Create a Mesh Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point Add New Points to the Mesh Create a Hole in the Mesh Mesh Tool Settings
756
Virtual Building
About Meshes
Meshes are surfaces of any form created by defining the elevation of their characteristic points and interpolating between them. In the Floor Plan, only the outline and the ridges of the mesh are shown. In 3D, depending on the construction method chosen in the Info Box and the Mesh Tool Settings dialog box, you will obtain meshes created as superficies, meshes created with vertical sides (skirt) and meshes created as solid bodies. A mesh is created on the foundation of the Mesh Reference Plane and the ridges of the Mesh. You draw the main contours of the mesh projected to the Reference Plane. You can then raise the characteristic points of the meshs superficies out of this plane. To aid in precise element placement, you can turn on the Gravitate to Mesh command to place additional elements onto the surface of the Mesh.
757
Virtual Building
Display of Meshes
Attributes for each part of the representation (e.g. cut surfaces, uncut lines) are set using the popup options in the Floor Plan & Section panel of the Mesh Tool Settings dialog box. When you are satisfied with the choices you made in the Mesh Settings dialog box, you can start drawing meshes. Note: For Slabs and Meshes, their Floor Plan outlines on remote stories (if they are shown on stories other than their home stories) are displayed using the line type set in Construction Elements Preferences (Project Preferences > Construction Elements). Choose a separate line type to display slabs and meshes on stories Above and Below their home stories. There are two types of ridges in a mesh: user-defined and generated ridges. You have the option to display all the ridges, or just the user-defined ones. (This control is located in Mesh Tool Settings).
User-defined ridges are always displayed. If the Show All Ridges option is selected, ArchiCAD will also show the ridges generated through the connecting mesh nodes. Each generated ridge connects two mesh points at different heights that are not already connected by a user-defined ridge. Generated ridges are shown only if they connect points that differ in elevation.
758
Virtual Building
Create a Mesh
New meshes can be created in either the Floor Plan or the 3D Window.
Mesh Geometry
The Mesh has four geometry methods in the Info Box. You can create Polygonal, Rectangular and Rotated Rectangular shapes or a Regular Sloped Mesh.
In all cases, you will draw a Mesh polygon at the elevation of the basis plane defined in the Settings dialog box.
Create a Polygonal or Rectangular Mesh

The Polygonal and Rectangular/Rotated Rectangular Mesh geometry methods work the same as similar controls for the Slab tool. For more information, see Creating Slabs. If needed, select the Mesh and edit its points, add new points, or create a hole.
Create a Regular Sloped Mesh

The Regular Sloped Mesh method (the fourth in the Info Box) helps you quickly create regular meshes with plane surfaces. After defining the rectangle contour of the mesh, the Regular Sloped Mesh dialog box opens automatically.
In the first part of the dialog box, you can set the number of divisions in either coordinate direction. You must then set the elevation of three mesh corners; the fourth one is generated automatically. Divisions: Specify divisions along two perpendicular edges of Regular Sloped Mesh. Set the number of divisions in X and Y directions. Note: Bigger division numbers allow you change the flat surface in finer steps.
759
Virtual Building
Mesh Corner Elevation: Set the elevation values of three corner points of the mesh. Note: You can specify elevation of three corners; the fourth is calculated by ArchiCAD. On confirming the settings, ArchiCAD will draw the mesh. If needed, select the Mesh and edit its points, add new points, or create a hole.
760
Virtual Building
Edit Elevation of a Mesh Point

1) Select the Mesh. 2) With the Mesh tool active, click a Mesh Point to bring up the pet palette.
3) Choose the Elevate Mesh Point command from the pet palette. This opens the Mesh Point Height dialog box.
4) Enter a new height value in the text field. Checking the Apply to All box will set all Mesh points to this new height. Changing the elevation of a single point will not affect the elevation of the neighboring points. The arrow below the text field opens a pop-up menu in which you can choose a reference level for the modified height.
761
Virtual Building
Add New Points to the Mesh

1) With the Mesh tool active, select the mesh. 2) Draw a closed polygon or a straight segment within the Mesh polygon. (If you draw outside of the contour of the first polygon, only points within the contour will constitute the Mesh.) The New Mesh Points dialog box then opens.
3) Choose the Add New Points radio button. (If you drew a two-point line rather than a polygon, this is the default and only choice.) 4) Choose an option from the drop-down menu to define the relationship between the newly created points and existing ones.
New Mesh Points Dialog Box

When you add points to the selected mesh, in the New Mesh Points dialog box you can choose between adding new points and creating a hole. Located below the two radio buttons, the pop-up menu contains three choices that produce different results.
762
Virtual Building
If you choose No Surface Fitting, the new points will be added with the height value currently set in the Mesh Settings dialog box. Intersected user-defined ridges will keep their height. If youre creating a hole, the slopes of the mesh will be connected to the bottom elevation of the mesh.
If you choose Fit to User Ridges, the new points will be placed on the current surface of the mesh, and only user-defined ridges will keep their height. This method is recommended for renderings.
If you choose Fit to All Ridges, the new points will be placed on the current surface of the mesh, and all ridges will keep their height. This method is the most precise one, but it may generate a rather large number of ridges.
In the latter two cases, if you wish to Create a Hole in the Mesh (for instance, to accommodate a house plot), no slopes connected to the bottom of the mesh will be created, allowing you to place your building exactly into the excavated site.
763
Virtual Building
Create a Hole in the Mesh

1) With the Mesh tool active, select the mesh. 2) Draw a closed polygon that falls entirely within the Mesh polygon. The New Mesh Points Dialog Box then opens.
3) Choose the Create Hole radio button. 4) Choose an option from the drop-down menu to define the relationship between the newly created points and existing ones.
764
Virtual Building
Zones
Zones are spatial units in your Project. Usually, they represent rooms; wings of a building; blocks of a housing estate or functional areas of a building. Zones in 3D can also be used for simple mass modeling.
Zone Categories 2D Display of Zone Fills Zone Stamps 3D Display of Zone Spaces Creating Zones Trim Zone to Another Element Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume Updating Zones Zone Tool Settings
765
Virtual Building
Zone Categories
Each zone you create in your project is assigned a Zone category in the Zones Settings dialog box. This Zone Category defines the color of the default zone fill and the type of Zone Stamp object used for the zone. The main function of zone categories is to use colors to visually distinguish different types of spaces in your project: for example, you can assign the Office category to all your office space, which will all be displayed in pink; and the Communication and Access category to the hallways, which will all be displayed in white. (However, you have great flexibility in the display of zone fills; see 2D Display of Zone Fills). Some Zone categories are predefined in ArchiCAD; you can define your own categories using the Zone Categories Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories).
766
Virtual Building
2D Display of Zone Fills

By default, zones are displayed in the color of their zone category. (See Zone Categories.) If you like, you can assign a different Zone fill using any cover fill. 1) Go to the Floor Plan panel of Zone Settings. 2) Activate the Cover Fill icon at the left.
3) Choose a fill pattern from the fill pop-up menu. If you have assigned a Zone fill, it will be displayed in Floor Plan by default. You may want to vary your zone display settings depending on what you are outputting. For example, construction documentation might display zones using the zone fill settings, while draft and approval documentation display category colors. To vary zone fill display on the Floor Plan, use the options in the Model View Options Override Fill Display (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options). For Zone fills, the relevant settings are in the panel section called Override Zone Fills.
767
Virtual Building
Check the Override Zone fills box to choose any other zone fill display preference. These settings are global and apply to every zone in your project.
For details, see Model View Options Override Fill Display.
Display of Zones with Slanted Walls

Zones bounded by one or more slanted walls will accurately consider the slanted geometry. Such zones are displayed on the Floor Plan with two separate zone polygons: the polygon with editable selection dots, which delimits the visible part of the zone on the Floor Plan (while you can edit this polygon, such editing has no effect on the true 3D zone), and the polygon with regular selection dots, which indicates the true extent of the base of the 3D zone (you cannot edit the zone shape by editing this polygon.)
768
Virtual Building
Zone Stamps
Zone stamps are intelligent parametric GDL Objects whose look, contents and behavior can be fitted to local architectural practice. They reside in the ArchiCAD Library. The zone stamp object assigned to your zone depends on the Zone Category you have chosen. See Zone Categories. Each zone stamp contains textual information about the zone, including its name, number, area, and other optional parameters; the exact content of your Zone Stamp depends on the parameters you set in the Zone Stamp Panel of the Zone Settings dialog box.
2D Display of Zone Stamps

Zone stamps are displayed by default. If you do not wish to display any zone stamps in the project, check Hide Zone Stamp checkbox in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options.
Moving Zone Stamps

Zone Stamps can be moved independently of the Zone: Click on a node of the Zone stamp. Choose the Move Sub-Element icon from the pet palette.
Drag the Zone Stamp to the desired location.
769
Virtual Building
3D Display of Zone Spaces

To view zone spaces in 3D, go to View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D and make sure the Zone checkbox is selected. In 3D, Zones appear as 3D spaces. ArchiCAD performs accurate analyses of both the geometric and quantitative attributes of zone spaces, no matter how complex their geometric shape. Note that the Z-value (height) of a zone space is not constrained by its boundaries as defined in the 2D view; your zone space in 3D takes on the height you define in Zone Settings (zone height.) When viewing the Shaded model, go to the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings, and choose the Contours: Draft option to view only the 3D Zones, without any of the construction elements.
If you choose Contours: Best, you will see the shaded Zone surrounded by the construction elements. Elements hidden by the zone shape are not displayed at all.
Note: You may wish to display 3D Zones as solid bodies in shading mode, and all other elements types in wireframe mode. To achieve this effect, apply the predefined Show 3D Zones as Solid Layer Combination.
3D Window 3D Window Settings
770
Virtual Building
Creating Zones
In the Zone Tool Settings dialog box, customize the parameters of your zone - such as its name, its category, its height, and the content of its zone stamp. Then you are ready to define the zone shape. The Zone definition methods are represented by the three icons in the Info Box. You can either manually draw the contour of a zone (using the Polygonal Method), or let ArchiCAD automatically recognize a zone surrounded by bordering elements (using the two Automatic Recognition Methods).
. Note: Columns cannot serve as the enclosing boundary of a zone. Whichever Geometry Method you choose, the Hammer cursor appears when you have finished defining the outline of the Zone. Click with it to define the location of the Zone Stamp. The Zone Stamp does not necessarily have to be placed inside the Zone polygon.
Polygonal Method
The Polygonal (manual) method is your best choice when your Zones boundary is not clearly surrounded by elements (e.g. when doing space planning). With this method, you simply draw a polyline (as you would for any other polygon) by clicking at every corner of the zone. Zones created with this method cannot change their shape when using the Update Zone command on them. You can edit a polygonal zone graphically by selecting it and using the pet palette commands.
Automatic Recognition Methods
Both automatic recognition methods, Inner Edge and Reference Line, are based on the fact that most Zones are surrounded by Walls and the only openings in them are Doors and Windows. If you choose the Inner Edge method, ArchiCAD will always define the zone area by the inner edges of walls. If you choose the Reference Line method, ArchiCAD considers the reference lines of the walls as the boundaries of the zone. Note that even if you constructed Walls with the reference line placed on the external edge, the Zone fill does not overlap the wall symbol until you choose Bring to Front from the Edit > Display Order.
771
Virtual Building
Note: In case of a slanted or complex wall, the Reference Line method will not consider the walls reference line, but rather its inner edge. (You cannot edit a zone polygon created with the automatic method using graphical methods, since these methods cannot determine the zones 3D shape.)
Exclude a Wall or Column as a Zone Boundary

By default, the Relation to Zones settings in the Wall or Column Settings Listing and Labeling Panels are set to Zone Boundary; this means that all walls/column enclosing a closed space are considered zone boundaries by default. To exclude any wall/column as a zone boundary, just change the Relation to Zones setting to No Effect on Zones.
Create a Manual Zone Boundary

If the Zone has openings that are not Doors or Windows, ArchiCAD will continue searching for boundaries outside the spatial unit that you wished to identify as a Zone. In this case, the result may not be what you expect (see figure, below right).
In this case, close the Zone by: using the Polygon method place an Empty Opening Door object into the Wall which is the same height as the Wall - the Wall is not shown in 2D, but it does serve as a Zone Boundary drawing a line to serve as a Zone Boundary
You can draw a Line, Arc or Spline to serve as a zone boundary if you check the Zone Boundary checkbox in its Line Settings dialog boxes (Line General Settings Panel).
772
Virtual Building
If your desired zone boundaries also encompass freestanding shapes or walls, you may get a warning message when clicking to place the zone stamp.
If this happens, you must click closer to the bounding elements. Then the zone will be created correctly.
Zone Reference Point

If you place the Zone Stamp with one of the automatic recognition methods, you will see a cross appear inside the Zone at the location that you first clicked to define the Zones area. This cross indicates the reference point of the Zone.
This point is used as the starting point of boundary recognition for subsequent updating actions.
Updating Zones Relation to Zones Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume
773
Virtual Building
Trim Zone to Another Element

Zone spaces can be trimmed to roofs, slabs and beams with the Design > Trim Zone command. You can either select an element (Roof, Slab, Wall, Column, Beam or Library Part) and trim a Zone to it if the element protrudes into the Zone, or select a Zone and then choose which element types to trim it to. Note: Zone space will be trimmed by any multi-story element with which it intersects, on any story. When trimming a zone to a roof, a checkbox gives you the option of ignoring holes (that is, to include any hole in the roof as part of the roof for the purposes of a zone boundary.) You can choose between trimming the base or the top of zone spaces. Check the corresponding boxes to define which elements you wish to trim to the zone.
The trim will be executed by clicking the Trim button in the dialog box. If you select only one type of trimming element in the project (e.g. Roof), all the checkboxes are greyed.
Zone space trims can be undone by selecting the trimmed zone space and pressing the Undo Top Trim or Undo Bottom Trim button in the Zone Model Panel of Zone Settings. Note: You can also opt to undo the Trim when updating modified Zones. For more information, see Updating Zones. 774
Virtual Building
Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume

Zone area is an important component in project calculations, and you can customize the way in which zone areas and 3D zone spaces are calculated. Zone dimensions are associative; following an update, zone areas will be recalculated to reflect any modifications. Zone areas are usually displayed on documentation as part of the Zone Stamp; they also form part of Zone Lists created with the Document > Schedules and Lists > Zone Lists hierarchical menu. The way ArchiCAD calculates Zone area depends on several different settings: Relation to Zones options chosen for Walls and Columns which define the Zones area; the Zones Preferences screen in Options > Project Preferences > Zones, containing global controls for calculating wall recesses and refining the calculation of walls or columns; the Zone Area Calculation Panel of the Zone Settings dialog box, which allows you to check the measured area of the Zone and refine the calculated values.
Relation to Zones
For each wall, Curtain Wall and column, you can customize its Relation to Zones, that is, whether it will act as a zone boundary (stopping the zone, as a delimiter), and whether its area and/or volume should be taken into account when calculating the area and volume of the zone shape. This definition is made in the Wall Settings, Column Settings and Curtain Wall Settings dialog boxes, with a pop-up menu located on the Listing and Labeling panel. The options are as follows: 1) Zone Boundary (not available for slanted columns.): A wall or Curtain Wall set to Zone Boundary will act as a delimiter of the zone; it will be the edge of the zone. If such a Zone Boundary wall/Curtain Wall is slanted, the zones geometry will take this into account, and will be slanted accordingly to fit to the wall. Also, a wall/Curtain Wall set to Zone Boundary, if located inside the zone area, will not be included as part of the measured zone area. The zone boundary is drawn at the base of the wall. A column set to Zone Boundary cannot act as the edge of a zone (unless it is located inside of a wall that is a zone boundary). However, a vertical column set to Zone Boundary, if located inside the zone area, will not be included as part of the measured zone area. The zone boundary is drawn at the base of the column. Multi-story elements in automatic display mode can serve as zone boundaries on any story on which they exist, not just their home story. Note: Any line-type element can also be set as Zone Boundary in its Settings dialog box. Such a line will act as a delimiter of the zone. 2) A wall/Curtain Wall/column located inside a zone and set to Reduce Zone Area Only means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column does not affect the zone geometry, but when you calculate the zone area, the area of these walls/Curtain Walls/columns is excluded from the zone area. (Zone volume, however, will include the wall/column volume.) Note: Even if you have set a wall, Curtain Wall or column to Reduce Zone Area, you may prefer to ignore this setting for very small-sized walls or columns. To set the minimum limit
775
Virtual Building
for excluding such walls and columns, go to Zones Preferences at Options > Project Preferences > Zones. To see how much of a zones gross area has been reduced due to Wall/Column reduction, select the zone and view the data in the Zone Area Calculation Panel of Zone Settings. 3) A wall/Curtain Wall/column located inside a zone and set to Reduce Zone Volume means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column does not affect the zone geometry, but when you calculate the zone area and volume, the volume of these walls/Curtain Walls/columns is excluded from the zone volume. 4) No Effect On Zones means that the wall/Curtain Wall/column has no effect on the zone; the zone area and volume will include the area and volume occupied by the element. The following example and table will help you understand what happens to a zone area of 10 by 10 meters (and of 2.70 meter standard height) including a square 1 by 1 meter column.
Option Boundary Reduce Area only Reduce Volume No effect
Area 99 m2 99 m2 99 m2 100 m2
Volume 267.3 m3 270 m3 267.3 m3 270 m3
776
Virtual Building
Updating Zones
When you modify your design, associative zones do not automatically adjust themselves to the changes.
To adjust Zones to your updated design and recalculate the Zone area, use the Design > Update Zones command to use the Update Zones dialog box. This function also alerts you to any problematic Zones that might have been created. The Update Zones dialog box contains the following columns: Status: This is where ArchiCAD tells you if the Zone could be updated, and if not, what the nature of the problem is. The icons appearing in this field represent the following: All is well, ArchiCAD has successfully updated your Zone. The Zone was created manually and cannot be automatically adjusted. The layer on which the Zone resides is locked. Unlock the layer in the Layer Settings dialog box and repeat the update process. The Zone is self-intersecting. Just as in the case of polygons, you may have to adjust the Zone to have valid geometry, or split it into two Zones. You can examine the Zone by selecting it in the list, and clicking the Zoom to Selected Zones button. Fix the problem and repeat the update process.
The reference point of the Zone is outside of its boundary. Each automatic Zone has a reference point that must lie inside the Zone. If you get this error message, move the reference point inside the Zone and repeat the update process.
For more information, see Zone Reference Point.
777
Virtual Building
The Zone you are trying to update cannot be properly adjusted, because it has difficulty in finding all of its edges. Click the Zoom to Selected Zones button to find the Zone. Fix the problem and repeat the update process. No.: This column contains the number that has been assigned to the particular Zone. Name: This column contains the name of the Zone. Added m2: This column contains information on how the Zone has changed. (You can change the area unit in the pop-up menu in the upper right portion of the dialog box.) To keep the original position of zone stamps when updating zones, check the Keep Zone Stamp position checkbox. To remove the 3D zone space trim, check the Undo Top Trim if updated and/or Undo Bottom Trim if updated checkboxes. Note: If you leave these checkboxes unchecked, conflicts may arise in certain geometric configurations. For more information, see Trim Zone to Another Element.
778
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall: A System Tool

About Curtain Walls Working with Curtain Walls: Overview Curtain Wall Members Create a Curtain Wall System-Level Editing Curtain Wall Display Curtain Wall Edit Mode Edit Grid Edit Curtain Wall Boundary Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line Curtain Wall Frames Curtain Wall Panels Curtain Wall Junctions Curtain Wall Accessories Curtain Walls and Other Elements Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls Free-Rotate Curtain Wall Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members Curtain Wall Settings
779
Virtual Building
About Curtain Walls

The Curtain Wall tool, located in the regular ArchiCAD toolbox, lets you create a Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, or 3D window.
The Curtain Wall is a single element consisting of Frame, Panel, Accessory and Junction components: these are the Members of the Curtain Wall, arranged on a Base Surface according to a pre-defined and editable Scheme.
To control the whole hierarchy at once, System level settings, which define the overall scheme and configure the Curtain Wall members, are organized into a multi-page settings dialog. Curtain Walls can be manipulated in the same way as any construction element in ArchiCAD. But unlike other elements, a Curtain Walls component members can be placed and edited individually, without disassembling the System. To enable the manipulation of sub-structural members, each Curtain Wall can be accessed at a deeper level: the Curtain Wall Edit mode. This is a graphical 3D workspace, similar to ArchiCAD's own, with dedicated tools and techniques to manipulate Curtain Wall members. In this context, only the members and scheme of the selected Curtain Wall are editable, although the rest of the model can be also displayed in a background manner, as a reference. Since Curtain Walls often feature extreme geometry that does not necessarily coincide with vertical-horizontal planes, ArchiCAD offers versatile input planes for greater freedom in surface definition. Also, in comparison with other construction elements, a higher level of editing freedom is provided: including input in Section views, boundary editing, and free rotation. 780
Virtual Building
Working with Curtain Walls: Overview

Creating a Curtain Wall involves a simple graphical input. You will select the Curtain Wall tool from the ArchiCAD toolbox, then a geometry method, and then draw a reference line, polyline, contour or arc, depending on the chosen geometry method. If you use the Boundary method, then your input defines the entire geometry of the Curtain Wall. If you draw a Reference Line/Arc/Polyline, then the Curtain Wall will be extruded from this line/polyline/arc. The next click, with a sun cursor, defines which side of the Curtain Wall should face the outside. Finally, a dialog box pops up to allow you to enter basic geometry information for the Curtain Wall. Clicking Place will create the Curtain Wall. For details on Curtain Wall geometry methods in different windows, see Create a Curtain Wall. Curtain Walls consist of a set of Members (such as Frames, Panels and Junctions), and each Members parameters are defined in Curtain Wall Default Settings. See Curtain Wall Members. View the Curtain Wall in your project. If you want to change something, you can approach the Curtain Wall at two levels: 1) either edit the Curtain Wall as a whole, using System-level Settings 2) or edit the settings of individual selected members of the Curtain Wall. To do this, you will enter Curtain Wall Edit Mode, where you can edit selected members either graphically or using member-specific Settings dialog boxes. These individual, edited Curtain Wall members will henceforth have Custom settings.
For System-Level Editing of Whole Curtain Wall:

Select the Curtain Wall; open Curtain Wall Settings; and edit any of its System-level settings again. Click OK to redefine the Curtain Wall according to the modified settings. See System-Level Editing.
To Edit Individual Curtain Wall Members:

Select the Curtain Wall; go into Edit mode. (See Curtain Wall Edit Mode). Edit mode shows you your Curtain Wall in 3D. At the Edit mode level, you can delve deeper into the individual components of the Curtain Wall you are editing. In Edit mode, you cannot place additional Curtain Walls, but you can edit any members of the selected Curtain Wall or add additional members to it. In Edit mode, each member (Scheme, Frame, Panel, Accessory, Junction) has its own Dialog box and its own Tool, enabling you to change settings and place new Members in this Curtain Wall. To customize the settings of any member of the Curtain Wall, select it and use the dialog box to change its settings. For example, select a panel and change its materials. Changing the settings of a selected member will transform that member into a Custom member. You can have any
781
Virtual Building
number of different customized members. Once a member has Custom settings, the System-level settings no longer apply to it. In Edit mode, you can create additional members for your Curtain Wall, using the Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction and Accessory Tools. When using any of these tools to create a new member, you have the choice of using the System-level default settings, or else defining custom settings. Save changes and leave Curtain Wall Edit Mode to return to your regular ArchiCAD editing environment.
Additional Curtain Wall Commands

The Design > Curtain Wall menu contains a collection of commands which are specific to Curtain Wall functions. These functions are described elsewhere in this documentation.
782
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Members

It is important to distinguish the following Curtain Wall components:
Reference Line
The Reference Line is the original input line/polyline/arc you draw in the window. If you use a Boundary method to create a Curtain Wall, the first drawn segment of the Boundary is the Reference Line. The Reference Line is part of the Curtain Wall Scheme (together with the Grid pattern, the Boundary, and the Base Surface.) Later, you can edit the Reference Line of a placed Curtain Wall. See Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line.
Reference Surface
The Reference Surface is an imaginary plane or arced surface automatically created by ArchiCAD by extruding the input line (polyline, arc) you have drawn. Often, you will place your input line along an existing ArchiCAD element (e.g. slab); the Reference Surface is extruded from this input line.
Base Surface
The Base Surface defines the shape and orientation of the Curtain Wall. It is the surface in which the physical members of the Curtain Wall (Frame, Panels) lie. The Base Surface may coincide with the Reference Surface; more likely, you will offset it. When you move or rotate the Curtain Wall as a whole, it is the Base Surface which you are moving; the Reference Line and Reference Surface move along with the Base Surface.
The Base Surface of Curtain Walls is an infinite plane - except if it is based on a curved shape. (The Base Surface of a curved Curtain Wall is cylindrical, and is infinite only in the direction of the cylinders axis.) A Curtain Walls infinite Base Surface gives you great freedom in connecting the Curtain Wall to other elements, and in adding multiple, bounded Curtain Wall portions to any Curtain Wall. See Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary.
783
Virtual Building
Grid
The Base Surface is crisscrossed by a Grid (primary gridlines plus secondary gridlines, defined as part of the Curtain Wall Scheme.)
The Grid defines the default location and arrangement of Frames and Panels in the Curtain Wall. You can edit the Grid (delete, add gridlines, move or rotate it). Changes to Grid geometry will change the geometry of its Frames and Panels accordingly. See Edit Grid.
Boundary
The Boundary is a simple polygon on the Base Surface, which represents the physical limits of the Curtain Wall. The Boundary is part of the Curtain Wall Scheme (together with the Grid, the Base Surface and the Reference Line). Depending on the geometry method used to create the Curtain Wall, the Boundary is either drawn by you or created by ArchiCAD in accordance with input parameters. You can draw additional boundaries on an existing Curtain Wall - this gives you freedom to separate the Curtain Wall into parts, while still keeping it as a single element: all parts of the Curtain Wall use the identical Scheme. See Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary. The Curtain Walls Boundary Frame always coincides with this Boundary polygon.
You can edit the Boundary of the Curtain Wall like any other polygon. See Edit Curtain Wall Boundary. 784
Virtual Building
Scheme
The Scheme contains the essential geometry definitions for the Curtain Wall: the Scheme encompasses the Base Surface, the Grid, Boundary, and Reference Line. Use Scheme Settings to arrange the gridline pattern in two directions (primary and secondary). The Scheme also defines the class to which individual panels within this basic pattern belong. See Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page. All other members of the Curtain Wall (Frames, Panels, Accessories, Junctions) are attached to the Scheme.
Frame
You can define three classes of Frames for any Curtain Wall: Boundary Frame; Mullion Frame; Transom Frame. Each Frame class has unique settings. Frames are attached to the Grid when you create the Curtain Wall, so if you move or delete a Gridline, you move or delete the Frame. (In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can place additional Frames independent of the Grid.) See Curtain Wall Frames.
785
Virtual Building
Panel
Panels are the flat surfaces - generally glazed - of the Curtain Wall. Any Curtain Wall can have two predefined classes of Panels: Main and Distinct. Panels are always placed between Frames. See Curtain Wall Panels.
Junction
A Curtain Wall Junction is an optional structure that serves to connect panels to the Frame. In ArchiCAD, a Junction is a GDL object, and can be placed either one by one, or automatically at every intersection. See Curtain Wall Junctions.
Accessories
Accessories are optional, non-load-bearing members - such as a sun shade - attached to the Curtain Wall. These are GDL objects placed at any Frame of an existing Curtain Wall.
See Curtain Wall Accessories.
786
Virtual Building
Create a Curtain Wall

In ArchiCAD, creating a Curtain Wall is intuitive and flexible. You will use input methods that are familiar from other ArchiCAD functions. ArchiCAD also gives you a wide range of geometry methods so that you can choose the easiest method for the situation and model view you are working on. Input methods are almost identical in all the windows (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE, and 3D): draw an input line, polyline, or arc, and then extrude the Curtain Wall to a defined distance. Or draw the entire boundary of the Curtain Wall. The Curtain Wall is placed on or relative to the input plane. In the Floor Plan, the input plane is the Story level. In Section/Elevation/IE, the input plane is identical to the Section plane. In 3D, the default input plane for Curtain Walls (as for any construction element) is Project Zero or the User Origin, but you may use several methods for defining any other input plane. See Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window.
Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan Create a Slanted Curtain Wall Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the Section Window Create a Curved Curtain Wall: Geometry Methods Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall in the 3D Window Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the 3D Window Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane
Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan

To create a single flat Curtain Wall, activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Polyline - Single geometry method from the Info Box.
787
Virtual Building
Note: The Polyline Geometry method is also available in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation Window. In these windows, the Single method will extrude the Curtain Wall perpendicularly from the Section plane. See Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View. Suppose you are working on the following Floor Plan of a two-story project, and you want to place a Curtain Wall for the remaining side of the building.
Draw a Reference Line representing the length of the Curtain Wall.
Click to complete the Reference Line. The sun cursor appears: click with the sun cursor to define the outside direction of the Curtain Wall. Here, move the cursor to the outside of the building and click.
788
Virtual Building
In the appearing Place Curtain Wall dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height and slant angle (default: 90 degrees). Here, we will enter 6200 mm and leave the angle at 90 degrees for a vertical Curtain Wall.
Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed. View the result in the 3D window.
789
Virtual Building
To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit Mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/ Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)
Create a Slanted Curtain Wall

To create a slanted Curtain Wall, follow the same steps as above (Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan). After drawing the reference line, the sun cursor appears: click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box, enter a slant angle: we will use 72 degrees. Note that this angle is measured on the inside of the Curtain Wall (opposite the side you clicked with the sun cursor).
790
Virtual Building
Click to place the slanted Curtain Wall.
View it in 3D:
To change the slant angle of a placed Curtain Wall, you can edit the Curtain Wall graphically in the 3D window, using the Free-Rotate Curtain Wall function. Alternatively, select the Curtain Wall and change the angle value in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Geometry and Positioning Panel. To trim the ends of the walls by connecting them to the Curtain Wall, use the Connect Curtain Wall function. See Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls.
791
Virtual Building
Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the Section Window

Use this method to create a Curtain Wall by drawing its Boundary freehand, in the Section window. Note: Using this Boundary method in the Floor Plan will create a horizontal Curtain Wall placed at the Story level. We start with the following building model. We will create a Curtain Wall whose Boundary runs along the opening on the buildings southern face. To do this, we will use the Boundary geometry method in the Section Window.
In the Floor Plan, the building and its Section line S-01 look like this. Note that we have drawn a Section line here whose sole purpose is to define the Curtain Walls input plane. In Section windows, the Curtain Wall input plane exactly coincides with the Section plane.
Open the Section. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Boundary geometry method from the Curtain Wall Info Box.
792
Virtual Building
Draw the Curtain Wall Boundary along the desired contour, clicking at each node as when drawing any polyline. Double-click or click with the Hammer cursor to close the polygon. Note: The Reference Line of this Curtain Wall is the first Boundary segment you draw.
Now click with the Sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall: If you click outside the polygon, the outside of the Curtain Wall will face in the same direction as the Section plane (away from you). The result in the Floor Plan looks like this:
If you click inside the polygon (on the Curtain Wall surface), the outside of the Curtain Wall will face opposite the Section plane (toward you). The result in the Floor Plan looks like this:
In our case, we want the Curtain Wall to face outside the building, opposite the Section plane (toward you). So after drawing the Curtain Wall boundary in the Section window, we will click inside the polygon, using the Sun cursor:
793
Virtual Building
Now the outside of the Curtain Wall is behind the Section Line. Therefore, due to the geometry of this Curtain Wall, no physical members (Panel, Frame) of the Curtain Wall are visible in the Section window. However, the result is seen in both the Floor Plan and the 3D window:
To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)
Create a Curved Curtain Wall: Geometry Methods

You can create a curved Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE window, or 3D window. When defining the geometry of a curved Curtain Wall, you must first define the cylindrical Base Surface, then mark off the parts of this cylinder onto which the Curtain Wall will be placed. Note: Curved Curtain Walls are always regularly shaped: the axis of its cylindrical Base Surface is either horizontal or vertical to the input plane when you create it, although subsequently you can tilt it in any direction. Choose one of the four geometry methods for creating a curved Curtain Wall with a cylindrical Base Surface. For the most part, these are the same methods used to draw circles or arc walls in ArchiCAD.
1) Centerpoint and Radius: Click to place the centerpoint. Click a second time to define the radius and one of the endpoints of the Curtain Wall. Click a third time to define the other end of the wall. Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed.
794
Virtual Building
2) Three Points: Click three times in succession to define the beginning point, another point, and the endpoint of the Curtain Wall. By defining these three points, the reference cylinders radius and centerpoint are also calculated. For an example, see Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan. 3) Tangential: Use this geometry method to place a Curtain Wall that forms a full circle. Click three times in succession to define three points on the Curtain Wall. By defining these three points, the reference cylinders radius and centerpoint are also calculated. A temporary reference circle appears. If the three tangential points enable more than one geometrical possibility for a full-circle, the eyeball cursor appears. Move the cursor to view the possibilities, then click to choose which geometry you need. Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. The full-circle Curtain Wall is placed. 4) Radius and Axis: Use this geometry method to create a regular arc-shaped Curtain Wall. This Curtain Wall will always be a half-cylinder shape placed on the input plane. The first two clicks define the Curtain Walls beginning and endpoints. Click a third time to define the extrusion length of the arc Curtain Wall. For an example, see Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window.
Create a Curved Curtain Wall on Floor Plan

The following building in the Floor Plan is based on a curved slab.
Follow these steps to add a curved Curtain Wall to the South Elevation:
795
Virtual Building
Activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Three Points geometry method from the Info Box:
Click the three points to define the reference arc of the Curtain Wall.
Click a fourth time to define the angle formed by the two ends of the wall and the cylinder centerpoint.
Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the appearing Place Curtain Wall follow-up dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height. Here, we will enter 6200 mm.
796
Virtual Building
For a curved Curtain Wall, you cannot set a slant angle; it will always be vertical.
Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window. Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed. View the result in the 3D window.
To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using Curtain Wall Edit Mode, Graphical Editing of Curtain Wallselect the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)
Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View

The input plane in the Section window coincides with the Section Plane. When you use an input method which extrudes the Curtain Wall from a Reference Line (such as the Polyline, Chained, or Curved methods), you must define starting point and the length of the extrusion. For this, use the options in the Place Curtain Wall on Section dialog box.
797
Virtual Building
To freely position the beginning of the extrusion by offsetting the starting point from the input plane: choose the first method. The first field is the absolute length of the extrusion; the third field is its offset from the input plane. (The sum of the two values is shown in the middle field.)
To begin extruding the Curtain Wall away from you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the second method and enter the length of extrusion. There is no offset (the Curtain Wall begins right at the input plane).
To begin extruding the Curtain Wall toward you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the fourth method and enter the length of extrusion.
798
Virtual Building
To place the midpoint of the extrusion vector at the input plane, choose the third option. Enter the total extrusion length in the first field below.
Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan

Use the Chained geometry method to create a multi-segment Curtain Wall based on a reference line drawn as a chained polyline. For each segment of a chained Curtain Wall, you can set up a separate Scheme, with a distinct pattern for each. In this example, we will place a chained Curtain Wall along a more complex slab contour.
Activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Chained geometry method from the Info Box:
799
Virtual Building
Trace the outline of the slab to create the Curtain Wall reference line, using the same pet palette controls as when drawing a polyline. Double-click to complete the reference line.
Click with the sun cursor to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. In the appearing Place Curtain Wall dialog, enter the Curtain Wall height. Here, we will enter 6200 mm. For a chained Curtain Wall, you cannot set a slant angle; it will always be vertical. Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window Click Place to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed.
The result: a single Curtain Wall with three Base Surfaces, based on a three-segment Reference Line.
800
Virtual Building
A Frame is always placed at the place where two adjacent segments are joined. Such a Frame cannot be deleted. (If you wish, you can set its type to Invisible, by selecting the Frame in Edit mode and adjusting its Type in Frame Settings.)
A Chained Curtain Wall has as many Schemes as it has segments: you can select one Scheme at a time and customize each Scheme separately.
Make any changes in the Grid Pattern, or modify the Grid Patterns origin. The selected Scheme is now a Custom Scheme. See also Edit Grid Pattern and Position.
801
Virtual Building
Click OK to apply the changes.
To edit the Curtain Walls individual Members using the Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Curtain Wall and click the Edit button. (If you select the Curtain Wall in the Floor Plan or Section/Elevation, this is the Edit in 3D button.)
Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window

With the Curtain Wall tool active in the 3D window, the Info Box provides the following options for defining the Curtain Walls input plane:
Default: Use the default input plane in the 3D window, which is the same input plane - Project Zero or the User Origin - you use when working with any other tool in the 3D window.
802
Virtual Building
Intelligent: Use one of the following intelligent methods to define an input plane by a series of clicks: Surface: Click any surface: the plane of the surface will be your input plane. Edge plus point: Click any edge (mercedes cursor) to define a line.
A plane appears on screen, rotating around the line as its axis. Then click a point (arrow cursor) to fix the input plane.
Point plus edge: This is just the reverse of the method above. Click a point, then an edge to define the input plane. Three points: Click any three points to define the input plane.
Horizontal: Click on a point to place a horizontal input plane at that point.
Vertical: Click on a point to place a vertical input plane at that point.
803
Virtual Building
Normal: Define a slanted input plane by defining a vector that is perpendicular (normal) to the desired plane. 1) Click two points to define the normal vector to the input plane, or Click on an edge to define the normal vector to the input plane 2) Then click a point through which the input plane will run. For an example, see Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane.
Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall in the 3D Window

In the 3D window, the process is the same as in the Floor Plan. However, the feedback is different. In the 3D window, the default Curtain Wall input plane is the same as the current 3D input plane (Project Zero, or the User Origin). To define other input planes, see Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Polyline - Single geometry method and the Default Input Plane from the Info Box.
Click to begin drawing the Curtain Wall Reference Line. No matter where you click, the input plane is fixed, and indicated by a temporary grid. Any Reference Line you now draw will be placed on this input plane. In our example:
Click at the two front corners of the building to define the Reference Line length. With the Sun cursor, click on either side of the Reference Line to define the outside of the Curtain Wall.
804
Virtual Building
The Place Curtain Wall dialog box appears:
By default, both the top and the bottom height values are measured to the Reference Line, and the Curtain Wall will be perpendicular to the Input Plane, but you can choose a different reference level using the pop-up:
Note: The three icons in the Positioning part of the Place Curtain Wall dialog box give you three different methods for defining the Curtain Wall height. For details, see Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window Click Place. View the result.
805
Virtual Building
Draw Curtain Wall Boundary in the 3D Window

We start with the following building model. We will create a Curtain Wall whose Boundary runs along the opening on the buildings southern face. To do this, we will use the Boundary geometry method in the 3D Window.
In the 3D window, the default Curtain Wall input plane is the same as the current 3D input plane. However, you can use a different Input Plane to make input easier. For more information, see Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. In this example, we will use the Intelligent Plane Input to define the plane that is perpendicular to the slab. With the Curtain Wall tool active, choose the Boundary geometry method and the Intelligent Input Plane Method from the Info Box.
Now you must define the Input Plane by a series of clicks. Here, click the slab edge with the Mercedes cursor (indicating an edge) to define a line. As feedback, an input plane appears in the window, rotating (as you move the cursor) around the line you clicked.
806
Virtual Building
Next, click the upper corner of the building with the Arrow cursor to define the input planes final position.
Now click to begin drawing the desired Curtain Wall Boundary on the input plane, clicking at each node as when drawing any polyline. Note: The Reference Line of this Curtain Wall is the first Boundary segment you draw. Double-click or click with the Hammer cursor to close the polygon. When the Sun cursor appears, click on the polygon surface: the outside of the Curtain Wall will face toward you. View the result.
807
Virtual Building
Create a Half-Cylinder Curtain Wall in the 3D Window

We will place a half-cylinder Curtain Wall on a slab in the 3D window. Choose the Radius and Axis geometry method and the Horizontal Input plane method
Click on the slab to place a corresponding horizontal input plane.
Now locate the midpoint of the slab and click once: the axis of our half-cylinder will run through this point.
Hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor to the far end of the slab, then click to define the half-cylinders radius. The feedback helps you visualize the structure.
Now move the cursor to define the extruded length of the Curtain Wall, then click to complete the Curtain Wall.
808
Virtual Building
See the result in 3D.
Extrude Curtain Wall from a Slanted Input Plane

When creating a flat Curtain Wall, it is extruded from your input line in a perpendicular direction. The input plane is ordinarily either vertical or horizontal. However, in the 3D Window, you can define any input plane. See Define Curtain Wall Input Plane in 3D Window. Consider the following model in 3D:
Suppose you want to draw the Curtain Wall so that it is extruded perpendicularly to an input plane which corresponds to the shape of the building. You need an input plane perpendicular to the buildings slant, rather than to the ground. To achieve this, activate the Curtain Wall tool and choose the Single geometry method combined with the Normal Vector input plane method:
809
Virtual Building
In the 3D window, draw a Normal Vector corresponding to the slanted shape of the building (you want the input plane to be perpendicular to this vector). Here, we draw the vector joining the southwest corners of the top and bottom slabs:
When you complete the normal vector, an input plane appears which is perpendicular to it.
Click anywhere to place the input plane: its angle will define the Curtain Walls extrusion from the input line.
810
Virtual Building
Now you are ready to draw the input line. The input line (as indicated by the rubberband line) is constrained and is projected perpendicularly to the input plane. Click at the two points where you want the Curtain Wall to begin and end: in our case, at the two front corners of any of the slabs.
The Sun cursor appears. Click below the input line to define the outside of the Curtain Wall. The Place Curtain Wall dialog box appears. Define the height of the Curtain Wall at its top and bottom. We enter 0 for the bottom and 6200 for the top height value. The reference level is significant: if you would measure from the Reference Line, the bottom of the Curtain Wall would coincide with the slanted input plane, and both the bottom and top of the Curtain Wall would be parallel to the input plane. This is not what we want. Instead, choose Project Zero as the reference level for the top and bottom height values. This way, the Curtain Walls top and bottom will both be parallel to the horizontal plane at Project Zero.
811
Virtual Building
Click Place.
812
Virtual Building
System-Level Editing
Use System-level editing to set up or edit the Curtain Wall element as a whole, using a single dialog box. Open Curtain Wall Default Settings by double-clicking on the Curtain Wall Tool. Or select the Curtain Wall you wish to edit, and open Curtain Wall Selection Settings.
Click on the items listed in the left-hand tree structure to open any of the dialog box pages associated with Curtain Wall Settings. Use these dialog box pages to define general System (position, display) preferences, as well as options for the Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction and Accessory members. (Each option is presented in detail in Curtain Wall Settings in ArchiCAD Help.) Options set here will define the structure and appearance of subsequently placed Curtain Walls. Note: Once the Curtain Wall is placed, you can customize individual members of a selected Curtain Wall, using Curtain Wall Edit Mode. Modifications to Curtain Wall System Selection Settings will modify all affected parts of the selected Curtain Wall. For example, if you modify a Mullion Frames material, the material of all the Mullion Frames in the Curtain Wall will be changed when you click OK to leave the dialog box. However, Custom Frames are not affected by changes to the Mullion Frame settings. Note that Frame definition occurs on three different pages: Boundary, Mullion, Transom: this means that a single Curtain Wall will have three different default Frame definitions (or classes) at once. You can set all Frame classes to have the same settings if you wish. After editing the Systemlevel parameters of one of the three Frame classes), click the Uniform Frame Classes button at the top of the Frame Settings dialog box of any of the three frame classes. Note that Panel definition occurs on two separate pages: Main and Distinct: this means that a single Curtain Wall will have two default panel types (or classes.)
813
Virtual Building
You can set both Panel classes to have the same settings if you wish. After editing the Systemlevel parameters of one of the Panel classes, click the Uniform Panel Classes button at the Top of the Panel Settings dialog box of either of the Panel classes. When you have finished setting up the Curtain Wall System options, use the Curtain Wall tool to place the Curtain Wall using any of the geometry methods. See Create a Curtain Wall.
814
Virtual Building
Graphical Editing of Curtain Wall

To edit a placed Curtain Wall graphically, select it in Section or the 3D window, and use the pet palette commands. These are analogous to the commands used to graphically edit walls. (Some commands might not be available in every window type.)
Stretch Height/Extrusion
As you change the Curtain Wall height, its thickness remains the same but its slant angle is adjusted accordingly. The Curtain Walls Reference Line stays in place.
Stretch Slanted Height

The Curtain Wall is stretched along its plane; its slant angle remains constant.
815
Virtual Building
Modify Angle
The Tracker fields reflect the new slant angle as well as the horizontal distance that the selected Curtain Wall edge is moved. The Curtain Wall is slanted, pivoting around its Reference Line.
Another graphical option is Free-Rotate Curtain Wall, available in the 3D and in Section/ Elevation-type windows.
816
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Display

Curtain Wall display in Floor Plan and Section views is defined in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel. Note that the Curtain Walls default Floor Plan Display option is called Symbolic with Overhead, which is unique to Curtain Wall Settings.
In Symbolic with Overhead, Frame and Panel elements are depicted using symbolic display. The Curtain Wall is displayed as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane, plus the Curtain Walls overhead part (the part above the Floor Plan Cut Plane), and its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. In Symbolic with Overhead mode, Accessories and Junctions are not shown at all on the Floor Plan, and only the Frame centerlines are displayed. The Symbolic or Symbolic with Overhead options are recommended for regular, vertical Curtain Walls. For other geometries, the Projected options will work better.
Model View Options for Curtain Walls

Go to Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. In the Options for Construction Elements panel, choose one of the two preferences for displaying Curtain Walls. These will affect the display of Curtain Walls in the 3D, Section-type and 3D Document windows only: Full: Panels and Frames are displayed in the Curtain Wall. Schematic: Only the Scheme (Gridlines, Boundary, Reference Line) is displayed.
817
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Edit Mode

About Curtain Wall Edit Mode Edit Mode Display Palette Select Curtain Wall Member in Edit Mode Multiselection of Panels and Frames About Curtain Wall Edit Mode
Any placed Curtain Wall instance is defined by Curtain Wall System Settings. However, you can use Edit mode and its dedicated member-specific tools to access and change the individual members of a selected Curtain Wall, or to add new custom members to it, using the same input, selection and editing methods as in the normal ArchiCAD workspace. In Edit mode, each member (Scheme, Frame, Panel, Accessory, Junction) has its own Settings dialog box and its own tool, enabling you to change settings and place new Members in this Curtain Wall. (You cannot create a new Curtain Wall in Edit mode; the purpose of Edit mode is to provide a deeper level access to the components of an existing, selected Curtain Wall.) Once you change the parameters of any selected Curtain Wall member in Edit mode, that member is no longer tied to Curtain Wall System Settings; it is a Custom member, and its parameters are locally defined, in its individual tool settings dialog box (e.g. Scheme, Frame, Panel, Junction, and Accessory Settings). Custom parameters are set in Edit mode only. Please note that changing the settings of any selected Curtain Wall member in Edit mode will NOT affect the Curtain Wall's System Settings.
Curtain Wall Tool Settings in Edit Mode

Tools can be accessed in the familiar way from the Curtain Wall Toolbox, available in Edit mode only:
Each of these tools has its own settings dialog, with the same appearance and arrangement of controls as the corresponding page of the Curtain Wall Settings dialog.
818
Virtual Building
The only difference is that member-specific Tool settings do not display the navigation tree seen in Curtain Wall System Settings, and they display a different header. Panel Settings, System Level:
Panel Selection Settings, Edit mode:
819
Virtual Building
For each selected member in Curtain Wall Edit mode, Tool Selection Settings displays the parameters of the currently selected member. If, for example, you have selected a panel of class Main, the top panel displays, by default, Class: Main Panel. These parameters are those defined in the System Settings: Main Panels dialog box. However, as soon as you change any parameter in this Selection Settings dialog box, the top panel display changes to Custom. Clicking OK will apply these Custom parameters to the selected panel(s) only.
A Custom member means that its link to the settings of the Curtain Wall has been broken, and any changes to the Curtain Wall Settings will not affect it. You can always renew this link by changing the class field back to System. To edit the System-level Settings without leaving Edit mode, click the System Settings command at the bottom of the Edit mode display palette. (See Edit Mode Display Palette.) When in Edit mode, you can save and load your Favorite settings individually for each tool, as with any other ArchiCAD tool. In the individual Tool Settings for Curtain Wall members in Edit mode, layer assignment is displayed but cannot be edited. All curtain wall members will be placed on the layer determined by the Curtain Wall Settings; layer assignment cannot be individually set for its members.
Enter Curtain Wall Edit Mode

To enter Edit mode, first select the Curtain Wall. Then click the Edit (or Edit in 3D) button which appears on the selected Curtain Wall. Another way to enter Edit mode: select the Curtain Wall, then the Design > Curtain Wall > Edit System command.
820
Virtual Building
Note: This only works if you have selected a single Curtain Wall. If the selection includes several disparate Curtain Walls, the Edit button will not appear, and you cannot edit individual members of any of them. When in Curtain Wall editing mode, the model is shown in the 3D window (even if the original Curtain Wall selection took place in a Floor Plan or S/E/IE window). The rest of the building (the environment) is shown in background mode. Note: If the contents of the 3D window do not include the Curtain Wall, you cannot use Curtain Wall edit mode. Make sure that the Curtain Wall can be seen in the 3D window before entering Curtain Wall edit mode.
Once you are in Curtain Wall Edit mode, the regular ArchiCAD toolbox is replaced by a special Curtain Wall toolbox. To edit the System-level Settings without leaving Edit mode, click the System Settings command at the bottom of the Edit mode display palette. When you have completed your modifications to the selected Curtain Wall in Edit mode, click OK in the Edit mode Display palette to save changes and return to the 3D window, or Cancel to discard changes.
(The same commands are available from a menu: Design > Curtain Wall > Finish Edit System or Cancel Edit System.) While you are in Edit mode, each Undo command will discard only the last modification. Right after you leave Edit mode, clicking Undo a single time will discard all the changes you just made in Edit mode.
821
Virtual Building
Edit Mode Display Palette

The Edit Mode Display palette appears automatically whenever you enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. To make editing easier, use the Edit mode display palette to show/hide the Curtain Wall elements as needed (click the eye icons to open or close them). You can click them on and off even during an editing operation. Right-clicking any of the components (e.g. Scheme) means that component will be displayed and the rest hidden. Note: The Edit mode display palette is a display-only editing aid and does not affect the construction or the output of the Curtain Wall element.
Environment, in this display palette, refers to the rest of the building model, which you can show or hide as needed to assist in editing. Preselection tags will identify the Environments model elements in dimmed form, but in Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can edit only Curtain Wall Members. Note: If you have trouble identifying the edges of these model elements shown as the Environment, try switching on the Draft or Best Contours option in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings.
822
Virtual Building
Select Curtain Wall Member in Edit Mode

Use the selection tools to select any member(s) of the Curtain Wall. To select all instances of any of the members, activate the tool and click Ctrl+A. For example, to select the Scheme, activate the Scheme tool and click Ctrl+A: all parts of the Scheme (Grid lines, the Boundary and the Reference Line) are now selected. If you also turn off the display of Frames and Panels (by clicking the eye icons in the Edit Mode Display palette), the Scheme is now easy to edit.
Note: In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can use the Marquee to limit the scope of the Find and Select Elements function - to find certain Curtain Wall members either inside or outside the Marquee.
Multiselection of Panels and Frames

When you select a single Panel or Frame of a Curtain Wall in Edit mode, an editing aid called a Grip appears. The Grip appears at the same time as the pre-selection Info Tag. The Grip gives you a shortcut for selecting multiple Frames or panels, based on the Curtain Wall Grid.
823
Virtual Building
When selecting a Frame, you can click one of two buttons on the Grip: the button with the single line will select all the Frames along the full gridline underlying the selected Frame:
the button displaying multiple parallel lines will select all the Frames that are parallel to the selected Frame segment.
When selecting a Panel, the Grip selection shortcut enables you to select all Panels along either the grids primary direction or its secondary direction.
824
Virtual Building
Edit Grid
To edit a selected Curtain Wall Grid or individual Gridline, you must use Curtain Wall Edit mode. Available operations include: Move or delete a selected Gridline Rotate all the Gridlines of one of the Grid directions Rotate or Move the Grid as a whole Note: Rotate Grid is not available for cylinder-based or Chained Curtain Walls. Add a new Gridline Note that moving or rotating a Grid, or one or more Gridlines, means that the Frame(s) assigned to that Grid or Gridline are moved or rotated along with it. Deleting a Gridline will delete the Frame on it. The Panel(s) will change in size to conform to the resulting new Frame pattern. To make editing the Grid easier in Edit mode, make sure that the Scheme is visible (and turn off the other members visibility as needed).
Edit Grid Pattern and Position Move Grid Line Move Grid Rotate Parallel Grid Lines Rotate Entire Grid Delete a Gridline Add a New Gridline
825
Virtual Building
Edit Grid Pattern and Position

In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can customize the Curtain Walls Grid Pattern by editing Scheme Settings. As soon as you edit any aspect of the Curtain Walls Scheme Settings, that Scheme becomes Custom, rather than System-defined. See Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page: Grid Pattern and Preview Panel. To edit a Curtain Wall grid pattern graphically, go into Curtain Wall Edit mode. Make sure that Scheme display is On. (To make selection easier, turn off the display of Frames, Panels, Junctions and Accessories.) Select the Scheme, then double-click the Scheme Tool to access Scheme Settings. A Chained Curtain Wall has as many Schemes as it has segments: you can select one Scheme at a time and customize each Scheme separately. See also Create a Chained Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan. Make any changes in the Grid Pattern, or modify the Grid Patterns origin. The selected Scheme is now a Custom Scheme. Click OK to apply the changes.
Move Grid Line

To move an individual Gridline, select it with the Mercedes cursor (clicking any node will select the entire Scheme). Choose the Move Grid Line command from the appearing pet palette:
Drag the Gridline to its new position (it will remain parallel to its original position). Click to place.
826
Virtual Building
Move Grid
To move an entire Grid orthogonally, select either a Gridline or the entire Grid and use the Move Grid command from the pet palette.
If you defined the Grid origin as a defined point (as opposed to Custom Origin) in Scheme Settings, then the Grid origin is locked, and you can move the Grid only in its secondary direction. See Pattern position.
Rotate Parallel Grid Lines

To rotate all the Gridlines of one direction (e.g. all the Secondary Gridlines), select one of the Gridlines you want to rotate, then choose the Rotate Parallel Grid Lines command from the pet palette.
Note: If the Curtain Wall is Curved or Chained, you cannot rotate the primary gridlines, just the secondary ones. As with other rotation commands in ArchiCAD, draw a rotation vector or enter a rotation angle in the Tracker. Click to complete the transformation.
827
Virtual Building
Rotate Entire Grid

To rotate the entire grid, select one Gridline or select the entire Grid. Choose the Rotate Grid command from the pet palette. Note: Rotate Grid is only available for Curtain Walls having an infinite Base Surface (it is not available for cylinder-based or chained Curtain Walls).
As with other rotation commands in ArchiCAD, draw a rotation vector or enter a rotation angle in the Tracker. Click to complete the transformation.
Delete a Gridline
You can delete an individual Gridline in Curtain Wall Edit mode: Select the Gridline and press Delete. You cannot delete the Grid as a whole.
828
Virtual Building
Add a New Gridline

To add a new gridline, make sure the Scheme tool is active and you are in Grid Input mode:
Click on the place at which you want to place a gridline. Move the cursor around the point you clicked: use the feedback and click either of the orthogonal gridlines to place it:
829
Virtual Building
Edit Curtain Wall Boundary

To edit the Curtain Wall Boundary, select the Curtain Wall and enter Curtain Wall Edit mode.
Since the Boundary is part of the Scheme, make sure that Scheme visibility in Edit mode is switched to On. In this example, we have turned the visibility of all other Curtain Wall components Off, except for the Environment (so that we can see the walls behind the Curtain Wall).
Select the Scheme. Notice that the Boundary is indicated by a heavier line, compared to the gridlines. Alternatively, select the Boundary only (without the Gridlines) by simply clicking anywhere on the Boundary with the mercedes cursor. Click along the Boundary to bring up the Pet Palette, with its polygon or node editing commands.
830
Virtual Building
Edit the Boundary as needed. See Reshaping Polygons and Chained Elements.
Switch on the Frames and Panels, and switch off the Scheme, to see the new shape of your Curtain Wall.
Additional Boundary-editing possibilities are available in the Section Window. See Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section.
831
Virtual Building
Edit Curtain Wall Boundary in Section

In Section or Elevation, you cannot select or graphically edit the Curtain Wall Boundary, but you can use a set of commands to edit the shape of fills, then apply the edited fill shape to your Curtain Wall Boundary. These commands (Design > Curtain Wall > Boundary Editing in Section) are available only in the Section, Elevation and Interior Elevation windows: Extract Boundary to Fill Redefine Boundary from Fill Subtract Fill from Boundary Add Fill to Boundary Open an Elevation which displays an existing Curtain Wall. Select the Curtain Wall.
Use Design > Curtain Wall > Boundary Editing in Section > Extract Boundary to Fill. This will create a fill that is in the same shape as the Curtain Wall Boundary. The fill will be in front in the Display Order, so you cannot see the Curtain Wall for now.
832
Virtual Building
Now you can edit the Fill polygon using any of the applicable pet palette commands. This Fill represents the desired shape of your Curtain Wall Boundary. Here we offset all edges of the fill by 350 millimeters, using the Offset All Edges command (available from the pet palette reached by clicking on the node of a selected polygon.)
After editing the fill polygon, use the Design > Curtain Wall >Boundary Editing in Section > Redefine Boundary from Fill command, then click on the Curtain Wall. The Curtain Wall Boundary is redefined to match the Fill Boundary. Delete the Fill and view your edited Curtain Wall.
Other Curtain Wall Editing Possibilities in Section Window

Activate the Fill tool and draw any shape on the Curtain Wall surface. Use Design > Curtain Wall > Boundary Editing in Section > Subtract Fill from Boundary, or Add Fill to Boundary. The Curtain Wall Boundary is modified accordingly. See also Adding and Subtracting Polygonal Shapes.
833
Virtual Building
Add Additional Curtain Wall Boundary

A single Curtain Wall can include several Boundaries. The advantage is that you can create several separate shapes or sections within a single Curtain Wall, yet use an identical Scheme for all of them. In our example, we wish to place a Curtain Wall on the south facade of this building: a single Curtain Wall, using uniform Scheme Settings, but in two separate parts. 1) Draw a straight Curtain Wall on one of the surfaces using the usual methods.
2) Select the Curtain Wall and go into Edit mode. Make sure that the Environment display option is switched On. 3) Select the Scheme tool and the Boundary Input method.
Now click on the desired Curtain Wall segment in which you wish to draw. (This is relevant for Chained Curtain Walls, which have multiple segments. In our example, there is only one Curtain Wall segment, but you must click anyway.)
834
Virtual Building
4) Now start drawing a new Boundary. You are drawing on the Base Surface of the currently edited Curtain Wall. Note: Because the Base Surface of any Curtain Wall can be infinite in one or more directions, you always have space to draw any number of new Boundaries while still working on the same single original Curtain Wall.
5) Complete the new Boundary. 6) View the result, with the Scheme displayed. Note that the Scheme has been extended to accommodate the new Boundary.
7) Try editing a selected Grid line, or edit the Panel pattern. Note that both parts of the Curtain Wall are handled in sync, because they are built upon a single Base Surface and a single Scheme.
835
Virtual Building
Edit Curtain Wall Reference Line

To edit the Curtain Wall Reference Line, select the Curtain Wall, then click the Reference Line to edit it. You can only select and edit the Reference line if it is on a plane that is perpendicular to the model view. (In Curtain Wall Edit mode, make sure that Scheme visibility in Edit mode is switched to On, since the Reference Line is part of the Scheme.) Click to bring up the Pet Palette, with its line editing commands.
Edit the Reference Line as needed. For information on editing lines, see Lines and Curve/Straighten Element Edge. Editing the Reference Line will change the shape of the Curtain Wall Base Surface. (Grid lines, Boundary, Panels and Frames will be modified accordingly.) Notice in our example that the Reference line is at the bottom and offset from the Curtain Wall.
836
Virtual Building
In our example, we change our straight Curtain Wall to a curved one by editing the Reference Line:
The result:
837
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Frames

About Curtain Wall Frames Frame Types Customize an Individual Frame Add New Frame to Curtain Wall Copy Cell Pattern Frame Intersections Create Common Frame for Adjacent Curtain Walls About Curtain Wall Frames
When ArchiCAD creates the Curtain Wall, it will place Frames at predefined locations. You can define three types (classes) of Frames for any Curtain Wall: Boundary Frame; Mullion Frame; Transom Frame. The properties of the Boundary, Mullion and Transom Frame classes are defined in the respective dialog boxes of Curtain Wall Settings. If you change any property of the Boundary, Mullion or Transom classes for a selected Curtain Wall, then every Frame in that class will change to reflect these changed settings. See Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom). Frames are placed along the Grid when you create the Curtain Wall. If you move or delete a gridline, you move or delete the Frame. (In Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can place additional Frames independent of the Grid.) In a multi-segment (Chained) Curtain Wall, a Frame is always placed at the place where two adjacent segments are joined. Such a Frame cannot be deleted. Boundary Frames are placed along the Curtain Wall Boundary. Mullion and Transom Frames are placed along either the Primary or Secondary gridlines.
838
Virtual Building
To define which gridlines (Primary or Secondary) the Mullion Frame should follow, use the control in Curtain Wall System Settings: Member Placement panel:
The Transom Frames will follow the other gridlines (in this case, the Secondary Gridlines.) For example, in this image, the Frames in the Boundary class are red; the Frames in the Mullion class (coinciding with the Primary Gridlines) are blue; and the Frames in the Transom class (coinciding with the Secondary Gridlines) are green.
The Frames in each class are linked to the settings for each class, defined in Curtain Wall Settings. This allows you to use Frame sets with varying specifications appropriate Frames positions in the structure. Frame class properties can be changed all at once, using the Frame class settings pages. In addition, when in Curtain Wall Edit mode, you can reassign selected Frames to take on the properties of a different class, or you can define custom properties for any number of selected individual Frames. Thus, to modify all the Boundary Frames in the Curtain Wall at once, just select the Curtain Wall, open the Boundary Frames page of Curtain Wall Settings, and make any adjustments. Once you click OK to leave the dialog box, all Frames belonging to the Boundary class will be modified accordingly.
839
Virtual Building
To determine whether a given Frame belongs to one of the Frame classes or is a Custom Frame, open the Curtain Wall in Edit mode, select the Frame in question, open Frame Settings, and view the dropdown at the top of the dialog box:
Frame Types
Choose the Frame Type in the Frame Type and Geometry panel of Curtain Wall Settings. Depending on the required level of detail, choose an industry-standard parametric GDL Frame, or a simplified built-in Frame prototype with rectangular cross-section.
The Invisible Frame exists as an object, but it is not visible. Use this Frame if you want two neighboring panels to remain two distinct panels without displaying a Frame between them. Invisible Frames are also appropriate when you don't want to burden the model with the Frame details, or when other structures (e.g. junctions) are used to support the panel connections. A seamless panel surface can be achieved if Frames are deleted from gridlines. Generic Frame: This is the most common type of Frame. A built-in rectangular Frame type, with a rectangular profile. From the outside of the wall, a "cap" is visible. Butt-Glazed: A built-in rectangular profile, used for inner support of a butt-glazed Curtain Wall surface. The panels will connect to each other in the front of a butt-glazed Frame, so the Frame will not be visible on that side (unless the panels are transparent or a gap is specified.) Modular Frame: This refers to a custom-created frame or cap profile object that you draw and save as a specialized component, using the process described at Custom Components.
Customize an Individual Frame

When a Frame is selected in Edit mode, you can Open Frame Selection Settings and change them Drag, Mirror, Rotate or Multiply the Frame Delete the Frame Note: Deleting a Frame is only possible if the two panels on either side of the Frame are both in the same plane. If the panels are not in the same plane, you must first delete the gridline 840
Virtual Building
which runs between them. On a non-planar Curtain Wall surface, deleting the gridline modifies the Curtain Wall geometry so that the panels are now in the same plane, and the Frame is deleted along with the gridline. Set the visibility to make your work easier (for example, turn off the visibility of everything except for Frames.) Select the Frame(s) you want to edit. See also Multiselection of Panels and Frames. Click the Frame tool to enter Frame Selection Settings. Make the needed changes. Note that as soon as you make any changes in this dialog box, the Class field at the top changes to Custom Frame. This means you have broken the link between the selected Frame(s) and the class to which it earlier belonged.
Click OK to leave the dialog box and apply changes to the selected Frame(s). For details on this dialog box, see Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom)
Add New Frame to Curtain Wall

You can add an additional Frame to an existing Curtain Wall. Such a Frame can be independent of the Grid, but the new Frame must be drawn so that its endpoints coincide with existing Frames. To add an additional Frame, enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. Activate the Frame Tool. Use the Info Box to define the Frame type and the Frame class whose parameters it should use (e.g. Mullion).
If you want the new Frame to use Custom parameters, open the Frame Settings page and adjust the parameters as needed. The Info Box will now reflect that the Frame Settings are Custom.
841
Virtual Building
Now draw a new Frame on the Curtain Wall in Edit mode.
If you draw the Frame on a Grid line, then that Frame will be attached to the Grid line. Moving the Grid will move the Frame. If you draw a new Frame that crosses an existing Grid line, the Frame will be segmented automatically where it crosses the Grid line. To select the entire continuous line of the new Frame (not just one segmented Frame at a time), use the grip to select new Frame segments that fall into the same line:
If you draw a pattern of additional Frames within a given cell of the grid pattern, you can easily copy those Frames to any other cell: see Copy Cell Pattern in the next section.
842
Virtual Building
Copy Cell Pattern

To copy the Frame pattern of any cell in the grid to another cell, first make sure you are in Curtain Wall Edit mode, with the Frames visible. Then issue the Design > Curtain Wall > Copy Cell Pattern command. Next, click in the cell whose Frame pattern you wish to copy.
Finally, click in the cell to which to copy the Frame pattern. The Frame pattern is duplicated.
843
Virtual Building
Frame Intersections
When two Frames meet in a Curtain Wall, the Frame with the higher priority will cut the other one. Frame Priorities are predefined for each Frame class in Curtain Wall Settings. Boundary Frames: Intersection level 15 Mullion Frames: Intersection level 10 Transom Frames: Intersection level 5
These values are not editable at the level of Frame classes. The slider shows the intersection levels of the built-in Frames (left to right: Transom - 5; Mullion - 10; Boundary - 15). However, you can change the intersection priority of any single selected Frame. In Curtain Wall Edit mode, select the Frame whose intersection priority you want to change. Go to Frame Selection Settings and adjust the slider to the desired level. Changing the Frames intersection level - as when changing any other Frame parameter - will result in a Custom Frame.
844
Virtual Building
Create Common Frame for Adjacent Curtain Walls

If two adjacent Curtain Walls Frames coincide and overlap, use this command to clean up the join. (One of the two overlapping Frames will be transformed into a corner-like Frame, and the other will be transformed into an Invisible Frame.) Select both Curtain Walls and use Design > Curtain Wall > Create Common Frames.
View the results:
845
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Panels

Panels are the flat surfaces - generally glazed - of the Curtain Wall. Panels are automatically placed between Frames and onto the Base Surface. When creating a Curtain Wall, you can define the parameters for two predefined classes of panels in Curtain Wall Scheme Settings. The Curtain Walls two predefined classes of Panels are called Main and Distinct. To define the arrangement of the different classes of panels within your Curtain Wall, toggle them by clicking the panel pattern in the Preview window of the Curtain Wall Scheme Settings dialog box: click any panel to switch its class from Main (white) to Distinct (grey) or vice-versa.
See Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page. The properties of the Main and Distinct classes of panels (type, material, width) are defined in the respective dialog boxes of Curtain Wall Settings. If you change any property of the Main or Distinct Panel classes for a selected Curtain Wall, then every panel in that class will change to reflect these changed settings. See Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct). Most of your Curtain Wall panels will be fixed glazed surfaces. However, you can insert objecttype Panels which serve as Door or Window openings. See Place a Door- or Window-Type Panel.
Customize an Individual Panel

When a Panel is selected in Edit mode, you can Open Panel Selection Settings and change them Delete the Panel Edit its parameters Select the Panel(s) you want to edit. See also Multiselection of Panels and Frames. Click the Panel tool to enter Panel Selection Settings.
846
Virtual Building
Make the needed changes. Note that as soon as you make any changes in this dialog box, the Class field at the top changes to Custom Panel. This means you have broken the link between the selected Panel(s) and the class to which it earlier belonged.
Click OK to leave the dialog box and apply changes to the selected Panel(s). For details on this dialog box, see Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct)
Place a Door- or Window-Type Panel

You can place a GDL-based panel which behaves like a window or a door. Some of these are predefined in ArchiCAD 13 and are listed in the Type pop-up list in the Panel Type and Geometry panel:
847
Virtual Building
For example, suppose you have a Curtain Wall like the following one, and wish to place a doortype panel into it:
Select the Curtain Wall and go into Edit mode. Now select the existing panels that you want to replace with a door-type panel. (Only rectangular panels will work.)
However, since you want to replace the two selected panels with just one door panel, first merge the selected panels by deleting the Frame between them.
848
Virtual Building
To delete the Frame, turn off the panel display so that you can see the Frames better.
Then select the unneeded Frame which divides the two panels. Delete this Frame. Turn the panel display back on (click the eye icon back open next to Panel in the list controlling Edit mode display) and notice that the two panels selected earlier have been merged into a single panel. Now select this panel.
849
Virtual Building
In the Info Box, select cw door 2 13 as the Object Type.
The selected panel is now replaced with a door-type panel, which you can open and close like other GDL doors. This newly placed panel is in neither the Main nor Distinct class; it is custom.
Note that this door-type Panel object has an editable parameter called Top Direction. This lets you redefine the top of the door by 90 degree increments in case you later free-rotate the Curtain Wall and the top of the door changes its position.
850
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Junctions

About Junctions Placement of Junctions Add New Junction to the Curtain Wall Customize an Individual Junction About Junctions
A Curtain Wall Junction is an optional structure that serves to connect panels to each other in order to support or (more often) to substitute for Frames, resulting in a seamless, more lightweight structure than the traditional Framework. Junctions can only be placed at either or both ends of gridlines. In ArchiCAD, a Junction is a GDL object. Its geometry and display attributes are all determined by their GDL parameters, which you can find in the parameter list of the Junction Type tab page. Additionally, placed Junctions can be flipped to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall, and set up with a custom ID for listing and labeling.
Placement of Junctions
In ArchiCAD, Junctions can be placed either one by one or automatically at every intersection. Choose either of these options in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Member Placement Panel.
When you choose At all Gridpoints, Junctions will be placed at every grid point at creation of the Curtain Wall. Automatically placed junctions are linked to the settings defined in Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions. Otherwise, the One by one option is applied: this means that no Junctions will be placed automatically, but you can place them one by one manually, using the Junction Tool and Junction Tool Settings available in Curtain Wall Edit mode.
851
Virtual Building
Manually placed Junctions can be configured individually with custom properties in Junction Tool Settings, or else you can apply System-level Junction settings (from the Junction page of Curtain Wall Settings) by setting their Class as System Junctions. Junctions are placed on the inside of the Curtain Wall by default. To determine whether a given Junction belongs to the System or is a Custom Junction, open the Curtain Wall in Edit mode, select the Junction in question, open Junction Settings, and view the dropdown at the top of the dialog box:
Add New Junction to the Curtain Wall

To add an additional Junction to an existing Curtain Wall, enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. Activate the Junction Tool. If you want the new Junction to use Custom parameters, open the Junction Settings page and adjust the parameters as needed. The Info Box will now show that the Junction Settings are Custom. Junctions can only be placed at either or both ends of gridlines. Usually, you will place a Junction to substitute for a Frame. However, in ArchiCAD, panels can only connect at Frames. If there is no Frame, the Panels will melt together to form a seamless surface, making Junctions unnecessary and difficult to position. For this reason, when you need to substitute a Frame with a Junction, first select Frames at a desired panel connection point and switch them to Invisible type. (Use the Frame Type and Geometry panel of Frame Settings.)
852
Virtual Building
Now click the hotspot in the middle of the connection.
Click to define which side of the curtain wall you want to place the Junction. It will be placed at the nearest panel connection point to your click. Moving the Gridlines (and hence moving the visible or invisible Frames) will also move the Junction. Only one Junction can be added to each Frame gridpoint.
Customize an Individual Junction

When a Junction is selected in Edit mode, you can Open Junction Selection Settings and change them Drag the Junction to another panel connection point. Delete the Junction
853
Virtual Building
Flip the Junction to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall (use the Flip button in Junction Tool Settings or Info Box):
Set the visibility to make your work easier (for example, turn off the visibility of everything except for Junctions, Frames, and the Scheme). Select the Junction(s) you want to edit. Click the Junction tool to enter Junction Selection Settings. Make the needed changes. Note that as soon as you make any changes in this dialog box, the Class field at the top changes to Custom Junction. This means you have broken the link between the selected Junction(s) and the settings of the Curtain Wall. Click OK to leave the dialog box and apply changes to the selected Junction(s).
854
Virtual Building
Curtain Wall Accessories

A Curtain Wall Accessory is an optional non-load-bearing member - such as a sun shade, a decoration strip or a canopy - attached to the Curtain Wall at any Frames.
Accessory Placement Add New Accessory to the Curtain Wall Customize an Individual Accessory Accessory Placement
In ArchiCAD, accessories can be placed one by one, in Curtain Wall Edit mode only, using the Accessory Tool. (There is no automatic Accessory Placement method.) An Accessory can be configured in Edit mode with custom properties, but you can also set Accessories to use the System-level Accessory settings from Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings. To determine whether a given Accessory belongs to the System or is a Custom Accessory, open the Curtain Wall in Edit mode, select the Accessory in question, open Accessory Settings, and view the dropdown at the top of the dialog box:
In ArchiCAD, an Accessory is a GDL object. Its geometry and display attributes are all determined by its GDL parameters, which you can find in the parameter list of the Accessory Type tab page. An Accessorys orientation upon placement is determined by the Frames.
Add New Accessory to the Curtain Wall

To add an additional Accessory to an existing Curtain Wall, enter Curtain Wall Edit mode. Activate the Accessory Tool. Use the Info Box to define the Accessory type and set Class to decide whether the newly placed Accessory's properties should be linked to the corresponding page of the Curtain Wall Settings (System Accessory), or not (Custom).
If you want the new Accessory to use Custom parameters, open the Accessory Settings page and adjust the parameters as needed. The Info Box will now reflect that the Accessory Settings are Custom.
855
Virtual Building
Now place a new Accessory in Edit mode.
Click on a Frame or a Frame endpoint - the endpoint closest to your click will be used as start of the Accessory.
Drag the cursor and click to determine the endpoint of the Accessory.
856
Virtual Building
Click with the eyeball cursor to determine the direction of the Accessory: outside or inside the Curtain Wall.
Moving Gridlines or Frames will move the Accessory along with them.
Customize an Individual Accessory

When an Accessory is selected in Edit mode, you can Open Accessory Selection Settings and change them Drag the Accessory onto another Frame. Flip the Accessory to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall (Use the Flip button in Accessory Tool Settings or the Info Box.) Delete the Accessory Set the visibility to make your work easier (for example, turn off the visibility of everything except for Accessories, Frames and the Scheme.) Select the Accessory(s) you want to edit. Click the Accessory tool to enter Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings. Make the needed changes. Note that as soon as you make any changes in this dialog box, the Class field at the top changes to Custom Accessory. This means you have broken the link between the selected Accessory(s) and the settings of the Curtain Wall. Click OK to leave the dialog box and apply changes to the selected Accessory(s).
857
Virtual Building
Curtain Walls and Other Elements

Connect Wall to Curtain Wall Disconnect Walls from Curtain Walls Curtain Walls and Adjacent Zones Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls Split Intersecting Curtain Walls Create Common Frame for Adjacent Curtain Walls Connect Wall to Curtain Wall
A Curtain Wall may be connected to one or more walls. Once connected, the wall is trimmed to the Curtain Wall. If you move or free-rotate the Curtain Wall, then the connected wall will stretch accordingly. Connecting a Curtain Wall to a wall can be helpful in adjusting wall geometry to a slanted Curtain Wall. To connect a wall to a Curtain Wall, select the wall(s) and the Curtain Wall. (You may select any number of walls, but only a single Curtain Wall.) Use the Connect wall... command from the windows context menu,
or the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect wall command. The Connect Wall to Curtain Wall dialog box appears. Each time you connect one or more walls to the selected Curtain Wall, use this dialog box to specify the exact connection point of the wall(s) to the Curtain Wall. The Outside value: this defines the point at which walls coming from the Outside direction of the Curtain Wall will connect to this Curtain Wall. The Inside value: this defines the point at which walls coming from the Inside direction of the Curtain Wall will connect to this Curtain Wall.
858
Virtual Building
Both the Inside and Outside wall connection points are expressed as offsets from the Base Surface, as shown in the Connect Wall to Curtain Wall dialog box.
The Default option is Curtain Wall thickness. This is likely to be your most frequent choice. By default, these Inside and Outside offset values total the Curtain Walls Nominal Thickness, as defined in Curtain Wall System Settings Geometry and Positioning Panel. In our example, the Nominal Thickness is set to 400.
For the purposes of offsetting connecting walls from this Curtain Wall, the Inside portion of this Nominal Thickness is equal to the Panel offset from the Reference Surface (in our example, 250); the Outside portion is what remains of the Nominal Thickness (in our example, 150). So, by default, Outside connecting walls will stop 150 mm from the Curtain Walls Base Surface; Inside connecting walls will stop 250 mm from the Curtain Walls Base Surface. If you want connecting walls to stop at points other than at the Curtain Walls nominal thickness, then click Custom offset. Then enter values for the offset from the Curtain Walls Base Surface to the Outside and Inside wall connection points. Click Connect. The eyeball cursor appears: click to define which end of the wall you want to connect to the Curtain Wall. As you move the cursor to either end of the wall, a double-arrow appears on the wall, to indicate that this is the end that will be connected if you click now.
859
Virtual Building
A wall connected to a Curtain Wall associates itself to the place at which its connecting end intersects the Curtain Wall surface. To redefine the offset for an already connected wall, connect it again.
Disconnect Walls from Curtain Walls

To eliminate the connections between walls and Curtain Walls, do one of the following: Select any Curtain Wall, any wall, or any combination of these elements. Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Disconnect all Elements command. All connections of the selected wall(s) and all connections of the selected Curtain Wall(s) are now broken. To break a particular wall connection to a particular Curtain Wall: Select the connected wall and select the Curtain Wall it is connected to. Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Break Connection command. The walls connection to the selected Curtain Wall is broken. (If the wall is also connected to another Curtain Wall, which was not selected, that connection will remain intact. The same is true for Curtain Walls: it remains connected to any additional walls that were not selected.) To break the connection between a particular Curtain Wall and all the walls it is connected to: Select the Curtain Wall, and do one of the following: Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Disconnect All Elements command; or Click the Undo Connections button in the Model panel of Curtain Wall System Settings. To break the connection between a particular wall and all the Curtain Walls it is connected to: Select the wall, and do one of the following: Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Disconnect All Elements command; or Click the Disconnect All Curtain Walls button in the Model panel of Wall Settings.
860
Virtual Building
Curtain Walls and Adjacent Zones

Adjacent Zones extend up to the Curtain Walls Nominal Thickness, as defined in the Nominal Thickness field of Curtain Wall System Settings (Geometry and Positioning Panel).
As with walls and columns, you have several options for defining how to calculate Curtain Walls which are bounded by Zones or which serve as a Zone boundary. Use the Relation to Zones popup in Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Listing and Labeling Panel to define how to calculate these Zones.
Split Intersecting Curtain Walls

One way to precisely connect two Curtain Walls is to make them intersect, then split off the extra parts, using the Design > Curtain Wall > Split Curtain Wall command. This command works only for splitting one or more Curtain Walls with another Curtain Wall. It is available in any model window (but not in Curtain Wall Edit mode). It is analogous to the Edit > Reshape >Split command, which works on other ArchiCAD elements. In this example, the two Curtain Walls intersect on the Floor Plan.
Select the curved Curtain Wall.

861
Virtual Building
Use Design > Curtain Wall > Split Curtain Wall, or the same command from the context menu.
Click on the other Curtain Wall. The eyeball cursor appears. Click either side of the curved Curtain Wall to define which part will remain selected after the Split takes place.
The curved Curtain Wall has been split into two separate Curtain Walls.
Now you can delete the one you dont need, and the remaining Curtain Walls are joined exactly. Repeat the process to split off, then delete the protruding part of the straight Curtain Wall.
862
Virtual Building
The result on the Floor Plan, and in 3D:
In such a case, the two adjoining Curtain Walls Frames may overlap. To remedy this, create a common Frame for both of them. See Create Common Frame for Adjacent Curtain Walls.
Example: Connect Slanted Curtain Wall to Side Walls

In this example, we have a slanted Curtain Wall placed between two straight walls, which overhang the Curtain Wall.
To trim the walls to the Curtain Wall so that the wall ends are parallel to the Curtain Wall, , we will use the Connect Wall command. Select the Curtain Wall and the two walls to connect it to.
863
Virtual Building
Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect Curtain Wall command, or the same command from the context menu.
The Connect Wall to Curtain Wall dialog box appears.
The default connection values assume that you want the walls to connect at the Curtain Walls nominal thickness. See Connect Wall to Curtain Wall. So lets try that: Leave the values as they are and click Connect.
864
Virtual Building
Then click with the eye cursor at the near end of either of the walls (this is the wall end to which you want to connect the Curtain Wall). (The temporary double-arrow helps you identify the correct wall end.)
The wall connection takes place. The walls are trimmed along the inside of the Curtain Wall, at the default location (in our case, offset from the Base Surface by 250 mm in the inside direction.)
View the connection point up close: the wall meets the inside of the Curtain Wall at its nominal thickness: exactly where the Boundary Frame begins. You may want a different geometry for this wall connection. Suppose you want the wall to connect at the outside limit of the Curtain Wall. You must re-do the Curtain Wall connection. Select the walls and Curtain Wall again. Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect wall command again to bring up the Connect Wall to Curtain Wall dialog box, where you can adjust the connection offset to a custom value:
865
Virtual Building
Since the wall is coming from the inside of the Curtain Wall, it is the Inside value which you will adjust:
The Inside value measures the distance between the wall connection point and the Base Surface, in the inside direction. If you want the wall to go past the Base Surface, as in this situation, enter a negative number. Here, we will use -50, so that the wall coming from the inside will cross the Base Surface (at 0) and keep going another 50 mm, stopping exactly at the Curtain Walls width thickness on the far side (the outside). Click Connect. View the result in 3D. Now the connecting wall is aligned with the outside face of the Curtain Wall.
866
Virtual Building
Free-Rotate Curtain Wall

You can free-rotate a selected Curtain Wall in the 3D window or Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation. Select the Curtain Wall and use the Free Rotate command from the pet palette. (The command is also available from Design > Curtain Wall > Free Rotate.)
First click and drag the cursor to define a line as the rotation axis. Then click to define the point from which you wish to begin rotating.
Click to complete.
867
Virtual Building
Attach Labels to Curtain Wall Members

There are two ways to attach labels to Curtain Wall Members. 1) Use the Label Tools Member Label type to create an associative label for any clicked Curtain Wall Member, in a Section-type window. Use this method if you need labels on a few particular Curtain Wall Members only. See Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls. 2) Use the Design > Curtain Wall > Label All Members command. Use this method if you need labels on all Members, or all of a certain class of Members. To use this command, select the Curtain Wall in the Section/Elevation/IE window. Click Design > Curtain Wall > Label All Members to bring up the all Members dialog box:
Check the boxes of all the Member types to which you would like to attach a Label. The Labels will be associative; if you have defined a default content for any of the Member tools (e.g. Junction, Frame), then these definitions will be used in the Label. Click Label to place the labels.
868
Virtual Building
Parametric Objects
About Parametric Objects Object Settings of Library Part Elements Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD Locating a Library Part Placing an Object Selecting a Placed Object Stretching Objects Customizing Object Parameters Parameter Transfer Between Objects Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots Create Patch Object Graphic Creation of Custom Objects Scripting Custom Objects Custom Components
869
Virtual Building
About Parametric Objects

An integral part of the ArchiCAD design process is placing objects into the plan. They can be placed in the Project using one of ArchiCADs dedicated tools (Object, Lamp, Door, Window, Skylight, Corner Window, Stair, Wall End, Curtain Wall Accessory or Junction) automatically by specific commands or Add-Ons (Markers, Labels, RoofMaker and TrussMaker elements) Objects are parametric. This means that you can freely configure the placed instance, using the Object Settings dialog box, or the dialog boxes associated with the object-type tools, without actually modifying the external file. For more information, see Object/Lamp Tool Settings. When you place an Object (as opposed to other elements in ArchiCAD), you are placing an instance of an external file located in an object library. ArchiCAD is shipped with a standard object library containing hundreds of preconfigured, editable objects (also known as GDL objects or Library parts). For the most part, you will use ArchiCAD tools to place objects from this standard library. Depending on their subtype, the tool that recognizes and places them can be either the Object tool or a dedicated tool, for example the Stair or Skylight tool. If you open a Project and the Library Loading Report palette or Library Manager informs you that any placed objects are missing, those items cannot be displayed on the plan. The place of missing library parts is indicated by nondescript spots on the plan. See Library Manager for details. See also Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts. You will find most of the objects you need for your project in the ArchiCAD Library - the factory-shipped library of standard objects. The objects are organized into folders and sub-folders to make it easy to locate what you need. The ArchiCAD Library is comprehensive, although localized versions of ArchiCAD libraries will contain special objects which are localized for the standards of particular countries. When you activate a tool that is dedicated to a particular Object subtype (i.e. Stair, Door), the Settings Dialog box accesses only the relevant part of the ArchiCAD Library. For example, activating the Window Tool gives you access to all the Windows in the ArchiCAD Library, but not Doors or Mechanical Objects. See also About GDL Object Subtypes. The Object Tool (chair icon) accesses a wide variety of objects that are not part of a dedicated subtype. These objects are divided into three main folders: Basic Library; Visualization Objects; and Add-On Library, and several sub-folders. As you can see by the folder names, the Basic Library contains all kinds of Furnishings (Beds; Chairs; Office Equipment, etc.); Decorations (such as clocks and vases); Health/Recreation items (such as a piano, a billiard table, a TV). Additional folders contain Building Structures (such as fences and moldings); Special Constructions (such as fireplaces and shutters); Mechanical Elements (such as air conditioners and elevators); and 2D Elements (such as electric and graphic symbols.)
870
Virtual Building
The Visualization folder contains Site improvements (e.g. trees) and objects depicting People and Vehicles. All of these files can be opened in ArchiCAD with the File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object command and they can be created in ArchiCAD with the File > Libraries and Objects > New Object command. You can also create objects graphically, using other ArchiCAD elements, and then saving them as an Object file. (See Graphic Creation of Custom Objects.)
871
Virtual Building
Object Settings of Library Part Elements

The Object Settings dialog boxes of Library Part type elements consist of two parts: On the left, the browser area allows you to locate single library parts corresponding to the active tool in the loaded libraries, either by browsing or by entering search terms to find a library part by name.
Double-click the splitter bar between the two panels to open/close the browser area (or click the black arrow at the top of the splitter bar). If you have stretched the dialog box horizontally, you can move the splitter bar horizontally to rearrange the dialog box. If you select an object (not a folder) in the browser area, its settings appear on the right-hand side of the dialog box. That objects settings will remain in the right side of the dialog box even if you use the browser to look through library objects on the left. To again return the browser to the status in which it shows currently selected objects place in the library hierarchy, click the Show in library command, accessible by clicking the black arrow next to the object name in the Preview and Positioning Panel.
The right-hand side of the dialog box contains settings panels.
872
Virtual Building
In the Preview and Positioning Panel (as in the Info Box), simple navigation controls allowing you to go the previous and next element in the active library set without having to use the browser area.
As with all other GDL Object type elements, the Custom Settings panel is only active if the chosen object contains a user interface script. For descriptions of each control in this dialog box, see Object/Lamp Tool Settings.
873
Virtual Building
Where to Find Objects for Use in ArchiCAD

The standard ArchiCAD library, shipped as part of your program, contains hundreds of predefined standard objects. Using ArchiCADs Library Manager, you can load additional libraries or add individual library parts as embedded objects at any time. You can also access libraries from BIM Servers. On the Internet, you will find a growing number of websites dedicated to GDL Objects, such as the Object Depository (ArchiCAD-talk.graphisoft.com/object_depository.php) or ObjectsOnLine (www.objectsonline.com). The GRAPHISOFT website (www.graphisoft.com) contains a directory of such locations. The GDL Web Control Add-On (www.graphisoft.com/products/ArchiCAD/ object_technology/downloads) allows you to select GDL Objects (Library Parts) from your web browser, and then drag & drop the objects directly into ArchiCAD Projects or into the Object Settings dialog box. Note: This function works if this plug-in has been correctly installed in your web browsers plug-ins folder.
On the site containing GDL Objects, choose the one that best suits your needs, and right-click on it (Windows) or click on it while holding the Ctrl key down (MacOS). Choose Save Object from the context menu that is displayed. These objects are automatically added to the Library Managers Embedded Objects folder. A number of third party programs or Add-Ons let you create or edit GDL Objects. These objects contain GDL scripts as well as other, application dependent data. Consult your dealer for availability information. DXF libraries are widespread in the CAD world and cover almost every area of engineering and design. Many manufacturers offer symbols or models of their products in DXF format. ArchiCAD can easily import these libraries. You can use existing elements within ArchiCAD to create and save custom objects. For more information, see Graphic Creation of Custom Objects. If you have very specific needs and no preconfigured library part will do, ArchiCAD provides a unique solution with its Geometric Description Language (GDL). Using this very simple programming environment, you can potentially script any building element in the form of library parts. For more information, see Scripting Custom Objects. You can sculpt in other 3D applications. ArchiCAD can import any 3D model you create, such those using Zoom or Alias Wavefront. These applications are multipurpose 3D modelers allowing shapes of free geometry. For more information, see add-on specific documentation in the Graphisoft Documentation folder.
874
Virtual Building
Locating a Library Part

Use the browser section of the Object Settings dialog box to locate the library part you need. (This function is available in the Settings dialog box of any object-type element: Window, Door, Skylight, etc.) The Settings dialog boxes of Library Part type elements consist of two parts: On the left, the browser area allows you to locate single library parts corresponding to the active tool in the loaded libraries, either by browsing or by entering search terms to find a library part by name. Note: By clicking the down-arrow in the center column of the settings dialog box, you can hide the browser area. This way, the dialog box takes up less space. The right-hand side of the dialog box contains settings panels.
If you select an element (not a folder) in the browser area, its settings appear on the right-hand side of the dialog box. A pop-up control in the top left corner of the settings dialog box allows you to arrange the browser area panels vertically or horizontally.
Three buttons representing different icon sizes allow you to display the contents of the browsed folder as large icons, as small icons or as a plain alphabetical list that always shows the full names of the elements.
875
Virtual Building
The browser area includes the libraries loaded with ArchiCAD. In the Object Settings dialog box, use the drop-down list to choose a way to look for a particular library part:
Choose Folder View to browse by library folder. Choose Subtype View to browse by object subtype. For information about Subtypes, see About GDL Object Subtypes. You can unfold library or subtype folders by clicking the plus sign (or, in MacOS, the arrow) next to their names in the browser panel. Choose the Find Library Parts option to locate library parts by name using keywords in a search engine.
Find Library Part Search Engine

1) Enter a keyword in the text field. Wildcard search characters may be used in the keyword field: Use ? (question mark) to denote any one character Use * (asterisk) to denote any string of characters Note: Library part names often include a number. You can use these numbers as part of your keyword search. 2) Refine the search by choosing an option from the drop-down list: Find all file names which: match keyword contain keyword begin with keyword end with keyword 3) Choose a library or set of libraries in the Search in list. For example, if you want to find the set of available bottom hung windows, just type in the phrase bottom hung into the Keyword field.
4) Press the Find button or Enter to execute the search. 876

Virtual Building
5) View search results. In our example, the following bottom hung windows will be displayed:
Search results are displayed in the Library Parts found window. Choose a format icon to arrange search results in one of three formats as described for the browser area.
Click on any library part icon in the Library Parts found window to view or edit its object settings at right. The library parts file path, in both its Library Folder and its subtype folder, are indicated at the bottom of the window. If you switch back to Folder or Subtype view after completing a search and selecting/editing an object, the same object will remain selected in those views.
877
Virtual Building
Placing an Object
Typically, you will follow these steps when placing an object: 1) Select the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and open its settings dialog box by doubleclicking the tools icon. 2) Browse for the appropriate element in the available library folders. 3) Adjust the default settings default to suit your particular situation or purpose. The external file is not affected in any way by the changes you make in the Object (Lamp, Door, etc.) Settings dialog box. 4) Click at the desired location and place the customized instance of the object.
Placement Anchor
The primary hotspot (objects placement anchor) can be defined at Object/Lamp Preview and Positioning Panel. Before placing the Object or Lamp, make sure that you have selected the appropriate hotspot to serve as the anchor.
Placement Aids
When the Object or Lamp tool is active and you place your cursor inside a construction window, the ghost bounding box of the element is shown and it follows the movements of the cursor. This also allows you to check the active hotspot used for positioning the Object or Lamp. You can switch this ghost box feature off in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
When positioning the Object or Lamp, you can use numerical input, gravitation, mouse constraints or the grids. This allows you to fit fixtures or furniture to corners, specific positions, or to each other with great accuracy.
Geometry Methods
Four geometry methods are available in the Info Box for placing Object and Lamp type Library Parts.
The Orthogonal method automatically places Library Parts in alignment with the normal grid lines unless you specify a rotation angle in the Settings dialog box before placement. To place a Rotated Library Part, first define a reference point by clicking any point Use the resulting rubberband line to place the rotation vector. This rubberband line can be constrained using any of the drafting modifiers or enabled Mouse Constraint angles.
878
Virtual Building
The Diagonal input method works like the rectangle geometry method used for polygonal elements. The Rotated diagonal input method works like the rotated rectangle method used for walls, slabs, etc. The last two methods let you define the A and B parameters of the Object or Lamp graphically. (For most objects, these parameters represent the Length and Width of the object on the Floor Plan.) Note that they are only available if the GDL Object can be freely stretched; some Objects may have fixed or proportionally set dimension parameters. The result of this technique also depends on the primary hotspot (anchor). As a rule of thumb, if a hotspot at the corner of the object is selected, you can define both the A and B parameters graphically. If the hotspot is along a side of the object, you can only define one of the parameters graphically and the other parameter will be taken from the Settings dialog box. When choosing a hotspot within the bounding box of the symbol, none of the parameters can be set graphically and the element will be placed as if using the simple orthogonal or rotated methods.
879
Virtual Building
View-Dependent Display of Objects

You can place Objects in both the Floor Plan and the 3D Window. It is also possible to place the 2D Symbol of Objects in a Section/Elevation/IE or a Detail Drawing window. Note that many 2D only elements have specific 2D Symbols for use in Floor Plan and Elevation view. Many objects can have a different appearance in 2D and 3D views. In Floor Plan view, the degree of detail is scale-sensitive and depends on the setting in Document > Floor Plan Scale. Choose the appropriate view in the Preview and Positioning panel before placing the Object. Some complex elements may take a long time to display in fully detailed 3D. A good example for this is realistic trees and other plants that consist of a very large number of polygons. In the default ArchiCAD Library, you can find different representations for the same type of Object according to usage. In the Object Settings Floor Plan and Section panel, the Show On Stories control (where available) lets you control the stories on which objects will be displayed: on its home story only, or in outline form on other stories as well. Plants, People and Vehicles can be found both in the 2D Elements and the Visualization folders. The People and Plants in the 2D Elements folder are shown in elevation view and are meant to be placed in Section/Elevation/IE windows. Using these simple representations saves time. Vehicles are also 2D only elements, but they have two or more representations, a top view for the Floor Plan and side, front and/or rear views for Sections/Elevations. A switch in the Parameter list allows you to choose between them. The counterparts of these elements in the Visualization folder are full 3D representations meant to appear in the 3D Window and especially in PhotoRendered pictures. The Visualization folder also contains a couple of Picture elements used for texture mapping. They are displayed as simple fills in shaded views and only appear in photo-renderings. If you place and activate a Camera, the picture will always face this camera to avoid distortion.
880
Virtual Building
Global Options for Object Display

Depending on which libraries your project has loaded, use the options in Model View Options for GDL Objects to assign global preferences for the display of certain objects and object parameters.
881
Virtual Building
Selecting a Placed Object

Unlike with walls or other elements constructed on the fly, the cursor can only snap to predefined hotspots of the object symbol. Objects can be placed, selected, and fitted to other elements by these hotspots. (You can also quick-select an object by clicking in its area, provided that Quick Selection is enabled in the Arrow Tools Info Box.)
882
Virtual Building
Stretching Objects
Objects, including Doors and Windows, can be stretched by their hotspots, provided that they have been appropriately defined, that is, on the nodes and edges of their 2D Symbol. Other hotspots cannot be used for stretching/shrinking. To check this, select the Object to display its hotspots.
You can either use the Stretch command or the pet palettes appropriate icon to stretch/shrink the Object by a node or an edge.
Note that you stretch the A and B parameters of the symbol, and not of its bounding box. Using parametric 2D scripts, you can easily create objects whose symbol size will not match the A and B parameters. If you make such a symbol, make sure that you define hotspots at the corner of an A*B sized rectangle. These will enable you to stretch that symbol. See also Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots.
883
Virtual Building
Customizing Object Parameters

One common characteristic of Object Type tools (Door, Window, Object, Wall End, Skylight, Lamp and Stair) is that their Settings dialog box includes a Parameters panel. You can customize many parameters in the settings dialog box before placing the Object. Placed Objects can also be selected and their parameters modified. For information on transferring modified parameters from one object to another, see Parameter Transfer Between Objects. Any Objects basic parameters are its Length and Width dimensions, called A and B in the parameter list. For example, if you set different values for A and B for a Round Table, you will get an elliptic table. You can customize other dimension parameters. In the case of the table, these include the overall height, the thickness of the table top, or the height or thickness of the frame below the table top.
You will notice that some parameters interact with each other. In the example of the elliptical table, you cannot change the number of its legs, which will always be 4. The Leg Number parameter field is greyed. On the other hand, if the table is round, the Leg Number parameter becomes active, and you can choose to have a table with one, three or four legs.
The number of legs can have an effect on the available leg types. These can either be set with a pop-up in the Parameter list, or picked from the Custom Settings panel of the object.
While most of the parameter changes are most spectacular in the 3D view of the GDL Object, there are some special cases which affect the plan view only. 884
Virtual Building
The Minimal Space parameter (included with many Objects from the default ArchiCAD Library) defines the area surrounding the placed object that you want to keep free. You can opt to display the minimal space of all objects in 2D views, depending on the global options you set in Model View Options for GDL Objects. Even the smaller details of Objects can be customized. For example the W1 Casement window element, you can experiment with different internal division numbers.
885
Virtual Building
Parameter Transfer Between Objects

After you have adjusted an objects parameters, Parameter Transfer offers a way to transfer your edits to a different object of the same type (e.g. transfer parameters between two window objects). Note: See the Parameter Transfer section for other ways to use this feature. To transfer parameters between objects of the same type, do the following: 1) In the objects Settings dialog box, make parameter modifications as needed, then place the object. In our example, we modify the Triple Sash window by adding shutters, then place the window. 2) Use the Parameter Transfer shortcut (Alt+click) to pick up the parameters of the placed object (here, the Triple Sash window).
3) Open the Settings dialog box. 4) Move your cursor to the next object you wish to place (here, the Double Sash window) - and press Ctrl+Alt (MacOS: Cmd+Opt). The cursor will change to a syringe shape.
5) Now click on the object to transfer the parameters. All transferable parameters of your originally modified object (Triple Sash window) will be transferred to the newly activated object (the Double Sash window).
886
Virtual Building
6) Place the object using the changed parameters. In our example, the Double-Sash window has inherited the parameters of the Triple-Sash window, including the shutters.
These modifications to the object are in effect only until you close the dialog box and place the object; the objects default settings will not change.
887
Virtual Building
Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots

Depending on their programming, GDL Objects can have smart editable hotspots (selection dots). You can recognize an editable GDL hotspot by its diamond shape. If you select such an object, click an editable hotspot and choose the stretch or Move Node icon in the pet palette (whichever is appropriate). Clicking an editable GDL hotspot produces the Tracker displaying the editable parameter. Click Tab to enter a value for the GDL parameter. The color of editable GDL hotspots can be set in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element information.
The diamond-shaped hotspot serves to alert you that in addition to graphical editing, direct numerical editing through the Tracker (for example, setting a windows sash-opening width by typing it in) is also available through that hotspot (provided that the applicable pet palette option has been selected). In the image below, the Tracker pops up showing the Sash Opening Width parameter if the Stretch icon is chosen from the pet palette.
The diamond-shaped hotspot and associated editing palette is also available in the 3D window. In the image below, you must choose Move Node from the pet palette to activate the Sash Opening Width parameter.
Note: The diamond-shaped hotspot appears only for editing options that produce a specific parameter editing possibility in the Tracker. No other type of function is necessarily associated with this type of hotspot.
888
Virtual Building
Create Patch Object

With the Document > Document Extras > Create Patch command, you can save the area enclosed by the 2D Marquee as a parametric 2D Library element. You can later use this to sticker your plans in order to provide the necessary detail in Floor Plan and Section views while saving time on modeling. To create a Patch, define a marquee area in the plan window, then select Document > Document Extras > Create Patch. The dialog box that appears will let you specify the location and name of the created element.
If you check the Place Patch Now checkbox, you can place the created element immediately after it has been saved. Note: Objects created this way will be enhanced with parametric behavior, specified by a special template in the ArchiCAD Library. If this template is missing from the loaded libraries you will still be able to save patches, but they will be plain stickers with no special intelligence. If ArchiCAD fails to locate the Patch Template, it will notify you, and you will have the option to either proceed or cancel the operation.
889
Virtual Building
Graphic Creation of Custom Objects

If you cannot find the library part you need, you can create your own GDL object. You need not do any programming; a few techniques using familiar ArchiCAD tools lets you draw and save a customized object easily, using elements as custom building blocks (regardless of their originally intended purpose).
Saving Library Parts from the Project File Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts Saving 3D Models as Objects Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File Saving Custom-Shape Holes or Niches
890
Virtual Building
Saving Library Parts from the Project File

2D drawings and 3D models made on the project file with ArchiCAD tools can be saved as library parts. ArchiCAD users dont need to have any GDL knowledge to make such elements. Objects generated with this method can be stored in Editable GDL Script or in Non-editable binary 3D data format. Users can modify the scripts of editable objects and they can even add new functions or parameters to them by GDL scripting. Each ArchiCAD tool has an equivalent GDL command that will be used in the 2D and the 3D scripts of the generated object. Project files can be saved as objects, doors or windows. Consequently the generated library parts will be available from the Object, Door or Window setting dialogs. See the next two sections for details on how to save library parts: Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts; and Saving 3D Models as Objects.
891
Virtual Building
Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts

Draw the desired 2D symbol in the project using 2D tools (line, text, fill etc.). Try to draw it close to the origin of the coordinate system if possible. Put hotspots on each point where you want the cursor to find the object. Select the desired drawing elements. Save the object with the File > Libraries and Objects > Save Selection as command.
Place it with the Object tool. Note that the created object is stretchable, but will be distorted after stretching since it was not scripted using parametrics. If you want to make further modifications to the object, select and open it with the File > Libraries and Objects > Open object command.
892
Virtual Building
Saving 3D Models as Objects

1) Create the desired 3D model within the project using ArchiCAD construction tools (slab, wall, mesh, roof etc.). For example, you can create a table whose tabletop is made from a slab and legs are made with the column tool. Try to draw it close to the origin of the coordinate system if possible.
2) Select the desired model elements and open the 3D window. 3) In the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings dialog box (Parallel projection), set the 3D view so that it will be the top view of the generated library part. ArchiCAD will automatically rotate the library part according to this setting. If your model is standing on the plan (as in the illustration of the table), use the following settings: top view, azimuth=270.
893
Virtual Building
If your model is lying on its side (see the chair object below) set the following: side view, azimuth=90.
4) If you do not want to show all the lines of the model in the 2D symbol, use the hidden line or the shading representation from View > 3D View Mode. 5) Select, then save the object with the File > Libraries and Objects > Save 3D Model as command. 6) In the Save Library Part dialog which appears, enter a name and choose the desired folder location for the object. Choose a Type: Object, Window or Door.
894
Virtual Building
7) Click Options for additional settings:
- If you do not want to include the redundant lines in the 2D symbol, check the Remove redundant lines from symbol option. - If you want to make further modifications on the library part, select the Editable GDL Script format. 8) Click OK, then Save. 9) Place the library part with the Object tool. Note that the created object is stretchable, but will be distorted after stretching since it was not scripted parametric. 10)To modify the object, select and open it with the File > Libraries and Objects > Open object command.
895
Virtual Building
Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File

1) Create the desired 3D model of the door or window in the project using ArchiCAD construction tools (slab, wall, mesh, roof etc.). The model must be lying at the zero level. The bottom surface of it (at the zero level) will be the exterior side of the window or the door. ArchiCAD will automatically rotate the generated object with 90 and create a rectangular hole around it in the wall. For example, the bottom of the slab (at the zero level) will become the outside surface of the window frame that fits to the exterior of the wall, and the thickness of the slab represents the frame.
For more information, see the Doors and Windows section of the GDL Reference Guide (a PDF document in the ArchiCAD > Documentation folder or in the ArchiCAD Help menu). 2) Select the desired model elements and open the 3D window. You can use any 3D projection settings. 3) Select, then save the object with the File > Libraries and Objects > Save 3D Model as command.
896
Virtual Building
4) In the Save Library Part dialog which appears, enter a name and choose the desired folder location for the object. Choose a Type: Window or Door.
5) Click Options for additional settings: - If you do not want to include the redundant lines in the 2D symbol, check the Remove redundant lines from symbol option. - If you want to make further modifications on the library part, select the Editable GDL Script format. 6) Click OK, then Save. 7) Place it with the Window or the Door tool. Note that the created object is stretchable, but will be distorted after stretching since it was not scripted parametrically. 8) To modify the object, select and open it with the File > Libraries and Objects > Open object command.
897
Virtual Building
Saving Custom-Shape Holes or Niches

You can create a custom shape hole in the wall from a slab or a roof that has an ID of Wallhole or Wallniche. Slabs and roofs bearing these IDs will not be displayed as door or window objects in 3D, but rather as a hole or a niche in the wall. (Wallhole and Wallniche are GDL commands used to create holes or niches in walls.) This method is very similar to the one used for saving rectangular doors and windows; the only difference is at the first step when you define the model on the plan: 1) Create the 3D model of your custom shape window or door on the floor plan as described at the previous section. 2) Place an additional element, a slab or a roof, that matches the contour of the desired wall hole or wall niche. Note: If you use a single slab as a wallhole or wallniche, make sure that it falls above the zero level. (By default, the top of a slab is at the zero level, which means it will not cut into the wall.) 3) Select this slab or roof and open its settings dialog. 4) Go to the Listing and Labeling panel and change the ID field to Wallhole if you want to make a hole and Wallniche if you want to make a niche in the wall.
5) Select the desired model elements and open the 3D window. You can use any 3D projection settings. 6) Select, then save the object with the File > Libraries and Objects > Save 3D Model as command. 7) In the Save Library Part dialog which appears, enter a name and choose the desired folder location for the object. Choose a Type: Window or Door.
898
Virtual Building
8) Click Options for additional settings: - If you do not want to include the redundant lines in the 2D symbol, check the Remove redundant lines from symbol option. - If you want to make further modifications on the library part, select the Editable GDL Script format. 9) Click OK, then Save. 10)Place it with the Window or the Door tool. Note that the created object is stretchable, but will be distorted after stretching since it was not scripted parametrically. 11) To modify the object, select and open it with the File > Libraries and Objects > Open object command. You can combine multiple slabs or roofs to create complex holes or niches. Since you can define inclination angle for the roofs, you can even cut non-perpendicular holes in walls.
For Further Information

Introduction to Object Making, written by leading GDL expert David Nicholson-Cole and published by GRAPHISOFT, provides an easy to follow introduction into Library Part creation with and without GDL.
899
Virtual Building
Scripting Custom Objects

If you want to go beyond all of the above possibilities, or if you need Library Parts for which the shape can be controlled with user-definable parameters, your next option is to use GDL and the scripting environment offered by ArchiCAD. When editing object parameters, you may wish to activate the Edit GDL Library Parts toolbar (Window > Toolbars > Edit GDL Library Parts) for quick access to frequently used commands. You can add it to your ArchiCAD menu structure using the Work Environment dialog box.
The creation of new Objects and the modification of existing ones is handled in a single environment: the GDL Master Window. In this window, you can add or edit the Parameters, Components, Descriptors, Scripts and the 2D Symbol of the GDL Object. Each GDL Object can include a scale-sensitive symbol representing it in floor plan view, a set of parameters defining the possible variations of the product family and a 3D script describing the complex geometry of the element. The 3D view of the GDL Object is generated from the 3D script that takes into account the parameter choices made by the user. Scripting in GDL is not limited to geometry; you can create elements with many useful attributes, including cost, availability, and texture. For information on how ArchiCAD projects handle custom attributes of imported GDL objects, see Custom Attributes of GDL Objects. Some GDL Objects do not contain any geometric data. For example, macros can be text-only files that other Objects can refer to, without needing to include the same script in all of these Object files, while Property Objects contain descriptive data only that is used to calculate element quantities. To modify an object already placed in your plan, select it, then choose File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object. The GDL Object Master Window appears.
900
Virtual Building
To modify a GDL Object chosen from a library, choose File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object and select the GDL Object you wish to edit.
Use the Files of type field to narrow the type of GDL Objects displayed. Select a file and click the Open button. The GDL Object Master Window appears for that object. To modify the opened object, use the editing controls of the GDL Master Window.
For Further Information

The GDL Reference Guide (see its PDF version in the ArchiCAD > Documentation folder or in the ArchiCAD Help menu) will help you learn to apply ArchiCADs powerful Geometric Description Language for dressing up your Project with objects, ornaments and other details of your own design.
901
Virtual Building
Custom Components
In ArchiCAD, it is possible to save elements created on the Floor Plan as GDL files, so that they become custom components of existing GDL Library Parts. For example, to create a customized door panel as a Custom Component, you can create a Slab which can then be saved as a custom Door Panel. All Doors that use Door Panel types (which have such parameters in their Parameter List) will be able to use this newly created custom Door Panel. t does not matter where the element from which you create the Custom Component is located spatially on the Floor Plan. ArchiCAD will automatically place it to their appropriate location in the library object. When applying the custom component, ArchiCAD will automatically resize it, if necessary. For example, you may create a Door Panel-type Custom Component that is 1000 by 2000 mm in size. If you have a Door that is 800 by 2000 mm in size, with its Trim Width 50 mm on all sides, the Door Panel will be resized to 700 by 1950 mm. The program will stretch/shrink all parts of the Door Panel Custom Component proportionately to fit this size. You can create custom components for all types of GDL elements (Windows/Doors/Objects etc.) This enables you to expand the number of options available in your libraries in case default options do not meet your specific requirements. Let us say you have a usual Door in your Library (D1 13.gsm in the example) and you wish to create a new custom Door Panel for that Door. Follow these steps:
902
Virtual Building
1) Using ArchiCAD Construction Elements (such as Slabs), create the Door Panel on the Floor Plan. In case of Door/Window custom panels, what you draw in the X-Y plane of the Floor Plan Window will be stood upright in the Window/Door library part (rotated 90 degrees around the X axis as described in the GDL Reference Guide). For other custom component types, this condition does not apply. The centerpoint of the resulting object is the center of the drawn elements bounding box.
Note: You should set the attributes (Pen, Material etc.) values of the drawn elements to the desired values prior to saving it. These values will be applied to the custom component when it is actually used later in the Project. 2) Select the drawn element(s) and choose the File > Libraries and Objects > Save Custom Components command.
903
Virtual Building
3) If you have no elements selected, the command will give you an alert to do so.
4) A Dialog comes up where you can specify the type of Custom Component you want to save it to.
5) Then specify File Name for the newly created file. It is automatically saved in your projects Embedded Library and available as a Custom Panel Type for Doors.
The saved object will be available in its appropriate location (defined by the type it was saved as).
904
Virtual Building
6) In the Door Settings Dialog, set the Custom Panel Name parameter to the desired value (if there is only one custom component defined, the parameter will be automatically set to that value). Set the Door Panel Style parameter to Custom Panel. Then press OK to accept changes.
905
Virtual Building
The newly created Door Panel is applied to your Door.
Custom Frame or Cap Profile for Curtain Walls

To customize the profile of your Curtain Wall Frame, or to add a custom Cap, just follow the steps above, using ArchiCAD tools to create the desired component on the Floor Plan. Save the drawn elements as Custom CW Frame (or Cap).
Select the Curtain Wall whose Frame you wish to customize. In Curtain Wall Selection Settings (either Mullion or Transom), choose Modular Frame.
906
Virtual Building
In the Curtain Wall Frame Settings panel, select Custom Frame and/or Custom Cap from the Type pop-ups.
Your saved custom objects are listed in the pop-ups below. Click OK to replace the selected Frames with the custom component(s).
907
Virtual Building
Dedicated Object Tools: Doors, Windows, Skylights, Wall Ends, Stairs

Doors/Windows Corner Windows Skylights Wall Ends Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects)
908
Virtual Building
Doors/Windows
The handling and behavior of Windows and Doors are quite similar, therefore they will be described together. In ArchiCAD, Doors and Windows simulate the look and behavior of real-life Windows and Doors. They are always placed into walls.
Doors and Windows cut real, see-through openings into the wall, so that 3D visualizations are more accurate and lifelike. However, glass panes are represented as solid shapes, allowing opaque openings for standard elevations. The glass material lets light in and you can look through the Windows and glass Doors in PhotoRendered views. The geometry of the Window or the Door is defined by the information included in the Library Part. While some generic elements allow a large amount of freedom in modifying the size and shape of the Window or Door before or after placing it in the project, more specific designs corresponding to real-life manufacturer catalog items can only be placed as defined, with restricted variation possibilities.
Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls Anchoring Sill or Header Heights Placing Doors or Windows Creating an Empty Opening Moving Wall Openings
909
Virtual Building
Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows

On the Floor Plan, Doors and Windows are, by default, represented by standard symbols. Attributes for the display of Doors/Windows can be set in the Door/Window Floor Plan and Section Panel. The Floor Plan Display pop-up has two symbol options: Symbolic and Overhead All. Symbolic: This is the chosen objects standard symbol. Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown with its overhead attributes. In case of a slanted wall, however, you might prefer a more realistic display of the cut window: choose either Projected or Projected with Overhead to see all parts of the window in a slanted wall. Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element, plus the element's overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Depending on the scripting of the Library Part (see the Options parameter), different levels of detail can be displayed depending on the Floor Plan scale.
The Door Options and Window Options settings in Model View Options for Construction Elements (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options) allow you to show Doors and Windows on the Floor Plan in full, with contours only, or as empty openings, or to show or hide their dimensions or markers.
910
Virtual Building
Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls

Windows and Doors can be placed in any type of wall, including polygonal, slanted and complex shapes. They can be fitted to slanted wall surfaces using the control in the Parameters Panel of Door/Window Settings. If your project contains slanted walls, use the Door/Window Opening Plane pop-up (Door/ Window Preview and Positioning Panel) to make the plane of your openings either associated to the wall plane or remain vertical.
Associated to Wall: the slant of the Window/Wall will be associated to the Wall into which they are placed. In slanted Walls, the Window/Door slants at the same angle as the Wall. In Double Slanted Walls, the Window/Door slants at the same angle as the side of the Wall into which the Window/Door was placed. Thus, if you move the Window/Door to the other side of the Wall, its slope will change accordingly. Vertical: the Window/Door will be vertical regardless of the type of Wall it is placed into.
911
Virtual Building
In Complex Profile Walls, the slant of the Window/Door is determined in the Profile Manager: use the Opening Reference Layer in the Design Layers panel to define the slant of Windows/ Doors set into the Complex Wall. For more information, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile.
912
Virtual Building
Anchoring Sill or Header Heights

Use the Door/Window Preview and Positioning Panel to set the height and width of a door/ window.
Every time you change a window/door height, the change will affect either the sill (the distance from the floor to the bottom of the window/door) or the header (the distance from the floor to the top.) Floor can be (depending on your choice) either the bottom of the wall, or a given story height. In the Preview and Positioning panel, the Anchor pop-up lets you choose any one of these constraints, to provide a point of reference for the height position of the Window/Door in the wall.
Sill to Wall Base: this is the default method. Sill to Story 0 (Current Story): the height of the Sill will be measured relative to the level of the Current Story. To choose a different Story, click the Select Story option and choose a story from the dialog box. Header to Wall Base: same method as the Sill to Wall Base options, but you must provide the Header height. Header to Story 0 (Current Story): same method as the Sill to Story 0 options, but you must provide the Header height. Select Story: If you choose this option (select the Story name from the list in the appearing dialog box), the chosen storys Floor Level will serve as the Anchor from which the Window/ Door should be measured. This option may be used, for example, when a Glass Curtain Wall is created and all individual panes must have their heights set to a common height.
Sill Height Using Subfloor Thickness

Use this control, in the Dimension Marker Panel of Door/Window Settings, to fine-tune the display of your sill height value if your floor level takes into account carpeting or parquet flooring, and your wall base is not at this floor level.
913
Virtual Building
ArchiCAD measures the height of a door/window sill from the wall base. But if you want the Floor Plan display of this value to reflect the real floor level, enter the thickness of this additional layer (the Subfloor Thickness) value in the Subfloor Thickness field.
ArchiCAD will still measure the sill value from the wall base, but the door/window marker will show a sill height value that subtracts the subfloor thickness from the entered sill value. For example, say the Wall Base is at -100 mm below Floor Level (Subfloor Thickness is 100 mm). The window sill (parapet) height is 1000 mm, but your effective Sill Height, for the purposes of construction documentation, is really 900 mm from the floor. So the windows sill height, as displayed in the Floor Plan marker, will show 900 mm.
Note: Entering a value into the Subfloor Thickness field does not affect the actual positioning of the door/window within the wall; it is merely an alternate way to display sill/header height in the door/window marker. Note: Sill height markers use dimension units set specifically for this type of value: go to Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions, and choose Sill Height Dimension.
914
Virtual Building
Placing Doors or Windows

Placement methods are defined in the Preview and Positioning tab page of the Door/Window Settings dialog boxes. The Anchor Point setting decides whether you will place the Window or Door by its centerpoint or its side. When you are satisfied with the choices made in the Window or Door Settings dialog box, you can start placing openings.
Insertion Points for Doors or Windows

Windows and Doors can only be inserted into Walls; they cannot be placed independently in the project. In the Floor Plan, you can place a Window or Door opening at any Checkmark or Mercedes cursor position on a wall.
To place a window click at the desired wall edge, then click a second time with the eyeball cursor to define the external side of the Window. Sill depth is always measured from this side.
To place a door, click at the desired wall edge, then click a second time to define the swing direction of the door. For doors without a German type reveal, sill depth will be measured from this side. For doors with a German reveal, sill depth will be measured from the opposite side. In 3D, you can place a Window or Door anywhere along the length of the Wall. In Section/ Elevation/IE windows, you can create new Windows or Doors only by duplicating existing ones using the Multiply or Drag a Copy functions. If you attempt to place a Window or Door near the end or top of a Wall, where there is not enough room to accommodate it, a dialog box will be displayed to warn you and give you the option of discarding the opening. However, you can still choose to place it.
915
Virtual Building
Creating an Empty Opening

To create a simple opening without placing a library part type Door or Window, click the Empty Opening button in the Door/Window Preview and Positioning Panel dialog box. Then go to the Empty Door (or Window) panel and enter the height and width of the hole. Click along either side of an existing wall.
You can obtain special 3D wall shapes by adding several empty openings to it, or by using Solid Element Operations.
916
Virtual Building
Moving Wall Openings

Use the Drag, Rotate, Mirror and Elevate commands to move wall openings (i.e. Doors and Windows). All these operations are available in the Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE windows and the 3D Window, for slanted and straight Walls only. Door/Windows do not need to be dragged by their hotspots. After selecting the Window/Door, choose the drag, move or multiply command, then click anywhere in the view to define the starting and ending points of the operations vector.
Windows/Doors may be dragged/moved/copied along with other Element types in one step. In the following image you can see that the Column is dragged. The Windows, selected together with the column, will also be dragged within their Wall by a distance that equals the component of the Drag vector.
917
Virtual Building
Windows/Doors may be moved across multiple Wall elements. You can drag or copy a Window from one Wall and end up in another Wall element.
Moving an opening across multiple elements works only if the Wall elements involved have their reference-side wall planes all in the same plane. If there are two vertical Walls involved, their Reference Lines must be aligned in a single vertical plane. If they are slanted Walls, their Reference Wall sides must align in a single slanted plane. The thicknesses and other attributes of these Walls, however, do not need to be identical; the Walls involved do not even need to be connected to each other. Also, when you stretch a Wall with the Marquee, the Windows/Doors included in the Marquee will also be dragged/copied, so they retain their position relative to the end of the Wall.
Dragging a Window or Door

If you want to drag a Door or a Window within the Wall that contains it without moving the Wall itself, select the opening individually.
918
Virtual Building
Rotating a Window or Door

To rotate Doors and Windows, select the opening and click the Rotate command (from Edit menu or pet palette).The selected opening will rotate by 180 degrees around its center (there is no need to draw any vector). Any number of openings can be rotated at the same time.
Note: Rotated text blocks, labels, dimensions and fill polygon area labels are always readable from the bottom and the right side of the drawing.
Mirroring a Window or Door

To mirror a Door or Window, select the opening and click the Mirror command (from Edit menu or pet palette, or use Ctrl+M). The pencil cursor appears. Click either on an edge of the host wall or outside the wall. The Door/Window will be mirrored (with its opening direction flipped laterally) along the axis where you click. If you click outside the host Wall, the mirroring axis is the line perpendicular to the Wall at the clicked point. (With trapezoidal walls, the mirroring axis is perpendicular to the reference axis.)
Mirroring can create an opening that falls entirely beyond the end of the wall. You can then select and move it in the same plane as the original host wall.
919
Virtual Building
Stretching Doors and Windows

When stretching Doors & Windows, you can use reference points outside the host wall. The endpoint of the stretch vector will be projected perpendicularly or orthogonally to the wall (according to the current Cursor Snap Variant in the Control Box) to define the new opening edge. This allows you to position a Door or Window with respect to an element within a room, or in another room, as shown below.
920
Virtual Building
Corner Windows
ArchiCAD has a separate Corner Window tool. The Corner Window Settings dialog box is similar to the Door and Window Settings dialog boxes. There is no separate object type associated with the tool; most of the windows in the standard ArchiCAD library can be placed using the Corner Window tool. Corner Windows are placed at straight wall corners.
When you wish to place a Corner Window at a wall corner, you can click anywhere on the wall: ArchiCAD will automatically snap the window to the nearest corner of the wall and create a mirrored copy of it on the adjoining wall. The second windows parameters and properties are identical to the firsts. Their angle and position are automatically adjusted. You can only place one pair of corner windows at any given corner. The angle between the two walls cannot be equal to either 0 or 180 degrees. The placed windows can be stretched manually and individually without breaking the link between the two windows.
Corner Windows turn into simple Windows if: You drag away, mirror or rotate any of the two placed Windows. The angle between the two Walls is changed to 0 or 180 degrees. One of the Walls is elevated (since Windows are part of the host Walls, the two Windows elevations become different). One of the connecting Walls is deleted or dragged away. For more information, see Door/Window Tool Settings.
921
Virtual Building
Skylights
Skylights are smart GDL Object type elements that can be intelligently placed in Roof type elements. Use one of the four geometry methods in the Info Box (Orthogonal, Rotated, Diagonal, Rotated Diagonal) to place the Skylight. The Skylight Object placed on top of a roof will be automatically inserted in the roof and adjusted to the correct roof slope angle, at the appropriate elevation, rotated to the correct angle (parallel with the roofs reference line). A hole will be cut in the roof. Note: The skylight must fit into a single roof plane. Skylight Objects are stored in the Dormers and Skylights folder of the standard ArchiCAD library and can be activated with the Skylight tool. The panels of the Skylight Tool Settings dialog box are similar to those of the Window/Door, Object and Lamp tools.
Placing a Skylight
Skylights can be inserted into Roofs in either the Floor Plan or in 3D view. In Floor Plan view, you place the skylight inside the outline of the roof. In 3D view, click on the roof plane - ArchiCAD will detect the location of the mouse-click and place the skylight on the roof plane. Skylights placed in Roofs behave quite similarly to windows placed in walls. For instance, when moving the skylight, its movements are restricted to the roof plane. If you modify the roof plane, for example by changing its pitch, the skylight object will follow suit.
922
Virtual Building
Wall Ends
The Wall End tool allows you to create a correct wall end profile with a single click. Activate the Wall End Tool. From the Wall End Tool Settings dialog box or Info Box, choose the desired Wall End object. Click on a hotspot at either end of a wall to place the Wall End.
Wall Ends are parametric GDL objects, similar to window and door objects. Wall End parameters (such as width and height) can be customized using the Wall End Tool Settings dialog box. Wall Ends are counted as objects in list schedules. Depending on its type, a wall end might reduce the walls surface or volume, but does not add to it. During a Trim to Roof operation, Wall Ends are handled as part of the wall, just like windows. (See Trim Element to Roof.) Wall Ends also remain in place if a Stretch, Drag or Split command is executed.
923
Virtual Building
Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects)

Use the functions of the Stair Settings dialog box to create and place a predefined stair object. Note: If you want to create and place a customized stair, use Custom Stairs with StairMaker. The ArchiCAD Library includes a number of parametric GDL stair objects accessible from the Stair Settings dialog box, which function largely like other objects.
Choose the Stair Tool and open the Stair Tool settings dialog box. Browse the loaded libraries for the predefined stair that suits your project requirement; place it as you would any other object.
924
Virtual Building
Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan

On the Floor Plan, Stairs are displayed as 2D symbols using standard architectural conventions. Stairs can be visible across multiple stories: Use the Show On Stories control in the Floor Plan and Section panel to set the stories on which stories the Stair should be displayed.
Use the Parameters and 2D Symbol, Arrowhead, Flight, Tread and Railing Types panels of Stair Settings to define the appearance of each Stair object symbol on the Floor Plan. These settings are described in Stair Tool Settings. Note the following special parameters:
925
Virtual Building
2D Detail Level
If you choose Scale Sensitive, then the amount of detail shown in the 2D symbol is scaledependent. Here, the same scale-sensitive stair is shown at 1:50 and at 1:200 scales:
If you choose Custom, then the Stair symbol remains the same regardless of window scale. In this case, you have additional symbol choices in 2D Symbol Type (see below).
2D Symbol Type
Use this control to choose a Symbol Type for the stair on the Floor Plan. Previews of each Symbol Type are shown in the 2D Symbol, Arrowhead, Flight, Tread and Railing Types panel just below the Parameters panel. The selection of available symbols here can vary depending on whether you have chosen Scale Sensitive or Custom in the 2D Detail Level control. Use the parameters under 2D Symbol Type to fine-tune symbol display. Note the following: Each Stair symbol has a Breakline which acts as a symbol cutting plane. Set the vertical position of the Breakline using the Breakline Position Height control. Visible and Invisible structures refer to the parts of the symbol that fall below and above the Breakline, respectively: you can set separate line types and pens for each type of structure. Show or Hide the Walking Line as needed. The Walking Line ends with an Arrowhead: choose an Arrowhead style with the help of previews shown in the 2D Symbol, Arrowhead, Flight, Tread and Railing Types panel just below the Parameters panel. Similarly, you have several choices for the Walking Lines Start Point. Optional text items for the Stair symbol include Numbering of treads, Rise and Run text, and UP and DOWN signs.
Story Sensitive Display

The Story Sensitive control (On or Off) is relevant if you are showing the Stair on stories above its Home Story (use the Show On Stories control in the Floor Plan and Section panel to set the stories on which stories the Stair should be displayed).
926
Virtual Building
If you turn Story Sensitive On, then a new set of parameters called 2D Above Home Story appears in the Parameter list:
Use these controls if you want the Stair to appear differently on stories above the Home Story. Lower and upper part refer to the parts of the symbol above and below the Breakline. The options you set here apply only to the Stair symbol shown on stories above the Home Story.
927
Virtual Building
Custom Stairs with StairMaker

StairMaker Add-On Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements
928
Virtual Building
StairMaker Add-On
StairMaker is an Add-On installed with your ArchiCAD program. There are two ways to create new stairs in ArchiCAD with StairMaker: Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements Note: To use StairMaker, it must be placed in ArchiCADs Add-Ons folder that is located either in the same folder as ArchiCAD, or in the System Folder (MacOS) or at the location defined in the Windows Registry (Windows). In both cases, you will be prompted to save the new object which will then listed as an Embedded Object in the Library Manager.
929
Virtual Building
Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type

You create a new stair based on a predefined geometry type by editing its parameters to suit your needs. There are 21 basic types built into the StairMaker application, which cover almost every standard situation, from straight runs to winders with or without landing and to spiral and circular stairs To design a new stair based on a standard type, activate the Stair tool, open the Stair Settings Dialog Box, and click the Create Stair button.
In the appearing dialog box, use the two top buttons to choose whether to build a stair or a slope. If you choose Slope, the symbols of those stair types whose geometry can be transformed into slopes will automatically turn into symbols of slope; all the other buttons become grey.
930
Virtual Building
The dialog box shows the standard stair types you can create with StairMaker. (The last button represents a Custom Stair you design manually with ArchiCADs drawing tools, and is always grey when creating a standard stair.) Choose the desired Stair/Slope type and click OK. The StairMaker editing dialog box appears, allowing you to edit the chosen stair type. This dialog box consists of six tab pages, accessed by clicking the appropriate large button on the left of this wizard-type window. Any modification you make on any of the tab pages also affects the other five.
Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) Structure and Landing (StairMaker) Tread Settings (StairMaker) Railings (StairMaker) Symbol Settings (StairMaker) Listing Settings (StairMaker) Check and Save Stair
931
Virtual Building
Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker)

Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Geometry and Flight Settings (top) button from the six buttons at the left.
The Stair/Slope Geometry and Flight Settings Tab Page contains preset values for the available parameters and a preview of the floor plan symbol on the right. The changes that you make on the geometry parameters are reflected on this symbol. Note that several controls on this tab page have lock/unlock icons. You should set the desired geometry and flight settings here, and then lock them. If you do not lock them, modifications on subsequent tab pages may cause StairMaker to automatically recalculate these values. If they are locked, then StairMaker will ensure that subsequent options you set are compatible with this basic geometry. In the picture below, for example, we have locked the height of the stair at 2800 mm and the number of steps at 16. These will never be changed, no matter what other settings you make on this or the other tab pages.
Set Stair Geometry

On this page, you set the main geometric parameters of the stair: the total height, the horizontal bounding parameters, the flight width, the length, the length of the walking line, as well as the 932
Virtual Building
number of risers, the form and the number of the treads in the winder range, the dimensions of the landings, the value of the arrival offset, and the closing angle of the flights. The available fields change according to the type of stair. You can add an optional top tread to the stair in the bottom section of this tab page: click the button on the right to add a top tread to the stair at top floor level as shown below. It may either have the same depth as the stairs other treads, or you can customize the depth of the extra tread by entering a value in the editable field.
If you leave the extra tread depth fields value at zero, the top tread at floor level will have the same depth as the other treads. To change the top treads depth, enter a positive value.
Define Tread Settings

Bottom right in the dialog box, Tread Settings are shown. By setting these parameters, you can define the geometry of the Treads or the angle of the Slope, based on the same geometry. To the right of these fields, the longitudinal section of the stair is shown, giving you instant feedback on your changes.
It is easier and more comfortable to climb the stairs if the sum of twice the riser and the run (2*Riser + Run parameter) is within the range of 60 to 63 cm, or 24 to 25 inches. To ensure this condition, you can define a range of values for the (2*Riser) + Run parameter in the Tread Settings section. The last parameter is not editable. It only shows the current value of the (2*Riser) + Run parameter.
933
Virtual Building
Note: Stair geometry definition is based on the (2*Riser) + Run rule. Every time you modify a parameter, StairMaker checks that the (2*Riser) + Run parameter is still in the appropriate range. In addition to this hierarchy, you may lock one or more parameters by clicking on the lock button. Locked parameters will not be modified. If parameters need changing, StairMaker will skip locked parameters and look for the next value in the hierarchy. If editing is not possible without changing a locked parameter or if too many parameters are locked, an alert will appear.
Break Line in Stair Symbol

Usually, only the lower part of a stair is displayed in full on the floor plan, on its home story. There is a double break line on the 2D Symbol of the stair showing where the stair is cut.
Note: The break line used for GDL Stair symbols is conceptually similar to the Floor Plan Cut Plane used for ArchiCAD construction elements, but the break line is unrelated to the cut plane. In the Preview picture in the Geometry and Flight Settings editing window, the endpoints of the two break lines can be dragged along the stair outline while the lines remain parallel. If the whole stair will be displayed on the floor plan, moving the break line will have no effect.
Editing the U-Return Winder Stair

Some of the available stair types have one or two winders. In the following example using the stair type called U-Return Winder, we will see how winders are handled. Note: Some other Winder-type Stairs available from StairMaker use a different parameter logic. As you can see in the Preview, a part of the stair is highlighted and all treads in the highlighted area are skewed. The highlighted section is the winder range for the stair. If the entire run is highlighted, then all treads are skewed with respect to the line of travel.
934
Virtual Building
Tread edges outside the winder range are perpendicular to the line of travel. (For a comfortable stair, the winder range usually includes at least the entire curved portion of the line of travel, so that non-skewed treads are all in the straight run section.)
You can change the extent of the winder section with the mouse. First move the pointer onto the stair (the pointer takes a form that may remind you of a spreadsheet editor).
Press and hold the mouse button while moving it along the stair. Some treads turn white as you make the winder section shorter at the end. Release the mouse button, and StairMaker will show the new outline of the stair. Make sure that you define a winder section without overly skewed treads.
935
Virtual Building
You can see that the treads shown in white are no longer skewed. You can also change the skewed state of a single tread by clicking.
For example, to make the nose of the bottom tread straight, simply click on the second tread. The first tread turns white.
The winder section is fixed on the middle tread of the curve, i.e., you cannot shorten either end of the winder range beyond this tread. If you shorten both ends of the winder range until the middle tread, you will see something like the illustration.
936
Virtual Building
In StairMaker, the tread edges before the beginning and after the end of the winder range are perpendicular to the line of travel. These two edges define a line of travel segment and an inside segment.
Enter a dimension for the narrowest tread at the stairs inside segment (s in the illustration below) using the parameter field in the Flight Settings section.
StairMaker will divide the stairs inside segment into treads as shown.
This value will be assigned to the middle tread of the stair run (or to the two middle treads, if the number of treads in the winder range is even). As an alternative to the standard winder, you can create a radial winder. When using this method, the edges of the treads in the winder range meet in a single point. You can select this method by clicking the Radial Winder button.
937
Virtual Building
You can change the location of the centerpoint by clicking on it. A dialog box will then prompt you to enter numeric values for the offset.
The location and the offset are displayed with dashed lines.
If the corner is chamfered or filleted, the offset is still measured from the imaginary corner. The offset at custom angled stairs looks like this. If you choose a U-Return Winder stair, StairMaker will automatically set the radial winder midpoint to the midpoint of the arced line of travel.
If you choose a Straight Run with winder at both ends, you can define the upper and lower extra length along the side of the stair. The angles of the first and the last edge of the stair depend on this offset.
Note: You cannot define radial winders for this stair type.
938
Virtual Building
Stair types with winders let you chamfer or fillet the corners of the run. To do this, move the pointer to a corner until it takes the form of a perpendicular sign.
Click on one of the stairs corner points to open a dialog box offering the three corner shapes available.
The Plain corner is the normal corner shape. When you start editing a new stair, all corners are plain. Choose the Chamfer radio button from the dialog box. Editable text fields appear where you can edit the chamfer length. Enter a value and click OK.
939
Virtual Building
Now fillet the other corner.
You can change the corner shape at any time. If you move the pointer to a chamfered or filleted corner it will again show the perpendicular sign.
See also Stair/Slope Geometry and Flight Settings Tab Page.
940
Virtual Building
Structure and Landing (StairMaker)

Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Stair Structure button (second from top) from among the six buttons at the left.
For detailed information on each control in this tab page, see Stair Structure & Landing Tab Page. The Stair Structure is set on the second tab page of the stair editing window. The content of this tab page changes according to the construction type of the stair. In the Structure section, you can choose among five ways to model the stair in 3D and edit the related parameters.
The following 3D alternatives are offered: Solid Stair with Treads:
941
Virtual Building
Stair with Carriages:
Stair with Stringers:
Treads only:
942
Virtual Building
Solid Stair:
The upper and lower slabs should be set to exactly join the Floor Plan Symbol within ArchiCAD, no matter which 3D alternative is selected in StairMaker, and even if a top tread at floor level is added to the stair.
Note: When the stair construction is changed, the fields for treads and nosing may change as well, according to the current construction options. The parameters of the stairs structure vary according to the selected type. These changes will also appear in the stair geometry tab page and in the parameters of the stair. In the bottom left section of the window, you can customize both the upper and lower structural and subfloor + finish thicknesses.
StairMaker automatically adjusts the stair parameters to these slab specifications. StairMaker automatically adjusts the stair height by referring to the top elevation of the connecting bottom floor slab as zero. If you use a separate slab for modeling the subfloor + finish in ArchiCAD, you only need to enter the thickness of this slab in the corresponding fields. When you place the stair in ArchiCAD, the positioning height in the Object Settings dialog box can be set to zero.
943
Virtual Building
If you do not use any separate slab for subfloor + finish in your design, set the subfloor + finish thickness to zero. You can set up the landing thickness of those stairs that have one or more landings in the editable text fields in the Landing section of the Structure tab page. StairMaker makes clean intersections at the bottom of the stair between the runs and landings if you click the Clean Intersections button at the bottom of the Landing section. The following dialog box will appear:
StairMaker cleans up these intersections by changing the thickness values of either the landing or the run. Select the desired option in the dialog box. Using the other set of radio buttons, you can choose whether the length of the landing is modified along the upper or the lower run. StairMaker recalculates the parameters with the new values, and the 2D symbol of the stair will be updated. If the stair type has two landings, your options affect the lower landing and StairMaker will apply them automatically on the upper one. In the Attributes section of the Structure tab page, you can define the pencolor used for the Stairs contour and the Materials of each of the Stairs sides in the 3D Window and PhotoRendering.
944
Virtual Building
Tread Settings (StairMaker)

Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Tread Parameters button (third from top) from among the six buttons at the left.
For detailed information on each control in this tab page, see Tread Settings Tab Page. The properties of the individual treads of the stair are set on the third tab page of the Stair editing window accessed by clicking the third button from the top on the left. The content of the Tread Settings tab page changes according to the current stair Structure settings. Note: This option is not available if the stair structure has been set to Solid Stair or Solid Slope on the previous tab page.
In the Tread section of the tab page you can set up the exact parameters of the stairs tread: define the thickness of the tread define the nosing on the front and on the sides define the thickness of the front of the risers In the Attributes section of the tab page, the Pen Color and Material pop-ups allow you to define the 3D appearance of the treads. You can assign different materials for each side of the treads.
945
Virtual Building
Railings (StairMaker)
Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Railings button (fourth from top) from among the six buttons at the left.
For detailed information on each control in this tab page, see Railing Settings Tab Page. You set up the railings of the stair or the slope on the fourth tab page of the stair editing window. Here you will again see a preview of the symbol of the stair showing the current choices for railings. Using the three buttons on the top of the tab page you can define whether the railing settings should affect both sides of the entire stair (All Stair-Rail mode), one side of the entire stair (One Side mode), or a selected segment (One Segment mode). Selection of the segments is indicated by a red line in the preview area. The mode chosen here is also in effect when setting the post.
946
Virtual Building
Clicking the first icon selects all the segments in the preview of the stair. Parameter settings will affect the whole of the stairs. A single railing type will be used for the whole stair with the same offset and parameter value for each segment. With regard to the offset value, the program automatically ensures the integrity of the railing, which means that the segments will intersect accordingly.
When switching to this mode from either of the other two (One Side mode or One Segment mode) each flight inherits the stair-rail and post settings of the lower starting flights first left-hand segment. After clicking the second icon, the left and right stair-rails can be set independently. The left stairrail is selected by default as displayed in the preview of the stairs. To switch to the right stair-rail, move the cursor to the other side of the stairs until it takes the form of a stair-rail, then click it.
The settings displayed on the screen are always those relevant to the selected railing, and any changes in the values of the parameters will affect only the selected railing. In this mode, the program uses single railing types for both sides of the stairs.
947
Virtual Building
When switching to this mode from All Stair-Rail mode, both sides inherit the settings chosen in the previous mode. When switching to this mode from One Segment mode, the whole flight inherits the settings of the lower starting segment. Clicking the third icon allows you to define a railing for each flight (segment) independently. By default, the first segment of the left railing is selected, as shown in the preview of the stairs. To select another segment, simply click it. Different offset values can be used for each segment. In this case, the elements of the stair-rail belonging to different segments will not fit each other automatically. Positive or negative upper and lower overhang can be defined manually for each railing segment.
When switching to this mode from either of the other two (All Stair-Rail mode or One Side mode), all stair-rails inherit the previous settings. The overhang values of the stair-rails will be identical to those calculated automatically in the previous mode. In the preview area that displays the floor plan of the stairs, each segment of the railing is represented by a line that shows where the centerline of the railing lies. To switch off a railing, first select it, then choose the No Railing option from the Railing type pop-up. A thin line will indicate the place of the stair-rail. The types and parameters of the selected railing are set in the Railing Setting section. The available railing types are listed in the pop-up menu placed at the top of the dialog box. The content of the pop-up window depends on the available definitions. In the railing preview area (above the stair-rail type pop-up) you can see the small image of the selected railing type.
The editable parameters under the pop-up window are generally valid regardless of the railing type. They define the position of the railing as related to the sideline of the stairs, the height of the posts and the baluster as related to the stairs, and the overhang values. In One Segment mode, the lower and upper overhang relates to the current segment, while in the other two modes they concern the lower overhang of the bottom segment and the upper overhang of the top segment. 948
Virtual Building
The parameters of the railing types will be displayed in the list of additional parameters in the Stair Settings dialog box. The settings and placement of the posts of the railing are defined in the Post Setting section.
If the selected type does not contain posts, this section will be dimmed. The position of the posts relative to the centerline of the stair-rail can be defined with the radio buttons and the parameter field. The rule according to which the posts are to be placed along the selected segments of the railings is defined with the radio buttons. The placement of the posts can be defined by: setting up an approximate distance between the neighboring posts (the posts are placed alongside the flight or the segment at a given distance from one another) placing a post on every tread (on landings, an approximate distance will be used), or setting the number of the posts. Using the Snap to Corner checkbox, the program automatically places posts to the segment ends and places additional posts on the segments according to the rule defined above. The position of the posts placed automatically by the program can be modified one by one by double clicking on the post on the selected stair-rail segment. A dialog box appears, where the position of the post can be set up numerically.
949
Virtual Building
Some of the available railing types are illustrated below.
950
Virtual Building
Symbol Settings (StairMaker)

Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Symbol Settings button from among the six buttons at the left.
Use these controls to define and edit the 2D appearance of your custom StairMaker stairs. For detailed information on each control in this tab page, see Symbol Settings Tab Page. The controls in the 2D Detail Level section give you graphical feedback on symbol choices for the 2D symbols of the stair, its walking line, and its railing.
951
Virtual Building
Attributes shows all parameters in logical groups: 2D Symbol Type, Walking line Settings, Text Display, Rail Display on Symbol, Carriage Display on Symbol, Story Sensitive Settings, 2D above Home Story.
Once you have created and saved a StairMaker stair, you can edit these same parameters directly from the Stair Settings dialog box.
For details, see Stair 2D Symbol and 3D Attributes Panel.
952
Virtual Building
Listing Settings (StairMaker)

Note: This tab page is part of the StairMaker editing window. To access it, activate the ArchiCAD Stair tool, open Stair Tool Settings, and click the Create Stair or Edit this Stair command. Choose a standard stair type. From the appearing stair editing window, click the Listing Settings button (last button) from among the six buttons at the left.
Each element and property of the stair can be listed with the Document > Schedules and Lists menu commands. Stairs will be listed as library parts. The list can be set up individually in ArchiCAD; however, if you wish to list a part of the stair, be sure that the box beside it (in this tab page) is checked.
For more information, see Calculation.
953
Virtual Building
Check and Save Stair

From the bottom of any of the tab pages, you can click Check Stair to run a check on the stair geometry you have set up.
ArchiCAD will let you know whether the stair is okay, or whether its geometry is incompatible:
If you are satisfied with your stair type, click Save As to give it a name. The Stair is saved in your Embedded Objects library.
954
Virtual Building
Custom Stair Based on Manually Drawn Elements

Custom stairs can be generated from a set of manually drawn elements using the Line, Arc and Fill tools. Design > Create Stair Using Selection command launches the StairMaker add-on to allow you to add the necessary options and details of the custom-made geometry. With the Create Stair Using Selection tool (Design menu), you can create custom stairs from a stair contour and a line of travel designed with ArchiCADs 2D drawing tools. Standard Stair types work with fixed geometrical data. If you cannot find the stair type you want among the predefined templates that cover most of the common stair forms, you can define the geometry of your Stair within your ArchiCAD project. 1) Draw the exact contour of the stair with the Fill tool. The fill that defines the stair cannot contain any holes.
2) Define the line of travel by using connected Lines and Arcs inside the fill polygon. The segments of the line of travel need to be connected properly, i.e., they cannot cross each other or the sides of the fill. It has to be a continuous chain of lines. Begin drawing the arcs and lines from the starting edge of the stair to define the appropriate direction of the line of travel.
Notes: The endpoints of the line of travel must snap exactly to the sides of the fill polygon but cannot connect adjacent edges or nodes of the fill polygon. Corners within the line of travel define landings. If the connection of two segments of the line of travel is not tangential, it will define a landing.
955
Virtual Building
3) Select the fill polygon and all segments of the line of travel.
4) Choose the Design > Create Stair Using Selection command in order to transform these floor plan symbols into a stair object. 5) The Stair Type dialog box appears. StairMaker automatically finds possible stair types for your draft. If none of the predefined Stair Types match the sketch, you can only define a Custom Stair.
Note: If the defined geometry cannot be interpreted by StairMaker, you will receive a warning message describing the problem. Make the necessary changes according to the rules of the stair definition, and try again.
956
Virtual Building
6) Select the required Stair type and click the OK button. StairMaker then displays the stair editing window. For custom stairs, some of the basic geometry parameters are not available and story height is locked by default: You can still customize: stair shape parameters the number of treads inclination angle (parameters of the riser and the run) When finished, click the OK button to automatically create the stair and save it in the Embedded Objects folder of Library Manager. You will then see the new stair displayed on the Floor Plan and can also view it in 3D. The original 2D elements are not deleted automatically.
957
Virtual Building
Element Extras
This section contains advanced functions which give you great leeway in designing and manipulating standard elements. These include: TrussMaker, used to create girder and truss objects Solid Element Operations
TrussMaker Solid Element Operations
958
Virtual Building
TrussMaker
TrussMaker is a built-in tool allowing you to create girder and truss objects for visualization purposes. It is accessed from the Design > Design Extras menu. Technically, TrussMaker is an ArchiCAD Add-On and is loaded with ArchiCAD on startup.
Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan Editing Trusses Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows
959
Virtual Building
Creating Trusses in the Floor Plan

Start by drawing the framework of the truss in the Floor Plan window with the Line and Arc/ Circle tools. Use different pen colors for the different parts of the truss, as seen below. Pen thicknesses have been exaggerated for clarity.
When you are satisfied with your design, select the lines making up the truss and choose the Create Truss command from the TrussMaker hierarchical menu (Design > Design Extras).
The TrussMaker Settings dialog box appears, allowing you to choose a shape and define options for creating the truss. When you have finished customizing your truss, click the Save button at the bottom right of the dialog box. You will then be prompted to name the new truss object and place it in your Embedded library. The new truss appears on the Floor Plan on the baseline of the contour. Go to the 3D window to visualize it, and then drag it into its final location.
960
Virtual Building
Editing Trusses
The framework drawn on the Floor Plan is not associated to the truss after it has been created and placed (and can only be used to create new trusses). Modifying this outline has no effect on placed trusses. TrussMaker offers you an additional method for editing placed trusses. Select a truss and choose the Edit Truss command from the TrussMaker menu (Design > Design Extras) or the TrussMaker palette. An alert will appear, prompting you to create a new Section window. Draw a simple section line with the Section/Elevation/IE tools, open the new Section/Elevation/IE window and then choose Continue Editing from the TrussMaker menu or palette. The original framework will appear in the window and you will be able to edit it.
When you have finished making your changes, choose the Create Truss command again. The TrussMaker Settings dialog box will appear, with the same options as seen above. The only difference is that in addition to the Save button, a Save as button appears.
If you click Save, TrussMaker will display a warning telling you that you are about to save a library part under an existing name. Clicking Overwrite will replace the previous truss, while clicking Cancel will abort the whole process. If you click Save as, a new truss object will be created. TrussMaker will prompt you to name this object.
961
Virtual Building
Creating Trusses in Section/Elevation/IE Windows

You can create a truss in a Section/Elevation/IE window: 1) Draw a Roof on the Floor Plan and add a Section Line.
2) Open the corresponding Section/Elevation/IE window. 3) Fit the framework of the truss to the roof. Draw the outline with lines as you would on the Floor Plan.
4) Select the frameworks elements and choose Create Truss from the TrussMaker hierarchical menu. (Design > Design Extras > TrussMaker)
962
Virtual Building
5) Make the appropriate settings in the TrussMaker Settings dialog box and save the object. An alert will be displayed, informing you that the new truss object has been created on the Floor Plan. The truss is placed on the same line as the section line and will therefore appear in the Section/Elevation/IE window as an element that was cut on its edge.
6) Display the new truss with the roof in 3D or in another Section window.
963
Virtual Building
Solid Element Operations

About Solid Element Operations Solid Operation Types Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation Solid Operation Example
964
Virtual Building
About Solid Element Operations

Solid Element Operations allow you to create complex shapes using Boolean operations, including subtraction, addition and intersection. The result is associative: if you modify the location or the attributes of the elements that participate in the operation, the linked elements will be updated accordingly. Solid Operations can be performed on elements in any model window by choosing Design > Solid Element Operations. For more information, see Edit Targets and Operators (Solid Element Operations). Solid Element Operations distinguish two roles: A Target is an element whose geometry will be modified by the solid operation. An Operator is an element that affects the geometry of the element it is linked to. The operation does not modify or delete the Operator element. You can hide the layers of the Operator elements after the operation has been performed without resetting the modified shape. You can also set the Operators layer to be shown as Wireframe, which allows you to still see the Operator elements contour and adjust it as necessary. In the illustration below, a Target Walls shape was modified by subtracting a Roof type Operator shape. On the left, both elements are shown; in the middle, the Roofs layer has been hidden; on the right, the Roofs layer has been set to Wireframe.
An Operator can work on multiple Targets, and a Target can be affected by multiple Operators. Each element can be a Target and an Operator at the same time, which permits nested Solid Element Operations. The operation remains in effect as long as the involved elements are present. If you wish to keep the obtained shape permanently, save it as a GDL Object from the 3D Window.
965
Virtual Building
Restrictions and Remarks

Roofs participating in Solid Operations will behave as any other elements, unlike when trimming elements to Roofs. Bypass automatic intersections: Solid Operations do not affect the results of automatic intersections, for example those created with Walls and/or Columns, if they are included in the same Layer intersection group. Before performing a Solid Operation on such elements, change the Layer intersection number of one of them. Beams: If you intend to apply an operation between Beams, the Operator must have at least the same 3D Intersection Priority number as the Target. If the Targets priority number is higher, the operation will appear to have no effect. Nested operations: If the desired shape can be only be obtained through a number of nested operations, pay attention to the order in which you apply them. For example, an Operator element may affect a Target that is also an Operator affecting another Target, and so on.
966
Virtual Building
Solid Operation Types

Five types of operations can be performed. The illustration below shows the effect of each: the starting Wall shape is shown at far left, followed by each of the five operations. The Operator element is shown in Wireframe mode.
Subtraction cuts out the shape of the Operator from Target. Subtraction with upward extrusion cuts out both the shape of the Operator from the Target and its vertical projection from the bottom of the Operator shape to the top of the Target. Subtraction with downward extrusion cuts out both the shape of the Operator from the Target and its vertical projection from the top of the Operator shape to the bottom of the Target. Intersection keeps only the common part of the Target and the Operator. Addition adds the shape of the Target to the shape of the Operator.
967
Virtual Building
Solid Operations: Element Display and Calculation

The solid operation affects the model shape, that is, the 3D view and the generated Section/ Elevation/IE model and Detail Drawing view. Below is the Section view of the elements shown above. The Operators are shown in Wireframe, above, and their layers are hidden, below.
The Floor Plan view of both Target and Operator elements is unaffected. Putting the Operator element on a Wireframe layer does not affect its display. If the Operators layer is hidden, then they will not appear in the Floor Plan, but you will not be able to edit them until you make the layer visible again. Note: If you select only the Target on the Floor Plan and display the selection in 3D view, the modified shape will be shown, but without displaying the Operator, even if it is on a visible or a Wireframe layer. If you perform a Solid Operation on a Section/Elevation/IE view, you need to rebuild the windows contents to see the results. All listing commands will be performed on the modified shapes.
968
Virtual Building
Solid Operation Example

In this example, we have created a complex stair footing shape for a spiral staircase, quickly and easily, using a Solid Element Operation. 1) Place the Stair Spiral in the plan using the Stair Tool.
969
Virtual Building
2) Create a curved wall to encompass the spiral stair.
3) Open the dialog box using the Design > Solid Element Operations command.
970
Virtual Building
4) Select target element: the curved wall.
5) Click Get Target Elements.
971
Virtual Building
6) Select operator element: the spiral stair.
7) Click Get Operator Elements. 8) Choose an operation type: Subtraction with upwards extrusion.
9) Click Execute. The Solid Element Operation is complete. 972

Virtual Building
10)Click in an empty space to deselect the stair. 11) View the result in 3D.
973
Virtual Building
Model View Options

The display and output of Model View elements can be set globally in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. Model View Options affect the on-screen and output display of construction elements, fills and zones, and certain GDL objects throughout the project. Model View Options do not affect the display or output of the 3D window. Exception: The two Model View Options for the Curtain Wall (Full and Schematic) affect the display and output of Curtain Walls in the 3D and 3D Document window only (including Curtain Wall Edit mode). See Curtain Wall Display. Model View Options (and saved MVO Combinations) are applied globally to your current model.
Set Model View Options Model View Options Combinations
974
Virtual Building
Set Model View Options

Use the dialog box at Document > Set Model View > Model View Options to set the following options (divided into separate panels): 1) Options for Construction Elements: Show/Hide and other options affecting the display and output of Beams, Column Symbols, Doors, Windows, Section Markers, Curtain Walls and Mark-up items. For more information, see Model View Options for Construction Elements. 2) Override Fill Display: Fill and zone backgrounds and patterns. For more information, see Model View Options Override Fill Display. 3) Options for GDL Objects: Switches the 2D display preferences for certain GDL objects. Use these options if you want to change the display and output of all relevant GDL objects in the project. (You can also set these display options for each object individually, using the parameters in the Object Settings dialog box.) Note: The options available here will vary depending on which libraries are loaded in your project. You may have multiple panels, one for each loaded library. For more information, see Model View Options for GDL Objects. Clicking OK will close the dialog box and apply your chosen display options to all affected elements in the project.
975
Virtual Building
Model View Options Combinations

After customizing one or more sets of Model View Options, you can save them as Model View Options Combinations, using the controls at the top section of the dialog box. Several Model View Options Combinations are predefined for your convenience; you can modify and save these under new names, if desired. Model View Option Combinations can be saved and easily applied to individual views depending on their purpose (for example, for use as Drafting plans or Site plans): different views can be displayed using different model view options. If you do not save the customized configuration, it is called Custom, an unsaved collection which reflects the current state of the Model View options. These custom settings can remain in effect even after you close the dialog box, but they are not saved under that name. Once you are satisfied with your set of options, you should save it under a new name using the Store As button in the Model View Options Combinations Panel of the dialog box. The active Model View Options Combination is displayed in the Properties section of the Navigator Project Map, View Map and Publisher Sets. It is accessible and editable at View Settings and Storing Options (at bottom of Project Map of Organizer) and in the Quick Options Palette.
Apply a Model View Options Combination to the Project

To apply a saved Model View Options Combination to the current model, do one of the following: use the Document > Set Model View menu to choose a Model View Options Combination open Document > Set Model View > Model View Options and choose one of the defined Model View Options Combinations from the top panel. Check the settings in the rest of the panels to see what will happen if this Model View Options Combination is applied. use the appropriate pop-up in the Quick Options Palette to choose a Model View Options Combination.
976
Virtual Building
use the appropriate pop-up at the bottom of the View Settings and Storing Options (at bottom of Project Map of Organizer) to choose a Model View Options Combination.
Apply a Model View Options Combination to a Saved View

When saving a view from any model window, the views current Model View Options Combination is also saved along with the view. To apply a different Model View Options Combination to any single view, use its View Settings Dialog Box.
For more information, see Saving a View.
977
Virtual Building
On-Screen View Options

The View > On-Screen View Options command produces a list of items (generally aids in editing) that can be shown or hidden on screen, depending on your preferences. Other items in this list let you toggle between line weight options and vectorial vs. bitmap display of fills. Click any item to toggle its status.
This status has no effect on whether the item will be displayed on your output; it affects only onscreen display. For a quick way to access these commands, activate the Window > Toolbars > On-Screen View Options toolbar.
On-Screen View Options Commands

Use the View > On-Screen View Options command to access these options (for a quick way to access these commands, activate the Window > Toolbars > On-Screen View Options toolbar). Clean Wall & Beam Intersections: Toggles the clean wall and beam intersection mode on and off. Walls & Beams Reference Lines: Use this option to toggle between displaying walls and beams with their reference lines and their contour lines. Roof pivot Lines: Use this option to specify whether Roof pivot lines are displayed on the floor plan. True Weight: Use this option to toggle the True Weight display of Lines on or off. If it is off, lines will be displayed in Hairline, and the following option (Bold Cut Lines) is not applicable. Note: The Hairline option in On-Screen View Options affects on-screen display only. For hairline output, use the Hairline checkbox in the Print or Plot dialog box.
978
Virtual Building
Bold Cut Lines: Use this option to specify whether Construction Elements are displayed with bold cut lines. Marker Range: Use this option to toggle the on-screen display of Marker Range items on or off. These items are: Section and Elevation depth lines and distant lines; Elevation/Interior Elevation lines and limit lines; input polygons defining Detail and Worksheet area. Highlight Source Markers: Use this option to toggle the on-screen display of source marker highlights on and off. Source markers are those which create a viewpoint when you place them. The color of source marker highlights is set in Options > Work Environment > OnScreen Options. Vectorial Hatching: Use this option to turn Vectorial Hatching display on or off. If it is off, then fills will be displayed in their bitmap patterns. This control affects on-screen display only for all Fills (regardless of fill type). Drawing Frames: Use this option to show/hide Drawing Frames on the layout. Master Items on Layout: Use this option to specify whether Master Items are displayed on the layout. If you want a uniform for all Master items, set this in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Show/Hide Drafting & Editing Aids: Use this option to show or hide all available drafting aids. Drafting aids include Fill Handles, Figure Handles, Text Boxes, and Bzier Spline handles. Use the next four toggles to show or hide each of these drafting aids individually.
979
Virtual Building
Partial Structure Display

The Partial Structure Display function allows you to display and output composite and complex elements in simplified form. See Composite Structures and Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. For example, when collaborating with other designers or with engineers, you may prefer to publish a Structural Plan that shows complex and composite elements only partially: displaying their core only, or displaying them without finishes. Use Document > Partial Structure Display to set these display preferences. Partial Structure Display settings affect composite and complex structures only. Unlike Model View Options, which affect 2D windows only, Partial Structure Display affects the display of elements in 2D and 3D windows alike. Partial Structure Display settings can be assigned in the following window types: Floor Plan (a single Partial Structure setting is in effect for every Floor Plan window) 3D Window (one setting for the 3D window) Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation/3D Document: Each instance of these window types can have its own Partial Structure Display setting (i.e. you can have three Section windows with three different Partial Structure settings). Exception: You cannot set a Partial Structure Display setting for a Drawing-type Section or Elevation, or for any Independent viewpoint. Worksheet and Detail: If the source viewpoint is in the Floor Plan or is an Auto-update viewpoint, then you can set Partial Structure Display settings for Worksheets and Details (separate ones for each window, if needed.) See also Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker. For a quick way to assign Partial Structure Display to the current window, use the Partial Structure pop-up in the Quick Options Palette. You can save different Partial Structure Display settings on a view-by-view basis. Topics in this section:
Choose Partial Structure Display Preferences Save Partial Structure Settings by View How to Define Composite Structure Components as Core or Finish Visualizing the Entire Structure Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker
980
Virtual Building
Choose Partial Structure Display Preferences

Use the Document > Partial Structure Display dialog box to choose your preferred display.
Entire Structure: this is the default setting.
Without Finishes: The entire structure, except for skins/components defined as Finish, is displayed.
981
Virtual Building
Core Only: Only those structures defined as Core will be displayed.
982
Virtual Building
Save Partial Structure Settings by View

The Partial Structure Display setting is saved with the view.
This means you can save different Partial Display Settings for each view: for example, you can save two different views of the same Section, each having a different Partial Structure Display. The Properties section of the Organizer Project Map and Organizer View Map provides feedback on the selected items Partial Structure settings.
983
Virtual Building
How to Define Composite Structure Components as Core or Finish

For composite elements (Wall, Slab, Roof): skins can be defined as either Core, Finish, or Other in the Composite Structures Dialog Box. You can define multiple skins as Core, but these skins must be adjacent to each other.
You can define multiple adjacent skins as Finish, but they must include one or both of the outermost skins. For Profile elements (Wall, Beam, Column): Components can be defined as Core, Finish, or Other in Design > Profile Manager.
984
Virtual Building
Visualizing the Entire Structure

Even if you are using a Partial Display option, ArchiCAD gives you several types of feedback to help you identify the entire original structure if needed. You can always choose the Entire Original Structure option for your Trace Reference: 1) Activate the Trace function. 2) From the Trace drop-down menu, use Choose Reference, and select Entire Structure as the Trace Reference.
In this Section, the composite walls are displayed with Core-Only settings, but the Entire Structure Display reference (in red) indicates the full wall structure.
When selecting a partially displayed element, hotspots will appear at their original location. The selection highlight, however, is shown only on the displayed parts of the elements.
985
Virtual Building
Preselection feedback will also help you identify the entire as well as the partially displayed parts of the elements. The preselection highlight is shown only on the displayed components, but the cursor recognizes the reference line even if it is not on a displayed part of the element - as shown by the bold Mercedes cursor in this image.
The Info Tag displays the Thickness of the original, entire element, even if it is currently only in Partial Display:
986
Virtual Building
Partial Structure Display Settings: Effect on Elements

Columns In Partial Structure Display Zones and Partial Structure Display Floor Plan Cover Fills in Partial Structure Display Dimensions in Partial Structure Display Intersections of Partially Displayed Elements Columns In Partial Structure Display
Although regular Columns have a Core and a veneer, they are not considered composite elements for the purposes of Partial Structure Display. Regular columns will always display both the Core and the Veneer regardless of the Partial Structure Display setting. To display a column without its veneer, create a Complex column and set the veneer component as a Finish. Then switch Partial Structure Display to Without Finishes.
For Columns wrapped by walls: No wrapping occurs if you are using Core only display.
987
Virtual Building
Zones and Partial Structure Display

Regardless of which Partial Display option is in effect, zones are not affected: zones that extend to an Inner Edge are calculated to include the finish component of a surrounding structure, even if the finishes are hidden according to the current Partial Structure Display Setting.
Floor Plan Cover Fills in Partial Structure Display

The Partial Structure Display setting has no effect on cover fills. If you have assigned a Cover Fill to any composite or complex element (this might be a Roof, Slab, or Mesh), then the Cover Fill will appear regardless of the Partial Display option that is in effect. To override Cover Fill display settings, use Model View Options Override Fill Display.
Dimensions in Partial Structure Display

Dimensions are connected to the Partial Structure display setting: each Partial Display mode has its own set of dimensions: you can have a set of dimensions in your Core Only view, and other sets of dimensions in your Entire Structure and Without Finishes views. If you switch between Partial Structure Display settings, the dimensions associated with the earlier Display setting will not be visible. To see the Dimensions again, switch back to the Partial Structure Display setting in which the Dimensions were placed. This wall is displayed with the Core Only display setting:
988
Virtual Building
If you now switch the display setting to Entire Structure, the dimension shown in Core Only disappears, and the other dimension - the one previously created with the Entire Structure display setting - appears.
You can copy-paste dimensioned elements between two views whose Partial Structure Display settings are dissimilar. However, if you try to paste dimensioned elements that do NOT appear in the given Partial Structure display, those dimensions will be lost after you paste. If you are copypasting dimensioned elements between two views whose Partial Structure Display settings differ, a warning appears:
Intersections of Partially Displayed Elements

Intersections will behave just as they do when the entire structure is displayed: No further skin intersections will be cleaned up as a result of changing to partial display. Exception: Complex (Profile) Elements that are set to Partial Display may end up with cleaned-up intersections in some cases.
989
Virtual Building
Partial Structure Display Settings in Windows Based on a Source Marker

Often, you will be working in a model view (Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail or Worksheet) in which the elements have their source in a different model window. However, if a your source viewpoint is a Manual-Rebuild or Drawing-type view/viewpoint, you would run into problems if you tried to change the derived views Partial Structure Display Settings, because the source viewpoint might not be in updated condition. Therefore, ArchiCAD does not let you change the Partial Structure Display settings for views derived from ManualRebuild or Drawing-type sources. The following view settings belong to a view whose source is a Manual-Rebuild model; the Partial Structure Display settings cannot be changed.
The solution: go back to the source view (or make a copy of it) and change its update type to Auto-update. In the opposite case: Suppose you have an Auto-update viewpoint with several views derived from it. Then you change the viewpoint to Manual Update or Drawing type. This is possible, but be aware that the views deriving from this source - even if youve already created these views - will, when rebuilt, change their Partial Display settings to match those of the source viewpoint. If you do change the Partial Structure Display settings of a source viewpoint which is of Manual Rebuild type (even though its derived views are based on an Auto-Rebuild source), ArchiCAD warns you of the consequences for the derived views: the views Partial Structure Display Settings might change:
990
Virtual Building
You can go ahead and continue Rebuild, or you can cancel the process. Again, the solution is to go back to the source view (or make a copy of it with the Partial Display Structure settings you need) and change its update type to Auto-update. When you do rebuild such a view - one whose source has changed from Auto-Rebuild to Manual Rebuild - you are again warned that your views Partial Structure settings will change:
991
Virtual Building
992
Documentation
Documentation
Drafting Annotation The Layout Book Publishing Calculation
993
Documentation
Drafting
Drafting Elements are strictly two-dimensional: they include Fills, Lines, Hotspots, Figures and Drawings. With the exception of Fills and Drawings, they do not appear in list views. Drafting elements have various uses: Details that you did not wish to model fully with construction tools. Positioning and drawing aids for the placement of construction elements. Their outlines can be used to generate complex 3D shapes using the Magic Wand tool. Decoration purposes or elaborating on details, especially in the Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows or on Details and Worksheets. The Floor Plan and Section/Elevation/Interior Elevation and 3D Document display of drafting elements depends on the attribute choices made for them in their respective Tool Settings dialog boxes. Attribute sets for Drafting Elements (pencolors, line types, fill types) are managed from the dialog boxes in Options > Element Attributes. For faster display or output, the 2D appearance of some of the attributes can be modified by the On-Screen View Options Commands in the View menu. The typical steps in creating a drafting element are the following: 1) Select the corresponding tool in the Toolbox and open its settings dialog box. 2) Adjust the settings to suit your particular situation or purpose, or click the Favorites button on top of the palette to select a predefined element configuration. Click OK to confirm the settings. 3) Choose a Geometry Method in the Info Box allowing you to create plain, curved, chained, rotated or polygonal variations of the elements, where applicable. 4) In the 2D window, define the location or the length of the drafting elements.
Fills Lines Hotspots Figures Drawings in Model Views
994
Documentation
Fills
About Fills Assign a Cut Fill Assign a Cover Fill Draw a Drafting Fill Available Fill Types Fill Types Dialog Box Fill Categories Create New Solid Fill Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap Display of Vectorial Fill Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display Create a New Symbol Fill Adding Area Text to a Fill Using Gradient Fills Create or Edit Image Fill
995
Documentation
About Fills
Fills are geometric 2D hatching patterns that help you distinguish and decorate the elements of your project. Fills can be Cut Fills: For most construction elements, you can select a Cut Fill for its surfaces that are cut. Cut Fills can be displayed for cut elements in Section/Elevation/IE windows, in a 3D Document, and in Details/Worksheets. or Cover Fills: Cover fills can be added to the display of Slabs, Roofs, Meshes and Zones on the Floor Plan: use the Cover Fills controls in the elements Settings dialog box. They are assigned to construction elements (Walls, Columns, Beams, Slabs, Meshes, Roofs, Zones, parts of Objects) or Drafting Fills: Drafting fills are simple 2D Fills drawn by hand in any model window. They do not have any relationship with construction elements such as Walls, Slabs or Roofs; they are used as purely drafting elements, placed with the Fill tool. These Fill elements are useful to represent areas that you do not want to render in 3D, to add shadows or other graphic touches, or to measure the area of polygons.
996
Documentation
As vectorial hatching, fills can also be used to embellish materials in the 3D Window and the 3D Document.
ArchiCAD includes a predefined set of default fill patterns, or fill types. Access Fills from the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types Dialog Box where you can define, edit, duplicate, rename or delete them.
997
Documentation
Assign a Cut Fill

To define a default cut fill for a construction element, or change the cut fill of a placed element: 1) Activate the elements tool; or select the placed element. 2) Go to the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings (or click Floor Plan and Section button in the Info Box.)
3) For the listed Cut Fill parameter, click the fill name or icon to access the list of available fill types.
4) Choose the desired Fill Type from the pop-up list. (See Available Fill Types.) 998
Documentation
Assign a Cover Fill

If an element is not cut on the Floor Plan - typically Slabs, Zones, Meshes and Roofs - it will not display the cut fill on the Floor Plan. However, you can assign a cover fill.
Slabs, Meshes and Roofs

1) Go to the Floor Plan and Section panel of its Settings (or click Floor Plan and Section button in the Info Box.)
999
Documentation
2) For the listed Cover Fill parameter, click the fill name or icon to access the list of available fill types.
3) Choose the desired Fill Type from the pop-up list. (See Available Fill Types.)
Zones
1) Activate the Cover Fill button in the Zone Floor Plan Panel by clicking it.
2) Click the fill name or icon to access the list of available fill types. 3) Choose the desired Fill Type from the pop-up list. (See Available Fill Types.)
1000
Documentation
Draw a Drafting Fill

To draw a Drafting fill, first activate the Fill tool in the Toolbox and choose one of the three Geometry Methods from the Info Box.
Drawing Fills with either the Polygon, the Rectangle or the Rotated Rectangle method is similar to the process for drawing walls. For an illustration of this process, see Create a Chain of Walls and Create a Rectangle of Walls. When creating a drafting fill with the Fill Tool, you can specify to which Fill Category the Fill should belong. For more information, see Fill Category: Advanced Settings for a Drafting Fill.
About Fills Fill Categories
1001
Documentation
Available Fill Types

The full set of fills used in the current ArchiCAD project is available in the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes).
You can modify this set manually or by importing items with the Attribute Manager. Use the Fill Types Dialog Box to define and/or edit fill types and patterns, and determine the category of each particular Fill (Drafting Fill, Cut Fill, and/or Cover Fill). In each fill pop-up, located in the Settings dialog boxes throughout the ArchiCAD interface, only those fills are available which are defined as applicable to the element you are creating. See Fill Categories for more information. To make it easier to find the right fill in the pop-ups, they are grouped as follows: Solid, Gradient, Vectorial, Composite, and Image.
Solid Fills
Solid Fills include the Foreground Fill: You see only the Foreground, because it covers up the Background. the Background fill: You see only the Background, because the Foreground is set to zero. Three fills whose foregrounds are of predefined Opacity (25%, 50%, 75%). These percentages can be adjusted by hand in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types, by entering a new percentage value in the Opacity field. See also Create New Solid Fill.
Vectorial Fills
Vectorial Fills can be assigned to construction elements in 2D windows. You can also assign Vectorial Fills to Materials, which are displayed in the 3D window. See Display of Vectorial Fill. Some properties of vectorial patterns can be adjusted, including their scale, angle, spacing, availability and associated screen-only bitmap display. See Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel.
1002
Documentation
Symbol Fills
Symbol Fills can be assigned to construction elements. You can edit the symbol pattern of an existing fill, or Create a New Symbol Fill entirely.
Image Fills
Create or Edit Image Fill can be used as Drafting fills drawn with the Fill tool. Image fills are also available as cover fills, applicable to a Roof, Slab or Mesh. See Create or Edit Image Fill.
Gradient Fills
Using Gradient Fills are Drafting fills only, and thus are available only from the Fill Tools popup. (Drafting fills are drawn by hand, using the Fill Tool.) See Using Gradient Fills.
Composite Fills
Composite Fills are available for elements that can have Composite Structures: that is, Walls, Slabs and Roofs.
1003
Documentation
Fill Categories
There are three Fill categories with their default uses: Cut Fills: For most construction elements, you can select a Cut Fill for its surfaces that are cut. Cut Fills can be displayed for cut elements in Section/Elevation/IE windows, in a 3D Document, and in Details/Worksheets. See Assign a Cut Fill. Cover Fills: Cover fills can be added to the display of Slabs, Roofs, Meshes and Zones on the Floor Plan: use the Cover Fills controls in the elements Settings dialog box. See Assign a Cover Fill. Drafting Fills: Drafting fills are simple 2D Fills drawn by hand in any model window. They do not have any relationship with construction elements such as Walls, Slabs or Roofs. See Draw a Drafting Fill. Every fill type is assigned to one or several of these categories. The fill category determines which element the fill can be assigned to. For example, a Fill Type must be set to Cover Fill if you want it to be available as a Cover Fill choice in Mesh/Zone/Roof/Slab settings. To assign Fill Categories, open the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types Dialog Box and check one or more boxes in the Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel.
Fill Categories are also significant for Model View Options: in the Model View Options dialog box, you can override individual fill display settings for all the fills in your project at once, by category. See Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display.
Fill Category: Advanced Settings for a Drafting Fill

Every freehand fill drawn with the Fill Tool is necessarily in the Drafting Fill category. However, you may wish to treat such fills as cut or cover fills instead, for display and export purposes. This is useful if you plan to export the ArchiCAD project to DXF/DWG format: during the export process, you can define, by category, the layers of the exported fills. See also Fill-Hatch Conversion Table.
1004
Documentation
To adjust the fill category, use the Fill Advanced Settings Panel:
For example: if you have a Wall in a Section, and you unlink the Section from the model, the fills generated from the Wall will belong to the Cut Fill category. If you then draw additional Fills in the Section window, you can set these fills (in the Drafting category by default) to be in the Cut Fill category instead, so that they will be treated the same as the cut fills coming from the construction element.
1005
Documentation
Create New Solid Fill

You can create a new solid fill type with any translucence value you wish. In the Fill Types Dialog Box, click New, and choose Solid fill from the Add New Fill dialog box.
In the Fill Appearance Panel of the Fill Types dialog box, set the Opacity percentage (in this case, 65). The new Fill Type will henceforth appear in the fill pop-up.
1006
Documentation
Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap

Each fill type has two faces or display modes: vectorial and bitmap. By default, all fills in your project are set to be displayed as Vectorial Hatching in On-Screen View Options Commands in the View menu. If you turn this control off, fills will be displayed on screen in bitmap mode. When printing or plotting fills, the vectorial face will be used even if the on-screen display is set to bitmap. The bitmap versions of all predefined fill patterns approximate their vectorial equivalents. If you change a vectorial pattern or generate a new symbol type pattern, you will need to create its bitmap version manually. See Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel.
1007
Documentation
Display of Vectorial Fill

On the Floor Plan
Elements will display the hatching of a vectorial fill on the Floor Plan only if you have activated View > On-Screen View Options > Vectorial Hatching. (Otherwise, the on-screen display will show the fills bitmap face.)
In the 3D Window
Construction elements in the 3D Window are displayed using the Materials assigned to them in the Model panel of the elements Settings. See Assign a Material to a Construction Element. If these Materials include a Vectorial Hatching, this Hatching will be visible in the 3D Window only if you switch the Vectorial 3D Hatching control to On in the 3D Window Settings dialog box, and only if you are using the Internal 3D Engine.
See also Material Vectorial Hatching Panel.
In the Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document Windows

Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows will display vectorial hatching only if you have checked the Vectorial 3D hatching box in the Model Display panel of the Settings dialog box.
For more information, see Section Model Display Panel and 3D Document Model Display Panel. 1008
Documentation
Vectorial hatching settings have no effect in rendered views.
Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching
1009
Documentation
Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching

You can manually define or change the orientation of a fill patterns vectorial hatching. For a Fill drawn manually with the Fill tool, use the Construction Method options in the General Settings panel of Fill Settings. (The options are described below.)
For Cover Fills assigned to a Mesh, Slab, Roof, or Zone, use the controls under Cover Fill in the Settings dialog box.
Link to Project Origin

If you choose Link to Project Origin, the orientation of the hatching will always be drawn orthogonally from the Project Origin, independently of the transformations made on the element.
1010
Documentation
Link to Fill Origin

Use the Link to Fill Origin to fine-tune the angle of the fill pattern. If you choose this option, the fill pattern starts at the origin of the fill. In this case, a single handle appears on the placed fill to define and show a visual feedback of the orientation of the fill. Note: Fill handles are visible only if you enable Fill Handles (Drafting and Editing Aids) in View > On-Screen View Options.
Now drag the Fill Handle to realign the fill pattern as needed. Make sure the Move Sub-Element icon is active on the pet palette.
1011
Documentation
When creating a new fill using the Link to Fill Origin option, first place the fill polygon using the Fill Tool.
The cursor changes to the shape of a fill handle arrow:
Click twice to define the origin and direction of the fill pattern. Your first click will determine the Fills origin and the second one the endpoint of the orientation vector.
Note that the handle does not necessarily have to be located inside the Fill. You can drag the handle out of the body of the fill after placing it.
Distorted Fill
A third Construction Method for Fill Orientation (available in Fill Tool Settings/Fill Info Box and Slab Tool Settings only) allows you to Use Distorted Fills. This means that instead of a single handle showing the orientation vector, two handles will appear at the origin of the fill and you 1012
Documentation
will be able to manipulate the hatching pattern by modifying the length of either handle and the angle closed by the two handles. Note that (if Guide Lines are active) a Guide Circle appears when you take hold of either handle, so that if you start distorting the fill but then decide to return to its original orientation, you can pull the handle back to its original location on the Guide Circle.
There are two special uses for distorted fills that can greatly enhance the realism of your design.
Cover fills of Roofs can also be represented according to their real geometric positions with this feature. While you cannot manually distort the pattern of a Roofs cover fill, you can set the Distort with Slope control in the Roof Settings dialog box to automatically distort its cover fill to follow its slope. To do this, select the roof and open its Roof Floor Plan and Section Panel. Make sure that the Cover Fills checkbox is active, and enable both the Align with Slope and Distort with Slope controls.
1013
Documentation
Model View Options: Global Settings for Fill Display

By default, all fills in the project will be displayed the way you define them in element settings or Fill Settings. However, in the Override Fill Display panel of Model View Options, you can override these settings-level definitions and create uniform display options for all fills (by category) throughout the project. Use Document > Set Model View > Model View Options.
For more information, see Model View Options Override Fill Display.
1014
Documentation
Create a New Symbol Fill

Symbol fills can be created by the user from a sketch drawn in any model window, with the following steps: 1) Draw a pattern using Lines, Arcs and Hotspots.
2) Select all the components of the pattern and choose Edit > Copy. 3) Choose Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types. Click the New. button, enter a name for the new fill and select the Symbol fill radio button, then click OK to set the name and type. 4) In the Edit Symbol Pattern panel, click the Paste button above the Preview window. The pattern appears in the Preview window. Check the Show Pattern Unit box to highlight a single unit of the pattern in the preview window of this dialog box. Note: If the selection of copied components includes splines, fills, text or other elements, these will not be pasted into the Fill Types dialog box. 5) Use the controls in the Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel to set the size, pattern and rotation angle for the symbol fill. 6) Click OK to exit the dialog box and save changes. Note: The fills screen-only bitmap pattern must be edited manually in the Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel. If you wish to change a symbol fill after the original components have been deleted from the window you copied them from, you must first choose the symbol to be edited within the Fill Types dialog box, and press the Copy button. By pasting the symbol fill back into the window, it becomes editable once more.
1015
Documentation
Adding Area Text to a Fill

Enable the Show Area Text checkbox in the General Settings panel of Fill Tool Settings. When you create the Fill, the Hammer cursor will appear, prompting you to position the area text with a click.
The text block is created by calculating the area of the Fill. The text settings will be the same as the default values set in Dimension Text Settings. This text will always be displayed horizontally on screen, even if the fill is rotated or mirrored, or the view itself is rotated. (See Oriented View.) Note: If the fill contains holes, they are subtracted from the fill area. To modify the font settings or even the content of the area text, select the text only (not the Fill itself) and edit the Dimension Text Settings (in this case, the last command of the Edit menu changes to Dimension Text Settings). The measurement unit and accuracy of the area value are defined in Dimensions Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions). Fill Area text will always be displayed horizontally on screen, regardless of the views orientation.
1016
Documentation
Using Gradient Fills

The purpose of Gradient Fills is to enhance architectural graphics; they do not indicate any physical properties, and so they are available for 2D fills created with the Fill tool (Drafting fills) only. Gradient Fills cannot be applied to construction elements (i.e. they are not available as Cut Fills or Cover Fills). To get a linear gradient fill, choose two different pen colors (foreground and background) on the General Settings panel of Fill Tool Settings. When placing the Fill, you will see that the pattern is a mix of the two colors with a transition area between them.
The location, angle and the size of the transition area can be modified with the fill handle provided that you enable Fill Handles (Drafting and Editing Aids) in View > On-Screen View Options.
The other type of the gradient fill is radial, that is, of basically circular shape. In this case, the two pen colors (foreground and background) define respectively the inner (next to the core) and outer colors of the gradient fill. With the fill handle, you can modify the origin of the gradient fill and the extent of both colors as well as that of the transition area.
Note: When moving the fill handle, make sure you select the Move Sub-element icon on the pet palette.
1017
Documentation
Create or Edit Image Fill

The Image fill lets you use images as the foreground part of Drafting fills or Cover fills. By default, ArchiCAD 13 provides two Image fills as Attributes, but you can define your own.
To create a new Image fill, go to Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types Dialog Box. Click New. In the Add New Fill dialog box, choose Image fill.
In the appearing Fill Types dialog box, note (in the Availability and Screen only Pattern Panel) that Image fills can be defined as either Drafting or Cover fills (not as Cut fills).
1018
Documentation
For Image fills, the second panel is the Fill Texture Panel. Here, click the Load Image button to bring up a library directory dialog box. Browse for the desired image and click OK to load it.
Use the Image Size controls to fine-tune the size and pattern of your Image fill.
1019
Documentation
Note that the Mirroring controls give you different options for setting up the repeating patterns within your Image fill.
Click OK to save the newly created fill as a project attribute.
1020
Documentation
Lines
The following straight and curved line elements can be created in ArchiCAD using the different Line tools and geometry methods. Single straight line segments, series of Chained straight and Curved line segments, Rectangles and Rotated Rectangles. Circular Arcs and full Circles Elliptical Arcs and full Ellipses Straight or Curved Polylines Natural Splines, Bzier curves and Freehand curves Double-clicking any of the Line type tools will open a dialog box in which you can adjust the settings of the given tool. In each of these dialog boxes, the Uniform Settings for Line Tools checkbox allows you to apply the settings made in this dialog box to all line-type tools: Line, Arc/Circle, Spline, Polyline. For more information, see Line Tool Settings, Arc/Circle Tool Settings, Spline Tool Settings and Polyline Tool Settings.
Line Categories in ArchiCAD Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment Stretching or Shrinking Lines Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles Stretching Curves Editing an Arc Using its Tangent Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses Convert Ellipse to Circle Drawing Splines Editing Splines Drawing Freehand Curves Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines Decompose a Polyline Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline
1021
Documentation
Line Categories in ArchiCAD

ArchiCAD allows you to assign categories to your lines. (Use the Advanced Settings panel of the Line Settings dialog box.) You can then use line categories to fine-tune model view options and export settings for lines depending on their category. ArchiCAD has three line categories: Drafting line: Simple 2D drafting line. Lines drawn with the Line tool will be in this category by default. Cut line: Contour line of a 3D element on a cutting plane. Note: You can choose to display lines in the Cut line category in boldface: In View > OnScreen View Options, choose Bold Cut Lines. Skin Separator Line: Separator line between skins of composite structures, including walls, columns, slabs and roofs. Line categories can be useful if, for example, you have exploded a composite wall into its constituent lines and fills. By default, in the Line Tools Advanced Settings Panel, all the contour lines are put into the Cut line category, while all the skin separator lines are put into the Skin Separator category. All other lines are placed into the Drafting category by default. However, if you draw lines by hand into a Detail Window, Worksheet, Patch, Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window, you can assign categories to these lines according to their function in the plan. This way, when assigning a model view option, even hand-drawn lines can be considered Cut lines or Skin Separator lines. Assigning line categories can also be useful if you save your file in DXF/DWG format: the DXF/ DWG Translation Setup dialog box allows you to define a separate layer onto which Skin Separator lines can be exported.
1022
Documentation
Drawing a Single Straight Line Segment

To draw a single straight Line segment, choose the Line tool in the Toolbox and the Single Line geometry method in the Info Box.
The Line segment is defined by clicking at its two endpoints. Note: This CAD-like drawing method is the default method for drawing segments in ArchiCAD, but you can change it in Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints & Methods.
1023
Documentation
Stretching or Shrinking Lines

To stretch/shrink a straight line with the menu command: 1) 2) 3) 4) Select a line. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Stretch command. Click an endpoint of the selected line and move it. Click again to either define the new endpoint as an extension (or reduction) of the previous length. The line is stretched or shrunk and, if needed, rotated according to the new endpoint. The other endpoint will remain at its original position. Note: Multiple Lines with overlapping endpoints can all be stretched at the same time using the Stretch menu command or with the Marquee tool. For more information, see Stretching with the Marquee Tool. When using the pet palette: 1) Select a line. 2) Click one of the lines endpoints. The pet palette appears. Choose the stretch icon:
Click to define the new endpoint.
1024
Documentation
Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles

To draw a circular arc or a full circle, choose the Arc/Circle tool in the Toolbox and one of the Geometry Methods offered by the first icon in the Info Box (Centerpoint, Three Points or Tangent Point).
Note: These methods are identical for drawing curved walls. See Create a Curved Wall. These methods differ in the basic points they define. The first option defines the centerpoint and radius of the arc or circle. Your first click defines the centerpoint. A ghost contour follows your cursor until you click a second time to define the radius. After that, only a partial ghost curved segment is shown, until you click a third time to define the length of the arc. If you need a full circle, double-click when defining its radius. When all three points are defined, the ghost contour is replaced by the fully displayed circle.
The second option defines the circle by three points on the arcs circumference. The first two clicks define two points that you will probably locate on points connecting other elements, grid intersections or special snap points. After that, a ghost circle follows the cursor until you click a third time to define the third point. A fourth click is needed to define the length of the arc segment.
1025
Documentation
The third option only defines full circular shapes based on three tangential edges or points. In this process, you select three initial points: these can be a tangent edge (indicated by the Mercedes cursor), a node (indicated by the Checkmark cursor), or a free-floating point (indicated by the Crosshair cursor.) An endpoint cannot qualify as a tangent edge when using this method, so a maximum of two endpoints are allowed. If more than two are selected, the process will revert to the second method described above. Only linear tangency is allowed: all tangent points must be on the straight edges of Slabs, Lines, Walls, etc. If you click a radial edge with the Mercedes cursor, the resulting Circle will pass through that point rather than being a tangent to the curve.
The next step depends on the geometric situation. If there is only one solution, the circle is automatically drawn. If there are two or four solutions, the Eyeball cursor appears and the ghost contour of the Wall flips from one position to the other as you move the cursor around. Click when it is at the right place to complete the circle. If there is no solution (for example, if you define three parallel edges for tangency), no circle will be made. Note: Unlike circular Walls, Circles can be fully closed. You will obtain a single element, not two half-circles.
1026
Documentation
Stretching Curves
You can modify the circumference or radius of Curved Walls, Arcs and Circles with either the Stretch command or the pet palette icon.
Angular Stretch
Use the Angular Stretch icon to change the elements arc length by dragging its endpoint (or reference line endpoint, in case of a curved wall) along the curve.
Alternatively, transform an Arc into a full Circle or the other way around.
Note: A curved Wall stretched into a full circle will be transformed into two half-circular elements.
Radial Stretch
Use the Radial Stretch icon to increase or decrease the elements radius by dragging its edge or reference line.
1027
Documentation
Stretch Ellipse
You can modify the shape of a closed ellipse or full circle by stretching it. Select the ellipse or circle.
Click on a node to bring up the pet palette. Choose the Stretch Ellipse icon. Drag the cursor to stretch the ellipse along its axis or stretch the circle into an ellipse.
Click to complete.
1028
Documentation
Editing an Arc Using its Tangent

Edit an arc from any point along its edge using the tangent to the nearest arc endpoint. Click on the edge of any arc and choose the Edit segment using tangent icon from the pet palette.
The tangent to the nearest arc endpoint appears on the plan. Move the cursor to edit the tangent line by choosing a new tangent endpoint. A rubberband line indicates the shape of the resulting new arc. Click to place.
1029
Documentation
Drawing Elliptical Arcs and Full Ellipses

To draw an elliptical arc or a full ellipse, choose the Arc/Circle tool in the Toolbox and one of the Geometry Methods offered by the second icon in the Info Box (Diagonal Ellipse, Semi-Diagonal Ellipse, Ellipse Radii).
The Diagonal Ellipse method creates an Ellipse constrained into a rectangle.
This method stretches the ellipse of an invisible rectangle held by the two points of its diagonal. 1) Click the starting point of the imaginary rectangle. 2) By stretching the imaginary diagonal, you get ellipses of different sizes drawn into the invisible rectangle. 3) With the second click you choose the ellipse of the appropriate size. The Semi-Diagonal Ellipse method works in the same way as the Diagonal method but here you define the imaginary rectangle by its centerpoint and the endpoint of its semi-diagonal.
The Ellipse Radii method defines an elliptical arc by the major and another radius of an ellipse and the angle of the arc.
1) Click the centerpoint of the ellipse. 2) Choose the orientation of the major radius, by clicking again.
1030
Documentation
3) You get the rubberband line of the second radius, which you can stretch to different sizes and angles. Notice the accompanying ellipse that fits the length of the two radii. If you stretch the minor radius too far away or right in line with the major radius, you cannot draw the ellipse. 4) In the final phase, ArchiCAD holds the ellipse while you define the side angle of the arc. First, you use a rubberband line to define the side where the angle starts from. Then you define a different side that closes the angle, while ArchiCAD follows the angle with the Elliptical Arc. Neither side of the angle remains visible when the final arc is drawn.
1031
Documentation
Convert Ellipse to Circle

To convert an ellipse to a circle: Select the ellipse. Choose one of its nodes to bring up the pet palette. Choose the Convert Ellipse to Circle icon.
The ellipse will be transformed into a circle, whose radius is equal to that of the ellipse at the clicked node.
1032
Documentation
Drawing Splines
To draw a natural Spline or a Bzier curve, choose the Spline tool in the Toolbox and the first (natural spline) or the second (Bzier curve) Geometry Method icon in the Info Box.
Natural splines can be defined by placing nodes, which the program automatically connects, thereby generating a smooth custom curve. The angle of the tangent and the shape of the spline generated with it is affected by each subsequent node defined. You can conclude this operation by double-clicking on the last node or by clicking the OK button in the Control Box. Clicking OK always results in a closed spline.
Bzier splines are somewhat more complex in nature, but they allow more accurate reproduction of specific custom shapes. Bzier splines are defined by nodes, just like natural splines, but they also have editable tangent handles on either side of these nodes, plus one tangent handle at each end (if it is an open spline). The shape of the Bzier spline is affected by the direction of the tangent and the length of each tangent handle. When defining Bzier splines, click once to place a node, and keep the mouse button depressed. By moving away from the node in any direction, you are in effect defining the initial tangent, and the length of the handle that defines the curvature. If you release the mouse button, ArchiCAD will assume that you wish to jump to the definition of the next node with your next click. Keep the mouse button depressed, and then define the next tangent and node as above. You can conclude this operation by double-clicking the last node or by clicking the OK button in the Control Box. Clicking OK always results in a closed spline. You can edit Bzier splines by varying the length of each handle separately: use the pet palette command for Move tangent handle.
Note that there is only one angle associated with both handles of a node, but the length of each handle may be different. The longer the editing handle, the smoother the curve will be at the control point. You can pull out the handles from sharp nodes to turn them into curved ones.
1033
Documentation
Note: The visibility of the editing handles of Bzier splines depends on the status of the View > On-Screen View Options > Spline Handles toggle. If this toggle is set to Show, then all editing handles are visible on the Floor Plan. If the toggle is set to Hide, then only the editing handles of the spline last selected will be visible; if the selection is removed, no editing handles will be visible.
1034
Documentation
Editing Splines
When the Spline tool is selected in the Toolbox, you can freely edit selected splines in the following ways.
Insert new node: Click a spline with the Mercedes cursor; then use the Add new node to Spline command from the pet palette. Delete a node: Choose the Modify Spline path command from the pet palette, then drag a node onto its neighbor to delete it, thereby modifying the shape of the spline.
Move a node: Choose Modify Spline path from the pet palette, then drag a node to move it without changing its handles. To unify a series of connected splines: Select the splines. Choose the Edit > Reshape > Unify command.
1035
Documentation
Drawing Freehand Curves

To draw a freehand curve, choose the Spline tool in the Toolbox and the third Geometry Method icon in the Info Box.
This method is particularly useful to mark up documents. When you start marking-up, ArchiCAD automatically activates the Spline tool with the Freehand geometry method. For more information, see Project Mark-Up. The Freehand method always creates natural Splines.
1036
Documentation
Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines

By combining the capabilities of the various line type tools, you can create a series of chained straight and curved line segments using the Polyline tool or the Chained geometry method of the Line tool. The difference between the two options is the result they produce. Polylines are single elements drawn using the Polyline tool. Chained lines are a set of connected line segments drawn with the Line tool. Each line segment is a separate element, although they can be grouped before or after they are created. To group a chained line, activate the Edit > Grouping > Autogroup command before you start to draw Chained lines, or select the set of Chained lines you have drawn and activate the Edit > Grouping > Group command.
To draw a Polyline, choose a geometry method for the Polyline tool: Polyline method, Rectangle method or Rotated Rectangle method.
To draw a Chained line, choose a geometry method for the Line tool: Chained method, Rectangle method, or Rotated Rectangle method.
With either method (Polyline or Chained Line) you produce a series of straight or curved line segments joined at their endpoints. Draw a line segment and click to complete the segment. As you click to complete one segment, you simultaneously begin the next one. Click the OK button in the Control Box or double-click the last endpoint to complete the polyline or chained line. For an illustration of this process, see Create a Chain of Walls. To cancel the last-drawn segment of a polyline or chained line, use the Backspace key.
1037
Documentation
Continue a Polyline
You can extend a completed Polyline from either end: Select the existing polyline.
Click on either endpoint of the polyline. Choose the Continue Polyline icon from the appearing pet palette.
Draw additional line segments, then double-click (or click OK in the Control box) to complete the polyline.
Note: When extending the original polyline, you can backspace to delete the last drawn segments, but you cannot delete segments of the original polyline.
Create Rectangles with Line or Polyline Tool

Using the Rectangle method with the Line tool will produce four individual Line segments, grouped by default. Using the Rectangle method with the Polyline tool will produce a single Rectangle. With the Rotated Rectangle method, you first define a rotation vector for the rectangles reference line. The rotation vector also defines the length of the two segments parallel to it. By hitting the Shift key once, you can unlock the length component constraint and use only the rotation angle component of the rotation vector.
1038
Documentation
Decompose a Polyline
To decompose a Polyline: Select the Polyline. Choose Edit > Reshape > Explode into Current View. You will then obtain a series of Lines and Arcs. Note: If the Edit > Grouping > Autogroup command is active, the result will be grouped.
1039
Documentation
Unify Drafting Elements into Polyline

Connected Lines, Arcs, and Polylines can be transformed into a single Polyline. Select all connecting elements Choose the Edit > Reshapes > Unify command. The attributes of the last selected element will be applied to the unified set of elements. You can unify multiple sets of selected, connected items with a single Unify command. Note: To unify items that are Grouped, you must first Suspend Groups. For more information, see Group Elements.
Open a Closed Polyline

To open a closed polyline by deleting one of its segments: Activate the Arrow tool. Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) the line segment you wish to delete. Note: Use the same method to cut a polyline having at least 3 segments into two independent polylines.
1040
Documentation
Hotspots
Hotspots are simple points indicated by a small cross. Their main role is to help position elements in 2D views. Hotspots do not appear on printed and plotted outputs and can be deleted when they are not needed anymore. For more information, see Hotspot Tool Settings.
Placing Hotspots
When you have made your Pen Color and Layer choice in the Hotspot settings dialog box, you are ready to place Hotspots. Just click at the desired location. In some situations, you may need to continue construction starting exactly on a given point of an element at a location where it has no hotspot or special point. The solution is to generate hotspots that will allow you to snap to this point. Note: The Guide Lines function is also available for locating intersection points and other useful snap points. You can automatically generate Hotspots at intersection points on the imaginary extensions of elements. The Hotspot tool must be active. 1) Select a line, edge or arc and place the cursor on top of another (the cursor will be in the Mercedes form). 2) Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) to generate a hotspot.
Note: Ctrl/Cmd-clicking the edge of a Roof while another one is selected will fit the clicked edge to the common ridge (if any) of the two roof planes. With the Wall or Line tool active, selected Walls or Lines will be extended to meet the intersection point with the clicked edge. To place a Hotspot at a remote tangential point, select the arc(s) and Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) with the Checkmark cursor on any element (hotspot or node). Tangential hotspots will be generated on the imaginary extensions of arcs or curved edges.
1041
Documentation
It is also possible to add Hotspots with a Ctrl-click (Cmd-click) to: A parallel projection of a wall, a line or the edge of a roof, a fill or a slab from a selected hotspot.
A perpendicular projection from any element hotspot (Checkmark cursor location) or any empty space (Crosshair cursor location) to a selected wall, slab, roof, fill edge or line.
1042
Documentation
Figures
Figures are image files imported and then embedded into the ArchiCAD project file. They can be inserted in any of the 2D windows (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document window, Detail, Worksheet, Layout). Figures are placed and manipulated by the dedicated Figure tool. For more information, see Figure Tool Settings. A placed Figure can serve as a background image to the ArchiCAD model by using the Align View function. You can also place the cropped content of an ArchiCAD window in the plan as a figure. For more information, see Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool. Note: Drawings, in contrast to Figures, are assigned ID numbers and (optionally) titles. Their frames can be cropped. Unlike Figures, Drawings represent linked files that can be updated. For more information, see Drawings in Model Views. Figures can be displayed either with or without handles or as simple placeholders. This setting is global, that is, it affects all placed Figures. The choice can be made using the Figure Handle toggle under View > On-Screen View Options. Note: Regardless of the import method, the images of Figure type elements are embedded in the Project and can make the file quite large. Use sizes and resolutions only as needed to prevent overloading the Project.
Placing Figures
When you have made your choices in the Figure Tool Settings dialog box, just click with the cursor to place the Figure. If the result does not satisfy you (for example, the image is too small or too large), open the Figure Settings dialog box again, and adjust the size, resolution or other settings before placing the Figure again. You can also stretch the placed Figure, using the Shift key to constrain the diagonal and keep the images proportions. If desired, however, you can stretch the Figures X and Y dimensions independently. Before you place the Figure, its ghost contour follows the movements of your cursor showing its proportional size. The ghost contours anchor point is sensitive to element nodes and edges. To make this option inactive, go to Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options > Show Ghost Bounding Box of Objects, Columns, Figures and Drawings. You can also place Figures in ArchiCAD directly, without using the Figure tool, by pasting bitmaps originating either from another ArchiCAD window (for example a PhotoRendered Model picture) or another image-processing software. The pasted element will be handled as a Figure by ArchiCAD. Note: Images imported by this method are always pasted pixel by pixel in the current zoom.
1043
Documentation
Drawings in Model Views

Drawings are ArchiCAD views and external files that have been placed into the project. You can customize the size, title and framing options for your drawings. (Figures, in contrast, do not have these features.) Unlike Figures, imported drawings can be updated automatically to reflect all changes in the source file, or you can opt to update them manually. Drawings can be placed into either 2D Model views or Layouts. Drawings placed into Model views are external files (such as DWG, PDF files and image files). They cannot include ArchiCAD views. Drawings placed onto Layouts, however, include ArchiCAD views (from the current project file and other project files), as well as all other external files available to ArchiCAD. For more information, see Drawings in the Layout Book. The Drawing Tool allows you to place Drawings into your project and to access and define the Drawing Settings.
Deleting a Drawing
To delete a drawing, select it and delete it like any other ArchiCAD element. Note that deleting a drawing is not undoable EXCEPT if the active window is the same type (e.g. Floor Plan or Layout window) as the window which contained the deleted drawing.
Placing Drawings into a Model window

Drawings can be placed into any model view except a 3D Window or a Schedule view. Placing a Drawing into a model can be useful if, for example, you receive a standard roof structure detail drawing from a manufacturer in PDF format. You can place this PDF document as a Drawing into your Detail window, add your own alterations or markups as needed, then place it as a modified detail onto a Layout. Similarly, an external DWG file can be placed as a Drawing into your model as a vectorial drawing. This is a simpler solution for accessing DWG files in ArchiCAD, as opposed to the more complex method of attaching the DWG file as an XREF. Images placed with the Drawing tool in a Model view can be preferable to placing images with the Figure tool, since such a Drawing retains its source file information and can be updated. Drawings placed into a model view (as opposed to onto a Layout) are scale-independent. To place a Drawing into a Model window: 1) Activate the Drawing Tool. 2) Click in the model window where you want to place the Drawing. 3) The Link to directory dialog box opens. Browse for the desired file, select it and click Open. Note: If you are importing a multi-page PDF document, a dialog box prompts you to choose which of the pages you wish to place. 4) The Drawing is placed by the anchor point that you selected in Drawing Settings (by default, its centerpoint).
1044
Documentation
Alternatively, use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing command to access the same dialog box.
You can change the settings of placed Drawings in the Drawing Settings dialog box. Drawings placed in Model Views are listed in the Drawing Manager, and can be updated and managed the same way as those placed on Layouts. For details, see Managing and Updating Placed Drawings.
1045
Documentation
Annotation
Annotation Elements display numeric or textual data in 2D views, either about the elements they refer to or as standalone informative elements. Dimensions are added to construction elements and drafting elements in the Floor Plan and the Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, and Worksheet/Detail windows using Dimension tools. The Grid Tool allows you to place Grid elements individually or in a Grid System. Grid elements are part of the model and serve as an editable framework for placing multiple elements or for identifying locations in the model. Texts are inserted using the Text tool, in text blocks accompanied by a flexible formatting options. Autotext is a text element containing a definition filled in automatically by the program. Autotext can be placed in both Model Views and Layouts. Labels allow you to link text information or a symbol to construction elements and 2D Fills. Freestanding Labels are also available.
Dimensioning The Grid Tool Text Blocks Autotext Labels Text Editing in ArchiCAD
1046
Documentation
Dimensioning
ArchiCADs dimensioning tools give you great flexibility in annotating the Virtual Building with your choice of measurement units and standards. Dimensions are associative, which means that dimension values will be updated automatically if the element they are associated to is modified. Exception: Dimensions you set to be static are not associative. See Static Dimensions. Dimensions can be placed in the Floor Plan, the Section/Elevation/IE, the 3D Document, and the Detail and Worksheet windows. The 3D Document window has some unique dimensioning options. See Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window. The following dimensioning construction options are available: Linear Dimensions display element lengths, both curved and straight.
Elevation Dimensions (a construction method of the Linear Dimension tool) display height values in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document views.
Level Dimensions display height values on the Floor Plan.
Radial Dimensions display the radius of curved elements.
Angle Dimensions display the angle in degrees between pairs of lines or edges.
Dimensioning Standards Placing Dimensions Glossary of Dimensioning Terms Static Dimensions Linear Dimensions Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window Dimensioning Overlapping Elements
1047
Documentation
Elevation Dimensions Dimensioning Wall Thickness Radial Dimensions Level Dimensions Angle Dimensions Editing a Dimension Chain Modify the Witness Line Dimension Text Type and Font Move or Edit Dimension Text Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document Secondary Dimensions (Add-On) Automatic Exterior Dimensioning Automatic Interior Dimensioning
1048
Documentation
Dimensioning Standards
ArchiCAD supports the use of different Dimensioning Standards. Use Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions to apply a Dimensioning standard or to create a customized standard.
For more information, see Dimensions Preferences. For a quick way to change the dimension standard of your project, use the Dimensions pop-up in the Quick Options Palette.
Custom Dimension Standards

You can fine-tune any of the dimension unit types in the project. For example, if you are working with the millimeter standard, but decide to display Door/Window dimensions in centimeters, go to Dimensions Preferences. Choose Door/Window as the dimension type and change its units to centimeters.
The project Standard is now Custom. You can save this new standard under its own name by clicking Add. Dimension unit standards you set here are saved along with your project.
1049
Documentation
Vary Dimension Standard by View

While the Dimension Standard set here applies to the Project globally, you can apply a different dimension standard to any view of the Project, if needed. To change the dimension standard for any single view, go to itsView Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel and adjust its Dimensions setting.
1050
Documentation
Placing Dimensions
The general process for dimensioning is as follows: 1) Select the appropriate dimensioning tool; choose settings in Dimension Tool Settings, construction and geometry methods. 2) As applicable, click along the element you want to dimension; these clicks create temporary reference points that indicate exactly where dimension units should begin and end. As you click on the element to be dimensioned, the element will be highlighted, as an aid to help you identify which element you are working on. Note: This highlight functions if the Highlight contours of related element(s) checkbox is active in Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information. 3) Double-click after placing the final reference point. 4) Click the black hammer cursor where you want the dimension chain to appear. For some dimension types, a rubberband line follows your cursor to help you choose the correct dimension direction. Linear Dimensions dimensions offer additional options (involving additional clicks) for determining the dimension line location. See Linear Dimension Line Placement Options. You can revoke any marked Reference Point by clicking it again.
1051
Documentation
Glossary of Dimensioning Terms

Reference points are temporary nodes that you create on ArchiCAD elements during the dimensioning process. If you place a reference point at an ineligible location (or in empty space), the cursor shows a rectangular reference point (as shown in the image below) instead of the regular circular one. This means that the reference point will be a static one and will not follow suit when the dimensioned elements are stretched or dragged. See also Static Dimensions.
Reference points are temporary; they disappear after you click to place the dimension chain. The Dimension Chain appears after you click the hammer cursor at the end of the dimensioning process.
A dimension chain, for Linear Dimensions, consists of a dimension line along the length of the element; witness lines (perpendicular to the dimension line), if Dimension Settings are set to display them; dimension points (where the dimension line intersects with the witness lines). A dimension unit connects two adjacent dimension points and includes the written dimension values.
1052
Documentation
Static Dimensions
Static Dimensions are an exception to the general rule that dimensions in ArchiCAD are associative. You can opt to make any linear or level dimension a static dimension, by enabling the Static Dimension checkbox in Dimension Settings.
The dimension line of a static dimension will not follow any modifications to model elements. The reference points of Static dimensions are shown as rectangular points (rather than the circle points on associative dimensions.) Once a dimension has been made static, it cannot be made associative again. If none of a dimension chains markers are attached to construction nodes, the dimension chain will become static. Static dimensions behave like other dimensions in two ways: 1) If rotated or mirrored, the value is always turned so that you can read it from the bottom. 2) If the Dimension Unit is modified in Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions, all values will be updated. For more information, see Dimensions Preferences.
1053
Documentation
Linear Dimensions
Linear Dimensions measure linear distances along an element, either straight or curved. Four construction methods are available in both the Info Box and the Linear Dimension Tool Settings dialog box. With the Linear method, distances between two adjacent Reference Points are measured and displayed.
With the Cumulative method, the first Reference Point is considered the zero point of the dimension chain. All dimension values of the chain will give you the distance between any Reference Point and the zero point.
With the Base-line method, measuring the dimensioning distances is the same as with the Cumulative method, but the zero point is not marked.
With the fourth icon, you create Elevation Dimensions.
For more information, see Elevation Dimensions. Geometry Methods for Linear Dimensions are set in the Info Box.
The default Any Direction method enables you to create dimension chains at a variety of positions relative to the elements position: either parallel to the first two reference points placed, or horizontal/vertical, or parallel to another edge/surface of your choice.
The X-Y Only method restricts the dimension line zones to horizontal and vertical only, relative to the screen.
The Arc Length method allows you to dimension curved elements.
The Geometry Method you choose applies to the entire dimension chain, and cannot be set unit by unit. Note: There are additional Geometry Methods for use in the 3D Document window. See Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window. 1054
Documentation
Linear Dimension Line Placement Options

To dimension a straight element, place a series of dimension points along the element, then double-click. The next step is to move the hammer cursor to the position where you want to place the dimension line. When dimensioning a straight vertical or horizontal edge, a rubberband line provides feedback when placing the dimension line:
However, dimensioning an element in any other position - and if you are using the default Any Direction geometry method - will give you three dimension line options (zones): vertical, horizontal, or parallel to the first two dimension points in the chain. Move the cursor around to get feedback on the possibilities.
For example, when dimensioning the slanted roof in the Section below with the Any Direction method, use the parallel option to place the dimension line parallel to the roof:
1055
Documentation
Alternatively, by moving the hammer cursor to another zone, you can choose a horizontal or vertical dimension instead:
An additional dimension line vector is also available: After the black hammer cursor appears, you can move this cursor to any straight line/edge in the project. Note: In the 3D Document window, you must align the dimension to the edge of a construction element - line segments do not work. In the following image, we have dimensioned the slanted roof and the black hammer cursor appears, and the standard three dimension line directions (horizontal, vertical, parallel to roof) are available.
Suppose you want to dimension the roof using the vector parallel to the diagonal, instead of parallel to the roof. After clicking the two dimension nodes on either end of the roof, move the cursor over the diagonal. The cursor then changes to the Mercedes + parallel dimension cursor shape, to indicate that it has found an edge, to which the dimension line can be parallel:
1056
Documentation
Click now to constrain the dimension line to be parallel to this line/edge. Now drag the dimension line to its final position and click with the black hammer to place the dimension chain.
Linear Dimensioning of Curved Elements

The Arc Length geometry method measures the length of a curved line or wall. With the Linear Dimension tool active, choose the Arc Length Geometry Method from the Info Box. Click with the Mercedes cursor on a circular arc or a curved edge - you dont have to find the end points, you can click anywhere on the curve.
ArchiCAD automatically marks the end points of the arc or the edge. This is the edge that arc length will be measured on. You may click any other points you want to add to the dimension chain. Double-click anywhere in the workspace with the Empty Pencil cursor or click the OK button in the Control Box to finish selecting arc points for dimensioning. The Hammer cursor appears, prompting you to place the dimension chain. Click to place the dimension chain.
1057
Documentation
Note: The Arc Length geometry method cannot be used for elliptical arcs and splines, Curtain Walls, or for (closed) circles. To achieve an approximate dimensioning of an elliptical arc or spline, first select it and turn it into a series of arcs using the Magic Wand tool, then use the Arc Length geometry method to dimension the arcs.
1058
Documentation
Linear Dimensions in the 3D Document Window

In the 3D Document window, use the Linear Dimension tool to place dimensions as needed. All the options for Linear Dimensions are available except Arc Length. As in 2D windows, you can limit the options to the X-Y Only constraint, or use Any Direction to place the line parallel to the first two clicked points.
Furthermore, as in 2D windows, the Any Direction option lets you constrain the dimension line by clicking with the mercedes+parallel dimension cursor on any other line/edge. In the 3D Document window only: You can constrain the plane in which the dimension line is to be placed. To choose a plane constraint for linear dimensions in the 3D Document window, choose among the options in the Linear Dimension Tool Info Box:
the horizontal plane the vertical plane any other plane The default is the Any Plane option, which gives you the most freedom.
Choose Dimension Plane in 3D Document Window

When placing a linear dimension in the 3D Document window with the Any Plane or the Vertical geometry method, you can choose the dimension plane. Suppose we wish to dimension the width of the roof in a 3D Document. Activate the Linear Dimension tool. Select the Any Plane geometry method in the Info Box, as well as the Any Direction option.
1059
Documentation
As usual, click at both ends of the roof, then double-click. The black hammer cursor appears.
Next, choose the plane in which you wish to measure the dimension. Move the cursor onto the roof. The magnet+dimension line cursor appears, indicating that you will select a surface as the dimension plane.
Click to measure the dimension along this plane. Now the cursor will move only in this defined plane. Click one more time to place the dimension line at the desired location.
1060
Documentation
Offset Dimension Plane

Once you have placed a dimension line in the 3D Document window, you can offset it within its current plane. This option is available for dimensions in the 3D Document only:
The usual dimension line editing options are also available from the pet palette (insert/merge dimension point, drag or align dimension line.) See Editing a Dimension Chain.
1061
Documentation
Dimensioning Overlapping Elements

You may have to dimension elements that overlap with each other. The element detection feature makes it easy to know which element you are associating your dimension to. By default, element detection is activated in ArchiCAD. During dimensioning or parameter transfer operations, the contours of related elements will be highlighted to help you identify which element you are working on. In the following image, the element detection highlight tells you that the linear dimension you are placing will be associated to the highlighted column, not to the wall.
If youd rather associate the dimension to the wall, move the cursor until the wall is highlighted, then place the dimension.
(Another way to select one of several overlapping elements is to pre-select one of them, then click TAB until the Info Tag indicates that the required element is ready to be selected.)
To activate/deactivate element detection, go to Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information, and activate/deactivate this checkbox: Highlight contours of related element(s) when placing or editing element. You can set a unique color for this highlight.
1062
Documentation
Elevation Dimensions
A special case of the linear Dimension tool is the Elevation Dimensioning construction method. Elevation Dimensions allow you to place height markers in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows. You can also use Elevation Dimensions on the Floor Plan, but there they only measure the Floor Plans Y-axis from the current Project/User Origin. Elevation Dimensioning is calculated based on the Dimension Origin, which you can set as needed in the Elevation Dimensioning Settings dialog box.
A series of Elevation Dimensions behaves as an associative dimension chain. You can select and edit the whole series by clicking on the invisible axis of the chain (where the cursor changes to Mercedes with Arrow) with the Arrow tool, or Shift-clicking with another tool active.
Individual markers in the chain cannot be edited. Place individual markers by clicking the point you want to dimension, then double-click, or click OK in the Control Box. Use the Hammer cursor to position the marker. To place a chain of Elevation markers, click multiple points, then double-click (or click OK in the Control Box) and use the Hammer cursor to place the chain.
1063
Documentation
Note: Hotlinked Modules placed in the Project may contain Elevation Dimensions that refer to a User Origin. In this case, the dimension values will be the same as in the source Project. Different rules apply if you move the Elevation Dimensions in the host Project:
If you select and move all elements related to an Elevation Dimension without selecting the dimension chain itself, the dimension chain will move with them. The origin of the dimension values will keep its position, which means that the numbers will change. If you select and drag elements together with the Elevation Dimension they relate to, and the dimension chain has a custom origin, the origin will move with the dimensions, which means that the numbers will keep their values.
1064
Documentation
Dimensioning Wall Thickness

In the Floor Plan, you can dimension wall thickness in a single click by clicking on the walls Reference Line. (The wall should be a regular or slanted straight wall.) In this example, with the Linear Dimension tool active, move the cursor to the walls Reference Line. (It is indicated by a bold Mercedes.) See Wall Reference Lines. Click once on the Reference Line. Two dimension points appear.
Double-click to complete the dimension chain and place it with the Hammer cursor.
If you place a series of wall-thickness dimension markers along a chained wall, only the dimension points located on walls perpendicular to the dimension chain will be displayed.
1065
Documentation
Radial Dimensions
Radial Dimensions display the value of the radius of a curved element.
Radial dimensions have two main parts: the Dimension (pointer) Line and the text. Click on a point of the curved element. Draw the dimension line, either toward the centerpoint of the curve or in the opposite direction. The radial dimension must always originate from a curved element. Click again to place the text, which shows the value of the radius. Text orientation can be selected in Radial Dimension Tool Settings.
Stretching and Moving Radial Dimensions

You can adjust a placed radial dimension with the aid of the pet palette: Use the Stretch Radial Dimension icon to stretch the dimension.
Use the Move Radial Dimension icon to move it.
Note: Deleting the dimensioned element will also delete any Radial Dimensions associated with it.
1066
Documentation
Level Dimensions
Level Dimensions are point-level elevation markers common to architecture and site planning. They measure the elements vertical height along the Z-axis. They are available in the Floor Plan and in Worksheet/Detail windows. They are not available in the Section/Elevation/IE window or 3D Document. Note: You can place Elevation Dimensions in a Section/Elevation/IE window. To place a level dimension in your Project, select the Level Dimension tool, then click anywhere in the window. The elevation of the active story is immediately displayed along with a standard level dimension marker. The Level Dimension Marker style can be chosen from the pop-up in the Level Dimensions Info box:
The units used by the Level Dimensions are a project-wide preference set in Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions. Click the Level Dimension icon and choose your preferred measurement unit.
Level Dimensions placed with Gravity On on top of Slabs, Roofs or Meshes are associated to them. For more information, see Gravity. You can edit the level dimension text separately as well as drag, rotate, and otherwise modify the text independently of the marker. The Level Dimension markers are individual elements, and each one can be individually edited. They can be dragged, rotated and mirrored, with or without copies, as any other element. If multiplied together with the reference element, the copies of the markers will be associated with the copies of the elements. If you multiply only the Level Dimension, the copies will be associative with the same element (or the story level) as the original. Associated Level Dimensions remain linked to the elements they were placed on top of, even if they are no longer inside the contour of these elements. If a Level Dimension falls outside the contour of the element it is associated to, its value changes according to the following rules:
1067
Documentation
With Slabs, there is no change: the value is the same as if the Level Dimension were still inside the Slabs contour. With Roofs, the value displayed is calculated by a projected extension of the roof (that is, what the value would be). With Meshes, it is the Storys height that will be displayed (but the Level Dimension remains associated to the Mesh). For more information, see Level Dimension Tool Settings.
1068
Documentation
Angle Dimensions
Angle Dimensions display angle values between a pair of lines or linear edges. An angle dimension can be either acute
or obtuse;
you choose this geometry method from Angle Dimension Tool Settings or the Info Box. Note: Angle dimensions are not available in the 3D Document Window. To dimension an angle, first define the pair of lines or edges by choosing exactly four reference points. These four points will determine two infinite lines that ArchiCAD will use to calculate the angle dimension. Choose reference points in one of the following ways: Click any existing line or edge (Wall, Slab, Roof, Mesh, Fill). This will immediately place two reference points on the clicked line/edge.
Click the hotspots of existing elements.
Click anywhere on the plan or on a Guide Line (in this case, the angular dimensions will not be associative).
Now you have defined two infinite reference lines, which divide the space into four quadrants. With the reference points defined, the Hammer cursor appears. Click to place the angle dimension. The arc of the angle dimension will pass through the point you click. The Angle Dimension Info Box offers two construction methods:
1069
Documentation
With the Inner Dimension (acute) construction method, only the quadrant of the space in which you click with the Hammer cursor will be dimensioned.
With the Outer Dimension (obtuse) construction method, ArchiCAD will calculate the angle of the clicked quadrant, plus the two adjacent quadrants.
Placing Angle Dimensions on Curves

Select the Angle Dimensioning tool in the Toolbox, then click the bent polygon edge or circular arc you wish to dimension. The two endpoints of the arc will be automatically marked.
Finally, place the dimension line with the Hammer cursor.
Note: It is always the arc side of the angle that will be dimensioned, regardless of the geometry method you choose, or which side you click to.
1070
Documentation
Editing a Dimension Chain

If you transform all of the elements a dimension chain refers to, the chain will be transformed along with the elements. If only some of the elements are edited, the Dimension Line will keep its place and angle, and only the markers, witness lines and values involved will change. If dimensioned elements are multiplied, you must also select the dimensions. The copies of the dimensions will be associative to the copies of the elements. Note: You can drag or rotate a dimension chain as a whole. Units or points cannot be dragged, rotated or mirrored away from the parent dimension chain.
Select Part of the Dimension Chain Insert New Dimension Points Delete a Dimension Point Delete a Dimension Unit or Chain Merge Dimension Chains Drag a Dimension Chain Align Dimension Line to an Edge or Plane Rotate Dimensions Mirror Dimensions Select Part of the Dimension Chain
Select the whole dimension chain by clicking at a free spot on the dimension line with the Checkmark with Mercedes cursor. Select a Dimension Unit by clicking its midpoint with the Checkmark with Arrow cursor. Select the Dimension Text by using the Quick Selection cursor. Or click on the lower left corner of the text with the Checkmark with Arrow cursor. When one or more dimension chains are selected, double-clicking the Text tools icon in the Toolbox opens Dimension Text Settings. For more information, see Dimension Text Content Panel.
1071
Documentation
Insert New Dimension Points

You can insert any number of new dimension points into the chain. First, select the chain. Then, with the Dimension Tool selected, Ctrl/Cmd-click on the desired new Reference Point. The new point can be located between existing chain points or anywhere outside the dimension chain.
The existing dimension units will be divided into the necessary number of units. Another way to insert a dimension point is to use the pet palette. Select the dimension chain. Click on the dimension line to bring up the pet palette. Choose the Insert/Merge Dimension Point command.
Click on the element whose dimension you want to add, or click anywhere on the dimension line to place a dimension there.
The dimension chain becomes longer as needed. You cannot insert points by selecting the dimension units directly; you must select the entire chain. Note: You can insert one reference point at a time into a single dimension chain.
Delete a Dimension Point

If you select and delete a dimension point in the middle of a chain, the adjoining two dimension units are merged.
If the deleted point was at the end of the chain, the last unit disappears and the chain becomes shorter.
1072
Documentation
Delete a Dimension Unit or Chain

If you select and delete a dimension unit in the middle of a dimension chain, the chain will be broken into two separate parts.
You can eliminate an entire dimension chain by selecting and deleting it.
Merge Dimension Chains

Separate dimension chains can be merged by selecting one of the chains and Ctrl/Cmd-clicking on the other one. Another way is to use the Insert/Merge Dimension Point command from the Pet Palette: select one dimension chain, bring up the pet palette and click the command, then click on the other dimension chain to merge it.
The second chain will be deleted and its Reference Points added to, and dimensioned by, the first (selected) chain. You can use this technique even with dimension chains that are not parallel with one another and/ or have no overlapping parts at all.
Drag a Dimension Chain

Dimension chains can be dragged to a new location: use the Drag command from the pet palette of a selected Dimension chain.
Note that associative Dimension chains can only be dragged along the direction of their witness lines. You can move the cursor anywhere when dragging, but only the perpendicular component of the movement will be applied to the chain. You cannot drag a Radial Dimension away from the element it dimensions; you can only move it to another location along the elements curve.
Align Dimension Line to an Edge

If you want to line up a dimension line with another existing line or edge in the window, use the pet palettes Align dimension line command.
1073
Documentation
First, select the Dimension chain. Choose Align dimension line from the pet palette.
Click with the cursor on a straight edge or line. The selected Dimension chain will align itself with the clicked element.
Rotate Dimensions
You can use rotation to change the orientation of a Dimension chain after it is completed: use the Rotate Dimension command in the pet palette of a selected Dimension chain.
Rotated Dimension Chains will remain associated to the same nodes, so you will see the length and the values change along with the witness lines. After a rotation, all the reference points will automatically be redimensioned and projected along the new direction.
Mirror Dimensions
Dimension chains can be moved to the opposite side of a Wall by mirroring. Choose the Mirror Dimension command from the pet palette of a selected Dimension chain.
As when mirroring any other element, click twice to define the mirroring vector and place the Dimension chain in its new position. For more information, see Mirroring Elements. The value positions are always automatically recalculated by ArchiCAD so that you can read them from the bottom or from the right.
1074
Documentation
Modify the Witness Line

Witness line styles (e.g., None, Fixed, Custom, or Dynamic) are chosen in the Type and Font and the Marker and Witness Line Options panels of Linear Dimension Tool Settings.
You can edit the length of custom and dynamic witness lines on screen for one or both witness lines of a dimension unit, or for all the witness lines in the chain: select the witness line(s) you want to edit, and drag. To edit all the witness lines, select the Dimension chain and choose the Edit Length of Witness Line command from the pet palette.
Move the cursor to the place where you want the witness line to end. (The Trackers Distance field shows the length of the witness line measured from the Dimension line.) Click to define the new witness line length for all the witness lines in this Dimension chain.
Dynamic witness lines will never extend beyond the reference node of the dimensioned element.
1075
Documentation
Dimension Text Type and Font

Use the options in the Dimension Type and Font Panel of Linear Dimension Settings to set options for displaying Dimension Text in Linear Dimensions.
Note the Horizontal checkbox: it is available if you choose the second, Interrupt option to display dimension text. Check the Horizontal box if you wish to display dimensions horizontally, rather than in the same direction as the dimension line. When the 3D Document is active, the Horizontal option is checked by default.
Move or Edit Dimension Text
1076
Documentation
Move or Edit Dimension Text

Dimension Text items are individually editable. You must first select the Dimension Text item (not the entire Dimension line).
To Edit Dimension Text items graphically:

Once you select a dimension text item, you can change its position and/or orientation using Edit functions (e.g., Drag, Rotate).
To undo the position changes of all modified dimension text items, open the Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions dialog box. and check the Revert All Dimension Text to Automatic Position checkbox. To reset the position of a selected custom text item, check the Revert to Automatic Position box at the bottom of Dimension Text Settings.
To Edit Dimension Text Settings:

Select the Dimension Text, then do one of the following: click the Text icon in the Info Box double-click the Dimension Tool icon in the Toolbox click the Edit > Dimension Text Settings command. (This command is only available when a Dimension Text is selected.)
1077
Documentation
Use Dimension Text Settings to set a custom value for the selected dimension, if needed. Once you set a custom value, this dimension is no longer associative.
1078
Documentation
Associative Dimensions in Sections/Elevations/IE and 3D Document

Dimensions in the Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows are associative, meaning that every dimension point you create adheres to its reference point. For instance, when you stretch the Window in the wall, it will cause the entire dimension chain to be automatically updated.
Elevation Dimensions and Angle Dimensions are also associative. When a Model type Section is turned into a Drawing type Section, dimension points will still remain associated to the right points and will reflect the changes to the model, if you use the Rebuild from Model command. For more information, see Updating Sections.
1079
Documentation
Secondary Dimensions (Add-On)

The Secondary Dimensions function allows you to add metric unit equivalents to dimension values displayed in feet and inches, and vice versa. The Secondary Dimensions hierarchical menu is located in the Document > Document Extras hierarchical menu. Note: If your program does not display the Secondary Dimensions menu, you can add it to your work environment. For more information, see Menu Customization Dialog Box. Use the Document > Document Extras > Secondary Dimensions > Convert Dimensions dialog box to set the unit and the number of decimals of the converted dimension value. Click OK, and the secondary values will appear on the opposite side of the dimension line.
The new values will be placed as a text block, and can be edited as any other text block.
If nothing is selected on the Floor Plan, all placed dimensions will be converted.
If there are selected dimensions, only their values will be converted.
Changes made to dimensioned elements do not automatically update the converted dimensions. Choose Document > Document Extras > Secondary Dimensions > Refresh converted dimensions to update both the value and the location of the dimension. Again, this command will work on either all dimensions (if nothing is selected) or selected ones. If you do not need equivalents any more, simply choose Remove converted dimensions from the Secondary Dimensions menu. For more information, see Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On).
1080
Documentation
Automatic Exterior Dimensioning

You can add automatic associative linear Dimensions to selected elements with Automatic Dimensioning functions. The appearance of automatic dimensions depend on the options chosen in Dimension Tool Settings. (See Dimension Tool Settings.) 1) On the Floor Plan, select the elements to be dimensioned. Open the Automatic Exterior Dimensioning Dialog Box from Document > Document Extras > Automatic Dimensioning > Exterior Dimensioning. Set the desired options 2) Define the direction of the dimension lines. Do this in one of two ways: Click the side edge of any element (the dimension direction will follow the element direction); or Click in an empty area, then click a second time to define the dimension direction. 3) Click with the hammer cursor to place the dimension line(s).
Automatic Dimensioning will automatically place the dimension lines (up to four types) depending on the options you have chosen in the dialog box (see below). If any of these dimension lines is unnecessary (e.g., there are no openings, or the facade is straight), it is discarded.
1081
Documentation
Automatic Exterior Dimensioning Dialog Box

Choose the Document > Document Extras > Automatic Dimensioning > Exterior Dimensioning command to open this dialog box.
Dimension Openings
Check this box if you want to include the dimensions of openings (doors and windows). The applicable options below will be active. Opening center: The dimension will be placed at each openings axis. Opening endpoints: Dimensions will be placed at either end of the opening, according to the definition you choose here: Choose separate dimensioning preference for doors and for windows Note: If Egress and Leaf Size are not the nominal sizes, they can be dimensioned here only if you first activate the "Show Additional Hotspots for Doors/Windows" checkbox in the "Options for GDL Objects" panel of Model View Options (Document > Set Model View). (In earlier library versions, hotspots must be activated by using the corresponding parameters of the library parts.) Note: If you automatically dimension doors placed from the ArchiCAD 12 or ArchiCAD 11 libraries, and if you choose Leaf or Egress size as the preferred door dimension, the door's height value will not be shown unless you choose Leaf or Egress as the Nominal value in Door Settings. (Door widths will be dimensioned without any problem.) If you automatically dimension doors placed from earlier ArchiCAD versions, only the Wallhole and Nominal Size options will work. 1082
Documentation
Use the next three checkboxes to define which element types to dimension individually. You will create as many dimension lines as the number of checkboxes you check here (if the relevant elements can be dimensioned): Dimension Structures (i.e. the linear dimension of the element itself, such as wall thickness) Dimension External Geometry (i.e. linear dimensions of extruding elements, such as a facade) Overall Dimension (a single dimension line that runs the length of the selected element set) Distance between dimension lines: Enter a distance using the working units currently set in ArchiCAD. Place dimensions on four sides: Check this box to automatically place dimension lines on all four sides of the bounding box of the selected elements.
1083
Documentation
Automatic Interior Dimensioning

The Automatic Interior Dimensioning Dialog Box contains options for dimensioning Columns and composite or profile (complex) elements. Open this dialog box from Document > Document Extras > Interior Dimensioning. Choose preferred dimensioning options.
. Column dimensioning: Use these options to set the way you wish to dimension columns. Object center: Dimension the axis of the column Object endpoints: Dimension the endpoints of the column. Composite and Profile dimensioning: Use a combination of these two checkboxes to determine how the skins of composite and profile elements should be dimensioned. Dimension each skin: Each skin of the composite/profile element is dimensioned separately. (If this is unchecked, a single dimension is applied to the total width of all the skins.) Dimension core only: Only the skins (components) that are part of the core of the composite/ profile element are dimensioned. You can dimension each skin/component of the core separately (if you also check the Dimension each skin box above), or dimension the core as a whole (if you leave the above checkbox empty.) Note: This checkbox has the same effect as the Dimension only the Core of Composite and Complex Walls checkbox in the Dimension Details panel of Dimension Tool Settings.
1084
Documentation
Next, draw a line across the selected elements. Walls, Columns, Beams, and Slab, Roof and Mesh edges perpendicular to or crossing the drawn line will be dimensioned. The line can consist of several segments. Double-click to finish drawing the line. An additional click is needed to determine the place of the dimension line. After placing the dimensions, the crossing line disappears.
1085
Documentation
The Grid Tool

About the Grid Tool Components of a Grid Element Visibility of a Grid Element Creating a Straight Grid Element Creating a Curved Grid Element Editing a Grid Element Place a Grid System
1086
Documentation
About the Grid Tool

The Grid Tool allows you to place Grid elements individually or in a Grid System; it is a regular tool in the ArchiCAD Toolbox.
Grid elements are part of the model and serve as an editable framework for placing multiple elements or for identifying locations in the model. While the Construction and Snap Grid (set in the View > Grid Options > Grids and Background) is a global, equally distributed net covering the whole 2D window, and is used as an input and editing aid, the Grid Tool creates a custom local structural grid. The grid created by this tool is interactive, so you can edit grid elements even after placing them. Grid elements can be edited using the Grid Tool Settings dialog box. Grid elements can be placed in either the Floor Plan or the 3D window, but they can be displayed in Sections, Elevations, Interior Elevations and the 3D Document as well. A Grid element marks a vertical location in the model. Like other model elements, Grid elements are saved along with views. Grid element on the Floor Plan:
Grid element in the 3D window:
1087
Documentation
To place a whole scheme of horizontal and vertical gridlines in one step, use the Design > Grid System command. The follow-up Grid System Settings dialog allows you to configure the system of Grid Elements and to place dimensions, beams, columns or optional library parts at the grid intersection points. This image shows a Grid System in 3D with Beams and Columns placed at intersections:
1088
Documentation
Components of a Grid Element

A Grid Element has two main components: Grid Marker and Grid Line. The Grid line can be displayed in three different formats to suit your documentation needs. Grid Markers can be switched on and off optionally at both ends of the Grid Line, in the Grid Tool Floor Plan Panel.
You can stagger grid markers away from the Grid line graphically, using a pet palette command. (See Editing a Grid Element.)
When you stagger the grid markers sideways, a certain line segment will be staggered together with the markers. The length of this line segment is the Staggering value. The default Staggering length for any Grid element can be set in both the Floor Plan and Section/ Elevation panels of Grid Tool Settings.
1089
Documentation
Visibility of a Grid Element

Provided that their layer is visible, Grid elements are visible on: the Floor Plan, on any or all stories: Use the Show on Story pop-up in the Grid Tool Floor Plan Panel.
the Section/Elevation windows, if the Section or Elevation settings allow: Use the Show Grid Elements checkbox on the Section Grid Tool Panel (in Section/Elevation Settings). There are two sets of filtering criteria for display of Grid elements on this Section: You can filter by Grid element Story, and/or you can filter by Grid element Name.
3D window and 3D Documents, if the Grid element is set to appear in 3D: Use the Display in 3D view checkbox in the 3D View panel of Grid Tool Settings.
Detail and Worksheet windows will not display the grid elements, just their exploded views.
1090
Documentation
By default, Grid elements are displayed in 3D as lines only, and are not displayed in renderings. However, you can choose to display Grid elements as model elements in 3D so that they appear in renderings, with a cross-section and materials: to do so, adjust the options in the Grid Tool 3D View Panel.
1091
Documentation
Creating a Straight Grid Element

Grid elements can be created in the Floor Plan or 3D window. The Straight Grid Element method produces one straight Grid Element at a time.
After setting up the element settings or choosing a Favorite, select the Grid Tool. Choose the Straight Grid Element geometry method from the Info Box. Click to place the endpoints and to define the length of Grid Element. The moment you start drawing the Grid Element, a ghost contour appears and it follows the cursor until you click at the second endpoint.
1092
Documentation
Creating a Curved Grid Element

After setting up the element settings or choosing a Favorite, select the Grid Tool. Choose one of the two Curved Grid Element Geometry methods from the Info Box.
The first option defines the curved Grid by the arc's centerpoint and radius. Your first click defines the centerpoint. A ghost contour of the circular grid follows your cursor until you click a second to time to define the radius. After that, only a partial ghost curved segment is shown, until you click a third time to define the length of the arc grid s circumference. When all three points are defined, the ghost contour is replaced by the fully displayed Grid Element.
1093
Documentation
The second option defines the curved Grid by three points on the arc's circumference. You will probably place first two points so that they connect other elements, grid intersections or special snap points. Next, a ghost circle follows the cursor until you click a third time to define the third point.
A fourth click is needed to define the length of the arc segment. The ghost arc is now replaced by the fully displayed Grid Element.
1094
Documentation
Editing a Grid Element

Edit Length of Grid Line
Any Grid elements can be stretched with Pet palette commands: select the Grid Element, then choose the Stretch icon.
Stagger Markers Away from Grid Line

Select a Grid element. Click on the editing hotspot which represents the staggered part of the Grid marker, and then drag the Marker, together with the staggering length, to a new position.
Edit Grid Position

The horizontal position of a grid element can be edited on the Floor plan and 3D window only. Select the Grid Element and use the familiar pet palette commands and shortcuts to Drag, Mirror or Rotate the Grid element, or copies of it.
The vertical position (Z-value) of a grid element can be edited in the 3D window or through the Grid Tool 3D View Panel/Info box.
1095
Documentation
Place a Grid System

To lay out a complete orthogonal or curved grid mesh, use the Grid System function. The Grid System command can save you a lots of time by automating the task of placing multiple Grid Elements in one step, following a defined scheme, and even placing elements on dedicated positions. You can also place dimensions throughout the Grid system in one step. A Grid System is a collection of Grid Elements; each Grid element continues to act as a distinct element, even though they are placed as part of a system. Select Design > Grid System. Adjust the Grid System Settings. The number of horizontal and vertical grid lines to be placed in this Grid System depends on what you set in the Grid Positions panel: click the plus and minus signs to add or remove individual Grid lines from the Grid System.
The number of Grid lines is shown in the axes field below. Click in the Distance field of any Grid line to define its distance from the previous Grid line:
If you do not know the distance you will need between your Grid lines, check the Distribute box for either or both Grid line directions (i.e. horizontal and/or vertical grid lines). This will enable you, when you place the Grid system, to set the beginning and endpoints of the Grid system in the given direction, divided into the number of Grid lines defined in the list. When you are satisfied with Grid System Settings, click OK. You will see a ghost grid system at the cursor, which you can place with two to four clicks: the first click defines the location of the anchor point you selected in the settings the second click defines the rotation of the grid system
1096
Documentation
if you selected the Distribute function as well, then one or two additional clicks are required to define the full distances for distribution in one or both directions, depending whether you checked Distribute for one or both directions.
Note: You can select and edit all or selected elements of a placed grid system by selecting them using any of the ArchiCAD selection methods.
Place Object, Column or Beams with Grid System

Use the General Settings panel of Grid System Settings to place an Object or Column automatically at every Grid intersection point; or to place a Beam along every Grid line of the Grid System.
1097
Documentation
The Settings button next to each checkbox will take you to the relevant Tool Settings dialog box (Column, Object, Beam). For details on these controls, see Grid System General Settings Panel. Although these checkboxes mean that Beams, Columns or objects are placed at each Grid intersection, these elements are independent of the Grid and will not be moved or rotated along with the Grid System.
Dimension Grid System

Two additional checkboxes in the General Settings panel of Grid System Settings enable you to automatically dimension each Grid line segment in the system, and/or to place a single total dimension for each Grid line. These dimensions are associated to the Grid system. The Settings button to the right of the Dimension checkboxes take you to Dimension Default Settings, where you can set the options for the chosen Dimension type for your Grid System. For example, you can set all of the individual Grid line dimension text to be displayed in italic, while the Total Dimension values are displayed in bold type. Note that if you would like to use uniform Dimension settings for both dimension lines, then you can use the Chain button to link them together, in the General Settings panel of Grid System Settings.
1098
Documentation
Text Blocks
Using the Text tool, you can create multiline texts with full-scale font options, multiple styles and alignment in any direction. Text blocks can be created in the Floor Plan, in Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Documents, and in Detail and Worksheet windows, and on Layouts. You can format the content of text blocks as a whole (using Tool Settings or Info Box), and you can also individually format characters within the text block (using the Text Editor). Text blocks are always readable from left to right even after a mirroring. The advantages of freely editable text elements are available for the Label tool as well as the Text tool. (Rich text functions are not available for other textual items in ArchiCAD.) Depending on the state of the Textbox Handles toggle in View > On-Screen View Options, all text blocks can be framed with brackets at each corner handle. This makes text blocks easy to locate and edit, while keeping the text readable.
Placing Text Blocks Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole Resizing Text Graphically Applying Favorite Text Settings Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls
1099
Documentation
Placing Text Blocks

Before starting to type into a text block, you can determine whether it will be a breaking or non-breaking text block. A breaking text blocks width remains fixed, with the line of text breaking automatically to the next line when it reaches the limit during input. A non-breaking text blocks width depends on how much text you enter; you can type as many characters in the same line as you wish. Use a non-breaking text block if you are not sure in advance how long the text will be. To place a breaking text block: 1) Choose the Text tool. 2) Draw a rubberband rectangle to define its corners. This rectangle defines the text block width.
A Text Editor window and a Formatting Palette appear on the screen. For more information, see Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls.
3) Type the desired text into the Text Editor. A flashing text cursor indicates your position in the text block. Note: The style and formatting of a newly placed Text Block depend on the settings in the Text Settings dialog box and Info Box. If you want different style or formatting for particular characters or paragraphs you are typing, use the Formatting Palette. In addition to typing in text, you can use the controls of the Text Editor to add the following predefined items to the text block - Autotext - Favorites - Symbols: Click this button to access a Character Map (Character Palette on MacOS) to choose and insert a symbol.
1100
Documentation
Once you reach the end of the text block, additional text will be automatically entered on the next line.
You can start a new line at any time by hitting the Return key on your keyboard. Click Cancel (Control Box) to cancel the text editing operation. 4) When you are finished, click OK in the Control Box; or click on an empty space in the window; or press Ctrl-Enter (Cmd-Enter). To place a non-breaking text block: 1) Choose the Text tool. 2) Double-click in the window. An editing window and a formatting palette appear on the screen.
3) Type the desired text into the Text Editor. The editing window (and the resulting text block) will extend indefinitely as long as you keep typing or until you hit Enter. The width of the text block will be determined by the width of the longest line of the block. A flashing text cursor indicates your position in the text block.
You can start a new line at any time by pressing Enter. Click Cancel (Control Box) to cancel the text editing operation. 4) When you are finished, click OK; or click on an empty space on screen; or press Ctrl-Enter (Cmd-Enter). The Formatting Palette appears: when you are entering text into the Text Editor by double-clicking inside an existing text block with the Arrow tool in Quick Selection mode by selecting an existing text block (with the Text tool active) and clicking inside the text
1101
Documentation
Formatting Text Blocks As a Whole

Use the Text Tool Settings and Info box to format the Text Block as a whole. Double-click the Text tool to open the Text Settings dialog box, which has two panels: The Text Style Panel settings apply to the appearance of your text characters. The Text Block Formatting Panel settings apply to the shape and appearance of the text block. To stretch a Text Block, select it and reshape it using any of its corner nodes. A rubberband box provides feedback as you stretch; the text in the block will automatically rearrange itself according to the new outline.
1102
Documentation
Resizing Text Graphically

You can change the size of the text inside the text block using a Stretch technique. Select the text block and stretch it with either the Stretch menu command or the pet palette. Move the cursor along the text blocks diagonal, and press the Shift key to constrain it to the diagonal.
With Shift still pressed, click to define the new size. The font size will grow or shrink proportionally.
1103
Documentation
Applying Favorite Text Settings

To apply Favorite settings to the entire text block, select the text block, switch to a Favorite in Text Tool Settings, and click OK (or double-click the desired Favorite from the Favorites palette).
1104
Documentation
Formatting Individual Components of Text Blocks

To format individual characters, lines and paragraphs that have been typed into your text block, or to switch styles while typing, use the Formatting Palette and the indent/tab controls of the Text Editor. The Text Editor and Formatting Palette appear as soon as you click on the Floor Plan (with the Text tool active) and begin typing into the text box. The Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls apply only to the text you are entering in the Text Editor, or to selections inside the Text Editor.
1105
Documentation
Autotext
An Autotext is a text element containing a definition filled in automatically by the program. After you insert an Autotext definition, the program will fill in the data that apply in the current context. This data - which can be text or a numerical value - is automatically updated in accordance with the changes made to the model, layout or drawing. You can add Autotext to any window where the Text tool is active (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/ IE, 3D Document, Detail, Worksheet, 2D Symbol of GDL Object, Layout, Master Layout). Autotext is also available as part of the IDs of Interior Elevations. The style of the Autotext can be formatted the same way as for any manually typed text.
How to Insert Autotext Autotext Reference Drawing
1106
Documentation
How to Insert Autotext

1) Activate the Text tool 2) Click on screen. The Formatting Palette and Text Editor appear. Use one of the following ways to insert Autotext: Click the Insert Autotext button in the Formatting Palette to display a dialog box listing the possible Autotext choices.
You can pick among Autotext in several categories, or choose the All category to see them all. The Recent category will list recently inserted Autotext choices.
The Preview area will either display the relevant value of the chosen Autotext definition, or else a placeholder text plus #. This means either that the information is not available yet (for example, the #Client Name has not yet been filled in the File > Info > Project Info dialog box) or that it cannot be processed for some other reason (for example, because the view has not been placed onto a Layout).
1107
Documentation
The other way to insert Autotext: Right-click at the insertion point in the Text Editor and choose the appropriate command from the Insert Autotext hierarchical menu.
If the information is already available, the appropriate text will appear in the Text Editor after you have selected it.
1108
Documentation
If the referenced information is not available, you will see a placeholder text.
When the missing information becomes available, the placeholder text is immediately updated with the relevant data. You can add any number of Autotexts, and type additional static text, in the same text block. The current Text Settings will be applied. To format individual characters or parts of text within a text block, use the Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls.
Autotext Sources
There are several sources of Autotext: Project-specific information such as the name of the project (not necessarily the same as the file name), the name of the architect, the date of issue or any other piece of information entered in the File > Info > Project Info dialog box. Layout-specific information such as the name or ID of the layout, the name or ID of the subset, the number of layouts in the layout book. Drawing-specific information including the name, drawing scale and magnification factor of the drawing. Information that comes from a specified drawing (one which you define as an Autotext Reference Drawing. System-dependent information (file name, path, date of creation and modification, etc.).
Adding Autotext to GDL Objects

You can use Autotext when scripting GDL objects. For example, if you use a GDL object-type Title block placed on a Master Layout, you can script the Title block to show the Project Name. In a GDL script window, the Text Editor interface (with its lists of Autotext entries) is not available, so you must use the corresponding formatting codes. For a list of Autotext codes for use in GDL scripts, see Autotext Keywords.
1109
Documentation
Autotext Reference Drawing

ArchiCAD lets you set a particular drawing as an Autotext reference. This means that your Autotext does not necessarily have to refer to the view or layout onto which you are placing the text. To set a drawing as Autotext reference, select a drawing in the Navigator or Organizer or on the layout, then right-click to display a context menu and choose the Set as Autotext Reference command. (The same command is also available from the Drawing Manager.)
Once defined as an Autotext Reference, this drawing will appear as a choice in the Insert Autotext dialog box.
The Autotext entries that use the Reference as source will then show values based on the reference drawing. If you later define a different drawing as Autotext Reference, earlier Autotexts referring to the original drawing will remain unchanged.
1110
Documentation
Autotext Keywords
The following Autotext Keywords are available when using the Autotext commands. Use the keywords in the right-hand column to insert Autotext items into GDL scripts. To show this Autotext: Project Info Client Project Name Project Number Company Street City State/Country Postal Code Architect CAD Technician Project Status Date of Issue Keywords Notes Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 System autotexts Type this <CLIENT> <PROJECTNAME> <PROJECTNUMBER> <COMPANY> <STREET> <CITY> <COUNTRY> <CODE> <ARCHITECT> <DRAFTSMEN> <PROJECTSTATUS> <DATEOFISSUE> <KEYWORDS> <NOTES> <CUSTOM1> <CUSTOM2> <CUSTOM3> What it looks like if Autotext is Undefined #Client #Project Name #Pln #Company #Street #City #State/Country #Post #Architect #CAD Technician #Project Status ##/##/#### #Keywords #Notes #Custom 1 #Custom 2 #Custom 3 These autotexts are system-generated and always show the correct value if you have already saved your project file at least once. 11/20/2007 Tuesday, November 20, 2007 3:54 PM These system autotexts will be undefined until you save your project file at least once. #File Name #File Path ##/##/#### #Last saved by #Layout Name #LayID #Subset Name #SubID 1111
Short Date Long Date Time System autotexts (File-dependent) File Name File Path Last saved at Last saved by Layout autotexts Layout Name Layout ID Subset Name Subset ID
<SHORTDATE> <LONGDATE> <TIME>
<FILENAME> <FILEPATH> <LASTSAVEDAT> <LASTSAVEDBY> <LAYOUTNAME> <LAYOUTID> <SUBSETNAME> <SUBSETID>
Documentation
Layout Number Number of Layouts
<LAYOUTNUMBER> <NUMOFLAYOUTS>
#LayNo1 #Drawing Name
Drawing autotexts Drawing Name <DRAWINGNAME> Drawing ID <DRAWINGID> Drawing Scale <DRAWINGSCALE> Original Scale <ORIGINALSCALE> Magnification <MAGNIFICATION>
#Drawing Name #DrgID 1:###### 1:###### ###%
Note: Your Drawing Scale, if you customize it in Drawing Settings, is distinct from its Original Scale (the scale of the Drawings source view).
1112
Documentation
Labels
Labels are text blocks or symbols optionally linked to construction elements and 2D fills. Labels allow you to identify or comment elements or parts of your design. Labels can be framed or unframed, with leader and arrowhead. They can contain custom text specification, predefined automatic texts, or a symbol. See Label Tool Settings. There are three kinds of labels: Independent labels are manually placed in the Floor Plan or in a Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window using the Label tool. Typically, you will use an independent label to display information that does not come from the model (e.g. install snow picks here). Associative labels can be added to placed elements or assigned automatically when the element is created. Typically, you will use associative labels to identify model elements and their parameters. Member labels can be added, in Section/Elevation windows only, to any individual Curtain Wall member.
Placing Independent Labels Placing Associative Labels Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls Tool-Specific Default Labels Define Default Text Content of Labels Symbol Labels
1113
Documentation
Placing Independent Labels

Independent Labels can only be placed manually. First, set the Label Tools default Type to Independent by doing one of the following Choose Independent Label from the pop-up options in the Label Info Box:
Or go to the Label Settings Content and Preview Panel and select Independent Label at the top of the list:
At the top of the Content and Preview panel, click the button at upper right of this panel to choose the type of independent label:
If you choose Text, then click OK to close the dialog box, use the Label Tool to place a predefined default text or a custom text in the Labels Text Box as described below. The predefined default text is whatever you type into the Text Label panel of the Label Settings dialog box. If you choose any of the symbol-style labels from the pop-up list (e.g. Object Label), ArchiCAD will insert this symbol object - a predefined GDL object - when you place the independent Label. When such a symbol Label is placed as an Independent Label, it is not associated to any element in the plan. With the Label Tool active, click anywhere in the workspace to start drawing an independent label. Two additional mouse clicks define the direction and end of the pointer line.
1114
Documentation
If the label content is Text, but no default text has been defined in Label Default Settings: draw a rubberband box after the third mouse-click to define the width of the label text box. If you do not want to predefine the text box width, simply click again at the end of the pointer line.
As with the Text tool, the Text Editor and Formatting Palette will appear. Type any length of text in the text box and click OK in the Control Box to complete the label. To format individual characters, lines and paragraphs that have been typed into your label text block, or to insert text symbols, use the Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls (indent/tab controls). If the label content is Text, and a default text has been defined in Label Default Settings: the label is completed after the third mouse-click.
If the label content is a Symbol: the label is completed after the third mouse-click. ArchiCAD will insert this symbol object - a predefined GDL object - when you place the Label.
1115
Documentation
Placing Associative Labels

Associative Labels can be added to selected placed elements, or they can placed automatically at the same time the element is created. Associative labels, unlike independent labels, remain attached to the element even when you move the element. If you delete the element, its associated labels are also deleted.
To add an associative label to a placed element:

Do one of the following: Select the element, then activate the Label (element type) checkbox in the Listing and Labeling panel of the elements Settings dialog box; or
Activate the Label Tool, set its type to Associative in the Info Box:
... then click the element to place its label. The Tool-specific default label, if any, is placed. (See Tool-Specific Default Labels.)
To add an associative label to an element each time you place it:

Open the elements Default Settings dialog box. Go to the Listing and Labeling panel. Now activate the Label (element type) checkbox. (To define or change the content of the Label, you can access Label Settings here.) See Tool-Specific Default Labels, below.
A Label will be appended every time you place an element of that type.
1116
Documentation
Tool-Specific Default Labels

You can assign a default Label type to each ArchiCAD tool individually using the Content and Preview Panel of Label Settings. For example, here the Wall label default is the Label object Wall Label 13.
Every time you click a Wall to place an associative Label, or every time you automatically label a Wall when placing it, ArchiCAD will place the Wall Label 13. In addition to Symbol labels, the default Label for any Tool can also be any Text, its ID, or a Unique ID.
1117
Documentation
Placing Member Labels on Curtain Walls

A special kind of Associative Label is the Member Label. It is available only in a Section/ Elevation/IE window, and only for Curtain Wall members. Note: To attach an associative Label to the Curtain Wall element as a whole (as opposed to any of its component Members), use the Associative Label type as described above. The Member Label works just like the Associative Label type. It will automatically append an associative label to the Member you click. If you have defined default text or other default label content for the Curtain Wall Member tools in Label Settings (Curtain Wall Junction, Frame, Panel or Accessory), then this default content will appear in the associative Member Label.
To place a Member Label, open a Section/Elevation/IE window which displays the Curtain Wall with the member you wish to label. With the Label Tool active, select the Member Label type from the Info Box.
Click on the Curtain Wall Member (e.g. Accessory) to which you wish to attach a Label. The Label is placed.
1118
Documentation
Define Default Text Content of Labels

The default text content of Independent, Associative and Member Labels are defined in Label Text Label Panel. The Default Text field is only available if you have chosen a Text-type Label on the Content and Preview panel.
1119
Documentation
Symbol Labels
Symbol Labels are GDL Objects. They can be scripted and/or graphically defined and can even include bitmaps. They can display all kinds of element information on the drawing, for example the skins of a composite Wall.
You can create your own Symbol Labels as you would any other GDL Object by choosing the File > Libraries and Objects > New Object command. For more information, see Scripting Custom Objects.
1120
Documentation
Text Editing in ArchiCAD

Search and Replace Text Spell Checker Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows
For information on placing and editing Text Blocks using ArchiCADs dedicated Text tool, see Text Blocks.
1121
Documentation
Search and Replace Text

The Search and Replace Text function is available for the following text-type elements in ArchiCAD: Text blocks placed with the Text tool Labels Dimensions Zone Stamps Parameters of GDL Objects The Edit > Search and Replace Text command opens the Search and Replace Text Dialog Box. This function lets you search texts in all eligible element types. It works on the Floor Plan and in Section/Elevation/IE, and Detail and Worksheet windows. It does NOT work for Autotext items. Note: The Search and Replace text function is not available for text-type windows. (Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function, GDL script windows, Project Notes, and Report windows.) In text type Windows, the Find & Replace command offers similar functions. For more information, see Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows.
1122
Documentation
Spell Checker
The Document > Spell Checker command allows you to check the spelling of your ArchiCAD project. The available features are similar to those used by Microsoft Word. Note: Spell Checker is not available for text-type windows. Use Spell Checker Preferences (Filters) to define which parts of the ArchiCAD project you want to spell-check.
Choose to search on either All Stories or Current Stories. Check the boxes of the element types you wish to include in the Spell Checker process. Spell Checker can work on Text blocks, Zones, Labels, custom text entered into Dimension labels, and on Door, Window, Object and Lamp parameters. Spell Checker uses Microsoft Words Spelling Check, which means that you must have Microsoft Word installed on your computer together with the dictionary of the language you are using. In Microsoft Word, use Tools > Options > Spelling and Grammar to set your desired preferences. ArchiCADs Spell Checker will also use these preferences. In addition, on the MacOS only, several freeware and shareware applications are available that take advantage of the Word Services spell checker suite. Warning: Spell Checker relies on Microsoft technology. ArchiCAD can only locate Words Spell Checker if its pointer is correctly written in the Windows Registry. If you have properly installed Microsoft Office, Spell Checker will work without any problem. If you have manually modified the location of Microsoft Word, ArchiCAD will not be able to use its spell checking features. Moreover, the Spelling commands must be installed with Word.
1123
Documentation
Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows

Text-type windows include all Listing windows created with the Calculation function, GDL script windows, Project Notes, and Report windows. Only a single editing step can be undone/redone in a text-type window. When a text-type Window is active, most of the Edit menu commands change in order to provide you with basic word processing features. Note: Search/Replace Text and Spell-check do not work for text-type windows. The Text Style command opens a dialog box determining how your text will look both on screen and for printing.
Choosing the Find & Replace command opens the Text Window Find dialog box which offers the searching options used in most word processing applications:
The Find Selection command searches for the selected string in the text according to the direction set in the Text Window Find dialog box. (The default Find Selection shortcut is Ctrl+H; to Find Selection Backwards, use Ctrl+Shift+H.) The Find Again and Replace Again commands repeat the last find or replace operation in the direction set in the Text Window Find dialog box.
1124
Documentation
The Go To Line command allows you to go to the desired line by simply entering a number in the edit box. This feature is especially useful when editing or checking GDL scripts.
The last six commands apply to GDL scripts, and are active only if a GDL script window is active. For more information, see Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows.
1125
Documentation
The Layout Book

One of the most important contributions of computer-aided design to architecture is that it facilitates parallel planning and documentation processes. With ArchiCAD, it is possible to work on several project phases, both design and documentation, simultaneously. The output of architectural drawings on plotted layouts, to be submitted to clients, contractors and building authorities, is traditionally considered the final phase in the work of the architectural team. With ArchiCAD, the creation of the construction documentation really becomes an integrated part of your design work. Layouts contain all the drawings and images that compose the architectural documentation of your project views, external drawings, List views, Element Schedules, Project Indexes. The layouts that you create can include views from both the currently open project file and from other ArchiCAD projects, as well as external drawing and picture files. Every Layout is associated with a Master Layout that defines its size and some other attributes. This helps automate such tasks as the inclusion of a company logo. In ArchiCAD, layouts are part of the project. Each ArchiCAD project file includes a Layout Book whose content is displayed in the Navigator.
Layouting Work Environment Layout Book Components Drawings in the Layout Book Layout and Drawing IDs Layouting Workflow Schemes
1126
Documentation
Layouting Work Environment

ArchiCAD allows you to fit your work environment to the tasks and skills required for the current phase of the project development. This means that you can choose a dedicated Work Environment Profile (Layouting), which concentrates only on the features that you currently need for constructing the layout book. When a Layout window is active, only the relevant menu commands and tools are available. Note for ArchiCAD 9 users: ArchiCAD 9 included PlotMaker as a stand-alone application to handle layouting and documentation. As of ArchiCAD 10, these functions are all integrated into ArchiCAD. For tips on adapting your workflow to this integrated environment, see Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13. You may wish to activate the Layouts and Drawings toolbar (from Window > Toolbars) to have quick access to frequently used commands. When the Layout Book is active, you can assign a separate pen set applicable to the Layout Book only. When defining these attributes, the Options > Pens and Colors command indicates that these attributes apply to elements placed on layouts in the Layout Book, rather than for the projects Model Views. There is a single Layer set for the entire Virtual Building, but you can define separate layer settings for the Layout Book and for Model views. Note: Layer settings for the Layout Book serve to show/hide elements directly placed on layouts, such as lines, texts and drawings as a whole. Layout Book layers do not affect the drawing content, which is determined by the layers of its associated view.
1127
Documentation
Layout Book Components

About the Layout Book Layouts Master Layouts Subsets
1128
Documentation
About the Layout Book

At the core of the ArchiCAD layouting concept is the Layout Book that includes all the layouts defined for the project, optionally organized into subsets (represented by folders). The Layout Book tree structure can be accessed in the Navigator and Organizer.
Although it is possible to use a flat structure in your Layout Book, Layouts are ideally organized in chapters, that is, folders known in ArchiCAD as subsets. This is especially useful when working on larger projects requiring many drawings. A pop-up button at top left of the Layout Book map allows you to view the components of your Layout Book according to the current view, that is, Tree by Subsets or Tree by Masters.
Tree by Subsets groups your Layouts according to Subsets and shows the names of the drawings that belong to each. In Tree by Subsets, Drawings are accompanied by icons that correspond to the file type. Tree by Masters lists your Layouts according to the Master Layouts they are assigned to. You can move and rearrange elements using the drag and drop technique to: Create hierarchical Subsets Move a Layout from one Subset to another Apply a Master Layout to a Layout Move a Drawing from one Layout to another Layout Note: In this case, the proportionate distance of the Drawing from the Layout origin remains unchanged. While you are editing the elements of your Layout Book, the Navigator or Organizer palette keeps track of which element you are working on. Elements selected within the Navigator will be highlighted. When you move over and work in the Layout window, the highlight changes to a box. Important: Operations involving Navigator/Organizer items (such as drag and drop between Navigator maps, deleting items from a map, or adding items to the Publisher set) are not added to the undo queue, and are not undoable. The easiest way to access the settings of any item of the Layout Book is to select it in the Organizer or Navigator palette, then click the Settings button at the bottom of the Properties section. Or use the commands of the context menu of the selected item in the list, or the commands of the Document > Layout Book menu.
1129
Documentation
Note: Another way to gain an overview of Layouts or Drawings in your project, or to sort them by criteria, is the Project Indexes function.
When you start a new project, the ArchiCAD Layout Book contains a number of predefined layouts and master layouts that correspond to the needs of your national version. All or some of the layout management functions are available from various locations in the ArchiCAD interface: The icons at the bottom of the Navigator palette The set of icons of the Organizer palettes Layout Editor view The context menu opened by right-clicking an item in the tree view of the Navigator or Organizer palette The commands of the Document > Layout Book menu
1130
Documentation
1131
Documentation
Layouts
To open a particular layout in the Layout Window, do one of the following: Double-click its name from the Navigators Layout Book or the Organizer palettes Layout Editor. Click the Layouts name from the Window menu Click Open Layout... from the Layout drop-down in the Mini-Navigator Toolbar. Activate the desired Layout from the appearing Open Layout list.
(To open a Layout in a new, separate window, select the Layout in the Navigator and choose Open in New Window from the context menu.) To navigate sequentially among Layouts in the Layout Book, click the navigation arrows at the bottom of the window to move to the previous, next, first or last Layout in the Layout Book. Click the button showing the current Layout number to access the Go to Layout command.
1132
Documentation
The contents of the layout windows are saved with the project. The white area represents the usable print area of the paper delimited by a blue frame. The gray area represents the non-printing area (margins) of the paper.
The displayed size and the margins of the Layout are defined by the Master Layouts. When printing the Layout, you can fit it to the actual paper size used by the device, with the Fit to Page control of the Print Layout dialog box. You can place, arrange and transform drawings in the Layout window, and manually add 2D elements as well as Autotext items. For more information, see Drawings in the Layout Book.
Create New Layout

To create a new Layout, do one of the following: choose the Document > Layout Book > New Layout command Click the New Layout icon in the Navigator or the Organizer
Use the New Layout command from the context menu of any Layout Book item in the Navigator. Once you create a new Layout or Subset, the Navigators Tree by Subsets view will list it directly underneath the currently highlighted element. If a Layout window is currently open, the new Layout will now be opened in its place. If a Subset is currently highlighted in the Navigator palette, the new Layout will be placed as the last element inside the Subset folder. You can also create new Layouts automatically when placing and importing drawings. (See Drawings in the Layout Book.)
Delete Layouts
You can delete any Layout in the Layout Book except the last one: the Layout Book must always contain at least one Layout.
1133
Documentation
Master Layouts
The Master Layout is like a template which defines the size of the Layouts (pages) of the Layout Book. Each Layout is assigned a Master Layout. The graphic and text items that you place on a Master Layout (Master items) will appear on every Layout that uses it as a template. Master Layouts are found in the Masters folder of the Layout Book and can be given distinctive names. ArchiCAD includes several predefined Master Layouts. You can use one of these predefined Master Layouts, or customize your own. Most related options are set in Master Layout Settings.
Open a Master Layout

To open a Master Layout, double-click its name in the Layout Book. By default, all Layouts and Master Layouts open in the same window, but you can also choose to open a new window for each one of them: set this preference in Options > Work Environment > More Options.
Default Master Layout

One of the Master Layouts will be applied by default to newly created Layouts. The default Master Layout is shown as earmarked.
To change the default Master Layout for your Layouts: Select the desired default Master Layout in the Navigator or Organizer, then do one of the following: From the context menu, choose Set as Default Open Master Layout Settings and check the Set as Default for New Layouts box.
Apply Master Layout

To apply another Master Layout to any Layout, do one of the following: Drag and drop any Master Layout onto the selected Layout Drag and drop a Layout onto any Master Layout
1134
Documentation
Select a Layout, then choose another Master Layout from the pop-up menu at the bottom of the Navigator Palette or in the Settings dialog box of the selected Layout.
Create New Master Layout

To create a new Master Layout, do one of the following: choose the Document > Layout Book > New Master Layout command Click the New Master Layout icon in the Navigator or the Organizer
Use the New Master Layout command from the context menu of any item of the Navigators Masters folder.
1135
Documentation
Master Layout Title Block

The default Master Layouts include commonly used title blocks which are composed of 2D drawing elements and text items, including Autotext. Autotext consists of special predefined automatic text items that are generated by the program. For example, the Title Blocks of the Master Layout template pictured below includes Autotext items for the Project Name, Drawing Name, Project Status and Layout ID, among others, as well as text items and a logo.
You can edit or create a title block by opening the Master Layout and using the 2D editing and text tools to add or modify the content.
Display of Master Layout Items

To assign a uniform color to all Master items, configure this at Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Otherwise, Master items are displayed in their original colors. To display Master items below or above the Layout, click your preferred option in the Name and Size panel of Master Layout Settings. You can choose to hide the on-screen display of Master elements on all Layouts by turning off View > On-Screen View Options > Master Items on Layout. This option also affects Master items on Layouts used as Traces. If you show a Layout as Trace, all Master Layout items will be shown as part of the Trace.
1136
Documentation
Subsets
A subset is a folder inside the Layout Book. Subsets allow you to easily organize your layouts and to define numbering rules for them. When working in the Navigator or Organizer, you can place any Layout into a Subset simply by dragging and dropping it into place. If you create a new layout in the Organizer palette when right-clicking the name of a subset, it will be placed automatically in this subset. A Subset folder is indicated by an folder icon with a small number 1.
Subsets are not required; you can place a Layout into the Layout book without placing it into a Subset. However, subsets are useful in organizing large-scale projects with multiple sets of documentation. When assigning IDs to Layouts, you can reflect the subset hierarchy as part of the Layout ID system, to make it easier to find the right Layout when needed. Subsets can be named upon creation and renamed in the Navigator palette Properties section. For more information on IDs, see Layout and Drawing IDs. When setting up the contents of a Publisher Set, you can add a shortcut to any Layout Book Subset: this means Publisher Set items are created which are linked to the Subset folder and to its contents. This means that any changes to the contents of the Subset in the Layout Book are also reflected in the contents of the Publisher Set. See Defining a Publisher Set.
1137
Documentation
Drawings in the Layout Book

Drawings are ArchiCAD views and external files that have been placed onto a Layout. The Layout can include views from the current project file and other ArchiCAD project files. External drawing and picture files as well as PDF files can also be placed on the layout. From the layouting point of view, all these are collectively called Drawings. Note: Drawings can also be placed into Model Views. See Drawings in Model Views. You can arrange and manipulate placed Drawings on the Layout as needed. (Although you can place any number of ArchiCAD views on a Layout, you cannot embed views within each other.) You can customize the size, scale, title and framing options for your drawings in the Drawing Settings dialog box. Imported drawings can be updated automatically to reflect all changes in the source file, or you can opt to update them manually.
Placing Drawings Onto the Layout Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout Importing PDF Files As Drawings Modifying Drawings on the Layout Drawing Titles Managing and Updating Placed Drawings Deleting a Drawing
1138
Documentation
Placing Drawings Onto the Layout

Drawings can be placed on layouts separately or collectively in the following ways.
Place Drawing from a Model View Window Drag and Drop Drawing Onto the Layout Place Drawing Using Layout Editor Place Drawing Using the Drawing Tool Place Drawing from External Application Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project Place Drawing from a Model View Window
Choose Document > Save view and place on Layout, or right-click anywhere in the window and choose the command of the same name from the appearing context menu.
1139
Documentation
The layout window will become active and a placeholder symbol with a double arrow representing the drawing will be displayed. Move it with the cursor and click to place it. During drawing placement, ArchiCAD will use the Drawings Anchor Point as set in the Drawing Properties Panel of Drawing Default Settings. The same Anchor Point will anchor the drawing in case its source view is later modified and the drawing updated.
Drag and Drop Drawing Onto the Layout

With the Layout window active, go to the Navigator or Organizer palette and drag and drop one or several items (viewpoints, views or views originating from external ArchiCAD files) directly onto the layout. When added to a Layout, viewpoints are converted to views with their current settings. The newly created view is added to the View Map, and the newly placed Drawing is added to the Layout Book.
Note: When placing several items from the Navigator/Organizer simultaneously onto a Layout, the placement obeys the rules (such as Auto Arrange) set in the Drawing Placement section of Master Layout Settings. See also Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout.
Place Drawing Using Layout Editor

In the Organizers Layout Editor, drag and drop viewpoints, views and external files from the appropriate hierarchy list on the left side into the Layout Book on the right side. (Or use the Place Drawing command on the left side of the Organizer.) See also External Projects in the Navigator. 1140
Documentation
The placement of the drawings obeys the following rules: If you drop an item on the name of an existing layout, the drawing will be added to that layout. If you drop an item on the name of a subset or the Layout Book itself, the drawing will be placed on a new layout created automatically inside the subset (or at the topmost level of the Layout Book.
Place Drawing Using the Drawing Tool

With a Layout window active, choose the Drawing tool from the Toolbox, then click on the Layout. From the appearing Place Drawing dialog box, choose one of the following options as the Drawing source: an external source: Click Browse to locate the Drawing file using a directory dialog box. If you choose an ArchiCAD project file, the Import Views from ArchiCAD Project dialog box appears. Choose the view: it is placed on the active Layout window. an internal view: the current projects View Map is shown in the dialog box. Select a view, then click Place. an external Teamwork Project: Click Browse. In the appearing Select Teamwork Project dialog box, choose the server and the project you need. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) The Import Views from ArchiCAD Project dialog box appears. Choose the view: it is placed on the active Layout window.
1141
Documentation
By default, when placing model views onto a Layout, the placed drawings frame will be adjusted to show only the zoomed area of the model. (This default setting can be changed in Options > Work Environment > More Options.) Once the zoomed view is placed, you can later opt to readjust the frame to fit other parts of the model view, either manually using pet palette commands, or using the Fit Frame to Drawing radio button in Drawing Settings.
Place Drawing from External Application

Use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing command, then select a drawing file from the file system. (The PDF format, many image formats, DXF and DWG are among the available formats.) See also Importing PDF Files As Drawings.
Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project

Use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing command, then select the PLN file you need; or Use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing from Teamwork Project command. In the appearing Select Teamwork Project dialog box, choose the server and the project you need. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server in the Teamwork section of ArchiCAD Help.) The Import Views from ArchiCAD Project dialog box will display the view list of the selected project, and options for placing them in your Layout Book.
Placing a view from another ArchiCAD project file will launch another instance of ArchiCAD.
1142
Documentation
Note: If you do not wish to launch ArchiCAD with each view placement, go to Options > Work Environment > More Options and check Do not launch new instance of ArchiCAD. Once you have placed a view from an external ArchiCAD project file into the current one, the view map and Layout Book structure of this source file will be at your disposal in the Project Chooser, and you will be able to place additional drawings easily into the current projects Layout Book. See also External Projects in the Navigator.
1143
Documentation
Arranging Multiple Drawings on the Layout

When placing multiple Drawings onto a layout, the Drawings will arrange themselves according to the Drawing Placement logic defined in Master Layout Settings. If the layout is defined (in Master Layout Settings) as using the Auto Arrange feature, the drawings will be placed according to these definitions in Master Layout Settings. Note: The default logic is Auto Arrange. If you are placing only a single drawing on the Layout, it will be placed in the center of the Layout. For more information, see Auto Arrange New Drawings.
If the layout onto which you are placing the drawings uses a Grid for Drawing IDs, the drawings will be placed in the appropriate cells. For more information, see Align and Assign Drawings to a Grid.
1144
Documentation
Importing PDF Files As Drawings

As when importing any other external file, use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing command. If the PDF file being imported is password-protected, you will have to provide a password when prompted. If you are importing a multi-page PDF document, a dialog box prompts you to choose which of the pages you wish to place.
You can also place PDFs into ArchiCAD 2D windows through drag-and-drop. In the case of multi-page PDFs, the dialog box that prompts you to choose a page will also appear. A PDF file placed on the Layout, like any other item, becomes a Drawing. The Drawing name consists of the PDF file name. The page numbering is displayed in the Source View field of the drawing. Like any other external linked drawing, placed PDFs can be automatically or manually updated in ArchiCAD.
1145
Documentation
Modifying Drawings on the Layout

While the modifications made on drawings placed on the Layout are performed in their original views, there are a number of special functions available in the Layout window. The operations performed on drawings in the Layout window are not reflected in the original view. A Drawing placed on the Layout can be stretched by dragging one of its boundary hotspots after selecting it with the Arrow tool. You can also drag or rotate placed drawings or their copies. With the Edit > Move > Multiply command, you can create multiple copies of the same Drawing and then customize each copy. The Layout and Model can refer to different pen tables. This means that you can define a separate set of pens to use on Layouts for the best printing and plotting results. Note: The Layouts Pen Set affects elements placed directly on the Layout (such as Master Layout items like the Title Block). The Drawings pen set affects the content of placed drawings and is assigned in Drawing Settings. For more information, see Pens & Colors. By default, drawings are displayed using the pen sets defined in their source views.
The View Drawings own Pen Set button lets you access, edit, and rename this pen set, if desired. Alternatively, use the Pen Set drop-down in Drawing Settings to choose any other pen set from the projects pen sets. Selecting the Edit > Explode into Current View command will deconstruct selected elements into drawing primitives (points, lines and fills). The appearing dialog box gives you the choice to keep the original elements along with the primitives, or replace the original elements with the drawing primitives. In the latter case, the placed drawing will be deleted. See Explode into Current View.
1146
Documentation
Drawing Titles
Each Drawing placed on a Layout can have a title containing graphic elements and information referring to the drawing data, such as Drawing ID, Name, and Scale.
Note: Drawings placed in Model Views do not have Titles.
The actual drawing title is based on a Title Type. Title Types are GDL Objects that can be assigned to Drawings by default (automatically) or assigned manually to selected Drawings. To assign a title to a Drawing, select the Drawing and open the Drawing Settings dialog box. In the Title panel, select a Title type from the pop-up menu.
To assign a title by default to each newly placed Drawing, open Drawing Default Settings (the Default settings come up if no Drawing is selected) and choose a Drawing title. Drawing Titles are laid out automatically with the associated drawing. A Drawing Title is a subelement of the drawing. Using the Drawing Title Panel of the Drawing Settings dialog box, you can define, assign and format Title Types according to your preferences and create new ones as Library Parts.
1147
Documentation
Create a New Title Type

In the Layout window, use the available 2D tools (e.g. lines, text blocks) to design a Title Type to fit your needs. Select the components of this new Title Type. Use File > Libraries and Objects > Save as Title Type to save this object. Once saved, your Title Type is available from the pop-up the Title panel of Drawing Settings. You can subsequently edit this custom-created Title Type graphically: Use File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object. From the directory dialog box, select the Title Type you want to edit. Click 2D Symbol to access the graphical editing window for this object. Make your changes using 2D tools. Note: Make sure the scale of the GDL 2D symbol window is set to 1:1, to make editing easier.
Back Reference to Layout Containing Source Marker)

The Drawing Title Panel of Drawing Settings gives you access to the Back Reference function. Back Reference allows you to add Layout ID information to the Drawing Title: specifically, the ID of one or more Layouts that contain a Drawing that shows the source marker of the current Drawing. Thus, the Back Reference function is useful if the current Drawing is based on a Section, Elevation, Interior Elevation, Detail or Worksheet.
Click Back Reference to bring up the dialog box of the same name.
1148
Documentation
This dialog box lists every Layout that displays the source marker of the current drawing. (Or which would display the source marker if the Drawing Frame hadnt been manually altered.) First check the Enable Back Reference box, then select one or more of the Layouts whose ID you wish to display. (Check Select All available if you want the Drawing Title to display the IDs of all Layouts listed here.) Click OK to close the dialog box and return to Drawing Settings. The Drawing Title Preview shows an Autotext in the place where the Drawing Title will contain the Layout ID information. In this example, if you have checked Select All available, the final Drawing title looks like this:
Note: Make sure that the parameters of the Drawing Title object you are using have enabled the Back Reference function:
1149
Documentation
Managing and Updating Placed Drawings

All drawings placed in the ArchiCAD project belong to one of the two following types: Automatic update. This means that the drawing placed on the layout will be updated automatically when the layout is activated (brought to front or selected for output). Automatic updates also occur before publishing. If a drawing comes from a different source than the currently opened project file, then ArchiCAD will check whether it requires updating or not, and perform an update if necessary. Manual update. This means that the drawing is frozen in the state its source view or file was in when placed on the layout or updated. This can be useful if you wish to keep the drawings untouched until they are approved or you are ready to move on to the next stage in your work. Manual-update Drawings are updated only if you issue an update command. Note on Drawings in Teamwork: If you are working in a Teamwork project and have reserved a manual-update Drawing, then you alone have the right to update that Drawing. You can override the default update type setting for selected placed drawings in their Drawing Settings dialog boxes. The Drawing Manager palette is the place where you can check the status of the placed drawings, modify their update type, reestablish, repair or change links.
1150
Documentation
The Drawing Manager can be accessed from the Window > Palettes menu. You can also access Drawing Manager by clicking the top left icon in the Navigator or Organizer palette and choosing the Show Drawing Manager command.
For details on all controls, see Drawing Manager. This will display a dialog box that lists all the Drawings you have placed in the Project (both Layout Book and Model views), including those referring to external projects and external drawings such as PDF files. The Drawing(s) contained in the active window are listed in boldface. To customize the list columns, right-click any column header to bring up a list of available columns, or click the black arrow at the right end of the list columns.
1151
Documentation
Note: If you enable the Cut Plane column, it will display the Cut Plane height of the Drawings source, when applicable. This field will display N/A (not applicable) if the drawing is not based on a Floor Plan viewpoint, and/or if the drawing was created in an earlier version of ArchiCAD that does not use Cut Planes. By selecting any drawing in the list, you can use its context menu to access the most important drawing-related commands, such as Drawing Settings and Open Source View. Note: You cannot edit a selected drawings parameters directly in the Drawing Manager. To edit drawing parameters, use Drawing Settings. To update linked Drawings if its source file has been modified: In the Drawing Manager, select one or more Drawings from the list, then click the Update button, or In the Navigator or Organizer Layout Map view, select a Drawing from the tree view, then click the Update button
or right-click and choose the Update command from the context menu. You can also update all drawings at the same time if nothing is selected in the Navigator or Organizers Layout Map view. If the Layout Book contains Drawings whose source is a linked PMK file (created in the Publisher out of an ArchiCAD model view), you can re-link all these PMK-based drawings back to their original model view. Select the PMK files in the Drawing Manager (multiselection is available) and use the following command from the context menu: Link to original Model View.
See the workflow description at Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects. When opening a project that includes drawings whose source views or files have been modified, the Update Drawings dialog box is displayed. You can then either choose to ignore this warning, update all drawing links or go the Drawing Manager and decide to only update selected ones. Note on Drawings placed from Teamwork Project Once you place a Drawing whose source is an external Teamwork project, a copy of the Drawing is created on your machine. When you subsequently update the Drawing, ArchiCAD will 1152
Documentation
automatically synchronize your local copy with the project on the server to ensure that the Drawing in your host project is fully updated. There is one case in which ArchiCAD will not update the Drawing placed from an external Teamwork project. This occurs if you are logged into the source Teamwork project, from your current computer, and if you have any unsent changes in that Teamwork project. In this case, ArchiCAD detects that the Drawing may not be in fully updated condition on the server, and will not update it. You will be warned if this occurs. In this case, send in any unsent changes from the source Teamwork Project, then update the placed Drawing again from the current project.
1153
Documentation
Deleting a Drawing
To delete a drawing, select it and delete it like any other ArchiCAD element. Note that deleting a drawing is not undoable UNLESS the active window is the same type (e.g. Floor Plan or Layout window) as the window which contained the deleted drawing.
1154
Documentation
Layout and Drawing IDs

Both Layouts and Drawings have IDs assigned to them, as an aid in organizing, navigating and outputting your project. The primary use of assigning Layout IDs is to achieve the automatic numbering of the Layout Book. While an automatic logic can be applied to the whole Layout Book, ArchiCAD provides maximum flexibility in customizing the assignment of IDs to meet your preferences.
Simple Layout Numbering Automatic Layout ID Assignment Book Settings Dialog Box Custom Layout/Subset IDs Drawing IDs
1155
Documentation
Simple Layout Numbering

The simplest way to number your Layouts is to number each layout sequentially, like the pages in a book. To do this, you do not need to consider Layout IDs; just place an Autotext for Layout Number in the Master Layout. The Layout Number is a number assigned to each layout in the order it is created; it is shown at the bottom of your Layout Window. Through the Autotext, this number will appear on each Layout.
However, if you want to use a smart numbering system that accounts for adding and removing Layouts in the Layout Book hierarchy, you should use the Automatic Layout ID Assignment logic.
1156
Documentation
Automatic Layout ID Assignment

Due to the complexity of most architectural projects, and to enable you to retain the desired numbering sequence even after Layouts are added and removed from the Layout Book, most users will prefer to use an automated method which assigns an ID to each layout. The smart ID assignment system automatically adjusts itself whenever the Layout Book is changed (for example by the addition of new Layouts, changes in the Layout order or in the document structure). Layout ID is available as an Autotext entry, so if you add the Layout ID Autotext to the Master Layouts Title block, then each Layout will be numbered with this ID. Go to Document > Layout Book > Book Settings. Choose your preferred method for assigning Layout IDs: Use Hierarchy (Tree view by subset): Use this method if you want your Layout IDs to reflect the Layouts location in a particular subset. IDs will reflect the tree structure hierarchy: Layout IDs will inherit the IDs of the subsets in which they are located - as in the illustration below.
Both the prefix and the style (1-2-3, A-B-C, etc.) of the layout/subset ID can be customized. The resulting layout ID is usually a letter-number combination, such as A-03/a. See Book Settings Dialog Box. Note: At any level of ID assignment (Book Settings, Layout Settings or Subset Settings), you can choose a style of No ID. As part of the automated ID system, every sub-item in that group (e.g. every layout in that subset) will be assigned an empty ID, which is like no ID at all. Use Flat Layout Order: This method will assign an ID to Layouts only (not taking subsets into account), from top to bottom in the Navigator Layout Book. Layouts will receive
1157
Documentation
sequential IDs regardless of their hierarchical position - as in the illustration below. If you change the order of Navigator items, their IDs will change accordingly.
1158
Documentation
Custom Layout/Subset IDs

Even if you use the Automatic Layout ID Assignment logic defined in the Book Settings Dialog Box, you can still assign a custom ID to any Layout or Subset. In Layout or Subset Settings, assign a custom ID to the selected layout or subset. The Layout/ Subset will still count as part of the ID sequence (e.g., if the previous Layout is A-02, the custom Layout might be Suppl.-02, and the following Layout will be A-03.) If you do not want the custom ID to be counted in the automatic ID sequence, check the Do not include this Layout (Subset) in ID sequence box.
Once you have customized a Subset ID, you then have the further choice: in the ID of Items in this Subset panel, you can make the IDs of Layouts in this subset either follow the new logic (incorporating the subsets custom ID), or else retaining the ID logic of the overall Layout Book structure irrespective of the customized subset ID. Another way to assign a custom Layout or Subset ID is by typing it directly into the Properties panel of the selected Layout (Subset) in the Navigator Layout Book.
1159
Documentation
Layout Settings Subset Settings Dialog Box Book Settings Dialog Box
1160
Documentation
Drawing IDs
Each drawing placed onto a layout is automatically assigned a Drawing ID. The Drawing ID appears in front of the Drawing Name in the Navigator and the Organizer palette. The method of ID assignment is defined in Drawing Settings. Note that the Drawing Name and the Drawing ID are defined separately. In the Drawing Identification Panel of Drawing Settings, choose one of these options for defining the Drawings ID: By View ID: The Drawing will have the same ID as its source view. This option is often the most useful if your Layouts contain one Drawing each. (This option is only available if the Drawings source is an ArchiCAD view.) By Layout: The Drawing will get an ID based on its Parent Layout: the Drawing ID will have the Prefix/Style you define in Layout Settings, in the IDs of Drawings on this Layout panel. This option is most useful if your Layouts contain multiple Drawings. Custom: Assign any custom ID to this Drawing. You can also use the Grid for Drawing IDs feature of Master Layout Settings to automatically place drawings in cells and assign IDs in a matrix or a flat structure.
1161
Documentation
Layouting Workflow Schemes

ArchiCADs Integrated Workflow Control ensures optimal workflow for projects of any size, complexity and type (single-user or shared project). The following outline introduces some workflow models you might use in various situations.
Layouting Workflow: Smaller Projects Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects
1162
Documentation
Layouting Workflow: Smaller Projects

Smaller projects typically mean smaller design teams (or solo practices) and smaller drawing sets. Smaller practices tend to be less structured, and more often than not the same architect takes care of the entire design process, including layouting. In such cases, the project usually consists of a single file which contains all the drawings that make up the documentation, with the possible exception of a number of external files such as pictures, PDF format tables and descriptions, and standard details. When using the single-file model, you can build up the structure of your layout book by defining the necessary number of subset folders and adding to them the viewpoints and views set up previously in the project file. If the placed drawings are defined as automatically updated, the layout book will be continuously in synch with the design work. The activated layout will reflect the latest changes made on the plans, sections and other drawings.
1163
Documentation
Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects

In larger architectural practices which handle large, multi-building projects, it may be more practical to break down the large project into smaller entities. Each of these subordinate entities (for example, buildings located on the same site) will then constitute a project file, which can still refer to a single set of templates, modules and libraries. However, the documentation will probably extend to the entire project, taking drawings from all the project files. In this case, it makes sense to define a single Layout Book that will accommodate views and files originating from all of the project files that make up the project. There are basically three solutions:
Single File Containing Model and Layout Book

If there is a large main file in the project with one or two smaller additional files, you can opt to build up the structure of the layout book in the larger file as you would in the single file model above, and then also open the smaller files, locate their views in the Organizer, and add them to the Layout Book. See Import Drawing from External ArchiCAD Project. See also External Projects in the Navigator.
1164
Documentation
Multiple Project Files, with Separate File for Layout Book Only
If there are many project files of about the same size and complexity, it may make sense to create an additional project file that does not contain any construction elements, just the Layout Book. You can then open the other files one by one and add their views to the Layout Map, possibly by creating a subset folder for each of them or by defining another custom hierarchical structure. When a layout is activated in the multiple file model, ArchiCAD checks whether it contains drawings that originate from project files other than the active one. If there are, it will then start updating those drawings that are set to be updated automatically. If the file containing the given drawing is open in another ArchiCAD session, the update occurs instantly. If the file containing the given drawing is not currently open, then another ArchiCAD session will be launched to open it.
Multiple Project Files, Separate Layout Book, Separate Drawings (PMK Files)
This workflow can be appropriate if several individuals are working concurrently on the model and documentation through a network. In this workflow, as in the previous one, the model is located in one or more project files, and the Layout Book in a separate project file. The Layouting procedure, however, is different: Layouts will contain Drawings whose source is in an external file, rather than directly linked to project views. The model designer will create views as usual in the ArchiCAD file. Instead of placing these views directly onto the Layout, s/he will use the Publisher function to save or upload the views in PMK format, a native ArchiCAD drawing format which takes up relatively less hard drive space than many other formats. See Defining Output Format. The architect responsible for the Layout Book will then place these PMK drawings on the Layout, using the Drawing Tool and the Place Drawing dialog box, or the File > External Content > Place External Drawing command. See Place Drawing Using the Drawing Tool. 1165
Documentation
These placed Drawings, like any other Drawing, are either Auto-update or Manual-update. Their source is the PMK file. Consequently, it is the model designers responsibility to ensure that every time an ArchiCAD view is modified, the PMK file created from that view is also replaced, so that the Drawings linked to these PMK files can be updated. Advantages of this workflow: Updating documentation may be quicker, because it involves updating a single, small-sized drawing file at a time. Opening the Layout Book might take less time, since the PMK files serving as the Drawing sources are located outside the project file. If the PMK-based Drawings are set to Auto-update, then they will be automatically updated when the Layout is published. If necessary, you can break the Drawings link to the PMK file and re-link the Drawing to its original model view. To do this, select the PMK file(s) in the Drawing Manager (multiselection is available) and use the following command from the context menu: Link to original Model View.
1166
Documentation
Publishing
Outputs are the end result of the architectural design workflow; ArchiCAD gives you a high degree of flexibility in printing, plotting, and electronic publishing. For quick outputs of the current on-screen view, the Print and Plot commands are available directly from ArchiCADs file menu; the Print and Plot dialog boxes contain familiar options. You will normally use printing for creating fast outputs on which you can check various aspects of your design and plotting for creating the final documentation that will be submitted and sent to the client, the building authorities and the subcontractors. For large-scale, planned outputs of one or more publisher sets, the Publisher function is a handy concept dedicated to the architectural design workflow. Using the Publisher palette, you set up and save preferences for any number of publisher sets: you define whether to print, plot, upload them to a server or save them to disk. Once a publisher set is defined, you can publish or republish it at any time, using the same properties, at the push of a button.
Print Plot Publisher Function PDF Output
1167
Documentation
Print
The File > Print command will bring up a Print dialog box which varies slightly depending on the view you are printing: Layout, 2D or 3D.
Print 2D Document Print 3D Document Print Picture Print Layout

Note: The following descriptions are based on the Windows interface. For a discussion of the print/plot features unique to MacOS, see Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS.
Items to be Printed
The Print command enables you to print the entire contents of the current window, or just a particular Print Area, as set in the Print 2D Document dialog box. From the Layout Window, you can print just the Layouts which are selected in the Navigator. Items that cannot be printed include Hotspots, selection dots, Section depth lines, Roof pivot lines, Cameras and their paths. The lines of the Construction Grid can be optionally printed from the 2D windows by checking the Print Grid checkbox. Note that you can only print the grid if Grid Display is ON. Items on a Trace view can also be printed. Note: Elements that are located on remote stories but individually set to display on the current story will always appear on the output. Use the Document > Set Model View > Model View Options dialog box to specify the display of model items on the Floor Plan, and thereby the printed output.
Header/Footer
When printing from ArchiCADs 2D or 3D window or Layout window, you have the option to place a Header or Footer on the printed page. You set the content of the Header/Footer in Header/Footer Settings.
Output Color
If you are using a printer that supports color or grayscale output, the color of the printed elements is defined by: 1) The setting made in the Print dialog box. Checking the Black and White box will print all colors in black independently of any other setting. For more information, see Print 2D Document. 2) The setting made on the Properties panel of the Drawing Settings dialog box for each individual drawing placed on the layout.
1168
Documentation
Note: In the Drawing Settings Properties panel, the Pen Set pop-up allows you to choose a pen set for the drawing; the Colors pop-up allows you to choose the colors that will be used for printing it. Since the color and grayscale pensets are not connected, it makes a difference whether you first choose the Color pen set and then choose to display the drawing in grayscale or the other way round. The two results can be entirely different as shown below.
1169
Documentation
Plot
The File > Plot command brings up the Plot 2D Document dialog box. Note: The following descriptions are based on the Windows interface. For a discussion of the print/plot features unique to MacOS, see Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS. Plotter drivers shipped with ArchiCAD all use the HPGL vector-graphic language. We refer to any printing device that supports HPGL as a 'plotter'. GRAPHISOFT provides dedicated plotter drivers for most plotters; for printing, you must use printer drivers provided by the vendor. Note: Many current large-format output devices come with printer drivers which make the device function as a system printer. If the device is also HPGL compatible, you can use the dedicated plotter drivers provided by GRAPHISOFT.
Plotter Setup
When outputting documents to a plotter, you first need to set up the plotter for ArchiCAD. The communication with the plotter device is ensured by specific plotter drivers stored in the PlotWare folder located by default in the same directory as ArchiCAD. Choose File > Plot Setup to open the Plot Setup dialog box. Note: The ReadMe file also contains extensive information on issues related to plotting, such as recommendations on the choice of drivers and cables, and network plotting. When first using a plotter with ArchiCAD, you need to connect to it by clicking the Setup button in the Connection area. You can only plot graphic data from ArchiCAD. If a text window is in front, both the Plot Setup and Plot commands appear in gray in the File menu.
Plot versus Print

Some of the basic differences with printing: You cannot define a plot range; the entire contents of the active window will be plotted. From a Layout Window, you can choose to plot the Layouts selected in the Navigator. You can choose a color for the lines of the window grid, if you wish to plot it from a 2D window. Elements in a Trace view cannot be plotted. You may prefer Plotting to Printing in these cases: Spool Folder: You can output a print/plot job into a file in both Printing and Plotting. However, if you need to collect your output jobs into a spool folder (so PlotFlow can take the plot jobs from the Spool Folder and send them to the plotter), use the Plotting function. Set the location of the Spool Folder in the Plot Setup dialog box. Grayscale Output Color: When Plotting, you have the option to select the color choice of the output: Color, Grayscale and Black and White are the available options. The Print dialog box lets you mark the Black and White checkbox if you prefer Black/White to color. (You
1170
Documentation
can, however, also achieve grayscale output when printing: use grayscale Pen Sets for Model Views, or set grayscale display for Drawings placed on Layouts.) Speed: Plotting is generally faster than Printing, so if you have a high-volume output job, you should consider Plotting.
1171
Documentation
Publisher Function
ArchiCADs Publisher feature automates and simplifies the repeated and consistent output of a larger number of documents (Publisher items). You set up Publisher Sets, predefine some options and properties and then can publish them at any time and any number of times by simply clicking a button. This function is vitally important in the documentation phase but it also comes in handy when preparing a project for review by contractors or clients. The Publisher function is controlled by the Publisher map of the Navigator or the Organizer. Open the Publisher map of the Navigator or Organizer by selecting its icon among the maps of the Navigator/Organizer. You can also access the Publisher from the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command. To see a list of all Publisher Sets defined in this project, click the One level up button to display the Publisher Set Chooser and Manager. In this view, command buttons are available for managing any selected Publisher Set: access its Publishing Properties; or Duplicate or Delete it. Here you can also Create a new Publisher Set. Double-click any of the listed publisher sets to view and manage their contents. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect, the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout). The View or Layout properties of the item are displayed at the bottom of the Publisher, but are not editable. The only additional settings controlled in the Publisher are the output format and related options (these are accessible in the Format tab page at the bottom of the Publisher). The icon of each Publisher item corresponds to its output format. In the image here, each of the Floor Plans is set to a different output format: DWG, DXF and PDF.
Publisher Sets are stored with the project, so you can access them any time, adjust settings if needed, and re-publish them. By clicking the Publish button, you can publish a single set or all defined publishing sets or even selected views.
Planning to Publish Defining a Publisher Set Defining Output Method Defining Output Format Viewing and Redlining DWF Files
1172
Documentation
Publishing Process
1173
Documentation
Planning to Publish
While Publisher automates and simplifies the publishing process, publishing all or part of a project can be a major task. All of the views to be published must be generated or updated, which can require considerable computer time. When planning to publish via the Internet, you should give some thought to the files you are going to send. For example, if you publish extensive 3D views of a Project, this could create very large files, which not only could take a long time to send but might be too large to be easily downloaded by your target users. In general, plan your publication carefully, making sure that you publish all that is required but nothing that is unnecessary. Note: When you use the Publish function to output a publisher set, previously saved or uploaded files of the same name will be overwritten without warning. If you have finished setting up the publication but do not want to actually start publishing, you can simply close the palette without clicking the Publish button. All Publisher settings are preserved with the project.
1174
Documentation
Defining a Publisher Set

Open the Publisher map of the Navigator or Organizer by selecting its icon among the maps of the Navigator/Organizer. To see a list of all Publisher Sets defined in this project, click the One level up button to display the Publisher Set Chooser and Manager. To define a new Publisher set, click the New Publisher Set button, then give the Publisher Set a name.
Next, add any combination of Layouts and Views to the Publisher set. Select the desired items from the View Map or Layout Map on the left side of the Organizer, then do one of the following:
click the Add Shortcut command at the bottom of the View Map/Layout Map. drag and drop the selected items into the Publisher set Note: If you select a Subset from the Layout Book or a View Map folder, the Add Shortcut button will create a shortcut linking the selected Subset/folder to a corresponding folder in the 1175
Documentation
Publisher Set at the right. Any changes to the contents of the Subset will also take place in the linked Publisher Set folder (similar to a cloned view map folder). In contrast, if you drag and drop a Subset or folder into the Publishing Set, a corresponding folder is created, but it is not linked and does not follow any subsequent modifications to the Subset/folder contents. In this image, the first Publisher Set item was created by selecting a Subset in the Layout Book and clicking the Create Shortcut button. Similar to a cloned folder in the View Map, it is a shortcut to the Layout Book Subset: all modifications to the Subset contents will be reflected in the Publisher Set item. Use Create Shortcut to ensure that Subsets and View Map folders are recreated in updated form in the Publisher Set. The second Publisher Set item was created using drag and drop. It is not a shortcut, just a onetime copy of the Subset folder.
Once the Publisher set is assembled, you can click on any of the Publisher items (i.e. views or layouts in the Publisher set) to view its Properties in the panel below. These properties are viewonly and not editable. For more information, see Publisher Controls.
1176
Documentation
Defining Output Method

Use the Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box to choose an output format for the Publisher Set. To open this dialog box, make sure you are viewing the Publisher Set Chooser and Manager. (Click the One level up button.) Click the Publishing Properties button in the Navigator or Organizer; or Click the Publishing Properties command button among the command icons.
You have four options here:
Print Save files Upload to Internet Plot For details on each option, see Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box. Choose one of these options, then define the output format: see Defining Output Format.
1177
Documentation
Defining Output Format

The Format section of the Navigator Publisher contains options that vary depending on how you have defined the output in Publisher Set Properties. Options with Print/Plot Output: If you chose Print or Plot in the Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box, you can use the Page/Plot Setup button to opens the corresponding dialog box, while Print Settings, Print Options and Plot Settings access simplified versions of the standard Print and Plot dialog boxes, with only the applicable options available. For more information, see Print 2D Document and Plot Setup. If you chose Save or Upload to Internet in the Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box, use the Format tab page to choose an image format for outputting the file. Files can be saved or uploaded in a large variety of formats including all standard image formats and CAD exchange formats. You can choose file formats for the contents of a folder or individually for each view.
For some formats, a variety of options are available - in these cases, an Options button is displayed, and you can choose among compression settings, color depths, and other options depending on the chosen format. For example, if you choose the DWG format, the Options button will bring up the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. If the selection contains several files with different file formats, the Format field displays Various.
1178
Documentation
PMK Format
Among other formats, the PMK format is available for saving views in the Publisher. This is a native ArchiCAD drawing format which takes up relatively less hard drive space than many other formats. Saving views in PMK format can be a good workflow if your project is divided among multiple files (e.g. Model pln and Documentation pln). See Layouting Workflow: Larger Projects. Note: If you are working in AutoCAD and open a DWG that was originally saved from ArchiCAD, an Alert may appear. However, you should go ahead and work with the saved DWG in AutoCAD - no stability problems should result.
Options for PDF Format

If you are saving or uploading in PDF format, two special options pages are accessible: Document Options and Page Options. For more information, see PDF Output. If the contents of a folder are all in PDF format, a checkbox gives you the option to Merge to one PDF file. (Make sure you select the folder that contains the PDF format items.) If you leave this checkbox unmarked, you will publish each file in the folder as a separate PDF file.
Note: Once you have checked the Merge to one PDF file for one of the Publisher map folders, the option is no longer available for any of its subfolders. To change your PDF merge preference to a lower-level folder, first uncheck this preference for the higher-level folder.
DWG Format
One of the available formats is the DWG format. Apply this to individual files or assign it to all the contents of a folder by selecting the folder, then choosing DWG from the Format pop-up list. If all the items in a folder are Layouts, and if the entire folder is set to DWG format, an additional checkbox appears: Merge to one DWG file. If you use this option:
1179
Documentation
The resulting DWG file will contain as many Paper Spaces as the number of Layouts that have been used as Publisher Set items. Thus, an entire Layout Books contents can be saved in a single DWG file. The resulting DWG file is in Paper Space, and the same translation options apply for all published Layouts.
Crop image to Zoom: Check this box to crop the image to the current zoom on the Floor Plan. This option is available if chosen your publishing format is DWF. When exporting an ArchiCAD view for use by AutoCAD, you can ensure that only a selected part of the view is exported: First, publish the view in DWF format to a separate folder, making use of the Crop image to zoom option. Open the DWFs in ArchiCAD and save them again as DWG files. Only the cropped view will be visible in the DWG file.
1180
Documentation
Viewing and Redlining DWF Files

When planning to save files for review by a contractor or a client who does not have ArchiCAD installed but wish to have a feedback from them, your best choice is the DWF file format with the Project Reviewer web environment. In DWF format, the published files can be viewed through the Internet or an intranet with the Java-based Project Reviewer web environment by anyone who can access the files location via a LAN or an FTP connection, without having to install or even be familiar with ArchiCAD. Colleagues, contractors, subcontractors or clients can view the design in a web browser application, add their remarks by redlining it, and send back their corrections or suggestions to the author of the project. Project Reviewer can be included with the published file set. Redlined DWF files can be incorporated in the ArchiCAD file by using Project Mark-Up.
Project Reviewer Project Mark-Up Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box
1181
Documentation
Publishing Process
Use the scroll-down list at the bottom of the Publisher to choose which item(s) to output:
If you choose this set, the entire active publication set will be published. If you choose selected items, only the items currently selected in the active publication set will be published. If you choose all the sets, all currently defined sets will be published. Click the Publish button at the bottom of the Publisher to begin the publishing process. The icons next to the view names inform you whether the job is completed, under way or failed. You can also click Stop, which will end the whole publishing procedure, or Pause, which will cause publication to pause, and change the Stop button to read Continue, allowing you to continue publication later.
A log file containing information on each publishing process is saved to the location you specify in Options > Work Environment > Publisher (Publisher log location).
1182
Documentation
PDF Output
On the MacOS, PDF output is integrated with the System software. The interface described in the sections below is used with Windows only.
Create PDF Output Using the Publisher Save Document in PDF Format 3D Content in PDF (WIN only)
1183
Documentation
Create PDF Output Using the Publisher

From the Publisher, you can save or upload one or more views in Acrobat PDF (Portable Document Format). (Views listed as Publisher items in the Publisher are set to PDF format by default.) 1) Open the desired Publisher Set in the Organizers Publisher. Make sure that either Save or Upload is selected from Publishing Properties. 2) Choose Publisher item(s) from the Publisher Set. 3) In the Format section of the Publisher, set Format to PDF.
4) Click Page Options to set the Paper Size and Orientation of the resulting PDF Document.
1184
Documentation
5) Click Document Options to define your preferred settings for the content of the resulting PDF Document.
6) At the bottom left of the Document Options dialog box, click PDF Options to create an optional password.
Note: The Arc resolution setting reflects the fact that the PDF format does not recognize arcs/circles and must approximate them by converting them to polygons. The Arc resolution setting defines the accuracy of these polygons. 7) Publish the selected item(s) as usual. PDFs created with ArchiCAD can include standard PDF features such as thumbnails and bookmarks.
1185
Documentation
Save Document in PDF Format

To save the contents of the currently active window as a PDF file, go to File > Save As, and choose PDF as the file format.
Click Page Options to set the Paper Size and Orientation of the resulting PDF Document.
Click Document Options to define your preferred settings for the content of the resulting PDF Document.
1186
Documentation
At the bottom left of the Document Options dialog box, click PDF Options to create an optional password.
Note: The Arc resolution setting reflects the fact that the PDF format does not recognize arcs/circles and must approximate them by converting them to polygons. The Arc resolution setting defines the accuracy of these polygons. Document Options will vary depending on the type of the active window you are saving from. For a 2D or 3D document, Document Options are similar to the options in the Print 2D/Print 3D dialog boxes. For more information, see Print 2D Document. When saving to PDF, you can save the contents in Color, Black & White, or Grayscale.
For a Layout, you can choose to output multiple Layouts into a PDF files, or else just the current Layout (at its current zoom or in its entirety), just as when printing a Layout. (No Page Options button is available when saving to PDF from a Layout window.)
1187
Documentation
For a formatted list, you have Scaling options and the ability to place each zone or page of the list onto a new sheet. (No Document Options button is available when saving to PDF from a formatted list window.)
1188
Documentation
3D Content in PDF (WIN only)

When creating a PDF, ArchiCAD allows you to take advantage of the U3D file format (in Windows only). When publishing a PDF document from ArchiCAD, you can embed a U3D file into the PDF, then navigate the view within the PDF as if it were a 3D model. 1) From the 3D window, set up the desired model view. It is recommended to clear unnecessary detail from the 3D model as much as possible, in order to optimize the navigation speed in the resulting PDF document. 2) Save the 3D window contents as a file using the Save as command. Choose the U3D file format from the list of available formats.
3) In the Navigator or Organizer Palette, save the 3D model as a view, then add the 3D view to a Layout. 4) Next, add this Layout to a Publisher set. Select the Layout in the Publisher Set.
1189
Documentation
5) Set the Publisher Set Properties to PDF format.
6) In the Format tab page at the bottom of the Publisher palette, choose Document Options, then PDF Options.
1190
Documentation
7) Check the Embed 3D content checkbox.
8) Click the Browse button to select the file you saved in U3D format (in Step 1 above). 9) Click OK.
10)In the Publisher, select the desired publisher item and publish it in PDF format. The resulting PDF file will contain an embedded, navigable U3D file. The U3D model embedded in the PDF can be navigated only by using Adobe Reader 7.0 or later.
1191
Documentation
Calculation
ArchiCADs integrated database of construction elements can be used to display, in list format, the number, quantities and components of elements in a project and the elements spatial disposition (zones). The following chapter sums up the basic concepts involved in the calculation process and enumerates the list types that can be obtained. The report-generation process described in this section is a simple output function; use predefined list templates to generate simple lists. Use the options in Calculation Units and Rules Preferences to set calculation preferences. Advanced users may wish to use customized formatting and define customized filtering properties. The entire process is described in detail in the ArchiCAD 13/Graphisoft Documentation/ Calculation Guide.pdf, also available from the ArchiCAD Help menu. Some of the commands referenced in this section are not visible in ArchiCAD 13s default work environment profiles. If you plan to configure lists (recommended for advanced users only), first use Options > Work Environment > Menus to add the following commands to an existing menu (i.e. Document > Schedules & Lists): Set up List Schemes (this dialog box can be reserved in a Teamwork project) Note: List Schemes will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the projects Embedded Library. Edit Database (this dialog box can be reserved in a Teamwork project) New Properties Edit Properties Last Selections Properties Link Properties to Criteria (this dialog box can be reserved in a Teamwork project) However, most users will prefer ArchiCADs Interactive Schedule function. Interactive Schedules are part of the Project Map, and the schedules produced can be saved as views and output on layouts. As its name indicates, an Interactive Schedule is a two-way editable item which is linked to the project elements that it contains.
Calculation Sources Calculation Setup List Types Displaying Lists Element Information ID Management
1192
Documentation
Calculation Sources
When performing calculations, ArchiCAD can take raw information from the following sources: The construction elements placed in the project. Construction element information includes the size, surface, volume, ID number, and the attributes and parameters defined for the elements in their settings dialog boxes or through graphic input. Property Objects assigned to construction elements. Property Objects are special GDL Object-type files without a 3D Script or a 3D view. Property Objects can include references to databases as well as Component and Descriptor data explicitly defined for that individual item. Property Objects are generally used to describe specific structures for the purposes of calculation: for example, the quantities and the detailed description of reinforced concrete beams used in the project. Calculation Databases organized by Keys and containing Components, Descriptors and measurement Units. Construction elements refer to these data directly, through Property Objects. Property Objects may be assigned to construction elements. Afterwards, Components and Descriptors created within the assigned Property Objects can be linked directly to database items, hence the connection between a construction element and a database entry. Components can either be the material ingredients (steel, concrete, etc.) of a structure, or anything (price, man hours, etc.) that can be measured in proportion to elements of the structure type. Each Component has a name, a code, a quantity definition, a unit and a reference to its proportion to related construction elements. Descriptors are text elements related to structure types, e.g., finishing, security, shipping, assembly or handling information. Descriptors are simply displayed in reports: they are not used in calculations and are not linked to components or element parameters. Each Descriptor has a name (also called short text), a code and the full description (long text). Properties can be associated with construction elements either through criteria or individually. Each Property Object can be linked to a unique combination of element selection criteria, e.g., the Property Object called Concrete Wall can be associated with all walls of concrete block fill that are drawn in pen No.12 and placed on the Exterior Walls layer. When this option is active, ArchiCAD filters the projects construction elements and automatically links the Property Object in question to all elements matching the given Criteria. Criteria sets are saved within the active Library so that they can be used in multiple projects. You can create criteria in the Link Properties to Criteria dialog box. Property Objects available in loaded libraries may be linked to criteria or you may create your own Property Objects and link those.
1193
Documentation
You can also choose to assign Property data directly, individually for each element. In this case the link is established manually item by item in the Listing and Labeling panel of each eligible elements Settings dialog box.
A Construction element (Wall, Column, Beam, Slab, Roof, Mesh, plus Fill) can be assigned a Property Object. A Component in a Property Object can be defined in four different ways: 1) Defining a Component/Descriptor that is linked to a Database item. Component definition. All fields (DBSet, Key, Code, Name etc.) of the Component come from a Database.
2) Defining a Component/Descriptor that exists only in that Property Object, and is not linked to a Database item. Component definition. Code, Name and Quantity do not come from a Database, they may be set by the user freely.
1194
Documentation
3) Defining a Local Component/Descriptor using the Property Script of the Property Objects that is linked to a Database item. Component is defined locally in Property Script. Number of parameters show that it is linked to a Database item. Components defined outside of the Property Script will not be listed.
4) Defining a Local Component/Descriptor using the Property Script of the Property Objects that is not linked to a Database item. Component is defined locally in Property Script. Number of parameters show that it is NOT linked to a Database item. Components defined outside of the Property Script will not be listed.
When at least one Local Component/Descriptor is defined in the Property Script, Components and Descriptors created elsewhere in the Property Object are ignored and will not be listed. Either write a Property Script, or define Components/Descriptors. Do not mix the two kinds, as only one kind will be listed always. A Library Part-type element (Wall End, Window, Door, Corner Window, Skylight, Object, Lamp, Zone) can have a Property Object assigned to them with Components defined in one or more of the above 4 ways, or Components/Descriptors can be defined using the Library Parts own Component/Descriptor area or Property Script. So in the case of a Library Part, there are 8 possible ways to define Components/Descriptors. Property Object mainly exist because Construction elements do not have their own GDL Scripts where Component/Descriptors can be defined, hence the need for Property Objects.
1195
Documentation
Calculation Setup
The sorting and analyzing of data, the calculation of required results and the formatting of reports are all done in accordance with the configuration of the selected List Scheme. List Schemes are predefined sets of instructions on how the ArchiCAD listing engine should process project information to present the required results. List Scheme formats can be of two types: Plain Text reports display calculation results in editable tabulated text format. The reports appear in text windows and can be saved as plain text files, tabbed text files for use in spreadsheets or tables in HTML files. Graphic outputs allow for both alphanumeric and image information, including element symbol drawings, logos and other bitmaps. Graphic output reports can be saved as RTF List files, or ArchiCAD Project files. It is also possible to copy all or part of these lists into an ArchiCAD plan. Though the contents of each language version are different, some predefined list schemes are embedded in ArchiCAD and available even if ArchiCAD is running without an active Library. If you need to define custom data or assignments, read the detailed instructions in the ArchiCAD 13/Graphisoft Documentation/Calculation Guide.pdf.
1196
Documentation
List Types
ArchiCAD can generate three types of calculation reports: Element Lists, Component Lists and Zone Lists. Element Lists are best used when creating schedules and inventories, and to display the parameters of construction elements in a project. To generate Element Lists, ArchiCAD filters the project or the selection set for construction elements according to the configuration of the selected List Scheme. Elements matching the filter settings will be listed together with element Parameters, Components and Descriptors, if so defined in the List Scheme.
Component Lists are generated when bills of materials, quantity takeoffs or price lists are required. These reports typically sum up and display component type properties; however, certain element parameters can also be listed.
1197
Documentation
Zone Lists are generally used to create room schedules and finish schedules. Zone Lists can include parameters of Zones and related construction elements. When related construction items are listed, the report is in fact an Element List where the range of calculated elements is limited by the Zones they belong to.
Depending on what you want to appear listed in your list, you may choose the type of List you need to use. Some common examples are:
You want construction elements listed with basic data and parameters about them listed: You want parameters specific to construction elements (such as: Door Sill Height, Number of holes in Slab) listed: You want to create Door/Window schedules You want quantities of components associated with construction elements listed: You want descriptors associated with construction elements listed You want to create room schedules You want Zones or detailed Zone parameters (such as: Zone Extracted Area, Zone Area Reduction) to be listed: You want main Zone parameters (such as: Zone Name, Zone Number) listed for Zones where listed construction element is located:
Element List Element List Element List Component List Component List Zone List Zone List Element List
1198
Documentation
Displaying Lists
The range of elements that will be used in calculation depends on the current selection made on the Floor Plan. If there is no selection made, all elements will be used and filtered by the listing commands List Scheme by type or other criteria; If there is a selection made, only selected elements will be used. For more specific element ranges, use the Setup List Schemes command and define filters. When you activate a list type window while elements are selected in the project, there may be a conflict between the listing commands criteria and the selection. (For instance, if you choose a Window schedule when the current selection also contains Walls and Doors.) In Options > Work Environment > Imaging and Calculation, the Selected Elements to be Calculated pop-up menu offers three options for managing this situation.
If you choose the List All option, all the selected elements will be calculated in the list, even though they do not correspond to the filtering criteria. If you choose the Use Filters option, the filters defined for the list scheme will be applied to the selected elements; elements that do not correspond to these criteria will be ignored. If you choose the Show Alert option, a warning of conflict will appear. You will then be able to choose between the two options described above. Example:
1199
Documentation
If we have a basic text list scheme that will list walls, their layer and User ID, the result would be the following.
However, if you make the above selection with the Marquee and list it, the following alert appears (if that was your choice in Options > Work Environment > Imaging and Calculation).
If you choose Use Filters, ArchiCAD takes all elements of the selection, and lists only those among them that fulfill the listing criteria (list Walls), so the result is the following.
In case you choose List All, all elements falling into the current selection (2 Walls, 1 Window and 2 Doors) will be listed regardless of the filter with the below result.
Note: The multi-story selection method (thick Marquee) works here as well. With the thick marquee, all elements within the Marquee will be included in the selection and the resulting list.
1200
Documentation
Element Information
The Element Information Palette displays information about the dimensions of element(s) selected on the Floor Plan. (Use Window > Palettes > Element Information to display it.)
With this feature, you can get instant feedback on some simple quantities that do not appear in the elements settings dialog boxes, without having to use any listing commands. The Information Content buttons in the top section of the palette define what information will be shown. If none of the buttons is active, only the number and type of the selected elements is displayed. The six buttons display, from left to right: ID, Layer and Linked Property information
Length, circumference and thickness values
1201
Documentation
Area values
Height values
Surface values
Volume values
1202
Documentation
You can combine these pieces of information and save and print them by choosing from the popup menu commands in the top right corner of the palette.
See also Element Information Highlight and Element Information Pop-up (Info Tags).
1203
Documentation
ID Management
The ID field is located on the Listing and Labeling panel of all construction element type tools as well as the Fill and Zone tools.
The ID serves to identify and group elements in list views. You can also use the ID in the Label associated to elements. The text string within the ID field cannot exceed 15 characters. Any character can be used. Note: All construction elements also have a unique, automatically generated, unique ID (GUID) which is conserved throughout the life of the Project. You can also use this identifier for labeling or in lists. Filtering or grouping elements by their IDs is used by many List Schemes. Totals obtained in calculations can refer to elements that have the same ID. Therefore, the content of the ID may be significant. If a number is included anywhere in the ID field, drawing successive elements will add one to this number for each new element, provided that the Auto ID Increase checkbox is enabled the Options > Work Environment > More Options dialog box. If there is no number in the ID field, each new element of the given type will have the same ID. If elements are duplicated or multiplied, the IDs of the replicas will remain the same as those of the originals. If you paste elements into a Project, you may have elements with conflicting IDs. The Element ID Manager in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu allows you to set the ID numbers of the projects elements based on their characteristics (attributes). You can also use it to modify automatically generated ID numbers. Settings can be saved and stored for future use. The configurations you create and save with the Element ID Manager help you prepare Project elements for a clearer reading of quantity takeoffs. Note: This command is only available when viewing the Floor Plan Worksheet. When you choose Document > Schedules and Lists > Element ID Manager, a dialog box appears. At the top of the dialog box, a pop-up menu lists the different settings you saved for the different element types. You can define several settings for any element type, or simply work on the current element choice. The Edit Settings pop-up allows you to save, rename and delete settings. Note: To change a saved setting, select and edit it, then save it again under the same name. 1204
Documentation
The dialog box includes two tab pages: Sort Elements for defining attribute choices, and ID Format for defining custom ID sets.
When the Sort Elements tab is active, the pop-up under the tabs allows you to choose an element (Tool) type. In the top right corner of the dialog box, the figures show how many of the Project elements belong to the active element type. If any elements are selected on the Floor Plan, Element ID Manager works on selected elements only. In this case, two figures are displayed: the number of selected elements and the number of elements of the active type.
If nothing is selected on the Floor Plan, the command works on all placed and visible (not on hidden layers) elements. The list on the left contains the criteria that can be chosen for the given element type. This list is the same as the one used by the Edit > Find & Select command. Select the criteria you need in the list and click the Add button. This will place the selected criteria in the list on the right.
1205
Documentation
Elements that have the same grouping criteria will get the same ID. When youre finished choosing criteria, click to open the ID Format tab page, which allows you to define custom ID Formats.
IDs can contain up to 15 characters or numerals. Element ID Manager allows you to subdivide the ID into four parts. For any of the parts, you can type plain text, a counter or a story number into the ID Components field. You can also opt not to use one or more of the four parts.
When choosing the Text type, you can type custom text up to the number of characters defined. When choosing the Counter type, you can type either numerals or letters such as aa that will change incrementally in the ID. When choosing the Story No. type, you cannot enter custom text; the ordinal number of the story will be used. Note: Story No. is only available as a type if youve selected Story as a Grouping criterion.
1206
Documentation
When you have finished configuring the settings and ID formats, click the Change ID's button in the bottom right corner of the dialog box. The Element ID List dialog box appears.
You can validate the changes made by clicking OK or return to the configuration dialog box by clicking Cancel and make further adjustments. You can save your settings using the Edit Settings pop-up menu on top of the dialog box.
The name of the saved set then appears in the Settings field and can be accessed at any time from that pop-up menu. These settings are saved by ArchiCAD in a separate file and can be reused for further Projects, even after choosing New and Reset.
1207
Documentation
1208
Collaboration
Collaboration
The ability for several individuals and teams to collaborate effectively on a single project is a basic necessity of architectural work. Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 is optimized to meet these needs, and specifically designed to meet the demands of a modern, multinational team. Architects often need to work together with each other and with professionals of other disciplines who use other software. Moreover, interactive communication with clients is also a growing concern. Collaborative features in ArchiCAD 13 are described in these sections:
Teamwork Hotlinked Modules XREFs Data Exchange Consultation
1209
Collaboration
Teamwork
Introduction Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server BIM Server Control Center BIM Server Manager Create Teamwork Project Teamwork Project Settings Join or Leave a Teamwork Project Open Teamwork Project Close Teamwork Project Working Online/Offline Accessing Your Teamwork Project from Different Computers Teamwork Commands Reserving Elements Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements) Review Your Workspace Creating and Sending Project Data Assign Elements Request Elements or Project Data Release Elements or Project Data Messaging Add Comment Libraries in Teamwork External Files Linked to Teamwork Projects Troubleshooting
1210
Collaboration
Introduction
Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 represents an entirely new approach to collaborative project work. Teamwork is based on a client-server architecture and is designed to ensure maximum flexibility, speed and data safety to enable teams - even those spread out around the world - to collaborate on large projects. The ability for several individuals and teams to collaborate effectively on a single project is a basic necessity of architectural work. From the beginning, ArchiCAD has met these needs of architects with such features as Hotlinked Modules and Teamwork. Today, effective collaboration among project teams is more important than ever. Projects are growing in size, and teams are often geographically far-flung and separated by time zones. And the team of users itself will change over time as the project proceeds through different phases. Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 is optimized to meet these changing needs, and specifically designed to meet the demands of a modern, multinational team. Breakthroughs in performance, data safety, and workflow enable your team to make the most of the efficiencies and coordination capabilities of the BIM model.
Teamwork Functions At A Glance

The following table highlights the key functions of Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13, compared to the way they worked in earlier Teamwork versions:
Function ArchiCAD 12 ArchiCAD 13
Reserving Elements
Reserve elements by reserving physical or logical regions of the project Occurs at sign-in Element creation restricted to these regions Each user reserves own items Available to Team Leader with Exclusive Access Occurs when changing workspace or signing out Updated at Send&Receive
Reserve any existing elements individually, by selection or criteria Occurs any time, as needed No reservation needed to create new element/data Assign elements to any user Reserve as needed, at any time, by any authorized user Released by the user at any time, as needed Always up to date (if user is online) Color-coding for at-a-glance feedback Use "Request" function to signal need for data
Reserving Other Project Data Releasing Elements Feedback on Reservation Status
Ownership Conflicts
Not handled
1211
Collaboration
Function
ArchiCAD 12
ArchiCAD 13
Send&Receive
Entire project is downloaded or uploaded to the server.
Download/upload involves only data that have been modified since last Send or Receive. Use simple built-in messaging system in addition to Mark-Up Central registry of users defined for all projects on BIM Server Each user's role can vary by project Users access the BIM Server from any remote computer via Internet Hidden local copy created automatically. No local drafts can be saved.
Team Communications
Use ArchiCADs Mark-Up function Users defined separately for each project Teamwork Roles are predefined LAN-based connectivity
Project Management
Working Via Internet
Working Offline
Managed by the user by saving local drafts
1212
Collaboration
Start GRAPHISOFT BIM Server

The GRAPHISOFT BIM Server can be installed from the ArchiCAD 13 DVD. (See Getting Started in ArchiCAD 13.) The GRAPHISOFT BIM Server runs as a service on your computer. Note: If you have installed the server, but not yet configured it, the Configure BIM Server wizard will start up automatically when you issue the Start Server command. See BIM Server Configuration. Use one of the following methods to start up the BIM Server manually.
Start Server from BIM Server Control Center

You will typically use this method to start the server if you are not running ArchiCAD on the server machine. Click Start Server from the BIM Server Control Center. On Windows: The BIM Server Control Center command is available from the Start menu, in the Graphisoft > BIM Server folder. On MacOS: The BIM Server Control Center command is available under Applications > Graphisoft > BIM Server. See BIM Server Control Center.
Use Start Local BIM Server Command

You can use this command if you are running ArchiCAD and the BIM Server on the same machine. Note: This command is the only way to restart your BIM Server if you have used the Shut Down BIM Server and exit command from the BIM Server Control Center. In ArchiCAD, go to the Open/Join Teamwork Project dialog box (File > Open menu or Teamwork > Project menu) or the Share Teamwork Project dialog box (Teamwork menu). From the server list pop-up, choose Add More BIM Servers, then Start Local BIM Server. (See Add More BIM Servers.)
BIM Server Configuration BIM Server Control Center BIM Server Manager
1213
Collaboration
BIM Server Configuration

In the BIM Server configuration process, you will define basic properties of how the server works. Later, you can monitor and change Server settings through the BIM Server Control Center. Click Next or Previous to move among the six pages of this wizard. 1) Enter the Server Name.
By default, the BIM Server will use the name of your computer. Optionally, you can define a custom name for the BIM Server: in this case, all server selection pop-ups will identify the BIM Server by this name. 2) Enter or Browse the location of the default Project Data Folder. This will be the location of Teamwork Projects on this server.
Note: Once a project is stored at this location, it cannot be moved to another location. However, in BIM Server Preferences, you can later change the default project location at any time (this will affect the location of newly created projects on this server.) 3) Enter or browse the location of the Library Folder, where you will store your BIM Server libraries. (Ideally, you should select a location on an internal drive.) 4) Enter data for the Server Administrator Account. The Administrator you define here (name, password, email address) is the initial Server Administrator, with sole access to the BIM Server Manager interface. (However, the Server Administrator can later define additional Server Administrators, on the Users page of BIM Server Manager.)
1214
Collaboration
5) Startup and Port Options: If you activate the Start BIM Server with Operating System checkbox, the BIM Server will automatically start each time you start up this computer.
This screen also gives you access to Port Settings and information on whether you need to change them. If you are warned that there is a problem: click Port Settings and use the controls to identify alternative ports.
Later, you can alter these settings from the BIM Server Preferences dialog of the BIM Server Control Center.
1215
Collaboration
6) Mail Server: Use these fields to define the Mail Server used to send information by email from the Server to users. The Mail Server definition can be modified later, in BIM Server Preferences.
Note: Using a mail server is optional. However, if you don't define a mail server here, you won't be able to send emails to users from the BIM Server Manager (e.g. password reminders.) 7) Configuration of the BIM Server is complete. Click Start Server to start it up.
1216
Collaboration
BIM Server Control Center

The GRAPHISOFT BIM Server runs as a service on your computer. This means that there isnt any visible application in the taskbar when the server is running. To see the servers status and to reach the server preferences, use the BIM Server Control Center. The BIM Server Control Center runs on the same machine on which the BIM Server has been installed and configured.
Open GRAPHISOFT BIM Server Control Center

If the BIM Server is running: BIM Server Control Center controls are available by clicking the BIM Server Control Center icon in the system tray (on Windows); or from the menubar (in MacOS).
If the BIM Server is not running: On Windows: The BIM Server Control Center command is available from the Start menu, in the Graphisoft > BIM Server menu. On MacOS: The BIM Server Control Center command is available in the Applications > Graphisoft > BIM Server folder. The Open Graphisoft BIM Server Control Center command opens this dialog box:
The Server Name is the one defined during BIM Server Configuration. The Status indicates whether the Server is Running or Stopped. Click the information icon for additional details About this BIM Server: the computers name, IP Address(es), and port number; and the BIM Servers version and build number. The Stop Server or Start Server button is available, as applicable.
1217
Collaboration
Note: Next to the Start/Stop Server button, you can click the black arrow to access a separate command: Shut down BIM Server services and exit the Server Control Center. Note: If the program detects that the server services are not responding, this button changes to Restart Server. The Server Manager... button takes you to the BIM Server Manager. Note: This button can open the Server Manager for the local machine only. The Choose Server and user authentication controls of the Server Manager will not be available.
BIM Server Preferences

BIM Server Preferences is available by clicking Preferences from the BIM Server Control Center window. This dialog box shows the BIM Servers current configuration settings, initially defined during BIM Server Configuration. You may edit these settings (except the Library Folder location) here.
Note: If you change the Default Project Folder path, this means that new Teamwork Projects shared to this server will be located in this folder. However, existing projects will remain in their original locations. Advanced BIM Server Settings 1218
Collaboration
Advanced Settings is a panel of the Teamwork BIM Server Preferences dialog box. Discovery Port: The discovery function enables the server to locate and communicate with client machines on the LAN, provided that all machines are using the identical port. Define this discovery port here. If a yellow warning triangle is displayed here, the port you have chosen is not available. In this case, try the options in the pop-up: Find a free port Reset to default Make sure that all client machines are using the same port: this control is found at Options > Work Environment > Network and Update, on each client machine. The rest of the ports listed in Advanced Settings must be set on the server machine, not on client machines.
Create Server Link for Client

On a local network, the client machines will use the Discovery function to identify servers automatically. If for some reason the Discovery function is not locating the servers in your LAN, or if Discovery is not permitted on your network, use the Server Link function to create a special link file (extension .twlink) which you can send to any client wishing to access this server through ArchiCAD. To create a .twlink file: 1) Open the BIM Server Control Center. 2) Click Create Link. 3) In the appearing dialog box, choose one of the two options:
- Server is accessible from the office only: in this case, you do not need to provide an internet address for the server. - Server is accessible through an internet address: You must provide the internet address of the server. 4) Click Save. 5) In the appearing directory dialog box, name and locate the .twlink file, which you can now send to the client. The .twlink file contains all server connection information the client needs to add the server to his/or Choose Server list.
1219
Collaboration
Clients can browse for this .twlink file using the Add More BIM Servers dialog box, available through the Share or Open commands. (See Choose BIM Server.)
1220
Collaboration
BIM Server Manager

The BIM Server Manager is a standalone application whose purpose is to remotely control BIM Servers. It enables the Server Administrator to manage users, projects, and roles on BIM Servers. Important: The BIM Server Manager (described in this section of the Help) is initially accessible only to the person who is defined as Server Administrator during BIM Server Configuration. This initial Server Administrator can then optionally define additional Administrators, who will then also have full access to the BIM Server Manager. BIM Server Manager functions are described in the following sections:
Open BIM Server Manager Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server Export Teamwork Project Delete Teamwork Project from Server Teamwork Project Settings Manage Users on the BIM Server Administrator Rights BIM Server Manager: Roles List of Access Rights BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties Open BIM Server Manager
To open the BIM Server Manager (after BIM Server is installed and configured), do one of the following: Use the BIM Server Manager command from the Start menu (on Windows) or the Applications folder (MacOS).
1221
Collaboration
If the BIM Server is located on your machine, open the BIM Server Control Center using the icon in the system tray (on Windows); or from the menubar (in MacOS); and click the BIM Server Manager button.
Note: Clicking this button opens the BIM Server Manager for the local machine only. The Choose BIM Server and user authentication controls of the BIM Server Manager will not be available.
Choose BIM Server and Server Administrator

Note: If you open BIM Server Manager from the BIM Server Control Center, you will access the server on your current machine, and the Choose Server and user pop-up are not available. 1) From the pop-up list at the top of BIM Server Manager, choose the server whose content you want to manage. 2) From the pop-up list at top right, choose a user who has Server Administrator rights, as defined in the Users page of BIM Server Manager. (If you have not yet added any users, then the only available name is the Server Administrator defined in Step 3 of the BIM Server Configuration.)
1222
Collaboration
Note: If you have lost/forgotten all administrator accounts, then go to the server machine and start BIM Server Manager from the BIM Server Control Center application. BIM Server Manager will open without authentication and you will be able to create new Users.
1223
Collaboration
Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use this function. From the Projects page of BIM Server Manager, click Create to create a shared Teamwork project on this server.
The Create Project dialog box appears:
Choose one of the two options for creating an existing Teamwork project on this server: Import Project from File: Browse for a Teamwork project which has been exported (from this or any other BIM Server) and saved as a .twportable file. (See Export Teamwork Project.) This imported project will be created on the current server and made accessible to users on this server. Note: The imported project will not contain any user data or associated access rights. You must add users from your server to the User list of the newly imported project: see Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project. - Delete File after Import: Check this box if you wish to delete the .twportable file from its original location after successfully importing it to this server.
1224
Collaboration
Duplicate Project: This option will duplicate an existing project currently selected in the BIM Server Managers project list. (If nothing is selected or the list is empty, this control is grey.) A new project (a duplicate copy of the selected project) is created on the BIM Server, and the New Project Settings dialog box appears. (See Teamwork Project Settings.) Note: One way to use the Duplicate option is to first create a template project in ArchiCAD and share it to the server. Then you can duplicate this template any time you wish to create a new Teamwork project on the server.
1225
Collaboration
Export Teamwork Project

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use this function. Use this command from the Projects page of BIM Server Manager to export an existing Teamwork Project as a file, from this server to another location. This Export function transforms project data into an easily transportable format and saves it as a file with extension twportable. (Teamwork Portable Project). This file can be imported to a BIM Server later, using the Create Project function. (See Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server.) Important: Because User Settings and access roles are server-specific, exporting a Teamwork project from the server will result in the loss of that projects users, User Settings and roles. Select a project, then click Export.
The Export Project dialog box appears:
In this dialog box, click Browse to choose a destination for the exported project (file type: .twportable). You must enter a location that is accessible to the server, not just the local machine. It is recommended to choose a folder located on the server machine. Check the Delete from Server box if you want to delete this project from the current server after exporting it successfully. Optional Content: Check these boxes if you want to include copies of Manual and/or Automatic Backups as part of the exported Teamwork Project Package. (See Schedule Project Backups.) Click OK to start the Export process. 1226
Collaboration
Delete Teamwork Project from Server

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use this function. To delete a project from the server, select the Project from the Projects page of BIM Server Manager and click Delete.
1227
Collaboration
Manage Users on the BIM Server

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use this function. The Users page of BIM Server Manager lists the users who have access to Teamwork projects on this server.
Create New User on BIM Server

On the Users page of BIM Server Manager, click Create to add a new user. The New User Settings dialog box appears. See Define User Settings (below) for details.
1228
Collaboration
Define User Settings

To change the settings of any user on this server, select the user name from the Users page of BIM Server Manager and click Settings to bring up User Settings. Notes: The controls are identical for New User Settings and for User Settings. Within a Teamwork Project, any user may also click User Settings from the Teamwork Palette to access his/her own user settings. Regular users are authorized to change only certain of their own settings; the user settings of others are shown but not editable. (In contrast, the Server Administrator can modify the settings of all users.)
Enter or edit the User Name. (For an existing user, the name is not editable.) Click the pop-up at far right to define the User Status:
Enabled: Enabled users are able to access any project on this server. Disabled: Revokes a users access to all projects on this server. Enter a Password. To generate a random password automatically, click Generate Password from the pop-up arrow to the right. Click Send Password by Email to send the new password to the User, along with his/her user name. Enter the users First Name, Last Name and Email address.
1229
Collaboration
Choose a default Role for this user. By default, the User will henceforth have this role in all projects on this server. (However, in Project Settings, an Administrator can change or customize a users default role on any particular project: see Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project. Note: If you change a users role or related access rights, and the user has already joined a Teamwork project, the role changes will take effect only after the user leaves, then re-joins the project. Optionally, assign Administrator Rights to this user. See Administrator Rights.
1230
Collaboration
Administrator Rights
In Teamwork, the original Server Administrator is defined during the BIM Server Configuration process; henceforth, this Server Administrator can access the BIM Server Manager and all user settings, and thereby define additional administrators. To open User Settings, select the user name from the Users page of BIM Server Manager and click Settings. In User Settings, check one or more boxes if you wish to define this user as Server Administrator and/or Project Administrator: Note: The Server Administrators rights encompass all Project Administrator rights, so if you check the first box, the second is automatically checked, too.)
Project Administrator
The Project Administrator (user icon: silver key) has the following rights in all of the projects on the server: Share projects from ArchiCAD. (See Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD.) Access and modify all Teamwork Project Settings from ArchiCAD Manage the libraries (e.g. upload, delete, update) on the server. (See Manage Libraries on BIM Server.) Force a user to leave the project Create Teamwork Support Package for project-specific error reporting
Server Administrator
The Server Administrator (user icon: golden key) has all of the rights of the Project Administrator, plus: full access to the BIM Server Manager and all of its controls: - Add Users to the server with their User Settings (including each users default roles, enabled/disabled status, Administrator status) - Create Roles and define Access Rights associated to each Role - Manage Projects on this server (e.g. export, create, delete)
1231
Collaboration
BIM Server Manager: Roles

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use this function. This page of BIM Server Manager allows you to define the default Roles of users on this server.
A Role defines what a user is allowed to do in a Teamwork Project. A Role is a set of access rights. The access rights enable a user to create, delete/modify, and/or manage particular element types or data types. (See List of Access Rights.) In BIM Server Manager, the roles defined apply globally to all projects on the server. For example, the access rights you assign here to the Lead Architect are assigned to all users who fill the Lead Architect role on every project located on this server. However, at the project level, the Administrator is able, if needed, to further tailor the access rights that are attached to any of these roles. (See Customize User Roles for a Project.) The following functions of the BIM Server Manager: Roles page are described in the sections below:
Review or Edit Role Settings Edit Multiple Roles Create a New Role Duplicate Role
See also:
List of Access Rights
1232
Collaboration
Review or Edit Role Settings

To see the access rights associated with a specific role, select the role, then click Settings. The appearing Role Settings dialog box (for a single selected role) shows the Role Name at the top (in our case, Lead Architect). If you wish, you can edit this Role Name.
Access rights, divided into seven categories, are listed on the left. Use the scrollbar at the right edge of the dialog box to view the list, or open/close the category panels as needed. Checkboxes indicate which access rights belong to the currently selected role. Access role information for the other roles is shown for information only. Access roles are editable (by checking/unchecking access rights) only for the currently editable role.
1233
Collaboration
Edit Multiple Roles

To edit multiple roles simultaneously, multi-select from the BIM Server Manager, then click Settings.
In the appearing Role Settings dialog box, the access rights of both selected roles can now be edited side by side. (The Role Name, for multi-selected roles, is not editable.) Here, too, access rights of other roles are displayed for information purposes only.
1234
Collaboration
Create a New Role

Click Create at the bottom of the BIM Server Manager: Roles page. The Create Role dialog box appears. Enter a Role Name, then define its access rights by checking the appropriate boxes.
Duplicate Role
Use this feature if you want to create a role that is similar to an already existing one. Select a single role from the existing list on BIM Server Manager: Roles, then click the Duplicate button. The Role Settings dialog box appears. Give the role a new name, then define its access rights by checking the appropriate boxes.
1235
Collaboration
List of Access Rights

A Role is a set of access rights. The access rights enable a user to create, delete/modify, and/or manage particular element types or data types. This list of access rights can be viewed and customized: At the BIM Server level: Go to the Roles page of BIM Server Manager (choose a Role, then click Settings to view or change access rights). These are your company-defined roles; they are applied globally to all projects on the server. At the project level: For a new project: during the Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD process, you can modify the access rights of any users, using the Users and Roles page. (Select a user, then select Custom from the pop-up at the end of the row to customize access rights for the user.) For an existing project: go to the Users and Roles page of Teamwork Project Settings (as above). Access Rights are divided into seven categories: Work with Elements Attributes Project Structure External Content Scheduling and Listing Administration More The following are the predefined access rights for Teamwork projects. Most access rights are self-explanatory. In this table, we have added a brief explanation where warranted.
Work with Elements
Documentation Tool Elements All ArchiCAD tools listed in the Documentation Tools sub-menu Design Tool Elements All ArchiCAD tools listed in the Design Tools sub-menu Grid Elements XREF instances Enables user to reserve, modify or delete XREF instances. Enables user to attach additional instances of projects existing XREFs. Does not enable user to manage XREFs of the project.
1236
Collaboration
Hotlink Instances Enables user to reserve, modify or delete instances of placed hotlinked modules. Enables user to place additional instances of projects existing hotlinked modules. Does not enable user to manage hotlinks of the project. Attributes Cities - Create Cities - Delete/Modify Composites - Create Composites - Delete/Modify Fill types - Create Fill types - Delete/Modify Layers/Layer Combinations - Create Layers/Layer Combinations - Delete/Modify Line types - Create Line types - Delete/Modify Markup styles - Create Markup styles - Delete/Modify Materials - Create Materials - Delete/Modify MEP System - Create MEP System - Delete/Modify Pen sets - Create Pen sets - Delete/Modify Profiles - Create Profiles - Delete/Modify Zone categories - Create Zone categories - Delete/Modify Project Structure Story - Create Enables you to create a new story using Navigator context menu or the Story Settings dialog box, provided you have reserved that dialog box. Not associated with the Viewpoint - Manage access right. 1237
Collaboration
Story - Delete/Modify Not associated with the Viewpoint - Manage access right. Views and Folders - Create Views and Folders - Delete/Modify Layouts and Subsets - Create Layouts and Subsets - Delete/Modify Master layouts - Create Master layouts - Delete/Modify Viewpoint - Manage Enables user to create, modify and delete source markers and independent markers (e.g. markers which create a new viewpoint). If you do not have this right, you can only place linked-type Section/Elevation/IE and Detail/Worksheet markers. Publisher Sets - Create Publisher Sets - Delete/Modify Publisher Sets - Publish External Content Hotlink - Manage Enables user to add new hotlinks to the project, and to perform all of commands in the Hotlink Manager. IFC External Properties - Manage Enables user to access the IFC 2X2 and IFC 2X3 panels in Tool Settings dialog boxes, if the IFC add-on is loaded and if these panels are visible. Library Part - Create Library Part - Delete/Modify Libraries - Add/Remove Enables user to add BIM Server Libraries to the project using the Library Manager. (Does not enable user to manage server libraries - that requires Administrator rights.) XREF - Manage Enables user to attach XREFs and to manage XREF sources in the XREF Manager External Drawings - Manage Enables user to place drawings from an external source and to link placed drawings to an external source. 1238
Collaboration
Scheduling and Listing
Schedules and Indexes - Create Schedules and Indexes - Delete/Modify Set Up List Schemes - Manage
Administration
Project Preferences Project Info Project Notes Project Preview Favorites - Create
More
Favorites - Delete/Modify Markup Entry - Create Markup Entry - Delete/Modify Model view options - Create Model view options - Delete/Modify Public Find/Select criteria - Create Public Find/Select criteria - Delete/Modify Add-ons setup - Manage Enables user to load/unload the projects Add-ons as listed in the Add-On Manager
1239
Collaboration
BIM Server Manager: Review Libraries

The Libraries page of BIM Server Manager provides information on the libraries of the BIM Server: their name and last modification date. You cannot manage the libraries directly here. To manage libraries on the BIM Server, use File > Libraries and Objects > Manage BIM Server Libraries. See Libraries in Teamwork.
1240
Collaboration
BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties

Note: You must be a Server Administrator to use these controls. Use the Custom Properties page of BIM Server Manager to define optional custom properties for users and for projects on this server.
To create a new User Property or Project Category, click Create, then enter a name. The new User Property or Project Category appears in the respective list. User properties are categories, defined by the Server Administrator only. However, any user can enter related information about themselves (e.g. Skype address, office location) into these fields, to help others identify who is who, and to communicate more easily.
1241
Collaboration
To view other users personal information in these fields, any user can select a name from the Users list on Teamwork Palette, then click the user icon: the selected users data appears here.
Project categories are custom-defined and assigned to any project by an Administrator. Go to the Projects page of BIM Server Manager, select the project and click Settings. or go to Teamwork Project Settings. Choose the category you need from the pop-up Category list.
1242
Collaboration
This way, the project list (both on the Projects page of BIM Server Manager and in the useraccessible Open Teamwork Project list) contains an additional column by which to sort and identify projects on the server.
1243
Collaboration
Create Teamwork Project

Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD Create Teamwork Project on BIM Server
1244
Collaboration
Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD

The process of creating a new Teamwork Project is called Share. This involves opening a solo ArchiCAD Project file (.pln), then using the Share command to add it to a BIM Server. Other users with access to the server will then be able to work on this shared project in Teamwork mode. To share a project, you must have Project Administrator or Server Administrator status. Note: User Status is assigned by the Server Administrator in the BIM Server Manager. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server.) Follow these steps to share a Teamwork Project: 1) Open a solo ArchiCAD Project file (.pln). 2) Use the Share command (Teamwork > Project > Share or File > New > Share) 3) If you have not yet shared or joined a project from this computer, you must provide your user name and password:
Enter your User name and Password, then click OK. 4) The Share this Project dialog box appears. The User in the dialog header is the name of the Administrator who most recently shared a Teamwork Project on this computer.
1245
Collaboration
Choose BIM Server

This list displays all BIM Servers to which your computer is connected. (An automatic serveridentification process, called Discovery, will locate all the BIM Servers on your LAN.) Choose a server on which you have Project (or Server) Administrator status.
Add More BIM Servers

If you do not find the server you need in this list, or if for some reason the Discovery function is not locating the servers in your LAN, choose the Add More BIM Servers command at the bottom of the list. In the appearing dialog box, you have several ways of adding servers:
1) Start Local BIM Server: This starts up the BIM Server (if any) that is installed on your machine. 2) Browse for a server link file: If your Server Administrator has created a Server Link File (with extension .twlink - see Create Server Link for Client) and sent it to you, browse for this file and click OK. That server will now be added to your server pop-up list. This way, you do not have to enter any information by hand in order to locate the needed server. 3) Set up BIM Server Manually: Enter the name of the server (its IP address and model port) you wish to add. 1246
Collaboration
Project Name and Category

Enter the name of the Teamwork Project. Optionally, choose a project category, or define a New Category.
Note: Project categories can also be defined in Project Settings. (See BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties.)
Users and Roles for this Project

Enable access of all users of [server name] with their default roles: This option means that everyone on the servers user list (see Manage Users on the BIM Server) will be able to access this project in their default roles.
1247
Collaboration
Custom Users and Roles: To add or remove users or change their roles on this project, click Custom, then the Users and Roles button to bring up this dialog box:
For details on these controls, see Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project. After the project is shared, you can still modify the projects user list, and the users roles, by using the identical Users and Roles panel from Teamwork Project Settings.
Convert Linked Libraries

These options define what to do with the linked libraries of the solo project you are about to share.
1248
Collaboration
Every solo ArchiCAD project includes folders for the Embedded Library, Linked Libraries and Shared Teamwork Libraries:
But once the project is shared as a Teamwork project, the Linked Libraries are no longer available as such. Thus, as part of the Share project, you must decide how to convert the linked libraries for use by the Teamwork Project. (The BIM Server Libraries of the solo project, as well as the Embedded Library, remain unchanged even after the project is shared.) Your choices will take effect after you click Share. The default option is to Replace Linked Libraries with BIM Server Libraries automatically. Libraries from the BIM Server will replace any identically named linked libraries. If no identically named library exists on the BIM Server, then the linked library will be uploaded to the BIM Server.
Custom Conversion
The Custom options enable you to either upload your linked libraries, replace them with BIM Server libraries, or disregard them.
Click Custom, then Libraries, to open the Library Conversion dialog box.
1249
Collaboration
The current solo projects Linked Libraries are shown in the left column.
For each linked library you select in this list, choose one of three possible Actions, from the Action pop-up:
1) Upload: Upload this linked library to a BIM Server. You can choose any server (to which you have access) as the destination for the selected linked library. To choose a different server than the one shown by default, click Different Server from the pop-up, then choose the server you need.
1250
Collaboration
2) Replace with: Use this option to replace the selected linked library (in the left column) with the BIM Server Library (in the right column).
Replace with is the default option if there is a library on the BIM Server that has the same name as the selected linked library, but you can choose any other library (to which you have access) to use instead of the selected linked library. To choose a different library, click Choose Library from the pop-up, then choose the server and the library you need.
3) Dont Use: This will remove the selected linked library from the project. (The linked library will not be loaded to any BIM Server during the Share process.)
1251
Collaboration
Click OK to return to the Share This Project dialog box.
Your library conversion choices will take effect after you click Share.
Backup Options
Click Backup Options to access the Project Backup Schedule dialog box.
These controls are also accessible from the Project Settings dialog box. (See Schedule Project Backups.)
Share
Click Share. By default, the newly shared project will be opened now. If you do not want to open the shared project right away, use the Share without Joining option from the Share buttons pop-up.
1252
Collaboration
Teamwork Project Settings

Note: You must be either a Server Administrator or Project Administrator to access and modify Project Settings. To open Project Settings, do one of the following: Select a project from the Projects page of BIM Server Manager, then click Settings to open Project Settings. Use ArchiCAD menu commands: Teamwork > Project > Teamwork Project Settings Options > Project Preferences > Teamwork Project Settings
Controls of the Project Settings dialog box are described in the sections below:
General Project Data Lock/Unlock Project Project Log Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project
1253
Collaboration
Customize User Roles for a Project Force User to Leave a Project Schedule Project Backups General Project Data
For a new project, enter the Project Name. Note: If you have opened the Project Settings of an already existing project, its name is not editable. Once a Teamwork Project is named, you cannot rename it. Choose a Project Category, if desired, from the pop-up below. (Categories can make it easier to sort and locate specific projects if you have a large number of Teamwork projects stored on this server.) Click New Category to define any custom Category, or No Category if preferred. Note: Custom Project Categories may also be defined on the BIM Server Manager: Custom Properties page. Project path on Server: (Not visible when opening Project Settings from ArchiCAD.) This field provides information on the projects location on the server (default path plus folder name), as defined during BIM Server Configuration. This path is not editable.
Lock/Unlock Project
Use the lock/unlock toggle control at the top right of the General Panel of Project Settings to temporarily lock all users out from accessing this Teamwork Project on the BIM Server.
If the project is locked, it means that users can keep working on the project, but will not be able to send or receive project data to or from the BIM Server. Use this locking function if you want to ensure that the project remains unmodified by all of its users for a period of time. (Afterwards, unlock the project again to allow users to access the project.)
1254
Collaboration
Project Log
The Teamwork Project Log is an automatically generated list of events which affect the status of the project model on the BIM Server. To bring up the Project Log dialog box, do one of the following: From Teamwork Project Settings: click the Project Log button File > Info > Teamwork Comments & Log
The Project Log lists the following actions: Share Send (including any Comments) Release of Project Data (including any Comments) Backups (both manual and automatic) Join/Leave project by any user Note: Comments are optional texts that are recorded in the Project Log. See Add Comment. The Project Log is useful for providing a snapshot of project progress within a given time frame: for example, to check whether all users really did send in their changes last night. In the event of a program crash, you can check the Project Log for information on changes made since the last backup. The logged events are listed in the Project History field. Use the controls at the top to filter these events by: Date: Enter From/To dates to narrow the display of events. User: Choose a user from the pop-up list to display his/her events only. (Or choose Unfiltered.)
1255
Collaboration
Action: Choose a type of event to display. (Or choose Unfiltered.) Comment: Type in a text or fragment to display all events whose comments include it. (Or choose Unfiltered.) Click Refresh to display the filtered list.
Export Log
Click the Export button to save the Project Log as a text file to any location.
1256
Collaboration
Assign Users and Roles to Teamwork Project

The Users and Roles panel of Teamwork Project Settings lists users authorized to access this project, together with their roles. Note: The same controls are available during the Share process, in the Share this Project dialog box. By default, Everyone can access the project: Everyone is a special Group user which includes every user defined on the BIM Server (see Manage Users on the BIM Server).
To add individual users, click the Add button and choose the names, from the BIM Servers user list, which you wish to add to this project. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server for information on how to add users to the BIM Servers user list.)
Even if you keep Everyone as user, you can add some of the user names individually to assign them a project role that is not their default role. Use the pop-up at the end of the selected item to change the users role, for this project only.
1257
Collaboration
Here, Everyone is registered as a user on this project in their default roles. However, another user has been assigned a role other than his default role: Peter has been added to this project as Lead Architect, instead of his default role as Draftsman.
To remove a user (including Everyone), select the user name from the list and click the Remove button. See also Customize User Roles for a Project.
1258
Collaboration
Customize User Roles for a Project

It is possible to customize any users role for a particular project. Go to the Users and Roles panel of Teamwork Project Settings and select the user name whose role you wish to customize. From the pop-up at the right end of the selected user name, choose the Custom option. Note: If you change a users role or related access rights, the changes will take effect only after the user leaves, then re-joins the project.
This brings up a list of access rights, allowing you to define (by checking and unchecking the boxes in the list) the role of this user, for this project. The users default role (e.g. Draftsman) is shown in the column on the right, for information purposes. Here, Agnes will be assigned additional rights relating to external content, by marking the appropriate checkboxes.
1259
Collaboration
Click OK.Agness role is now listed as Custom in the Users panel here.
Choose Edit Custom Role from the pop-up if you want to further modify this custom role.
1260
Collaboration
Schedule Project Backups

The Backups panel of Teamwork Project Settings allows you to display and manage project backups: both automatically scheduled and manual backups. Use the pop-up to list just the Automatic Backups, just the Manual ones, or both.
If you export a Teamwork project into a Teamwork Portable Project (.twportable) file (see Export Teamwork Project), you will have the option of including automatic and/or manual backups as part of the exported file. Automatic Backups are scheduled by you in one of two ways: When sharing a solo ArchiCAD project, click Project Backup Options from the Teamwork > Project > Share dialog box. (See Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD.) In the Backups panel of Teamwork Project Settings: click Schedule. The Project Backup Schedule dialog box opens:
Keep last: Enter the number of automatic backups to keep. With each additional automatic backup, the oldest stored backup will be deleted. Exception: You can opt to keep any automatic backup indefinitely: see Keep Automatic Backup. Run every: Enter the interval (in minutes, hours or days) for creating automatic backups. If you define the interval in Days, the Start at field lets you set the time.
1261
Collaboration
Create Manual Backup

Manual backups can be created at any time and kept indefinitely - for example, whenever the project reaches particular milestones. 1) Click the Create button from the Backups panel. 2) Enter a name for the backup copy to be created.
3) Click Create. The new Backup appears in the Backups panel, with a Status of Create. This indicates that the backup will be created after you click OK to close Project Settings.
4) Click OK to close Project Settings and create the new manual backup. 5) The next time you open Project Settings, the new backup is listed.
Keep Automatic Backup

If you select an Automatic backup in the Backups list, the Keep button becomes available. Click Keep to retain this automatic backup even after it would otherwise be scheduled to be deleted. This action takes effect after you click OK to close Project Settings. In effect, the automatic backup - after Keep - becomes a Manual Backup, with an editable Name, and will henceforth be listed as a Manual Backup.
Delete Backup
Select any Backup from the list and click Delete. This action takes effect after you click OK to close Project Settings. The Delete button is available for newly created backup entries, even if you have not yet clicked OK to actually create it (such entries will show a status of Create.)
1262
Collaboration
Automatic backups are automatically deleted one by one, oldest first, whenever the program exceeds the maximum number of backups, as defined at the Keep Last control of the Backup Schedule. Exception: You can opt to keep any automatic backup indefinitely: see Keep Automatic Backup.
Rollback
Use the Rollback button in Project Settings to either replace the current project with any selected backup copy, or else to create a new Project out of the backup.
Choose a Rollback Option: Overwrite this Project: The selected backup copy will overwrite and replace the current project. As a result, all users are notified of a Terminated Session: they must re-join the new version of the project on the BIM Server. (Users must discard any unsent changes, or save the version they currently have as a solo project, but they can no longer send any unsent modifications to a project that has been overwritten.) Create New Project from Backup: The selected backup copy will be created as a new, separate project on the server. Click Rollback, then OK to close Project Settings. View the results in the BIM Server Managers Project list.
1263
Collaboration
Force User to Leave a Project

A Project Administrator or Server Administrator can force any project user to leave the project. As a result, the user cannot send his/her changes to the project and will lose all his/her reservations. However, he/she can join the project again immediately, without any further action by an administrator. Consequently, the Force Leave function is a temporary situation that can serve to force the release of reserved elements or data, without waiting for the owner to release them enable changes to a users access rights to take effect. For example, if the Administrator has changed the access rights of a user (see Customize User Roles for a Project), the new settings will not take effect until the user leaves, then re-joins the project. To force a user to leave the project, use the Teamwork Palette: select the user name from the Users panel, then click the icon to force the user to leave. A Warning tells you that the user will not be able to send his/her unsent changes to the project.
At this point, the user is forced out, and receives the following message:
The user has no way of sending his/her unsent changes to the server, but may opt to save the local copy as a solo project. The other two choices are to discard changes and rejoin the project immediately, or to discard changes and quit.
1264
Collaboration
Join or Leave a Teamwork Project

To join or leave a Teamwork project, you must be online.
Join
Typically, you will join a Teamwork project and remain joined in, for the full period of time that you are a participant in the life of the project. As long as you are joined in to a Teamwork Project, a copy of the project exists locally on your machine and is synchronized with the project on the server whenever you send and receive changes. As long as you are joined in to a Teamwork Project, you can Open or Close the project as many times as you like, without losing your reservations or dumping your local copy. To join a project, follow the process described at Open Teamwork Project. The only difference is that the project you choose from the Open Teamwork Project list will not have a green dot (which would indicate that you already joined it), and the dialog box command changes to Join.
1265
Collaboration
Leave
Typically, you will leave a Teamwork project when you no longer participate in it. Once you leave a project, you relinquish your reservations and the local copy on your machine is discarded. You must also leave a project if your role and related access rights have changed: changes will take effect only after you leave, then re-join the project.
Forced Leave
The Project Administrator is also able to force any user to leave the project: see Force User to Leave a Project.
1266
Collaboration
Open Teamwork Project

Note: To open or join a Teamwork project: - The project must already have been shared on the BIM Server (See Share a Teamwork Project in ArchiCAD); and - You must be registered as a user on that BIM Server. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server.) To open a project in ArchiCAD, do one of the following: If you have recently opened the project on this computer with the current user name, you can just select it from the Recent Projects list, at the bottom of the File > Open sub-menu. Choose File > Open > Open/Join Teamwork Project, or Teamwork > Project > Open/Join Teamwork Project. When starting ArchiCAD, choose Open Project, then Browse for a Teamwork Project. (See Start ArchiCAD.) The Open Teamwork Project dialog box lists the projects located on the selected server, and displays each projects category, status, and date modified. If the current user has already joined a project, and is currently online, the project name is accompanied by a green dot. If the user has unsent changes in his/her local copy of this project, the project icon is red. If the current user has already joined the project but the server is currently offline, the dot is greyed. If you have not yet joined the project, the command in the dialog box changes from Open to Join. See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project.
If selected server is not what you need, Choose BIM Server as required. If the user name is not what you need, see below:
1267
Collaboration
Select a User
From the pop-up list at top right, choose a user name. If the name you need is not in the list, click Different user, then enter user name and password for identification:
Now select the Teamwork project you wish to work on.
Click Open. You can now work on the opened Teamwork project.
1268
Collaboration
Close Teamwork Project

Use File > Close to close a Teamwork Project. When you close a project with unsent changes while online, the program prompts you with several options:
Discard changes Send changes to the server and save them locally (Send & Save) Save your changes locally without sending them to the server (Save without Send)
Close Project Offline

If you are offline, you cannot send changes to the server. Your only options are to discard the changes, or else to save them locally.
Discard Changes
If you choose Discard Changes, then you will not synchronize your local copy with the server. Thus, in order to continue working on the project offline at a later time, you must first reload the project to ensure that what you are working on is up to date.
1269
Collaboration
If you discard changes while you are offline, you cannot continue working on the same project until you first go online and reload the current state of the project, using the Teamwork > Reload Project from BIM Server command.
See Editing Conflicts.
1270
Collaboration
Working Online/Offline
The BIM Server Control Center icon and the top of the Teamwork Palette indicate your online status:
The client machine must be online to use the following Teamwork functions: Reserve Send and Receive Messaging If the client is offline, interface items relating to these functions will be grayed. You can, if desired, work in Offline mode even if you have access to the BIM Server: click Stop Server from the BIM Server Control Center; or Work Offline from the pop-up arrow at the top of the Teamwork Palette.
1271
Collaboration
Accessing Your Teamwork Project from Different Computers

Once you have joined a Teamwork project, you can later access it from a different computer (such as your home computer). To do this, use File > Open > Open Teamwork Project, and locate your project on the BIM Server that houses it. See Join or Leave a Teamwork Project. Note: If you want to access the project from a wide area network as well as from a local network, make sure the server name is identical in both networks. When you are closing a project which you plan to open later from a different computer, make sure you have sent in all your changes before closing it.
Editing Conflicts
If you open and work on a Teamwork project on one computer, then subsequently open it on a different computer, you may run into editing conflicts if you did not send in all your changes. In this case, you will be warned of an Editing Conflict.
If you choose Edit Anyway, you will lose any unsent modifications that you made to this project from the first computer. Therefore, when you return to this project on the first computer, you will be warned that the project version here is no longer current, and the unsent changes can no longer be sent in to the server.
You have these options: Discard Changes and Quit Discard Changes and re-Open: Open the project, losing the changes.
1272
Collaboration
Save solo Project: If you do not want to lose the changes, your only option is to save this version of the project as a solo project. Your edits will remain, but you can no longer send them in directly to the BIM Server. You can, however, manually paste your elements into the Teamwork project.
1273
Collaboration
Teamwork Commands
Teamwork-related commands are available in these locations:
Teamwork Palette
Teamwork > Teamwork Palette Window > Palettes > Teamwork Palette
Note: Additional commands are accessible by clicking the black pop-up arrows next to the Send & Receive, Reserve and Release buttons.
Teamwork Toolbar
Window > Toolbars > Teamwork
1274
Collaboration
Teamwork Menu
Teamwork Data Location

Choose a default Teamwork Data Folder location at: Options > Work Environment > Special Folders
Libraries and Teamwork Projects

File > Libraries and Objects > Manage Teamwork Libraries File > Libraries and Objects > Library Manager
Other Teamwork-Related Menu Commands

File > Open > Open/Join Teamwork Project File > Leave Teamwork Project File > External Content > Place External Drawing from Teamwork Project File > Info > Teamwork Comments & Log Options > Project Preferences > Teamwork Project Settings
1275
Collaboration
Reserving Elements
Overview of Teamwork Reservation Reserve Elements by Selection Reserve Elements by Criteria Reserve Library Objects Element Reservation Results Feedback on Element Ownership
1276
Collaboration
Overview of Teamwork Reservation

In Teamwork, you only reserve elements/data when you need them, for as long as you need them. Anyone can create new elements or data; no reservation is needed to create something new. For example, anyone can create a slab, or save a new view, and send it to the server. However, to modify or delete an element, attribute, or other data type from the shared project, you must first reserve that element/data type. New elements created by you are reserved by you automatically. Typically, you will reserve the elements as you need them, then release them when you are done working on them, making them available to any other user. Feedback on the reservation status of any item in the project is always up-to-date, as long as you are online. In Teamwork, you can reserve: 1) Elements. There are two ways to reserve existing elements: Reserve Elements by Selection Reserve Elements by Criteria 2) Other Project Data. You can reserve many ArchiCAD data types, such as attributes and certain Navigator items, that are not elements. See Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements).
Conditions for Reserving

To reserve something, the following conditions must be true: 1) You are online. 2) The element/data type is not currently reserved by any other user. 3) Your role includes access rights to the element or data type. 4) The project is in updated condition on your machine. Note: If you do try to reserve elements that are not up to date on your client machine, you will be alerted that a Receive is necessary before you Reserve.
1277
Collaboration
Reserve Elements by Selection

Note: You must be online in order to reserve. Follow these steps: 1) Explicitly select the elements which you want to reserve. All ArchiCAD elements can be reserved. 2) Click the Reserve button from the Teamwork Palette, or click Reserve Selected Elements from the windows context menu:
If your reservation attempt was unsuccessful, or only partially successful, the Last Reservation Results dialog box appears. See Element Reservation Results for details.
Reserving Marker Elements: Sections/Elevations/IEs and Details/Worksheets

Important: Reserving a source-type marker element means that you reserve the right to adjust the markers location and Settings. It does not mean that you reserve elements shown in the associated viewpoint. To reserve a marker-type element - e.g. a Section line - select the Section marker, then reserve it using one of these methods: Use the Teamwork Palettes Reserve command Use the Reserve Selected Elements command from the windows context menu. Select the Section item in the Navigator and click the Reserve button at the bottom of the Navigator.
1278
Collaboration
Select the Section item in the Navigator and click the Reserve button from its context menu.
1279
Collaboration
Reserve Elements by Criteria

If you want to reserve a larger logical group of elements (such as every element on one or more stories), use the Reserve Elements dialog box.
The Reserve Elements dialog box contains information on: 1) the Project Region you want to reserve from 2) the Criteria by which to define the set of elements you need. To bring up this dialog box, click the Reserve Elements command from several locations on the interface. See details here: Reserve Elements in the Active Window Reserve Elements in a Viewpoint, View or Layout
Reserve Elements in the Active Window

To reserve elements from the currently active window, do one of the following: Right click in the active window with nothing selected, and choose Reserve Elements from the context menu; Use the Teamwork > Reserve Elements command. Click Reserve Elements from the Teamwork Palette.
1280
Collaboration
The Reserve Elements dialog box appears. The Project region will be the currently active window - such as the currently open Layout, as in this image:
The Project Region list generated in the Reserve Elements dialog box cannot be edited. Note: You can list several Project Regions here if you multi-select Navigator items, then click Reserve Elements from the context menu: see Reserve Elements in a Viewpoint, View or Layout. Now define the criteria for filtering the elements in this project region (see Define Reservation Criteria). Then click Reserve Elements. If this reservation attempt was unsuccessful, or only partially successful, the Last Reservation Results dialog box appears. See Element Reservation Results for details.
Reserve Elements in a Viewpoint, View or Layout

To reserve elements in a Navigator item (Viewpoint, View or Layout): 1) Select one or more Navigator items. 2) Right-click to bring up the context menu.
1281
Collaboration
3) Choose Reserve Elements.
4) The Reserve Elements dialog box appears. The Project region will be the Navigator item you selected (such as the Section, in this image):
Navigator items from which you can Reserve Elements include: Any viewpoint containing reservable elements - regardless of the current Layer Settings. (This means, for example, that you may reserve elements that are currently hidden.) Note: Reserving elements from a drawing-type viewpoint, such as a Worksheet or Detail, will only reserve 2D Drawing elements - no model elements. Any view containing reservable elements (taking into account the limitations of the views saved layer settings and zoom)
1282
Collaboration
Any Layout or Master Layout. The Layout or Master Layout will be listed in the Project Region. You can reserve 2D elements only: Drawings and other 2D drawing elements placed on the Layouts/Master Layouts. The Layout Book. All Layouts and Master Layouts will be listed in the Project Region. The View Map. All views of the Public View Map will be listed in the Project Region. Any Navigator Publisher Set. All views and/or layouts linked to this Publisher Set will be listed in the Project Region. From the listed Layouts, you can only reserve the Drawings and any 2D drawing elements. Navigator Groups (e.g. Subsets; Stories; Elevations). All users of that group (e.g. all Layouts in a Subset, as in the image below) are listed in the Project Region.
Multiselection of Navigator items is available within one Navigator Map at a time. However, in the Project Map, items from only one Group can be selected at a time (you cannot simultaneously select an Elevation and a Story as the Project Region). The Project Region list generated in the Reserve Elements dialog box cannot be edited. Once you have defined the criteria for filtering the elements in this project region (see Define Reservation Criteria), click Reserve Elements. If this reservation attempt was only partially successful, the Last Reservation Results dialog box appears. See Element Reservation Results for details.
1283
Collaboration
Define Reservation Criteria

In the Criteria part of the Reserve Elements dialog box, choose the criteria with which to filter the elements that fall within the Project Region defined at the top of the dialog box. From the Criteria Set Name pop-up, choose a predefined Criteria Sets, including:
Built-In Criteria Sets: All Elements All 2D Elements All 3D Elements All elements on unlocked and visible layers Note: The predefined All elements on unlocked and visible layers Criteria Set is designed to fit a workflow in which the project manager sets up views especially defined for Teamwork usage. You can create several views out of a single viewpoint, then vary the layer states in each view: set the layers of elements that logically belong together to be visible and editable (with the rest of the non-relevant elements locked), then name the view accordingly. For example, a view entitled "Ceiling Plan" might place all the paneling and mechanical structures onto visible and editable layers. This way, the designated user would reserve elements from the Ceiling Plan view by using the "Elements on unlocked and visible layers" criteria. Public Criteria Sets and My Criteria Sets are listed if you have already defined and saved custom criteria sets (see below.)
1284
Collaboration
Save Custom Criteria Set

Here, the Project region is 1. Story, and the Criteria set is All 2D Elements.
Alternatively, define a Custom criteria set: use the interface to add new criteria, or to define additional conditions for filtering. (The interface is similar to ArchiCADs Find and Select Elements dialog box.) Here, you wish to reserve all columns and beams on 1. Story with white brick material:
Note that the Criteria Name is now Custom. Click on the arrow to the right of the name to store this Criteria Set for later use.
1285
Collaboration
In the appearing dialog box, give your newly defined Criteria Set a name (e.g. White brick Columns/Beams). Choose either Public Criteria Set (to make it available to all project users) or My Criteria Set (if you do not wish to share it).
Click Store to return to the Reserve Elements dialog box.
The newly defined Criteria Set is now listed in the pop-up. Click Reserve Elements. Reserving Elements using these Criteria Sets will NOT select the elements; the Criteria Sets used here merely act as a filter for reserving elements in Teamwork.
1286
Collaboration
Stored Criteria Sets in Teamwork

Criteria Sets that you create and store in the Reserve Elements dialog box are also available from the Find and Select Elements dialog box.
Conversely, all the Criteria Sets you defined in the Find & Select dialog box are available from the drop-down Criteria name menu in the Reserve Elements dialog box. In a Teamwork Project, stored Public Criteria Sets can be reserved through the Find & Select dialog box: click Reserve Public Criteria Sets from the Criteria Name pop-up. Public Criteria Sets are shown as underlined if they have not yet been sent to the server.
This reservation means that you alone have the right to modify any of the stored Criteria Sets. However, any user - regardless of reservation status - can create, use and store new Criteria Sets.
1287
Collaboration
Reserve Library Objects

When you place a library object into a Teamwork project, the placed instance of this object is automatically reserved by you: you can graphically move or delete the object. You can request or reserve other placed object instances, just like other elements in Teamwork. If the object file is located in the Embedded Library, then you can also reserve this source file, independently of any of its placed instances. To reserve an embedded object (source file), go to the Embedded Library in Library Manager. Select the object file and click Reserve.
You now own the source file of the object: you can modify its parameters (use File > Libraries and Objects > Open Objects). Your modifications to the objects source file will be reflected in all placed instances (after Send & Receive), even those not reserved by you.
1288
Collaboration
Feedback on Element Ownership

Info Tag Colored Workspaces Navigator Icons Review Your Workspace Info Tag
In Teamwork, the Info Tag of an element belonging to you displays Editable:
If an element is owned by someone else, the Info Tag indicates Reserved by [Owner name]:
If a previously reserved element has been released, the Info Tag indicates that it is again Free for Reservation:
1289
Collaboration
Colored Workspaces
The Colored Workspaces function, in the Teamwork Palette, provides feedback on reserved elements. This function works in the 3D window as well as 2D windows. From the pop-up Colored Workspaces control of the Teamwork Palette (Window > Palettes > Teamwork), choose one of the options to help you easily identify the reservation status of project elements. See also Defining the Colors in Colored Workspaces.
1) Highlight my reservation Here, the Colored Workspaces option is set to Highlight my Reservation: this means that your own elements are shown using the Highlight color; all other elements are shown in the Passive color:
1290
Collaboration
Other options in the Colored Workspaces function: 2) All with original Color: This is the default option, and essentially means that no reservationspecific colors are used. 3) Gray out Unowned Workspace: Everything which is NOT yours is shown in the Passive color. (Your own items are shown in their original colors.) 4) Show Reservation by Users: Each Users elements are shown in a different color (Member colors are defined in the Teamwork Palettes Users panel). All unowned elements are shown in the Free Elements color. 5) Own elements/free elements/others workspace: Your own elements in your own color; free elements in the Free Elements color; others workspace in the Passive color. 6) Requested by me/From me/Other Elements: Requested by me and From me are shown in those respective colors; other elements shown in the Passive color.
Defining the Colors in Colored Workspaces

Depending on which Colored Workspace variation you choose, you will use one or more of the following colors: Highlight Passive Free Elements Requested by Me Requested from Me These colors are defined in the Workspace Colors section of Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options:
1291
Collaboration
Defining User Colors

In addition to the color categories listed above, you can define a separate color for each user: select the User Name in the Teamwork Palette, then click the color icon to bring up the color chooser palette.
Navigator Icons
In a Teamwork project, a green dot next to Navigator items means that the item is reserved by you.
1292
Collaboration
The Teamwork Status panel at the bottom of the Navigator also indicates whether the selected item is Editable (you can click Release if you no longer need it) Free for Reservation (click Reserve if you need it) Reserved (click Request to ask for it)
1293
Collaboration
Element Reservation Results

When you attempt to Reserve a set of elements in Teamwork, it may occur that some of the elements cannot be reserved by you. Reasons for a failure to reserve elements: They are already reserved by another user They have been deleted In such cases, the Last Reservation Results palette appears with feedback on the results.
This palette lists each region (e.g. viewpoint, Layout) in which your reservation attempt ran into a conflict. For each such region, you have several options. Select one or more region in the list and choose an option: Release: Release the reservation for the selected region. Reserved elements listed here are now returned to their previous ownership status. Show Conflict: (Available only if you have selected a single region in the list.) ArchiCAD will open the window of the selected region, and zoom into and select the unreservable element(s). Show Successful: (Available from the Show Conflict buttons pop-up.)
ArchiCAD will open the window of the selected region, and zoom into and select the successfully reserved element(s). Request: Click this Request for all the conflict elements in the selected region(s). A Request message is created: click Send to send this message to the owners of all of these elements. See also Request Elements or Project Data.
1294
Collaboration
Reserving Project Data (Non-Elements)

See also Overview of Teamwork Reservation. Any user, with the appropriate access rights, can create new data and send it to the server. However, to modify or delete shared project data, you must first reserve that data type. After reserving an attribute/project data type, the user can modify/delete items of that type. To reserve project data types, just go to the relevant dialog box, palette or Navigator map, and view the Teamwork Status information at the bottom. If the data is available, click Reserve to reserve it: for example, the Fill Types dialog box, or a Layout.
Once you have clicked Reserve in a dialog box, that data type or attribute remains part of your workspace until you release it (even if you click Cancel to leave the dialog box). Topics in this section:
List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements) Feedback on Ownership of Project Data Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items Reserve and Delete Layers Reserve Find and Select Criteria Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes Reserve Mark-up Entry
1295
Collaboration
List of Reservable Project Data (Non-Elements)

In a shared Teamwork project, you can reserve the data represented by the following dialog boxes, palettes and Navigator items:
Attributes
Line Types Fill Types Composites Pens Profiles Cities Mark-up Styles Zone Categories Layer Settings Materials
Navigator Items
Layout Map individual Layouts individual Views individual Drawings Publisher Sets Camera/VR Schedules Indexes List Schemes (certain functions)
Other
Model View Options Favorites Find & Select Criteria Project Preferences Story Settings Markup Entry Project Notes Project Info Project Preview
1296
Collaboration
Feedback on Ownership of Project Data

At the bottom of each dialog box (or at the bottom of each Navigator map), the Teamwork Status control light is color-coded to indicate the current status of that data type: Blue - Free for Reservation. The Reserve button is available. (Clicking Reserve also means that the reserved data type will automatically be synchronized with the server to ensure it is up to date.) Green - Editable. This data type belongs to you; you can modify or delete these data as needed, or Release them using the button to the right. Changes are sent to the server There is an additional option for Releasing:
Release and Comment. The data is released, and the Release event is added to the Project Log in the form of a comment. You also have the option to send a message at this time. (See Add Comment.) Red - Reserved (by user name). The Request button is available.
See Request Elements or Project Data. Gray- Not Accessible. (The server is off-line.)
Gray - No Access Right: You have no access rights at all regarding an attribute category (neither "Create" nor "Modify/Delete").
A list of the Project Data owned by you is included in the My Workspace pop-up of the Teamwork Palette (see Review Your Workspace).
1297
Collaboration
Reserve Individual Views and View Map Folders

In a Teamwork project, there are two View Map modes: Public Views and My Views. Shared views must be in the Public View Map. To switch between View Map modes, use the pop-up at the top of the View Map:
Reserve a View
Reserving a view means that you reserve the right to: modify the View Settings delete the view move the view in the View Map hierarchy In Public Views, use context menus in the Navigator to reserve the views that you need: rightclick the view, then choose Reserve View Settings. Alternatively, select the view and click Reserve at the bottom of the View Map.
Note: To reserve a view, you must be assigned the role: Views and Folders - Delete/Modify. If you do not have this role, the corresponding commands are not available.
Reserve All Available Views

To reserve all available views in a View Map, or one of its folders, right-click the View Map folder, then choose Reserve free items. If the selected folder itself is available too, the command is: Reserve with free items. (This will reserve the selected folder, plus all available items that it contains.) 1298
Collaboration
Available items are those not currently reserved by any other user.
Reserve a Clone Folder

To reserve a Clone Folder, select it and choose Reserve Clone Settings from the context menu.
Reserving a clone folder thus allows you to alter the clone folder settings. (As a result, any new views added to the clone folder will take on these settings - see Clone a Folder in the View Map.) However, alterations to the clone folder settings will only affect the views in that clone folder which you have already reserved. Settings of cloned views that are owned by others will not change even if you change the clone folder settings. Note: If you change clone folder settings but have not yet reserved all views in that cloned folder, you receive a reminder to this effect.
My Views
In addition to the Public View Map, you can use the local My Views mode in the Navigator View Map. Views in My Views are visible and accessible only by you - they are not shared, and they cannot be sent to the BIM Server with the Send command. To use My Views, just click My Views from the pop-up at the top of the View Map. To add a view to My Views, make sure that the View Map in the Navigator is in My Views mode. Now, whenever you create a new view, it will be placed into My Views. Alternatively, set up the Organizer with Public Views on one side and My Views on the other, and copy views from one to the other as needed. 1299
Collaboration
Reserve Settings of Layout Book Items

Note: To reserve the Settings of a Layout, Master Layout or Subset, you must be assigned the role: Layouts and Subsets - Delete/Modify. If you do not have this role, the corresponding commands are not available.
Reserve Layout Settings

Use context menus in the Navigator to reserve the Layouts you need: right click the Layout, then choose Reserve Layout Settings. (The same applies to Master Layouts.) Alternatively, select the Layout and click Reserve at the bottom of the Layout Book. Reserving a Layouts Settings means that you reserve the right to: modify the Layout Settings delete the Layout move the Layout within the Layout Book structure To reserve Settings of all available Layouts in the Layout Book, or all Layouts in one of its Subsets or in the Master Layouts folder, right-click the Layout Book name (or the Subset/folder), then choose Reserve free items. If the selected folder itself is available too, the command is: Reserve with free items. This will reserve the settings of the selected folder, plus the settings of all available items that it contains. Available items are those not currently reserved by any other user.
This will reserve the Available items are those not currently reserved by any other user.
1300
Collaboration
Reserve Subset Settings

Use context menus in the Navigator to reserve the Subsets that you need: right click the subset, then choose Reserve Subset Settings. This gives you the right to modify the Subset Settings Dialog Box. Note: Modifications to Subset Settings will affect all Layouts in the Subset, even those owned by other users.
Reserve Layout Book Settings

To reserve Book Settings, right-click the project name at the top of the Layout Book tree structure and click Reserve Book Settings.
Reserving the Layout Book gives you the sole right to edit the options in the Book Settings Dialog Box.
1301
Collaboration
Reserve Publisher Sets

To reserve a Publisher Set, open the Publisher set tab page of the Navigator Palette. In a Teamwork project, there are two Publisher Set modes: Public Sets and My Sets. Shared Publisher Sets must be placed in the Public Sets list.
Since there can be multiple public Publisher sets, you must specify which one you want to reserve. Navigate to Public Sets (use the One Level Up button), with the list of public Publisher Sets. From this list, choose the desired Publisher Set. Click Reserve at the bottom of the Publisher Set page to reserve it; or click Reserve from the context menu.
Note: To manage public Publisher sets, you must first click on Public Sets to show the list, then use the icons to duplicate or delete sets, or to create new ones.
1302
Collaboration
Reserve and Delete Layers

To assist in your design work, you can change layer states and create new Layers or Layer Combinations, even if the Layer Settings attribute has been reserved by someone else. However, to save and share these changes to the project, or to delete layers, you must reserve Layer Settings. To reserve Layer Settings, open the Layer Settings dialog box, and click Reserve. If you delete layers, any of your own elements located on those layers are also deleted.
However, elements on deleted layers are NOT deleted if they are owned by other users. Such elements will be identified as having MISSING layers. These elements will be displayed on all outputs; their visibility cannot be changed. If you find that your elements are located on a deleted (MISSING) layer, you should either delete these elements or move them onto another layer. To easily identify which of your elements are on MISSING layers, just hide all project layers: elements whose layers are missing (plus any elements on the ArchiCAD Layer) will be the only elements that are still displayed.
1303
Collaboration
Reserve Find and Select Criteria

In a Teamwork project, the Find & Select Palette contains a number of built-in Criteria Sets. (See Find and Select Elements.) Additional Criteria Sets customized by you can be stored either locally (My Criteria Sets) or shared and reserved (Public Criteria Sets). Click the Criteria Sets pop-up to see which Criteria Sets are available to your project:
The control light (green, blue or red) lets you know whether Public Criteria sets are Reserved by you, Available for reservation, or Reserved by someone else. Use any of these Criteria Sets to Find & Select elements in your project, even if the Public Criteria Sets are reserved by someone else. These same Criteria Sets are available in the Reserve Elements dialog box. (See Reserve Elements by Criteria.) While any user can use the criteria sets regardless of ownership, you must reserve Public Criteria Sets in order to Store a custom Criteria Set as a Public Set Overwrite an existing Public Criteria Set Delete a Public Criteria Set To reserve the projects Public Criteria Set, click this command from the pop-up at the top right of the Find & Select dialog box.
1304
Collaboration
If you have reserved the projects Public Criteria Sets, the green control light will indicate this:
1305
Collaboration
Reserve List Scheme Dialog Boxes

The following functions of the Calculation List feature can be reserved using the control light interface: Set Up List Schemes Note: List Schemes will function in Teamwork projects only if you save them to the projects Embedded Library. Edit Database Link Properties to Criteria For details on the Calculation List feature, see Calculation.
1306
Collaboration
Reserve Mark-up Entry

See Teamwork and Project Mark-Up.
1307
Collaboration
Review Your Workspace

For an overview of all project items (both elements and non-elements) reserved by you, go to the Workspace panel of the Teamwork Palette and click the My Workspace button:
Select any item on this Workspace pop-up and click Show (to zoom to elements) or Open (to open the relevant dialog box), depending on the item you have selected. Click Release if you are ready to release the selected item.
Feedback on Element Ownership Feedback on Ownership of Project Data
1308
Collaboration
Creating and Sending Project Data

Create New Data
Regardless of reservation status, any user having the necessary access rights can create and store new project data, and you can modify such data locally. For example, any user can create a new Fill Type even if he/she has not reserved the Fill Types dialog box. If you create a new attribute or other data type, you are free to modify and delete it. Until the first time you issue the Send command, the name of the newly created data type is shown as underlined in the dialog box (like Pavement 20 in this image), indicating that no other users are able to see or use this attribute.
Send New Data

If you create a new attribute or other non-element data type, use Send Changes to send it to the server. If, at the time you want to send changes, the data type is reserved by another user, you will be warned that you cannot send in any changes:
To resolve this situation, you can: Get the owner of the data type to release it right now, then Retry Cancel, then reserve or request the data type (e.g. Fill Types Dialog Box), then Send again Delete the new data (e.g. Pavement 20), then Send again
New Data in the Navigator

When you create a new Navigator item (e.g. a new view), its Settings are automatically reserved by you. A newly created item that has not yet been sent to the server is displayed in green in the Navigator. To create a new view or Public View Map Folder, you must be assigned the role: Views and Folders - Create. If you do not have this role, the corresponding commands are not available.To create a new Layout, Subset or Master Layout, you must be assigned the role: Layouts and Subsets - Create. If you do not have this role, the corresponding commands are not available.
1309
Collaboration
Assign Elements
You can assign any of your own elements to another user, even if that user has not requested them. To do this, select the element(s), then the Assign Selected Elements to command from the context menu or the Teamwork menu. Choose the user to whom you will assign the elements.
In the appearing dialog box, click Send to complete the operation. The recipient is automatically notified of this assignment through the Messaging system. If the assigned element is not in updated condition, you are prompted to Send your changes to the server first.
It is possible for you to be assigned an element that is not yet in updated condition on your client machine. In this case, you cannot edit your new acquired element until you do a Receive. This is indicated in the elements Info Tag:
1310
Collaboration
Request Elements or Project Data

Use Request if the element you wish to reserve is currently owned by another user. You must be on-line to Request. The Request command is available from the following locations: in the Teamwork Palette in the context menu of selected Navigator items in the context menu of selected elements in the dialog box of project data (such as Model View Options)
Click Request. The New Request dialog box appears to let you send a message about your request to the elements owner. Click Send.
See also Messaging.
1311
Collaboration
The Request command is also available if you have tried to reserve a number of items, but your reservation attempt was only partially successful, because some of the items are owned by others and could not be reserved. In this case, the Last Reservation Results dialog box appears, showing the number of Conflict items (see Element Reservation Results). Clicking the Request button here means you request the Conflict items from their owners.
1312
Collaboration
Release Elements or Project Data

Release Project Data
To release project data owned by you, open the relevant dialog box (or select the item in the Navigator), then click the Release command from the bottom of the dialog box (or from the Navigator items context menu).
Release Selected Element(s)

To release an element currently owned by you, select it, then click the Release Selected command from one of these locations: the Teamwork Palette (choose either the Release button or the Release Selected and Comment option from the pop-up) the Teamwork menu the context menu of the selected element
Once released, an element is shown as Free for reservation in the Info Tag.
It can now be reserved by another user. If any user has already sent in a request for this element, then he/she will automatically receive the element (and a message) as soon as it released. Before releasing a modified element, you must send your changes to the server:
1313
Collaboration
Release All
If nothing is selected, the button in the Teamwork Palette changes to Release All. This will release all of your reservations: elements and project data alike. Click the pop-up button to access other Release commands:
Release and Comment

Release commands on the Teamwork Palette and in project data dialog boxes include an option to Release and Comment. Choose this to add a comment to the Project Log (with or without a message to other users) to report the Release event. See Add Comment.
1314
Collaboration
Messaging
Teamwork for ArchiCAD 13 introduces an efficient, easy way for users to instantly communicate and to manage workspaces. Teamwork Messaging is integrated with the ArchiCAD project: its functions are tied to elements and actions within the project, so that many messaging functions are automated, reducing the amount of user-initiated communications needed. For example, when requesting an element, you need not explain which one you need: just select it and click Request. The owner immediately and automatically receives a message (with built-in response commands) that displays exactly which element you have requested. Every time you receive a message, a fly-over alert appears on your screen.
You can click this to view the message and respond to it as needed, or ignore it and keep working until you take the time to deal with the new messages. You can communicate with users who are not online at the moment: they will receive their messages the next time they are online. Teamwork Messaging does not handle any kind of attachment. The Messages panel, available from the Teamwork Palette, has three tabs. The To Do list shows you items which await action from you. New messages arrive here, including notification of the outcome of your Requests. (for example, Granted request: Elements on the 1. Story; or Denied request.)
1315
Collaboration
The Pending Requests list stores request messages sent by you, which are still pending.
If a pending request (or a part of it) is completed, then it automatically moves to the To Do list, letting you know that you can start working with the elements. (Such items are automatically removed from the Pending Requests list.) If you sent a request to more than one user, then each response will appear as a separate message on the To Do list. Your request will remain in the Pending Requests list until the last answer arrives. If you open one of your Pending Requests, you get a status report: how many of the requested items have been granted/denied and how many are still pending. If you requested an element from someone who simply released the element without responding specifically to your request, the element is then automatically given to you. Your request is then moved from the Pending Requests list to the To-Do list, in the form of a No pending elements message. The Completed list is a repository of messaging actions that are no longer pending and no longer require action by you. You can also move an item to Completed manually: select the item, then the Move to Completed command from the context menu; or click the clock icon at the bottom right corner.
Exception: If a message is expecting a response from you, then you cannot move it to the Completed list; you must first answer that message. (These messages are typically Requests, requiring an answer of Grant or Deny.) Once you answer with a Grant/Deny, then the message automatically moves to the Completed list.
1316
Collaboration
To delete one or more messages from the Completed list, select them and click the Delete item at the bottom of the list.
Request Messages Create a New Message Receive and Open Message Ask for Review
1317
Collaboration
Request Messages
A Request message is automatically created and sent whenever you click the Request button associated to a selected Teamwork element or data type which you wish to reserve, but which is owned by another user. See Request Elements or Project Data. Whenever you send an Request message, it is filed in your Pending Requests list. Concurrently, the Request message is delivered to the owners To Do list. If the owner is not currently on-line, the Request will be delivered as soon as s/he goes on-line. If the owner releases the requested item independently of the Request message, the requesting user automatically receives the item. If you open one of your Pending Requests, you get a status report: how many of the requested items have been granted/denied and how many are still pending.
Handling Request Messages

The owner of the requested data can respond to the request by clicking the triangle to show relevant commands, or double-clicking it to open the request:
Open Message: Same effect as double-clicking the item, or clicking on the fly-over message notice. Mark as Read: Unopened messages are listed in bold typeface. You can remove the bold typeface using the Mark as Read command. (Double-clicking the message to open it will also mark it as read.) Show Elements: Zoom in to view the requested element(s). Show Dialog: Zoom in to view the requested dialog box. Accept Request: Click this to released the requested element(s). A Grant response message is automatically generated; type any additional message, then click to send it. Deny Request. Click this if you do not want to release the elements. The elements remain in your workspace. A Deny response message is automatically generated; type any additional message, then click to send it. (The same options are available if the owner chooses Open Message to open the Request message.) Once the owner grants or denies a Request, the associated request message is automatically moved to his/her Completed list.
1318
Collaboration
At the same time, the user who issued the Request receives the response in his/her own To-Do list: (the message is concurrently removed from his/her Requests list).
Now, this response to the Request can be opened, where the original request, the owners response, and information on the elements can be viewed in a single window. Click Show All to zoom in to the elements in question, or to access the dialog box of the requested data type.
1319
Collaboration
Create a New Message

To create a new message, click the Send New Message icon at the bottom of the Messages panel of the Teamwork Palette, or use Teamwork > New Message.
Alternatively, select one or more user names from the Teamwork Palettes Users panel, or from the context menu, and click the same icon there. The selected names will appear in the messages To: field.
Note: You can also send messages associated with Comments. See Add Comment.
Choose Recipients
Click the To: button to bring up a checklist of users who are logged in to the project (whether currently online or not). Choose the recipients of your message.
1320
Collaboration
For extra emphasis, you can choose to add a High Priority icon to your message from the pop-up at the top right. High priority messages are shown in the recipient's To Do list with a colored background, and the associated flyover that appears on the recipients screen will not disappear until the recipient takes some action to open or close it.
Type in the desired text message, and click Send.
Add a Task Request

You can make it easier for the message recipient if you add a pre-programmed task request as part of your message. Click the Task pop-up in the New Message dialog box:
If you wish, choose a Task to add it to your message. For example, if your message asks the recipients to send in all their work, you can attach a Send Changes button to your message. In complying with your request, the recipient needs only to click this Send Changes button from the message.
1321
Collaboration
Receive and Open Message

To view a new message and related options, do one of the following: click on the fly-over message notification click the pop-up of the new message in your To-Do list, and choose one of the options:
If the sender has included a Task as part of the message, the related command is shown here: click if you want to complete the Task. The same options are available if you open the message.
1322
Collaboration
Ask for Review

If you want to discuss certain element(s) with a fellow user, it often easiest to ask them to take a look. In Teamwork, this is easy: 1) Select the element(s) in question. 2) From the context menu, choose Ask for Review. 3) Enter recipient name(s). 4) The Review Selected Elements task is automatically included in the message. Click Send.
The recipient simply clicks Show to see the elements under review.
1323
Collaboration
Add Comment
Comments are optional texts that are recorded in the Project Log. To add a comment to the Project Log, do one of the following: Use Teamwork > Add Teamwork Comment Choose Send and Comment or Release and Comment from the pop-up or context menu of the regular Send and Release commands.
The appearing Add Comment dialog box may contain an automatically generated text about the action you have just taken. (If you just issued the Add Teamwork Comment command, the field is empty.)
1324
Collaboration
Type any text into this field. When you click OK, the comment will be added to your Project Log.
Send Message with Comment

In addition to sending the Comment to the Project Log, you can notify any other user at the same time, by sending a message. When the Add Comment dialog box appears, click the messaging icon to Add Comment with Message:
Define the message recipients and add an optional task as with regular messages. (See Create a New Message.)
1325
Collaboration
Libraries in Teamwork
A Teamwork Project uses two types of libraries: the Embedded Library plus the BIM Server Libraries. As for any ArchiCAD project, these libraries are listed in the Library Manager. Linked libraries cannot be used by Teamwork projects; this limitation is necessary to ensure that all users have access to all library objects, even when working offline.
Add BIM Server Libraries to Project

Use the controls of the Library Manager to add BIM Server Libraries. (See Add BIM Server Library.) Note: You must have the access right of Libraries - Add/Remove in order to add or remove BIM Server Libraries.
Library Path Too Long

The operating system has a limit on the number of characters that the library path name can contain. Consequently, you may encounter a warning that the program is unable to save a local copy of the BIM server library, because the library path is too long. To resolve this problem, try one of these solutions: Simplify the librarys file structure at its source. This solution requires that you have Server Administrator rights. Go to the source file of the BIM Server Library, and do one of the following:
1326
Collaboration
- Create a container file (.lcf) out of the library folder, using File > Libraries and Objects > Create Container. Next, go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Relocate command to browse the location of server librarys new.lcf source file. - Alternatively, create a different, simplified folder structure for the library (e.g. move the library folder to a higher position in the folder hierarchy so that the file path becomes shorter). Next, go to Manage Server Libraries (File > Libraries and Objects) and use the Refresh command to update the server library with its newly restructured source. Modify the destination of the local library copy. Go to Options > Work Environment > Special Folders, and enter a different location for your Teamwork Local Data folder, which is the destination of your local copies of BIM Server libraries. The new location should be at a higher level of the folder hierarchy, thus making the path shorter.
Convert Linked Libraries to BIM Server Libraries

When you share a solo project as a Teamwork project, the Share This Project dialog box gives you options for converting the solo projects linked libraries into BIM Server Libraries. See Convert Linked Libraries.
Manage Libraries on BIM Server

To manage libraries on any BIM Server, you must be an Administrator (either Project or Server Administrator). Go to Manage BIM Server Libraries. This command is available: from File > Libraries and Objects > Manage BIM Server Libraries from the Library Manager: open the Add buttons pop-up list; click Use BIM Server Libraries to open the Choose BIM Server Libraries dialog box; click Manage BIM Server Libraries.
1327
Collaboration
This dialog box lists the libraries available on this server. Click Upload to add another library to this server, or Remove to remove it. For each selected library in the list, information is displayed on its source path, the date of upload and the last time it was updated. Click Relocate to link a selected library to a new path location. You cannot edit the contents of a library via these server management controls. However, if changes are made in a library at its source (e.g. new parts added to the Company Library), click Refresh to ensure that these changes are also made on this server. Extract will extract the contents of the selected library to the location of your choice.
1328
Collaboration
Library Management Workflow

BIM Server Library source
Library
Library
Project
Library
Project
Client
1329
Collaboration
External Files Linked to Teamwork

Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork External Drawings in Teamwork
1330
Collaboration
Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork

Hotlink/XREF Access Rights
The following access rights enable users to work with Hotlinked Modules and XREFS: Hotlink Instances: This right enables the user to reserve, modify or delete placed instances of hotlinked modules. He/she can also place additional instances of the projects existing hotlinked modules. Hotlink - Manage: This right enables the user to add new hotlinks to the project, and to perform all of commands in the Hotlink Manager (these involve managing the source files of hotlinked modules - see Managing Hotlinks). XREF - Instances: This right enables the user to reserve, modify or delete instances of XREFS, and to attach additional instances of the projects existing XREFs. XREF - Manage: This right enables the user to attach new XREfs to the project and to manage XREF sources in the XREF Manager (See XREF Management Dialog Box).
Reserving Hotlinked Module/XREF Instances

Once you place a Hotlinked Module instance, you automatically reserve it. A placed Hotlinked Module or XREF instance can also be reserved or requested like any element, using the commands of the Teamwork Palette and the context menus. Reserving a Hotlinked Module or XREF instance means that you have the right to move it or delete it. You can also modify its settings (e.g. its orientation/rotation, Master Layer, height and elevation/story values).
Source Files
Any user can open and edit the source file of a Hotlinked Module instance, regardless of who owns the instance. You can Delete and Break Hotlinks to your reserved instances. You can Update every instance of placed modules, both those reserved by you and by other Teammates. After Send & Receive changes, ArchiCAD will update all instances according to the modifications. You can relink the Hotlink of your instances of placed modules. When you then choose Send & Receive Changes, you will see that only your own instances will actually change, while those reserved by other Teammates will remain linked to the original Hotlinked module (the effect is to add new hotlinks to your project).
1331
Collaboration
External Drawings in Teamwork

As in any ArchiCAD project, you can place an external Drawing into a Teamwork project. To do this, you must have the access right External drawings - Manage. See Placing Drawings Onto the Layout. The external Drawing may have its source in another Teamwork Project. In this case, use the File > External Content > Place External Drawing from Teamwork Project command. In the appearing Select Teamwork Project dialog box, choose the BIM Server and the project you need. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server.) External Drawings in a Teamwork Project, like any ArchiCAD project, are managed in the Drawing Manager (see Managing and Updating Placed Drawings). To use the Drawing Manager commands, you must have reserved the Drawing(s) that you are managing. Exception: You do not have to reserve the Drawing in order to Update it.
1332
Collaboration
Troubleshooting
If you encounter an error in a Teamwork project that requires technical support, the problem can be resolved much more efficiently if the support personnel can view the problematic project files. In a Teamwork project, the relevant files are located both on the server and client machines, in various folders. The Teamwork Support Package function is a utility that automatically gathers the necessary project data and stores it in a single file (.twsupport) that you can easily send to GRAPHISOFT for troubleshooting. To create a Teamwork Support Package: 1) From the ArchiCAD Help menu, select Create Teamwork Support Package. 2) You are prompted to close any open projects. (You are also prompted to Save or Send and Receive changes, where applicable.) 3) The Create Support Package dialog box appears: - Select a BIM Server, then the Teamwork Project whose files you want to send. If the current user is not a Project Administrator, you are prompted to provide a Project Administrators user name and password in order to access the projects on the server. (This account will not be stored on your computer.) - Select a destination folder for the Teamwork Support Package file. 4) Define Project Content: either Include All (recommended), or Custom. - If you choose Custom, the Package Content dialog box enables you to check the components you wish to include: Model from Server (available only if the server is online); the last autosaved version; and/or selected project libraries. 5) Click Create to start the file creation process. 6) When the process is complete, a browser window opens showing the location of the newly created .twsupport file. 7) Send the file to GRAPHISOFT Technical Support.
1333
Collaboration
Hotlinked Modules
About Hotlinked Modules Create Module Place Module Place Module(s) from Multistory File Managing Hotlinks Modules: Multiplatform Issues
1334
Collaboration
About Hotlinked Modules

Hotlinked Modules allow you to insert the contents of external ArchiCAD files (sources) into the currently open Project (host). Hotlinked Modules thus enable you to place a set of construction elements onto the floor plan, using a logical pointer (a hotlink) to an external source file.
Hotlinked Modules can be used, for example, to manage the repetitive structures of buildings such as hotels or offices with a large number of identical rooms: if rooms are placed as a hotlinked module file, you can modify all the rooms in one step, by just updating the modules source file. Moreover, the same structures can be used in multiple projects. This is also a good way to subdivide large projects into easier-to-handle smaller files.
The source file of a Module can be a Solo Project, a Teamwork Project or a Module-type file from ArchiCAD 12 or 13. To use an older-version file as a hotlink source, you must first open and save the source file in ArchiCAD 12 or ArchiCAD 13. Older-version Teamwork projects (from ArchiCAD 11 and earlier) must first be migrated to ArchiCAD 13. For details on migrating legacy projects, see the Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13. Your host file can include any number of Hotlinks. The Modules content can be updated upon command if the hotlinked source file changes. The elements of a hotlinked module are included in the host Project, which means that even if the hotlinked source file is not currently available, the Module is still present and visible, but cant be updated as long as the referred source file is unavailable.
1335
Collaboration
Elements belonging to a selected Module have hollow square marks on their hotspots. If several Modules are selected, their selection dots will have different colors to help you distinguish them.
Multiple instances of the same Hotlink can be placed, each instance being a separate Module. The placement parameters of each instance can be different even though they share the same Hotlink source. The Module can only be edited as an entity (similarly to Library Parts or Groups). They cannot be ungrouped and their elements cannot be edited as long as they remain part of a placed Module. You can use the Find & Select command to locate Module elements by Hotlink.
For more information, see Find and Select Elements. Managing (modifying, updating, breaking, deleting) a Hotlink will have an effect on all of its placed Modules.
Source File Data Interpretation

The Hotlinked Modules feature is strictly a Floor Plan to Floor Plan communication, which means that only elements appearing on the source files Floor Plan will appear in the host file. Source file elements keep their story-relative elevation values.
1336
Collaboration
Section/Elevation/IE markers and the contents of Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document windows as well as Cameras of any type are skipped when placing the Module. Library Parts: Placing a Module does not import any of the Library Parts it refers to. Make sure that the Library Parts used by the source are also available to the host, by doing one of the following: - Use the same Libraries for both source and host - Add the sources Libraries to the host files libraries Stories: When you create a Module that contains multi-story elements, or which includes several stories, you have the option of including all stories or selected stories as part of the module. For more information, see Place Module(s) from Multistory File. Pen Colors: The settings of the current Project will be applied to the Module. Materials, Line Types, Fill Types and Composites: If the elements of the Hotlinked Module use attributes that have the same names as those of the current Project, they will use the attributes of the host file. If no material, line type, fill type or composite of that name exists, new attributes will be added to the host file. However, once an attribute is part of the host file, that attribute will not be updated by any modifications to the same attribute in the source file. Note: Attributes imported with Hotlinked Modules are added permanently to the Project, i.e., they will not be removed when deleting Hotlinks or Modules.
Module-Type Files (.mod)

Module-type files are a simplified type of ArchiCAD file (with extension .mod). They contain no Section/Elevation/IE, Worksheet/Detail, or 3D Document data, Library or preferences information and only refer to attributes actually used by their elements. Only the visible Layers are included. Thus, a .mod file is much smaller than a .pln file. Important: If you open a .mod file and add drawing elements in its Section window (or Worksheet/Detail/3D Document), those modifications will be lost when you save the .mod file.
Legacy Hotlinks from Older-Version Source Files (ArchiCAD 11 and earlier)

When opening a project which contains hotlinked modules from source files that are ArchiCAD 11 or earlier, ArchiCAD will display a warning about legacy files, with instructions for how to make the modules updateable in ArchiCAD 13:
1337
Collaboration
For details on converting legacy hotlinks, see the Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 for ArchiCAD 13.
Hotlinked Modules in Teamwork

See Hotlinked Modules and XREFs in Teamwork.
1338
Collaboration
Create Module
There are two ways to create a module-type file (.mod): Save a Project as a Module File Save Selected Elements as Module
Save a Project as a Module File

On the Floor Plan, create the set of elements you want to use as a module. Use File > Save As, and choose the .mod file format. Module-type files can either be placed as Modules or merged into a project through the File > File Special > Merge command. (see Merging Files.) Merged elements cannot be updated from the source file. It is of course possible to place an entire project file as a Hotlinked Module; you do not have to save it first as a .mod file. However, module-type files are a simplified type of ArchiCAD file (with extension .mod). Only the visible Layers are included. Thus, a .mod file is much smaller than a .pln file. This can be useful if, for example, you receive an 80 MB .pln file from a structural consultant but all you need are three of the project layers. In this situation, you can set those three layers to be visible, the rest invisible. When you save the .pln file as a .mod file, only the three layers you need are included, and the hotlinked .mod file is only 2 MB in size. Important: If you open a .mod file and add drawing elements in its Section window (or Worksheet/Detail/3D Document), those modifications will be lost when you save the .mod file.
Save Particular Stories in Module File

If the project contains multi-story elements or several stories, ArchiCAD will, by default, save all of the stories as part of the module. Alternatively, you can save only certain stories in the module: when you save the module using File > Save As, click the Options button in the Save As dialog box to bring up Save Options.
1339
Collaboration
The default choice is All Stories, but you can choose just the current Story, or a specified range of stories to include in the module file. Any element that falls within this range will be included in the module. Click OK to create the module file and close the dialog box. You can then place this module file into your project. See Place Module.
Save Selected Elements as Module

1) Draw some elements in the Floor Plan and select them. You can select elements from several stories by using the Marquee tools multistory option. 2) Go to File > External Content > Save Selection as Module. A directory dialog box will appear, prompting you to save the selected elements as a module file.
By checking Replace selection with this hotlinked module file, you can immediately replace the selected elements with the module file. If you have selected certain elements and copied them to the clipboard, you can save a module that will include those elements only: use File > Save As, then choose the Module File from Clipboard file format. Note: If the selection contains elements that cannot be modified (e.g. they are locked, located on a locked layer or reserved by another user), an alert will warn you. You will then have the choice of either creating the module with the editable elements only, or canceling the operation altogether. The Apply offset/rotation of most recently broken hotlinked module checkbox is only available in this dialog box if a hotlinked file has been broken; otherwise it is gray. See Apply Offset and Rotation of Edited Module. 3) Click Save. You can then place this module file into a project. See Place Module.
1340
Collaboration
Place Module
1) Choose File > External Content > Place Hotlinked Module. The Place Module Dialog Box appears.
2) Click the Choose Hotlink button to open the corresponding dialog box.
3) Do one of the following: Choose one of the existing hotlinks of this project, shown in the list, or Click New Hotlink to establish a new one. Choose the source of the new Hotlink: either From File, or From Teamwork Project.
- From File: A directory dialog box will appear. Select the desired file to use as the hotlink.
1341
Collaboration
- From Teamwork Project: The Select Teamwork Project dialog box appears. You must choose a BIM Server, authenticating yourself with user name and password, then choose the project you need. The project will appear as a pln file in your Choose Hotlink list. Select this file to use as the hotlink. Important: To access the server and its projects, your user name must be present on the Teamwork projects User list. (See Manage Users on the BIM Server.) 4) Click OK to return to the Place Module Dialog Box. Use the controls here to set the Layer, Orientation and Elevation of the module you are about to place. 5) Click Place Module to place it in the project. Modules are placed in grouped mode. They cannot be ungrouped, and their elements cannot be edited individually. Note: Similarly to pasted elements, Modules can be placed into the current zoom or keep their source file coordinates. (See Paste Options Dialog Box.) 6) If you are placing one or more modules from a multistory source file, the Choose Story dialog box appears: see Place Module(s) from Multistory File.
Edit Parameters of Placed Module

To edit the placement parameters of a placed module, select it, then use File > External Content > Hotlinked Module Settings. Note: You can also modify the orientation, elevation and mirroring parameters of selected Modules with the corresponding Edit menu commands (Rotate, Mirror, Elevate). You can repeat the placement of the same module any number of times with different settings. It is also possible to create multiple instances of the same Hotlinked Module by using the usual Edit commands (Edit > Move > Copy/Paste, Drag/Rotate/Mirror a Copy, Multiply) on Modules already placed in the Floor Plan.
1342
Collaboration
Place Module(s) from Multistory File

To place a multistory file as a module, follow the process described at Place Module. When you place this module, the Choose Story dialog box appears.
All Stories (Multistory): Every story of this module file will be placed as a single module into the host project. Note: If you try to place a multistory module into a host project that contains fewer stories than the module you are placing, the module stories which do not fit in the host project will not be placed. Individually Linked Stories: This option enables you to choose which stories to place as singlestory hotlinks. Choose one or more of the listed stories (use Ctrl+click to multi-select as needed). Click OK.
Match Stories
the Match Stories dialog box appears.
1343
Collaboration
Here, type in the story number of the module which you want to place on the current story in the host project. The rest of the stories of the module will be placed accordingly into the project.
Hotlinks that refer to a missing file cannot be used when placing Modules.
1344
Collaboration
Editing Module Content

Two workflows for editing modules are described here:
Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink
1345
Collaboration
Edit Hotlink Source in Separate ArchiCAD

To edit the elements of all the instances of a placed module, the easiest way is to edit the Hotlink Source file. In Hotlink Manager (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager), choose the desired source file from the Hotlink Sources list. Then click Open in Separate ArchiCAD. Another ArchiCAD opens on your machine, with the source file. Edit the file as needed, then save it. Hint: If you want to see the Floor Plan context of the placed module while editing its source in the second ArchiCAD, use the Trace function: save the Floor Plan (in the first ArchiCAD) as a view and place it onto a Layout. In the second ArchiCAD, use the Organizer to access the first ArchiCAD and copy this Layout into the second ArchiCAD. Select this Layout in the second ArchiCADs tree structure and choose Show as Trace from its context menu. Return to the first (host) project. Go to File > External Content > Hotlink Manager. In the Hotlink Source list, note that the Status of the edited modules Hotlink Source now reads Modified. (If needed, click Refresh Status to get the latest status messages.) Click Update to update the hotlink. This action is carried out once you click OK to close the Hotlink Manager dialog box.
1346
Collaboration
Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink

Another way to edit a module is to break its hotlink, then edit it, and replace the previous hotlink with the newly edited module. 1) Select the module to edit on the Floor Plan. 2) Choose File > External Content > Hotlinked Module Settings. 3) Check the Break Hotlink of Selected Modules box, and click OK to close the dialog box.
4) Edit the elements as needed. (Use Edit > Grouping > Suspend Groups to enable editing.) 5) Select the elements again and choose File > External Content > Save Selection as Module. 6) Give the new module file a unique name. Note: If you choose the old name of the module file, you will overwrite the previous source file and thereby overwrite all placed instances of the module file, not just the selected module. 7) Click Save. The new, edited Hotlinked module is placed.
1347
Collaboration
Apply Offset and Rotation of Edited Module

When several instances of a module have been placed with different rotation and offset values, and you edit the source file after breaking its hotlink, a relocation effect occurs when you save the modified source file.
To correct this: Follow the steps listed above to break the hotlink and edit it.
When saving the edited selection as a module in the Save Selection as Module dialog box (see step 5 above): Check both the Replace selection with this hotlinked module file and Apply offset/rotation of most recently broken hotlinked module boxes. Click the Save button.
1348
Collaboration
The placed module instances keep their relative locations.
1349
Collaboration
Display Order of Hotlinked Module Elements

You cannot directly control the display order of Hotlinked module instances in the host file in which you have placed it: the display order of Hotlinked Module elements is inherited from the original hotlinked file. To change the relative display order of elements in the Hotlinked Module instance, you must change the display order of the overlapping elements within the host file (move the elements forward or backward in the display stacking order as needed), then update the hotlink in the host file. See more on the display stacking order system at Display Order.
1350
Collaboration
Managing Hotlinks
Use the Hotlink Manager Dialog Box (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager) to gain an overview of and manage all the modules in your project. The Hotlinked Modules list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules hotlinked into the current project. Each module listed here represents a vertical slice (that is, one or more stories) of its source file. The list is hierarchical, indicating any nested modules at a lower level in the tree structure. The following image shows three single-story modules placed from source file A.pln, and a multistory module (from B.pln) which also contains the nested module E.mod.
Select any module in this list to view its information: the Module Name, the linked story (or stories), and the number of placed instances of this module in the project. Hovering your cursor over any hotlink displays an information tag with the modules location in the host file. Note that selecting a module in this list also highlights the name of its source file in the Hotlink Sources list further down in this dialog box. The Hotlink Sources list displays the source files of the hotlinked modules, together with the status of each of these files. Use the buttons at the right of the Hotlinked Modules list and the Hotlink Sources list to manage the modules, their links and their source files.
Nested Modules Deleting Modules from the Floor Plan Breaking Hotlinks
1351
Collaboration
Updating Hotlinks Restoring Missing Hotlinks Replacing Hotlinks Nested Modules

It is possible to have several levels of hotlinked modules nested into each other. Nested Modules are listed in the Hotlink Managers Module list according to their location in the module hierarchy.
Skip or Include Nested Modules in All Placed Instances

For each module that contains nested modules, you may choose to skip the nested modules. This means the nested modules will not be shown on the Floor Plan. To skip nested modules in all instances of a placed module, select the module in the Hotlink Manager dialog box and choose Skip from the Nested Modules pop-up.
In this case, the elements coming from nested modules will be excluded from this module instance on the Floor Plan (but will, of course, still be present in the source file). To re-display a nested module, select its parent module again from the Hotlink Manager, then choose Include from the Nested Modules pop-up. Changes in the display of a modules nested elements will take effect when you click OK to close the Hotlink Manager dialog box. If you select a nested module in the Hotlinked Modules list, you cannot change or break the hotlink (these commands and the module name itself are greyed), but you can save it as a new file.
Skip or Include Nested Modules in Any Single Instance

You can set the option to Skip Nested Modules separately: for each placed instance of a hotlinked module, select the module, go to Module Settings, and check the Skip Nested Modules box. When placing any instance of a module containing nested modules, the same option is available: in the Place Module Dialog Box, check Skip Nested Modules. This will apply to the currently placed instance only. 1352
Collaboration
Source File of Nested Module

You can open or update the nested hotlinks source file in just one step, by clicking the Update or Open in Separate ArchiCAD buttons in the Hotlink Sources section below. However, the Relink command is available only for the source files of modules at the top of the hierarchy, not for nested modules.
Deleting Modules from the Floor Plan

To delete a module placed on the Floor Plan, select it and press Backspace or Delete. (To select it, Suspend Groups should be disabled; that is, the module should be in grouped mode.) All the elements making up the module will be cleared from your Project. If you want to clear all the instances of the same Hotlinked Module, you can go to the Hotlink Manager dialog box, select a Hotlinks name and click the Delete button.
Breaking Hotlinks
To break the hotlinks and preserve the elements of ALL instances of one or more modules, select the module in the Hotlinked Modules list in the Hotlink Manager Dialog Box (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager). Then click the Break Hotlink button. The result: the elements contained in the module are now regular editable ArchiCAD elements, no longer part of a module and no longer linked to any other source file. To break the hotlink of any single instance of a placed module, select the module and use the Break Hotlink of Selected Module in File > External Content > Hotlinked Module Settings. Once the hotlink is broken, the placed elements can be edited. See Edit Module: Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink.
1353
Collaboration
After you break the Hotlink of a placed Module, the elements will be automatically grouped. However, restrictions on grouping will be valid (e.g., Dimension Chains will not be included in the group).
Updating Hotlinks
If the source file of a hotlinked module is changed, the placed instance of the module will be updated only if you use the Update command in Hotlink Manager. (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager.) The Hotlink Sources list indicates which source files, if any, have been Modified and thus are out of date. Select the file and press Update.
Once you press OK to close the dialog box, the module instances originated with this source file will be updated in your project. If you click the Update, Relink or Relocate commands for selected Hotlink Source files, these scheduled actions are noted in the files status column with a yellow triangle (at this point, you can still cancel the operation). The actions are not carried out until you press OK to close the Hotlink Manager dialog box. Warning: Carrying out these actions means that your ArchiCAD projects entire Undo queue will be cleared!
When pasting or merging data containing placed modules into a file containing instances of the same Hotlinks but with different update times, it is always the more recent module content that will be used, forcing the updating of the older instances. Warning: After this operation, the Hotlink may still be outdated.
1354
Collaboration
To set update preferences when opening a file containing hotlinks, go to Options > Work Environment > Data Safety > Hotlink Update.
Restoring Missing Hotlinks

The elements making up the module are actual elements, not just references to items. This means that when you save the project file containing the hotlinked module, all the data you need is saved, even if the source files are not available anymore. You can work with a project file containing modules whose source is not available just like with any other modules, except that the modules cannot be updated. To recreate a live Hotlink to a module whose source is lost or not available: 1) Choose File > External Content > Hotlink Manager. 2) In the list of Hotlinked Modules, select the name of the hotlink which needs a new source file. 3) Click the Save as file... button and name the newly created file (it will be a module-type file with extension .mod). To redefine the location of a Hotlink Source listed as Missing in Hotlink Manager: Click Relink and use the appearing New Hotlink directory dialog box to provide the location of the Hotlink Source (which is probably missing because it was moved to a new location.) As long as a Hotlinked Source is missing, ArchiCAD cannot update its module instances.
Note: Relink is available only for source files of top-level hotlinked modules; you cannot relink the source file of a nested hotlink. If the source of a nested hotlink is shown as Missing, open the file into which the nested hotlink is placed, and relink the source file.
Replacing Hotlinks
To replace an existing hotlink with a different hotlinked module, select the hotlink from the Hotlinked Modules list at the top of the Hotlink Manager, and click Change Hotlink. From the appearing dialog box, choose another hotlinked module from this project, or click New Hotlink to create a new one. You can also replace a Hotlink Source file with another one: in the Hotlink Sources list in Hotlink Manager, select the source file to replace and click Relink. All module instances based on the original source will now be replaced by modules based on the new source you relinked here.
1355
Collaboration
If the new source file has a different story structure than the host file, you will be warned that some dimensions may be lost if you continue the relink process:
You can replace multiple source files with a different set of source files if the replacement files are all in the same folder: select the files in Hotlink Manager, then click Relocate. In the directory dialog box, define the location of the folder containing the new source files. The Relocate command is available only if you have selected multiple Hotlink Source files.
1356
Collaboration
Modules: Multiplatform Issues

Host files located on either MacOS or Windows based computers can accommodate modules created on the other platform. However, moving the host file to the other platform will require that you manually select the appropriate file for each hotlink by clicking the Change Hotlink button in the Hotlink Manager Dialog Box. (File > External Content > Hotlink Manager). After this, the host file will store hotlink path names according to both platform standards. If you then change any Hotlink to point to another file, the path name for the other platform will be cleared. Note: There is an exception to this rule. If this file has the same name as the one the Hotlink previously pointed to, the path name for the other platform will be preserved. Although it is possible to use Hotlinks having the same file name but placed at a different location as long as youre working on either MacOS or Windows, moving the file to the other platform will merge these different path names. Therefore, it is recommended to use different file names for different module content even if youre working in a single-platform context.
1357
Collaboration
XREFs
External reference files (XREF) are similar to Hotlinked Modules, except that they are DXF or DWG files and not ArchiCAD files. External referencing is a way of saving disk space and work. You can attach a DWG or DXF file to your drawing, which will be loaded into the Project and displayed. You can, for example, snap to all drawing elements within the XREF and print or plot them. A common use for XREFs is to draw elements that are common to several kinds of drawings within a Project (e.g., the outlines of exterior and interior walls). If you have a file containing this data, you can attach it to other drawings that can use the geometric information contained in the XREF file without the Project file actually having to contain the data. Also, if the source of the data in the external reference (the DWG or DXF) is changed, then these changes can be updated immediately so the latest data is always available. XREF is available in both ArchiCAD and AutoCAD - both applications can detect circular references. In ArchiCAD, external reference files work much as they do in AutoCAD. ArchiCAD XREFs can display 2D elements from DWG files, but three-dimensional AutoCAD elements (such as Solid elements) are not visible in ArchiCADs 3D window. You can attach and detach XREF files in ArchiCAD, unload and reload them, bind them to the project file and view information about them. These functions are available in the XREF Management Dialog Box (File > External Content > XREF Manager and File > Attach XREF commands. The XREF Management dialog box displays information about the attached files, including the name of the reference (usually the same as the attached file), its status (Loaded, Detached, Reloaded, Unloaded or Bound), size, type (Attach or Overlay), Date and the number of instances. Note: If any of the functions described in this chapter do not work properly, the DXF/DWG Add-On may be missing, or the DXF/DWG Translator is not set. You can check this easily by choosing File > Open and looking for the appropriate file types in the Files of type field. The missing Add-On can be loaded with the Add-On Manager command in the Options menu.
XREFs and the Layer Structure Using XREFs in Round-Trip Communication
1358
Collaboration
XREFs and the Layer Structure

When you attach an external reference file to an ArchiCAD Project, a layer will be created for it. The resulting layer names will have the following format: XREF_NAME | LAYER_NAME. For example, the PEN_56 layer of a DWG file that was attached to the project with the XREF name 3D_STUFF will become the layer 3D_STUFF|PEN_56. In Layer Settings, the layers of any attached XREFs are listed separately, at the bottom of the layer list.
Layers of XREF projects cannot be unlocked, but you can show or hide these layers. When the XREF is detached, a dialog lets you choose between retaining or removing the detached XREFs attributes, including layers, linetypes and fills.
If you do not want XREF layers to appear in Layer Settings, use the display filter pop-up at the top right of the dialog box and choose Hide Xref layers.
XREF layers are not available from layer selection pop-ups in other parts of the user interface (e.g. Tool Settings dialog boxes and Info Box). However, if an XREF element is included in the
1359
Collaboration
last selection, its XREF layer does appear - for information purposes only (in italics) - in the Layer chooser pop-up. If you want to do not want to import unused attributes of the XREF: click the Settings button in the Attach Xref dialog. In the appearing Settings dialog, check the Purge all unused Attributes box on the Miscellaneous page of the Settings of the Selected Translator.
1360
Collaboration
Using XREFs in Round-Trip Communication

In this scenario, you are assigned to work on one part of a larger project. You get the whole project (or the part of it relevant to your job), extend it with your part and send it back. In this case we recommend that you use the XREF (External Reference) model. Using this model you can see all parts of the project, but modify only the part assigned to you. The XREF model is based on a master AutoCAD file containing general information (e.g. a site map). First, attach this master file as an XREF to your ArchiCAD plan to see the current state of the project. Detail plans, including your file, are added as XREFs. Make your modifications in your external file, using ArchiCAD. You will be able to modify only your file. Meanwhile, other members of the project team are working on their files in parallel. To receive the changes made by the others, reload the master file. The updated file contains all the modifications submitted by the other parties. If you want the others to see the work you have done so far, you can send your changes by exporting your work in AutoCAD format. The XREF model preserves the master AutoCAD file: each team member works only on his/ her own part without being able to modify others work, because externally referenced files dont have to be sent back to their original sources. Due to essential differences between ArchiCAD and AutoCAD, perfect round-trips are not possible. (For example, if you import and then export something, polylines and structures are lost.) In practice, however, you can rely on the suggested XREFs, which do not involve overwriting the other partys original file, so that you dont need to rely on a perfect round-trip. If you work in round-trip communication, your file never gets overwritten. The specialist gets new DXF/DWG files from you from time to time, which contain imperfect reproductions of his modifications. You can avoid these imperfections if you keep his additions in a separate XREF file, attached as an external reference to the file you send back to him.
1361
Collaboration
Data Exchange
ArchiCAD is fully prepared to work in collaboration with users of other CAD systems, especially those supporting AutoCADs native DWG and the industrial standard DXF formats. The DXF/DWG Add-On is installed together with the ArchiCAD package and is smoothly integrated in the ArchiCAD user interface. It allows you to: Open AutoCAD drawings as ArchiCAD Projects or ArchiCAD Library Parts. Merge AutoCAD drawings with your ArchiCAD Project file. Place AutoCAD drawings as ArchiCAD Drawings to Layouts or Model Views. Add AutoCAD drawings as external references (XREFs) to the ArchiCAD Project. Import BLOCKs from an AutoCAD drawing and create ArchiCAD Library Parts out of them within their own newly created Library. Save your ArchiCAD Floor Plans, Sections/Elevations, Detail Drawings and 3D Views in AutoCAD formats. Save your ArchiCAD Layouts in AutoCAD formats. Set up Translators to make it easier to apply a customized set of conversion rules to the equivalent elements and functions of ArchiCAD and DXF/DWG files.
Opening DWG/DXF Files Saving DWG/DXF Files Merge a DXF/DWG File
1362
Collaboration
Opening DWG/DXF Files

You can open DXF and DWG format files in ArchiCAD as Drawings or Layouts. Choose File > Open and then select the file you need in the directory dialog box. Conversion rules for data exchange between ArchiCAD and AutoCAD can be stored in a file called a Translator (extension XML). To use the default translator, just choose the Open command, and the selected file will be opened in ArchiCAD. The default translator of ArchiCAD is set up in a way that the translation gives correct results in most of the cases. At the same time, because of the differences between AutoCAD and ArchiCAD correct translation requires custom set up in certain cases. To switch translators or adjust settings before opening the file, choose Settings to open the DXF/ DWG Translation Setup dialog box. This dialog box is accessible: when you begin a data transfer operation, by pressing the Settings button in the Save, Open or Merge directory dialog box or the Attach XREF dialog box, if the import/export file format is DXF/DWG directly with the File > File Special > DXF-DWG Translation Setup command when opening a DXF/DWG file through the File > Libraries and Objects > Open Objects command through the File > Libraries and Objects > Import Blocks from DXF/DWG command You can perform translator management every time the Translator dialog appears whether during data exchange (open and save) or through translation setup. Note for Teamwork users: Using common Translators ensures that all users have access to the same conversion options. It is therefore recommended that the CAD Manager (or a person filling the same type of role in your office) manage the set of Translators and place them on a server. To use the translators, each user must first introduce them into their list of Translators. For more information on Translator settings, see DXF/DWG Translation Setup.
Opening as Library Part

You can also open a DXF/DWG file as a Library Part by choosing the File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object command. This will open the GDL Master Window where you can configure the new object obtained from the entire file.
Opening with Drag-and-Drop

You can import DXF/DWG drawings using Drag-and-Drop: Left-click the AutoCAD drawing, dragging it over the desired location and dropping it. The file will be opened using the last-used DXF/DWG Translator. With this method, the DWG/DXF file is simply merged into the ArchiCAD Project file. The 3D content of the file is not imported, only its 2D appearance.
1363
Collaboration
If several DXF/DWG files are drag-and-dropped, only one of them will be dropped; since you cannot control which file will be dropped, it is recommended to drag-and-drop only one such file at a time There are several ways to use Drag-and-Drop techniques while opening/merging AutoCAD drawings: Drag-and-dropping a DXF/DWG file onto the background of the ArchiCAD application window, the ArchiCAD menu bar or the ArchiCAD icon will result in opening the file. Drag-and-dropping a DXF/DWG file onto the ArchiCAD Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document window or Detail/Worksheet window will place the file as a Drawing. Drag-and-dropping a DXF/DWG file onto a Layout will place the Drawing onto the Layout.
Opening with i-Drop (Windows Only)

i-Drop is a technology by Autodesk that is freely available. It allows users to download DWG/ DXF objects from the web and drop them directly into their CAD software of choice. ArchiCAD now supports this functionality. The needed software (which is an Internet Explorer extension) may be downloaded from Autodesk. Web pages usually contain a preview of how the object looks. When dragging the cursor over the object preview picture, it changes into an I-Drop Indicator cursor form, which shows it is an object that may be drag-and-dropped into your CAD application.
To use such an object in ArchiCAD, press the left mouse button while your cursor is over the preview picture of the object. Drag it over the ArchiCAD Window (Floor Plan, Section/Elevation/ IE or 3D Document Window or Detail/Worksheet Window) and release the mouse button. ArchiCAD will download the object from the web. During the process, a process indicator may appear showing the current stage of the download. Each such object may consist of two files: the DWG/DXF file and a preview picture file. ArchiCAD will download both, if they are available. The preview picture may or may not be available, or it may not be the same image file that is shown on the web page as a preview. ArchiCAD saves the downloaded files into the folder defined in Options > Work Environment > Web Objects. The default location of this folder on Windows is: C:\Documents and Settings\<USER>\My Documents\Graphisoft\Dropped Objects 1364
Collaboration
Opening Password-Protected Files

In AutoCAD 2004 and later versions, it is possible to protect drawings with a password. When importing or opening such a file, you may encounter such a situation. Currently, on the MacOS platform it is not possible to open password-protected AutoCAD 2004 and later DXF/DWG files because the operating system does not support the encryption method used by these password mechanisms. In such a case an alert will come up on your MacOS. On Windows the operating system may be such that it does not support the password decoding routine. In this case you will be alerted that the file cannot be opened. If the system supports the decoding routine, a dialog appears where you can enter the password you received from the person sending you the file. For XREF files, the program will require the password the first time the XREF is reloaded in ArchiCAD. If several XREF files are being reloaded, only the password-protected file will not be reloaded if its password is not entered correctly.
Opening Blocks as Library Parts

The closest analogy of an AutoCAD block is an ArchiCAD Library Part. Block references (insert entities) match the library part instances. The difference: while a library part is a separate file, the block is stored within the AutoCAD file itself. Converting blocks into library parts is the only way to preserve the blocks 3D structure. However, it may be more efficient (use less storage space) to explode relatively complex blocks (e.g. if you explode 100 instances of a block containing 100 lines you end up with 10000 lines). Drawbacks of converting blocks into library parts: You must regularly weed through the object libraries created during DXF/DWG import, to eliminate duplicate and unnecessary items Some editing functions available for details stored in blocks will not be available for the library part instance
ACIS Import
A new function allows you to convert AutoCAD 3D Solids, Regions and Bodies into GDL Objects. Opening or merging such objects brings up a Browse dialog box, where you choose the folder to which to save the GDL objects you will create.
1365
Collaboration
Saving DWG/DXF Files

You can save a project view or layout in ArchiCAD in DXF and DWG formats. (No DWG save is possible from a schedule, index or list view.) Note: If you are working in AutoCAD and open a DWG that was originally saved from ArchiCAD, an Alert may appear. However, you should go ahead and work with the saved DWG in AutoCAD - no stability problems should result. When the Save directory dialog box is displayed, choose the format you need (DXF or DWG) and enter the name under which you wish to save the file. The Translator field in the Save dialog box lists default translators you will use in most cases (such as for as is output). If you dont know which default translator to use, choose Settings to open the DXF/DWG Translation Setup dialog box. Each default translator listed at the top is briefly described in the Description field.
Entity Conversion
Simple ArchiCAD elements get converted into the corresponding AutoCAD entities: Hotspots to points Lines (without arrowheads) to lines Circles to circles Arcs (without arrowheads) to arcs Ellipses to ellipses Elliptic arcs (without arrowheads) to elliptic arcs Texts to multiline texts. Fills to hatches. Note: fills in walls, columns and library parts are treated the same way. Pictures to images Dimensions (all kinds) to dimensions Note: ArchiCAD and AutoCAD dimensions have different aspects of appearance to be configured, so your dimensions will often appear differently. The possible locations of the dimension text relative to the dimension line is the most apparent difference. Arrowheads make these elements (the lines and arcs) complex elements.
1366
Collaboration
Complex elements: their drawing details are made up of more than one AutoCAD entity. Unless you choose Explode complex ArchiCAD Elements, they are drawn into a block each and an insert is placed into the entity section. Walls: they are drawn into blocks named WALL_<n> where n is the index of the wall element. The block contains visible contour lines, fills (see notes to the polygon fills), block references to windows and doors and an attached label. The window and door references may be followed by their window dimension block references and attached label references if they have any. Note: the contours of an arc wall aren't arcs, but polylines made up of straight segments. Columns are drawn in blocks named COLUMN_<n> where n is the index of the column element. The block contains the visible contour lines, the fills (see notes to the polygon fills) and the block references to the attached label. Windows are drawn in blocks named WINDOW_<n> where n is the index of the window element. Doors are drawn in blocks named DOOR_<n> where n is the index of the door element. Objects are drawn in blocks named OBJECT_<n> where n is the index of the object element. Lights are drawn in blocks named LIGHT_<n> where n is the index of the light element. Note on windows, doors, objects and lights: when the library part doesn't have any 2D script, it may have up to 8 different looks depending on Use Symbol Colors, Use Symbol Linetypes and the possible mirrored state. So one library part of this kind cannot have more than 8 blocks exported. Others (with 2D scripts) may have any number of different looks and they will have exactly as many blocks as looks occur on the exported floor. Since more than one instance may share the same detail block, the attached labels cannot be put into these blocks they follow the block references. Slabs are drawn in blocks named SLAB_<n> where n is the index of the slab element. The block contains the contour and hole polygons and the block reference to the attached label. Roofs are drawn in blocks named ROOF_<n> where n is the index of the roof element. The block contains the contour and hole polygons and the block reference to the attached label. Beams are drawn in blocks named BEAM_<n> where n is the index of the beam element. The block contains the contour and hole polygons and the block reference to the attached label. Meshes are drawn in blocks named MESH_<n> where n is the index of the mesh element. The block contains the contour and hole polygons, the mesh level lines and the block reference to the attached label. Zones are drawn in blocks named ZONE_<n> where n is the index of the zone element. The block contains the foreground fill, the zone stamp and the block reference to the attached label. Note: since the default zone-fill colors are light pastel colors and the AutoCAD color set does not contain an equivalent, they all will be RGB-matched to a light gray. If you prefer, pick a saturated color (e.g. red or yellow) for zone fill color and blue or black for zone stamp color. Cameras and camera sets are not exported.
1367
Collaboration
Using SHX Fonts in the Conversion Process

The DXF-DWG Add-On relies on the availability of AutoCAD fonts including the SHX fonts. The Add-On will display a message asking for these fonts during the course of a conversion. If you do not have these fonts available, you can expect problems in text formatting (such as incorrect line breaks). It is recommended that you acquire the SHX font files, which are part of the AutoCAD package, from an AutoCAD user. (Although the fonts are not available with ArchiCAD for proprietary reasons, AutoCAD users are allowed, even encouraged, to distribute them.) True-type version of all SHX fonts are also available in the AutoCAD package. Once you get the fonts, create a separate folder for them. When the Add-On asks for an SHX font file, select it from this collection. If you dont have the requested one, you may select another one. (In this case the conversion results may differ.) Once you have shown the folder to the Add-On, it will henceforth automatically search in that folder (but not in any newly created sub-folders) for the required SHX font files. Note on TrueType fonts: You can use TrueType fonts in ArchiCAD without any problem on either Windows or MacOS. (MacOS users should copy the TrueType font files into the system drives Library/Font folder.) Note on Fonts vs. Shapes: AutoCAD uses SHX files not only as fonts but for other purposes as well. Complex line types insert shapes into their patterns. The shapes may be added to the drawings as simple symbols. It may cause problems if you select an SHX of this kind instead of a font so when the Add-On requests you to locate an SHX file, use the Skip option if you are not sure an SHX file you found is the right kind. The requested filename should give you a clue about which kind is needed font or shape.
Attribute Purge
When saving an ArchiCAD file as DWG, only those ArchiCAD attributes will be included which are actually used in the project. This is an automatic process, reducing file size. You can opt to purge further attributes: the checkbox in DXF-DWG Translation Settings (Miscellaneous) enables you to Purge all unused attributes that originate in the DWG template file.
1368
Collaboration
Merge a DXF/DWG File

You can merge DXF and DWG format files into the currently open ArchiCAD Project. Use File > File Special > Merge, and choose the DXF/DWG file you want to merge. The Merge DXF-DWG dialog box appears. You have the option of merging the content of Model Space into the current View, or to Merge (Append) Paper Spaces to the Layout Book of the Project.
For more information, see Merge DXF-DWG.
Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge)
1369
Collaboration
Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge)

Use Smart Merge (round-trip conversion) if you are merging the DXF or DWG file back into the same ArchiCAD file from which you saved it. Smart Merge allows you to work at the same time on the same project in ArchiCAD and AutoCAD and exchange the additional information with minimal loss and interference. Smart Merge allows you to deal with: New elements added in ArchiCAD or AutoCAD. Elements created in ArchiCAD or AutoCAD and modified (stretched, dragged, rotated, mirrored) in the other application or both applications. Elements created in ArchiCAD or AutoCAD and deleted in either or both applications. If you cooperate with someone using AutoCAD (or any other CAD program that can communicate via DXF or DWG format), the process will be something like this: 1) You work out the architectural aspects of the whole plan to a point where it can present an overall layout for your partner to add details (at this point, you need not be completely finished with your part). 2) Then you save a DXF or DWG file for your partner with ArchiCAD-specific info to support merging. You can merge the DXF or DWG file back into the same ArchiCAD file from which you saved it: Use File > Save as, then click the Settings button to access the DXF-DWG Translation Setup dialog box. In the Settings in Selected Translator panel, use the Saving Floor Plan option: Prepare File for Smart Merge.
Note: You must first save your ArchiCAD Project (save a PLN) so that it contains the necessary information for the merge process. If there is no Merge information in a DWG/DXF
1370
Collaboration
file, you wont be able to rebuild ArchiCAD model elements, only simple AutoCAD-native data. In case the ArchiCAD file was not saved before, this option is grayed. For more information, see DXF/DWG Translation Setup > Save Options > Saving Floor Plan. 3) You continue your work on the original plan, while he works on the DXF/DWG file. That is, while you are elaborating the architecture, he adds his own details (e.g. electric, plumbing etc.); but he may find it necessary to change something you created. For example, he may move a wall or duplicate an object. 4) Now the time has come to bring your separately made additions together. Activate the File > File Special > Merge command and select the appropriate DXF/DWG file. If you have saved an ArchiCAD file as dxf/dwg format in the right way (step 2), you can merge it into the same ArchiCAD file using the Smart Merge Options: File > File Special > Merge > Open From the Merge DXF-DWG dialog box, choose the Merge Content of Model Space into Current View option From the DXF/DWG Merge dialog box, choose Merge Options.
The Smart Merge Options dialog box appears, allowing you to modify the Smart Merge configuration file and the translator options (if desired). Note: You can also set up these options in advance with the File > File Special > Smart Merge Options command which opens the same configuration dialog box. 5) Repeat from step (2) as many times as necessary.
1371
Collaboration
Consultation
ArchiCAD includes two features that allow architects to take into consideration remarks and suggestions made by other members of the design team, or by clients.
Project Reviewer Project Mark-Up
1372
Collaboration
Project Reviewer
Project Reviewer is a Java applet that lets you view DWF, JPG, GIF, and TXT files saved in ArchiCAD using the Project Publisher command. It also allows you to add redline information to DWF files.
This is an extremely convenient way of communicating with clients and decision-makers, who thus do not need to learn to use ArchiCAD or even install the program. Reviewer runs in an internet browser environment and displays the views that you published. For more information, see Project Reviewer Environment. Comments, corrections and other information added with the tools of the Redlining palette can be incorporated in your design by importing them with the Project Mark-Up feature described below.
Project Reviewer Example
1373
Collaboration
Project Reviewer Example

Let us say a Drafter is working on an Apartment building. The Architect wants to review an apartment (e.g. Apartment B26) and make design modifications to it, if necessary.
1) The Architect asks the Drafter to send him drawings to review. The Drafter goes to Publisher in ArchiCAD. Here he selects the 2nd Story for Publishing in DWF format. The DWF file is part of the 'Apartment B26 Review' Publisher Set. He sets the path for the saved files in the Publisher Set Properties Dialog. Also here, he checks the 'Include Project Reviewer web environment' checkbox so the necessary Java application is included with the saved files.
1374
Collaboration
2) The Drafter then publishes this set or drawing.
3) He then finds the saved files on his computer, compresses them into one file (ZIP for example) if necessary, and sends them over to the Architect via e-mail or by uploading the files to an FTP site from which the Architect can download them. It may be advisable for the Drafter to open the saved HTML file before sending it to ensure everything is OK and data were saved correctly.
1375
Collaboration
4) The Architect receives the files. He double-clicks the HTML file to start the Project Reviewer web environment.
5) He moves in on the area in question and begins to review it.
1376
Collaboration
Here he might have several thing he wants to check. For example, he may check, using the Tape Measure Tool of the Surveyor Toolbar to see whether the Bath is wide enough or the Living is wide enough.
6) Then he can start making Redlining entries to give instructions to the Drafter on what to change. For example, he might want a design option for the Apartment in which the wall between the Kitchen and the Living is removed, enabling him to rearrange the placement of the Kitchen counter and the Dining table. Also he wants the wall between the Living and the Vestibule to be moved downward to increase the Living area. He marks all these changes using the various Redlining tools of Project Reviewer, such as the Ellipse Tool, the Freehand Polyline Tool, the Arrow Tool or the Text Tool.
1377
Collaboration
7) After this step he can Upload the redlining data to the file, save his modifications, then go to the E-mail Tab Page of Reviewer and send the modified DWF containing the Redline file to the Drafter. Reviewer automatically attaches to uploaded DWF redline files to the mail sent. He may also attach any other files to the e-mail he sends to the Drafter. Also, it is not necessary - although handy - to use Project Reviewer to send the e-mail. The Architect may send it from his e-mail program, but in that case he needs to manually locate and attach the Redlining DWF files to his mail. 8) After the Drafter receives the mail, he saves the attached Redlining DWF files to his hard drive. Then he opens the Mark-Up Palette, and creates a new Mark-Up entry. He chooses the DWF file from which to import these Mark-Up entries. This will be the file or files the Architect sent him.
1378
Collaboration
9) The Redlining information appears on the ArchiCAD Floor Plan. These entries are imported to the Redline Layer.
10)Now that all needed modifications are visible to him, the Drafter makes the necessary modifications. After he is finished, the cycle begins anew. After he is finished with the modifications, he again sends the file to the Architect who ensures that all modifications were done as requested. If not, or if new modifications are necessary, he sends another Redlining DWF file. They do this until all modifications are correctly carried out to the Architect's specifications.
1379
Collaboration
Project Mark-Up
About Project Mark-Up Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow Version Management with Mark-Up Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information Teamwork and Project Mark-Up Mark-Up Tools Palette Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box
1380
Collaboration
About Project Mark-Up

Project Mark-Up facilitates communication between designers. It allows you to point out problematic elements with a color highlight or to add new elements. You may wish to mark up a design for many reasons - for example to correct and manage a colleagues errors or deviations from a projects guidelines, or to make alternative design suggestions. Use the controls of the Mark-Up Tools Palette (Document > Mark-Up Tools) to add Mark-Up Entries to the project. A Mark-Up Entry is composed of a logically related set of Corrections, Highlights and Tags placed on the plan, and a discussion consisting of comments made by one or several users. The appearance of an Entry depends on its Mark-Up Style. A Style consists of a pair of colors. It is an attribute defined in the Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box.
Sharing Mark-Up Information

Mark-Up Entries in a solo project can be communicated to others via any output of the Publisher Function. Partners can open the file in ArchiCAD, review the mark-ups, and add comments to the discussion. If you publish the views in DWF format, non-ArchiCAD users can add further redlining with Project Reviewer. Redlined DWF format files can be sent to you by the reviewer. You can import these DWF files as a new Mark-Up Entry. Mark-Up entries in a Teamwork project can be shared more directly: just assign any of your entries to another logged-in member, who is alerted to the Mark-Up via an automatic message. (See Teamwork and Project Mark-Up.)
1381
Collaboration
Project Mark-Up: Basic Workflow

1) Switch on the Mark-Up Tools Palette (Document > Mark-Up Tools). Note that it has three panels (plus a fourth, Teamwork panel, if you are in a Teamwork project: see Teamwork and Project Mark-Up.)
1382
Collaboration
2) Start a new Mark-Up entry by clicking the Add Entry icon in the Mark-Up Entries Panel. Alternatively, click the Start Corrections icon in the Mark-Up Tools panel.
3) The New Mark-Up Entry dialog box appears. Enter a Name for this entry and choose a Mark-Up Style (e.g. Revision.)
4) Now add your input, using the controls of the Mark-Up Tools Palette. For example: Add new elements as corrections: Enable the Start Corrections button, then use any tool to add elements to the current view. (The colors used are determined by the Entrys Mark-Up Style.) Convert elements to corrections: After selecting an element, click the Turn into Corrections button. (Remove the Correction marking from any selected element by clicking the Remove Corrections button.)
1383
Collaboration
Highlight elements: Select one or more elements, then click the Highlight Elements button. (Remove a highlight from a selected element by clicking the Remove Highlight button.)
Add a tag text: Type the desired text into the field in the Tag and Discussion panel. Then click Place On Plan, and move the cursor to the desired position in the view. Click to place.
Add a Discussion Comment: Click Add Comment to open a text window, then type your comment. Colleagues who then open your marked-up view can view your comment by clicking on Show Discussion, and add their own comment.
Show/Hide A Mark-Up Entry

For any Entry listed in the Mark-Up Entries Panel, click the eye button open or closed to show or hide it.
If an Entry is hidden, the corrections/highlights will disappear as long as the Entry remains hidden.
1384
Collaboration
Show/Hide All Mark-Up Entries in Project

A projects Mark-Up Entries are displayed by default. To hide them, uncheck the corresponding control in the Document > Set Model View > Model View Options dialog box.
1385
Collaboration
Publishing and Retrieving Mark-Up Information

You can publish your marked up Project using the Publisher Function. Publisher will use the visibility option you set for Mark-Ups, that is, whether they are shown or hidden in general (in Model View Options). However, it will not store which Mark-Up Entries were visible when the View was created. When publishing, the current visibility status of each Mark-Up Entry will be reflected in the output. Provided that the published files are saved in DWF format, non-ArchiCAD users can add further redlining with Project Reviewer. Redlined DWF format files can be sent to you by the reviewer. You can import these DWF files as a new Mark-Up Entry. There are also special redlining objects provided in the ArchiCAD Library.
1386
Collaboration
Version Management with Mark-Up

The Mark-up tool can also be used to compare several design proposals to each other. In this scenario, architects create corrections elements organized in Mark-Up entries. Each Mark-up entry represents a version. To view one proposal, the corresponding Mark-up entry has to be set visible, while the other entries have to be hidden. When the architect is ready to present the different ideas, he or she assigns all the mark-up entries to the senior architect who is in control of the project. The project leader still does not have to reserve workspace. He or she signs in as Mark-Up user and gets the Mark-Up entries assigned to him/her. After the final decision is made, the project leader changes the style of the chosen version to approved and assigns the entry back to the teammate who created that. The teammate can turn the approved set into final elements. The discarded versions can be deleted or marked as rejected and kept as hidden markup entries for later use.
1387
Collaboration
Teamwork and Project Mark-Up

In a Teamwork Project, the Mark-Up Tools Palette includes a Teamwork Panel:
The Mark-Up Entry is owned by the user who created it, or to whom the Mark-Up Entry has been assigned. If a solo ArchiCAD project is shared, any Mark-Up Entries it contained will not be owned by anyone in the Teamwork Project. The Assigned to field in the Teamwork Panel shows None until it is assigned to a user. None means that the Mark-Up Entry currently has no owner, because it was created in a nonTeamwork project, or because its previous owner has logged out of the project. Every user can see the Mark-Ups of others, but they can only edit the ones that they own. Elements in a Mark-Up Entry cannot be Reserved, Released or Requested. Mark-Up Styles, a project Attribute, can be reserved/released/requested in the Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box, just like similar data sets in Teamwork. A user can assign ownership of any of his/her Mark-Up Entries to any other logged-in user:
Assign Your Mark-Up Entry To Another User

1) Activate the Mark-Up Tools palette (Document > Mark-Up Tools). 2) Select the corresponding Entry on the Mark-Up Entries panel. 3) In the Teamwork panel, click the Assigned to: pop-up and choose a user.
4) A Message automatically appears, addressed to the chosen recipient, with a default text: The Mark-Up Entry has been assigned to you...
5) Click Send. The Mark-Up Entry is been assigned to the chosen recipient, who receives a message to this effect in his/her To Do list. 1388
Visualization
Visualization
Visualization in ArchiCAD encompasses all the tools and techniques that allow you to display and present your architectural design to your customer even at an early stage of your work. Presentations can be of various types (photorendered still images, animation, virtual reality) and may serve different purposes. You can visualize your entire project or parts of it using numerous built-in views or by adding dedicated cameras to the floor plan and then viewing the data from that vantage point. Some of the special views (for example virtual reality scenes) require the use of dedicated tools. ArchiCADs default 3D perspective and parallel (or axonometric) views can be activated and customized with menu commands and by using the Navigator palette. Cameras and their settings play a key role in the definition of the different visualization modes and views. Although the built-in visualization possibilities of ArchiCAD are quite extensive, you may want to further improve on the output images or insert them into foreign environments. ArchiCAD offers various options for exporting the entire model into a number of common file formats used by professional rendering software. Artlantis is a cutting-edge rendering solution developed by GRAPHISOFTs French distribution partner, Abvent SA. It can handle still images, animations and VR Scenes exported directly from ArchiCAD by choosing the appropriate file format. Moreover, an intelligent link is established between the original model and the Artlantis file. You can also export the floor plan or 3D view into a variety of applications such as Piranesi, 3D Studio or Photoshop for fine-tuning it or adding special effects. The most commonly used commands related to Visualization techniques can be found on the predefined 3D Visualization toolbar. Choose Window > Toolbars > 3D Visualization to display this toolbar as needed. (This toolbar also contains 3D Window display and 3D Navigation commands.) Multi-core processors are recommended to support 3D navigation and 3D model generation.
Cameras PhotoRendering Visualization Extras
1389
Visualization
Cameras
You can place any number of Cameras in the Floor Plan for generating perspective views in still image or animation (fly-through) format as well as Virtual Reality panoramic scenes, a path for VR scenes, and navigable VR object movies. There are three types of Cameras available from either the Camera Settings dialog box or the Info Box: Perspective Cameras, VR Objects, and VR Scenes.
For more information, see VR Objects and VR Scenes and Camera/VR Tool Settings. Perspective Cameras allow you to view and edit the entire project or a selected part of it in the 3D Window and to create renderings that represent a snapshot of the current state of the project. They are defined by a viewpoint, a target point and an opening angle.
On the Floor Plan, all Cameras are shown with their target points and paths, and the handles that can be used to manipulate them. Only one camera is active at a time, as indicated by the sun and view angle markers.
Camera Path Options

The Display Options of perspective Cameras can be set with a pop-up menu in the Path Options dialog box accessed from Camera Settings. You can hide the Cameras altogether, show the Cameras with or without the Path line and with or without the in-between frames. When the 3D Window is active, you can modify Cameras with the Navigator and Navigator Preview palettes (click the desired Camera from the list in the Navigator, then modify it in the Navigator Preview). You can also modify the settings of placed cameras by changing the 3D view with the navigation commands, then using the 3D Navigation Extras commands to adjust the placed cameras to the new viewpoints. For more information, see 3D Navigation Extras.
1390
Visualization
Note: Only one type of Camera can be displayed at a time. If you switch to another type in the Info Box, the Camera Settings palette or the Navigator palette automatically hides all the Cameras of the other two types. When you have made your choices in the Camera Settings dialog box, you are ready to place Cameras on the Floor Plan. Your first click on the Floor Plan defines the location of the Camera itself. Draw a rubberband line to set the view direction, and click again to define the targets horizontal position. When the operation is completed, the sun icon appears with default settings. You can check the view of the camera by selecting it and activating the 3D Window. When you do this, the parameters of the perspective defined by the camera are copied into the 3D Projection Settings dialog box and the Navigator and Navigator Preview palettes.
1391
Visualization
PhotoRendering
The ArchiCAD PhotoRendering feature allows you to create photorealistic images of the model as a snapshot of the current state of the project. PhotoRendering allows you to go far beyond the possibilities offered by the views created in the 3D Window. This feature includes sophisticated effects that give you photorealistic or stylized images of the entire project or a selected part of it. Photorealistic images are an ideal presentation and communication tool of architects and contractors; these images are the most understandable for customers and show an accurate, lifelike view of the final building. PhotoRendered images (or Model Pictures) are generated in a separate PhotoRendering window and cannot be edited. To keep them, you need to save them as separate files, independent from the model. Choosing Save when a PhotoRendering window is active will save the image file; the Project remains unaffected. Closing the PhotoRendering window without saving it discards the rendered image. Important: PhotoRendered Model Pictures are not saved with your Project. If you wish to keep them, you have to save them manually. Closing a Model Picture Window that you havent saved means you wont be able to access this image again. Model Pictures are listed in the Window menu. You can keep several pictures open at the same time and compare them. You can also use the Marquee tool to select and copy parts of Model Pictures. For more information, see Copy Cropped Image File with Marquee Tool. Various types of picture files can be opened as model pictures: all QuickTime based image files and a number of additional formats are available. ArchiCAD includes several engines that create different styles of photorendered pictures. The preferred engine can be selected in the pop-up menu on top of dialog box opened with Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings. For more information, see PhotoRendering Settings. Note: It is possible to use a different rendering engine for different parts of the project view one engine for the top half of the window, another for the bottom half - and then splice the resulting images together in a photo editing program. To create a rendered image, choose the Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRender Projection command. This will instruct ArchiCAD to make a photorealistic picture of the current projection according to the settings defined in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. The rendering engines are: LightWorks Rendering Engine: This engine allows the most sophisticated rendered views, even if you rely only on the preset settings. LightWorks offers ray-tracing, soft-shadows, reflection features and complex shader editing capabilities. This engine creates expert renderings of the best quality available in ArchiCAD. LightWorks takes advantage of multiprocessor systems and is thus generally faster than the other engines. For more information, see LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On).
1392
Visualization
Internal Rendering Engine: The Internal Engine is suitable for producing draft-quality or simple renderings offering shaded surfaces, simple shadows and transparencies. For more information, see Internal Rendering Engine. Z-buffer Rendering Engine: This engine is similar to the Internal Engine but can work faster if the model is large and the shadow effect is switched on. However, a large amount of physical memory is recommended. Sketch: This produces non-photorealistic renderings that replicate sketched lines - best suited for draft views in the early project stages. Effects include felt tip, pencil, graphite and marker. Files used for sketch rendering are placed in the Add-Ons folder inside the ArchiCAD folder. In the SketchTextures subfolder, you can find the predefined style file named SketchPreset.txt as well as the line texture files, each placed in a separate subfolder of SketchTextures. Below, the same building rendered with two different Sketch styles.
For more information, see Sketch Rendering Engine.
Basic LightWorks Options Expert LightWorks Options Exterior LightWorks Example Interior LightWorks Example
1393
Visualization
Basic LightWorks Options

The LightWorks Rendering Engine, built into the ArchiCAD PhotoRendering interface, gives you the power to create high-quality photorealistic images that can be published as ArchiCAD views. LightWorks offers ray-tracing, soft-shadow and reflection features and complex shader editing capabilities, yet its interface is compatible with ArchiCADs own elements. For examples of LightWorks images, see Exterior LightWorks Example and Interior LightWorks Example. Basic LightWorks functions include predefined shaders that you can use with their default settings. Expert options allow you to edit those shaders and to use special unique light objects that can greatly enhance renderings by simulating ambient lighting. LightWorks introduces ray tracing to ArchiCAD. Ray tracing works by casting rays from the point being shaded towards each light source, thus establishing whether or not there is a direct line of sight from the point of the light source. By this it is possible to determine whether a surface point is lit or in shadow from a light source. The simplest way to start working with LightWorks is to open an ArchiCAD Project and switch to the LightWorks Rendering Engine in the Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. The LightWorks Engine will understand ArchiCAD materials and convert their Transparency, Emission, Reflection and Glowing values to its own format. The following picture was taken with the Internal Rendering Engine.
1394
Visualization
The same Project rendered with the LightWorks Rendering Engine appears below. Thanks to ray tracing, you can see reflective glass surfaces and nicer shadows in this rendering.
When working with LightWorks, the usual procedure after building the 3D model is to define materials, then load and modify shaders connected with these materials using the LightWorks Shader Settings panel in the Options > Element Attributes > Materials dialog box. For more information, LightWorks Shader Settings. There are archive files storing hundreds of predefined shaders. Most of the time you can find the shader you like among the predefined ones. LightWorks shaders can have textures like the ones used with the ArchiCAD Internal Rendering Engine. Another feature is the use of so-called procedural shaders in which patterns are defined by a set of parameters. Image-based shaders can easily exhibit tiling when patterns are repeated across a surface, lose their definition when viewed close up, and can use up large amounts of memory. LightWorks procedural shaders do not exhibit tiling, give a unique appearance at each point of the surface, are more memory efficient, and offer more flexibility because of their adjustable parameters. Important notes for users of Projects created in ArchiCAD 8.1 or earlier: Although ArchiCAD materials all have Reflection values defined for them, rendering engines in earlier versions did not use these values. Since the LightWorks Rendering Engine understands and uses these values, this might lead to unexpected results if these values are not adjusted. So you might have a material named Concrete that is very shiny with a lot of diffuse light around it. This can come from those Ambient, Diffuse and Shininess values. In such a case, adjust these values until they give a satisfactory result. Also, ArchiCAD materials can have a texture assigned to them as well as a LightWorks shader (which is also, in effect, a texture). The ArchiCAD texture will be displayed in the 3D Window when OpenGL is being used as the 3D Engine, and in PhotoRendering when the
1395
Visualization
ArchiCAD Internal Engine or the Z-Buffer Engine is being used. But if you use OpenGL in the 3D Window and LightWorks Rendering Engine in PhotoRendering, the textures might look completely different, which can be misleading. There are two solutions to this if you plan to create your PhotoRenderings with the LightWorks Rendering Engine. The first one is not to use the OpenGL engine in 3D so it will not mislead you as to how it will look like in PhotoRendering. The second is to remove ArchiCAD textures from any materials to which LightWorks shaders are assigned. Then these materials will not display any texture in 3D even with the OpenGL engine, and misleading preview images are thereby avoided.
1396
Visualization
Expert LightWorks Options

The LightWorks Library contains some unique light objects that can enhance your renderings: although they are lamps, they simulate ambient lighting. These objects are placed using ArchiCADs Lamp tool: to find them, open the Lamp Settings dialog box and the LightWorks Lights sub-folder from Libraries and are called SkyObject, SunObject and WindowLight. You can adjust the intensity level of these lights in their respective settings dialog boxes. However, the Ambient checkbox and its associated intensity value, in the LightWorks Effects Panel of PhotoRendering Settings, will also affect these objects lighting effects. As with all lights, you can turn them ON or OFF, and set their Light Intensity and Color. For more information, see Object/Lamp Tool Settings.
SkyObject
SkyObject simulates the diffuse light effect of the sky (in the form of a large half-dome with a number of individual distant light sources) for a daylight effect without having to add artificial lighting manually. Its effect is so expansive that it doesnt matter where you place it on the plan. This object takes into account the sun direction as set in general rendering settings, so you need not define this separately. The Latitude Resolution and Longitude Resolution parameters along with Light Intensity will define how many lights will be distributed evenly on the surface of a hemisphere. This object is basically a hemisphere with a radius large enough so it is larger than the whole 3D Model.
The Number of Light Sources field shows how many lights will be generated based on the above values. There are parameters for turning Shadow Casting and Soft Shadow on. You can also set Shadow Quality and a Contour Pen for display in 2D. These shadow-related parameters will only affect shadows created by the light sources coming from this lamp object. To use this object, just place one copy anywhere in your Project.
1397
Visualization
Note: LightWorks Rendering doesnt produce proper image quality if the 3D data structure is generated from a selection (e.g. with the Arrow tool or with the Marquee tool) and if this selection does not contain the SkyObject (or other) lamp object(s). In the following picture you can see Soft Shadows. See how fine the transition of the shadow is on the floor of the corridor. This effect is possible because the SkyObject contains many lamps, with the result that the lighting is diffuse, creating soft shadows, rather than concentrating the entire light source at a single location, which would create hard shadows.
SunObject
Another lamp used to simulate exterior light is the SunObject lamp. It can be placed anywhere on the Floor Plan, just like the SkyObject lamp. This lamp is used to simulate the effect of the Sun in the rendering. In the case of this lamp, the light is coming from a distant source. Its use is also very similar to the SkyObject lamp. You can set light intensity, the color of its light, shadow quality and make it cast Soft Shadows as well. Unlike in the SkyObject lamp, where the program automatically calculates the number of light sources from the longitude and latitude resolutions you entered, here you can directly specify the Number of Light Sources. As you can see, with LightWorks, you can simulate the effects of the Sun in two ways: 1) by checking the Sun checkbox as a light source in the LightWorks Effects panel of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box, or 2) by placing a SunObject lamp anywhere on the Floor Plan. These two methods have different effects. The major difference is that the light intensity of the SunObject lamp can be varied in a much larger range. Although both can be used at the same time, it is advisable to use only one of them at a time so it is easier to identify their effect on the rendering.
1398
Visualization
WindowLight
While the SkyObject and SunObject lamps are used to simulate exterior light, WindowLight simulates diffuse light in interior rooms that are generated by incoming light. WindowLight comes close to simulating a radiosity effect. This type of lamp must be placed on the inner side of any Window or Door. You can do this in 2D or 3D. The width and height of the WindowLight lamp object should be the same as those of the Door/Window it is linked to. Make sure that the arrow representing the sun direction points into the building. The object will be shown on both the Floor Plan and in 3D.
WindowLight also has the Cast Shadow, Shadow is Soft and Shadow Quality parameters to control how shadows created by this light source are generated. The Rotation Angle parameter is used when the object is placed next to a Skylight object in a Roof. See the effect of the Shadow Quality parameter below. On the image on the left, Shadow Quality = 1. See the crude graduation of shadows on the wall on the left and on the ceiling. In the image on the right, Shadow Quality = 3. See how much smoother shadow tones are on the wall and ceiling.
1399
Visualization
In the following picture you can see effects created by the SunObject and WindowLight lamp objects. See the light areas on the ceiling of the corridor and the room close to the outside windows, which is caused by the light generated by these lamp objects.
Editing Shaders
You can also enhance your images by editing the applied shaders. Shader editing is possible both for the entire image and for individual materials. Shader parameter controls can be of various types: color tables, sliders, text and numeric fields, buttons or menus. You can apply and modify shaders for the Sun, the Foreground and the Background of the image on the LightWorks Environment panel of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. These shaders include parameters that affect the aspects of the shadows cast by the sun and the appearance of elements in the foreground or the background. To modify the appearance and behavior of a given material, activate the Options > Element Attributes > Materials dialog box. Each material can have up to six shaders associated to it that will define its Color, Reflectance, Transparency, Displacement (or bumping), Texture Space and Pipeline (or emission) attribute. You can also load predefined settings from a large number of archive files that replicate real-life materials such as stretcher bricks, polished plastic, galvanized metal or mown grass. For more details on shader editing, see Exterior LightWorks Example.
LightWorks Tips
Since the LightWorks Rendering Engine is both hardware and memory-intensive, here follow some suggestions for speeding up your work while using it. Uncheck the Reflection checkbox in the Effects field of the LightWorks Effects panel of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. Reflection is probably the one factor increasing
1400
Visualization
rendering time the most. If you turn Reflection off, you will still be able to set lighting correctly, yet generate faster renderings. Choose the Off checkbox in the Antialiasing field of the LightWorks Effects panel of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. This will also decrease rendering time while showing the effects of lights correctly. When setting lights and materials select a small model piece with the thick (multi-story) marquee and experiment with that. Then, when all is set, you can render the whole model. The SkyObject and SunObject lamps work quite well even when the number of light sources is set to low numbers (even as low as 4). At the same time, setting them to such low values will substantially decrease their memory requirements and increase rendering speed. You can experiment with your setting choosing hard shadows. This will increase speed over using soft shadows while the character of the rendering will not change markedly. You can check the settings of your picture on a smaller rendering, thereby saving time. You may want your final rendering to be 1600x1200 pixels, but you can check and set your settings on a 400x300 pixel rendering as well. You can also zoom on details and create small detail renderings of those. Besides a good camera position, a good rendering requires good lights and good material shaders. You should set lighting on a small model or partial model without Reflection and Antialiasing, few light sources and Hard Shadows. Setting materials can also be done on a partial model. Then, when all is set, Reflection, Antialiasing and Soft Shadows can be turned on a full model.
1401
Visualization
Exterior LightWorks Example

After building your model in ArchiCAD, you need to create good camera positions, apply shaders to your materials, place light objects, set rendering parameters and create a test rendering. From the test result, you can identify any needed adjustments to materials, lighting etc. Let us start with the following exterior detail of a residential building rendered with ArchiCADs internal rendering engine.
Here we have some textures and shadows, but we would like reflections, better shadows coming from ambient and diffuse light sources and procedural shaders. Let us start with the materials. We can select the material of wooden frames and work on that. In Options > Element Attributes > Materials, you can choose a shader in the Color category or load one from hundreds of predefined shaders located in the Archives. We used the Oak shader and modified it a bit. For more information, see Materials. It may be useful to create a Wall in your project and then assign your currently edited material to it. Then you can create renderings of only this one Wall while modifying the material shader, thereby saving rendering time in this phase.
1402
Visualization
Let us say we have the following shader displayed on the side surface of our wall:
The above Wood shader is a procedural shader. The surface created by the shader will be unique, calculated from a set of parameters which provide great variability and ensure that the surface will not show a tiled effect (a tiled effect means that, if the surface is large enough compared to the texture size, you can see where the pattern ends and then is repeated). In the above wood shader the wood is too curvy, which we want to make more realistic. The Gnarl parameter defines this curviness. After reducing its value, the texture will look like this:
We can make it a bit denser by reducing the RingWidth parameter and also reduce its relative size by lowering the value of the Scale parameter.
1403
Visualization
When you are satisfied with the result you can go on to the next material. Of course you may set other shaders as well, such as Reflectance or Transparency to produce a more sophisticated texture. Next we can place light sources on the Floor Plan. You can simulate the Sun by either checking the Sun checkbox under LightWorks Effects in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box or placing a SunObject lamp on the Floor Plan. These two light sources achieve different effects and have different sets of parameters. We chose the SunObject lamp for this example, as it has a much wider range of light intensity that can be influenced by its Light Intensity slider or its Number of Light Sources parameter. This produces better-lit surfaces and better shadows. Ambient lighting coming from the environment can be turned on with the Ambient checkbox in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. Diffuse light effect coming from the sky can be achieved using the SkyObject lamp. Check the Lamps checkbox in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box for the SunObject and SkyObject to have an effect on the rendering. You may also enable Camera lighting and place additional individual lamps and light sources. In this example, a SkyObject and a SunObject lamp was placed, plus Ambient light was used for renderings. There is great variability using these two lamps objects. Both can have different strengths of light, the color of their light may be defined, shadow quality and softness may be set. Both can cast shadows as well. In the illustration below, the color of the SkyObject lamp was set to light yellow (similar to the color of the Sun).
1404
Visualization
Then the color of the SkyObject lamp was set to light blue (similar to the color of the sky). Compare the two images to see the difference this one setting makes in the result.
After the general scene is done, you can check where you want to improve your image. For example, you may not like the brick texture:
It could have a little more depth or roughness or bumpiness added to it. You can use the Rough Scale, Rough Amplitude and Fuzz parameters to make it more so. Alternately, you can use the Wrapped Bump Map shader of the Displacement shader group. With it you can select an image file which will become a map for defining the bumpiness of the surface just like alpha-channels in ArchiCAD textures. In our example, we used the image shown below as a bump map.
1405
Visualization
After applying this map, the Brick wall looks rougher, as if it really had those inequalities on its surface.
While trying to improve the image, you may also encounter the case where certain areas of your image are too dark (underexposed) or too light (overexposed). You can either change ambient and diffuse light (SkyObject lamp) settings to lower or higher strengths, or you can edit your materials, especially their Reflectance shaders Ambient Factor and Diffuse Factor parameters. In the example below, the Diffuse Factor parameter is set to 1,00, meaning all light is reflected back from the surface as diffuse light. Surfaces can become overexposed this way. In such a case, decrease the value of the Diffuse Factor parameter. When you are finished with your adjustments, you can generate your final rendering with the LightWorks Rendering Engine.
1406
Visualization
Interior LightWorks Example

This example uses a Japanese house.
A SkyObject and SunObject are both placed on the Floor Plan for exterior lighting. The way their parameters are set is very similar to the Exterior example. Also, material shader definitions are done the same way. Since the rendering will show the interior corridor of the house, we placed two WindowLight lamps on the two large window panes separating the inside corridor from the exterior space. Their purpose is to simulate the diffuse light coming through the window panes.
1407
Visualization
Make the WindowLight lamps Width and Height the same size as the Window it is placed for. Place the WindowLight lamp in front of the Window frame so it is closer to the interior than the Window.
If you look at it in 3D, you can see the small spheres that show the individual light sources of the WindowLight lamp. Their number is automatically calculated and is influenced by the Light Intensity and Light Resolution parameters of the lamp.
Note: these light source spheres are visible in 3D only if the 3D Engine is set to OpenGL Engine. The purpose of this rendering was to create fine soft shadows. The final settings of the WindowLight lamp for this particular scene include Shadow Quality set to 4, which is almost the maximum value. The next image shows the final rendering. Note the fine reflections on the ceiling of the corridor. Also, see the softness of the shadow cast by the divider column between the two Windows. See how the shadow is harder close to the column and softer toward the inner side of the corridor as 1408
Visualization
more and more diffuse light from other areas of the windows reaches it. We needed the SunObject lamp placed to achieve this since Ambient and Camera lights do not cast shadow, and the SkyObject lamp casts shadow from various points on a hemisphere. The SunObject provided the necessary amount of concentrated light to achieve this effect.
1409
Visualization
Visualization Extras
You can enhance your visualization output with dynamic content such as fly-throughs or virtual reality. This section is devoted to these extras.
Fly-Through VR Objects VR Scenes Sun Study Align View
1410
Visualization
Fly-Through
Creating a movie of the project allows you to present your final design to your clients under a variety of angles. This ArchiCAD feature is called a Fly-Through. To create this animated view of your project, you place a series of Cameras that define a path along which images will be recorded. At each camera point (or key frame) a snapshot is taken. The series of pictures is then merged into an animated movie file by adding a number of extrapolated views (or in-between frames). If you save the Fly-Through as an external file, you can even show it on a computer on which ArchiCAD is not installed. Note: A large number of frames means a smoother movie but also a much larger file. Choosing Document > Creative Imaging > Create Fly-Through creates a series of simple 3D or PhotoRendered pictures defined by the parallel projection set or the current camera path. You can either show the resulting animation immediately on screen, or save these pictures in the desired file format and show them later using a movie viewing utility. The Create Fly-Through command will only be active if you have at least one Preset Parallel Projection or an animation path with at least two Cameras. The name of this command changes according to the type of camera currently selected in the Camera > VR Settings dialog box (Camera, VR Object, VR Scene). For more information, see Create Fly-Through and Camera/VR Tool Settings.
1411
Visualization
Defining Fly-Throughs
Placing several Cameras defines a Fly-Through path whose parameters you can adjust in the Path Options dialog box (opened from the Camera Settings dialog box or the context menu of the Path item in the Navigators Project Map.) For more information, see Camera/VR Tool Settings > Path Options. Only one camera will be active at a time. This is the only camera displayed with its sun and view angle markers. The active camera is always the one that was last placed, unless you select another one. Any cameras placed on the Floor Plan will be attached to the current Fly-Through path after the active camera.
Note: Collections of 3D parallel projections can also be linked to create a Fly-Through, but these are handled differently from perspectives. Only a single set of parallel projections can exist, and you edit it in the View > 3D View Mode> 3D Projection Settings > Parallel Projections > Pre-Sets dialog box, and not through the Camera Settings. Also, since the viewpoint distance is infinite for parallel projections, you cannot display them on the Floor Plan.
1412
Visualization
VR Objects
Virtual Reality in ArchiCAD encompasses two functions: VR Objects and VR Scenes. With the VR Object function you create a navigable view of an model object and examine it from any angle. This is best used for exterior views of an entire building or site. With the VR Scene function you essentially place yourself inside the project and can look around in this space. Linking various panoramic views allows you to step from one location to another, as if you were walking from room to room in a building. For more information, see VR Scenes. Note: These commands are located in the Document > Creative Imaging hierarchical menu. They appear only after you have selected the VR Object or VR Scene tab page in the Camera/ VR Settings dialog box. VR Objects take advantage of Apples QTVR (Quick Time Virtual Reality) technology. They are defined by a spherical path along which the viewpoint can be positioned and navigated. This viewpoint is represented by a view cone. The navigable object can be viewed in Apples QTVR Player application.
To define a VR Object and create a VR Object Movie: Select the Camera Tool. Choose the VR Object option (either open the VR Object tab of the Camera Settings dialog box, or choose VR Object from the Cameras Info Box.)
For more information, see VR Object Settings.
1413
Visualization
With a single click on the Floor Plan you can place a VR Object camera with default parameters. Further clicks on the Floor Plan will not create new cameras; you can only have one camera active at a time. If the VR Object is selected and you go to the 3D Window, you can check its perspective elevation view from the viewpoint indicated by the view cone. To modify the location of the view cone, select it with the Camera tool active, then use the Move Sub-Element command of the pet palette to drag its node and position it onto another node of the object.
Choosing Create VR Object from the Document > Creative Imaging hierarchical menu will open the Create VR Object dialog box where you can set a few options for creating a navigable object. For more information, see Create VR Object. Clicking Save in the dialog box will prompt you to name your navigable object file. All the 3D data you need will be exported into this new format. You can view the result by launching QTVR Player. To change the position of the placed VR Object, use the cursor or the Drag, Mirror or Rotate commands in the Edit menu. If the Camera tool is active, you can reposition any of the selection nodes to change the objects 2D position. The sun and the camera can be repositioned by their respective selection nodes.
1414
Visualization
VR Scenes
Note: VR Scenes can be generated only if you are using the 32-bit version of ArchiCAD. Panoramic cameras define navigable VR Scenes using Apple QTVR or RealSpace technology. You place one or a series of cylindrical panoramas to be viewed in the corresponding player application. For more information, see VR Scene Settings.
Note: RealSpace works with VR Scenes only and does not support VR Objects. VR Scenes
created with RealSpace share the features of QuickTime VR Scenes. To take advantage of the RealSpace features, you need to have a player installed on your computer or a plug-in for your favorite web browser. The first click on the floor plan places a panoramic camera for the VR Scene. Draw a rubberband line and click again to define the view direction.
This is your initial camera, which defines your starting position and view direction in the VR Scene. The initial camera is distinguishable from subsequent cameras by its double-circle icon. Every time you place a panoramic camera, the panorama name and the sun icon appear with default settings. The panorama name takes the form of Panorama-x (x is the cameras sequence number) by default. (The name can be changed in the Panorama name field in the middle section of the Camera /VR Settings dialog box.)
If you do not add additional cameras to the current scene, you can generate a single node QTVR Scene.
1415
Visualization
To define a multi-node VR Scene, place a sequence of panoramic cameras. One camera, the one displayed with its sun marker, will be active at a time. The active camera is always the one which was last placed, until you select another one. Each position has to be connected to at least one other, otherwise a warning will prompt you to do so when you try to generate the VR Scene using the Create VR Scene command in the Document > Creative Imaging hierarchical menu. The connections will define how you can change your position in the final VR Scene. The connecting line between two positions can be drawn either when placing a panoramic camera or after unconnected cameras have already been placed. To place a new camera connected to a placed camera, first click the center node of the placed camera, then pull the cursor to draw the connecting line and click a second time to place the new camera.
You can insert a detour in a connection line by pulling its center node with the Checkmark cursor when the Camera tool is active. This allows you to define a connection that makes sense between two positions, for instance on opposite sides of a wall. Instead of jumping through the wall, you can go through a door before reaching the next position, without having to place an extra Camera at the door opening.
Any connection can be cleared by selecting and deleting the connection lines center node.
The view direction and the sun position can be changed by moving their nodes with the Checkmark cursor while the Camera tool is selected.
To define another camera as the initial one, select the current initial camera (with the Camera tool active) and drag the circle representing the starting position onto another cameras centerpoint. If the VR Scene tab page is selected in the Camera Settings dialog box, the Create VR Scene command is added to the Document > Creative Imaging menu.
1416
Visualization
Note: If the Camera/VR Settings is switched to VR Scenes, no placed Cameras or VR Objects will be visible on the Floor Plan. Choose the appropriate camera mode from Camera/VR Settings to make theses visible again. Choosing Document > Creative Imaging > Create VR Scene will open the Create VR Scene dialog box where you can set a few options for creating panoramas or pictures that you can then view in the appropriate player applications. For more information, see Create VR Scene. You can also set the image height and length as well as the Window size in QTVR Player.
1417
Visualization
Sun Study
Sun Studies allow you to view an entire project or a selected part of it in a real-life situation by choosing a geographic location and defining the time period over which you wish to examine lighting and shadow casting. What you actually see is a series of simple or photorendered 3D pictures defined by the current 3D Projection Settings, the current 3D Window Settings or PhotoRendering Settings and the Sun position settings defined in the Create Sun Study dialog box. The geographic location of your project can be chosen from a preset list of cities in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings > More Sun > Set Cities or by defining a new one with the appropriate latitude and longitude values. In Levels and Project North Preferences, you can redefine the orientation of your project by modifying the project North, which points by default to the top of your window. You can either have the resulting animation shown immediately on the screen, or save these pictures in the desired file format and show them in the future using a movie viewing utility. The pictures below show the same detail of a building at the same location at sunrise, one hour later, two hours later and in the afternoon.
1418
Visualization
Align View
When using a scanned photograph as the background of your rendering, you may want to fit your ArchiCAD model into the photographs environment. In the photorendering made from the Camera placed by the Document > Creative Imaging > Align View command, the perspective of your building in ArchiCAD will match the perspective of the background. For more information, see PhotoRendering. For this feature, you need to select two clearly visible vertical segments on the photograph (e.g., the sides of a door or a window, two vertical edges of a wall, or two flagpoles), and connect them with their exact position in the virtual model or its environment. This is done by connecting each of four points on the placed photograph (the tops and bottoms of the two vertical segments) with their position on the Floor Plan, and then entering their Z coordinates in the Align View dialog box. Note: This function is mainly useful in refurbishing, when a photograph of the existing environment is available.
Align View: Interior Example

Using the Figure tool, place the scanned image on the Floor Plan at any size or resolution. For more information, see Figures. You then have two possibilities for aligning the camera view to the photograph: you can either use existing lines or can manually draw lines between the corresponding points of the Floor Plan and the photograph. To draw the connection lines automatically: 1) Select the placed photo. 2) Choose the Document > Creative Imaging > Align View command. ArchiCAD will prompt you to make six clicks on the Floor Plan with the Pencil cursor, identifying the corresponding points between the picture and the plan. The connection lines are drawn automatically. 3) The Align View dialog box appears, prompting you to enter the height values for the four points. 4) Click OK. The camera will be placed on the Floor Plan on a new path. To draw the connection lines manually: 1) Using the Line tool, connect the tops and bottoms of two vertical lines visible on the photograph with their location on the Floor Plan (e.g., the sides of a door or a window, two vertical edges of a wall, or two flagpoles). This will give you four lines, each extending from a floor plan location to a point on the photograph, with the two line pairs connecting where they meet on the Floor Plan. 2) Select the photo and the four lines.
1419
Visualization
3) Choose the Align View command. The dialog box appears, prompting you to enter the height values for the four points.
4) Click OK to close the Align View dialog box. The camera will be placed on the Floor Plan, on a new Path.
1420
Visualization
Select the elements you wish to display on the image, then select the Camera, and choose the Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRender Projection. In the picture below, only the Object type elements have been selected on the Floor Plan and they appear against the backdrop of the scanned photograph.
Note: For greater precision, you can enter the horizon of the photograph by simply rotating the picture on the Floor Plan so that the horizon is exactly parallel to the unskewed x-axis (otherwise the command will calculate the horizon for you). The precision of the result depends largely on that of the entered points, but even very careful preparation may result in a Camera that is slightly off position. In this case, set the photograph as the background of your 3D window, and fine-tune the Cameras position in Wireframe or Hidden Line mode using ArchiCAD's 3D navigation tools.
1421
Visualization
Align View: Exterior Example

Lets say you have a photograph of a building and its plan as an ArchiCAD file. Place the original photo on the Floor Plan of the building. If the picture is placed without any rotation then the horizon is calculated automatically as horizontal. You can, of course, override this horizon calculation manually, and enter the horizon angle yourself; this is done by rotating the picture on the floor plan. When the picture is rotated with an angle other than 90 (or 180 or 270) on the floor plan, then Align View calculates the horizon by itself, otherwise the horizon is assumed to be horizontal. You need to know the height values of two vertical lines (four points in all) on the building and their locations on the photo.
Two black hotspots on the Floor Plan and the heights of two distinct points of the building below each are shown on the illustration. Zoom in on the photo and place four hotspots at the locations of the four points with known height values. Select the photo and choose Document > Creative Imaging > Align View.
1422
Visualization
To link the hotspots, click first on the point on the Floor Plan that corresponds to hotspots on the photo. (In the above example, the side of the window on the left where you see the black hotspot with two heights, +2.64 and -2.21.) Now click the pair of hotspots on the photo, one after the other. Repeat this operation with the other point on the plan and the corresponding pair of hotspots. It does not matter which point on the Floor Plan you start with. In addition, after marking a point on the Floor Plan, you can select the two corresponding points on the photo in either order.
When correctly done, the result will look as shown above, and the Align View dialog will appear. Type the height of the hotspots in the appropriate fields in the dialog box. The upper points are located along the same vertical line as the lower points. In this example, these will be 2.64 and 2.21 meters (left upper and lower) and 3.08 and -3.40 meters (right upper and lower). After you click OK, a new camera will be placed on the Floor Plan. Select the original scanned photo to be the background picture in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. Make sure the width-height ratio of the resulting PhotoRendering is the same as that of the original photo. You can also modify the size of the photo to suit the size of your PhotoRendering window. Note: You cannot crop the photo. If you must, crop it in a way that the original proportions of the photo stay the same (i.e. cover a part of the photo with a solid white fill), because Align View needs the original proportions of the picture to locate the original target point of the photo. The view will not be aligned precisely if the proportions of the photo have been changed. For example, if you have a scanned picture of 1200 x 900 and you want a 3D window or PhotoRendering window image of 600 x 450, you would reduce the size of the background photo to 50 percent in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. (You can choose this same background
1423
Visualization
in the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings dialog box: click the Background: As in PhotoRendering radio button.) By selecting the created camera and generating a 3D View or a photorendering, you will see the result - the building is accurately placed in the existing environment.
1424
User Interface Reference

In this section you will find the description of ArchiCADs user interface (palettes, settings, dialog boxes) listed in 3 categories: Controls; Dialog Boxes; and Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The best way to use the User Interface Reference is to navigate to specific topics by using ArchiCADs context sensitive help. Read more about this feature in Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13.
Controls Dialog Boxes Tool Settings Dialog Boxes
1425
Controls
Navigator Palette Controls Organizer Palette Controls Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls Control Box Coordinates Palette Search and Replace Text Dialog Box Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls Trace & Reference Palette Project Info Project Notes Project Preview Report Window Edit Targets and Operators (Solid Element Operations) Library Loading Report Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar
1426
Navigator Palette Controls

Use the four buttons at the top of the Navigator Palette to choose a Map to display in the Navigator.
From left: Project Map View Map Layout Book Publisher Sets. Refer to the Tool Tips to learn which icon refers to which map. The palette caption indicates which map is currently displayed. The following sections describe the controls in the Navigators Project Chooser menu, plus all maps of the Navigator.
Project Chooser Project Map Controls View Map Controls Layout Book Controls Publisher Controls
For a description of how to use the Navigator and Organizer in building up and managing your project, see Navigator Palette and Layout Book Components.
1427
Project Chooser
Use this button to access choices for managing projects with the Navigator or Organizer. The top section of the Project Chooser list displays ArchiCAD project files you have accessed. Active: Name of current project Linked: An external project from which you have already added a view or layout to the active project Running: An external project which is open in a separate instance of ArchiCAD. Browse: Click this button to access a file directory and choose an ArchiCAD project whose content you want to use in the active project. Show Organizer: Click this command to display the Organizer (if you are in the Navigators Project Chooser). Show Navigator: Click this command to display the Navigator (if you are in the Organizers Project Chooser). Show Drawing Manager: Click this command to display the Drawing Manager palette.
Managing and Updating Placed Drawings External Projects in the Navigator
1428
Project Map Controls

The Project Map provides a tree structure of the components (Viewpoints) of your Virtual Building Model. The Project Map is an aid in navigation: double-click any Project Map item to open it in the relevant window of the project. (Once you save the settings of a viewpoint, it becomes a view and is listed in your View Map.) For more information, see Navigator Project Map.
Project Map Buttons

The buttons at the bottom of the Project Map are active if you have selected a relevant item in the Project Map list. The New Viewpoint button will create a new viewpoint of the same type as the selected Project Map item. (Not available for 3D or 3D Document, Schedule or Index viewpoints.) If a Story is selected: Create New Story If a Section/Elevation/Detail/Worksheet is selected: Create New Independent Section/ Elevation/Detail/Worksheet. Note: These commands (e.g. Create New Story; Create New Independent Detail) are also available from the context menu if you select the corresponding Project Map item. The Delete button will remove the selected viewpoint. All linked markers to this viewpoint will be deleted.
Project Map Properties

This section displays the properties - Viewpoint ID and Viewpoint Name - of the Viewpoint currently selected in the Project Map tree. Note: If you have selected a Story, its Story ID is not editable. A Story ID is identical to its Story Number, which can be set in the Story Settings Dialog Box.
1429
View Map Controls

The View Map provides a tree structure of all the saved views in your project. Click on any view in the Navigator Palette to access its properties and settings. For more information, see Navigator View Map.
View Map Buttons
These buttons represent shortcuts to commonly used view management commands. From left, they are: View Settings: Opens View Settings dialog box of selected view For more information, see View Settings Dialog Box. Save Current View: Opens Save View dialog box, where you can save the current view by click the Create button. For more information, see Saving a View. New Folder Clone a Folder: Opens Clone a Folder dialog box For more information, see Clone a Folder in the View Map. Delete item
View Properties
The first items concern the View ID and View Name. Click directly into the fields to enter a different ID number or name for the view, if needed. The remaining Properties fields are not editable here. They give you information on the following properties of the selected view: Layer Combination Scale Model View Options Combination Settings: Click this button to access the selected views Settings dialog box. For more information, see View Settings Dialog Box.
1430
Layout Book Controls

For more information, see Navigator Layout Book. Click the button at the top of the dialog box to choose the type of tree structure for the Layout Book: Tree by Subset: Shows Layouts organized according to their Subset folders. Tree by Master: Shows Layouts organized according to the Master Layout assigned to them.
Layout Book Buttons
These buttons represent shortcuts to important commands, and are active or greyed depending on the item selected in the Layout Book (Layout Book, Subset, Layout, Drawing, or Master Layout): Settings: Opens the Settings dialog box of the selected item. For more information, see Drawing Settings. New Layout: Opens the Create New Layout dialog box, where you can name the new layout and choose a Master Layout for it. New Master Layout: Opens the Create New Master Layout dialog box, where you can name the new master layout. For more information, see Master Layouts. New Subset: Opens the Create New Subset dialog box, where you can name the new subset. For more information, see Subsets. Update: Updates the status of the selected Drawing. Delete item.
Layout Book Properties

Click an item (Layout Book, Subset, Layout or Drawing) in the Layout Book to view its Properties in the Properties section below. Layout Book Properties in Layout Book (if Book is selected): Project Name and Path are shown in read-only fields. Subset Properties in Layout Book (If Subset is selected): Subset ID and Subset name are shown in editable fields. Layout Properties in Layout Book (if Layout is selected) The first items concern the Layout ID and Layout Name. Click directly into the fields to enter a different ID number or name for the Layout, if needed. The next control displays the Master Layout assigned to this Layout. Use the list to assign a different Master Layout if needed. The third field displays the Size of the Layout.
1431
Settings: Click this button to access the selected Layouts Settings dialog box. For more information, see Layout Settings. Drawing Properties in Layout Book (if Drawing is selected): The first edit fields concern the Drawing ID and Drawing Name. Click directly into the fields to enter a different ID number or name for the Drawing, if needed. The next item shows the Path of the source of the Drawing. The next item displays the Drawing Scale. The final item displays the Drawing Size. Settings: Click this button to access the selected Drawings Settings dialog box. For more information, see Drawing Settings.
1432
Publisher Controls
This page describes the controls found in the Publisher map of the Navigator or Organizer. For more information, see Navigator Publisher. Open the Publisher map of the Navigator or Organizer by selecting its icon among the maps of the Navigator/Organizer. You can also access the Publisher from the Document > Publisher > Publish menu command. To see a list of all Publisher Sets defined in this project, click the Up one level button to display the Publisher Set Chooser and Manager. Use the buttons at the bottom of the Publisher Set list for the following functions: Open the Publishing Properties dialog box Duplicate the selected Publisher Set Create a new Publisher Set Delete the selected Publisher Set Click the Publishing Properties button to access the Publisher Set Properties dialog box, where you can choose the method of publication: Print, Save files, Upload to Internet, or Plot. For more information, see Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box. Publishing Properties: These fields provide feedback and options for Publishing Properties: Publisher Set name, the chosen publishing method, and the destination of the output (if applicable). Double-click a Publisher Set name to list and to set options for the contents of the Publisher Set. Select any publisher set item from the tree structure to view and adjust its properties and output format. Each Publisher item refers directly to a View or to a Layout (in effect, the Publisher item is a shortcut to the View/Layout).
View Properties/Properties: These fields display the properties of the view, drawing or layout linked to the selected publisher item. These properties vary depending on which item is selected (view, drawing or layout): they include e.g. ID, Name, Layer Combination, Scale, Model Display Options Combination, Master Layout. They are displayed for informational purposes and cannot be edited here. 1433
Format: Choose a format from the scroll-down list in which to publish the selected item(s). The content of the list depends on the type of the selected item. For details, see Defining Output Format.
Publish: Click this button to start the Publishing process. To define which sets to output, click the pop-up button next to the Publish command and choose an option:
If you choose this set, the entire active publication set will be published. If you choose selected items, only the items currently selected in the active publication set will be published. If you choose all the sets, all currently defined sets will be published. Created/Modified: The Created/Modified pop-up at the bottom of the Publishing tab page displays the selected files last creation or modification date and time. Note: This data appears only after the file has been published at least once.
Process Dialog Box

The icons next to the view names inform you whether the job is completed, under way or failed. You can also click Stop, which will end the whole publishing procedure, or Pause, which will cause publication to pause, and change the Stop button to read Continue, allowing you to continue publication later.
1434
Organizer Palette Controls

The controls of the Organizer Palette Maps are almost identical to their counterparts in the Navigator Palette. See Navigator Palette Controls. A few controls are unique to the Organizer:
View Settings and Storing Options (at bottom of Project Map of Organizer)
Use these pop-up buttons to change the settings of the selected viewpoint in the Project Map. The following settings can be changed in this section: Layer Combination See Layer Combinations. Scale See Scale. Pen Set See Pens & Colors. Model View Options Combination See Model View Options Combinations. Dimensions See Dimensions Preferences. Zoom See Zoom. Depending on the mode of the Organizer Palette, a button on the left-side tree structure allows you to add or copy the appropriate item (view or layout) to the right-side tree structure (view map, layout map or publishing set.) In View Editor Mode: If a viewpoint selected in the Project map, the Save view button will create a view from the selected viewpoint and add it to the View Map. In Layout Editor mode: If an item is selected in the left-hand tree structure (i.e. a viewpoint from Project Map or a view from the View Map), the Place Drawing button will add the selected item to a layout in the Layout Map. Moreover, if the source of the Drawing is a viewpoint, a view is also created and added to the View Map at the same time. In Publisher Mode: If an item is selected in the left-hand tree structure (i.e. a view from View Map or a Layout from the Layout Map), the Add Shortcut button will create a corresponding, linked publisher item in the Publisher Set at right. Note: If you select a Subset from the Layout Book, or a folder from the View Map, the Add Shortcut button will create a shortcut linking the selected Subset or folder to a corresponding folder in the Publisher Set at the right. In contrast, if you drag and drop a Subset or View Map folder into the Publishing Set, a folder is created, but it is not linked and does not follow any subsequent modifications to the Subset/folder.
1435
If you have the same map shown on both sides of the Organizer Palette, the Copy Shortcut button will duplicate the selected item on both sides (since both trees represent a single identical map). It is possible to display an external ArchiCAD projects tree structure in the Organizer and copy any of its views or Layouts into the active project. See External Projects in the Navigator.
1436
Publisher Set Properties Dialog Box

To open this dialog box, make sure you are viewing the Publisher Set Chooser and Manager. (Click the Up one level button.) Click the Publishing Properties button in the Navigator or Organizer; or Click the Publishing Properties command button among the command icons.
Publishing method: Click this scroll-down menu and choose a publishing method from the list:
The Print and Plot choices have no additional formatting choices. If you choose Save files or Upload to Internet, you have the following further configuration options.
1437
Save files
Path: Enter the path of the folder you want to save your files in. Browse: Click this button to browse through folders for saving your files. Create a real folder structure: Click this button to save your files in a hierarchical structure. Create flat file structure: Click this button to save your files in a flat structure. Include Project Reviewer web environment: Check this box to save the Project Reviewer web environment together with the set for browsing it later. The Options button will then become active. - Options: Click this button to display a dialog for defining settings for the Project Reviewer index file. The index file contains the hierarchical structure of the files of the publication. For more information, see Project Reviewer.
Upload to internet
Host name: Displays the name or address of the FTP server. Enter the name or address of the FTP server. Note: You can optionally enter it in the following format: ftp://username:password@hostname/path. In that case, filling the rest of the fields below is unnecessary.
1438
User name: Displays your user name. Enter your user name here or leave it blank for anonymous login. Password: Enter your password here Path: Displays the path of your publication here. Text field next to Path: Enter the path of your publication here. Text field under Path: (Status area): Displays the login status. Browse: Click here to the FTP browser dialog box and choose a location. You can also send an email message to one or several recipients of the uploaded file, or even attach the files themselves to the e-mail. First, enable the Send an email checkbox. Note: You must first define your own email options in Options > Work Environment > Publisher. In the appearing E-mail dialog box, enter the recipient information and set other options as desired.
Recipients can be typed in, or accessed using your own customized Contacts list (Document > Publisher > Contacts).
1439
Note: The email will not be sent if the publishing process fails.
Test login: Click this button to test whether the address you entered is correct. The text on the left will change accordingly. Note: When using the browsing method, testing is automatic. Include Project Reviewer web environment: Check this box to upload the Project Reviewer web environment together with the set for browsing it later. The Options button will then become active. - Options: Click this button to display a dialog for defining settings for the index file. The index file contains the hierarchical structure of the files of the publication.
For more information, see Project Reviewer. Send an e-mail: Check this box if you want to send an e-mail. E-mail: Click this button and define your e-mail and its properties. - Click Add from Contacts to enter the address of a partner already listed in your Contact list. (Document > Publisher > Contacts). - Click Add a New Recipient button to add the email address of a person not listed among your Contacts. Enter a subject for your email followed by an optional message. You have three checkbox options: - Attach publication information to the email - Attach the published files to the email - Attach the user name and password needed for accessing the FTP site
1440
The 2D Navigator Preview Palette Controls

To show the 2D Navigator Preview Palette, use Window > Palettes > Navigator Preview; or click the Show/Hide Navigator Preview icon in the bottom scrollbar.
The Navigator Preview palette has three uses: It shows a small preview of the Project Map or View Map item selected in the Navigator palette. It can be updated to show the a preview of the contents of the currently active model window. With zoom and pan operations inside the palette, you can update the view displayed in the active window. Go: Click Go to jump to the view you select from the Navigator or in the Overview. Note: Clicking Go is the equivalent of double-clicking one item on the Navigator tree view or double-clicking on the Overview inside the frame of the Overview. Zoom Out: Clicking this results in reduction on the visible plan in the overview area. Zoom: Sets the zoom on the plan visible in the overview area. Zoom In: Clicking this results in magnification on the visible plan in the overview area. Zoom Pop-up Menu: You can define the connection between the Navigator Preview and the frontmost window. You can also redraw preview from here. Real-time Zoom: If you choose this option, the zooming and panning operations made in the preview are continuously shown in the window. Auto zoom: With this option, the zooming and panning operations made in the preview do not affect the screen display until you release the mouse button. Double-click to zoom: With this option, the view does not reflect the display changes made in the preview. To update it, you need to either double-click inside the preview or click the Go button in the top right corner of the palette. Redraw Preview: This command updates the preview window if you have edited the contents of the active window. For more information, see Navigator Preview (2D).
1441
The 3D Navigator Preview Palette Controls

The 3D Navigator Preview Palette is only available when working in the 3D window. See also Navigator Preview (3D). The options are different for Perspectives and Parallel Projections (Axonometrics). If you are in a perspective view: Choosing Show from Top from the pop-up at the lower right corner of the palette allows you to manipulate a perspective camera directly: move it around, fix the target point or the viewpoints.
Choosing Show from Side at the pop-up at the lower right corner displays only the perspective camera and story elevation marks. Click on the camera and hold the mouse button on the up or down arrow to adjust the cameras vertical position. (The story signs will start to move in the opposite direction, simulating the effect of camera motion on the model.) A carat will appear in the upper or lower right corner of the preview field to indicate when the camera position has reached the top or bottom of the model.
1442
The double-arrow at the bottom of the window enables you to adjust the camera position from story to story (up or down) with just one click.
Click and drag the cameras arrow to adjust the cameras tilt. Use the sliding arrow at the bottom of the window to adjust the cameras view cone.
For axonometric views, only the small house representing the model is displayed when showing the Top view. The controls resemble those of the Parallel Projection Settings dialog box. For more information, see 3D Projection Settings.
Choosing Show Actual Preview displays the current content of the 3D Window. In this case, all zooming controls are disabled. To refresh the preview of the current 3D view, double-click it or choose Redraw Preview. Redraw all previews will redraw the 3D Navigator Preview picture of each 3D view.
1443
Control Box
Note: The Control Box is not visible by default. To show it, choose its name from the Window > Palettes menu. The Control Box contains a number of drawing aids in the form of icons. The palettes controls, from left to right:
Guide Lines On/Off

Click the toggle icon in the Control Box to turn Guide Lines display on and off.
Guide Lines Options

Click the pop-up menu to access Guide Line options.
Main-direction Guide Lines Relative-direction Guide Lines Incremental Angles Guide Line Settings
Create Guide Line Segment

For more information, see Guide Lines.
Relative Construction Methods

The Relative Construction Methods help geometric input by constraining the cursor's movement to a constant angle or distance as you draft or edit elements. Click the pop-up arrow in the Control Box to access the seven different Relative Construction Method icons.
The Parallel, Perpendicular and Angle Bisector methods constrain the cursor's movement to a constant angle. 1444
Perpendicular: Select an existing edge for a reference line by clicking on it, or draw a new reference line (oriented as needed) using the cursor. Draw the new element perpendicular to the reference line you defined. Parallel: Select an existing edge for a reference line by clicking on it, or draw a new reference line (oriented as needed) using the cursor. Draw the new element parallel to the reference line you defined. Angle Bisector Constraint: Define reference vectors; use the same process as with angle dimensioning. Click to start drawing the new element. The mouse is constrained to the bisectorial angle. The Offset and the Repetitive Offset methods help polygon or polyline input by giving graphical feedback while drafting. Offset: The Offset method creates polylines with a given offset to a drawn polygon. Draw an open or closed polyline. Specify the offset numerically or graphically. The offset polygonal element is drawn. Repetitive Offset: The Repetitive Offset method creates multiple polylines with given offsets to a drawn polygon. Draw an open or closed polyline. Specify the offset numerically or graphically. The first offset polygonal element is drawn. Continue specifying new offsets. The Special Snap Vector method lets you draw a temporary vector that displays your defined special snap points, to aid in accurate placement of elements. See Special Snap Points on Temporary Vector. The Align to Surface method works in 3D only.
Select an existing surface by clicking on it. Place the element on the section line of the input plane, and the surface you defined. For more information, see Aligning Elements to a Surface in 3D.
Cursor Snap Variants

This set of icons controls the way the current position of the cursor is projected on the rubberband line constrained to a predefined direction. Cursor Snap becomes active when you start drawing a vector. For more information, see Projection Mode of Cursor with Mouse Constraints.
Enable/Suspend Groups
These two icons act as a toggle and have the same effect as the Suspend Groups toggle command. If Suspend Groups is active, grouped elements can be selected and edited one by one. For more information, see Group Elements.
Magic Wand
With the Magic Wand feature, ArchiCAD allows you to trace the outline of shapes for creating elements. Effect of Magic Wand depends on Tool and construction method selections. For more information, see Magic Wand.
1445
Special Snap Points

With this method, you can place a node at the division point of a temporary vector defined on the fly. Division point(s) will be calculated based on the current Special Snap Point settings. Snap Points Menu:
Half: Divides an edge into two equal parts. Division: Divides an edge into the set number of segments. (Range: 3-20) Percentage: Divides an edge into two parts according to the set percentage. Distance: Divides an edge into two parts according to the set distance. When the Special Snap Points Relative Construction Method is ON, and the cursor changes to the Mercedes form on edges of elements, special snap points are automatically generated. Special points only appear temporarily and will disappear after 4-5 seconds. Special Snap Points options include: Special Snap Points disabled, Special Points work on the whole element, Special Points work on the part of the element between two intersection points. You can set custom values for Division, Percentage and Distance methods if you open the Set Special Snap Values dialog box (View > Special Snap Options > Set Special Snap Values menu command). Use the OK button to confirm the current operation. Use the Cancel button to abandon the current operation. For more information, see Special Snap Points.
1446
Coordinates Palette
The Coordinates Palette is only visible if you choose Coordinates from the Window > Palettes list. From left to right, the Coordinates Palette contains the following controls: User Origin: Resets the zero point to a user-defined location. Click this button and place the Origin anywhere on the Floor Plan. Note: To return the User Origin to the Project Origin, double-click the User Origin button. For more information, see Origins. Set Rotated Grid: Click Rotated Grid button, then draw a vector on the Floor Plan to specify the angle of the rotated grid. Note: To return to the 'normal' grid, use the Grid Switch button. Switch Orthogonal/Rotated Grid: Select the Rotated Grid option to switch to the rotated grid or the Normal Grid option to switch to the horizontal/vertical grid. Grid Snap: Select one of these three options to control Grid Snapping: - Grid Snapping OFF - Snapping to the Snap Grid - Snapping to the Construction Grid For more information, see Grid Snap Function. Absolute/Relative: Switch the delta button ON to display and enter relative X and Y coordinates (for cartesian coordinates) and radial/angle coordinates (for polar coordinates). Absolute values show the horizontal, vertical, radial and angular distance of the cursor from the Project Origin or a User Origin but never from an Edit Origin. Relative values show the horizontal, vertical, radial and angular position of the cursor relative either to the Project Origin, to a User Origin before any element is begun, or to an Edit Origin once a drafting or editing process is under way. In general, viewing Absolute Cartesian and Relative Polar coordinates provides the most information, and is the most useful under normal circumstances. Gravity: The Gravity icon and pop-up control allows you to determine how to place elements atop slabs, meshes and roofs.
The Gravity icon can be set to either on or off. The option you choose from the pop-up Gravitate to Slab, Roof, or Mesh - will function if the icon is set to on. For more information, see Elevation. Elevation: The z field in the Coordinates Palette displays the elevation at which elements will be placed. The pop-up lets you define the reference level from which this value should be measured: the Project Zero, the current Story (or in 3D, the User Origin), or one of the two optional Reference Levels defined in Options > Preferences > Reference Levels.
1447
Search and Replace Text Dialog Box

The Edit > Search and Replace Text command can search texts in all eligible element types. It works on the Floor Plan and in Section/Elevation/IE, and Detail and Worksheet windows, and on Layouts. See also Search and Replace Text. The dialog box it opens has two modes: Novice and Expert. By default, the Novice mode is displayed.
Find Text that contains: Enter the text to search for. Search criteria can be changed in Expert mode. Replace all with: Type replace string to be applied if you click Replace All Clicking the Filters button opens a further dialog box in which you can set Element, Layer and Story filters.
Search on:
Current story: Click this radio button to restrict searching to the current story. All stories: Click this radio button to search on all stories. Visible layers: By default, only visible layers are searched. To enable the All layers option, first click Include uneditable elements. All layers: Click this radio button to search on all layers.
Search in:
Include uneditable Elements: Check this box if you wish to extend search possibilities to three new filters: Dimensions Measured Text; Associative Labels; and to all layers, including invisible ones. (You must mark the filters to include them in the search.) Text blocks: Check this box to include Text blocks in the search. Labels: Check this box to include Labels in the search. Dimensions Custom Text: Check this box to include Custom Dimension Texts in the search. Doors/Windows: Check this box to include Doors/Windows in the search. Zones: Check this box to include Zones in the search. Associative Labels: Check this box to include Associative Labels in the search. (Available only if Include uneditable Elements is checked.)
1448
Dimensions Measured Value: Check this box to include Measured Dimension Values in the search. (Available only if Include uneditable Elements is checked.) Objects/Lamps: Check this box to include Objects/Lamps in the search. When you have made your choices here, click OK to return to the main dialog box. Case sensitive: Check this box for case sensitive searching. Find text that ... the specified string: Select search criterion from the list.
If you click Replace All, all found texts will be automatically replaced. If you click Start Search, a Window will appear listing all found texts.
Search & Replace Results

Found Elements that contains: The original search criterion Replace Texts that contain: Type text to be substituted when you replace selected Hit list items With: Type text to substitute when you replace selected Hit list items. Hits: This field contains the Hit list. Editable list items are in black, read-only text items are grayed out. You can start to edit a text by double-clicking it. Recently changed items are in Italic, they will turn back to plain when you apply changes. Replace: Click Replace to change all text selected in the list. Zoom in: Click here to zoom in on the first selected element on the list. Zoom out: Click here to zoom out. Apply Changes: Click Apply Changes to actually perform changes made in this list in ArchiCAD. By clicking New Search, the list will disappear and you can start a new search.
1449
Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls

The Text Editor and Formatting Palette appears as soon as you click on the Floor Plan (with the Text tool active) and begin typing into the text box. Use the Formatting palette and the indent/tab controls of the Text Editor to format individual characters, lines and paragraphs that have been typed into your text block, or to switch styles while typing. The controls of the Formatting Palette and Text Editor apply only to the text you are entering in the Text Editor, or to selections inside the Text Editor. The position of the Formatting palette can be customized using the Position of Text Formatting Palette controls in Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes. The Info Box is greyed while you are in the Text Editor.
Formatting Palette
Use the Formatting Palette to apply formatting to selected characters or paragraphs in the text editor, or to insert text symbols. By selecting and formatting different segments of the text blocks, you can have multistyle formatting within a single text block. Note: If the selected text contains multiple styles, the Formatting Palette settings reflect the formatting of the first character in the selection. Choose Favorites: This pop-up contains a list of Text Settings that you have saved as favorites, as well as the default settings. If you have not saved any favorite Text Settings, this button is grey.
To apply text settings saved as Favorites, select text inside the text editor and click on the stored Favorite from the pop-up list. Note: Only the text-specific settings of the Favorite can be applied to selected text in the Text Editor. To apply Favorite settings to the entire text block, use Text Tool Settings. For more information, see Apply Favorite to Placed Element. Insert Autotext: Use this control to open a dialog box to choose from available Autotext categories and items. The Preview area depicts the selected Autotext.
Insert Symbol: Click this button to access a Character Map (Character Palette on MacOS) to choose and insert a symbol.
1450
Alignment buttons: (left, center, right, justify): to set particular alignments for the selected paragraph within your text block.
Leading: Use this control to modify the leading value (in percentage) for a selected line in the text block. Enter a number or use the up-and-down arrows to change the value in increments of 25 percent.
Note: In Windows, if you enter a leading value of less than 100 percent, the text in your text editor will not reflect this accurately (it will still appear as if your line spacing were set to 100 percent). However, your text will be displayed correctly on screen. Superscript/Subscript/Strikethrough: Click either Superscript or Subscript to raise or lower the typed text compared to the text line. Strikethrough will draw a line through the text.
Text format for selected text: Set font, font size, character style or font color for any one or more characters or paragraphs that you select inside the text block. Note: If you use the Automatic pen color visibility adjustment for Model Views feature (Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options), the text in the text editor will reflect this (modified) color. For more information, see More Options.
Text Editor
The text editor appears (together with the Formatting Palette) every time you activate the Text tool and place a text block in the project. The flashing cursor indicates your place in the text editor.
The background color of the text editor is the same color as the text blocks background.
1451
Setting Indents and Tabs

When creating a new breaking text block, indents appear in the ruler of the Text Editor: At left, the first-line indent marker (on top) and the left-side indent marker (on the bottom) At right, the indent that shows the width of the text block.
To reposition these indents, just click and drag them to the desired position. Set a new tab stop by clicking on the ruler. Drag it to a new position as needed. To delete a tab, click and drag it off the ruler entirely.
Alternatively, you can use the Indents and Tabs commands: 1) Click inside the paragraph whose indents or tabs you want to set or edit. 2) Choose the Indents and Tabs command from a context menu opened by right-clicking on the Text Editors ruler bar.
The Indents and Tabs dialog box appears, where you can enter values for indents of the first line, left side and right side of the text block. You can set new tabs: click the New button and enter a desired value. To modify tabs, select the existing value and enter a different one in the Tabs fields. Note: Depending on the unit set in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units, you may set values in centimeter (cm) or inches (in).
1452
Trace & Reference Palette

To access this palette, choose Window > Palettes > Trace & Reference. Controls in the top section of this palette affect the Reference. These affect output as well as display, should you choose to print the Reference directly from the active window. Controls below affect the Active content for Visual Compare functions, which help you to contrast the Active with the Reference. These are on-screen-only options, not part of any view or layout, and are associated with the current viewpoint. Note: At the top of this palette, the Choose Reference and Drag/Rotate/Reset/Switch Reference commands are the same as their counterparts in the list of Trace Reference commands. Show/Hide Reference: Click this button to show or hide the Reference in the current window.
Choose Reference: Click this pop-up to access a list of recently used Reference items, plus the default Reference item. Click the item you wish to use as Reference.
Note: Another way to choose a Reference is to right-click on an eligible Navigator item and use the Show as Trace Reference command. Switch Reference with Active: Click this command to make the Reference into the Active, with the former Active content shown as the Reference.
Drag Reference: Click this command to drag the Reference to another location.
Rotate Reference: Click this command to rotate the Reference.
Reset to Default Position: Click this command to reset the Reference to its original default position after you have moved it.
1453
Rebuild Reference: Click this command to rebuild the Reference to reflect changes in the model.
Color: Choose a Color for the Reference and for the Active from the two Color pop-ups: either Original Colors, or another, uniform color. Recently chosen colors (up to 14 colors) are offered in this list as a quick way to assign a frequently used Reference color. See Tip 1: Use Separate Colors for Active and Reference. Intensity: Use the two sliders to adjust the intensity of the display of the Reference and the Active.
Slide it to the right to increase the intensity; slide it left to make the view fade out. See Tip 4: Optimize Intensity of Reference vs. Active. Temporarily Displace Reference: Click this command to activate the Temporarily Displace Reference function.
Click anywhere in the window, then move the Hand cursor to temporarily move the Reference to a new position on screen. Click again to return the Reference to its original position. See Tip 6: Move the Reference Over Temporarily (Displace Reference). Reference on Top: Click this icon to switch the display order of the two views.
See Tip 3: Reverse Display Order of Reference and Active. Splitter: Click this command to show the Splitter function, which allows you to compare the Reference with the Active by creating a moveable split line between the two views.
See Tip 5: Use the Splitter Bar to Turn the Page.
1454
Make Fills and Zones Transparent: This control toggles the display of background fills and zone fills.
If this button is activated, then element fills will not be displayed. These include foreground fills, background fills that have a color, and zone fills. See Tip 2: Make Fills and Zones Transparent. This switch has only a temporary effect and does not affect the settings of the model elements. Visible Elements: Click the arrow next to the Reference intensity slider in the Trace & Reference palette. This set of options is available only for the Reference.
In this list, put a checkmark next to elements you wish to be displayed on the Reference. Apply Settings to All References: If you click this button, changes you make to the current References Color/Visibility options will be applied to all References used in the project. Otherwise, these changes will apply only to the Reference of the current window.
1455
Project Info
The Project Info command from File > Info opens a dialog box which enables you to enter information about the currently opened project. By default, 14 items are predefined by name, but you can create any number of custom Project Info Items. Click the headers to sort the data according to the clicked header. Use the splitter bars to edit column width.
Defined Project Info items are available for use as AutoText entries in Text Blocks, in both Model Views and Layouts. For more information, see Autotext. The current Project Info data can be saved in a named .xml file to your computer and loaded into any other ArchiCAD project. This can be useful when setting up company-standard Project Info data. If you load a new Project Info file into your current project, all existing AutoText entries will be overwritten by the data in the imported Project Info file. No.: Lists Project Info items in numerical order. Name: Lists Project Info item by name. Description: Editable text field for entering information on the selected Project Info item: click the item, then the black arrow at the right end of the Description field to open a text editing field. Click the OK or Cancel button at the bottom of this editing field to accept or reject the edits you entered.
Use the buttons at right to manage Project Info entries. New: Click to add any number of additional Project Info entries. Delete: Click to delete the selected Project Info item. 1456
Load: Click to load another Project Info .xml file. A file directory dialog box appears, letting you choose the desired .xml file. Save: Click this button to save the current project info data as an .xml file. A file directory dialog box appears, letting you choose the path for the .xml file. See also Project Notes, Project Preview and Report Window.
1457
Project Notes
Access this window by choosing the File > Info > Project Notes command. Whenever you open it, the date and time will be updated. It works like a note pad, where you can: Enter written notes about the project or comments for fellow designers. Keep track of the time spent on a particular job. Any text entered here is saved with your project. If you are signed into a Teamwork Project, the Project Notes window is not active; instead, the Teamwork Notes window (Teamwork > Teamwork Notes) serves the same function. See also Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows.
1458
Project Preview
You can paste a PhotoRendered image of your project into this window, at File > Info > Project Preview. Create a Rendered view of your project. Drag and Drop or Copy-Paste this picture into the Project Preview window. Note: For best results, the image should be 128x128 pixels in size. This preview is shown in the File > Open dialog box in order to make the identification of files easier. (This image will serve as the icon for the project file in Windows Explorer, replacing the standard ArchiCAD icons.)
1459
Report Window
The Report window (File > Info > Session Report) displays information about the imaging and listing process, provided that you have checked the Write Report option in Options > Work Environment > Imaging and Calculation > 3D and Calculation Process Check Controls field. (Use the slider next to the Write Report checkbox to define the report as either brief or long.) It also lists input/output operations, as well as the name and version number of the Add-Ons that have been loaded or by choosing the Options > Add-On Manager command.
1460
Edit Targets and Operators (Solid Element Operations)

For more information, see Solid Element Operations. The Design > Solid Element Operations command opens a floating palette, Edit Targets and Operators.
New Operation Panel

Use the controls in this panel to set up and execute a Solid Element Operation. Get Target Elements: Click to store the selected objects as Target Elements. They are now stored as Target Elements (even after you deselect them) as long as the Solid Element Operations (Edit Targets and Operators) palette remains open. Note: If you selected the Target elements in the 3D Window, they may not all belong to the same Story. In this case, a warning will inform you about this. To select the stored target elements again if you have deselected them, click the Select Stored Targets button.
Note: If you then select another element and click the Get Target Elements button again, it will replace the stored selection.
1461
Get Operator Elements: Click to store the selected objects as Operators. You do not need to perform this selection in the same window as you did for the Targets; you can select the Target on one story and the Operator on another one. To select the stored target elements again if you have deselected them, click the Select Stored operators button.
Choose an operation: Click to select the desired operation type between Target and Operator elements. New Surfaces of Target will: Specify whether the new surfaces of Target Elements will use the Target Element surface attributes, or whether they will inherit the Operator Elements' surface attributes. Inherit Attributes of Operator: Choose to define attributes of the new surfaces as those of the Operator Elements. Use Their Own Attributes: Choose to define attributes of the new surfaces as those of the Target Elements. Execute: Click to create a Solid Operation Link between the stored Operator and Target Elements.
Maintain Operations Panel

Maintain Operations: Use the controls in this panel to verify, edit and cancel already existing Solid Operations. These controls affect elements that have been linked via a completed Solid Operation, and have no connection to the settings of the New Operation panel above.
Add to Selection
If you have selected an element that has participated in a Solid Element Operation, use the following two buttons to add more elements to the selection: those which are either the targets or the operators of the selected elements. You can click both buttons in succession; this will select all the targets and all the operators of the linked Solid Element Operation. Targets of Selected Elements: Click this button to add elements to the current selection which are targets of the selected element. Operators of Selected Elements: Click this button to add elements to the current selection which are operators on the selected element. Cancel Operations of Selected Elements All Targets: Click this button to cancel any links that may exist between the selected operators and their targets (if any). All Operators: Click this button to cancel any links that may exist between the selected target elements and their operators (if any). All Other Selected Elements: The current selection may contain elements linked to each other by a solid operation. Click this button to cancel these links.
1462
Library Loading Report

The Library Loading Report Palette shows you the names of the Library Part files that present problems and the download status of web objects.
You can also display it by choosing Library Loading Report in the Window > Palettes hierarchical menu. Clicking the arrow top left expands/compresses the Palette. It has two tab pages: Missing/Doubles and Download. The Missing/Doubles tab page provides the list of Library Parts missing from your Project, followed by the list of Library Parts that have identical names. On top, next to the folder icon, the number of the problematic items is shown.
The three buttons in the middle of the dialog box allow you to: Copy this list to the clipboard. Print this list. Save As this list to a text file for reference. Library Manager: Click this button to go to the Library Manager dialog box where you can locate missing libraries and update the loaded library list. The Download tab page lists the Library Parts and folders that you have downloaded through drag & drop into the Project.
1463
The icons representing the three download states are: download in progress
download completed
download failed.
Note: In the Palettes compressed state, only the number of the problematic and downloaded items is shown in the header.
1464
Classic 3D Navigation Toolbar

If you prefer to use the 3D navigation controls of ArchiCAD 9 and earlier, activate the Window > Toolbars > Classic 3D Navigation command. The commands specific to this toolbar are:
3D Edit icon: represented by an Arrow-Wall-Slab combination; with this mode on, 3D construction Tools can be used and the elements edited. Walk: Walk tool with Camera mode. Move back and forth and turn around. Lateral Move: Lateral Move tool with Camera mode. Move up and down and laterally to the left or right, but keep looking in the same direction. Turn: Turn tool with Camera mode. Stand still and look around in all directions. Look To: Interactively set the target point for the perspective. Lock Target Point: In the middle of the image, a rectangle will appear. This is the neutral area. If you click anywhere between the rectangle and the window border, you will begin moving. Click at the top or bottom for one kind of movement, to the left or right for another, and in the corner areas for a combination of the two. Click close to the rectangle to move slowly, close to the windows border to move fast. To move at a constant speed, keep the mouse pressed. Drag the pointer around to increase or decrease speed and change directions. For extreme speed, drag the cursor out of the 3D Window as far as your screen size permits. If there are individually selected elements in the 3D Window when you start navigating, only these elements will be displayed as you move. This feature can be extremely helpful with large projects. It also allows you to analyze one or several elements on their own, without their environment. Look to perpendicular: Switch to a view perpendicular to a given point. Reset Roll Angle: Reset the roll angle to zero to rapidly return from a bizarre view obtained during navigation. Horizontal View: Return with a single command to a horizontal view of the model.
1465
1466
Dialog Boxes
This section describes ArchiCADs dialog boxes and palettes in detail. The list on this page is divided into four categories to help you navigate to the dialog box you need. Other interface item descriptions can be found: in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes; and in Controls.
Configuration and Attributes Work Environment Dialog Box Working Units Project Preferences Dialog Boxes Layer Settings Dialog Box Line Types Dialog Box Fill Types Dialog Box Composite Structures Dialog Box Pens & Colors Dialog Box Material Settings Dialog Box Zone Categories Dialog Box Profile Manager Dialog Box Add-On Manager Working in Model Views Story Settings Dialog Box Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box Create New Story Dialog Box Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box Copy Dialog Box Grids & Background Dialog Box Linework Consolidation Settings
1467
Fill Consolidation Settings Model View Options Combinations Panel Model View Options for Construction Elements Model View Options Override Fill Display Model View Options for GDL Objects 3D Document Settings Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box 3D Window Settings Open GL Options 3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box 3D Projection Settings Sun Set Cities RoofMaker Settings TrussMaker Settings Grid System Settings GDL (Geometric Description Language) Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) Format Options (Interactive Schedule) Index Settings Dialog Box View Settings Dialog Box Book Settings Dialog Box Subset Settings Dialog Box Layout Settings Import Views from ArchiCAD Project Master Layout Settings Drawing Manager
1468
Output and Imaging Pasting Dialog Box Paste Options Dialog Box Print 2D Document Print 3D Document Print Picture Print Layout Plot Setup PlotFlow Plot 2D Document Plot Layout Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS PhotoRendering Settings Collaboration Modules XREF Management Dialog Box DXF/DWG Translation Setup Merge DXF-DWG Mark-Up Tools Palette Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box Project Reviewer Environment
1469
Work Environment Dialog Box

Use the Options > Work Environment > Work Environment command to open the Work Environment dialog box. For more information, see Customizing your Work Environment. Use the splitter bars to optimize the display of text in this dialog box.
Profile Options Scheme Options Dialog Boxes and Palettes Selection and Element Information Tracker and Coordinate Input Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box Guide Lines Settings Imaging and Calculation Publisher More Options Advanced Redraw Options On-Screen Options Data Safety Network And Update Options Special Folders Shortcut Customization Dialog Box Toolbox Customization Dialog Box Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization Info Box Customization Dialog Box Toolbar Customization Dialog Box Menu Customization Dialog Box
1470
Profile Options
(Options > Work Environment > Work Environment Profiles) For general information, see Profiles.
Stored Profiles displays the list of Profiles available to the user who is currently logged in. Clicking on any of them displays, in the window below, the Schemes stored in the selected Profile. Select the Profile you wish to apply, rename, export or delete. Note: A lock icon next to the profile name means that the file is read-only; the profile is locked. It is not possible to edit or delete locked profiles. New Profile: Use the New Profile dialog box to define a new profile.
Enter the name of the new profile in the field. Each profile must have a unique name. 1471
Select the Schemes of the Profile: Choose the schemes you want the new profile to contain. Highlight each scheme type, then choose the scheme you want from the drop-down list at right. If you dont want a particular scheme to be defined as part of this profile, choose Undefined for that scheme. When you apply the new profile, the undefined schemes settings will remain as-is or default. Any scheme in the new profile set to Custom will be stored as a scheme (and given the same name as your profile), and will be saved as part of your new profile. If you dont want to include this scheme, set it to Undefined. Edit: Click this button to edit the selected Profile. This dialog box and its functions are identical to the New Profile dialog box. Delete: Press this button to delete the selected Profile. Deleting the profile does not delete any of the schemes it contained, merely the particular scheme-combination that the profile represented. Export: Click this button to export the selected Profile. Enter a folder name in which to save the profile data. (By default, the folder name is identical to the profile name; but you can choose any folder name, and the folder can contain multiple profiles.)
Click the Browse button to choose a location for the profile folder, then click Export. Import Profile: Click the Browse button and locate the profile folder you need. If the folder contains multiple profiles, choose the one you want from the list below, then click Import.
Note on Profiles with Identical Names: You can import a profile that has the same name as a profile you already have, but ArchiCAD will differentiate between them by displaying the date and time the profile was created. Set as Default: Click this button to define the selected profile as your default profile. Henceforth, this profile will be applied if you choose Default Profile from the Set up Work Environment pop-up when starting ArchiCAD, or with the New & Reset All command. Apply Schemes of Profile: Click this button to apply the Schemes stored in this Profile. Note: A Profile consists of a set of schemes; applying a profile means that you apply the schemes it contains. Once you have applied a profile, you will get feedback on which schemes are active, but no feedback on which profile is active. To make sure that a particular profile has been applied, check that the right schemes are activated, or else re-apply the profile.
1472
Scheme Options
The Scheme Options screen appears in the Work Environment dialog box (Options > Work Environment) if you have selected one of the six scheme sets from the tree structure at the left side of the dialog box.
Use the controls on this screen to manage the schemes of this scheme set. Apply Schemes of Profile: Select a Profile from this pop-up at the top left corner of this dialog box. The Schemes stored within this Profile will be applied. Stored Schemes: This list shows all the Schemes stored for the currently selected Work Environment Profiles. Select the Scheme you wish to apply, rename or delete. Note: A lock icon next to the scheme name means that the file is read-only; the profile is locked. It is not possible to edit or delete locked schemes. Apply Scheme: Click this button to apply the settings of the selected Stored Scheme (from the list above) to your current project. Store as: Click this button to enter a name and save settings of the currently selected Work Environment component into a Scheme. Each scheme must have a unique name. Rename: Use the Rename Scheme dialog box to give the selected scheme a new name. Delete: Click this button to delete selected Scheme and the settings stored in it. Redefine: To redefine a selected scheme according to current settings, use the Redefine command. In effect, you will replace the stored settings with the latest Custom settings.
1473
Export/Import Schemes
To make your schemes available to a network or other users, or to transfer them to another computer, you can export and import schemes to/from folders of your choice. Schemes can also be exported/imported as a group, when combined into a Profile. Note: The Export and Import Schemes functions, described here, refer to copying existing scheme files to make them available to yourself or other users. You can also set certain schemes as defaults and have users load these defaults during start-up from a predefined server location. For more information, see the Getting Started booklet. Export: Enter a name for the exported scheme, if you want to export it under a different name. Click the Browse button to choose a location for the scheme, then click Export.
Import: Click Browse and locate the folder you need. (Folders can be located on your hard drive or any network location.) When importing schemes, you must point to the folder that contains the scheme(s), not to the actual scheme file itself.
If the folder contains multiple schemes, choose the one you want from the list, then click Import. The browser will list only those schemes that fit the scheme category you are in. (For example, you cannot import a Shortcut scheme into the list of Tool Schemes.) The imported scheme will be added to the list of stored schemes in your Work Environment dialog box. Note on Schemes with Identical Names: You can import a scheme that has the same name as a scheme you already have, but ArchiCAD will differentiate between them by displaying the date and time the scheme was created.
1474
Dialog Boxes and Palettes

(Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes) This screen contains options related to the display of dialog boxes and palettes.
Dialog Box Auto-Update Delay: Enter a value in seconds for the auto-update delay time for edit text dialog boxes. (This is the amount of time it takes for the program to validate your typed entry as the desired value; you do not have to click Enter.) Hide Locked Layers in Pop-up Palettes: This option means that locked layers will not be shown in any of the layer pop-up palettes. Use Scroll Effects for Dialog Box Panel Opening (Windows Only): By default, to prevent crowding of dialogs when opening new panels, previously opened panels will close automatically, and the dialog box will move upwards on the screen. If you check this box it means that dialog box panels will roll open (at the speed you set with the slider) instead of snapping open, which is the effect you get if you uncheck the box. Move up dialog box if it cannot accommodate more panels: Many dialog boxes have five or more panels that might not all fit on the screen if they were opened all at once. This option will move the whole dialog box up to make room for newly opened panels. Close panels if the dialog box cannot accommodate more panels: This option will close one or more open panels to make room for newly opened panels.
1475
Pet Palette Movement

To define the type of pet palette movement you prefer, open Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes. Choose a radio button to determine whether and how your pet palettes will move around on the screen as you work.
Follow Cursor: This means that the pet palette will follow your cursor around the screen as you complete your editing operation. (This way the editing icons on the pet palette are available right next to your cursor instead of at a far corner of the screen.) Jump to Preferred Position: This means that when you bring up a pet palette and release the mouse button, the pet palette jumps to one position and stays there as you complete the editing operation. If you want the pet palette to stay someplace else, drag and drop the palette to your preferred position. All subsequent pet palettes will appear at that preferred position. You can still move the pet palette at any time during your editing operation.
Distance from Cursor

Use the two slider controls to set the palettes following distance from the cursor. The first slider sets the palettes initial distance from the cursor when it first appears on screen. The second slider sets a minimum following distance: the palette will not follow the cursor until the cursor is at that predefined distance from the palette. (This is useful if you want to prevent the palette from covering up the very area that you want to edit.) The operations that can be performed by using the pet palette are detailed in Editing Elements.
Position of Text Formatting Palette

Above Text Editor: Check this to locate the Text Formatting Palette above the Text Editor. Jump to preferred position: Check this to have the Text formatting Palette jump to a preferred position. This means that when you bring up a the Text Formatting palette and release the mouse button, the pet palette jumps to one position and stays there as you complete the editing operation. If you want the palette to stay someplace else, drag and drop the palette to your preferred position. All subsequent Text Formatting palettes will appear at that preferred position. You can still move the palette at any time during your editing operation. For more information on this palette, see Text Block Formatting Panel. Keep ArchiCAD Palettes visible even when another application is in front (Available for MacOS only): Check this box if you want to view any open ArchiCAD palettes while another application is in front on your screen.
1476
Selection and Element Information

(Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information)
Selection Dots and Marquee Color: Click in the field to access a color pop-up and customize the color of the dots appearing on selected individual elements, as well as the marquee. Editable Selection Dots Color: Click in the field to access a color pop-up and customize the color of editable selection dots. Double-click the color box and choose a different color from your systems picker or editor dialog box. This setting is not effective on grouped elements that use color-coded markers. For details about editable selection dots, see Graphical Editing Using Editable Hotspots. Highlight selected elements contours: Check this box if you wish to have the selected elements contours highlighted. Contour color: Choose a color for the selected elements contour from this pop-up palette. Bold contours: Check this box to display the selected elements contours in bold font style. Highlight selected elements surfaces: Check this box to apply a highlight to the selected elements surfaces. Surface color: Choose a color for the selected elements surface color. Transparency in Shaded OpenGL view: Set the transparency for shaded Open GL view here. Use the slider to set the grade of transparency/opacity for shaded OpenGL view.
1477
Element Information
For more information, see Element Information Highlight. Highlight element contour lines before selection: Check this box to highlight element contour lines (i.e. detection highlight) before selecting them. Highlight color: Choose a color for the selection highlight here. Bold contours: Check this box to display bold contours for the selection highlight. Highlight appears after: Enter a value here in seconds for the delay time before highlight appears. (Highlight appears immediately if you press Shift.) Highlight contours of related element(s) when placing or editing element: Check this box if you wish to use the element detection feature: during dimensioning or parameter transfer operations, the contours of related elements will be highlighted to help you identify which element you are working on. You need not press Shift. Highlight color: Choose a color for the element detection highlight contours here. Enable element information Pop-up: Check this box to enable the element information pop-up (e.g. Info Tag). Pop-up appears after: Enter a value here in seconds for the delay time before element info pop-up appears. Show short info only: Check this box to display only short info in the element info pop-up. Use Tracker colors: Check this box to use the colors chosen for the Tracker in Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input. Use small font: Check this box to use small fonts in the element info pop-up.
1478
Tracker and Coordinate Input

(Options > Work Environment > Tracker and Coordinate Input)
Show Tracker: Choose an option for preferred Tracker display: Always: Select this radio button to always show the Tracker on your plan, both in 2D and in 3D, as you move your cursor. On-demand: Select this radio button to show Tracker only during coordinate input and editing operations. Use factory color settings: Check this box to use only default factory color settings for the tracker. If this box is checked, the factory settings will override any choices made in the three controls below. Foreground color: Choose a color from this pop-up for the foreground color of the Tracker. Background color: Choose a color from this pop-up for the background color of the Tracker. Background opacity: Specify the opacity of the Trackers background by dragging this slider. Note: If you wish, you can apply these colors to the Element Information pop-up (Options > Work Environment > Selection and Element Information > Use Tracker colors). Show Z value: Check this box to display Z value (when applicable) in the Tracker. Show parameter tags: Check this box to show parameter tags in the Tracker. (These are the texts identifying the data values displayed in the tracker, e.g. Distance). Show frame: Check this box to display a frame for the Tracker. Use small font: Check this box to display the information in the Tracker with small fonts.
1479
Coordinate input logic

This part of the panel refers to the coordinates and angles displayed in the Tracker. See also Coordinate Input Logic: Expert Options. Prefer polar coordinates in Tracker during straight vector input: Check this box to prefer polar coordinates (distance, angle) over X-Y coordinates in the Tracker. Show X-Y Coordinates relative to User origin in Tracker: Check this box if you want to display absolute X-Y coordinates in the Tracker even if you have enabled the Relative Coordinates in Tracker command from the Standard Toolbar. This way, the Tracker will display Relative polar coordinates and Absolute X-Y coordinates simultaneously. Coordinate shortcuts prefer Tracker: Check this box if you want coordinate shortcuts to jump to the Tracker (instead of the Coordinates Palette). Enable direct numeric input into Tracker fields: If this box is checked, numeric input during editing operations will be interpreted as coordinate entries into the Tracker. If this box is not checked, you must enter the Tracker using a coordinate shortcut or the TAB key. Use relative angle measures: Check this box if you want the angle values in the Tracker to be measured (1) relative to the orthogonal grid (from 1 to 180 degrees), or (2) relative to the previous input segment during polygonal input. Use angle relative to the active Guide Line: Check this box if you want your Tracker angle values to be interpreted relative to the active Guide Line. Expand Tracker automatically during numeric input: Check this box to extend the size of the Tracker automatically during numeric input.
1480
Mouse Constraints and Methods Dialog Box

(Options > Work Environment > Mouse Constraints and Methods)
Horizontal-Vertical: Check this box to constrain cursor movement to 0, 90, 180 and 270 from any Edit Origin by holding down the Shift key. Horizontal-Vertical to Rotated Grid: Check this box to interpret 'Horizontal and Vertical' constraint in the direction of the rotated grid's main axes. Fixed Angle: Check this box to enable cursor constraint at the defined Fixed Angle from any Edit Origin by holding down the Shift key. Enter a Fixed Angle value here for cursor constraint. Relative to Rotated Grid: Check this box to interpret 'Fixed Angle' constraint relative to the rotated grid's main axes. Nearest Instant Guide Line: Check this box to snap the cursor to the nearest visible Instant Guide Line. Lasting Guide Lines: Check this box to snap the cursor to the nearest Lasting Guide Line. Cursor Snap Range: Enter a value here in pixels for the distance at which the cursor snaps to an element. Line Drawing: Set the line drawing method here by clicking one of the buttons. Mac Classic-like: Select this option to use the standard click-drag drafting method. Example: to draft a Line, click the Mouse button at the first endpoint, drag while holding it down and release at the other endpoint. CAD-like: Select this option to use the standard CAD click-click drafting method (default). Example: To draft a Line, click the mouse button at the first endpoint and release it, move to the other endpoint and click to complete the Line.
1481
Guide Lines Settings

(Options > Work Environment > Guide Lines Settings) For more information, see Guide Lines.
Show Guide Lines: Click this icon to display Guide Lines (on-screen editing aids) in the project. Extend Edges and Arcs if the mouse stops moving for: Enter a value in seconds for the amount of time you want to wait before the guide lines are extended from the edges and arcs of the element. Show the following Main-direction Guide Lines if the mouse stops for: To show main-direction guide lines, click the button at the left of this control. Then enter a value in seconds for the amount of time you want to wait (with the cursor placed on the node of an existing element) before main-direction guide lines (defined with the controls below) are displayed. Check any or all of the following Main directions (relative to the Grid) at which to display the guide lines: Horizontal-vertical Horizontal-vertical to Rotated Grid Fixed Angle: Enter an angle measure. A Guide Line will appear at intervals of this angle (as measured from the grid lines, either orthogonal or rotated). Relative to Rotated Grid: Check the box if you want to measure the angle from the rotated grid. Input vector angle and length: These Guide Lines appear when the cursor hits the node of an existing element while inputting another element. Two multi-choice Guide Lines appear: one
1482
which reflects the vector angle, and one (a Guide Circle) whose radius is defined by the vector length. Move the cursor onto either or both to make it a lasting Guide Line/Guide Circle. Show the following Relative-direction Guide Lines if the mouse stops for: To show relative-direction guide lines, click the button at the left of this control. Enter a value in seconds for the amount of time you want to wait before relative-direction guide lines are displayed. Relative-direction Guide Lines are shown relative to the Active Guide Line (the one shown in bold). Check any or all of the following relative-direction Guide Lines to display: Parallel to the active Guide Line Perpendicular to the active Guide Line Angle Bisector of intersected Guide Lines Tangent to the active Guide Line Show Incremental Guide Lines in increments of: To show incremental guide lines, click the button at the left of this control. Then enter an angle value to define the increment. Incremental Guide Lines are instant only. They appear during input, and can be made lasting only by using the context menu commands (Convert to Guide Line Segment/Place Guide Line). Relative to active Guide Line: Check this box to define the incremental guide lines relative to the currently active guide line. Guide Line Color: Choose a pen color for the Guide Lines. Multi-choice Guide Line color: Choose a pen color for the Multi-choice Guide Lines. Extendededge and extended-arc Guide Lines will also be in this color if they pop up before you begin an input.
1483
Imaging and Calculation

This dialog box (Options > Work Environment > Imaging and Calculation) provides options for rebuilding the 3D and Section/Elevation/IE windows, creating reports and dealing with error alerts.
3D Window Rebuild Controls

Auto-rebuild 3D Window when activated: Checking this box means the 3D display of your plan is updated after each modification to the model, as soon as you activate the 3D Window. If this box is unchecked, the 3D model does not show the modifications until you choose the View > Refresh > Rebuild command. Switching this option off can be useful if you want to keep an already existing 3D image in the window for a longer period, and you want to avoid accidentally rebuilding it. Note: If you edit elements in an outdated 3D view, deleted elements will be visible but cannot be selected. Moved elements can be selected, but their selection dots are displayed at the real location and you cannot edit them. Modified elements can be selected and edited, but this will trigger the rebuilding of the view. 3D Settings changes bring 3D Window to front: Check this box if you want to activate the 3D window and rebuild its content every time you make a change in either the 3D Projection Settings or the 3D Window Settings dialog box. Keep zoomed detail on Rebuild: Check this box to preserve the last zoom made in the 3D Window even if you choose View > Refresh > Rebuild. If you uncheck it, the 3D Window will recreate the 3D view at the original zoom level.
Section Window Rebuild Control

Keep zoomed detail on Rebuild: If you mark this checkbox, then the zoom level of your Section/Elevation/IE Window will be retained even after you execute a Rebuild command. For more information on ArchiCAD windows, see Updating Sections.
1484
3D and Calculation Process Check Controls

Show Progress Window: If this box is checked, the progress of 3D and list processing is indicated by a special timer. This will help you evaluate whether to cancel lengthy 3D redraws or calculations, change some settings (for example by selecting a smaller area, setting more specific filters or less precise imaging options or reducing the 3D Windows size). Note: The movement of the indicator is proportional not with the elapsed time, but with the amount of data processed. Interrupt with Error Messages: If this box is checked, any error messages will appear on the screen (in the Report Window) before the imaging or calculation process is completed. If the box is left unchecked, error reports appear only after the process is completed. Write Report: Use this checkbox to enable or disable the creation of a report on the 3D conversion and list calculation processes. Use the sliding switch to set the amount of detail it should contain. The report is more than just a list of alerts. It can be used to keep track of and compare imaging time for different images. New information is always added to the end of the report. The Report is cleared when you close the Project. If you wish to preserve it, save it as a text file. Selected Elements to be Calculated: This pop-up field gives you three options for handling a possible conflict between a listing command and items selected in the workspace. Select List All to calculate all selected elements in the list, even though they do not correspond to the filtering criteria. Select Use Filters to apply the filters defined for the list scheme to the selected elements. Elements that do not correspond to these filters will be ignored. Selecting Show Alert will display a warning about the situation and you will be able to choose between the two options above. For more information on calculation, see Calculation.
1485
Publisher
On this screen of Work Environment (Options > Work Environment > Publisher), you define options used by the Publisher function:
Publisher log location: Enter a file path, or use the Browse button to access a file directory dialog box to specify a file path on your system. This path shows the save location of the publishing log file, which is generated every time you publish an output using the Navigator/Organizers Publisher map. To view the log, click the Show the log file button. My email options: Information entered here will be used if you choose to send an email when uploading one or more items to the internet as part of your Publisher process. Enter your E-mail address and Display name. Enter the address of the server used to send emails. Enter the mail service port used by your server. My server requires authentication: Check this box if your server requires authentication. If so, enter your domain name as the Account name, and your password. You can now send an email to any recipient as part of the Publishers Upload process. For more information on Publisher see Publisher Function.
1486
More Options
(Options > Work Environment > More Options)
Update Auto-rebuild Model viewpoints continuously

If this box is checked, Sections/Elevations/Interior Elevations of Auto-rebuild Model type will always be in updated condition. However, in large projects this may cause slowdowns. In this case, try unchecking this box to avoid constant rebuilds. Auto-Rebuild Models will then be updated only when such a window is opened or brought to the front of the screen.
Create Detail/Worksheet Boundary in Detail/Worksheet Window

This box is checked by default, and each Detail or Worksheet Drawing window will include a line that represents the boundary you created when placing the marker. Even if such Boundaries are hidden as part of the Marker (View > On-Screen View Options > Marker Range), this line will be shown in the Detail/Worksheet window. If you do not want such a boundary in the Drawing window, disable this checkbox.
Save Navigator Preview Data with Project files

If you mark this checkbox, the saved Navigator previews will be available when you reopen your project, allowing for faster navigation.
Auto ID Increase
Using the Auto ID Increase checkbox, ID numbers will automatically increase when creating a new element, provided that a number is included in the ID field. For details about ID Management, see the Calculation Guide (a PDF document in the ArchiCAD > Documentation folder, or in the ArchiCAD Help menu).
1487
Enable ArchiCAD Sounds

This box is unchecked by default. If you want to hear the beeping sounds associated with ArchiCAD processing, check this box.
Show New Message Alert in Teamwork

Check or uncheck this box depending on whether you want a message alert to float across your screen every time you receive a message in Teamwork.
Do not launch new instance of ArchiCAD when placing a view onto a Layout
By default, a new instance of ArchiCAD is launched when you place a view from an external project onto a layout in the current project. Check this box if you do not wish to launch this additional instance every time. In this case, the new instance of ArchiCAD will be launched only when you update the placed view.
When placing model views onto Layouts, adjust each drawing frame to show only zoomed area of model view
Check this box if you want the placed drawings frame to be adjusted to the zoomed area of the model view by default. Once the zoomed view is placed, you can later opt to readjust the frame to fit other parts of the model view, either manually using pet palette commands, or using the Fit Frame to Drawing radio button in Drawing Settings.
When opening view or layout from a menu or by double-clicking in Navigator:

Two radio buttons give you options for opening views or layouts using menu commands or Navigator commands: Prefer to open in an existing window: the new view/layout will replace the one in the existing window, if applicable. Prefer to open in a new window: the newly opened view/layout will be opened in a new window. These options do not apply to Floor Plans and 3D windows, since multiple Floor Plans and 3D windows cannot be open simultaneously.
1488
Advanced Redraw Options

(Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options) These options are designed for advanced-level users or IT managers familiar with processing and memory issues. For most users, it is sufficient to leave these settings at their default values.
Model Display in 2D Navigation

Choose from three options for displaying project elements during panning operations. (If you are experiencing fits and starts while navigating in a large, complex model, switching among these options can speed and smooth the process.) Simplified Model: The full model is shown in simplified version (for example, hatches are temporarily hidden). Structural Contours Only: Only the outlines of construction elements appear during a panning operation. Full Model: All elements are shown in full. When you finish with the panning operation, all elements are fully displayed again.
2D Drawing Antialiasing
Check this box if you want to achieve antialiasing on line-type 2D Drawing elements. This box is checked by default. MacOS only: Do not antialias horizontal and vertical lines. Check this box if you want to exclude horizontal and vertical lines from the antialiasing process.
2D Hardware Acceleration Level

Use the slider to adjust the level at which hardware processes (e.g. video card) are used instead of the software for 2D Drawing processes (e.g. lines, fills, input feedback). To turn Hardware Acceleration off, move the slider all the way to the left.
1489
Off: Hardware Acceleration off. 2D Drawing takes place in software-only mode. Level 1: 2D drawing of lines, fills, etc. occurs using the software, but certain layers of information (e.g. Floor Plan, Trace Reference) are constructed using the video card. If the ArchiCAD project is divided among several monitors, then the merging of these layers is helped to some extent by software processes. Level 2: Both 2D drawing, including antialiasing, and the layering of information types is done using the hardware (video card) if the project is on a single monitor. If the project is divided among several monitors: XP - processes are identical to Hardware Acceleration Level 1. Vista - Full hardware acceleration works, but without antialiasing (this is a technical limitation.) Full: Full hardware mode. Regardless of the number of monitors, all 2D Drawing processes, including antialiasing, are done by the video card. However, the performance of certain older video cards (in terms of speed and memory) may be insufficient: the redrawing process must be repeated on each monitor, requiring a great deal of video memory. Arbitrary Hardware Acceleration Level Decrease If you set the Hardware Acceleration to a level that in certain situations exceeds the graphics card's performance, then ArchiCAD might automatically fall back to a Hardware Acceleration Level below the one set up by you. The slider will not be moved by ArchiCAD but there will be a warning about this event at the bottom of the dialog box: Warning: A hardware test indicates that the currently set 2D Hardware Acceleration Level exceeds the performance capabilities of your video card in some situations. Therefore, ArchiCAD will automatically switch to a lower level of 2D Hardware Acceleration.
Memory Usage
Use this slider to adjust the level of memory usage by ArchiCAD. Provided that you have enough memory available, and depending on your processor, increasing this value (by moving the slider to the right) may result in improved performance. The Memory Usage slider defines ways of working in ArchiCAD that are not strictly related to the 2D display, yet might have an effect on the speed of 2D display. By default, the slider is set to Full. In this situation, when ArchiCAD is opened, part of the memory is reserved for indexing elements. This reserved memory enables ArchiCAD to accomplish various tasks - most of them affecting 2D speed - faster. If memory usage is very high (as when working with large files) then it is advisable to move the slider to the left. In this case there will be less memory reserved for the indexing function, and more memory reserved for regular ArchiCAD functions. Note that if you are working with small files, the difference between the two ways of working is not noticeable. We recommend that you leave the slider on the right, in its default position, and only move it to the left when ArchiCAD experiences serious memory shortage problems.
1490
On-Screen Options
(Options > Work Environment > Advanced Redraw Options)
Show Ghost Bounding Box of Objects, Columns, Figures and Drawings: If this box is checked, the bounding box of Door, Window, Object, Lamp, Column, Figure and Drawing elements that you wish to place will follow the cursor. Autohide Special Snap Points: This option is checked by default. Special Snap Points (if enabled) will disappear on their own after a set interval. If you disable this checkbox, the snap points will remain visible until you either place an element or change to another view or story. Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment for Model Views: When this box is checked, then black pens will be shown as white on your ArchiCAD screen if the luminance value of a particular background color falls below a threshold value - that is, if your background is sufficiently dark. See Pens & Colors for more information. Use uniform color for Master items on Layouts: Check this to display all Master items using a single color on Layouts. To choose the color, double-click the color field. If you leave this box unchecked, the elements own colors will be applied. Special Snap Point color: Use the color chooser to set a custom color for the Special Snap point, if desired. For more information, see Special Snap Points. Feedback Graphics color: Use the color chooser to set a custom color for bounding boxes and rubberband effects shown during editing operations.
1491
Source Marker Color: Use the color chooser to set a custom color to highlight source markers. (To turn Source Marker Highlight on or off, use View > On-Screen View Options.) For more information, see Source Marker Highlight. Line Type and Pen of Marker Elements on-screen-only parts: Use these controls to set a line type and color for the on-screen parts of all marker elements. These are: Section Limit Line, Elevation Line, Section and Elevation Distant Line, Interior Elevation Line and Limit Line, and Detail/Worksheet Boundary Line. Workspace Colors (Teamwork projects only): Choose preferred color for highlighting elements depending on their ownership, in Teamwork projects only. See Colored Workspaces.
1492
Data Safety
(Options > Work Environment > Data Safety) Use the features of the Data Safety dialog box (Options > Work Environment > Data Safety) to minimize the risk of data loss and file corruption. This is especially important if your power lines suffer from voltage spikes or failures, or if your computer is prone to software conflicts.
Autosave
The Autosave function controls a number of options protecting you against losing work. If you are forced to restart your computer or the program because of a crash, then the next time you launch ArchiCAD, a dialog box gives you the option of resuming the interrupted work. When Autosave is triggered, the Bulldozer cursor may appear momentarily on the screen while the program saves any changes made to the Project since the last Autosave (or manual Save). Even with large Projects, Autosave should complete its cycle within a few seconds. Autosave is On by default. To turn it on manually, open the Data Safety dialog box and click the Autosave On radio button. Click the Autosave Off radio button if youre sure that you will not need Autosave. To configure the Autosave method, click either of the Save every radio buttons. The two options operate as follows: Save after specified time interval (Save every... seconds): Enter a value (measured in seconds) for the length of Autosaves wait cycle between saves. Save after specified number of steps (Save every... steps): Enter a number. Autosave will be triggered after you perform that number of undoable or redoable actions in the Project. There are three limitations to Autosave functions. The following items must be saved manually: Opened Library Parts Completed PhotoRendering Images All types of Calculation Lists
1493
If ArchiCAD is restarted after a crash, it will detect the Autosave data and prompt you to open it. Important: Opening the Autosaved file at this point is the ONLY way you can recover Autosaved data; it is recommended that you open it! By opening it, you will recover the full project content at the time of the last Autosave, including half-completed PhotoRenderings. If you choose not to open it, the Autosave data will be deleted. Suspend Autosave: Use this option if you want a pending Autosave to be executed only after you have stopped working for a specified time period. (This is useful if you do not wish Autosave to interrupt you between two steps of a multi-step input/edit process.) If you mark the Suspend Autosave checkbox, enter a User idle time (the default value is 5 seconds). This means that when it is time for an Autosave, a flashing icon will appear at the bottom of your screen:
Followed by the idle time in seconds. If you stop working at this point, you will see the clock tick away the idle time. When the idle time is up, the program will Autosave. If you do not want to stop working, the Autosave will remain in suspended state (with the Autosave pending icon on view at the bottom) until you do stop for the specified idle time. Once that time is up, the Autosave will take place. If you switch to another application while Autosave is suspended, ArchiCAD will save the project right away. Autosave Folder: If Autosave is On, the Autosave Folder stores the autosaved documents at the specified location: Use Default Location, or Choose Location and then Browse among folders on your computer or across a network. Changes to the settings of the Autosave Folder will take effect after the program is restarted. Undo Limit: This field allows you to set the number of undoable steps. The default value is 20. See also Undo/Redo. You can still use Undo and Redo after an Autosave. After a manual save, however, your Undo/ Redo memory is cleared. Make Backup Copy: Mark this checkbox to create a backup copy of the previously saved version of your work, by appending the .bak extension to its name. For creating backups of Shared Projects, see also Teamwork.
Hotlink Update
Choose any from the pop-up options to control file operations involving hotlinks. Ignore Hotlinks: Choose this option to ignore any modification made on hotlinked files. This is the fastest opening option for a file containing Modules. Check Hotlinks and ask for update confirmation: Choose this option to look for all hotlinked files and check their modification date. An alert will appear asking you to confirm whether you want to update modifications or not. This is the default setting in the program.
1494
Check and update Hotlinks automatically: Choose this option to update all Modules that are hotlinked to modified files. Should there be any problem in the course of the automatic updating process, choose the first option (no updates), open your file again, and then update the hotlinks manually through the Hotlink Manager dialog box. Note: The option you choose here will be preserved in your Preferences file, but will not be saved with the Project. For more information, see Hotlink Manager Dialog Box.
1495
Network And Update Options

Use this screen (Options > Work Environment > Network And Update Options) to define options related to the Internet and HTML format.
Default Web Page: Use this field to enter the address of your favorite Web page. HTML Output Options: Choose a style to use when saving data in HTML format, e.g., from a list-type Window in text format. Simple: Choose this to display the HTML file without styles. With Styles: Choose this to display the HTML file using the Style Sheet formatting below. (Click Browse to find and use a different style sheet.) Style Options: Choose External if you want the resulting HTML file to include a link to the chosen Style Sheet. Choose Internal if you want to include the Style Sheet itself as part of the HTML file. Check for Updates: Check this box if you want automatic notification - when starting ArchiCAD - if a new ArchiCAD or Library update (Hotfix) becomes available. You will be notified with an on-screen Alert if the Check for Update function is run. This function only works if you have a live internet connection. Use the pop-up to set how often you want to run Check for Updates (Daily, Weekly, or Monthly.) Click Check Now to check for updates immediately. Set the components (both ArchiCAD and Library, or either one) for which you wish to Check for Updates. Note: The Check for Updates does not download anything to your computer automatically. It only provides a notice that such a download is available. Check for Updates will provide automatic information about your ArchiCAD version to the GRAPHISOFT website. These data are limited to the data needed in order to update; they include no personal information. 1496
Teamwork Discovery Port: This setting defines the port on your computer used for the Discovery function, which helps you connect to the BIM Server. See Choose BIM Server.
1497
Special Folders
On this screen (Options > Work Environment > Special Folders), you can relocate the Temporary, Cache and Template, and Teamwork Data Folders to a hard disk volume that is different from the default location. Note: If you choose a custom location which is not available, ArchiCAD will use the displayed system default location. Changes to the folder location settings will take effect after the program is restarted.
The Temporary Folder stores data required for the quick operation of ArchiCAD. The Cache Folder stores 3D projections, PhotoRendered images and other project data. The cache data is used when the program generates the image files automatically in the background and stores them in the chosen Cache Folder. ArchiCAD uses the Cache Folder for quick display and updating of images on the screen. On MacOS, very large hard disks are recommended for advanced imaging, because the Cache Folder can expand greatly when rendering a very complex Project with shadow casting. On Windows, ArchiCAD keeps this data in the virtual memory. Set the limitation of the page file to the highest possible value when rendering a very complex Project with shadow casting. 1498
The Template Folder contains template (.tpl) project files shipped with ArchiCAD. Template files do not contain any virtual building elements, but certain attributes and options have been pre-set. The Teamwork Data Folder: For each Teamwork project you join, a local copy of the project is created on your machine. This data is available even if you are offline. If you have not yet joined any Teamwork projects on this machine, this location is empty. Local data of a project remain available until you leave the Teamwork project, at which time this data is discarded automatically. When using remote network volumes, ArchiCADs operations may be affected by the network performance capabilities. Note: If your startup volume does not have the recommended amount of free space when you launch ArchiCAD, you will have the opportunity (through an alert box) to select another volume during the startup process.
1499
Shortcut Customization Dialog Box

Open Options > Work Environment > Keyboard Shortcuts. From the list window, click on the function or command that needs a shortcut.
To locate a particular item in the list window, click a list format from the drop-down list.
Click on any command or function to view its brief description in the field at the bottom of the list.
Assign Shortcut
If the selected function/command already has a shortcut assigned to it, that shortcut is displayed in the Shortcut(s) for selected command window on the right. In this image, the selected command already has a shortcut (Alt+F7).
1500
Click Detach selected shortcut to remove the existing shortcut. If you dont detach it, you can still assign another shortcut; this way the function/command will have multiple shortcuts. Now type the keys that will constitute the new shortcut. (Use the field where it says Click here and press desired shortcut keys.) As shown in the following image, we pressed the F8 key as our new shortcut.
Use any single letter or number character, or a function key (e.g. F2) with or without modifier keys (i.e., Ctrl, Shift, and/or Alt). If you change your mind about the shortcut, just re-type it. If the combination you typed has not yet been assigned to any other command, you will see the sentence: Currently not assigned to any command. Click Assign.
Shortcut Collision
If the key combination you entered has already been assigned to another function or command, this will be noted in the field: Currently assigned to. - In the following image, we typed F5 as a new shortcut, but this key has already been assigned.
In this case, you can try typing a different shortcut. Note: No collision is detected if the shortcut has been assigned to commands from two different window types. See Window Types (Text or Non-Text).
1501
To assign the shortcut despite the collision, click Assign anyway. This action assigns the shortcut and detaches the shortcut from the function/command to which it was previously assigned. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the selected shortcut scheme according to its current settings.
Window Types (Text or Non-Text)

The set of commands available in ArchiCAD varies slightly, depending on whether the active window is Text-type (Schedules, Lists, Report, Project Notes or GDL script window) or Non-Text type (all other windows). Use these two radio buttons in the Keyboard Shortcuts dialog box to choose the window type in which the shortcut will work: Only in the currently active window type: The shortcut will work only in the type of window that is currently active (i.e. the one you were working in at the time you opened the Work Environment dialog box). If you choose this option, you can assign the same shortcut to two different commands as long as the two commands are from different window types. Note: If you have defined a shortcut to apply only in the current window type, you can henceforth edit that shortcut only by opening the Work Environment dialog box from the window-type of that shortcut. In All window types: The shortcut will work in all windows of ArchiCAD. Click OK to close the dialog box and apply the selected shortcut scheme according to its current settings.
Keyboard Shortcut Preview

To see and/or print a list of currently assigned shortcuts for the chosen scheme, press the Show Shortcut List in Browser button.
1502
Toolbox Customization Dialog Box

Go to Options > Work Environment > Toolbox. Another way to access this dialog box is to open the Toolbox context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Toolbox, then click the icon representing the Toolbox customization page.
. Use the splitter bar as needed to change the width of the fields in this dialog box.
The Available Tools window lists all the ArchiCAD tools. The Toolbox Groups window lists the existing tool groups. To change the order of the tool groups, click and drag on the up/down arrows at the left of each group. By clicking the pushpin icon, you define whether the selected toolbox group will remain permanently open (vertical pushpin), or open and close as space permits (horizontal pushpin). By toggling between the arrow/ABC icons, you define whether the selected toolbox group will be displayed by its icon only (arrow icon), or by both its name and icon (ABC icon). The Tools in Selected Group window lists the tools that are currently part of the group you have selected.
1503
Add a tool to the selected tool group by selecting it from the Available Tools list, then click the Add Selected button at the bottom, or simply drag it to the right. It is possible to place the same tool into more than one Tool Group. Remove a tool from the selected tool group using the Remove button. Further options are available in the Tool Group Options pop-up menu: Create: Use this command to create a new tool group. Rename or Delete: These commands are applied to the selected tool group. Always keep group open: This option will keep the selected Tool Group open on your screen, and no open/close arrow is available on its panel. Show icon and tool name, or Show icon only: This option determines how the tools in the selected Tool Group are displayed. Changes to the Toolbox are applied when you press OK and close the dialog box. The current open/close status of your toolbox panels will be saved as part of the Tool Scheme, together with all the other settings customized in this dialog box. Note: It is possible that the Toolbox size, as saved in your Palette Scheme, is not big enough to accommodate all the toolbox panels you saved as open. In this case, one or more panels of your Toolbox will be displayed as closed.
1504
Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization

Go to Options > Work Environment > Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. Use the splitter bar as needed to change the width of the fields in this dialog box.
The left window contains a list of all ArchiCAD tools. The right window lists the panels that appear on the selected tools Settings Dialog Box. To see what the selected panel looks like, double-click its name or click the Panel Preview button. Use the arrow icons to define the order of appearance of the Tool Settings Dialog Box panels, and the eye icons to show or hide them. When you are satisfied, click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
1505
Info Box Customization Dialog Box

Go to Options > Work Environment > Info Box to open this dialog box. Another way to access this dialog box is to open the Info Box context menu by right-clicking anywhere in the Info Box, then click the icon representing the Info Box customization page:
Use the splitter bar as needed to change the width of the fields in this dialog box.
The left window contains a list of all ArchiCAD tools. The right window lists the panels that appear on the selected tools Info Box. To see what the selected panel looks like, double-click its name or click the Panel Preview button. To change the order in which the Info Box panels appear, use the arrow icons To show or hide Info Box panels, click to open or close the relevant eye icon. Note that you can use a scroll-mouse to scroll through the contents of your Info Box. When you are satisfied, click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog box. To customize the location of the header on your Info Box, right-click anywhere in the Info Box to access its context menu commands. You can store your customized Info Box settings as part of a Tool Scheme in your Work Environment. 1506
Toolbar Customization Dialog Box

Open the Options > Work Environment > Toolbars dialog box to create a new toolbar, or customize any of the available ones. To create a new toolbar, use the New Toolbar command from the Toolbar Options pop-up menu. To customize a toolbar, choose one from the pop-up list at the top right of the dialog box. The list window at the left lists commands and functions in several formats. Add a command or menu to the desired toolbar by selecting it from the list window, then click the Add Selected button at the bottom, or simply drag it to the right. It is possible to place the same command or menu into more than one toolbar. To change the order of the items (including separator lines) within the toolbar, use the up/down arrows at the left of each command. For example, you might add the 3D Navigation extras menu to the predefined 3D Visualization toolbar.
If you have placed a menu into the toolbar, it is indicated by a special icon:
1507
If you click on it (or double-click the menu name), that menu opens to let you modify its contents (commands), if you want.
The Options button will accordingly change to Menu Options instead of Toolbar Options. Click the Remove button to remove a command or menu from the selected toolbar. (Removing the menu from the list of toolbar items does not delete the menu from the interface entirely.)
Toolbar Options
Using the Toolbar Options pop-up menu, you can: Rename, Delete, Duplicate, or create a New toolbar Set a view mode for the selected toolbar: for every command in the toolbar, you can show its Icon, or its Name, or both Icon and Name. You can also choose Icon and Name selectively. Note: Icon and Name Selectively means that the Icon will be shown for every command, but the name will be shown only selectively, depending on what you set in the Further Options panel.
Further Options Panel

The settings in this panel apply to selected commands individually. Show command name in case of Selective option: This checkbox is relevant only if you have chosen Icon & Name Selectively from Toolbar Options. In this case, select a command in the list for which you want to show both Icon and Name, then mark this checkbox. Any command for which you do not check this box will be displayed with its Icon only. Sticky pop-up menu: This option is available only if you have placed a menu as an item in the toolbar and then selected it. Check this box to associate the selected pop-up with the previous item in the toolbar. The effect: the sticky menu will be displayed on the toolbar as a black pop-up arrow.
1508
For example, the Tracker command on the Standard toolbar contains an associated (sticky) popup menu, represented by a black pop-up arrow, which in turn accesses Tracker-related commands.
1509
Menu Customization Dialog Box

Use the Options > Work Environment > Menus dialog box to customize the contents and arrangement of all of the menus that exist in ArchiCAD. Any command or menu can be placed into or removed from any menu; the order of the commands within any menu is entirely customizable. Exception: Context menus are not customizable. Use the splitter bar as needed to change the width of the fields in this dialog box.
Customize Menus Panel

The left side of the dialog box (Application commands and menus) lists all of ArchiCADs commands and menus. You can display this list in one of five formats: Current menu structure; All commands by theme; All commands in alphabetical order; All menus in alphabetical order; All New commands in alphabetical order. The last item in the list is a Separator bar. Note: If you are in one of the two All commands formats, you can access them (i.e. click and drag them to the right) only if you have chosen a particular menu (as opposed to the menubar) in the Build or edit the menu list on the right. It is worth examining the All menus in alphabetical order list. You will see that this list includes not only the usual menus you put in a menubar, such as File or Edit; it also includes thematic menus such as Gravity Options with their own set of commands. These menus can be placed either on the menubar, or as sub-menus of any other menu, or into a toolbar.
The right side (Build or edit this menu) shows the current set-up of the main menubar, or the menu you are currently constructing or editing. Note: The menu you are editing will be displayed only for windows of the currently active window type (either Text or Non-Text). For more information, see Window Types (Text or Non-Text). 1510
The pop-up under Build or edit this menu provides a list of menus only (no commands), together with the menu path (for example File > External Content).
Choose a menu to build or edit from this pop-up list. A menu appears in this list as many times as it is used in the interface; menus not yet inserted in your Work Environment are grouped together at the bottom of this pop-up list. Menu Options: Choose among the following menu management options for the selected menu: New menu, Rename, Delete or Duplicate menu. (The New menu will create a submenu within the selected menu.) Note: If the Menubar is selected, this control changes to Menubar Options, with New the only available command. This command will create a new menu and add it to the ArchiCAD menubar. List window: The right-hand list window displays the content of the selected menu. Remember, the menu contents can include commands (dragged in from the All commands lists at left) or menus (dragged in from the All menus list at left). A menu within a menu is indicated by an icon:
Click on it (or double-click the name) to open that menu and edit its contents.
1511
To move up one level in the menu hierarchy in the right-hand list window, click the Up one level icon:
In this right-hand list window, you can rearrange the menus in the main ArchiCAD menubar, add or remove commands or menus to or from any of the menus, using the Add selected and Remove buttons; or change their order by dragging the up-down arrows. The separator bars, an aid in grouping items inside a menu, can likewise be moved with the up/down arrows anyplace you like. (To insert a new separator bar, drag it from its location at the bottom of the left-hand list.)
Further Options Panel

Alternating menu items: This checkbox is available after you have selected a menu or command in the right-hand column. Checking this box means that the selected item (for example, New & Reset) will alternate with the item above it (New). (The item set as alternating will be indented underneath its pair.) Only one of the two alternating items will be visible at any given time in the menu. Important: For items to alternate, their shortcuts must correspond as follows: the shortcuts are the same except that one items shortcut has an additional modifier. For example: The shortcut for New is Ctrl+N; the shortcut for New & Reset is Ctrl+Alt+N. To alternate between them, press the unique modifier key (in this case, Alt).
1512
Working Units
To set working units for the current project, use the dialog box at Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.
Use the controls of this dialog box to set a project standard for such units as length measurement and angle units. Note: This dialog box allows you to set different length measurement units for editing Layout Book items (Layout Unit) and Model items (Model Unit). Note: Length measurement units for ArchiCAD dimensions are set in the Dimensions Preferences dialog box, at Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions. Model Unit: Click here to select from various standard Length Measurement Units used in the Coordinates Palette, Control Box and dialog boxes when editing Model views. Decimals/Fractions: Click this drop-down list to select the number of decimals or the size of fractions for the chosen Length Measurement Unit. Note: If you change the Working Units (for example from metric to imperial), some of the other default values such as grid spacing or default element sizes may need adjusting for meaningful, round values. Note: The Length Unit entered here does not apply to Dimensioning functions. To set Dimension units, use Options >Project Preferences > Dimensions. Layout Unit: Click here to select from various standard Length Measurements units for all editing functions associated with the Layout Book (e.g. Layout size, 2D drawing elements added to Layouts, Title size, etc.). Decimals/Fractions: Click this drop-down list to select the number of decimals or size of fractions for the chosen Length Measurement Unit. Angle Unit: Click this drop-down list to select from various standard Angle Measurement Units. Decimals/Accuracy: Click this drop-down list to select the number of decimals or degree of accuracy for the chosen Angle Measurement Unit.
1513
Note: Surveyors Unit angles are measured from the North direction (set in the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings > More Sun dialog box). Every other angle is measured counterclockwise from the horizon.) Angle & Text Size Decimals in Dialog Boxes: Click this drop-down list to set the number of decimals displayed for Text Height & Rotation Angle values in dialog text boxes. Note: Text is measured in mm if the Length Unit is metric and in points if it is feet and inches.
1514
Project Preferences Dialog Boxes

This dialog box (Options > Project Preferences) contains several screens. Navigate among them using the drop-down menu at the top, or the Previous and Next arrows.
The settings you make here are Project Preferences: specific to the Project you are working on and are saved with it. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied.
Dimensions Preferences Calculation Units and Rules Preferences Zones Preferences Construction Elements Preferences Levels and Project North Preferences
1515
Dimensions Preferences
To access this screen, go to Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions.
The available dimension options will vary depending on the unit (metric or imperial) you choose. Standard: Click this pop-up field to select from various predefined Dimensioning Standards. Note: In a Team Project, standards can only be changed by the Team Leader working with Exclusive Access. Add: If you have customized a dimension setting in this dialog box, the Standard Dimension name changes to Custom. Click Add to name this customized Standard and make it available to your project as a named Standard. Delete: Click this button to remove the selected Dimension Preference from the pop-up list above. Click any Dimension tool type (Linear, Angular, Radial, Level and Elevation Dimensions, Window/Door Dimensions, Sill Height Dimensions and Area Calculations) to edit its units.
Sample: A sample gives you feedback about the number format for the defined settings. Unit: Define the Units for each of the Dimension tools in this dialog box.
Metric Unit Display

Decimals: Define the number of Decimals you want to display for each tool.
1516
Extra Accuracy: Select one of the European methods for rounding decimal values (e.g. a superscript 5 is added to indicate fractions between .25 and .75). (See the result in the Sample field.) Hide Zero Wholes: Check this box to suppress whole zero values: Example: 0.25 meters is displayed as 25 25 meters is displayed as 25.00 Hide Zero Decimals: Check this box to hide any zeros at the end of the decimal dimension, regardless of the number of decimal places you set in the Decimals popup above. You cannot use the Hide Zero Decimals options concurrently with Hide Zero Wholes. Rounding: For area calculation, a Rounding function is available: you can round to half (0.5/0) or round to quarters (0.25/0.50/0.75). Accuracy: Click this pop-up field to select the precision if your chosen Angular Dimension Unit is degrees/minutes/seconds or surveyors unit.
Imperial Unit Display

If you choose an imperial unit, the following options can be available. Note: You cannot mix units for the same dimension type in a Project. However, you can display two types with the Secondary Dimensions command. Fractions: Click this pop-up field to define the fractions displayed for the selected Measurement Unit, if you are using a unit that includes fractional inches. Fractions in Small Type: Toggles printing of fractional inches and feet in small characters on and off in length dimensioning. Display of Zero Feet & Inches: If using Feet & fractional inches, this section has three pairs of radio buttons; if using fractional inches, there is one pair of radio buttons. For each pair, choose the option you prefer for displaying dimensions that measure either zero feet or zero inches.
Witness Line Scalability: Choose either fixed or scaled to make your witness lines keep a fixed scale, or else vary them depending on window scale. (Witness lines are the perpendicular lines between a linear dimension and the dimensioned element.) Revert All Dimension Text to Automatic Position: Check this box to revert all manually moved dimension texts to their original position. Revert All Custom Text to Measured value: Check this box to revert any manually modified dimension texts by replacing them with their actual values. Warning: Checking either of these boxes and clicking OK will overwrite manual dimension modifications across the entire project. This action is not undoable.
1517
Calculation Units and Rules Preferences

To access this screen, go to Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units and Rules. This screen allows you to set the units to use in ArchiCADs listing functions, such as Calculation and the Interactive Schedule, and to set additional rules for computing the values of listed parameters.
The settings you make here are Project Preferences: specific to the Project you are working on and are saved with it. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. If you are using the Calculation function, these settings will affect Text format lists only: When using a Graphic Template, the number formats defined in the Template will override them. Length Unit: Click this pop-up field to select from various standard Measurement Units for the Calculations of the Length Units. Decimals: Click the pop-up field to select the number of decimals for the chosen Measurement Unit. Extra Accuracy: Click the pop-up field to select one of the European methods for rounding decimal values (e.g., a superscript 5 is added to indicate fractions between .25 and .75). Use these pop-up fields to specify values for the Area Calculations in this field. Area Unit: Click the pop-up menu to the right to select from various standard Measurement Units for the Area Calculations. 1518
Decimals: Click the pop-up field to select the number of decimals for the chosen Measurement Unit. Extra Accuracy: Click the pop-up field to select one of the European methods for rounding decimal values (e.g., a superscript 5 is added to indicate fractions between .25 and .75). Use these pop-up fields to specify values for the Volume Calculations in this field. Volume Unit: Click this pop-up field to the right to select from various standard Measurement Units for the Volume Calculations. Decimals: Click the pop-up field to select the number of decimals for the chosen Measurement Unit. Extra Accuracy: Click the pop-up field to select one of the European methods for rounding decimal values (e.g., a superscript 5 is added to indicate fractions between .25 and .75). Use these pop-up fields to specify values for the Angle Calculations in this field. Angle Unit: Click this pop-up field to select from various standard Angle Measurement Units for the Angle Calculations. Accuracy: Click this pop-up field to the right to select the precision if your chosen Angle Unit is degrees/minutes/seconds. Decimals: Click the pop-up field to select the number of decimals for the chosen Measurement Unit. Note: Calculations using Graphic Templates will override these settings.
1519
Calculation Rules
Click the Calculation Rules button (in Options > Project Preferences > Calculation Units and Rules) to open this dialog box. These controls enable you to define conditions for certain listing parameters, and how these parameters should calculate walls, slabs, roofs, and beams. For example, suppose you are making a Wall List and your schedule criteria (as defined by you in Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule)) include this parameter: Conditional Surface of the Wall on the Reference Line Side
The parameter name includes Conditional, indicating that you can tie this parameter listing to conditions, using this Calculation Rules dialog box. If you want to reduce the listed wall surface by openings that are 2.5 m2 or larger, check the box shown:
1520
Your Wall List Interactive Schedule will compute wall surfaces according to this condition.
Insulation/Air Space Fill Type

Use these pop-ups to designate which skins of your composite walls and/or roofs should be recognized by ArchiCAD as insulation or air fill, for the purposes of listing these quantities separately in listing windows. You can customize the skins of Composite Structures, using the Composites Edit Selected Item Panel of the Composite Structures Dialog Box. If you consistently use a particular fill type as an insulating layer in your projects composite Walls or Roofs, check that fill type in the appropriate pop-up of the Calculation Rules dialog box. For example, if your standard insulation layer in roofs is Batt Insulation, check Batt Insulation from the Roof Insulation Fill Type pop-up of the Calculation Rules dialog box. Henceforth, if your listing criteria for roofs include Insulation Skin Thickness, ArchiCAD will list the thicknesses of the roof composite skins that are set as Batt Insulation.
1521
Zones Preferences
To access this screen, go to Options > Project Preferences > Zone Preferences. These options define the behavior of Related Constructions when creating Zone Lists. The settings you make here are Project Preferences: specific to the Project you are working on and are saved with it. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. Add Wall Recesses to Zones: These options define how to take large door/window recesses into consideration when calculating Zones. Door/Window recesses which meet the criteria defined here will be included as part of Zones when ArchiCAD calculates Zone size. Check the Door and/or Window icons if you want to consider Door and/or Window recesses in zone calculations. If deeper than: Check this box to enter a minimum depth for the recess to be considered, then enter this minimum depth into the text box. If larger than: Check this box to enter a minimum surface area for the recess to be considered, then enter this minimum area into the text box. Click AND or OR from the pop-up menu to further define the recess size (minimum depth and/or minimum area) to take into consideration. Walls & Column Subtraction: Click here to define the minimum size of walls/columns that should be subtracted when calculating the size of the zone they are in. Check the Wall and/or the Column icon, then define the minimum size of walls/columns to be subtracted from zones. 1522
(Any walls/columns smaller than this minimum limit will be included in the zone size.) Note: These options will affect only walls/columns that are set to Reduce Zone Area Only or Reduce Zone Volume in the Listing and Labeling panel of their Settings dialog box.
If larger than: Enter the minimum area of Walls/Columns whose areas should be subtracted when calculating the size of Zones containing them. Subtract: Enter how much (in percent) of the Wall/Column should be subtracted from the Zone area. (The default is 100%.) Area reduction under low ceiling: Use these controls if you want to exclude areas under low ceilings as part of a zones area. You can set one or two height limits. First checkbox: Check this box to define a height limit to take into account for calculating Zone sizes. Second checkbox: Check this box to define a second height limit to take into account for calculating Zone sizes. Subtract: Use these text boxes to define the percentage of the area underneath ceiling that should be subtracted from the zone area. You can enter up to two different subtraction percentages, one for each height limit you defined. To see how much of a zones gross area has been reduced due to this Area Reduction setting, select the zone and view the data in the Zone Area Calculation Panel.
1523
Construction Elements Preferences
To access this screen, go to Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. These options affect the behavior of different types of construction elements. The settings you make here are Project Preferences: specific to the Project you are working on and are saved with it. If another user opens the Project on his or her own computer, the same settings will be applied. Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories: Select a line type with which to display the outlines of Slabs and Meshes that appear on stories other than the Home Story. For more information, see Show On Stories. Note: This setting has no effect on the display of elements in a Trace Reference. Above Home Story: Use this pop-up palette to select a line type for Slab/Mesh elements displayed above their Home Story. Below Home Story: Use this pop-up palette to select a line type for Slab/Mesh elements displayed below their Home story. Note: These line types are only effective on Library Parts if the Use Symbol Linetypes checkbox in their Settings dialog boxes is switched off.
3D Intersection Priorities
All Columns vs. Beams: The slider defines the relationship between all Columns and Beams in the project. When Beams cross Columns, the element of lower priority will be cut in 3D, i.e., the intersection part will be removed. The element of higher priority will remain intact. This applies to volume calculations as well. Note: Column priority numbers are always even and can only be defined as a general setting, in this dialog box. Beam Priority is set for each beam separately in Beam Tool Settings (Floor Plan and Structure panel). Enhanced Connections for Walls and Beams: Enable this checkbox to improve the 3D appearance of Wall and Beam connections with other Wall or Beam elements, especially when 1524
connecting walls of different heights. Your 3D result will then correctly display how much of each wall/beam has been cut. Intersections involving complex walls/beams will always be calculated as if this function were active. Note: Activating this checkbox might result in slower 3D performance. If your projects wall and beam intersections involve simple walls/beams of equal heights, you might improve performance by leaving the box unchecked.
1525
Levels and Project North Preferences

You can define optional Reference Levels that will help you position elements. This is done at Levels and Project North Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North).
All of these settings are effective for Coordinates Palette, Info Box and all Dialog Boxes. Select a levels name and modify it as you like, then type the value you need in the Elevation field. In this example, we defined the two reference levels in addition to Project Zero: the top of the property, at 400 meters, and Sea level, at 200 meters below Project Zero.
You may find it easier to calculate levels (in this dialog box) by switching the zero value to another level than Project Zero. You can do so by simply clicking in the Relative to field next to the levels name.
Note: You cannot rename the Project Zero reference level.
1526
Note: Reference Levels are display and input aids only. Changing their value has no effect on placed elements, whose actual elevation is always calculated from Project Zero. The newly defined Reference Levels are now available in the Absolute Base Height fields of the Geometry and Positioning Panels of construction and object-type elements.
See also How to Place a Construction Element in ArchiCAD. Reference levels can also be used as reference levels for showing elevation (Z) values in the Tracker.
1527
Project North
Enter an Azimuth (compass) angle value here to orient the Project North direction in the Floor Plan window, or drag the dark compass pointer to orient the Project North Azimuth graphically. The Project North value affects the following: Some Interior Elevation Markers include text which display the Project North value. The Project North object placed in the project reflects the Project North value. When using surveyors units (Options > Project Preferences > Working Units), the North of the Coordinates Palette and the Tracker will be the same as the one set here. The Sun azimuth: If you define the sun position by defining a location with date and time (see Sun), its azimuth settings will be calculated with respect to this orientation (where East is at 0.00 degrees).
1528
Layer Settings Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to create, edit, and manage layers. For more information, see Layers. To display Layer Settings, use one of the following: Options > Element Attributes > Layer Settings Document > Layers > Layer Settings (shortcut: Ctrl+L) Click the Layer Settings icon in the Info Box of any ArchiCAD tool.
Click the relevant button of the Arrange Elements toolbar:
The left panel lists existing Layer Combinations. The right side lists all the layers defined in the project. Use the splitter bar that separates the two sides to display as much text as you need.
Double-click anywhere on this splitter bar to open/close the Layer Combinations panel (or click the black arrow at the top of the splitter bar.) Multiple selection is possible. All the commands detailed below act on selected Layers. To quickly change the layer status of several layers at once, use the shortcuts in the Quick Layers palette.
1529
Editing Layer Status

Select a Layer on the right side of the dialog box to edit it. Note: The first item on the list, the ArchiCAD Layer, cannot be deleted, hidden or locked. This layer collects all those elements that may have lost their layer definitions. Click on the icons of the selected layer to change its status. Lock/Unlock
The open or closed lock icons indicate whether a Layer has been locked to prevent its contents from accidental modification. If a Layer is locked, the elements on it cannot be edited or deleted and no new elements can be placed on it. Show/Hide
Use the open or closed eye icons to show or hide a selected layer. Elements on a hidden layer will be hidden. Note: To show all Layers while working in your project, use the Document > Layers > Show All Layers command or the relevant button of the Arrange Elements toolbar. 3D View Display
The solid model or wireframe icons indicate that the elements placed on that layer are fully visible in 3D views or with their contours only, independently of the current 3D mode set in the Image menu. This can be useful, for example, for storing the operator elements of Solid Operations on wireframe layers and target elements on solid layers. Intersection Group Number Set an intersection group number in the first edit box.
See Use Layers to Prevent Wall/Column/Beam Intersections. Layer Name Extension Add an extension to the layers name. This can act as an additional sorting control if you have many layers.
1530
Sort Layers
You can sort Layers in the list alphabetically either by Name or Extension, or sort them by status or intersection group number, by clicking any of the column headers. Use the pop-up items by the funnel icon to limit the display of layers in the list:
Show all layers: All layers in the project are shown. Layers of XREF items are listed separately at the bottom of the list. For more information, see XREFs and the Layer Structure. Hide Xref layers: If you have XREFs in your project, and if you choose this option, then the XREF layers will not appear in Layer Settings. Filter by extension: This option is available if the selected layer has an extension. Only layers having this extension will appear in Layer Settings. Select All/Deselect All: Use these buttons to select and deselect all layers, respectively. Delete: Click to remove selected layers. Deleting a layer clears all the elements on it and is not undoable. ArchiCAD displays a warning prior to actually deleting the layers. New: Click this button to create a new layer and give it a unique name.
Layer Combinations
See Layer Combinations.
1531
Print Layer List

The Print... button at the bottom right of the Layer Settings Dialog Box creates a text-format list, in a PDF file, of the layers in your project.
This is a simple list, organized by Layer Combination. Within each Layer Combination, the layers are listed in order of their Attribute numbers. (These attribute numbers are not visible in Layer Settings; they are seen in the Attribute Manager opened from Options > Attributes > Attribute Manager.)
1532
Line Types Dialog Box

Use the Options > Element Attributes > Line Types command to open this dialog box. For general information on Line-type elements, see Lines. Choose a predefined Line Type from the pop-up list at the top of the dialog box. The first one in the list is a solid line; this is not editable. The next set of lines in the list is dotted/dashed lines; these are editable. For more information, see Line Edit Selected Type Panel. The rest of the lines in the list are symbol-type lines; these are also editable. For more information, see Line Edit Selected Type Panel (Symbol).
To create a new line type: New: Click this button to create a new line type. In the resulting dialog box, choose one of the following options:
Dashed: Use this option to create a line type based on a dashed line. Symbol: Use this option to create a line type based on a customized stencil of 2D drawing elements copied from an ArchiCAD window. Duplicate: Use this option to create a new line type by duplicating the selected line type under a new name and editing its properties. 1533
Rename: Click this button to rename the currently selected line type. Delete: Click this button to remove the selected line type from the project. Note: Line elements whose type has been deleted will be named Missing and displayed as Solid Lines. The basic line types (Solid, Dashed, Dotted and Dense Dotted) cannot be deleted.
Note: Existing Lines in Team Projects can only be modified by the Team Leader.
Line Edit Selected Type Panel

In this field, you will graphically edit the first component of the new or selected dashed line. The black and white flags represent sections of the dashed line. Each black flag represents the end of a dash in the line, the length of which can be edited either by dragging the flag in a horizontal direction, or by editing its value in the Dash edit fields. The little white flags represent the gap between each dash section, and can be edited similarly. The values in the numerical input boxes are given in the respective measurement standards defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.
Line Edit Selected Type Panel (Symbol)

To create a new symbolic line type, first draw the stencil on the Floor Plan or in another window, using Lines, Arcs and Hotspots. Select all stencil components, then choose Edit > Copy. Choose Options > Element Attributes > Line Types. Click New. From the Add New Line dialog box, select the Symbol option and click OK. From the Line Types dialog box, click Paste line components under the graphic editing section.
The previously captured line component will appear in the graphic editing Window. You may edit the scale of both line component and the gap between each component, by either dragging the little flags in the window or editing the numeric values underneath. The line component will be scaled as a whole. Modifications in size are reflected in real time by the change of the values in the numerical editing boxes. Notes: Only Arcs, Lines and Hotspots may be used in the definition of symbolic lines. If the selection of components copied from the ArchiCAD window includes splines, fills, text or other elements, these will not be pasted into the Line Types dialog box. The bounding box of 1534
pasted graphics will be centered on the centerline of the Symbol line. If the Project Origin was located within the bounding box of the copied elements, it will be used for alignment. Regular Copy-Paste operations do not function in this dialog box. If you wish to change a symbolic line after the original components have been deleted from the Floor Plan, select the line to be edited within the Line types dialog box, and press the Copy line components button. Then paste these components on the Floor Plan, where you can edit them. The appearance of the lines on the screen, printer or plotter depends on the following options: Scale with plan (Model size): Use this option to ensure that the current Line type will be displayed at the same scale as the model on every output. Note: Avoid editing a scaled line type if the project scale is different than that of the line type, as it will be distorted. Scale-independent: Use this option to display, plot and print the current Line type definition at a fixed size, regardless of output scale.
1535
Fill Types Dialog Box

Use the Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types dialog box to define and/or edit fill types and patterns, and determine the category of each particular Fill (Drafting Fill, Cut Fill, and/or Cover Fill). For details on Fills and how to use them, see Fills.
Choose a predefined Fill from the pop-up list at the top of the dialog box. Either edit its properties directly, or choose one of the following commands: New: Click this button to create a new fill Type. In the appearing dialog box, choose one of the following options:
Solid: Solid fills display a foreground only. You can set any opacity value in percentage for a solid fill. Symbol: Use this option to create a fill type based on a customized stencil of 2D drawing elements copied from an ArchiCAD window. Image: Use this option to create a drafting-type fill based on an imported image.
1536
Duplicate: Use this option to create a new fill type by duplicating the selected fill type under a new name and editing its properties. Rename: Click this button to change the name of an existing Fill type. Type the new name in the subsequent dialog. Delete: Click this button to remove selected Fill types from the Fill list. Note: Existing Fills in Team Projects can only be modified by the Team Leader.
1537
Fill Availability and Screen-Only Pattern Panel

This is a panel of the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types.)
Check one or more of the Use with checkboxes to define its Fill Category, which determines how the selected Fill type can be used in the Project: See Fill Categories for more information. Drafting Fills: Check these boxes to allow using this Fill type as a drafting fill. Drafting fills are not applied to construction elements; they are drawn by hand using the Fill tool. Note: If this box is not checked, the current fill type will not be available in the Fill Settings dialog box. Cover Fills: Check this box to allow using this Fill type as a cover fill. Note: If this box is not checked, the current fill type will not be available in Slab, Roof, Mesh, Zone, Object settings dialogs and on the 3D hatching panel in Material settings dialog. Cut Fills: Check this box to allow using this Fill type as a cut fill. Note: If this box is not checked, the current fill type will not be available in the construction elements settings dialogs, or in the Composite Structures Dialog Box. Depending on the Fill Categories you set here, you will be able to hide or show the fills in your project by using the options in Model View Options Override Fill Display (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options). The Screen-only Pattern window shows the bitmap pattern of the selected Fill type; this pattern is used only to identify the fill in the fill pop-up menus, and is also used if you disable the Vectorial Hatching on-screen view option (View > On-Screen View Options); the fill will be displayed, on screen only, using this bitmapped pattern. (See also Fill Display Mode: Vectorial vs. Bitmap) To edit this screen-only pattern, click with the arrow cursor in the pattern window to turn pixels on or off. The new pattern remains associated to the selected name and vector fill.
1538
Fill Edit Vectorial Pattern Panel

This panel appears in the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types) if you are creating or editing a vectorial fill.
To change the vectorial pattern of a Fill Type, select the fill you want to modify in the pop-up list at the top of the dialog box. Edit its properties in the Edit Vectorial Pattern panel using the controls described below: Show Pattern Unit: Check this box to place a highlight over the symbol unit in the preview window. Scale window: Enter view scale in percent in this box to control the view in the vectorial hatching area. To determine the relationship between fills and project scale, use the two radio buttons: Scale with plan (Model size): Use this option to ensure that the current Fill type will be displayed at the same scale as the model on every output. Note: Avoid editing a scaled fill type if the project scale is different than that of the fill type, as it will be distorted. Scale-independent (Paper size): Use this option to display, plot and print the current Fill type definition at a fixed size, regardless of output scale. Zoom Out: Click this button to Zoom Out the view in the vectorial hatching area Zoom In: Click this button to Zoom In the view in the vectorial hatching area. Spacing: Enter values in this section for spacing the vectorial hatching pattern horizontally and vertically. Angle: Enter a value here to rotate the vectorial hatch shown in the Sample Window. Click OK when you are finished. All elements using this fill pattern will now display the modified one.
1539
Fill Appearance Panel
This panel appears in the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types) if you are creating or editing a Solid fill. Opacity: Define a solid fill by assigning an opacity value to the foreground as a percentage. View the result in the Preview window.
1540
Fill Edit Symbol Pattern Panel

This panel appears in the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types) if you are creating or editing a Symbol fill. To create a Symbol fill, first draw a symbol unit in a 2D window and copy it. Then open the Fill Types dialog box. Click Paste in the Edit Symbol Pattern Panel to paste the copied symbol into the preview window. For additional details, see Create a New Symbol Fill.
Show Pattern Unit: Check this box to place a highlight over the symbol unit in the preview window. Strokes: Use these four fields to set the vectors of rows which compose the symbol pattern. First note the Motif size of the symbol unit (shown at the bottom of this panel.) X1 and Y1: These values determine the horizontal (X1) and vertical (Y1) distance between the symbol units for the first vector of the pattern. For example, if the Motif size is 1000 mm, then an X1 value of 1500 for the vector pattern means that the symbol units are placed alongside each other with a 500 mm gap. X2 and Y2: These values determine the horizontal (X2) and vertical (Y2) distance between the symbol units for the second vector of the pattern. For example, if the Motif size is 1000 mm, then an X2 value of 750 means that the next row of symbol units is staggered back by 750 millimeters compared to the first horizontal vector (at 1500 millimeters). Angle: Enter an angle in degrees if you wish to skew the fill pattern. Scale: Enter scale factors by which to stretch the Symbol unit both horizontally and vertically. (By default, this factor is 1.0, that is, the symbol unit is not stretched.) Motif size: These fields provide feedback on the absolute size of the Symbol unit on the Floor Plan. The percentage field and the zoom buttons below the preview window refer to the image in the preview window only. The preview displays the symbol pattern at the given percentage as compared to its appearance on the Floor Plan. To determine the relationship between fills and project scale, use the two radio buttons:
1541
Note: Existing Fills of Team Projects can only be modified by the Team Leader. Scale with plan (Model size): Use this option to ensure that the current Fill type will be displayed at the same scale as the model on every output. Note: Avoid editing a scaled fill type if the project scale is different than that of the fill type, as it will be distorted. Scale-independent (Paper size): Use this option to display, plot and print the current Fill type definition at a fixed size, regardless of output scale.
1542
Fill Texture Panel

This panel appears in the Fill Types Dialog Box (Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types) if you are creating or editing an Image Fill. For more information, see Create or Edit Image Fill.
Load Image: Click this button to bring up a directory dialog box enabling you to choose and load any image file. Choose an image file from the library, or click Load Other Object to navigate to other locations. Image Name: Displays the name of the image you have loaded. Image Size: Displays the size of the image you have loaded in pixels. Horizontal and Vertical Size: Enter values for the horizontal and vertical size of the image. Keep Original Proportion: Check this box if you want to link the Horizontal and Vertical Size values so that the image is not distorted when editing its size. Angle: Enter an angle if you want to rotate the image pattern from the horizontal. Mirroring Method: Click one of these four radio buttons to control the positioning of the image units with respect to each other within the image pattern. To determine the relationship between fills and project scale, use the two radio buttons: Scale with plan (Model size): Use this option to ensure that the current Fill type will be displayed at the same scale as the model on every output. Note: Avoid editing a scaled fill type if the project scale is different than that of the fill type, as it will be distorted. Scale-independent (Paper size): Use this option to display, plot and print the current fill type definition at a fixed size, regardless of output scale. Sample: Number of texture units displayed in Preview box
1543
Composite Structures Dialog Box

Open this dialog box from Options > Element Attributes > Composites. Use these controls to edit the pattern and parameters of Composite Structures assigned to roofs, walls and slabs.
Choose a predefined Composite Structure from the pop-up list at the top of the dialog box. Either edit its properties directly, or choose one of the following commands: Duplicate: Click this button to create a new composite structure by duplicating the selected composite under a new name and editing its properties. Rename: Click this button to rename the currently selected composite structure. Delete: Click this button to remove the selected composite structure from the project.
Composites Edit Skin and Line Structure Panel

This panel lists the components (skins and contour/separator lines) of the composite structure. Its graphic representation is seen in the Preview window. If you select a component in the list, an arrow appears next to the corresponding section of the graphic. The properties of the selected line/skin are editable in the Composites Edit Selected Item panel of this dialog box. Select the name of the item (contour line, separator line or skin) you wish to edit. 1544
If you select a skin, use the pop-up at the right end of the selected line to define this skin as either Core, a Finish - or Other:
You can define multiple skins as Core, but these skins must be adjacent to each other. You can define multiple adjacent skins as Finish, but they must include one or both of the outermost skins. The Priority column gives you feedback on the intersection priority of the selected skin.
To edit this priority number, use the Skin Priority slider in the Composites Edit Selected Item panel (below). Note: Skin intersection priority has no relation to the skins core or finish status. Use the next two buttons to edit the skin structure of the composite element: Insert Skin: Click this button to insert a new skin, with a separator line on each side, at the current location of the cursor in the list. A new skin is created of the same type as the skin you selected, and is inserted above it. The rest of the skins in this composite element move down in the stack. Note: A composite structure can have up to 8 skins. Clear Skin: Click this button to delete the selected skin. Use with: Click one or more icons - Wall, Slab, and/or Roof - to indicate which of these elements should list the current Composite Structure among its structural choices. Composite Structures will appear in the Wall, Slab, and/or Roof Settings dialog box (Floor Plan & Section > Structure pop-up) for the elements you select here.
Composites Edit Selected Item

In this section, you edit the properties of the skin or line structure selected in the Edit Skin and Line Structure Panel, above. (The controls vary depending on whether you have selected a Skin or a Line.)
1545
If you have selected a line:
Use Skin Separator Line: Check this box to display this separator line in the composite element. If you check it, then choose a Line Type and Line Pen for the selected separator line. If the box is unchecked, the selected line will be hidden. If you have selected a skin:
Skin Thickness: Enter a value for the thickness of the selected skin. Skin Pattern: Choose a fill type from the pop-up. (All fill types identified as Cut Fills in the Fill Types Dialog Box are available here.) Note: Skins you assign here can be designated by you as insulation or air space for the purposes of ArchiCADs listing functions (such as Interactive Schedules and lists). To define which skins of composite walls and roofs are air space or insulation, go to Calculation Units and Rules Preferences. Cut Fill Pen and Cut Fill Background Pen: Choose pens for the fills foreground and background patterns. Use Skin End Lines: Check this box to display the end lines of the selected skin in the composite element. If you check this box, then use the Skin End Line Pen pop-up to choose the pen of the two Skin End Lines of the selected skin. Skin Priority: Assign a skin priority to the selected skin which will affect its 2D intersection appearance in the project. This control affects only composite elements used as walls, not for slabs or roofs. See also Display of Intersecting Composite Wall Skins (2D only). Component Type: Click this pop-up to define the selected skin as either Core, Finish or Other. This definition will affect the Partial Structure Display of the composite element. Fill Orientation: This option affects the appearance of the fill pattern (Composite Walls on the Floor Plan, plus composite Roofs and Slabs in Section/Elevation view): 1546
Project Origin: The fill pattern is displayed so that the pattern originates at the Project Origin. Element Origin: The fill pattern is displayed so that the pattern originates at the elements Edit Origin. As shown in the example below, the Element Origin fill follows the vector of the wall. Fit to Skin: Available only if the skins pattern is a symbol fill. This option means that the symbol will be drawn so that it fits within the limits of the Skin Thickness (defined above). Here is a composite wall whose skins have a vectorial and a symbol fill. You can adjust the orientation of these fills to make the outcome look better:
If you assign a composite structure to a curved wall, and then explode the wall (See Explode into Current View), the fills and lines of the composite structure can be selected individually. If such a selected fill from an exploded curved wall had a Fit to Skin orientation, the Radial Distortion Construction Method becomes available in the Fill Selection Settings dialog box. Use this construction method if you want to graphically adjust the vector of such a fill. See Construction Method for more details on radial distortion of exploded fills.
1547
Pens & Colors Dialog Box

Open this dialog box from: Document > Pen Sets > Pens & Colors or Options > Element Attributes > Pens & Colors
If a model view window is active, the name of the dialog box is Pens & Colors (Model Views); the pen set you choose here will be applied to the model views. If the Layout Book is active, the name of the dialog box changes to Pens & Colors (Layout Book), and the pen set chosen here is applied to the Layout Book.
Available Pen Sets Panel

Select a Pen Set for either Model Views or the Layout Book.
The Pen Sets listed here are predefined pen sets shipped with ArchiCAD. Each pen set name (e.g. Structural or Mechanical) indicates that the pen weights and colors associated with each pen in that pen set are optimized for its particular purpose (e.g. Structural plans). Rename: Click this button to give a new name to the selected pen set. 1548
Note: The Rename button will not create another copy of the selected pen set; the new name will replace the old one. Store as: If you have edited any controls of the selected pen set, the active pen set appears as Custom and the Store as button becomes active. Click it to save the Custom pen set:
- Store the pen set under a new name (enter any name into the field); or - Overwrite a selected Pen Set with your custom Pen Set Delete: Click this button to delete the selected pen set.
Selected Pen Set Editing Panel

There are 255 pens represented in the tablet. Their index numbers are indicated by their position in the tablet. The top row contains pens 1 to 20 from left to right, the row below, pens 21 to 40, and so on. There is a default color assignment for each pen, but you can edit any color for a specific pen by double-clicking its color box or clicking the Edit Color button. Note: To select continuous or discrete ranges of pens for simultaneous editing, use Shift-click and Control-click (MacOS: Cmd-click), then click Edit Color. The Edit Color dialog box appears, in which you can select your color graphically or numerically. This is a system-level control. (In case of multi-selection, the dialog box is called Edit Selected Colors.) You can edit pen weight numerically using the fields in the Pens and Colors dialog box. If you click on any color in a pen set, the Description field indicates the purpose for which the pen is optimized in this pen set. If you have edited any of the selected pens controls, the name of the pen set changes to Custom. To save these changes, you must click Store As and name the pen set with a unique name, or overwrite an existing pen set. ArchiCAD offers user-defined Pen Weights associated with each of the 255 Pen Colors. Pen Weights are measured in points or millimeters, depending on the current drawing units set in the pop-up menu next to the Pen Weight edit field. Pen Weights will be displayed accurately only if you choose True Line Weight in View > OnScreen View Options > True Line Weight. (Disabling True Line Weight here means that
1549
Line Weight will be shown as Hairlines: all lines are one pixel wide only. If you also enable Bold Cut Lines, then all Cut Lines will be 2 pixels wide.) Note: The Hairline option (achieved by disabling True Line Weight in On-Screen View Options) affects display only. For hairline output, use the Hairline checkbox in the Print or Plot dialog box. Separate pens can be assigned to line arrowheads, various dimensioning components and vectored fill pattern strokes through the corresponding Tool and attribute dialog boxes. Note: A Pen Weight of 0.00 always produces the thinnest weight possible (i.e., one pixel on the screen or a hairline on a laser printer, depending on the printers resolution).
1550
Material Settings Dialog Box

Use the Options > Element Attributes > Materials command to open this dialog box. The pop-up palette at the top of the dialog box displays the materials available in the Project. At the top of the pop-up list, you will see the name of the currently selected material, and icons indicating whether this material has a Vectorial Hatching and/or a Texture associated with it.
The Preview picture changes dynamically as you work in the Materials dialog box, so that you can see the effects of your settings. The Preview gives you an idea of what the chosen material will look when rendered, depending on the rendering engine used. Create Preview with: Choose a rendering engine from the list. For more information on rendering engines, see PhotoRendering Settings. Note: The Preview file of the current rendering engine function is not available if the Apply Data file is not properly installed or has been removed from the ArchiCAD Folder. Important: The panels which appear in Material Settings depend on which rendering engine you have chosen as the Preview engine. By default, the Disable unrelated controls checkbox is checked: only those panels and controls which apply for the selected rendering engine will appear in the dialog box. To see all controls which determine the properties of the material with different engines, uncheck this box.) Use the three buttons under the pop-up menu to Duplicate, Rename and Clear (delete) Materials.
Create a New Material

1) From the pop-up palette at the top of the Material Settings dialog box, activate a material which looks like the one you want. 2) Click the Duplicate button. 3) Assign a name in the Duplicate Material dialog box. 4) Edit the materials characteristics using the relevant controls in the panels of the Materials Settings dialog box. (The panels appearing here depend on the rendering engine you have chosen as the Preview engine, using the Create Preview with control. 5) Click OK to verify the new Materials settings.
1551
Material Exposure to Light Panel

(Options > Element Attributes > Materials) The controls in this panel will affect renderings created by the Internal Rendering Engine and the Open GL engine. Surface color: Define the materials color by double-clicking the box. This opens the Edit Color dialog box where you can select your color graphically or numerically by mixing the HSL (HueSaturation-Luminosity) or RGB (Red-Green-Blue) components. The rest of the attributes in this panel are set as a percentage of their theoretical limits. You can edit the values either numerically or with a sliding switch. Transparency attributes control how light penetrates the selected material. Use the following two controls to adjust transparency: Transmittance: The higher the value, the greater percentage of light is transmitted through the material. Glass is at the top of the scale and opaque materials are at the bottom. Attenuation controls how sharply transmittance diminishes as the objects surface becomes less perpendicular to the viewing direction. Any number in a continuous range from zero to 100 can be set. Emission is a measure of a materials fluorescence (i.e., the light emitted by its surface). Use the Attenuation control to adjust the emission intensity of the selected material. Emission intensity decreases as attenuation increases (i.e., the viewpoint is moved farther from the object). Click the Emission color control to bring up the Edit Color dialog box. Select your color graphically or numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue-Saturation-Lightness) or RGB (RedGreen-Blue) components. The Materials Reflection has three attributes: The Ambient control sets the percentage of ambient light the material is able to reflect. This determines how much a material is subject to brightening effects (as opposed to shades or highlights caused by directional light). The Diffuse control describes the surface quality of the material. Uneven or rough surfaces tend to reflect incident, directional light in a non-directional, diffuse way. Diffuse reflection carries the color of the material rather than the color of light. Shininess is the ability of a curved surface to reflect directional light from a point-like source (sun, flashlight, spots, etc.), in a more or less focused fashion. The more focused the reflection, the shinier the surface appears. Highlights are confined to a small area if this control is set close to 100, while a wider highlight area will result if the control is set to a low value. The Materials Glowing is determined by its Specular setting. The Specular setting is the opposite of Diffuse. It is a directional reflection carrying the color of the incident light rather than that of the material. An extremely smooth and saturated hard surface will produce strong specular reflections (set at close to 100%), while a soft and light material will produce hardly any (set at close to 0%).
1552
Specular Color is theoretically identical to the color of directional light, but the program lets you define it independently. Double-click the sample color here to display the system-level Edit Color subdialog box, in which you can establish your definitions. This color, mixed with the Material color and the color of the light, will determine the color of the surface where directional light is reflected.
1553
Material Vectorial Hatching Panel

(Options > Element Attributes > Materials)
On the Vectorial Hatching panel, you can choose a vectorial fill pattern and pattern color for the chosen material. Note: When assigning a 3D Vectorial Hatching in the Materials dialog box, you can access only fills defined as Cover Fills. Note: Vectorial Hatching does not affect PhotoRenderings, so the Preview window (generated by the chosen PhotoRendering engine) will not reflect the modifications you make in this panel. Use the fill pop-up palette to select a vectorial fill. Check the Element Pen radio button to display the vectorial pattern in the color assigned to the uncut line pen. Alternatively, choose any other color from the pencolor pop-up.
1554
Material Texture Panel

(Options > Element Attributes > Materials) The controls in this panel will affect PhotoRenderings created by the Internal 3D Engine and 3D views generated by the Open GL 3D engine.
Choosing and Editing a Texture

On the Texture panel, you can link a Texture to any standard or custom Material. If the selected Material already has a Texture linked to it, the textures file name and preview picture are displayed, along with the image size in pixels. To assign a Texture to a Material: Click the Search button to open the Load Image from Library dialog box and find the needed texture map.
Click OK to assign the texture and see its preview.
1555
Another way to choose a texture is to click the Previous/Next arrow buttons below the preview window. ArchiCAD will load the previous/next texture filet from the loaded libraries.
Note: Only files residing in the Active Library Set are available for selection. If you save your Project as an Archive, all associated Textures can be saved with the Plan by checking the Include Linked Textures checkbox. If a linked texture is missing from the Active Library, its name will appear in the Missing Library Items list. Click Remove Texture to de-link the Texture from the Material. In the middle of the dialog box, a number of controls allow you to define the texture display. The first two edit fields define the vertical/horizontal size of the texture as applied to 3D surfaces. For example, if the image shows two bricks, set its size to match the physical size of the bricks.
Check the Keep Original Proportion checkbox if you want to keep the proportions of the original texture file for all elements. Define the angle at which the texture is applied to elements. Use the four rotating and mirroring radio buttons to arrange the texture sequence. Note: For good results, you need textures prepared for seamless tiling. These are images that can be placed in a matrix with no apparent line at connecting edges.
1556
Activate the Random Origin checkbox to use a random starting point for applying the texture. This option is useful if there are several identical elements in the model that should differ in appearance. Use the Sample pop-up list to adjust the number of texture units displayed in the Preview box this helps you get a better idea of what the texture will look like.
Alpha Channel Effects

At the right side of the Material Settings dialog box (Texture Panel), options are provided for Alpha Channel control.
In 32-bit color images, the Alpha Channel is an extra channel (in addition to RGB components) that can be edited in image editing applications such as Adobe Photoshop. ArchiCAD allows you to take advantage of the information placed in the Alpha Channel in several ways: for masking elements in PhotoRenderings. for transparency or bump mapping. to model certain material properties of the texture. You can use all image formats handled by the QuickTime system extension. Formats that can include an Alpha Channel are: Photoshop 3.0 and later, PICT, TIFF, PNG, Truevision, TGA and the generic QuickTime image. Surface: If the alpha value is white, then you get the color of the texture, while if it is black, then the materials original color will be valid in the given pixel of the given surface. If the value is a shade of gray, then the two colors will be mixed and the result will appear in the PhotoRendering. Ambient: The same as above, but applied to the Ambient color instead of the Surface color. Specular: Controls to what extent the Specular effect is taken into account. If the alpha value is white, the Specular effect is entirely taken into account at the given pixel. If the alpha value is black, the Specular effect is entirely disregarded at the given pixel. Here again, intermediate values are allowed. Diffuse: Controls the effect of diffuse light the same way as with Specular light. Bump Mapping: Controls the surface normal at the given pixel, allowing for a convex effect on the surface. White values represent bumps, while black values represent holes. Transparency: If the value is white, then the color of the texture is visible; if it is black, the texture will be perfectly transparent at the given pixel. Intermediate values are allowed.
1557
LightWorks Shader Settings

Use this Shader Settings panel in Material Settings (Options > Element Attributes > Materials) to customize materials with LightWorks shaders. LightWorks uses shaders to define the properties of surfaces in photorenderings. To see this panel, you must select the LightWorks Rendering Engine in the Create Preview with drop-down list. Checking the Disable unrelated controls checkbox will make invisible all panels of the Dialog that are not related to the currently selected Rendering Engine.
The Load Settings from Archives button leads you to another Dialog where you can load shaders.
Select from the popup list the Shader archive you want to browse. Then you will have a list of shaders organized in a folder structure. Select the shader you wish to use and click OK. In the upper right corner of the dialog box, a preview window displays the selected shader.
1558
The Class buttons will have their values filled up by those of the loaded shader and the preview will be updated. By clicking on any of the Class buttons, you can start modifying the various parameters belonging to that group of parameters of the shader. The Colour button gives you access to shaders defining the colour of the Material. You can choose from among dozens of shaders if you wish to modify it. There are simpler shaders (like Plain) that have few parameters and others having many parameters. The Plain Color shader has one parameter defining the color of the shader applied to the Material. In the Set Parameters area are listed all parameters belonging to the currently selected shader. Checking the Show Essential Only checkbox will list only those parameters that are necessary for the correct definition of the shader. When it is unchecked, you have access and are free to modify any and all parameters of the shader. The Reflectance button lets you choose shaders that will help you define or modify shaders that specify how the surface of the Material reflects light. Click the Reflectance button and its shaders in the list next to it will become available for viewing or editing. The method is the same for each button: select the button, select the shader from the list next to it, then modify its parameters appearing in the list on the right side of the Dialog panel. The Transparency button gives you access to shaders that define how much and in what pattern the Material will let light go through its surface. The Displacement button contains shaders that can help define a bumpy appearance for the surface of the Material. The Texture Space button lets you access shaders that define a 2D rectangular area having a certain unit size and repeating itself in a tiled way over the surface. When you are using certain shaders (most wrapped shaders), all the effects of those shaders on the surface will be applied by taking settings in the Texture Space area into consideration. With these shaders you can scale, rotate, mirror and offset the 2D texture space. The Pipeline buttons options include GRAPHISOFT Emission: this lets you set the properties of the materials fluorescence (i.e., the light emitted by its surface). Use the Attenuation control to adjust the emission intensity of the selected material. Emission intensity decreases as attenuation increases (i.e., the viewpoint is moved farther from the object). Click the Colour parameter to bring up a color-picker dialog box. Select your color graphically or numerically by mixing the HSL (Hue-Saturation-Lightness) or RGB (RedGreen-Blue) components. When you have set all materials to your liking, you need to set the LightWorks Rendering Engine parameters in the PhotoRendering Settings Dialog. The Dialog has two panels specifically related to the LightWorks Rendering Engine.
Defining LightWorks Shaders

To define shaders and their parameters for the chosen material: 1) Click the name of the class to activate the list of associated shaders. (Such as Reflectance, in the image below.) 2) Choose a Shader from the list. (Such as Conductor, in the image below.)
1559
Note: Some shaders, such as GS Masked Image in the Color class, and GS Replicate in the Texture Space class, replicate the materials Internal Engine settings in this category. 3) Edit its parameters in the right side of the panel: click on a parameter (such as Mirror Factor in the image below), then edit its settings at the bottom of the panel. (Depending on the parameter, you will use color tables, sliders, text fields or radio buttons.)
Note: To limit the number of editable parameters for the shaders, check the Show Essential Only checkbox.
Using LightWorks Shader Archives

To use LightWorks shaders for your materials (instead of adjusting shader parameters individually): 1) Click the Load Settings from Archives button in Material Settings to open the Load Settings dialog box. 2) Browse the archive folders to find the shader that best suits your needs. A small preview picture gives you an idea of shader qualities. 3) Click OK to load the settings into the Materials Settings dialog box 4) Edit the shader further if desired. Note: The files in the archives cannot be edited, but you can edit their settings once you have applied them to a material in ArchiCADs Material Settings dialog box.
Using Internal Engines Material Settings with LightWorks

By default, ArchiCAD materials are defined according to settings of the Internal Rendering Engine. When you select a material to edit in the LightWorks Shader Settings, its initial shader parameters are set to coincide, as much as possible, with the materials default appearance. Once you begin editing the shaders, you may change the material settings so much that its appearance when rendered with LightWorks is very different from its original appearance as rendered with the Internal Engine.
1560
To revert the LightWorks material to its default appearance (i.e. to correspond with the Internal Rendering Engine appearance), press the Match with Internal Engine button. Note: This process of translating settings between the Internal Rendering Engine and LightWorks is not exact, since LightWorks shaders encompass many more and different parameters than those used by the Internal Engine.
1561
Zone Categories Dialog Box

Use the Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories command to open this dialog box.
Use the pop-up at top to choose a zone category from list of predefined zone categories. Either edit its properties directly, or choose one of the following commands: New: Click this button to create a new zone category by creating a copy of the selected zone category under a new name and editing its properties. Rename: Click this button to rename the currently selected zone category. Delete: Click this button to remove the selected zone category from the project.
Zone Edit Selected Category Panel

Zone Stamp pop-up: Choose a Zone Stamp for use with this zone category. Zone Stamps are GDL objects. From the pop-up, choose one of the zone stamps from your loaded library, or load another zone stamp from another source. Color: Choose a color for the selected Zone Category. By default, all zones belonging to this category will be displayed in this category color in the project. Parameter Default Values: The parameters in this list apply by default to the Zone Stamp of the selected Zone Category. You can change these default values if needed; newly placed zones in this category will use the zone stamp parameters set here. (You can edit these parameters for each zone stamp individually in the Zone Settings dialog box.) A preview window helps you visualize the zone stamp parameters.
1562
Profile Manager Dialog Box

Use the Design > Complex Profiles > Profile Manager command to open the Profile Manager dialog box. For general information on this feature, see Creating or Editing a Complex Profile Element.
Manage Profiles Panel
Choose profile: Choose a profile from the pop-up list if you wish to duplicate, edit or rename an existing profile. Delete: Click this button to remove the selected profile from the project. Rename: Click this button to rename the currently selected profile. Duplicate: Click this button to create a new profile by duplicating the selected profile under a new name and editing its properties. New: Click this button to create a new profile. Edit chosen profile: Click this button to open the selected profile in the Profile Editor window. Capture elements profile: If a Wall/Column/Beam element is selected in the active model window, click this button to capture the element in the Profile Editor window as a new profile element. Apply to Selection: If a Wall/Column/Beam element is selected in the active model window, click this button to apply the Profile that is currently chosen or under construction in the Profile Manager dialog box to the selected element.
1563
Design Layers Panel

Design Layers contains layer settings that apply to the Profile Editor window only. (This panel is active only if the Profile Editor is open.)
Construction: Active if you are using the fill tool to create a profile element. Click the eye icon to show/hide the fill elements in this window. Drafting: Active if you are using any other drafting tool. These elements will not be part of the saved profile element. Click the eye icon to show/hide the drafting elements in this window. Horizontal/Vertical Stretch: Check the respective boxes if you wish the final profile element to be stretchable in the horizontal and/or vertical directions. Click the eye icon to show/hide the stretch handle(s) in this window. Use the regular editing techniques in this window to move the stretch handles to the right position on the profile element. Opening Reference: Check this box if you want to set a reference line for the placement of openings in the placed profile element. Click the eye icon to show/hide the Opening Reference line in the Profile Editor window. Edit this reference line in the Profile Editor window to ensure the right position for wall openings.
Components - Default/Selected Panel

Use these controls to set the attributes of each profile component (i.e., the solid body represented by each fill drawn in the Profile Editor window) individually. (This panel is active only if the Profile Editor is open.)
Select a component (represented by a fill) in the Profile Editor window. Edit any of the following parameters for this component: Intersection priority: Use the slider to set a 2D intersection priority for the selected component of the profile element. 1564
Note: This setting will be applied to the placed profile element only if you check Enable Skin Priorities in the Structure/Cut Surfaces/Outlines part of the elements Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). Component Type: Click this pop-up to define the selected component as either Core, Finish or Other. This definition will affect the Partial Structure Display of the complex element. Orientation: This option affects the appearance of the fill pattern: Project Origin: The fill pattern is displayed so that the pattern originates at the Project Origin. Element Origin: The fill pattern is displayed so that the pattern originates at the elements Edit Origin. Fit to Skin: Available only if the skins pattern is a symbol fill. This option means that the symbol will be drawn to scale within the fill polygon. (The program finds the longest edge of the fill boundary and the nearest parallel edge to it, and considers the distance of the two as the thickness, scaling the fill to this thickness.) Side materials: Use the Materials pop-up to select a material for the 3D display of the sides of the profile element. Note: This material will be applied to all sides of the selected component (Uniform). To apply a different material to one or more selected sides of this component, select a fill in the Profile Editor window and execute the pet palette command Set parameters for profile edge, then edit the controls in the appearing Custom Edge Settings dialog box. These custom edge settings will be applied to the edge from which you opened the Pet Palette (Selected edge only), or to all edges. If needed, you can apply a different custom edge material/contour line to each individual edge.
Ending Contours: Choose a line type and pen color for the uncut line representing the contour of its facing ends (Ending Contours). Note: The facing end of the Complex Profile itself, while it may consist of multiple components that are distinguishable in Section and Floor Plan, has a single material in 3D view: the material assigned in the Model panel of its element Settings dialog box.
1565
Profile - Uniform Contours Panel

This section of the dialog box lets you apply uniform line types and pen colors to cut lines and to all separator lines at once, for display in Section and Floor Plan. (This panel is active only if the Profile Editor is open.)
Note: Settings defined here will be applied to the placed profile element only if you check Apply Structures Settings in the Structure/Cut Surfaces/Outlines part of the elements Settings dialog box (Floor Plan and Section Panel). Cut lines: Choose a uniform line type and pen color for all of the cut lines (outer lines) of the profile element. Separators: Choose a uniform line type and pen color for all of the separator lines (inner lines) of the profile element. Override: Click this button to apply the Cut Lines and Separator settings to the respective lines in the Profile Editor window. These uniform settings will override all individual line settings.
1566
Add-On Manager
Use the Options > Add-On Manager command to open the Add-On Manager dialog box. For more information on this topic, see Add-Ons and Goodies. Click the header fields to sort data by that column. Use the splitter bars to edit column width.
Available Add-Ons Panel
Here you can load or unload Add-Ons by switching the checkboxes on and off, then check OK to close the dialog box and execute the changes. If you see a checkmark in front of the name of an Add-On without a box, this means that the AddOn must always be loaded with ArchiCAD. The Type column refers to the type of the Add-On, which can be Tool or Imaging. Tool type add-ons which are loaded by default appear as menu commands in the Standard Work Environment profile. You can customize their location like any other menu command. Other Tool-type add-ons, after being loaded manually, will be placed in a menu according to the location of that menus Add-On Anchor Point. Imaging type add-ons add rendering or animation options to View menu items. The icons in the Mode column show whether the Add-On was loaded individually or as part of an Add-On folder set to be available automatically at each startup.
Add-On Info Panel

The Add-On Info panel contains information on the interface location and operation of the AddOn selected in the Available Add-Ons panel.
1567
Edit List of Available Add-Ons Panel

In the Edit List of Available Add-Ons panel, you can search for more Add-Ons, remove items from the list and redefine the location of the dedicated Add-On folder.
The Use designated add-ons folder checkbox will activate the folder enabled by default (the Add-Ons folder in your ArchiCAD Folder) or another dedicated folder that you can choose with the Change button by browsing your computer. If you are using such a designated folder, the add-ons made available from this folder cannot be removed from the list of available add-ons. However, they can be unloaded manually (by unchecking its name in the Load column) for the current ArchiCAD session. In this case, the rest of the add-ons which are still loaded from this folder will appear as individual add-ons in the Mode column. If you load an Add-On that has the same name and ID as a loaded one, it will replace the previous one. All settings of the Add-On Manager will be preserved when you quit and restart the program, even if you choose New and Reset. If you open a Project that refers to currently unloaded Add-Ons, an alert will appear, listing the missing Add-Ons. Some of the Add-Ons cannot be loaded until you restart the program, as they contain references to the project database. If loading such Add-Ons with the Add-On Manager, an alert will appear. If current modifications do not concern these Add-Ons, you can ignore the alert or choose to save the recent changes and reload the Project with the required loaded Add-Ons.
1568
Story Settings Dialog Box

To open this dialog box, do one of the following: Use the Design > Story Settings command Choose Story Settings from the context menu of a selected Story, or the Stories folder, in the Navigator Palette.
Use the splitter bars in the header to edit column width. In the upper section of the dialog box, a scrollable list shows the current stories in your design. When starting a new project, you may have several stories already created by default. Every project must contain at least one story. To activate a story, select it in the list and click OK. The Floor Plan will show this selected story. Note: You can also navigate among stories using the Navigators Project or View Map, or the story-related commands in the Mini-Navigator toolbar.
Insert Above/Insert Below: Click either button to create a new story above or below the story currently selected in the list. When the name of a Story is selected, you can edit its Name, Elevation (to Project Zero), its Height to the Story above, and whether to show the Story Level line on sections. The Number field is not editable manually. Changes to story height and elevation are interpreted differently: If you modify the height of a story, this will affect the elevation of all stories above (if the story number is positive) or below (if the story number is negative). In practical terms, you
1569
stretch or shrink the whole building by making the height of a story larger or smaller. The height of all other stories remain as they were. If you modify the elevation of a story, this will affect the heights of the stories immediately above and below. In practical terms, you move the level of a single story while keeping the rest of the building static. The elevation of all other stories remain as they were. Show Level on Sections (icon at far right in Story Settings): Check this box to display Level Lines of this Story in Section view.
For more information, see Show/Hide Story Level Lines in Section/Elevation/IE. Delete Story: Click this button to delete the selected story. Warning: Deleting a Story also clears all the elements that are placed on it.
1570
Edit Elements by Stories Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to cut, copy, paste, and/or delete all elements of a given type on a story, or from one story to another. To open this dialog box, do one of the following: Use the Design > Edit Elements by Stories command Choose Edit Elements by Stories from the context menu of selected Stories in the Navigator Palette. If this command is not available, use the Work Environment Menu Customization Dialog Box to add it to any menu.
Use the splitter bars in the header to edit column width. In the upper section of the dialog box, a scrollable list shows the current stories in your design. When starting a new project, you may have several stories already created by default. Every project must contain at least one story. Select Story: Select a Story whose elements you wish to edit. (If you click OK after selecting a story, this will close the dialog box and activate the selected story on the Floor Plan.) Select Actions: In the scrollable list of Element types, select the element type(s) you wish to edit on the selected story by checking the box following the name of the tool that created this type of element. To select all elements, check the All Types box. Note: Not all tools are included in this list, because not every element type can be copied from one story to another. For example, Section and Elevation lines cannot be copied among stories, and these tools are not included in the list.
1571
Clicking the Cut All button removes all the selected elements from the story that is selected in the list (and all construction elements whose Home Story is the one selected in the list, even if these elements were created on another story). Clicking the Copy All button creates copies of the selected elements of the story that is selected in the list (and all construction elements whose Home Story is the one selected in the list, even if these elements were created on another story). Clicking the Paste Selected Types button pastes all the cut or copied elements on the story that is selected in the list (do not forget to switch stories before this operation). If there are already some elements on the target story and you wish to remove them first, select that story, check the appropriate element type box and click the Clear All button, then paste the new ones. The Event List next to this area shows you the story editing steps you have taken.
These operations are not actually performed until you confirm them and exit the dialog box. When you click OK, a final prompt will ask you to confirm that you want to proceed with the operation.
1572
Create New Story Dialog Box

This command is available from the context menu if you have selected a Story in the Navigators Project Map.
For more information, see Navigator Project Map. Story Name: Type a name for the new story here. Click an option for where the new story should be placed in the project structure: Insert Above: The story will be inserted above the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). Insert Below: The story will be inserted below the currently selected story (in Story Settings or the Navigator). The new story appears above or below the selected story. The numbering is automatically updated.
1573
Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box

Use Document > Floor Plan Cut Plane to open the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings dialog box.
Cut Plane height to Current Story

Enter the height at which elements will be cut for display on the Floor Plan. The other options in this dialog box - Relative Floor Plan Range and Absolute Display Limit will be applied only to construction elements whose Show Projection setting (in the Settings dialog box) is set to use one of these two definitions. These definitions set a limit on how much of the element is to be displayed, relative to the current story.
Relative Floor Plan Range

Use these controls to define the Relative Floor Plan Range for construction elements that use this definition. Show up to: Enter the number of stories you want to display the element above the current story. Offset by: Optionally, enter a positive or negative elevation value by which to offset the Show up to display limit. Story pop-up: Choose either Current Story or, if you want to display the element on additional stories above the current one, Story(s) above. Show down to: Enter the number of stories you want to display the element below the current story. Offset by: Optionally, enter a positive or negative elevation value by which to offset the Show down to display limit. Story pop-up: Choose either Current Story or, if you want to display the element on additional stories below the current one, Story(s) below.
Absolute Display Limit

Use these controls to define the Absolute (lower) Display Limit for construction elements that use this definition. This limit is in effect regardless of the currently active story. Show down to: Enter the fixed lower limit to which elements will be projected. (By default, this is Project Zero.) 1574
Offset by: Optionally, enter a positive or negative height value by which to offset the Show down to absolute display limit.
1575
Copy Dialog Box

This dialog box appears if you have copied a Marquee area from the 3D window (using the 2D Marquee option of the Marquee tool), when using the Internal 3D Engine. For details, see Copy/Paste Marquee Area from Project Window.
Copy/Save as:
Painting Screenshot will copy the contents of the 3D Window as a unified picture (Figure). When choosing Drawing, the resulting image will consist of the parts described in the dialog box. The size of the picture obtained will be equal to the size of the image in the 3D Window. This is important when pasting the copied parts into another application such as SuperPaint or Photoshop. The Scaled drawing option creates an image that keeps the sizes of the Floor Plan. If you paste a Side view of the Project on the Floor Plan using the Scaled drawing option, the sizes will match the sizes of the plan. With the Elements to Copy pop-up menus you can define which elements of the 3D View you want to copy to the Clipboard. The Shadows pop-ups are available only if the Vectorial Sun Shadows option is set to On in 3D Window Settings (View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings.) Copying the shadows of top views can be useful if you want to place accurate, measurable shadows on the Floor Plan. Shadows and 3D hatching of orthogonal views add a further touch of realism to elevation drawings. The 3D Hatching pop-ups are available only if the Vectorial 3D Hatching option is set to On in 3D Window Settings (View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings), and if the 3D view contains at least one element that has 3D hatching applied. In the lower part of the dialog box you can define whether to save/copy invisible Polygons (for example, the polygon elements of a window behind a wall) or only visible ones. You also have the option of copying the polygons with or without frames.
1576
You will see the Remove Redundant Lines checkbox if you want to copy the selection in Drawing or Scaled drawing mode from a wireframe or a hidden line picture. If you check this checkbox, lines exactly on top of each other will be omitted in the copied file. Hint: If you want to copy the elements of the 3D Window, e.g., for an elevation view, it is recommended to use the Calculate split polygons and Frameless options.
1577
Grids & Background Dialog Box

Use the View > Grid Options > Grids & Background command to open this dialog box. For general information on this feature, see Grid System.
Construction Grid/Nudge
You can set separate Spacing and Steps values for the Main Grid and the Aux. (Auxiliary) Grid.
Note: All the values in this dialog box are based on the current measurement units defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. Spacing: Enter values to define the horizontal and vertical distances between grid lines. These Spacing values will also define the larger Nudge distance: use the Nudge shortcut to move elements by a slight predefined factor. (use Alt + Shift + an arrow key to move the element left, right, up or down). See Nudging Elements. Steps: Enter values to define the number of times to display the Main grid line before displaying the Auxiliary grid line, in both the horizontal and vertical directions. If the Steps value for any of these grid lines is 0, those lines will not be displayed. In the example above, you will display one main grid line (spacing 2000), followed by two Auxiliary grid lines (spacing 1000); then the pattern repeats. The sample window on the right displays a preview of the Construction grid (both the Main grid lines and Auxiliary grid lines). Use the percentage and Zoom In/Zoom Out controls (below the preview window) for zooming in the preview window. Note: The grid is automatically hidden if it would be too dense on the screen, that is, if the smallest distance between two adjacent grid lines would be smaller than 3 pixels.
Rotated Grid
Local Origin: Specify X and Y values to specify a local origin that is different from the Project Origin. Rotation Angle: Enter a Rotation Angle to define the Rotated Grid.
1578
To enable the Rotated Grid, click the Rotated Grid button at the bottom of the Grids & Background dialog box. (The same command appears in the Coordinate Palette and in View > Grid Options.)
Snap Grid
Spacing: Enter a value to define the intervals (horizontal and vertical directions) to which the cursor will snap when Snap Grid is activated. To enable the Grid Snap function, click one of the Snap Grid buttons at the bottom of the Grids & Background dialog box: you can snap to either the construction grid or to the snap grid. (The same commands appears in the Coordinate palette, and can also be toggled on and off with View > Grid Snap.) These Spacing values will also define the smaller Nudge distance: use the Nudge shortcut to move elements by a slight predefined factor. (use Shift + an arrow key to move the element left, right, up or down). See Nudging Elements.
Background
Background: This field displays the color of the window background. Double-click the field to open the Set Color (on MacOS: Color) dialog box to select a different color. Grid Lines: Double-click the field to open the Set Color (on MacOS: Color) dialog box to select a different color for the Grid Lines. Note: The color you select here will also be used for the dimmed Project Origin when it is temporarily displaced.
Grid Display
Click the appropriate icon at the bottom of this dialog box to switch Grid Display on or off.
1579
Linework Consolidation Settings

To access this dialog box, you must first select at least two line-type elements. Use Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation... command. For general information on this feature, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. The first time you execute this command, you will bring up the Linetype Consolidation Wizard. The wizard takes you through the Consolidation options one by one. Note that each line consolidation option builds on the previous one; the program will execute the consolidation in the order in which they appear in the Wizard. On the last screen of the Wizard, check Display simple Linework Consolidation Settings next time. This way, the next time you use the Edit > Reshape > Linework Consolidation command you will access the simplified Settings dialog box. Convert Polylines into Drawing Primitives: Polylines will be exploded into multiple single lines. Delete Duplicates: Duplicate lines are those which have identical attributes and positions. One line will remain, the rest will be deleted. Merge Connecting Lines: Co-linear line segments which are connected and which have identical line types will be merged into a single line. Merge Overlapping Lines: Lines which partially overlap and which have identical line types will be merged into a single line. Merge Settings: If you have selected either or both of the two Merge options (Merge Connecting Lines/Merge Overlapping Lines), the Merge Settings button is activated. Click to access Linework Merge Settings to define the attributes of the lines which result from the merge process.
Linework Merge Settings
Check any or all of the following attributes: Layer Pen Category Checking an attribute here means that the program will not take these attributes into account when merging connecting or overlapping lines. 1580
For example, if you check Pen, then the program will merge overlapping or connecting lines even if the lines do not use the same Pen (e.g. one line is blue and the other is red). For each checked attribute in this dialog box, the Layer/Pen/Category controls are activated, so that you can assign a layer/pen/category for the lines which result from the merge process. For example, after checking Pen, you must decide whether the new line, merged from the original red and blue lines, should henceforth be red, blue, or any other color. Force Solid Lines: This option is useful if several lines overlap each other, and one of them is a solid line which completely overlaps the other line(s). Checking this box will delete the other line(s), with the single solid line remaining in place. Adjust Overlapping Lines: This option will apply if two or more lines of different line types partially overlap each other. If you check this box, only the topmost line (as defined in the display order) will remain in place of the overlapping part. Setup Wizard: Click this button to set Linework Consolidation options using the step-by-step Wizard, rather than the current Linework Settings dialog box.
1581
Fill Consolidation Settings

To access this dialog box, you must first select at least two fill-type elements. Use the Edit > Reshape > Fill Consolidation command.
For general information on this feature, see Consolidate Lines and Fills in Drawing Windows. Trim Overlapping Fills: Any selected fills that partially or entirely overlap each other will be trimmed so that only the top fill remains; any other fill (or part of a fill) that is covered up beneath the top fill will be deleted. Note on Overlapping Fills with Transparent backgrounds: If the top-level fill has a transparent background, any solid-background fill beneath it will remain intact, because it will be visible. Exception: If there are multiple transparent fills atop each other, only the top-level fill will remain in full; any fills or parts of fills underneath, if they have transparent backgrounds and are covered by the top-level fill, will be deleted. Convert fill outlines into drawing primitives: Any fill contours will be exploded into simple line segments/arcs. Merge identical adjoining fills: Any adjoining fills (regardless of display order) which have identical fill patterns/colors will be merged into one. Note: In Merge Identical Adjoining Fills, identical means that fills must have identical fill patterns, identical foreground/background colors, and identical orientations. Fills that have different pattern orientations (project origin/fill origin/distorted) will not be merged. The resulting fill will carry the ID of the largest of the original fills. Outlines of Merged Fills: If you checked Merge identical adjoining fills, three different options are activated. Don't merge any fills that have outlines: Such fills are not merged at all. Merge identical fills if they have identical outlines: Only those fills will be merged which also have identical outlines. Merge identical fills regardless of their outlines: All identical fills are merged, whether they have outlines or not, and whether the outlines are the same or not. If you check this
1582
option, additional controls are activated to let you define the line type and pen of the outlines that will result after consolidation. Note: If you checked Convert Fill Outlines into Drawing Primitives, these options are not available, since the fill outlines will no longer exist after the consolidation process. Fills that have different pattern orientations (project origin/fill origin/distorted) will not be merged. Merge Settings: If you have selected Merge identical adjoining fills, the Merge Settings button is activated. Click to access Fill Merge Settings to define the attributes of the lines which result from the merge process.
Check either or both of these attributes: Layer Category Checking an attribute here means that the program will not take these attributes into account when merging adjoining fills. For example, if you check Category, then the program will merge adjoining fills even if the fills are not assigned to the same Fill Category (e.g. one fill is a Drafting fill, the other is a Cover fill. For each checked attribute in this dialog box, the Layer/Category controls are activated, so that you can assign a layer/category for the fills which result from the merge process. For example, after checking Category, you must decide whether the new fill, merged from the original Drafting and Cover fills, should henceforth be a Cover fill, a Drafting fill or a Cut fill.
Fill Categories
1583
Model View Options Combinations Panel

For general information, see Model View Options Combinations. (Document > Set Model View > Model View Options) A drop-down list contains six pre-set Model View Options Combinations. You can apply any of these combinations, or customize and save them under a new name. To apply an existing Model View Options Combination, select it in the list and click OK to close the dialog box. Alternatively, select a view in the Navigator and assign a different Model View Options Combination by using the pop-up list in the Properties section (where available), or in the selected views View Settings dialog box. To assign a Model View Options Combination to the active window, use the Quick Options palette or the menu command. Store As: Click this button to open the Store Combination dialog box and store a customized Model View Options Combination by assigning it a name. Rename: Click this button to open the Rename Combination dialog box and assign a new name to the selected Model View Options Combination. Delete: Click this button to delete the selected Model View Options Combination. This operation is not undoable. Export: Click this button to export the selected Model View Options Combination as an .xml file to the desired location. Import: Click this button to open a file directory where you can browse for accessible .xml files to import as Model View Options Combinations. Press OK to close the dialog box and apply the current settings. Press Cancel to return Model View settings to their original state.
1584
Model View Options for Construction Elements

To access this panel, go to Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. For general information, see Model View Options. Use the controls to determine the model view options for some Construction Elements (Beams, Doors, Windows, Columns and Mark-Up items) in your project. A preview window next to each group of controls helps you envision the result. Note: These options are independent of On-Screen View Options. Show Beam As: Choose an option for displaying Beams on the plan. Entire Beam Reference Line Contour Line Show Column Symbol: Check this box to display the symbol chosen in Column Settings (Floor Plan and Section panel > Floor Plan Symbol) for each column in your model. For more information, see Column Floor Plan and Section Panel. Curtain Wall Options: Choose one of the two preferences for displaying Curtain Walls. These will affect the display of Curtain Walls in the 3D and 3D Document windows only: Full: Panels and Frames are displayed in the Curtain Wall. Schematic: Only the Scheme (Gridlines and Boundary) are displayed. Show Mark-Up Items: Check this box to display Project Mark-Up items in your project. Door Options: Choose a global option for displaying the doors in your project. Show on Plans: The Door will be displayed with the appropriate symbol on the Floor Plan and in Section-type windows. with Markers: Check this box to display doors with Markers (if assigned in the Door Settings dialog box.) Show Opening Only: The place of the doors (but not the doors themselves) will be indicated by an openings in the walls. with Contours: The wall openings will include the wall contours. Hide on Floor Plan: No placed doors or door openings will be shown on the floor plan. (The door openings only will be shown in Section-type views.)) Window Options: Choose a global option for displaying the windows in your project. Show on Plans: The Window will be displayed with the appropriate symbol on the Floor Plan and in Section-type windows. with Markers: Check this box to display windows with Markers (if assigned in the Window Settings dialog box.) Show Opening Only: The place of the windows (but not the windows themselves) will be indicated by an openings in the walls. with Contours: The wall openings will include the wall contours. Hide on Floor Plan: No placed windows or window openings will be shown on the floor plan. (The window openings only will be shown in Section-type views.)
1585
Model View Options Override Fill Display

To access this panel, go to Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. For general information, see Model View Options. This panel is divided into five parts, each controlling one aspect of 2D fill display throughout the project: Fill background color Cut Fills Cover Fills Drafting Fills Zone Fills Override Fill Background Color: Check this box to override element-level fill background definitions. Choose one of the two fill background options to control the display of the backgrounds of all fills in the project. Note that your choices here will override any other Background preference you set for fills in the rest of this panel of the dialog box. Transparent background: This option will give all fills in the project a transparent background, regardless of the elements individual settings. (Foregrounds only will be displayed.) Window Background Color: This option will give all fills in the project a background identical to the background color of the ArchiCAD window. Note: Fills defined (in Fill Settings) with Transparent or Window Background are not affected by this override option. Override Cut Fills: Check this box to override element-level cut fill definitions. Choose one of these two options to define the display of all cut fills in the project. No Fill: Cut fills will not be displayed, except for their contour lines. Solid Foreground: Each cut fill will be shown in a single solid color, the one set for its cut fill pen in its element settings. Show Skin Separator Lines: Check this box to display separator lines of composite elements. Override Drafting Fills: Check this box to override element-level drafting fill definitions. Choose one of these two options to define the display of drafting fills: No Fill: Drafting fills will not be displayed, except for their contour lines. Solid Foreground: Each drafting fill will be shown in a single solid color, the one set as its foreground color in Fill Settings. Override Cover Fills: Check this box to override element-level cover fill definitions. Note: This option does not apply to Zone cover fills! To override Zone fill definitions, use the Override Zone fills checkbox. Choose one of the three options to define the display of cover fills: No Fill: Cover fills will not be displayed, except for their contour lines. Solid Foreground: Each cover fill will be shown in a single solid color, the one set for its cover fill pen in its element settings. 1586
Solid Background: Each cover fill will be shown in a single solid color, the one set as its cover fill background pen in its elements settings. Note: Override Fill Background Color options will take precedence over this choice.
Override Zone Fills: Check this box to override the zone cover fills defined in Zone Settings (if any). Click the pop-up to choose an option to define the display of all zones in the project. Category Background: Click this option to display zone fill backgrounds using the colors assigned to their categories (in Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories). The foreground of the zone fill, if any, will also be displayed. Note: Override Fill Background Color options will take precedence over this choice. No Fill: Zone fills will not be displayed, except for their contours. Hide Background: The background of Zone fills will not be displayed; the foreground pattern (if any) is shown. Solid Foreground: Zones are displayed in a solid color: the color of the foreground fill pattern. Solid Category: Zones are displayed in a solid color: its category color as assigned in Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories. No foreground pattern is shown. Solid Background: Zones are displayed in a solid color: the color of the background fill pattern. No foreground pattern is shown. Note: Override Fill Background Color options will take precedence over this choice. Hide Pattern: Zone cover fills are displayed in a solid color: the cover fill background. If no zone cover fill has been applied, then the zone will be displayed with its solid category color. Hide Zone Stamp: Check this box to if you do not wish to display Zone Stamps.
1587
Model View Options for GDL Objects

To access this panel, go to Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. This panel and its contents depend on the libraries you have loaded. (You may have multiple panels, one for each loaded library in your project.) Library objects located in that specific library will be globally displayed according to the Model View Options set here. Options will be applied only to objects whose GDL script is programmed to allow for this. In the INT version of ArchiCAD 13, with the MEP Add-on library also installed, the panels look like this:
Show Minimal Space for Furnishing

Check this box to show the objects minimal space on the Floor Plan by displaying a contour and fill corresponding to the minimal space parameter. Choose options for the contours line type and pen, and for the fill type/pen/background.
Lamps and HVAC Plan Symbols

Choose one of the options for displaying the Floor Plan Symbols of Lamps and HVAC objects (e.g. ceiling lamp, smoke detector, air diffuser) in the project. Realistic Electric Reflected Ceiling Plan
1588
Hide Object Accessories in 3D

Check any or all of the boxes to set the global display of object accessories in 3D: Hide Knobs in 3D Hide Taps in 3D Hide Door Handles in 3D
Opening Lines for Doors and Windows in 2D

For the opening lines of doors and windows in 2D windows: Choose your preferred opening line style: either Curved or Straight. Choose options for the opening lines type and pen.
Show Opening Lines for Doors and Windows in 3D

Check this box if you want to display the opening lines of doors and windows in the 3D window. Choose line types (either dashed or solid) for the opening lines both inside and outside. Choose either Handle or Hinge to set the opening lines orientation. This option is scale-dependent (generally, opening lines are not displayed at all at small scales).
Show Additional Hotspots for Doors and Windows

Checking this box will: Enable hotspots on the doors' egress size and leaf size, on the 2D and Section/Elevation symbol, when the door is selected or being dimensioned. Enable hotspots on the connecting structures like casing, sill etc. This option applies at a scale of 1:100 and below.
1589
3D Document Settings
The 3D Document Settings dialog box is available from: the bottom of the Navigator Project map, if a 3D Document is selected from the context menu of a 3D Document window from the Document > 3D Document menu For general information on this topic, see 3D Document.
3D Document General Panel
Reference ID: An ID is assigned by default; you can change it by typing any other value into the field. This field can contain up to 256 characters; the ID will serves to identify the 3D Document in the project window and in the Navigator. Name: This field can contain up to 256 characters. This name appears in the Navigator palette and the title bar of the 3D Document window. Status: Choose an option to define the status of the link between the 3D Document and the Model. Auto-rebuild Model: A 3D Document with Auto-rebuild status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen, if the model has changed. Manual-rebuild Model: A 3D Document with Manual-rebuild status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command. (The same command is available from the 3D Document windows context menu, and from the Project Map items context menu.) Note: There is no Drawing-type 3D Document. The next part of the 3D Document Settings dialog box provides information on the 3D Documents 3D source window. If you are looking at the 3D Document Default settings, the text indicates whether the current 3D window is limited by Selection/Marquee, or not. (Any 3D Document you create out of the current 3D window will be limited, or not, as indicated here.) 1590
The rest of the text is greyed.
If you are looking at a the settings of a selected 3D Document, you get feedback on both this 3D Documents 3D source window (is it limited by selection/marquee, or not?) and the current 3D window (is it limited by selection/marquee, or not?) If the current 3D window is also the source window for the 3D Document, then obviously this information will be identical.
The next three controls allow you to redefine the currently selected 3D Document: Redefine 3D Projections: Click this button to access the dialog box needed to readjust the 3D projection of the source 3D window. Once you press OK and leave the Settings dialog box, your 3D Document will be redefined according to this modified 3D projection. See also 3D Projection Settings. Redefine Filter Elements: Click this button to access the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. Make any adjustments you need, then close the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box. See also Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box. Redefine the Projection, Cutting Planes and Visible Elements based on Current 3D window: Check this box to redefine the selected 3D Document based on the projection, the cutting planes, and the visible elements in the current 3D window. Note: This checkbox has a one-time effect: the content of the 3D Document will not be automatically redefined when the 3D window is changed. The next time you open this settings dialog, the checkbox will appear unchecked.
1591
3D Document Model Display Panel

Cut Elements Fill Cut Surfaces with: This control gives you four options for displaying the surfaces of cut elements in the 3D Document:
1) Cut Fills - as in Settings: Cut surfaces will use the fills assigned to the individual elements in their Settings dialog boxes. In this case, an additional option is available: Uniform Pen for Cut Elements: Check this box to use the same pens to display all the cut elements in this 3D Document. (If you dont check this box, the cut elements will use the pen settings of the individual elements).
Then define the pen using the following controls: Cut Line Pen Cut Fill Pen Cut Fill Background Pen 2) Uniform Material: This option means that all cut surfaces in this 3D Document will use a single material. - Choose this uniform material using the fill pop-up of the Cut Surface Material parameter
or - Check the box Use Material Defined in 3D Cutting Planes. This is the material you choose in View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutting Planes. 1592
See 3D Cutaway Sections for information on 3D Cutting Planes.
3) Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): This option means that all cut surfaces in this 3D Document will be shown using the Material assigned to the individual elements in their Settings dialog boxes. 4) Own Material Colors (Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this 3D Document using the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. UNCUT ELEMENTS Choose pen attributes for uncut elements displayed in this 3D Document. Fill Uncut Surfaces with: Use this control to define the fill of uncut surfaces displayed in this 3D Document.
1) Uniform Pencolor: Choose this option to apply a uniform color to the fills of all uncut surfaces in this 3D Document. If you choose this option, the following parameter appears: Uncut Surfaces Pen: Use this control to choose the desired pencolor to be applied uniformly to all uncut elements in this 3D Document. To display Material colors in this 3D Document (on uncut parts of this 3D Document only), choose either of the following options:
1593
2) Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills using the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface. 3) Own Material Colors (Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills using the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. Uniform Pen for Uncut Contours: Check this box if you want to display the contours of fills on uncut surfaces in this 3D Document. If you check it, the Uncut Contours Pen color chooser appears; choose a pencolor.
Vectorial 3D Hatching: Check this box to activate vectorial 3D hatch patterns in this 3D Document. Transparency: Check this box to give see-through Materials (e.g. glass) a transparent effect in this 3D Document. Note: These Vectorial 3D Hatching and Transparency controls are specific to the 3D Document. Redefining the 3D Document with the settings of the current 3D window will not redefine these options.
SUN AND SHADOWS

Vectorial Sun Shadow: Choose one of the options in this control to set the display of shadow fills in this 3D Document: Contours Off: Shadows are displayed without Contours. Contours On: Shadows are displayed with Contours. Off The shadow fill polygons are freely customizable. Choose the Fill type, Fill pen and Fill background pen using the corresponding pop-up palettes.
1594
Filter Elements in 3D Dialog Box

Use the View > Elements in 3D View > Filter Elements in 3D command or use the 3D Visualization toolbars button to open this dialog box
You can also access it from 3D Document Settings to redefine filtering criteria for a 3D Document. Stories to Show in 3D: Define the stories of the project to be displayed in the 3D window: Infinite: Show all elements. From Story To Story: Specify a continuous range of stories. Trim Elements to Story range: Check this box to clip the model at the story range boundaries. If this box is not checked, the model will not be clipped, and all elements that fall at least partially inside the story range will be displayed. Marquee Effect: If you have used the Marquee tool to create a selection area prior to generating the model, use these options to define which part of the project will be shown in the 3D window: Inside Marquee: Elements inside the Marquee will be displayed. Outside Marquee: Elements outside the Marquee will be displayed. This option allows you, for example, to exclude internal elements of a house when you need only external views of the 3D model. The Marquee can affect multiple stories, not just the current story. Trim Elements to Marquee: Check this box to clip the model at the Marquees boundaries. If this box is not checked, the model will not be clipped, and all elements that fall at least partially inside the Marquee will be displayed. If there is a Marquee selection made in the Floor Plan, the settings of the Filter Elements in 3D dialog box are observed, but the caption of the 3D window includes the Marquee mention and the range of included stories. The Element Types to Show in 3D checkboxes allow you to turn the 3D Window display of construction elements on and off. With Doors and Windows switched off, openings are interpreted as empty holes. Checking the All Types box selects all element types.
1595
3D Window Settings
Use the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings command to open this dialog box. 3D Engine: Select from the list of available 3D engines. OpenGL: This is the default engine and recommended if your video display card supports OpenGL. However, some effects, for example cast shadows, vectorial 3D hatching and the option to save the contents of the 3D window as a vectorial 2D drawing, are not available with OpenGL. Options button: Click here for more Open GL Options. Choose the Internal Engine to use effects like sun shadows, vectorial 3D hatching and to have the option of saving the contents of the 3D window as a vectorial 2D drawing. See also 3D Engines. Mode: Select from the list of model formats to be displayed in 3D: Wireframe, Hidden Line or Shading. These modes differ in the amount of detail they show. Note: If you are using the OpenGL engine, there is no Hidden Line mode. Note: If you have defined a Layer as Wireframe, its elements will always appear in Wireframe mode, even if you have chosen another 3D view mode here. Both the 3D Engines and the 3D display modes are also accessible from the View > 3D View Mode menu. Methods: Define the processing methods for the 3D Window if you are in Hidden Line or Shaded 3D Modes. (If you are using the OpenGL 3D engine, only the Contours setting is available here.) Hidden Line Mode/ Shaded Mode: Click these pop-up fields to select Analytic (slower but more sophisticated) or Raster (faster but less sophisticated) computational methods for generating images in the 3D Window. Use Analytic shading for: accurate surface polygons, zoomable image, resolution-independent, 3D hatching and 3D shadows can be applied, can be saved in several formats, plottable at any size with HP DesignJet raster plotters. Use Raster shading to obtain: bitmapped image, no effects are available, cannot be plotted. Contours: Click this pop-up field to define whether contours will be visible in Shaded images. Contours are lines showing the edges of model elements. Off: Choose this to ensure that no contours are visible in Shaded images. The Draft option produces a fast result, but it doesnt eliminate all the lines that the Hidden Line Analytic method would. The Best option produces a perfect result, but it may be rather slow for large and complex 3D models. 1596
Vertical Raster Strips: Enter a value here to determine the number of vertical strips used to raster Shaded or Hidden Line models. Hint: More strips provide a more realistic image, but take longer to process. For fast but clean images, select 3 to 10 vertical strips, depending on your screen size. Do not go beyond 50 strips, as this will usually not enhance the image any more, but will take more time to calculate. Beyond a limit, the only way to get better images is by using the Analytic Hidden Line, the Analytic Shading or PhotoRendering methods. Effects: Use the controls in this section to specify the use of 3D hatching, shadow-casting and transparency. (If you are using the OpenGL 3D engine, only the Transparency in shading setting is relevant here.) Vectorial 3D Hatching: Click this pop-up field to define whether Vectorial Hatch patterns are used in Analytic Hidden Line and Shaded images, provided that you have already selected a 3D Hatching in the Materials dialog box for any material you are using in your Project. For more information, see Materials. Note: Vectorial 3D Hatching is also available for Section/Elevation/IE Windows and for 3D Documents, but this setting has to be made individually in each Section/Elevation/IE and 3D Document Settings dialog box. The choices made in the 3D Window Settings dialog box have no effect on Section/Elevation/IE or 3D Document windows. Transparency in Shading: Turn this setting On to produce transparent views of elements that have the appropriate Materials setting when generating a shaded view. Below, the same glass wall appears with Transparency in Shading Off and On.
When saving a view for publication, the Transparency in Shading setting will be saved with the view. Note: When used with the Internal Engine, Transparency in Shading is not effective with Postscript printers. Vectorial Sun Shadows: Click this pop-up field to enable ArchiCADs shadow-casting capability and to specify whether shadow contours should be shown in the 3D Window. (Click Contours On to show them; click Contours Off to hide them.)
1597
If you have turned Vectorial Sun Shadows on, use the pop-up field below to define where Vectorial Sun Shadows are generated: on all surfaces, or on a single horizontal plane only. (This option is useful for shadow studies in top view.) If you choose this option, enter a value here to specify the absolute elevation of the horizontal plane on which the Vectorial Shadows will be generated. The Vectorial Sun Shadow option is also effective for Wireframe, Analytic Hidden Line and Shaded images. Display: Use the controls in this section to define characteristics of the 3D Window. Window Size in Pixels: Enter the horizontal and vertical size of the 3D Window here. Keep Proportions: Check this box to always have proportions maintained. Line Weight: Define lineweights for Wireframe and Hidden Line modes here. This option is available for the Internal Engine only.
Click the left button to use single-pixel lineweights in Wireframe and Hidden Line display modes. Click the right button to use double-pixel lineweights. Background: Define the background color of the 3D Window here. Single Color: Click this button to apply the color in the box on the right as the background color of the 3D Window. Double-click the color field to choose another color from the pop-up palette. As in PhotoRendering: Click this button to use the background specified in PhotoRendering Settings. GDL Object Hotspots: Use these buttons to enable or disable editable Object hotspots in the 3D window. Enable 2D Hotspots: Choose this to enable Hotspots defined for 2D editing. (This will give you more editing points.) Show 3D Hotspots only: Choose this to enable 3D editing by dragging pre-defined Hotspots. Note: If the GDL Object has no 3D hotspots at all, the 2D hotspots will be always displayed, as well as their copies projected to the zzyzx height value, provided that such a parameter has been defined for the object.
1598
Open GL Options
This dialog box is available by clicking the Options button in 3D Window Settings (View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings) if you have chosen Open GL as your 3D engine. Check the boxes of the effects you want to use when generating 3D images with the OpenGL Engine: Highlights: Check this box to display specular reflections as highlights. Emission: Check this option if you have chosen, or created, light emitting Materials and want this quality to be displayed. Smooth Surfaces: Check this box to control degree of smoothing. Curved surfaces, which are normally approximated by flat planes, are represented by more lifelike surfaces when this option is on. Textures: Check this box to display bitmapped pictures (referred to in the GDL script of some library parts) on the corresponding surfaces. Ignore hardware acceleration in 3D: ArchiCAD will bypass the display cards OpenGL support and use the system-level software emulation of OpenGL, available both on Windows and MacOS. Note: Software emulation is a slower method. Use it if you are experiencing difficulties with OpenGL display.
Smoothness of visual feedback during navigation

Customize feedback speed in Frames per Second: If you check this box, the slider below is activated. Use the slider to set feedback speed in frames per second. Note: In case of a high Frames per Second value, some elements may not be displayed during navigation. Always display all elements within the following radius: This slider fine-tunes your feedback speed preference: regardless of the effect of the Frames per Second set above (which may result in some elements not being shown during navigation), you can set a minimum radius here, within which all elements will be shown during navigation. (Set the radius either numerically or by using the slider.)
1599
3D Cutting Planes Dialog Box

Use the View > Elements in 3D View > 3D Cutting Planes command or use the 3D Visualization toolbars button to open this dialog box:
This dialog box displays the three basic orthogonal representations of your building (front, side and top). To create a section, draw a line through any of the views which represents a cutting plane perpendicular to the given orthogonal view. The Eyeball cursor appears after you have drawn each line, prompting you to click on whichever side of the line you would like removed. The parts of the Project views displayed as shaded will be removed, leaving a sectional view of the model. Hint: Holding the Shift key constrains the cursor to 0 or 90. Double-click a Section Line to remove it. If you define the cut line numerically, click on the name of any coordinate to lock it, and click it again to release it. Enter X, Y and Z coordinate values to define the 3D section cut. You can create special section cut surfaces with different colored edges, as well as cut surfaces having custom material definitions. These attributes are used on all 3D elements which are cut by the 3D Cutting Plane, helping to emphasize the cut surface areas. Fill Material & Edge Pen of Cuts: Use these controls to define Fill Material for interior surfaces and Pen for the edges of cut elements. Custom: Click this button to choose Custom Material & Pencolor/Penweight for highlighting the edges and surfaces of elements cut in 3D Sections. Use Element Attributes: Click this button to use existing Materials & Pencolors/Penweights for highlighting the edges and surfaces of elements cut in 3D Sections. The cut surfaces of construction elements will have the same colors/materials as the uncut edges (as defined in their respective settings dialog boxes). Material pop-up palette: Click this pop-up palette to select a custom Material for exposed interior surfaces of solid elements. Cut surfaces of Library Parts will be painted according to the material set for the Library Part. If the Library Part has internal material descriptions, the first one in the script will define the material for cut surfaces. The 3D Cutting Planes feature does not show the various layers of composite elements. To obtain sections showing these (if required for working drawings) use the Section/Elevation/IE tools. Delete All Cutting Planes: Click here to delete all Cutting Planes from the Section Windows. To create ordinary cross sections, draw a single line and set a view in the 3D Parallel Projection Settings which is perpendicular to the section plane. When drawing the line, you can use the rulers or numeric input the same way as on the Floor Plan. If you miss with your first attempt, double-click the line of the cutting plane with the Mercedes cursor. The line is removed and you can start another. Hint: The number of cutting possibilities offered here is much greater than you generally need in architecture. You can, however, make good use of them when you are dealing with non-orthogonal details or when showing material cutaways. For generating straightforward sections, use the Section Tool. 1600
3D Projection Settings
Use the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings command or the 3D Visualization toolbars button to open the two modes of this dialog box.
(Click the top right button to switch between modes.) For general information, see 3D Projections. The name and contents of the dialog box depend on the projection type: Parallel Projection Settings or Perspective Settings. You can easily switch from one settings dialog to the other with the button at the top right corner.
The projections that you define in the 3D Projection Settings dialog boxes remain valid only until the next time you open the dialog box and modify them.
Parallel Projection Settings Perspective Projection Settings
1601
Parallel Projection Settings

For general information, see 3D Projections. Use the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings command or the 3D Visualization toolbars button to open this dialog box.
Use the controls in this dialog box to set up 3D views as parallel projections. Click this pop-up button to select from 12 preset Projection Types, including predefined axonometrics, side, top and bottom views, and your own custom-defined axonometry:
For each Projection type, the editable boxes show the defining angles and scaling ratios of the X, Y and Z coordinate axes.
1602
Projection Preview: This preview window shows the position of the coordinate axes for the current projection type, with any additional settings you may have made. Click or drag to reposition the axes, or enter values for the angles and ratios of the three coordinate axes.
This dial shows Camera and Sun Azimuth with respect to the target. Simply click the Sun or Camera icon and drag it to the desired location. The effect of your changes is shown by the rotation of the house in the preview area and by the values in the edit boxes to the right of the control.
To move the camera or the sun in 45 degree increments, click once near the desired direction on either of the gray circles. To move them in 5 degree increments, drag the camera or sun icon. To move to any in-between position, type the desired numeric value into the edit fields. Another way to create a customized axonometry is to manipulate the house icon itself in the preview area: To rotate an axis about the origin, click on or near it and drag it to the desired orientation. To rescale and rotate an axis, click within the circle at its endpoint and drag it to the desired position. Use the Shift key to lock the angle while dragging. (If you only want to rescale, it is easier to enter a value in the edit box.) The adjustments you make here are continuously reflected both by the values displayed in the edit boxes, and by the distortion of the house icon itself. You can set the direction of your view and the position of the sun with the controls and edit boxes to the right of the preview area. The Azimuth of the camera and the Sun Azimuth can be set either graphically or numerically, but the sun Altitude angle can only be set numerically: Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Camera Azimuth to Target. Sun Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Sun Azimuth used in shaded or rendered images.
1603
Sun Altitude: Enter a value here to specify Sun Altitude used in shaded or rendered images. Just as for perspective projections, the distance of the sun from the target is considered to be infinite, and for parallel projections the viewpoint distance is infinite as well. Hint: Unless you are an experienced ArchiCAD user, it is generally best to begin with a predefined projection from the palette, then rotate the view with the camera angle control, and finally make minor adjustments with the rescaling features. Pre-Sets: Button: Opens a dialog where you can specify options for and insert frames in FlyThrough Paths. For details, see Pre-Set Projections below. More Sun Button: Opens a dialog to specify Sun options. Perspective Settings: Click here to open Perspective Projection Settings, where you can define perspective views.
Pre-Set Projections
This dialog box lets you store and retrieve projection settings. You can also use this sequence of axonometric views for a future animation. Animations based on axonometric views are not flythroughs in the same sense as perspectives, even though they are created with the same command. Using in-between frames, you will get an animated metamorphosis from one projection to the other. The Add Current Projection button places the current view on the list. The views on the list will be keyframes in the Fly-Through. You can also name each keyframe in the dialog box that appears after pushing this button. If no projection is selected, New will be added to the bottom of the list. If a projection is selected, the new projection will be inserted before the selected one. The Set to Current Projection button changes the highlighted keyframe in the list to the one you set prior to opening the Pre-Sets dialog box. The Delete button clears a keyframe from the list. Under Options for Fly-Through in the right section of the dialog box you can also set the number of in-between frames that ArchiCAD will create by interpolating between every parameter (e.g., axis scaling ratio, camera angle, etc.) of consecutive keyframes. For more information, see Fly-Through. The Open and Closed radio buttons control whether the animation will loop continuously from the last defined keyframe back to the first keyframe during the Fly-Through. Wait frames: This number refers to the number of still frames (time units) during which the fly-through motion will remain frozen at the given camera before moving on to the next one. Enter the number of still frames to be included in the Fly-Through Path.
1604
Perspective Projection Settings

For general information, see 3D Projections. Use the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings command or the 3D Visualization toolbars button to open this dialog box.
Use this dialog box to set all the relevant parameters for perspective 3D views, such as viewpoint location and elevation, target location and elevation, width of the viewing cone, and sun position. The preview area on the left side of the dialog box shows your Floor Plan as it currently appears in the window. To see another part of the Project, leave the dialog box, choose another detail using the Navigator or zooming and panning operations, then open it again. For more information on Navigator or zooming and panning operations, see Navigation. The solid line in the preview area represents the line of vision between the viewpoint and the target point. You can click and drag both the target point and the viewpoint independently of one another. Click anywhere in the preview area and the line of vision will be rotated around the target point to your click position. The angle defining the View Cone is displayed in the preview area and provides reliable information if the line of vision is horizontal. If the line of vision is looking up or down, the angle can be used only for estimating the resulting view. After zooms, pans, or numeric distance settings, the viewpoint and/or target point may occasionally disappear from the preview area. To retrieve them, simply Shift-click where you want the viewpoint and Alt/Cmd-click where you want the target point to be in the Window. They will immediately move to the points where you clicked. You can also specify the following values numerically. Effects of these settings will be displayed graphically in the preview area. Camera Z: Enter a value here to specify Camera height from Project Zero. (In this case, the position of the target will remain unchanged.) Target Z: Enter a value here to specify Target height from Project Zero. Distance: Enter a value here to specify the horizontal distance between Camera and Target. Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Camera Azimuth to Target. For a one-point perspective, set the viewpoint and target point elevation to the same value. Set the viewpoint Azimuth parallel to the principal axis of the Project. For a two-point perspective, set the viewpoint and target point elevation to the same value. The other settings can have any value. For a three-point perspective, set the viewpoint and target point elevation to different values. To get a top view in perspective, set the viewpoint elevation higher than that of the target point elevation, drag the target to the desired location on the plan, then set the distance to zero by dragging the viewpoint until the numeric field displays a minimal value near zero. (You cannot type zero in the Distance field.)
1605
The elevation of the viewpoint and the target point, as well as the View Cone and Roll Angle of the Camera must be set numerically by using the remaining edit boxes. View Cone: Enter a value here to specify the opening angle of the Camera View Cone. Hint: Wider angles (a=>60) can fit more objects in the Window, but can also distort the image. Roll Angle: Enter a value here to specify Camera Roll Angle. In the projection preview area, the dashed line from the center of the area with a sun icon at its end shows the direction of light for shaded and rendered representations. The sun icon can be dragged around the perimeter of the plan, but it cannot be positioned closer. Its distance is considered to be infinite. Both its Altitude and Azimuth can be set numerically in the edit boxes below the viewpoint and target settings. Sun Altitude: Enter a value here to specify Sun Altitude used in shaded or rendered images. Sun Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Sun Azimuth used in shaded or rendered images. Note: Cameras placed in the Floor Plan window also define perspective views, but they are configured in the Camera/VR Tool Settings dialog box, not in this dialog box. You can copy a cameras settings here by selecting a single camera on the Floor Plan and choosing 3D Projection Settings. More Sun button: Click here to open a dialog to specify Sun options. You can also use the Navigator and Navigator Preview palettes to set up the 3D view. For details, see Navigation in the 3D Window.
1606
Sun
The Sun sub-dialog box is accessible from: the Camera/VR Tool Settings dialog box, by clicking the Sun... button the 3D Projection Settings dialog box, by clicking the More Sun... button. The Sun subdialog box contains a series of sophisticated sunlight settings, which can be used for PhotoRenderings. See also Sun Study.
Light Parameters
Set parameters for each component of the light: Sunlight (directional normal), Ambient Light and Fog. Sunlight is the directional light falling on the project. Ambient light is general, non-directional light that contributes to the overall brightness of the image, and can brighten otherwise overshadowed surfaces. You may have to vary its intensity to obtain special effects in renderings. Fog is the fog effect applied to a PhotoRendered image. Color: Double-click inside each color sample box to bring up the Edit Color selection, then choose colors for the Sunlight, Ambient Light and Fog. Intensity: Choose a color Intensity between 0 and 100% for Sunlight and Ambient Light. Note: This Intensity value multiplies the Brightness component of the Sunlight color. Contribution to Ambient (%): Choose a percentage for how much of the Sunlight is represented in nondirectional, ambient light. Auto Preview: Check this box to automatically create a preview rendering in the preview box, showing the Sun/Ambient light settings. If Auto Preview is not checked, the preview will appear, reflecting your latest sun settings, only if you click inside the box.
1607
Location and Date

Displays the selected city. To change the location, click the Set City button. See Set Cities. Use the next four fields to enter the exact date and time for which you need sun settings. +1 hr Daylight: Check this box to adjust the hour forward for Daylight Savings Time (Summer time), from 2 AM on the second Sunday in March until 2 AM on the first Sunday in November (US), or from the last Sunday in March until the last Sunday in October (Europe). Sun position: This section displays the Sun position. Azimuth: Displays the Sun Azimuth in ArchiCAD's polar coordinates system. Note: If you adjust the Project North value, the sun azimuth value here will change accordingly. Altitude: Displays the Sun Altitude above the Horizon in degrees. Note: A negative Altitude angle indicates that the Sun is below the horizon (night). This may produce completely black Images. The icon to the right indicates whether the Date/Time/Location will result in a daytime or nighttime Image.
Project North
This control gives you feedback on the current projects Project North definition. To define Project North, go to Levels and Project North Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North). Click OK to leave the Sun dialog box, then click Apply in the Camera dialog box to apply new Settings to the selected Camera. You do not need to close the dialog box to see your changes appear.
1608
Set Cities
Use this dialog box to choose the geographic location of your project. To access this dialog box, follow these steps: 1) Open the Camera Tool Settings dialog box 2) Click the Sun... button to access the Sun Dialog box. 3) Click the Set City... button to access the Set City dialog box. Or go to View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings > More Sun > Set City.
Choose a city from the list of City Definitions in the ArchiCAD City Database. Click a City name to display its Latitude, Longitude and Time Zone in the fields at the bottom of the dialog box. Note: Use the Scroll Bar or drag to scroll the list. To add a new city, type its name, the exact global coordinates and its time zone, then click the Add button. The new city now appears in the list in its alphabetical position. Delete: Click this button to delete the selected City Definition from the ArchiCAD City Database. Latitude: These boxes display degrees and minutes of Latitude North or South of the Equator. Click the pop-up menu to switch between Latitude North & South. Note: Latitude angles are measured in degrees & minutes relative to the Equator (0 lat.). Longitude: These boxes display the degrees and minutes of Longitude East or West of the Prime Meridian at Greenwich, England. Click the pop-up field to switch between Longitude East & West. Note: Longitude angles are measured in degrees & minutes East or West of the Prime Meridian at Greenwich, England (0 lon.). Time Zone: Displays the hour and minutes components difference of the selected City's Time Zone from Greenwich Mean Time. Note: A negative value indicates a City West of Greenwich and East of the International Date Line (usually North or South America).
1609
Click the pop-up fields to choose the month, date, hour and minute. Note: The hour setting uses a 24-hour clock, i.e., 19 = 7 PM. To apply the view defined by a Camera on the 3D model, select the camera and activate the 3D Window.
1610
RoofMaker Settings
(Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker)
Rafter Settings Dialog Box

Select a roof on the floor plan. Choose Create a Rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the first icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The Rafter Settings dialog box appears in which rafter parameters can be set. The preview picture in the dialog box reflects the changes in the settings as you make them, to let you experiment with several possibilities before placing the rafter.
Width: Enter the width of the rafter cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the rafter cross-section here. Hip Rafter Width: Define the width of the hip rafter (the connecting element at the top of the rafter.) Rafter angle at the top: Choose either radio button (Perpendicular or Vertical) to define the angle at which the rafter joins the connecting element at its top end. Eaves Angle: Choose a radio button (Perpendicular, Vertical or Rectangular Cut) to define a how to cut the bottom end of the rafter. Soffit: Click this box to attach a soffit to the lower end of the rafter. The soffit will have the same cross section as the rafter. Soffit Angle: Enter a value to set the inclination of the soffit. A zero angle means the soffit is horizontal.
1611
Note: The preview will not reflect the angle you set for the soffit, but the value will correctly displayed on screen and in all outputs. Material: Choose a material for the rafter from the pop-up palette. Width of Valley Rafter: Enter the width of the valley rafter. Layer: Choose a layer for the Rafter element. Axis linetype: Choose a linetype for the axis of the rafter. Show outline in 2D: Check this box to display the full outline of the rafter, including its axis, on the Floor Plan. Although roof plans usually show only the axis of any inclined element (rafters, hip rafters, valley rafters), switching on the outline view temporarily gives you better control of the connections between elements. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Multiple Rafters Dialog Box

Select a roof on the floor plan. Choose Create Multiple Rafters from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). The controls of this dialog box are identical to those of the Rafter Settings Dialog Box, but the controls related to multiple rafters are also active.
Placement of multiple rafters: The placement method is defined by either a maximal distance between the axes of the rafters (Distance Fixed), or by a fixed number of rafters to be placed at an equal distance (Number Fixed). If you choose Distance Fixed, enter a value below for Max. distance between rafters.
1612
If the user-defined range might not allow the regular placement of the objects. In such a case, use the Distance Fixed - gap start/middle/end radio buttons to fine-tune where the gap between rafters will be introduced (either at the start, the middle or the end). Number of copies: This field is active if you have checked the Number Fixed radio button. Enter the desired number of rafters. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Hip or Valley Rafter Settings
Select either one or two roofs on the floor plan. Choose Create a Hip or Valley Rafter from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). Width: Enter the width of the rafter cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the rafter cross-section here. Width of Purlin: Enter the width of the purlin here. Thickness of Rafter: Enter the rafter thickness here. Axis linetype: Choose a linetype for the axis of the rafter. Show outline in 2D: Check this box to display the full outline of the rafter, including its axis, on the Floor Plan. Although roof plans usually show only the axis of any inclined element (rafters, hip rafters, valley rafters), switching on the outline view temporarily gives you better control of the connections between elements. Eaves Angle: Choose a radio button (Perpendicular, Vertical or Rectangular Cut) to define a how to cut the bottom end of the rafter. Material: Choose a material for the rafter from the pop-up palette. Enter values for the Width of purlin and Thickness of rafter fields. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
1613
Create a Purlin (or Beam)

Select a roof on the floor plan. Choose Create a Purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox).
Width: Enter the width of the purlin cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the purlin cross-section here. Elevation: Enter an elevation value for the purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. Top of Rafters: Check this box to place the purlin on top of the rafters. If the purlin is placed on top, you must also set the rafter height at which to place the purlin. Rotated Purlin: Check this box to place the purlin perpendicular to the rafters. Rafter height: Enter a value for the height of the rafters. Material: Choose a material for the purlin from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
1614
Create an Eaves Purlin (or Plate Beam)

Select a roof on the floor plan. Choose Create an Eaves Purlin from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox).
Width: Enter the width of the purlin cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the purlin cross-section here. Elevation: Enter an elevation value for the purlin so that it can be higher or lower than the reference plane. Material: Choose a material for the purlin from the pop-up menu. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Create a Trimmer (or Blocking)

Select two rafters on the floor plan. Choose Create a Trimmer from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox).
Width: Enter the width of the trimmer cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the trimmer cross-section here. Perpendicular: Check this to place the trimmer perpendicularly to the rafters
1615
Vertical: Check this to place the trimmer vertically. Material: Choose a material for the trimmer from the pop-up menu. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Create Collar Beams

Select two rafters on the floor plan. Choose Create Collar Beams from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). Width: Enter the width of the collar beam cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the collar beam cross-section here. to Story 0: Enter a value here for the height of the top of the beam from the current story to Project Zero: Enter a value here for the height of the top of the beam from Project Zero. Single-sided: Click this button to create a single-sided beam. Double-sided: Click this button to create a double-sided beam (on both sides of the rafter). Material: Choose a material for the purlin from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Create Tie Beams

Select two rafters on the floor plan. Choose Create Tie Beams from the Design > Design Extras > RoofMaker menu (or select the appropriate icon from the RoofMaker toolbox). Width: Enter the width of the tie beam cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the tie beam cross-section here. to Story 0: Enter a value here for the height of the bottom of the beam from the current story to Project Zero: Enter a value here for the height of the bottom of the beam from Project Zero. Material: Choose a material for the purlin from the pop-up menu. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan.
Roof Wizard Dialog Box

For more information, see Create Special Roof Objects with RoofMaker.
Rafters Tab Page

Create Rafters: Check this to create Rafters and enable related controls on this tab page. Width: Enter the width of the rafter cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the rafter cross-section here. Eaves Angle: Choose a radio button (Perpendicular, Vertical or Rectangular Cut) to define a how to cut the bottom end of the rafter. Soffit: Click this box to attach a soffit to the lower end of the rafter. The soffit will have the same cross section as the rafter
1616
Soffit Angle: Enter a value to set the inclination of the soffit. A zero angle means the soffit is horizontal. Axis linetype: Choose a linetype for the axis of the rafter. Show outline in 2D: Check this box to display the full outline of the rafter, including its axis, on the Floor Plan. Although roof plans usually show only the axis of any inclined element (rafters, hip rafters, valley rafters), switching on the outline view temporarily gives you better control of the connections between elements. Distance between normal rafters: Enter a value here to set the standard distance between rafters. Minimal distance between rafters: Enter a value here to set the minimum distance between rafters. Use the checkboxes for special rafter placement options: Add extra rafters to big gaps Add extra rafters to corners Choose one of the two radio buttons to set how rafters behave at slant edges: Join on slant edges Stagger on slant edges Double rafters on window side: Check this box if you want to double the rafters on the side of window openings. Material: Choose a material for the rafter from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan and creates the rafters according to the current settings.
Beams Tab Page

Create Beams: Check this to create beams and enable related controls on this tab page. Check a radio button for the type of beam needed: Collar Beams Note: With the Roof Wizard, only double collar beams can be created. Tie Beam Width: Enter the width of the beam cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the beam cross-section here. Set the Elevation of the beam. to Story 0: Enter a value here for the height of the beam from the current story. to Project Zero: Enter a value here for the height of the beam from the Project Zero. Note: For collar beams, the elevation value is the top of the beam; for tie beams, the elevation value is the bottom of the beam, as reflected in the preview picture. Material: Choose a material for the rafter from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan and creates the beam(s) according to the current settings.
1617
Purlins Tab Page

Create Ridge Purlins Create Eaves Purlins Check either or both of these boxes to create ridge purlins (use controls on the left side of the dialog box) and eaves purlins (use controls on the right side). Width: Enter the width of the purlin cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the purlin cross-section here. A purlin is placed either below the opposing rafters (supporting them), or between the rafters (supported by them). Purlin between rafters: Check this box to place the ridge purlin between rafters. Indenture: Check this box to set the depth at which the eaves purlin cuts into the rafter it supports Material: Choose a material for the purlin from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan and places the purlins according to the current settings. Note: The eaves purlin is always placed on the same level as the pivot line of the corresponding roof surface.
Trimmers Tab Page

Click the Create Trimmers checkbox to activate the controls on this tab page. Width: Enter the width of the rafter cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the rafter cross-section here. Perpendicular: Check this to place the trimmer perpendicularly to the rafters Vertical: Check this to place the trimmer vertically. Material: Choose a material for the purlins from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan and creates the purlins according to the current settings.
Ridges Tab Page

Create Hip Rafters and Valley Rafters: Check this box to use the controls in this dialog box to create Hip Rafters and Valley Rafters. Width: Enter the width of the rafter cross-section here. Height: Enter the height of the rafter cross-section here. Axis linetype: Choose a linetype for the axis of the rafter. Show outline in 2D: Check this box to display the full outline of the rafter, including its axis, on the Floor Plan. Although roof plans usually show only the axis of any inclined element (rafters, hip rafters, valley rafters), switching on the outline view temporarily gives you better control of the connections between elements. Eaves Angle: Choose a radio button (Perpendicular, Vertical or Rectangular Cut) to define a how to cut the bottom end of the rafter.
1618
Drop hip rafter to match rafters top: Check this box to lower the hip rafter to match rafters' top with its own top. (This may be necessary if the pitch angle of the standard rafters differs from that of the hip/valley rafters.) Material: Choose a material for the rafters from the pop-up palette. Clicking OK returns you to the floor plan creates the rafters according to the current settings.
1619
TrussMaker Settings
(Design > Design Extras > TrussMaker) For general information, see TrussMaker. Choose a construction type using the three large buttons on the left of the screen of the TrussMaker settings dialog box: Timber Construction: click this button to construct wooden trusses. Hollow Section: click this button to construct rectangular or circular hollow trusses. Rolled Steel Profile: click this button to construct steel trusses using a variety of profile options. After setting a construction type, use the controls on the three tab pages to define the truss.
TrussMaker Attributes tab

This tab page defines the appearance of the truss in floor plan, section and 3D views and is identical for all three construction types. Floor Plan and Model Attributes Enter a pen number and pen color, line type and material setting for the line of the truss. Enter a vertical offset for the truss: to Story: this value is the elevation of the truss from the current story. to Project Zero: this value is the elevation of the truss from Project Zero. Resolution of Arcs: Enter a value to set the segmentation of any curves that you used to define the outline of the truss. Note: The value you enter in the Resolution of arcs field is relative to the complete circle, not the arc segment.
TrussMaker Truss Profiles tab

Use this tab page to assign distinct parameters (e.g., thickness, diameter or profile) to each part of the truss. Note: To define the different parts of the truss, you must assign different pencolors when drawing the truss outline on the floor plan. To select a part to work on, either click its pencolor icon, or corresponding button/field, or its outline in the Truss Preview. The thick outline in the preview and a black diamond next to the pen color indicate which part of the truss you are working on. The available parameters depend on the construction type of the truss you are creating. Width: Enter a value to set the width of the element. Height: Enter a value to set the height of the element. Thickness: Enter a value to set the thickness of the element. Cross Section: Displays the cross section of the selected profile type. In addition to the above, the Hollow Section type of truss has a number of additional settings. Profiles: Click a radio button to choose either a rectangular or circular profile. 1620
If you choose a circular profile, such truss elements are defined by their diameter and resolution rather than height and width. Thickness: Enter a value for the thickness of the truss part. For a Rolled Steel Profile only: Click the Profiles and Positioning pop-ups to choose a shape and placement option for your Rolled Steel Profile.
Steel Junctions tab

This tab page is only available for the Rolled Steel Profile construction type. These controls allow you to use customizable junction plates at the points where the truss elements meet. Choose a radio button to set whether your truss will include junction plates. Without junction plates: Check this radio button if you do not want to use junction plates. If you choose not to use junction plates, the corresponding options are greyed in the dialog box. With junction plates: Check this radio button to use junction plates. When joining two identical profiles, choose a radio button to set whether your truss will include junction plates: Dont use junction plate Use junction plate. Choose a radio button to set the geography of the steel junction profile: Use center of gravity Use midpoint of bounding box. In the Junction Plates section, T stands for the cross-section value, L for the length of the junction plate from the intersection point of the profile axis and M for the minimal overlapping length of the profile and the junction plate. Depending on the geometry (the angle between the profiles), either L or M will be used to determine the actual junction plate length - whichever results in a longer junction plate. T: Enter a value to set the thickness of the plates (cross-section. L: Enter a value for L (length of junction plate). M: Enter a value for M (minimal overlapping length between profile and junction plate). When you have finished customizing your truss, click the Save button at the bottom right of the dialog box. You will then be prompted to name the new truss object and place it in your active library.
1621
Grid System Settings

For general information, see The Grid Tool. This dialog box is available from the Design > Grid System command.
Grid System General Settings Panel
Geometry: Select between orthogonal and curved grid systems. If you select a curved system, then enter a value for the radius of the outermost gridline. Place...: Check any of the next four checkboxes to place additional elements at each gridline intersection: Elements at Grid line intersections: Check this to place elements at grid line intersections. Click the pop-up to select the element type (Column or Object) and click the Settings button to open that element's settings dialog on top of this dialog. Default Beams on Grid lines: Check this to place a Beam element along the grid lines. Click the Settings button to open the Beam settings dialog on top of this dialog. Dimension lines: Check this to place a dimension line between each and every grid line. Enter a value for the offset between the dimension line and the first crossing grid line. Click the Settings button to open the Dimension settings dialog on top of this dialog. Total Dimension: Check this to place a dimension line between the two side grid lines. Enter a value for the offset between the dimension line and the first crossing grid line. Click the Settings button to open the Dimension settings dialog on top of this dialog. Click the chain icon to have identical attributes for dimension lines and the total dimension. Keep Column and/or Beam within Grid perimeter: Check this to shift the columns and the beams so that will appear inside the perimeter of the Grid system.
1622
Grid System Grid Elements Panel
Grid Element Settings: Click this button to open the Grid Element to set properties for every Grid element in this Grid System. (All Grid elements will look the same.) Extension: Enter a value for the distance that the Grid line extends beyond the last crossing Grid line Anchor: Click one of the four positioning buttons to define an anchor by which to place the Grid System. Markers: Check any or all of the four sides of the Grid System to place Markers. (If you define a rotation during Grid System placement, then these sides will be rotated as well.) Auto-stagger Grid Markers if they overlap: Check this to automatically stagger Grid markers sideways to avoid overlapping, if the markers would otherwise overlap.
Grid System Naming Rules Panel
Use this panel to define the logic by which to name the Grid lines of this Grid System. You can define separate naming styles for the two grid directions. For a curved grid system: circular Grid lines and radial Grid lines. Note that assigning naming rules to horizontal and vertical gridlines, as well as the up and down definitions, are relative to the Grid Systems orthogonal position (if you rotate the Grid System when placing it, the assigned names will be rotated accordingly.)
1623
Custom: Select this to enter names manually for any grid element, using the fields in the Grid Positions Panel: if you click Custom in the Naming Rules Panel, then the Grid line names become editable in the Grid Positions Panel.
Generate names automatically: Select this to auto-generate names for the Grid lines in this Grid System. Ascending direction: Select one of the two directions (click the up or down arrow) to define in which direction the automatically generated names should be assigned. Start at: This field shows the starting value of the Grid element naming. Prefix: a static text displayed in front of each auto generated name. Suffix: a static text displayed following each auto generated text. Style: Choose a style for the auto generated Grid element names: either numbers (1,2,3,...), letters (A,B,C,... or a,b,c,... ), or Roman numbers (I,II,III,IV,...)
Grid System Grid Positions Panel

Use this panel to define the number and position of horizontal and vertical Grid lines for this Grid System. (For a curved grid system: circular Grid lines and radial Grid lines.)
Note that horizontal and vertical gridlines parameters are relative to the Grid Systems orthogonal position, and rotate along with the Grid. 1624
Add a Grid line: Click the Plus sign to add a Grid line. Remove a Grid line: Click the Minus sign to remove a Grid line. Set distance: Click the distance field of any of the listed Grid lines to define its distance from the previous Grid line. The Distance of the first Grid line in the list is always zero. Distribute: If you do not know the distance you will need between your Grid lines, check the Distribute box for either or both Grid line directions. This will enable you, when you place the Grid system, to set the beginning and endpoints of the Grid system in the given direction, divided into the number of Grid lines defined in the list.
1625
GDL (Geometric Description Language)

The dialog boxes and commands described below are used when editing GDL objects in ArchiCAD.
GDL Master Window Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows About GDL Object Subtypes Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window)
1626
GDL Master Window

Each GDL Object has its own Master Window. All controls needed to edit a GDL Object are present in the Master Window. Any number of GDL Object Master Windows can be open at the same time. For a detailed description of scripting commands and object-level editing, see the GDL Reference Guide (available from the ArchiCAD Help menu). To open an Object Master Window, use File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object, then browse for the desired object. Note: To access library parts in a library container file, you must first extract the container. For more information, see Library Container File. The subtype of the open object is shown in a text field at the top of the dialog box. You can change an objects subtype by clicking the Select Subtype button which will open the Subtype Hierarchy dialog box. Changing the Objects subtype modifies its behavior and adds the parameters and functionality needed for the new subtype. For example, you can change a plain object into a light source by changing its subtype to Light. For more information, see Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window). If you close the Master Window of a GDL Object (Library Part), all of the other windows of the Object will also be closed. You will be prompted to save changes, if any. In the GDL Master Window, check one of the two checkboxes to define the object placement type. If you check the Template box, the object will be saved as a Template to be included in the list of available Subtypes. The new template will appear in the Subtype Hierarchy dialog box and any new Objects that you associate to this subtype will take on all of the parameters of the subtype. The Placeable checkbox is enabled by default. If you uncheck it, the Object will behave as a macro. If this box is unchecked, this means that it will not appear in any of the tool settings dialog boxes; you will not be able to place it directly in the Project; it cannot be included in an archived project file; but you can refer to its scripts from other Objects. The Preview Picture window can be viewed in one of six formats. Click one of the buttons below the window to choose a display option for the preview picture: 2D Symbol (drawing), 2D Full View, Elevation, Hidden Line, Shading, and Rendered Preview. With the Elevation, Hidden Line, or Shaded display options, you can click in the preview window to rotate the image in 45 degree increments. The 16 numbered buttons below the Preview Picture represent the fragments of the 2D Symbol. Fragments are useful for organizing the graphic elements that compose the plan symbol of the Library Part. To define and edit fragments, see 2D Symbol.
1627
Click any fragment to show/hide it, or use the Show All/Hide All buttons. Note: Fragments that are hidden are not available for storing new graphic elements. If you select a hidden Fragment in the dialog box of the Tool you are using for editing the symbol, you will get a warning asking you to change your selection or Show the selected Fragment. The rest of the GDL Master Window contents depend which window category you activate in the list at left. Parameters: Click this button to display the Parameters of the current Library Part in the editing area. Components: Click this button to display the Components of the current GDL Object in the editing area. Components define the objects composition for use in listing and calculation features. Descriptors: Click this button to display the Descriptors of the current GDL Object in the editing area. Descriptors define the objects composition for use in listing and calculation features. See details on Parameters, Components and Descriptors in the sections below.
Script Buttons
These buttons allow you to program your GDL Object. If you click the button itself, editing will take place inside the Master Window, while clicking the window icon next to the scripts name will open a separate window for entering or modifying the script. Master Script 2D Script 3D Script Property Script Parameter Script Interface Script Comment For details on these script windows, see GDL Script Window Shortcuts. GDL Object Views Buttons: At bottom left, the window icons allow you to open the corresponding views of the GDL Object: 2D Symbol 2D Full View 3D View Preview Picture For details on editing these views, see the corresponding descriptions below. When closing the master window, a prompt warns you to save changes. All the components of your item will be saved with it. You can also save your item using the Save or Save as commands from any of the library items windows. (From the 3D View, you can only save the image using Save as.) After saving, you can choose the Rebuild command (View > Refresh) for the Floor Plan or 3D window to view the modified GDL Object. 1628
Parameters
By assigning values to the set of variables in the Parameters list, you will define the attributes of a particular GDL Object. The values assigned here will be the default values found in the Settings dialog box when you choose a tool that uses GDL Objects. These locally defined Parameters can also be called by the different Scripts of the Object. For a detailed description of scripting commands and object-level editing, see the GDL Reference Guide and Introduction to Object Making with ArchiCAD (in PDF format) in ArchiCAD 13/ Graphisoft Documentation. The parameters that appear in blue are the obligatory parameters that belong to the edited Objects subtype. Some examples of obligatory parameters: x and z dimensions for Windows and Doors, x and y dimensions for Objects, x and y dimensions, on/off selection, color components and intensity for Lamps. The list of optional parameters (below the obligatory parameters) are available for use in the Objects GDL description. The values specified for them will become the default additional values displayed when you open the appropriate Settings dialog box from the Toolbox. The optional parameters are typically used to define such things as the number of window panes or door panels, the usual materials of a part, etc. New parameters can be created by pressing the New button at the top of the Master Window. Remove existing parameters by selecting them in the list then pressing Delete next to the New button. Each parameter in the list can be edited in its own row. Each line consists of an icon (required) indicating its type, the parameter letter or a string variable, a descriptive text (optional, but recommended) and a default numeric value. Highlight the row you wish to edit. For obligatory parameters, you cannot edit the variable name or type icon. For optional parameters you can edit all the parameters. The icons control how the values are interpreted by ArchiCAD. Clicking an icon displays a dialog box where you can redefine the parameters type by choosing another icon.
The parameter types (identical for obligatory and optional parameters) are the following: Length:
specifies physical dimensions of the GDL Object (and makes conversions to whatever units you are using.) Must be a positive number.
1629
Angle:
specifies angular values in decimal degrees for such GDL operations as rotation transformations and defining arcs. Real Number:
specifies decimal non-dimensional values (any real number) for uses like including a magnification factor in a GDL calculation. Integer:
specifies whole numbers, dimensionless values for uses like defining the number of identical components in a GDL description or the number of times to loop through a part of the GDL Script. Boolean:
the value of a Boolean parameter can only be 1 or 0 for uses like activating or deactivating an action or an item in a GDL Object. These values can either be typed directly into the value box, or set by clicking the checkbox at the right end of the parameter line. Text:
specifies character strings up to 255 characters for uses like defining changes in the GDL Object or typing plain words instead of numbers in the parameters value box. Material:
specifies a material as a GDL parameter. Line Type:
specifies a line type as a GDL parameter.
1630
Fill Pattern:
specifies a fill pattern as a GDL parameter. Pen Color:
specifies a pencolor as a GDL parameter. Note: If any of the Material, Line Type, Fill Pattern or Pen Color parameter types is selected, a button appears at the right end of the parameter line where you can bring up a pop-up list of corresponding settings. Any of the attributes currently available to ArchiCAD can be chosen.
For details, see Favorites. Proper parameter type specifications are especially important when, for example, you are working with feet and inches, which only the Length type parameter will accept. Incorrect use of a specification can also result in misinterpretation of non-dimensional parameters (i.e., angles or number of pieces). Note: Depending on how you write your GDL descriptions, the parameters you use can affect both the 2D and 3D aspects of the Library Part. Parameter Types include two further options: Separator and Title.
These are virtual parameters as they are only used to make the Parameter List more organized and easier to view. To further organize and format the parameter list, use any of the three list formatting icons, visible only when a list item is highlighted.
Pressing the first icon, Hide Parameter, will remove the highlighted parameter from the Parameters panel in the Object Settings dialog box. 1631
The second icon, Subordinate, will create a hierarchy among parameters. When a parameter is ordered under another one, the subordinate parameters appear in a sublist within the parameter list of the Object Settings dialog box. The sublist can be opened and closed by pressing the small triangle next to the superior parameter. The superior parameter can be of any type; however, a Title type parameter cannot be subordinated. Pressing the third icon, Bold, will make the parameter name appear in bold type. You can restrict the possible values of a parameter by defining an array. When you highlight an array item in the parameter list, a button appears next to the Type icon.
Click it to toggle between a single or value list and an array. If it is toggled to array, clicking it will open the Array Values dialog box. Note: Once array values have been defined for a parameter, the Array Values dialog box can only be opened by pressing the Set button at the top of the Master Window.
Array Values
Edit the fields of the array by clicking on the fields, then entering the value in the number field at the right side. Where variable types allow, you can choose values from a pop-up menu. To insert or delete a row or column, select the button showing the row/column number, then press Insert or Delete.
Details
The Details dialog box for the Object, Lamp, Label and Zone types concerns item (instance) sizes. Object Instance Sizes: Use these radio buttons to set how you want your placed objects (object instances) to store their parameter values. Store the ratio of current/default A/B sizes: Placed objects will proportionally follow any changes in default A and/or B parameters. Store fixed values: Placed objects will not change when their default A/B parameters are later changed. Hotspot on bounding box: Check this box (if applicable) to place five hotspots at the edges of the 2D symbol of the Library Part. These are independent of hotspots defined in the parts GDL script. These five hotspots will be located at the four corners and at the center of the symbols bounding box. The default hotspot used for placement of the object on your Project will be the lower left one of the five. (This is indicated by a heavy square highlighting the hotspots on the 2D symbol in the Tool Settings dialog for the Library Part, where you can change the active hotspot.) If you do not want the lower left corner of the bounding box to be the default hotspot, leave the checkbox unmarked and write the required hotspot(s) into the GDL script. In this case, the default will be the first hotspot encountered in the script. If neither bounding box nor GDL hotspots are specified, ArchiCAD will place hotspots at the corner of the Library Part bounding box and use this as the default.
1632
Fit Size to 2D Drawing: Check this box to transfer the current 2D Symbols X and Y axis dimensions into the default X and Y dimension fields of the Master Window. Note: This button is available only for Objects, Lamps and Zone Stamps.
Details (Door-Window)
Derived Sizes: Use the edit fields in this section of the dialog box to define the geometric relationship between the wall opening and the Door or Window. Use numerical GDL expressions. For a detailed description of scripting commands and object-level editing, see the GDL Reference Guide (in PDF format) in ArchiCAD 13/Graphisoft Documentation. Nominal Frame Thickness: Specify the Nominal Frame Thickness here. Parapet Wall Inset: Specify the Parapet Wall Inset here. Opening Oversizing: Specify opening oversizing relative to the nominal (A and B) sizes here for Y +, Y- (at the top and bottom) and X +, X- (at the right and left). Orientation Displaying: Use these controls to define the way the openings orientation is displayed (e.g., with R for right and L for left). Default: Click this button to display Door/Window opening orientation as a standard default setting. Reverse: Click this button to display Door/Window opening orientation in reverse as a standard default setting. Custom: Click this button to customize the display of Door/Window opening orientation. Contours: Choose an option to either display or hide the 3D contour of the selected Door/Window object (when shown in Wireframe or Hidden Line modes). Contours icon (left button): Click this icon to display the Wall opening outline around the Door/Window in 3D. No contour icon (right button): Click this icon to hide the Wall opening outline around the Door/Window in 3D.
Components
A series of Components can be assigned to each GDL Object, defining its composition for use in listing and calculation features. Clicking one of these buttons changes the right-hand side of the dialog box into an appropriate editor. DB Set: Select Database from this pop-up menu. Key: Select one of the Keys from this pop-up menu. Note: This pop-up menu is only available if your loaded library contains Key description. Code: Define a Code for new Components or modify the Code of a selected one in this box. Quantity: Define the Quantity for new Components or modify the Quantity of a selected one in this box. Unit: Select one of the predefined Units from this pop-up menu. Note: This pop-up menu is only available if your loaded library contains Unit description.
1633
Proportional with: Select one of the predefined GDL expressions from this pop-up menu, or select the Custom button and enter any GDL expression in the long edit box above. For details about Component Editing, see the ArchiCAD Calculation Guide.
Descriptors
A series of Descriptors can be assigned to each GDL Object, defining its composition for use in listing and calculation features. Clicking one of these buttons changes the right-hand side of the dialog box into an appropriate editor. Link to Database Item: Click this button to link a Component or Descriptor to an external database residing in the selected databases of the loaded Library. While a Component or Descriptor is linked to the selected database, it cannot be edited. To modify it, click the Remove Link to Database button to unlink the Component or Descriptor. Change Link: Click this to re-define an existing link to another external database Text: Click this button to open the Descriptor Full Text dialog box displaying the whole Descriptor text. Short Text: Enter Short Text for a new Descriptor in this box. For details about Descriptor Editing, see the ArchiCAD Calculation Guide.
Script Buttons
These buttons allow you to program your GDL Object. If you click the button itself, editing will take place inside the Master Window, while clicking the window icon next to the scripts name will open a separate window for entering or modifying the script. The Master Script will be executed each time any of the other scripts are executed. The primary benefit of this script is that you can globally define variables or operations, or access external data before executing other Scripts. In the 2D Script window, you can create a parametric 2D symbol using the transformations and elements available for the two-dimensional space in GDL. This script will be used to generate the 2D Full View of the Object. In the 3D Script window, you can find and edit the 3D description of the GDL Object. The script will be used to generate the 3D View of the Object. With the Property Script, you can attach descriptions and technical data to the Object using its variables and the related GDL commands and expressions. Component quantities (weight, price, paint, etc.) can be calculated according to the expressions in the Properties Script and included in the lists. To use the custom Properties Script as the default in the elements settings dialog box, click the Set as Default button at the top of the screen. Note: When there is a Property Script defined, the listing commands will use this script, even if you previously created Components and Descriptors in the corresponding sections of the dialog box. Using the Parameter Script, you can define the choices available as a value of a given parameter. For example, you can restrict the choice of the material of a table top to wooden materials, or define the different panel styles of a given door by their name. To use the custom
1634
Parameter Script as the default in the elements settings dialog box, click the Set as Default button at the top of the screen. The Interface Script allows you to define a custom user interface for your GDL Objects, including the graphic explanation of additional parameters. If an Interface Script exists, the settings dialog box of the given library part will include a Custom Settings panel. To use the custom Interface Script as the default in the elements settings dialog box, click the Set as Default button at the top of the screen. In the Comment window, you can add notes or messages to a GDL Object, including the web address of the manufacturer. This text can appear in the preview area of the Object type tools settings dialog boxes. For a detailed description of scripting GDL objects, see the GDL Reference Guide.
GDL Script Window Shortcuts

On top of all script windows, some commonly used functions are available in the form of buttons.
Clicking the first button transforms selected lines into comments, that is, lines that will not be executed in the script. Comments are identified by an exclamation mark at the beginning of the line. Note: You can select more than one line. The second button has the opposite effect: clicking it will transform any selected comments into executable lines. Clicking the third or fourth button will format the script window by tabulating selected paragraphs left or right. The last button checks the GDL Script of the active window. Note: When you are working in a Script window, all of these functions are also available as menu commands from the Edit menu, along with other special script window editing commands. Note: The Property, Interface and Parameter Script editing windows also include a Preview button to show a preview of the custom script.
2D Symbol
Clicking the 2D Symbol item opens a new editing window from the Master Window. Each GDL Object you place in your Project is shown on the plan by a 2D Symbol. You can edit an existing symbol or create a new one with the standard ArchiCAD selection and 2D tools: Arrow, Marquee, Text, Fill, Line, Arc/Circle, Spline and Hotspot. You can also paste elements from the 3D Window here. The final symbol that appears on the Floor Plan will be created from the elements of this window and the 2D Script, if there is one. The 2D Symbol Fragments switchboard located under the Preview Area of the Master Window lets you show and hide the Fragments of the 2D Symbol while you are viewing or editing it. There are 16 Fragments available for use with each GDL Object.
1635
Fragments work like Layers, and they are useful for organizing the various graphic elements (lines, arcs, text, etc.) that compose the plan symbol of the GDL Object. Fragments are especially useful for letting you easily replicate parts of the Symbol. You can draw a figure in the 2D Script Window with the various graphic tools, and refer to it by its Fragment number in a GDL 2D Script that incorporates the figure in the final symbol in a variety of rotated and translated positions. To set which Fragment you are drawing in when editing the 2D Script Window, choose a number from the Layers pop-up in the settings dialog box of the Tool you are using.
2D Full View
The 2D Full View window allows you to check the symbol that will be shown on the Floor Plan. If there is a 2D Script defined, the 2D Full View will be calculated according to the script, even if the 2D Symbol window contains drawing elements. However, the 2D Script can refer to 2D Symbol Fragments. To exit 2D symbol editing, close the symbol editing window or choose a different window, either from the Master Window, or from the Window menu.
3D View
In this window you can see the 3D view of the GDL Object converted from the 3D Script that refers to the current Parameter values. The viewpoint and other aspects are controlled using the View > 3D View Mode > 3D Window Settings dialog box or the 3D Navigation Palette. This will not affect your settings for the Projects 3D Window.
Preview Picture
In the Preview Picture window, you can attach characteristic graphical information to a GDL Object. The graphic is a PICT (MacOS) or BMP (Windows) type image and does not affect the Objects behavior or appearance in any way. This preview is displayed as the default representation of your Object in its tool settings dialog box, as well as next to library objects listed in a browsing window. To generate the preview of a new Object: 1) Place the Object in the Project. 2) Select the placed Object and choose View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings. Choose a projection type and set up a view angle that show the typical features of your Object. Click OK. 3) Choose Image > 3D Image Settings. Set the windows height and width to the same value to obtain a square shaped window. 4) Check the result in the 3D Window. 5) Choose Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings. In the Resulting Image area, define a 128 by 128 pixel size that you will be able to insert in the preview without any distortion, and choose a neutral background for the Object (for example, white color for both the Sky and the Ground). 1636
6) With the Object still selected, choose Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRender Projection. A Model Picture is generated. 7) Choose Edit > Select All, then Edit > Copy. 8) Go back to the Floor Plan. With the Object still selected, choose File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object. This will open the Master Window of the selected Object. 9) Click the Preview Picture icon to open the corresponding window, then choose Edit > Paste. 10)Save the GDL Object. You can also paste other data from the clipboard, for example a photograph of the real-life object.
Matching 2D & 3D Descriptions

The 2D symbol and the 3D description are automatically linked to each other in the GDL Object. There are no built-in safeguards against geometric incompatibilities between the two components. The most common incompatibility error occurs when the 2D symbol and the 3D shape have different positions or orientations with respect to the origin. To avoid this problem, follow these steps: 1) Activate the 3D View of the GDL Object. 2) Choose Top View in View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projections Settings > Parallel Projections, and set the angle to 270. 3) Choose Edit > Select All, then Edit > Copy. Activate the GDL Objects 2D Symbol window and choose Edit > Paste. This will place the top view of the object (as a wireframe or hidden line) into the symbol window. It should match the dimensions and position of the 2D symbol. 4) Choose Undo once you have verified that the symbol matches the 3D view. This will remove the 3D lines. You can use this feature to have ArchiCAD create the 2D symbol for you. You will only need to add additional hotspots, line types, etc. The procedure is the same for Doors and Windows, with the following modifications: Choose Side View instead of Top View (the angle should still be 270). A mirrored view will be placed. Select the placed lines and mirror them across the reference line of the wall. Note: When you place a wireframe view, redundant lines are removed. Using Hidden Lines (analytic) will give you an accurate view, but underlying lines will be hidden. You can also ensure compatibility between the 2D plan symbol and the 3D model of a GDL Object by writing a parametric description in GDL for the symbol.
1637
Text Editing Commands in GDL Script Windows

These commands in the ArchiCAD Edit menu are active only if one of the library part script windows is active: Master, 2D, 3D, Property, Parameter, Interface, Comment. Other Edit menu commands that are useful in GDL Script Windows are described at: Editing Commands in Text-Type Windows. See also Script Buttons and GDL Script Window Shortcuts.
Comment
The Comment command adds exclamation marks (!) in front of selected lines in a GDL script window. Note: This commands is also available as a shortcut at the top of the GDL script windows:
Uncomment
The Uncomment command removes the exclamation marks from selected lines in a GDL script window. This feature is useful if you wish to visualize only a part of your script. You can comment or uncomment the whole contents of the Window by first choosing the Select All command from the Edit menu. Note: This commands is also available as a shortcut at the top of the GDL script windows:
Increase Indent/Decrease Indent

These commands will place/remove the number of spaces defined in the Text Window Format dialog box for tabs at the beginning of the paragraph. Notes: These commands are also available as shortcuts at the bottom of the GDL script windows:
Check Script
With this command, you can check whether the syntax of the GDL script in the active Window is correct. If you wish to check all the scripts of the current Library Part, activate its Master Window before choosing the command. Note: This command is also available as a shortcut at the bottom of the GDL script window.
1638
Open Debugger
This command is only active when a GDL Script Window is in front and allows you to debug GDL Scripts.
1639
About GDL Object Subtypes

All GDL Objects have a subtype, organized in a tree hierarchy based on the IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) entity structure. Note: IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/downloads/ Subtypes allow you to organize your library parts into a logical system. Add-Ons also use subtypes to identify their corresponding library parts. ArchiCAD subtypes are controlled by subtype object templates. When you create a new GDL Object, ArchiCAD will allow you to choose one of the available subtypes for your element. Each subtype has a set of compulsory parameters that define the behavior or functionality of the elements that belong to it. Some of the subtypes include additional features called handlers. These define whether the elements that belong to the subtype can be accessed as general objects by clicking the Object tools icon and choosing them in the Object Settings dialog box, or as specific objects that either have their own tool icon in the Toolbox (for example Door, Window, Corner Window, Skylight, Label, Stair) or are placed by special commands or functions (for example Zone stamps and RoofMaker objects). To locate an element by subtype, choose File >Libraries and Objects > Open Object. From the Files of Type drop-down list, choose the subtype of the objects you wish to browse.
1640
Subtype Hierarchy Dialog Box (GDL Master Window)

This dialog box is accessible using the Select Subtype button in the GDL Master window (File > Libraries and Objects > New Object)
or is available on the Edit GDL Library Parts toolbar (Window > Toolbars > Edit GDL Library Parts). You can add it to your ArchiCAD menu structure using the Work Environment dialog box.
The items listed by name in the Subtype Hierarchy are color-coded. Green indicates that the item is placeable. Black indicates that the item cannot be placed on its own and can be only used as a macro reference. Bold type indicates that the item is a subtype template and is placeable. If you highlight an item in the hierarchy, you can review its Properties in the bottom section. Below the Name field, the GUID refers to the highlighted Subtypes Global Unique Identification code. See Identifying Duplicates Among Library Parts for more information on GUIDs. For a complete description of how GUID works, see http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ ArchiCAD/archiguide/guid.html Select: Click this button to directly open that items Master Window. Create Clone: Click this button to create a copy of the highlighted Subtype with the same properties.
Changing an Objects Subtype

To change the subtype of a placed object, select it, open it (File > Libraries and Objects > Open Object) and click the Select Subtype button at the top of the dialog box. Changing the Objects subtype modifies its behavior and adds the parameters and functionality needed for the new subtype.
1641
Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule)

To access this dialog box, do one of the following: Choose Document > Schedules and Lists > Schedules > Scheme Settings command. Use the Schedules context menu in the Navigator. Select a Schedule from the Navigator, then click the Settings button at the bottom of the Navigator panel. For more information, see Interactive Schedule.
Schemes Panel
The scrollable box on the left lists the available Schedule Schemes defined for your project. Select a name to edit its properties in the Criteria and Fields panels. Create New: Click this button to create a new Schedule Scheme. In the dialog box that opens, choose either Construction Elements or Components, depending on whether you are creating an Element Schedule or a Component Schedule. Enter a name and an optional ID for the new Scheme. Rename: Click this button to rename the Schedule Scheme selected on the left. In the dialog box that opens, enter a new name and an optional ID. Delete: Click this button to delete the Schedule Scheme selected on the left. Import: Click this button to import an interactive Element Schedule file created with ArchiCAD 8 or above or a Door or Window Schedule file created with ArchiCAD 7.0. Export: Click this button to export an interactive Element Schedule file that you will be able to import into another project.
Schemes Criteria Panel

This panel lists the criteria and values defined for the scheme selected on the Schemes panel. Clicking a row in the list selects it and makes its fields available for modification. Criteria column: Lists the criteria defined for the scheme. Click the pop-up arrow to choose a criterion (e.g. Element Type). The next column includes the relationship between the criterion and the value (is, is not, is equal to, is larger than, starts with, etc.), depending on particular criterion. Choose a condition by clicking the arrow. Value column: Shows the value assigned to the criterion. Depending on the type of the criterion, you can type a value manually or choose from pop-up controls. Add: Click this button to add a new row. The and/or operator determines the relationship between adjacent criteria. The Open Parentheses and Close Parentheses columns enable you to set up nested criteria for more complex schemes. Each open must have a corresponding close in order for the scheme to be logical. If there is a mistake in your parentheses logic, the Criteria invalid! warning appears at the bottom of the panel. Remove: Click this button to delete the selected row. Inactive if no row is selected. 1642
Click and drag the up/down arrow at the beginning of any row to move the row up or down within the Scheme.
Additional Parameters
On the Criteria Panel: Click this button to open the Additional Parameters dialog box and make the parameters of loaded library parts available for listing as criteria. The button is only active if you have chosen as a criterion a library part type of element (Object, Door, Window, Lamp or Zone). On the Field Panel: Click this button to open the Additional Parameters dialog box and make the parameters of loaded library parts available as schedule fields. Using these parameters as fields only makes sense if the library part type of element (Object, Door, Window, Lamp or Zone) chosen as a criterion on the Criteria panel includes the given parameter. Select Object by: Use the pop-up on the right to choose an option for searching for objects to select. Folder View: lists all the loaded library folders that contain library parts. Folder View (Used Objects only): lists the loaded library folders that contain the library parts used in the current project When you deploy a folder, only the names of the actually used parts will appear. Search Criteria: displays a form that allows you to list the library parts whose name matches the chosen criteria. Favorite Objects: shows the preview and the name of the library parts defined as Favorites. Search Object: If the Search Criteria option is active in the Select Object by pop-up field, this area allows you to search for library parts whose name matches some criteria. Find names which: With the pop-up control, choose a condition (match, contain, start with, end with) and enter a text string in the field on the right. Search in: Use this pop-up control to choose a loaded library to search. Click the Find button to display the results in the Library parts found box. Find: Click this button to perform a search based on the condition set with the Find names with and Search in controls. Library parts found: Displays the preview and names of the library parts that match the condition set with the Find names with and Search in controls. Available Parameters: This box lists all the parameters of the library part selected in the Select Object by area on top of the dialog box with their Variable name, Type and Name. Selected Parameters: This box lists all the library part parameters added from the list of Available Parameters with their Variable name, Type and Name. Add: Click this button to add the available parameter selected in the box on the left to the list of selected parameters on the right. Remove: Click this button to delete the selected field from the box on the right.
Schemes Fields Panel

Available Parameters: This box lists all the parameters that can be used as fields of the element schedule. Parameters are grouped in two types: General parameters and element-type specific
1643
parameters. Click the + sign to reveal the entire list of available parameters, then select a parameter and click the Add button at the bottom to display it on the right. Schedule Fields: This box lists the parameters added from the box on the left and that will be displayed as fields of the element schedule. Parameters that cannot be edited in the schedule are shown in blue while editable ones are shown in black type. You can change the order of the fields by dragging them up and down with the double arrows on the left. For each selected schedule field, 3 buttons are available at the right to fine-tune sorting criteria. Display an up/down arrow to sort the items of this field in ascending/descending order; or leave this field blank, for None. None means that this field will not be taken into consideration when sorting. Display a sum to add a schedule cell that will contain the sum total for all items of this field. To show the quantity of items (rather than their sum), choose the sum1 icon. Display the flag icon next to the one schedule field for which you want to display subtotal cells in the schedule, as well as sum/quantity cells. Add: Click this button to add the additional parameter selected in the box on the left as a schedule field appearing in the box on the right. Remove: Click this button to delete the selected field from the box on the right. Once the new (or modified) scheme is defined, its name appears in the Navigator and you can use it like any other view.
1644
Format Options (Interactive Schedule)

Formatting options for Interactive Schedules are available at the top and sides of every Interactive Schedule window. To open an Interactive Schedule, go to the Navigator palette and double-click its name. For general information on this feature, see Interactive Schedule. Alternately, you can also choose an existing Schedule from the list of items in the Window menu or from the list of items in the View > Navigate > Schedules > Open Schedule dialog box. To adjust individual row or column heights, manually drag the tabs on the top and left side of the schedule. Double-click any tab to fit the cell to its contents.
Style: The two options of this pop-up list define whether the Element Schedule will display the record fields by rows or by columns, that is, in a horizontal or vertical arrangement. Show uniform items as a single entry: If this checkbox is active, identical items will be grouped in the schedule in a single record. If it is inactive, all items will be listed individually.
1645
Show headline: check this box to insert a separate row above the rest of the fields. Click Headline Settings to define the content and appearance of this headline:
First schedule field: The first field of the schedule will be displayed in the headline. If the records are displayed by columns, the first parameter appears in a separate column left of the other parameters. Insert separator row before headlines: If this checkbox is active, there will be an empty row included before each headline row. Add Header text to headlines as prefix: If this checkbox is active, the Header name will be appear as a prefix to its value in the headline row. Apply Format Options to: Choose the items that you will format with the controls below. Formatting can either affect the Entire Schedule or any of its items: Header, Headline Separator, Headline, Value, Total, Grand Total or Preview. The controls below change dynamically according to the choice you make here.
Font: Use this pop-up field to choose a font type for the item type selected in the Apply to pop-up menu above. Encoding: Use this pop-up menu to choose a regional font encoding for the item type selected in the Apply to pop-up field above. Row Height: Available if the Apply to field is set to Entire Schedule. Enter the default row height for this Schedule in the unit defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. 1646
Text Height: Enter the height of the capital letters in the Schedule or Schedule item selected in the Apply to pop-up menu above in mm (metric units) or points (imperial units), depending on the choice defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. Font Pen: Choose a pencolor with the numeric field or the pop-up control for the Schedule or Schedule item selected in the Apply to pop-up field above. Font Style: Select font styles (bold, italic, underline) for the Schedule item selected in the Apply to pop-up menu above by clicking the corresponding buttons. More than one style can be active at the same time. Greyed if you have selected Entire Schedule or Header in the Apply to pop-up field. Headers can be customized individually: click inside a header cell to activate these font style buttons for the active Header. Align: Choose an alignment option (left, center, right, by decimal marker) for the contents of the selected cell. Greyed if you have not selected a cell. Enable Objects Pen: Available if the Apply to field is set to Preview. If this checkbox is active, the pencolors defined for the Objects (Doors, Windows, Lamps, Zones) outline will be used for the preview picture shown in the corresponding fields of the schedule. If it is inactive, you can choose a pencolor with the numeric field or pop-up palette below. Align preview to: Available if the Apply to field is set to Preview. If you check the Reduce preview checkbox below, this option is greyed. Choose one of the pop-up options to align the door/window preview pictures in this schedule within their cells: either at the Center, Top or Bottom of the cell, or (for 3D previews only) to correspond to their relative elevations from the chosen reference level (Story Zero, Project Zero, or other defined reference level.) Reduce preview to fit into cell: Available if the Apply to field is set to Preview. Check this box to resize each Preview picture to fit into their cells. Add automatic dimensions: Available if the Apply to field is set to Preview. Check this box to add dimensioning to Preview pictures of any doors/windows in this schedule. Dimensions are associative; if the door/window is modified in the project, its dimensions in its preview picture in the Interactive Schedule will be updated. Note: You can add dimensions manually to any Preview picture by double-clicking its cell. See Add Annotations to Schedule Previews. Border Pen: Choose a pencolor with the numeric field or the pop-up menu for the preview picture shown in the schedule, if any. Greyed if the Enable Objects Pen checkbox is active. Cell Border: Use this pop-up palette to choose a border option for the Schedule item selected in the Apply to pop-up field or by clicking in a cell of that type in the schedule itself. None: No border will be drawn for the selected Schedule item type. Border: Lines of the type selected below will be drawn on all sides of the selected Schedule item type. Separator Only: A line of the type selected below will be drawn below each occurrence of the selected Schedule item type. If the records are displayed by columns, the line will be drawn on the right. Border Line Type: Use this pop-up palette to choose a line type for the border lines of the selected Schedule item type.
1647
Border Pen: Choose a pencolor with the numeric field or the pop-up palette for the border lines of the selected Schedule item type. Cancel/Redo Format Change: Click these buttons to cancel the last changes made to the formatting of the schedule, or to return to the previously cancelled state (redo).
Footer Settings
Click this button to open the Footer Settings dialog and define a footer for the Schedule: Enable Print Footer: Activating this checkbox allows you to add a footer to the Schedule when printed. The footer does not appear on your screen, only a preview of its content is shown in the Preview area at the bottom of this dialog box. Content: This area includes the controls for the content of the printable footer. The items whose checkbox is active will be included in the footer. Use the double arrows on the left to modify the order of footer items. Date: Check this box to include the current date in the printable footer according to your system settings. Time: Check this box to include the current time in the printable footer according to your system settings. Page Number: Check this box to include the page numbers of the Schedule in the printable footer. Page X of Y: Check this box to include both the number of the individual Schedules page and the total number of pages in the printable footer. Project File Name: Check this box to include the name of the current project file in the printable footer. Text Properties: This area includes the controls for the format of the printable footer. The controls act on all of the items. Font: Use this pop-up field choose a font type for the content of the printable footer. Encoding: Use this pop-up field choose a regional font encoding for the content of the printable footer. Row Height: Enter the height of the line including the content of the printable footer in the unit defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. Text Height: Enter the height of the capital letters of the printable footer in mm (metric units) or points (imperial units), depending on the choice defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units. Font Pen: Choose a pencolor with the numeric field or the pop-up palette for the content of the printable footer. Alignment: Choose an alignment option (left, center, right) with the pop-up palette for the content of the printable footer. Preview: This area shows the preview of the content of the printable footer. The text properties cannot be previewed.
1648
Header Options
The commands of this pop-up menu refer to the schedules Header and sub-header fields. Deleted selected cell: This is only active if you have manually created a subheader, and have selected that cell for deletion. Not available in any other type of header or other cell. Insert header cell above: Use this command to create a sub-header for the schedule. First, select two or more headers (use Shift-click to select multiple cells). Then execute the Insert header cell above command. A new cell (named merged by default) appears above the selected headers. You can then manually edit the name of this header. Any number of subheaders can be created in a hierarchical order. Note: This command is not available if you have not selected at least two contiguous header cells. Hide/Show main header: Hides and shows again the main header cell in the Schedule. Hide/Show column (row) headers: Hides and shows again all header cells in the Schedule except for the main header. Select on Floor Plan: Click this button to select on the Floor Plan the element selected in the Schedule. Not available if you have not selected an element. Freeze Schedule Header: Activating this checkbox ensures that the header rows (or columns) remain visible when you need to scroll down the elements listed in the schedule. Not available if both the main and column headers have been made invisible in the Header Options pop-up menu. Scheme Settings Button: Click this button to open the Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) and modify the settings (criteria, fields) of the scheme that this Schedule is based on.
1649
Index Settings Dialog Box

For more information, see Project Indexes. To access this dialog box, do one of the following: Choose Document > Project Indexes > Project Index Schemes command. Use the Project Indexs context menu in the Navigator Project Map structure. Select Project Indexes in the Navigator Project Map structure and click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator panel. Select an Index in the Navigator View Map structure and use its context menu.
Indexes Panel
The scrollable box on the left lists the available Indexes defined for you project. Select a name to edit its properties in the Criteria and Fields panels. Create New: Click this button to create a new Index. Choose the type of items to list in the index: Views, Sheets (Layouts) or Drawings. In the dialog box that opens, enter a name and an optional ID for the new Index. Duplicate: Click this button to duplicate the selected Index before editing it. Choose a new name and ID number in the appearing dialog box. Rename: Click this button to rename the Index selected on the left. In the dialog box that opens, enter a new name and an optional ID. Delete: Click this button to delete the Index selected on the left. Import: Click this button to import an Index created in the interactive schedule file format. Export: Click this button to export an Index in the interactive schedule file format that you will be able to import into another project.
Index Criteria Panel

The scrollable box on top of this list displays the criteria and values defined for the type of index you are creating (views, sheets or drawings). Clicking an item in the list selects it and makes its fields available for modification. Add: Click this button to add a new criterion. Remove: Click this button to delete from the list the selected criterion. Inactive if there is no selected criterion. Criteria column: Lists the criteria defined for the index. Click the Add button at the bottom to add a criterion. Select a criterion and click the Remove button at the bottom to delete it. Basically, each criterion has a single condition, but you can add more conditions by clicking the + sign on the right edge of the selected row. In this case, no name appears in the Criteria column and this condition refers to the criterion above. The next column includes the condition, that is, the relationship between the criterion and the value (is equal to, is larger than, is smaller than, etc.) depending on the type of the criterion. Choose a condition by clicking the arrow. 1650
Value column: Shows the value assigned to the criterion. Depending on the type of the criterion, you can type a value manually, choose from a pop-up control or use a checkbox.
Index Fields Panel

Available Parameters: This box lists all the parameters that can be used as fields of the index. Click the + sign to reveal the entire list of available parameters, then select a parameter and click the Add button at the bottom to display it on the right. Index Fields: This box lists the parameters added from the box on the left and that will be displayed as fields of the index. Parameters that cannot be edited in the index are shown in blue while editable ones are shown in black type. You can change the order of the fields by dragging them up and down with the double arrows on the left. The long arrow pointing upwards or downwards on the right defines the sorting order according to the given field. Add: Click this button to add the additional parameter selected in the box on the left as an index field appearing in the box on the right. Remove: Click this button to delete the selected field from the box on the right.
1651
View Settings Dialog Box

Use the controls in the View Settings dialog box to adjust the settings of the currently selected view. For more information, see Setting up a View and Saving a View. To open this dialog box, select a View from the View Map of the Navigator/Organizer. Then do one of the following: Use the Views context menu in the Navigator/Organizer. Click the View Settings icon in the Navigator/Organizer. For more information, see View Map Buttons. Click Settings button at the bottom of the Navigator View Map. Get Current Windows Settings: Click this button to overwrite the settings in this dialog box to correspond to the view currently in effect in the active (frontmost) window.
View Settings Identification Panel

ID: Choose a method for assigning an ID to this view: None, Custom (enter desired ID in adjoining text field), or By Project Map. By Project Map means that the view will inherit the ID from its corresponding Viewpoint in the Project Map. Name: Choose a method for assigning a name to this view: either Custom (enter desired name in adjoining text field), or By Project Map. By Project Map means that the view will inherit its Name from its corresponding Viewpoint in the Project map. Source: This field provides feedback on the views source viewpoint, or the file path of its source file.
View Settings General Panel

Layer Combination: Choose a Layer Combination to be applied to this view. For more information, see Apply a Layer Combination. Scale: Choose a Scale to be applied to this view. For more information, see Scale. Structure Display: Choose a Partial Structure Display setting for this view. For more information, see Partial Structure Display. If this pop-up is grey: This means that the original viewpoint is either Manual Update or Drawing, so you cannot edit the Partial Structure Display of this view. You can change the viewpoint to Auto Update, or else create a new view using the Partial Structure Display setting you need. Pen Set: Choose a Pen Set to be used with this view. For more information, see Pens & Colors.
1652
Model View Options: Choose a Model View Option Combination to be applied to this view. For more information, see Model View Options.
View Settings 2D/3D Documents Panel

Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings: Click this button to access the Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings dialog box. Any adjustments to these settings will be applied to this view only, not to the project as a whole. For more information, see Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting). Dimensions: Choose a Dimensioning standard from this pop-up menu. The standard you choose here will be applied to this view only, not to the project as a whole. For more information, see Dimensions Preferences. Zooming: Choose a zoom to save with this view:
- Current Zoom: Once a view is saved at Current Zoom, that setting is henceforth called Zoomed Area in this pop-up list. - Fit in Window: whenever you open this view, or whenever drawings from this view are updated or published, they will be displayed to include the project windows entire contents, subject to Layer status - any custom-named Zoom you have saved earlier. (See Save Zooms.) For more information, see Zoom. Ignore zoom when opening this view: If this box is checked, then whenever you open this view, it will be displayed using the zoom value of the last opened ArchiCAD window. The saved zoom level of this view will still be applied when you place this view as a Drawing, or publish it.
View Settings 3D Only Panel

Generate in: Choose whether to generate the 3D view in the 3D window or in the PhotoRendering window. For more information, see 3D Projections and PhotoRendering. This panel also provides feedback on how the 3D-related settings (collectively Image settings) are saved with the current view. Redefine Image settings with current: Check this box if you want to overwrite the stored Image settings with the Image settings now in effect in the current (frontmost) window. Note: Image settings are the following: 3D projection settings (including zooming and sun settings), filter elements in 3D, 3D window settings, 3D cutting planes, 3D cutaway and photo rendering settings.
1653
If you check this box, the panel will then provide information on whether the 3D view in the current (frontmost) window has been filtered or limited by a marquee. If you now click OK to close the View Settings dialog box, the 3D view will be redefined accordingly (i.e. it will only display the filtered or selected elements).
1654
Book Settings Dialog Box

To access this dialog box, do one of the following: Use the Document > Layout Book > Book Settings command. Use the context menu of the Layout Book icon in the Navigator Layout Book structure, or the Settings button at the bottom of the Navigator when the Layout Book icon is selected in the tree view. For more information, see Layout Book Buttons.
IDs of Items in this Book Panel

The Use Hierarchy option assigns IDs that reflect the position of the Layouts within the tree view hierarchy, including their position in Subsets. In this system, the Subsets can also receive an ID, which shows up as part of the ID assigned to each of its Layouts. Subset IDs are defined in Subset Settings. For more information, see Subset Settings Dialog Box. The Use Flat Layout Order option assigns IDs to all the Layouts of the Book. The ID assignment is performed in the Navigator from top to bottom regardless of the Layouts position in the hierarchy. In this case, Subsets will have no IDs. The Layout IDs will use the prefix and style you define here. For more information, see Layout and Drawing IDs.
1655
Subset Settings Dialog Box

Subset Settings provides a way to assign IDs to the Layouts contained in the selected Subset. The ID definitions in Subset Settings are applied if you have selected Use Hierarchy as the ID assignment method in Book Settings. The Subset Settings dialog box can be accessed from the Navigator in one of three ways, provided that the Tree by Subsets view is displayed and the given Subset is selected: Click the Settings button at the bottom of the Navigator palette. Choose the Subset Settings command in the context menu opened by right-clicking (or Ctrlclicking) the name of the Subset. Click the Settings icon at the middle of the Navigator palette. For more information, see Layout Book Buttons.
Subset Identification Panel

Use the controls in this panel to assign an ID to the selected subset. For more information, see Layout and Drawing IDs. Do not include this Subset in ID sequence: Check this box to exclude the Subset from automatic ID assignment. (If you check this box, the following option for automatic ID assignment is greyed.) Assign ID Automatically: Choose this option to assign an ID automatically, based on the Prefix and Style defined in Book Settings. Custom ID: Choose this option to assign a Subset ID of your choice.
1656
IDs of Items in this Subset Panel

These controls affect the IDs of Layouts contained in this Subset. Continue Using ID Assignment of Upper Levels: Check this option if you want Layouts within this Subset to be assigned IDs as if they were not within this Subset, but rather part of the level above. In this case you are only using the Subset as a logical grouping which has no effect on IDs. Customize ID assignment: Check this option if you want the Layouts inside the Subset to be assigned custom IDs: - Use Prefix & IDs of Upper Levels: Layouts in this subset will be assigned IDs based on the previous Layout in the Layout Book structure. - Add Prefix for this Subset: Note: When IDs by letters exhausts the alphabet, the numbering continues as follows: y, z, aa, ab, ac. (The initial letter in double-letter numbering always consists of a single character regardless of the language being used.) When moving a Subset within the hierarchy, IDs are automatically adjusted accordingly.
Subset Preview Panel

This area shows a preview of the ID style you have selected.
1657
Layout Settings
The Layout Settings dialog box contains information about the selected Layout. To access this dialog box, select a Layout - either by opening it in the Layout window, or by selecting it from the Navigator/Organizer. Then do one of the following: Choose Document > Layout Book > Layout Settings command. Use the Layouts context menu in the Navigator. Click the Settings icon at the middle of the Navigator panel. For more information, see Layout Book Buttons. Click Settings at the bottom of the Navigator panel.
Layout Identification Panel

For more information, see Layout and Drawing IDs. Do not include this Layout in ID sequence: Check to exclude the current layout from the automated layout ID assignment. Use Automatic Book and Subset ID assignment: Check to apply the automated layout book and subset ID assignment to the current Layout, as defined in Book Settings. For more information, see Book Settings Dialog Box. Custom ID: Check to apply a unique ID to the current layout. Name: Enter a Name for the Layout.
Layout General Settings Panel

Master Layout: Select a Master Layout from the pop-up menu. For more information, see Master Layouts. Size: This field provides information on the horizontal and vertical size of the current layout (as defined in its Master Layout).
IDs of Drawings on this Layout Panel

Settings in this panel will determine the IDs of all Drawings placed on this Layout, provided that the Drawing ID is set to By Layout in the Identification panel of its Drawing Settings dialog box. For more information, see Drawing Identification Panel. Continue Drawing ID sequence from previous Layout: Check this box to assign an ID by continuing the ID sequence from the previous layout.n (This control is greyed if the selected Layout is the first one in the Layout Book.) ID Prefix: Enter item prefix characters for the drawing ID. ID Style: Choose any of the listed ID styles from this pop-up field. Start at: Enter either a number or a letter (depending on the selected ID style) with which to begin the ID sequence. Preview: This area shows a preview of the ID style you have selected. 1658
Import Views from ArchiCAD Project

For an overview, see Placing Drawings Onto the Layout. This dialog box appears if you are placing a Drawing into your project in one of two ways: You have chosen File > External Content > Place External Drawing and selected an ArchiCAD Project (.pln; .pla; .bpn) file type, or You have clicked with the Drawing Tool in the Layout Window, then either selected an ArchiCAD solo project file, or browsed for an external Teamwork project. In this second case, you can only select a single view, and the placement options on the right side are greyed. Choose the view, then click Select to place it in the open Layout Window.
Check items to import: This list displays, in a tree structure, all the Views of the chosen project. Click the checkbox of each item that you wish to import into the active project. (The View Settings of any individual selected view are displayed at the bottom of the dialog box.) list. If the Layout Window is open, you are placing a Drawing onto an open Layout Window, you can only choose a single view here. Click. Checking a box in front of a folder name will select all the Views in that folder. Choose a radio button at right to define where to place the imported drawings. Place Drawings on Current Layout: Place each selected View as a Drawing onto the currently active Layout. Insert new Layouts in Selected Layout Book Subset: Place each View onto a New Layout in the Subset (provided that a Subset was selected in the Navigator palette prior to choosing the Place External Drawing command). Note: This option is inactive if no Subset has been selected in the Navigator, or if multiple Navigator tree structures are open with several selected subsets.
1659
Append new Layouts to Layout Book: Place each View as a Drawing onto a new Layout appended to the Layout Book Note: After importing items from this file, its tree structure will henceforth be displayed in the Navigator, so you will be able to drag and drop further items easily. Use Source Hierarchy: Check this box to retain the hierarchy of the source folder: the current project will recreate the same folder structure inside the Navigator palette.
1660
Master Layout Settings

For general information, see Master Layouts. Access the Master Layout Settings dialog box using one of the following methods: from the context menu, after clicking a Master Layout in the Navigator with the right mouse button with the Settings button in the Navigator Layout Book, after selecting a Master Layout in the Navigator with the Document > Layout Book > Master Layout Settings command
Name and Size
Note: Length units defined for the Master Layout are Layout units, defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.) Name: Enter a Name for the Master Layout in the text field. Size: Define the Master Layout size using the standard paper sizes listed in the drop-down list, or the Custom option. The two fields below give you feedback on the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the Layout. Margins: Enter values for the Master layouts four margins in the text fields. Choose Portrait or Landscape as the Master Layouts orientation. Printable area: This area gives you feedback on the Master Layouts printable area (taking its Size and Margins into consideration). Anchor Point: Click one of the nine points to use as an anchor for your master layout. Display Master Layout: Choose an option for displaying Master Layout items with respect to other Layout items. Above Layout: Master Layout items will be placed on top of the Layout (in some cases, obscuring some of the Layout content).
1661
Below Layout: Master Layout items will be displayed behind the Layout. Contents of the Layout may obscure some Master Layout items.
Drawing Placement
Choose one of the two logics for placing multiple drawings on the layout. Note: The default logic is Auto Arrange. If you are placing only a single drawing on the Layout, it will be placed in the center of the Layout.
Auto Arrange New Drawings

If you choose this option, click Auto Arrange Setup to see the settings for drawing placement. Direction: Choose either horizontal or vertical to determine the direction in which subsequent drawings are placed on the Layout. Distance from Margin: For each of the four sides of the Layout, define a margin of space. Sequence by: When placing multiple drawings at once, the Sequence setting determines the order in which they appear on the Layout. Name/ID: Alphabetical by name; in case of identical names, drawings are placed in order of ID (numerical or alphabetical). ID/Name: In ID order; in case of identical IDs, drawings are placed according to their name (alphabetical order). Navigator position: Drawings are placed in the order (top to bottom) that they are listed in the Navigator View Map. (Floor Plans are an exception; they are placed according to their View Map order from the bottom up, e.g. Story 1, 2, 3...). Insert break between sequences: Sequence depends on your choice in the Sequence by options above: if you are sequencing by Name/ID (or ID/Name) then checking this box means that a new row/column will be started every time the Name (or ID) changes. If you are sequencing by Navigator position, then a new row/column is begun for each new folder in the Navigator View Map. For example, Drawings from the Details folder will be placed in one row, from the Sections folder in the next, etc. Gap Between Drawings: Define the length of the gaps between the rows and columns of placed drawings. (Length units here are Layout units, defined in Options > Project Preferences > Working Units.) Create New when Layout is Full: Checking this box means that a new Layout is created if the current layout is full.
1662
Align and Assign Drawings to a Grid

If you choose this option, click Grid Setup to access the grid settings options. ID Logic: Click one of the radio buttons to select a method for assigning an ID to each grid cell. Matrix: With the Matrix option, each cell is assigned a coordinate corresponding to its column and row numbers. Flat: With the Flat option, each cell is assigned an ID consecutively from a corner of the grid. Number of Cells: Use the text fields and/or arrow controls to choose the number of columns and rows in your Grid. Depending on which ID assignment logic you choose (Matrix or Flat), the subsequent controls will vary. If you are using Matrix: Direction and Style: The group of controls on the left refers to the IDs of the grids columns. Click an arrow to define whether IDs should be assigned to grid columns from right to left or from left to right. Choose an ID style for the columns from the list. The controls to the right refer to the IDs of the grids rows. Click an arrow to define whether IDs should be assigned to rows from bottom to top or from top to bottom. Choose an ID style for the rows from the list. Drawing ID Format: Each cell ID is composed of a row number and a column number. Click one of the two radio buttons to define whether the row or column number should come first in the Drawing Number: Row, then Column, or Column, then Row If you are using the Flat method: Start From: Use this pop-up field to choose which corner of the grid to use as the starting point for assigning cell IDs. Style: Choose an ID Style from this pop-up menu. Primary Direction: Click one of the two radio buttons to define the direction (horizontal or vertical) in which to assign the cell IDs, starting from the corner you designated in the Start From option. The rest of the controls in the panel are general settings which apply to the Grid regardless of ID logic. Distance from Margin: Enter values in the four text fields to define the distance of the Grid from the paper margin (top, bottom, left and right). Grid line type: Use the line type and pencolor pop-ups to define a line type and pencolor (or enter a pen number) for the gridlines. Grid line display: Choose an option for displaying the grid on the layout: Show all Hide all
1663
Hide all which intersect with a drawing: If your drawing occupies more than one cell, it will intersect with a grid line. Check this option to hide those grid lines. Note: These Grid line display settings will also affect printed output.
Drawings occupying multiple cells: Some drawings will occupy space in more than one cell. In such a case, use this pop-up field to define which cell ID should be assigned as the drawing ID (You will choose one of the drawings four corners; the ID of the cell which that corner occupies becomes the drawing ID.) Preview: The Preview picture at the bottom right gives you an idea of the end result of your Numbering Grid settings. Set as Default for New Layouts: Check this box if you want this Master Layout to serve as the default Master Layout for new Layouts.
1664
Drawing Manager
For more information, see Managing and Updating Placed Drawings. To open the Drawing Manager, do one of the following: choose File > External Content > Drawing Manager click the Drawing Manager icon from the pop-up menu at the upper left corner of the Navigator/Organizer:
choose Window > Palettes > Drawing Manager The top left corner contains four commands (icons). These commands are active only if one or more drawings is selected in the Drawing Managers drawing list: Chain icon: Click this button to link the selected drawing to either an external source or an internal view. Chain icon crossed out: Click this button to break the link of the selected drawing. A warning window will ask whether you want to permanently break the current link. Green circling arrows: Click on this button and your drawing will be permanently updated. (This command icon is also available in the Navigator Layout Book.) Red X: Click this button to delete the selected drawing(s) after confirming the warning message. Note: Deleting a drawing is undoable ONLY if the window containing the drawing is active at the time you delete it. Check Status: Click on this button to check the update status of the selected drawing(s), if its status shows Needs Checking. The main part of the Drawing Manager lists all the Drawings in the Project (in both Layout Book and Model views) together with their properties. By default, the Type, ID, Name, Status, Layout (Placed to), Source View and Path are shown for each drawing. You can sort items by any of these properties by clicking on its column header. You can then perform a secondary sorting function: clicking a second column header will further sort within the hierarchy obtained by the first sorting. To customize the list columns, right-click any column header to bring up a list of available columns, or click the black arrow at the right end of the list columns. Toggle these on and off as needed.The column widths can be graphically resized. Each column lists a drawing property: T: The icon in the T column indicates the Drawings source type (e.g. a Floor Plan view or a PDF file). ID: Shows Drawing ID. Name: Shows Drawing name. Status: Shows one of the following update statuses for the selected Drawing: OK: Drawing is updated. Modified: Source has been modified. Click the Update button to update the drawing. Missing: The source of the linked drawing cannot be found.
1665
Not Accessible: The source file is either a Teamwork file (a Teamwork file format from a pre13 version of ArchiCAD), or it is an ArchiCAD 13 Teamwork project located on a BIM Server. You do not have access to this source, because you are using either a Demo version of ArchiCAD, or a non-Teamwork protection key; or you do not have Teamwork access rights to this source. To be Updated: Temporary status of a drawing included in the set of Drawings to be updated, but the update process has not affected this drawing yet. Updating: Temporary status of a drawing currently being updated. Embedded. This Drawing has no link and cannot be updated. (If it once had a link which has since been broken, the Drawing manager displays its former source view for information purposes only.) Needs Checking: ArchiCADs automated background quick-check function cannot determine definitively whether the drawing needs an update or not. If this status appears, you can either: - click the Check Status button to see whether the drawing is either OK or Modified. In the latter case, if the drawings update method is Manual, you can decide whether to update it or not. (A Drawing set to Automatic update will be updated as soon as you activate its Layout or window.) - click the Update button to achieve an updated status. Placed To: Shows name of Layout or Model View on which Drawing is placed. Source View: Shows the source views position in the Navigators hierarchical structure (as displayed in Navigator Project Map). If the Drawing source is not an ArchiCAD view, then this column displays the source file name and (in the case of a multi-page PDF document source) the page number from which the Drawing is created. Note: If the Drawing source is a DWG paperspace, this field will also indicate the viewport number. Path: Shows the location of the drawings source view (e.g. either Internal, or its file path). Click on a column head to sort Drawings by that property. Sorting priorities are indicated by arrowheads in the column head. Open Source View: Click this button to open the source view of the selected drawing. (This button is greyed for Drawings having an external source.) Settings: Click this button to open the selected drawing(s) Settings dialog box. Note: To assign a particular drawing parameters to multiple Drawings at the same time (such as a uniform Pen Set to all Drawings in the Layout Book), select several or all drawings in Drawing Manager and click Settings. Any settings you modify in the Drawing Settings dialog box will be applied to all the selected drawings (other Drawing Settings will remain as-is for each drawing).
1666
Pasting Dialog Box

This dialog box appears if you have copied drawing, image or text elements from an external application to the clipboard, and you want to paste the clipboard contents into ArchiCAD.
Rich Text (RTF): If you choose this option, the result will be a plain pasting operation. If the selection contains graphics, they will be lost, but the text elements will be directly editable in ArchiCAD as part of a Text Block. ArchiCAD 2D Elements: This option will also result in a plain pasting operation, with elements exploded into ArchiCAD drawing elements. Since the clipboard contents are treated as graphical elements, you may find that some text elements are not entirely accurate, but graphic elements will be properly displayed. Single Figure: This option will not explode the contents, but retain them in a single, uneditable Figure. Embedded drawing: This option is available if the clipboard contents consist of part of a PDF document.
1667
Paste Options Dialog Box

This dialog box appears if you are pasting copied ArchiCAD elements from the Clipboard, and the pasted elements cannot appear in their entirety in the Window at the current zoom level, or if it is possible to locate the pasted elements relative to either the Active view or a Reference view.
Where to Paste
Center of the Current View: Paste the Clipboard contents into the center of the current view with no regard for the pasted elements source view origin. Original Location: Paste the Clipboard contents into the current view at the same position as in the original source view (i.e., relative to the origin of the source view). Reference Location: Paste the Clipboard contents into the current view relative to the origin of the Reference view. This option is only available if a Reference view is shown; if the Reference views origin is at a different location from the Active views origin; and if that Reference view is of the same type (e.g. Floor Plan) as the contents of the Clipboard.
Zoom
Keep Current View: After the Paste command, the currently active window will remain at the same zoom level as before. Zoom to Pasted Elements: After the Paste command, the current window will zoom in to the newly pasted elements.
1668
Print 2D Document
This dialog box is opened with the File > Print command if a 2D window (including the 3D Document Window) is active.
Printer: This field displays the printer driver currently set up for your machine. To change the assigned printer, choose the Page Setup button at right. Page Setup: Click this button to open the Page Setup dialog box, where you can choose a printer and set paper size and orientation. Print Area: Choose which part of the active 2D window you wish to print. Entire Drawing: Choose this button to print the entire printable content of the window. Current Zoom Only: Choose this button to print only the visible content of the current window at its current zoom (including its rotated orientation, if any). Marquee Area: If you have placed a normal orthogonal Marquee in the active window, choose this button to print only the marquee area. (The option is available for other marquee shapes, but the output area will always be orthogonal.) Print Range: Choose either All to print all pages, or choose a page range for multi-page output. See the Preview at the bottom right of this dialog box for how multi-page output will be arranged. Scale: Choose a print scale for the output of the active window. Original: Choose this button to print at the original scale. Fit to Page: Choose this button to make the output fit the page. The scale will be adjusted accordingly. Custom: Choose this button to enter any other scale for the output. Either type in a custom scale, or choose a scale from the pop-up list below.
1669
Text & Markers: Available only if you have chosen either Fit to Page or Custom as the Print Scale. Use this pop-up field to define the scale of text and markers in the output. These options also affect the output characteristics of other elements such as arrowheads, scale-independent dashed line types and fill patterns. Resize to Printing Scale: Outputs text in proportion to the size of other elements. This method is good for enlargement of a Project for a presentation to be seen from a distance. Fix Size: Outputs text at its exact size in the current paper units (inches or millimeters). To keep text at exactly the same size even when the printed size of the project changes, choose this option. This is acceptable for enlargements but can produce unwanted effects with reductions. Text may overprint other elements as they shrink. Print to File: Check this box to save the output as a print file on your computer. Collate Copies: Check this box if you are printing multiple copies, and would like each copy to be output in sequential order. Black and White: Check this box for black and white output. With this option, colored elements will be output as follows: Lines: All colored lines will be black; white lines remain white. Fill: Foreground will be black; background will be white. Fills using RGB colors will be gray Zones: All will be displayed in grayscale cover fills. Images: All will be displayed in grayscale. Trace Reference: Will always be displayed in grayscale. Dithering: Check this box to reduce the total number of colors present in the output while retaining visual fidelity. Dithering may be necessary due to a limited number of colors available on the display device. For example, if your fills turn out solid black, the Dithering effect may help. Print Grid: Check this box if you would like the grid (construction or rotated) to be displayed on your printed output. Print Reference: Check this box if the active window includes a Trace Reference, and if you would like to include its elements in the printed output. Hairline: Check this box if you want to print all lines of the document using the thinnest line available on the printing device. Header/Footer: Check this box if you wish to include a Header or Footer on the printed output. To define the Header/Footer content, click the Settings button at right. For more information, see Header/Footer Settings. Print Quality: Enter a dpi (dots per square inch) setting to define print quality. Copies: Enter the number of copies you wish to print. Arrangement: This section helps you arrange the drawing on the output sheet(s). A preview window helps you get the desired outcome. In the preview window, the black square(s) represent the page(s) to be printed. The blue rectangle represents the drawing size. The Preview indicates the position of a Header/Footer if you have checked that option. Sheets: Shows the number of sheets of the paper size chosen in Page Setup. Positioning: Click these arrow-buttons to move the printed content around on the output sheets as shown in the Preview. 1670
Print 3D Document
This dialog box appears if you issue the Print command while the 3D Window is active, using the Internal 3D Engine. The controls are identical to those of the Print 2D Document dialog box, except certain 2Drelated options (Text/Marker scale, grid, Trace Reference, etc.) are not available here. If you issue the Print command while the 3D Window is active, using the OpenGL Engine, then the Print Picture dialog box comes up.
1671
Print Picture
This dialog box appears if you issue the Print command while the 3D Window is active, using the OpenGL Engine.
This printing function treats the entire contents of the 3D window as a single image. Consequently, the only available controls are: Printer: This field displays the printer driver currently set up for your machine. To change the assigned printer, choose the Page Setup button at right. Page Setup: Click this button to open the Page Setup dialog box, where you can choose a printer and set paper size and orientation. Print Range: Choose either All to print all pages, or choose a page range for multi-page output. Copies: Enter the number of copies of the image to print. Print to File: Check this box to save the output as a print file on your computer. Collate Copies: Check this box if you are printing multiple copies, and would like each copy to be output in sequential order. Dithering: Check this box to reduce the total number of colors present in the output while retaining visual fidelity. Dithering may be necessary due to a limited number of colors available on the display device. For example, if your fills turn out solid black, the Dithering effect may help. Use Printer Resolution: Check this box to use the print resolution set up in the printer device. Print Quality: Enter a dpi (dots per square inch) setting to define print quality.
1672
Print Layout
This dialog box is opened with the File > Print command if Layout is active.
Printer: This field displays the printer driver currently set up for your machine. To change the assigned printer, choose the Page Setup button at right. Page Setup: Click this button to open the Page Setup dialog box, where you can choose a printer and set paper size and orientation. Source: Choose which layout(s) you wish to print. Selected Layouts in Navigator: Click this button to print only those layouts which are selected in the Navigator palette. Note: This option is inactive if nothing is selected in the Navigator, or if several Layout Books (in the Navigator and Organizer) are open. Entire Layout: Print the entire currently active layout. Current Zoom: Print only the visible content of the active layout at its current zoom. Marquee Area: If you have placed a normal rectangular Marquee in the active layout, click this button to print only the marquee area. (The option is available for other marquee shapes, but the output area will always be rectangular.) Print Range: Choose either All to print all pages, or choose a page range for multi-page output. See the Preview at the bottom right of this dialog box for how multi-page output will be arranged. Size: Choose the layout output size. Fit to Page: Click this button to make the output fit the page. The size (in percentage) will be adjusted accordingly. Custom: Click this button to enter a size for the printed output, as a percentage of the paper size.
1673
Margin Options: Use these controls to assign a margin to the printed output: either the printer margin or the layout margin. Note: This option is available only if you have chosen Selected Layouts in Navigator or Entire Layout in the Source field. Print to File: Check this box to save the output as a print file on your computer. Collate Copies: Check this box if you are printing multiple copies, and would like each copy to be output in sequential order. Black and White: Check this box for black and white output. With this option, colored elements will be output as follows: Lines: All colored lines will be black; white lines remain white. Fill: Foreground will be black; background will be white. Fills using RGB colors will be grey. Zones: All will be displayed in grayscale cover fills. Images: All will be displayed in grayscale. Trace Reference: Check this box if you want to include the Trace Reference displayed on the Layout as part of the printed output. Dithering: Check this box to reduce the total number of colors present in the output while retaining visual fidelity. Dithering may be necessary due to a limited number of colors available on the display device. For example, if your fills turn out solid black, the Dithering effect may help. Print Reference: Check this box to include the Trace Reference in the Layouts printed output. Hairline: Check this box if you want to print all lines of the document using the thinnest line available on the printing device. Header/Footer: Check this box if you wish to include a Header or Footer on the printed output. To define the Header/Footer content, click the Settings button at right. For more information, see Header/Footer Settings. Print Quality: Enter a dpi (dots per square inch) setting to define print quality. Copies: Enter the number of copies you wish to print. Arrangement: This section helps you arrange the drawing on the output sheet(s). A preview window helps you get the desired outcome. In the preview window, the black square(s) represent the page(s) to be printed. The blue rectangle represents the drawing size. The Preview indicates the position of a Header/Footer if you have checked that option. Sheets: Shows the number of sheets of the paper size chosen in Page Setup. Positioning: Click these arrow-buttons to move the printed content around on the output sheets as shown in the Preview.
1674
Header/Footer Settings
Use the Settings button in Print 2D Document, Print 3D or Print Layout dialog boxes to open this dialog box. (Check the Header/Footer box first, to enable the Settings button.)
Content: In this section, check the items you would like to include in your header or footer. The available options are: Project name, optionally With Path Name of Story/Section/Detail/Layout Layer Combination (not available for Layouts) Model View Option Combination (not available for Layouts) Printing Scale (for 2D model windows)/Resize Factor (for Layouts) User Name Date and Time Page number/number of pages Custom Text. If you check this box, enter custom text in the field to the right. Text Properties: Use the controls in this section to set the properties of text items in the header/ footer, including Font Type, coding and font height3+. Location: Use this pop-up field to choose between either a header (top of page) or a footer (bottom of page), and to set its horizontal location (left, center or right of the page.) Preview: This field shows you the contents of your header or footer. A symbolic preview of your header or footer is also viewable in the Print dialog. When using a header or footer, please note: If you are working on a shared Teamwork Project, the User Name field changes to Team Member name. A header or footer can only be a single line. You cannot change the order of the fields.
1675
Plot Setup
Note: The following descriptions are based on the Windows interface. For a discussion of the print/plot features unique to MacOS, see Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS.
Use the two drop-down lists at the top of the dialog box to choose the plotter driver. The first lists manufacturers and the second the plotter driver for the given manufacturer. The contents of this list depends on the contents of the PlotWare folder. If the manufacturer of your plotter is listed but that particular model is missing, browse through the other models and select one with a similar paper size (e.g., E size). If there are several models with these criteria, experiment with all of them. If the manufacturer is not listed with any model, check the user manual of the plotter for compatibility and emulation modes. If the plotter accepts HPGL-2 and/or RTL data, there is a good chance of making it work. In this case, choose the HP DesignJet 755C model. See also the list of supported models in the PlotWare folder/Read Me for Plotter Users.html file. Paper: Use these controls to choose a paper size for your plotter. Invalid paper sizes are grayed in the menu and are not selectable. If you choose Custom in the Paper area, the second pop-up list contains by default two items: Current paper and Modify list. Choosing Modify List opens a dialog box in which you can define your own custom paper sizes. Click OK when you have finished defining sizes manually. The new custom sizes will appear in the custom size pop-up. Custom paper sizes are saved with plotter settings. Margins: Choose either Normal or Extended for the paper margins. The values in the X and Y fields below give you feedback on the result. X/Y: These fields display the horizontal and vertical paper size. If you are using a Custom paper size, enter the desired paper size here. 1676
Available Drawing Area: The X and Y values shown here indicate the size of the usable drawing area of the chosen paper. Orientation: Use these controls to determine the location/direction of the output on the paper.
Connection
In the Connection area, specify the connection type you intend to use with your plotter. To configure and use a plotter connected to one of your own computers ports or to a network plotter, use the Add Printer tool of the Windows Printers Control Panel. When first using a plotter with ArchiCAD, you need to connect to it by clicking the Setup button in the Connection area. The Select Plotter dialog box appears. You can choose one of the installed printer drivers from the pop-up menu. This driver will serve as a gateway to the plotter; ArchiCAD will use the specific plotter driver selected on top of the dialog box for actually plotting data.
Spool Folder
Below the Connection options, you can define a folder for spooling files to be plotted either from your own computer or anywhere on the network in the background.
1677
PlotFlow
Background plotting is handled by the PlotFlow utility that is part of the ArchiCAD package. You can find it in the PlotFlow folder; double-click to start the application. PlotFlow helps manage your plotting tasks by collecting previously generated plot jobs and spooling them to the chosen plotter or printer. It provides an interface that lets you individually prepare a list of files to send or automatically process a Spool Folder content, controlling the data transmission as needed. Instead of directly sending data to a Printer or Plotter device from a source application such as ArchiCAD, you can save the data stream to a file as well. See also PlotFlow for MacOS X for specifics on using PlotFlow with MacOS. Select the Destination: File radio button in the Plot dialog or check the Print to File checkbox in Print dialog of the source application, and save the plot file to the location of your choice, which can be either a local drive or a remote machine. The only criterion is that the target directory must be write-enabled for the source application, and PlotFlow must have permission to read this directory.
How to Set Up PlotFlow

Choose Settings in PlotFlows Options menu (or click the corresponding button in the toolbar) to open the PlotFlow Settings dialog box.
If you check the Show all files checkbox, you can add all file types to the queue. Note: Use this option to send plot files created with Print to File command having .prn extension. Checking the Delete spooled files checkbox will remove the plot files from the file system after processing. The spooling process will have to be resumed after each transmitted file if the Pause spooling after each file option is chosen. If you enter a Default source directory, PlotFlow will automatically send every file from the specified folder to the output device instead of queueing a previously set list of plot files. Note: If you check the Default source directory checkbox, the Delete spooled files checkbox will be checked by default, otherwise the plot files added to this folder would be printed repeatedly.
1678
How to Send Plot Files Automatically

If you designate a Default source directory, do not close the PlotFlow window, because it would simply stop the program. Just minimize it and let it work in the background. Every file added to the selected folder will be sent to the output device automatically. Plot files can be added automatically as well if the Default source directory is the same as the Spool Directory in the Plot settings dialog box of ArchiCAD, and if Plot destination is set to Spool Folder in the corresponding Plot dialog box.
How to Send a Manually Created Queue of Plot Files

If you leave the Default source directory checkbox unchecked, PlotFlow will send the files included in its File queue. You can add plot files to the queue list through the Open command from the File menu or the Open button located on the Toolbar, or simply by dragging and dropping plot files into the File queue field.
How to Control the Spooling Process

Unless the data transfer is paused, PlotFlow will spool the queued files. The currently processed file will disappear from the File queue field, while the file name will be displayed in the Spooling field along with its progress bar. Use Pause or Resume commands from file menu or press Pause or Resume toolbar buttons to stop or start the data transfer process. To remove queued files from list, select list items in file queue and apply the Delete command from File menu or Toolbar. Note: Delete will not remove files from the file system. The Spool Folder does not necessarily have to be placed on the same computer as the one on which PlotFlow is running. Using a Spool Folder effectively solves the problem of plotting from a mixed network including both PCs and MacOS. You can place the Spool Folder on a Windows NT server that can be read from both MacOS and PCs. Revert to Factory Defaults button: Click this button to undo the custom settings made in this dialog box and revert to the factory default settings of the chosen plotter. See also Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS, Creating PDF Output in MacOS, Print Dialog Box (MacOS) and Page Setup Dialog (MacOS).
1679
Plot 2D Document
Plotter: The name of the active plotter (chosen in Plot Setup) is shown at the top of the dialog box. Plot Setup: Click this button to access the Plot Setup dialog box. For more information, see Plot Setup. Destination: Choose a destination for the plotted output: Plotter: send the output to the designated plotter File: send the output to a plot (data) file Spool Folder: send the output into the spool folder specified in Plot Setup. In the latter two cases, you can plot files manually or automatically using PlotFlow. For more information, see PlotFlow. Scale: Choose a plot scale for the output of the active window. Original: Choose this button to plot at the original scale. Fit to Page: Choose this button to make the output fit the page. The scale will be adjusted accordingly. Custom: Choose this button to enter any other scale for the output. Either type in a custom scale, or choose a scale from the pop-up below. Note: You cannot enter a custom value that will make the plotted image larger than the usable page size. Text & Markers: Available only if you have chosen either Fit to Page or Custom as the Scale. Use this pop-up to define the scale of text and markers in the output. These options also affect the output characteristics of other elements such as arrowheads, scale-independent dashed line types and fill patterns. Resize to Plotting Scale: Outputs text in proportion to the size of other elements. This method is good for enlargement of a Project for a presentation to be seen from a distance. Fix Size: Outputs text at its exact size in the current paper units (inches or millimeters). To keep text at exactly the same size even when the printed size of the project changes, choose this option. This is acceptable for enlargements but can produce unwanted effects with reductions. Text may overprint other elements as they shrink. Plot Grid: Check this box if you wish the output pages to display the ArchiCAD grid. Hairline: Check this box if you want to plot all lines of the document using the thinnest line available on the plotting device. Plot with: Choose a color scheme for the plotted output (options may vary depending on the type of plotter used): Color Grayscale Black and White Copies: Enter the number of copies to plot. Arrangement: Use the preview window to view the arrangement of output on the plotted page. For more information on plotting, see Plot. See also Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS, Creating PDF Output in MacOS, Print Dialog Box (MacOS) and Page Setup Dialog (MacOS). 1680
Plot Layout
This dialog box is opened with the File > Plot command if Layout is active. Plotter: The name of the active plotter (chosen in Plot Setup) is shown at the top of the dialog box. Plot Setup: Click this button to access the Plot Setup dialog box. For more information, see Plot Setup. Destination: Choose a destination for the plotted output: Plotter: send the output to the designated plotter File: send the output to a plot (data) file Spool Folder: send the output into the spool folder specified in Plot Setup. In the latter two cases, you can plot files manually or automatically using PlotFlow. For more information, see PlotFlow. Source Selected Layouts in Navigator: Click this button to plot only those layouts which are selected in the Navigator palette. Note: This option is inactive if nothing is selected in the Navigator, or if several Layout Books (in the Navigator and Organizer) are open on screen, with several sets of selected Layouts. Active Layout: Plot the currently active layout. Resize Fit to Page: Click this button to make the output fit the page. The size (in percentage) will be adjusted accordingly. Custom: Click this button to enter a size for the plotted output, as a percentage of the drawings original size. Margin Options: Use these controls to assign a margin to the plotted output: either the plotter margin or the layout margin. Hairline: Check this box if you want to plot all lines of the document using the thinnest line available on the plotting device. Plot with: Choose a color scheme for the plotted output (options may vary depending on the type of plotter used): Color Grayscale Black and White Copies: Enter the number of copies to plot. Arrangement: Use the preview window to view the arrangement of output on the plotted page. For more information on plotting, see Plot.
1681
Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS

This section reviews some of the print/plot features and interface items which differ from their counterparts in Windows.
Creating PDF Output in MacOS Print Dialog Box (MacOS) Page Setup Dialog (MacOS) Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS) PlotFlow for MacOS X
1682
Creating PDF Output in MacOS

MacOS X can save documents directly as PDF (Portable Document Format) from any kind of native MacOS X application. There is no need to install an external driver or use a converter. This feature can be accessed from the Print dialog: if you click the Preview button, the output will be opened in a Preview window (standard MacOS X application) without saving. Clicking the Save As PDF button will open a Save to File dialog box, where you can specify the desired name and location of the PDF file. Note: PDF stores ArchiCAD drawings in vector-based format, however raster images like figures or bitmap patterns will be optimized for screen presentations (exported using screen resolution).
1683
Print Dialog Box (MacOS)

The Print command will open a Print dialog box similar to other MacOS X applications. Click the first pop-up menu to choose Printer or access Edit Printer List. Click the Presets popup menu to save the current settings as Preset or organize previously saved Presets. Clicking the third pop-up menu (at the first separator line) displays different print settings screens, where general or application specific settings can be modified. Choose the second to last option to access the application specific print settings dialog box (e.g. ArchiCAD). The specific dialog box will then open:
1684
Page Setup Dialog (MacOS)

The MacOS X version of ArchiCAD uses the operating systems Page Setup dialog box. Click on the Settings pop-up menu to reach the Custom Paper size settings dialog or the Summary screen. Click the Format for pop-up menu to choose the output device or open the Printer List component of the operating system. The third pop-up menu shows the available Paper Sizes depending on the chosen printer.
1685
Plot Setup Dialog (MacOS)

In ArchiCAD 11 and later, you can use any plotter connection type that MacOSX supports, by using the operating systems printing layer to connect to the plotter. In essence, you will install the plotter as a printer. For details, see http://archicadwiki.com/Plotting_in_ArchiCAD11_on_Macintosh Note: The Plotter settings for ArchiCAD 10 are not compatible with the ArchiCAD 12 and later plotter drivers. Therefore, in ArchiCAD 12 and later, you have to set up the plotter again; you cannot preserve the settings from ArchiCAD 10.
1686
PlotFlow for MacOS X

The following features can be accessed from the File menu: Open command will add a plot file to the queue. Configure command will show a dialog box where you can set the connection type and parameters, enter the Spool Folder location or disable logging. In addition to the previously described connection types, USB port is available also. Start Queue will transmit the first plot file of the queue to the device. Stop Queue will stop sending plot files after the item currently being processed. Break will interrupt the data stream immediately. Update Queue will synchronize the spool folder contents to the queue. This command is active when a Spool Folder is set. The main window of PlotFlow for X shows the status of the plotting process and lists the queued plot files. The queue items can be selected and their status can be modified individually with the corresponding buttons above the list: Pause will set the selected plot file status to Hold, which will prevent it from sending. Play will be active if the item has been paused, and sets the item free for transmission. Trashcan button will delete selected items from the queue. Click and drag the element to change the queue order. Note: For compatibility reasons, the Plotflow folder contains the PlotFlow Classic application as well, which requires having MacOS 9.1 or later installed.
1687
PhotoRendering Settings
For more information, see PhotoRendering. The panels of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box access dialog boxes with settings for the photorendering process. The panels you will see depend on the rendering engine that is selected. Engine: At the top of the dialog box, choose a photorendering engine. Add-Ons can install additional rendering engines. Factory Settings button: Click this button if you have made changes to the selected Engines settings (using the panels below), but want to revert all engine settings to their original, factory values. Enter a Resolution value in dpi. The size of the resulting photorendered image can be set numerically, or you can adjust it to the size of the currently used 3D Window by clicking the Size to 3D Window button in the upper part of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. The proportion of the height and width of the resulting image will be indicated by the image frame in the Preview Window. If the proportions are different, you get stripes of the background color at the top and bottom and on the left and right sides of the PhotoRendered image. This will be apparent with internal perspectives or with external perspectives where the view does not enclose the entire Project and it is clipped by the image boundaries. If you check the Keep Proportions of 3D Window checkbox, the height and width ratio of the resulting image will keep its current proportions. If you change either the horizontal or vertical values, the other value will be updated accordingly.
LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On) Internal Rendering Engine Z-Buffer Rendering Engine Sketch Rendering Engine
1688
LightWorks Rendering Engine (Add-On)

To access the settings for the LightWorks rendering engine, choose LightWorks Rendering Engine from the Engine drop-down menu in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box (Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings).
LightWorks Effects Panel

Method: These options determine the shading method and thereby the rendering quality. Normal results in the fastest rendering time. Better improves the quality. Use Final for your final renderings. For the highest quality rendering, choose Best. Antialiasing: The Antialiasing feature simulates a higher screen resolution. This technique can be useful in reducing jagged-line problems, but increases rendering time. Use the slider to set your preferred antialiasing level at one of four levels ranging from Fastest (lower antialiasing level but faster rendering) to Best (highest-quality rendering, but can be more time-consuming) Off: Check this box to switch off antialiasing. Get model data during rendering process: Check this box to allow two processes to proceed simultaneously when you execute a PhotoRendering: ArchiCAD will analyze model data at the same time that it generates rendering effects for the model. As a result, the rendered model might take longer to appear in full on screen, but the process will require less memory. Effects: Choose PhotoRendering Effects among the checkboxes: Reflection causes elements to reflect light. Transparency: Transparent elements (such as glass) will be rendered as transparent. (If you leave this box unchecked, such elements will be shown as opaque.) Smooth surface: With this option checked, the engine will smooth large curved surfaces that are usually approximated by polygons. Light sources: Choose any or all of the following light sources to illuminate objects within the rendered plan, by checking the boxes: Sun: Illuminate objects using sunlight. Ambient: Illuminates objects according to ambient (environmental) light. Camera: Illuminates objects with flash effect. Use the numeric fields to the right of each of the three above light sources to adjust the intensity of the light, by changing its value in percent. (The intensity is set to 100% by default.) Lamps: Use the objects placed with the lamp tools as sources of light. - The SunObject (placed with the Lamp tool) has parameters that are similar to those of the SkyObject lamp object. - The WindowLight Lamp object has both a Light Intensity and a Light Resolution parameter: these define how many individually light sources are generated to simulate diffuse light coming through the Door/Window. For more information, see SkyObject, SunObject and WindowLight.
1689
Shadow Casting: Choose one of the three radio buttons to determine Shadow Casting. Off means that no shadows will be cast regardless of the settings defined for any individual lamp. Choose Hard for all placed lamp objects to produce shadows with hard contours. By lamp settings means that shadow-casting is determined separately for each lamp, in the Lamp Settings dialog box (use the Shadow item on the Parameters panel). Shadow Resolution: If you have opted to use Cast Shadows, use these controls to determine shadow resolution. By lamp settings means that shadow resolution depends on the settings used in each lamps Settings dialog box (switch the Light Shadow Casting on or off in the Parameters list). Override: Alternatively, override the individual lamp settings (uncheck the lamp settings checkbox) and set a global Shadow Resolution value using the slider switch.
LightWorks Environment Panel

LightWorks uses shaders to define the properties of surfaces in photorenderings. Use the Environment panel to choose shaders and edit their parameters. Note: To limit the number of editable parameters for the shaders, check the Show Essential Only checkbox. Shaders in the LightWorks Environment panel are divided into three classes: Sun, Foreground, and Background. Sun: The Sun shader is the classic, faster shader for rendering sun shadows. The Realistic Sun shader results in a more sophisticated sun shadow rendering, which requires increased rendering time. Foreground: These shaders contain parameters defining the appearance of elements in the foreground. Background: These shaders contain parameters defining the appearance of elements in the background. To activate the Background class of shaders, you must first uncheck the box that follows: Render Background with Internal Engine: If checked, this option means that the photorendering background will be generated by using the settings in the Background panel. To define shaders and their settings: Click the name of the class to activate the list of associated shaders. Choose a Shader from the list. (The Sun class contains only one shader; it has no corresponding list.) Edit its parameters in the right side of the dialog box: click on a parameter, then edit its settings at the bottom of the dialog box. (Depending on the parameter you will use color tables, sliders, text/numeric fields, buttons, or menus.) To access the entire list of available parameters, make sure the Show Essential Only checkbox is unchecked. For more information, see Editing Shaders.
1690
LightWorks Background Panel

This Background panel is identical to the one associated with the Internal Rendering Engine settings. For a detailed description, see Internal Rendering Engine Background Panel.
LightWorks Brightness Panel

This panel is identical to the Brightness panel associated with the Internal Rendering Engine settings. For more information, see Internal Rendering Engine Brightness Panel. For more information on LightWorks, see Basic LightWorks Options, Expert LightWorks Options, Exterior LightWorks Example and Interior LightWorks Example.
1691
Internal Rendering Engine

Choose Internal Rendering Engine from the Engine drop-down menu in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box (Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings). The controls below concern the internal ArchiCAD rendering engine. Note: The speed of PhotoRendering is defined most of all by image size, while model complexity affects speed if shadows are used. The PhotoRendering effects define the final quality or character of your rendering.
Internal Rendering Engine Effects Panel

Use the controls in this section to select the PhotoRendering effects you want to use: The Method setting determines how closely the program should adhere to its ultimate imaging capacity. With the Best button selected, the program calculates the light attributes of each pixel. As the choices decrease in quality, ArchiCAD calculates individual values for every second or third pixel only. The quality increase will affect curved surfaces more than others. Using multiple light sources or picture mapping may require the Final or Best settings. The Flat Shading button results in each shape being roughly approximated by flat surfaces only. Special effects like Transparency, Fog, Emission, Smooth Surfaces, Highlights and Light Decay are unavailable. The Flat Shading option is faster than all the other options in this dialog box, but slower than when 3D Window Settings is set to use Shaded mode. The contour quality of your renderings is controlled by the Antialiasing settings. Jaggedness of the contour is gradually eliminated as you move from Off to Best. You may want to use the Best option only for final documents, since processing time increases along with quality. The series of checkboxes in the Effects section lets you enable a variety of light and material effects, some of which are initially set in the Options > Element Attributes > Materials dialog box. For more information, see Material Settings Dialog Box. Specular reflections are taken into consideration and displayed as highlights in your PhotoRenderings when this box is checked. Note: If Highlights is unchecked, or the Flat Shading method is used, specular reflections are ignored in the rendering. Check the Emission option if you have chosen, or created, light emitting Materials and want this quality to be displayed in the renderings. Check the Fog option if you have set fog color and intensity in the Sun dialog box (accessible from View > 3D View Mode > 3D Projection Settings) and wish to use it in your PhotoRendering. For more information, see 3D Projection Settings. Transparency: Transparent elements (such as glass) will be rendered as transparent. (If you leave this box unchecked, such elements will be shown as opaque.) 1692
The degree of smoothing is set through the Smooth Surfaces control, with up to one pixel accuracy. Curved surfaces, which are normally approximated by flat planes, are represented by more lifelike surfaces when this option is on. If Lamp Falloff is not checked, the angle falloff and distance falloff values in the GDL Scripts of Lamps will be handled as being zero. This results in a sharp border between illuminated and dark areas. If it is checked, the values originally given will be used, resulting in a smooth transition between illuminated and dark areas. Note: Lamps must be enabled at the Light Sources checkboxes for falloff to operate. If the Textures box is checked, bitmapped pictures referred to in the GDL script of some library parts will appear on the corresponding surfaces. It also controls whether the textures linked to materials in the Materials dialog box are displayed in PhotoRenderings as described. For more information, see Material Settings Dialog Box. You can select which Light Sources (Sun, Lamps or both) you want to use to illuminate the model during the PhotoRendering process. You should select at least one of the two choices. The Lamps checkbox can only be effective if Lamp type library parts have been placed on the plan. They must be switched on in their Settings dialog box. In the Shadow Casting section, you can define which of the available light sources you want to cast shadows in the PhotoRendered picture. Check the High Accuracy box if you notice incorrect results on your PhotoRendered picture, especially missing shadows of relatively small elements. This may occur if you zoom in on a small detail of an otherwise large project in the 3D Window and make a photorendering of that detail. If the Use transparency checkbox is checked, ArchiCAD will create different shadows for materials with different transparency. The color of the transparent material will also affect the color of the shadow in the final photorendering. This is also valid for materials with Alpha channel, where the Alpha channel is used to define the transparency of the material. Use the slider next to the Texture antialiasing checkbox to set the desired image quality. As this procedure is very time consuming, use it only if you require a superior image quality for printing.
Internal Rendering Engine Background Panel

This panel of PhotoRendering Settings is identical for all PhotoRendering engines. In this panel of the dialog box you can set the attributes of the background for your rendered 3D model. If the Colors radio button is checked, you can set the color of the sky and the ground in the Set Color subdialog box after clicking the Sky Color or Ground Color button. During the photorendering process ArchiCAD will automatically locate the horizon line of the background to correspond with the horizon of the picture. In parallel projections, if the bottom of the elements is visible, sky color is used; if not, ground color is used. The 3D Window can also use the colors specified here. If you just need a plain, single color background, click the Chain icon next to the Preview Window and set either the Sky Color or the Ground Color by pushing their button.
1693
ArchiCAD PhotoRendering supports precise horizontal and vertical pixel size and dots per inch resolution. This makes it possible to merge background bitmap images of known proportions and resolutions with PhotoRendering images. You can make a powerful graphic statement by placing a rendered model against an existing picture as the background. Just turn on the Picture radio button and search for the appropriate picture from the directory dialog box. If you want a different picture for the background, click the Change Picture button. In the Load Image from Library dialog box you can select another picture. Your rendered model will be merged into the background picture in an intelligent manner, masking it when necessary as shown below.
Note: You can save the background picture together with your Project. Use the Save As command to save the project in archive format, then check the Include Background Picture checkbox in the dialog box. The background picture you selected is fitted into the Preview Window of the dialog box, and you can rescale it with the Resolution and Magnification settings. The size of the picture will change in the Preview Window, and you can check its real size with the values written above the horizontal line on the right side of the dialog box. (You can also get a sense of how its size is changing by comparing it to the image frame, discussed below, which grows and shrinks as you change these settings.) If the Show Preview radio button is set to Picture, the Preview Window will show you the whole opened picture, and a bold frame inside it represents the dimensions of your rendered image. You can drag this by clicking inside the frame. If the bold frame is not visible, it is too large. Just click in the picture and you will see the bold frame. In this case, change either the magnification, the resolution or the image size values to bring the ratio of the incoming and outgoing image sizes closer. Ideally the frame is smaller than the background picture so that you can choose the best detail. If the Image radio button is selected, you will see only the framed part of the background in the Preview Window. You can select another part of the background picture here by clicking the Preview Window and dragging the frame on top of the background picture. The Use Alpha Channel for Transparency checkbox will allow you to use the Alpha Channel information of the opened background picture if it has any. White color of the Alpha Channel will make the background picture dominant, while black color of the Alpha Channel will make the photorendered image of ArchiCAD dominant over the background.
Internal Rendering Engine Brightness Panel

This panel of the dialog box gives you choices regarding exposure. Use the dimmer switch to set the desired brightness from dark to bright. 1694
You have three options for correcting possible Overexposures. (Overexposure occurs when the computational method results in a brighter color requirement than the brightest white on the monitor.) ArchiCAD can make all surfaces darker than their computed color and make the brightest color white. This keeps the contrast between bright and dark parts of the image, but details in darker areas may be lost. You can choose to darken only the overexposed surfaces. This way, dark areas will not be extremely dark, but the contrast between shades in bright areas will be smaller. Paint the overexposed surfaces with the selected color to show their place in the picture. This is an editing tool that helps you fine-tune the lighting of your renderings by changing elements of the model (e.g., relocating or dimming individual lamps) rather than applying one of the overall corrections described above. When you click the Apply button, ArchiCAD will create a new image from the latest PhotoRendered image using the brightness and overexposure correction settings in the dialog box. Creating this new image will take much less time.
Internal Rendering Engine Partial Rendering Panel

This part of the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box provides you with the option of making partial Renderings. The Partial Rendering settings allow you to specify a range of lines and columns to be rendered for your image. This is useful when you do not want to waste time rendering the entire image. This method can also be useful for comparing different material or light conditions within a single image. Additionally, it can be used for continuing images which were stopped when being processed. (You must save the half-completed image and open it as a background picture). Use this method if you make a modification in the model that affects only the unrendered part of the entire image. This allows you to re-render a part of it.
1695
Z-Buffer Rendering Engine

Choose Z-Buffer Rendering Engine from the Engine drop-down menu in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box (Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings). This engine is similar to the Internal Rendering Engine but can work faster if the model is large and the shadow effect is switched on. However, a large amount of physical memory is recommended.
1696
Sketch Rendering Engine

Choose Sketch from the Engine drop-down menu in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box (Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings). This rendering engine allows you to create and process sophisticated rendered images with different free-hand effects. These options are fully integrated into ArchiCAD.
Sketch Basic Settings Panel

Sketch style: Choose a sketch style from this list. The Sketch Rendering Engine provides a number of factory styles with preset parameter values. If you override these factory settings, the style will be renamed Custom. Since it is not possible to save customized styles, the solution is to rewrite the preset styles to suit your needs: Open the Sketchpreset.txt file in ArchiCAD folder at: Add-Ons > Visualization > SketchTextures. Using word processor functions, replace the preset values with your preferred values, making sure that the text format remains unchanged. Line Styles: Each linetype is represented by a dedicated folder with a set of bitmap images. These sets can be extended with similar scans of scripts using any graphic device. To get the best sketch effect, it is recommended to scan a large variety of line lengths, as the program will choose randomly among these styles when reproducing lines in the rendering. Line color: Custom: Any preferred color can be chosen for monochrome images. The presets suggest traditional black, blue or tan colors. Current element settings: In this case, line color depends on the pen colors of individual model elements. Color images can be generated this way; however, it requires the careful adjustment of pen colors. As in Line Style: For the most natural effect, the color of the lines can be determined by the scans original colors (graphite pencils, black art pen ink, sepia and peine gris aquarelles, and carmine.) If you check the Show 3D Vectorial Hatching box, the hatch lines (for example brick or tile contours) will be drawn in the rendered image. The properties of the hatch lines can be controlled by the settings of the Hatch Line Settings panel below. With Show Vectorial Sun Shadows active, the rendered image will include shaded areas representing sun shadow. The shade lines properties can be set on the Shadow Line Settings panel.
Sketch Enhancements Panel

Antialiasing: Smoothens the lines by picking longer lines from the scans than necessary. In case of textured line types (e.g. brush, chalk), it is recommended to keep this value low (2 or less), as high values can slow down rendering. Air perspective: Similarly to the Fog effect, fades lines further to the viewpoint. Although this effect is not normally done with manual sketching, a light air perspective to a rough wax sketch can be an attractive enhancement, and can be made to look especially natural with brush scans.
1697
Paper roughness can simulate the effects of bumps on scans of real rough paper. Normally, bumps are generated randomly by the rendering engine; however, for best results, it is advisable to use a background image with predefined alpha channel for the bumps (you can find some background images in the ArchiCAD Library 13/Background Images/Alpha Paper Textures folder). Check the Use background alpha channel box if you use such a background image. The sketch engine can detect these bumps and fade or erase the sketch lines at this area depending on the settings of the Paper Roughness slider. This setting has no effect if no background image has been scanned with the alpha channel. For samples, go to the ArchiCAD folder and open ArchiCAD Library 13\Background Images 13\Alpha Paper Textures 13. Try loading any of these background images from Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings > Background. These tend to work well with wax sketches; the effect is less natural if using a brush effect.
Sketch Line Settings Panel

Thickness: Use a low value to replicate thinner devices (pencil, fine marker). Large values are appropriate for displaying the textures of brush or wax. However, you can experiment with different line settings and try getting interesting results which can be varied for a given line style. For best results, use higher values for Sketch Lines than for Hatch Lines and Shadow Lines. Line distortion: Try various values with the chosen line style to achieve the desired effect. Generally, to replicate a pencil stretch you will use a lesser distortion than for brush, but you can experiment. When Line Overstretch is set high, the lines will be longer than their counterparts in the ArchiCAD 3D window, as if you had been drawing lines that do not connect properly and will cross each other. When the control is set low (below zero), the lines will stop short of reaching one another.
Sketch Hatch Line Settings Panel

The controls on this panel are to set the properties of the hatch lines of the rendered image. If the Show 3D Vectorial Hatching checkbox on the Basic Settings panel is not active, no hatch lines will be drawn and the choices you make here will have no effect whatsoever. The Thickness, Line overstretch and Line distortion controls have the same effects as on the Sketch Line Settings panel. When the Clarify remote area control is set high, the hatch lines in the background will be paler and thinner. This is useful and sometimes even necessary when a hatched surface is viewed from a reduced angle. Without clarifying the remote area the hatch lines would be so dense that they would form a continuous dark area. These settings only take effect if you check the Apply box.
Sketch Shadow Line Settings Panel

The controls on this panel set the properties of the shadow shading lines of the rendered image. If the Show Vectorial Sun Shadows checkbox on the Basic Settings panel is not active, no shadow lines will be shown and the choices you make here will have no effect whatsoever. The Thickness, Line overstretch and Line distortion controls have the same effects as they do in the Sketch Line Settings panel. 1698
Darkness controls the opacity of the shadows. When it is set low, the shade is more transparent. Spacing controls the distance between the shadow lines. A high spacing value results in lighter shadows. Note: The effects of Thickness, Darkness and Spacing may overlap. For example, if you set a high Thickness value when Spacing not very high, you will obtain a darker shadow, as if you had increased the Darkness value.
Sketch Background Panel

This Background panel is identical to the one associated with the Internal Rendering Engine settings. For a detailed description, see Sketch Background Panel.
Sketch Brightness Panel

This panel is identical to the Brightness panel associated with the Internal Rendering Engine settings. For more information, see Sketch Brightness Panel.
1699
Modules
Hotlink Manager Dialog Box Place Module Dialog Box Module Settings
For an overview of these functions, see Hotlinked Modules.
1700
Hotlink Manager Dialog Box

Use the File > External Content > Hotlink Manager command to open this dialog box. Use the Hotlink Manager to gain an overview of all the modules in your project and to manage them.
Hotlinked Modules
The Hotlinked Modules list (in the top half of the dialog box) displays the hierarchy of modules hotlinked into the current project. Hover the cursor over any module to view an information tag showing the modules location in the host file. Select any module in this list to view the module type (single- or multistory), the names and numbers of the Story it contains, and the number of placed instances of this module in the current project. For any selected module in the list, you can do the following operations:
1701
Note: Once you click any of these commands, the actions are noted in parentheses next to each module name. The actions are not carried out until you press OK to close the Hotlink Manager dialog box.
Change Hotlink: Click this button to select a different hotlink. The selected module will be replaced on the Floor Plan by the newly linked module. Note: The Change Hotlink command is not available for the source files of nested modules. Save as File: Click this button to save the selected module to an external file. Break Hotlink: Click this button to break the hotlink between the module elements and their source file. The result: the elements contained in the module are now regular editable ArchiCAD elements, no longer part of a module and no longer linked to any other source file. Note: The Break Hotlink command is not available for the source files of nested modules. Delete: Click this button to delete all instances of the selected module in this project. Note: The Delete command is not available for the source files of nested modules. Nested Modules: This pop-up has two states: Skip or Include. If you choose Skip, the nested modules in all instances of the selected module will be skipped (they will not be shown on the Floor Plan). If you choose Include, all nested modules in all instances of the selected module are shown. Note: You can override this setting for any instance of a module: select the placed module and go to Module Settings. Check or uncheck the Skip Nested Modules box as desired. To set update preferences when opening a file containing hotlinks, go to Options > Work Environment > Data Safety > Hotlink Update. For more information, see Hotlink Update.
Hotlink Sources
The Hotlink Sources list displays the sources of the hotlinked module files together with the status of each of these files. Select any file in this list to view its size, the time and date it was last modified, and its file path. In the header, click the fields to sort data by that column. Use the splitter bar between Name and Status to edit the column width of the Name column.
1702
For any selected file in the list, you can do the following operations: Update: For any file having the status of Modified, click the Update button to update, from the selected source file, all instances of the module placed in your project. Relink: Use this command to replace the selected Hotlink Source with another file. This means that all module instances based on the original source will now be replaced by modules based on the new source you relinked here. Note: The Relink command is not available for the source files of nested modules. Use Relink if any of your Hotlinked Sources are shown with Missing status: use the appearing New Hotlink directory dialog box to provide the location of the Hotlink Source (which is probably missing because it was moved to a new location.) As long as a Hotlinked Source is missing, ArchiCAD cannot update its module instances. See Restoring Missing Hotlinks. Relocate: This command is available if you have selected multiple Hotlink Sources. It brings up a directory dialog box allowing you to choose a folder location. Selected source files will be replaced with identically named files located in the designated folder. Note: If you click the Update, Relink or Relocate commands for selected Hotlink Source files, these scheduled actions are noted in the files status column with a yellow triangle (at this point, you can still cancel the operation). The actions are not carried out until you press OK to close the Hotlink Manager dialog box. Warning: Carrying out these actions means that your ArchiCAD projects entire Undo queue will be cleared!
Open in Separate ArchiCAD: Use this command to open the selected source file in a new instance of ArchiCAD. This way you can edit the file. If you wish, save the edited source file and click Update in Hotlink Manager to have all placed module instances based on this source file reflect your edits. See Updating Hotlinks.
Hotlink Source File Status Messages

Each hotlink source files status is indicated by one of the following: OK: This Source files modules are up to date.
1703
Modified: Source file has been changed. To update the modules in your project that originate in this source file, you must use Update. Missing: You have placed modules from this file in your project, but ArchiCAD cannot locate the source file. To enable the updating of these modules, you must first locate the source file (use Relink to identify the missing files location). Not Accessible: The source file is either a Teamwork file (a Teamwork file format from a pre13 version of ArchiCAD), or it is an ArchiCAD 13 Teamwork project located on a BIM Server. You do not have access to this source, because you are using either a Demo version of ArchiCAD, or a non-Teamwork network key. Legacy: Legacy source files are those saved in an ArchiCAD version prior to ArchiCAD 12. To enable these modules to be updated, you must first open the legacy source file and re-save it in version 12. See the ArchiCAD 13 Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 for details on migrating legacy hotlinks.
1704
Place Module Dialog Box

For an overview of this process, see Place Module. The controls in this dialog box apply to the currently chosen Hotlink, as displayed in the Hotlinked to field in the bottom half of the dialog box. To choose a different hotlink, click the Choose Hotlink button to open the corresponding dialog box.
The name of the hotlink chosen here will appear in the Place Module dialog box. Use the controls to adjust its settings:
Module Master Layer

The whole module is placed on a Master Layer, which you can check or change in the Place Module or Module Settings dialog boxes.
The elements of the module keep their element-specific layer assignment and are placed on the corresponding layers of the current Project, if layers with these names exist. If necessary, new layers will be created. The Master Layer controls the visibility and locking of a module as an entity. This Master Layer is an ordinary layer of the host file and can include any other elements. Different instances of the same module can be assigned to different Master Layers. Element-specific layers control the visibility of the elements within the module. Locking a Master Layer has priority over the Delete and Break Hotlink commands in the Hotlink Manager Dialog Box. These commands only act on modules with an unlocked Master Layer. Layer Combinations of the source file are not imported with the modules. Note: For best results, use the same layer structure in both the source and the host file.
1705
Orientation
Type a value in the Orientation field to place the Module at an angle that is different from the one defined in the original file. Note: If your module contains elements (such as labels or zone stamps) whose angle is fixed, those elements will, by default, retain the fixed angle you set for them in the source file irrespective of the Orientation angle of the module. Adjust angle of fixed-angle elements to reflect module rotation: If you prefer fixed-angle elements in the module to follow the modules rotation as specified in the Orientation field, check this box. Check the box next to the Orientation field to place a mirrored Module. Height/Elevation values: Positions relative to the actual story of the original file are applied. When placing the module, you can type a value in the Elevation field to define the height at which the Module will be placed, i.e., an optional vertical offset added to the elements original story-relative elevation. Click the Place Module button to place an instance of the Hotlinked Module in your Floor Plan.
Skip Nested Modules

Check this box if you do not want to include this modules nested modules when placing the current instance.
Choose Hotlink
This dialog box lists the Hotlinks that have already been established between the current Project and other ArchiCAD files. Select a Hotlink in the list and click OK to return to the Place Module dialog box.
1706
Module Settings
This dialog box is available from the File > External Content > Hotlinked Module Settings menu item, if you have selected a placed module on the Floor Plan. Its settings are almost identical to those of the Place Module Dialog Box. This is a slight variation of the Place Module dialog box, with an additional checkbox allowing you to break the hotlink to the Module. Break Hotlink of Selected Modules: Check this box to break the Hotlink without clearing the elements that make up a single instance of a Module.
1707
XREF Management Dialog Box

To access this dialog box, go to File > External Content > XREF Manager. Most XREF-related functions can be completed in this dialog box. For an overview of this topic, see XREFs.
View Mode Buttons

The two buttons in the upper-left corner of the dialog box control how the list of attached XREF files is displayed. The left button will display all XREFs in the order they were attached. The right view mode button will display attached XREFs in a hierarchical tree structure. Since DWG files used as external references can also contain additional external references, nesting can occur. This nesting can be quite complex, reaching down several levels. The hierarchical view mode lets you see which files refer to other external files, indicating what should load into the project when attaching an external reference file. If an attached file refers to other files, a + sign will appear on its left. Clicking the + sign reveals the names of the associated files. XREF List: This list contains the information about the attached files. In the header, click the splitter bars to edit column width as needed. If you are in list mode you will see data about each file, including: Reference name: The name of the reference, usually the same as the name of the attached file. Status: The exact status of the file after each operation that affects it, such as Loaded, Detached, Reloaded, Unloaded or Bound. Size: The size of the referenced file. Type: The type of external referencing, either Attach or Overlay. Date: Last date the file was modified. Insts (Instances): The number of instances of a certain external reference file attached to the Project. As with library objects, you can attach an external reference several times to a Project file and in various locations (layers, different floors etc.). For more information, see XREFs.
Attach
Click this button to display the Attach XREF dialog box. For more information, see Attach XREF.
Detach
Click this button to detach the XREF from the drawing: closing the dialog box will remove it from the Project file. If you want to use it again you will have to attach it again. The Status column will reflect this detached state.
1708
When the XREF is detached, a dialog lets you choose between retaining or removing the detached XREFs attributes, including layers, linetypes and fills.
Reload
When the DWG or DXF file used as an external reference has been modified, and you want to have the latest changes appear in your ArchiCAD Project file, you can do so by clicking the Reload button. The program will load the whole file into ArchiCAD again and display the latest state. Also, if you unloaded an external reference from the Project file, you can load it again with the Reload button. The status column of the dialog box will reflect this state. Note: The reload process does not display an options dialog box to specify the input parameters. They are present in the database: the same data will be used as specified earlier with the Attach command.
Unload
Click this button to keep the selected external reference file attached to the project file, while unloading it from memory. The files contents will not appear on the Floor Plan. As opposed to detaching, which removes the file from the project and the XREF Management file list, the Unload command keeps it attached. Clicking the Reload button will make it reappear. These changes are reflected in the Status column of the dialog box. Note: After you unload an XREF, a text will appear at the insertion point of the XREF notifying you of this fact. For example, if you unload the XREF file WALLS, the message Unloaded XREF WALLS will appear on the Floor Plan in place of the XREF.
Bind
Clicking the Bind button will merge the content of the external reference to the Project and delete the external reference to the file from the list. Note: Binding will make all instances of the reference file part of the Project. It is not possible to bind only one instance of the XREF file. When you bind an XREF, the layer names of the XREF will reflect the change, taking on following format:
XREF_NAME $ NUMBER $ LAYER_NAME.
For example, the PEN_5 layer of the XREF file with the name WALLS was converted to layer WALLS|PEN_5 while it was attached. When it is bound to the project file, its name is automatically changed to WALLS$36$PEN_5, with the number 36 being a number in the list of layers.
Browse
Click this button to open a directory dialog box where you can change the file that the selected XREF points to (XREF Found at). After you select another file and return to the XREF Management dialog box, you must click the Reload button for the change to take effect. After exiting the dialog box with the OK button, ArchiCAD reloads the new file, which will then be associated with the given XREF name.
1709
This feature is particularly useful when you have an XREF in your project whose original file was changed and saved under a new name. For example, consider a Floor Plan that is attached to an interior design project with the name Floor Plan0728.DWG. Later, as the Floor Plan changes, it is saved under the name Floor Plan 0801.DWG. Clicking the Browse button and selecting this new file will associate the link with this latest version of the Floor Plan, enabling the Interior Designer to quickly update it and use it for further work.
Show Log
Click this button to expand the XREF Management dialog box downward to show a list of all steps performed in the current session of the XREF Management dialog box. This log allows you to see what functions the program will execute once you click the OK button. Click Hide Log to hide the log from view.
1710
Attach XREF
This dialog box opens when you click Attach from the XREF Management dialog box. (File > External Content > XREF manager.) XREF Name: Specify the name of the file to be attached as an external reference. Use the Browse button to select from a file selection dialog box. Alternatively, select from the pop-up list of already attached files if you want to place another instance of the file into the Project. Path: Shows the exact path to the selected file. Reference Type: Choose a radio button to set how nested XREFs will be handled. Note: Nesting occurs when you load an external reference to a file that has external references loaded to other files. Attachment: All levels of nesting can be displayed in the Project file. Overlay: Nested XREFs from the referenced file will not be visible in the Project. The following table shows what happens when you attach/overlay DWG files that contain attached/overlaid XREFs. XREF visible (yes/no) XREF attached, nested XREF within originally attached XREF attached, nested XREF within originally overlaid XREF overlaid, nested XREF within originally attached XREF overlaid, nested XREF within originally overlaid YES YES YES YES Nested visible (yes/no) YES NO YES NO
Examples: 1) A DWG file named BASE.DWG that has an attached XREF named COMMON.DWG is attached to the ArchiCAD Project. Both files will be visible on the Floor Plan. 2) A DWG file named BASE.DWG that has an overlaid XREF named COMMON.DWG is attached to the ArchiCAD Project. BASE.DWG will be visible on the Floor Plan but COMMON.DWG will not be visible. 3) A DWG file named BASE.DWG that has an attached XREF named COMMON.DWG is overlaid to the ArchiCAD Project. Both files will be visible on the Floor Plan. 4) A DWG file named BASE.DWG that has an overlaid XREF named COMMON.DWG is overlaid to the ArchiCAD Project. BASE.DWG will be visible on the Floor Plan but COMMON.DWG will not be visible.
1711
Placement Parameters: Use these controls define where and how you want the XREF to be placed on the ArchiCAD floor plan. Insertion point: In the X and Y field, you can enter the exact coordinates of the location of the lower left corner of the enclosing rectangle or of the Drawing origin. Alternatively, you can check the Specify On-Screen box to enter these coordinates by clicking on the Floor Plan. Scale: Either specify a scale factor in both X and Y directions, or check the Specify OnScreen box to define scale on the screen. Note: If you specify scale factors, the XREFs enclosing box will be scaled to the appropriate size. If not, you will be able to stretch the enclosing rectangle just as if you were stretching an ArchiCAD object. It is possible to input or specify negative or positive values for scale factors. By specifying negative values you can achieve mirroring effects. Rotation: You can define an angle by which the whole placed XREF will be rotated around its insertion point, or check the Specify On-Screen box to define rotation manually, on the screen. Note: If you specify a rotation angle, the XREF is rotated and then drawn. If not, you can rotate the enclosing rectangle until you input the value with a mouse click or coordinate input. Anchor Point: Use these controls to define by which point of the XREF to place the drawing. Drawings own origin: the Global Origin (0;0 coordinate) of the attached XREF will be located at the coordinates specified by you on screen or in this Dialog. Drawings own anchor point: the attached XREF drawings own anchor point (if any) will be located at the coordinates specified. Bounding box node: ArchiCAD calculates the size of the bounding box of the attached XREF. You choose any of the 9 significant points of the bounding box, and that position of the XREF will be located at the coordinates specified fro placement. Place on Story: Use this drop-down list to choose the story onto which to place the XREF. Before the actual placement, ArchiCAD will switch to that story. Translator: This field displays the currently selected DXF/DWG Translator to be used during the conversion of the attached AutoCAD drawing. You may select any of the currently available Translators from the drop-down list. Clicking the Settings button will bring up the Translator Dialog where you can make modifications to the Translator Settings before attaching the XREF file. For more information, see DXF/DWG Translation Setup. Description: This field shows a short explanation and note about the currently selected Translator so you can decide if it fits your needs. Attach: Click this button to execute the attach operation. Note: When you attach an external reference file to an ArchiCAD Project, a layer will be created for it. The resulting layer names will have the following format: XREF_NAME | LAYER_NAME. For example, the PEN_56 layer of a DWG file that was attached to the project with the XREF name 3D_STUFF will become the layer 3D_STUFF|PEN_56.
1712
DXF/DWG Translation Setup

Use the File > File Special > DXF-DWG Translation Setup command to open this dialog box. Use this dialog box to define how elements in ArchiCAD will be interpreted when exported as DXF/DWG files, and vice versa: how the elements in DXF/DWG files will be interpreted when imported into ArchiCAD. For information on data exchange using DXF/DWG files, see also Data Exchange.
Managing Translator Files

In the top part of the dialog box, translators are listed and identified according to the following fields: Name: The length of Name can be anything within the limits enforced by the file system of your machine. Project and Partner: You may store up to 255 characters in these fields (127 in Japan, China or Korea). To enter data into these fields click the Rename button. Use the splitter bars to edit column width. The list of Translators can be sorted by any of the fields, by clicking on the fields title button. The buttons to the right of the translator list are used for translator management, as described below. Create New: Click this button to create a new Translator: A dialog will ask you where to locate and what to name the file. (Default location: the place where the DXF-DWG Translators are stored; default name: New translator.Xml). Enter the necessary details and click the Save button to return to the main Translation Setup dialog. The new entry appears in the Translator list and gets selected. It is filled with default values, which you can adjust to fit your needs. Duplicate: Click this button to duplicate a Translator: Duplicate creates a copy of the selected translator, with an identical file name augmented by _Copy. Then make the necessary translator rule modifications in the new translator. Rename: Click this button to rename and edit information about a Translator: A new Dialog will open where three text fields enable you to set the Name, Project and Partner information of the selected Translator. When you have set these values, click on the Rename button to apply changes and return to the main Translation Setup dialog. Delete: Click this button to remove unneeded translators: Deleted translators will disappear from the list only, but the XML files they refer to remain in the file system, for two reasons: If the unneeded translator is on a server, you may not have the right to delete it. If, at a later time, you need the removed translator after all, you can reintroduce it into your list.
1713
Browse: Click this button to access an existing Translator file. A file dialog appears where you have to find and select one or more relevant Translator files. Some of the files you selected may be either damaged translators or XML files created for other purposes. The add-on screens the files and accepts only the good ones. At the end you get a report about the accepted and rejected files. Alternatively, you can drag and drop files from any kind of file system window (e.g. from a Find File dialog) onto the surface of the dialog. The dropped files will go through the screening procedure described above.
Revert
If you make a mistake while editing settings and fields in the Translation Setup dialog box, click on the Revert button at the bottom left corner of the dialog. This command will restore the status quo that existed when you launched the dialog. If you created new files before clicking the Revert button, you will have to create them again, because these files are not saved to disk until you finish the operation with OK/Open/Save commands.
Save Settings & Close

If you started data exchange (Open or Save of any kind) and made some Translator modifications that you want to preserve, but dont want to continue the data exchange operation, click on the Save Settings & Close button. Your Translator modifications will be saved, but your original Open or Save command will not be executed.
DXF/DWG Info Panel

The information in these fields is specific to the selected translator. Description: This is a multi-line edit box containing information about the selected translator. You can edit its contents with a single click. Location: This field displays the path of the selected translator file and cannot be edited.
DXF/DWG Settings in Selected Translator Panel

This panel contains the settings of the conversion rules themselves. The conversion rules for data exchange between ArchiCAD and AutoCAD fall into six main group: Drawing Unit Open Options Save Options Attributes Miscellaneous Custom functions Depending on how you access the Translator Setup dialog box, not all settings groups will be available: if you access the dialog box during an Open operation, Open Options will be listed, but not the Save Options, and vice-versa. If you open the dialog box from the File > File Special menu, all options groups are listed.
1714
The options displayed in the dialog box at right depends on the settings option you click from the hierarchical menu at left. Moreover, the options themselves will vary depending on the type of elements being imported or exported.
Drawing Unit Open Options Save Options Attributes Layers Pens & Colors Line Types Fills Font-Style Conversion Miscellaneous Custom Functions
1715
Drawing Unit
This is an option of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. Value of 1 DXF/DWG Drawing Unit in ArchiCAD: As you export or import something in DXF or DWG, you must set the size and distance conversion factor to ensure that ArchiCAD interprets the data correctly. The user interface of the DXF/DWG Drawing Unit consists of a pop-up list and a numeric data field. The pop-up list has four items for standard drawing units (1 meter, 1 millimeter, 1 inch, 1 foot). Two custom units are also available: Custom [mm] and Custom [inch]. Selecting either of these gives you a field in which you enter numeric data according to your needs. When opening a DXF/DWG file, you must define a scale at which you would like to see the correct ratios of elements drawn in AutoCAD. This particularly applies to arrowheads, symbol line types and symbol fills. Set Scale Factor for converting texts and arrowheads: Choose one of the three options: Set scale factor separately with each conversion: In this case, a dialog box appears after clicking the Open button, letting you set the desired scale factor. You may click the arrow before the text Show Example to display an explanation of the effect of the scale factor: This scale factor has an effect on Texts and Arrowheads of the imported AutoCAD drawing. Click OK to accept the scale factor. Use constant factor for all conversions: Set a scale factor for ArchiCAD to use for these conversions. In this case the Scale Factor Dialog will not come up. Always use the scale set in the currently active ArchiCAD window: The scale of the ArchiCAD Floor Plan will be used for conversion. This is the same method which worked in ArchiCAD versions up to 8.1. Note: If you used the Set scale factor separately with each conversion option, the Scale Factor Dialog will also come up in case an AutoCAD drawing is dragged and dropped onto the ArchiCAD Window background (drag-and-drop Open), and in case an AutoCAD drawing is merged into the ArchiCAD Floor Plan, a Section/Elevation/IE Window or a Detail/ Worksheet (drag-and-drop merge)
1716
Open Options
These options of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup vary depending on the performed operation. They include: AutoCAD Block translation with the additional option of including 3D Data in the resulting Library Parts The conversion of Dimensions Import of ArchiCAD Hatch Blocks Conversion format of pictures contained in AutoCAD drawings 3D Conversion when AutoCAD drawing is opened as Library Part
Opening as Floor Plan: Translate AutoCAD Blocks as: Choose one of the following options: 2D Elements Grouped 2D Elements Library Parts When you choose 2D Elements or Grouped 2D Elements, all the references of all the blocks get decomposed into simple floor plan elements. Translate Dimensions As: Lines and Text: you dont create a dimension out of the dimension entity; rather you use the drawing details stored in the file to get the same look (arrowheads, colors, text positions) as in AutoCAD. Single Dimension Units: every dimension unit in the AutoCAD file gets converted into an ArchiCAD dimension unit. Note: dimensions may have different visual features in ArchiCAD and AutoCAD. Not all of these visual features can be reproduced during conversion. The most significant difference is with arrowheads: ArchiCAD has a fixed set of them, whereas in AutoCAD you can design your own set. Dimension Chains: In AutoCAD only separate 2-point dimensions are available (even though there is a method of creating sets of dimensions that look like dimension chains.)
1717
Associative Dimensions where applicable: In former versions of AutoCAD, dimensions were not associative the way we mean it in ArchiCAD: that is, glued to hotspots of other elements. If you check this option the add-on will look for already imported elements to which to associate the processed dimension. It may be time-consuming, therefore the default behavior is to create hotspots on the element and associate the linear dimension to the hotspots. Note 1: When radial dimensions are concerned, they always need something circular to be associated to Note 2: The most recent version of AutoCAD contains associative dimensions for certain elements, which cannot be converted Note 3: ADT has also introduced a kind of associative dimension, but it can be associated only to ADT objects. Import AutoCAD Hatch Blocks: Check this box if you want AutoCAD fills transformed into unnamed groups of individual lines (hatch blocks). These will not be recognized as fill types in ArchiCAD. When importing a file from AutoCAD version R14 or later, hatches will be converted into fill types in ArchiCAD. Import Viewports as Embedded Drawings: Check this box to ensure that Autocad Viewpoints are imported as embedded Drawings after opening a DXF/DWG file in ArchiCAD. If you uncheck the box, Viewports will be converted to ArchiCAD views instead. Convert Pictures to Format: Choose a file format to use in converting pictures: either retain the pictures original format, or choose another image format from the pop-up as a uniform format for all pictures. Open as Library Parts 3D Data in created Library Parts: Choose one of the following options: Binary 3D: store the 3D information in binary format, GDL Script: store the 3D information in GDL script. If you process 3D data, the Binary 3D form is recommended: it is much quicker if the script doesnt have to be recompiled every time you generate the 3D view. Note: The Open Object command is the only way to get all the 3D data stored in a DXF/DWG file!]
1718
Enable partial open: Check this box and save it as part of the Translator Settings to filter, by layer, the elements to be converted into ArchiCAD. In this case, when you use File > Open on a DWG/DXF file, the DWG/DXF Partial Open dialog box appears, listing the source files layer set and the layers status. Uncheck the layers which you do not wish to include in the converted ArchiCAD file.
This function lets you restrict the DWG conversion to just those elements that you really need, thereby increasing conversion speed and reducing the size of the resulting ArchiCAD project.
1719
Save Options
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup.
File Format
Define which version of AutoCAD you are saving your files to. The options are: AutoCAD 2000, 2002 AutoCAD 2004, 2005, 2006 (default) AutoCAD 2007 The Smart Merge feature is available in all. Note: The AutoCAD 2005 file format is identical with AutoCAD 2004. We will refer to this format as AutoCAD 2004 in this documentation.
Convert Images to
Choose a format from the drop-down list for images saved to AutoCAD. As a default, Images original format is selected; in this case, no conversion takes place. Force output in AutoCAD picture formats: If this box is checked, the list of available image formats will show only those which the selected version of AutoCAD can read. The rest of the choices are disabled. Note: If you have also selected Images original format, the picture will retain its original format only if it is recognized by AutoCAD; unrecognized file formats will be converted as TIFF.
Template File
Some settings in AutoCAD cannot be matched to anything in ArchiCAD or from the data coming from ArchiCAD it is not possible to decide what value elements in AutoCAD should assume. For example, in ArchiCAD, layers do not have color and line type; in AutoCAD they do. The solution for the conversion of these settings is to choose a Template. The Template File is a DXF/DWG file where these conversions and changes are already done. If you choose a Template File with DXF/DWG export, elements going to the layer defined in the template file will have their layers color and line type set to the same values as in the Template file. This happens without the user even opening the resulting DXF/DWG file. The template file supplies the layer names defined in the file, so you dont have to type them in, making it easier to create the layer conversion table. Next to an edit field, the Browse button opens a file dialog from which to select a Template File. These Template Files may come from consultants. After you saved a DXF/DWG file for a consultant, he opens it and makes changes to it (e.g. to layers, pens etc.). Then he saves this file and sends it back to you. You will now have a Template File which you can use the next time you save DXF/DWG data for this consultant. To the right of this Browse button, you will find another button. If you click it, the selection of the Template File will be cancelled, and the edit field will become empty.
1720
Save Layout Into

Controls how and into what Space of a DXF/DWG file the content of the Layout is saved. Paper Space with Drawings as Blocks: All elements drawn on the Layout, plus all drawing data will be saved into the Paper Space of the resulting AutoCAD drawing. All Drawings placed on the Layout will be converted into AutoCAD Blocks, and these will be clipped so only those portions of the Blocks will be visible in the AutoCAD Paper Space that were visible on the Layout in ArchiCAD. The purpose is perfect reproduction of what you saw on the Layout. With this option the Model Space of the resulting AutoCAD drawing will be completely empty. Model Space: All elements drawn on the Layout, plus all drawing data will be saved into the Model Space of the resulting AutoCAD drawing. All Drawings placed on the Layout will be converted into AutoCAD Blocks, and these will be clipped so only those portions of the Blocks will be visible in the AutoCAD Model Space that were visible on the Layout in ArchiCAD. The purpose is perfect reproduction of what you saw on the Layout. With this option a default Paper Space will be created in the resulting AutoCAD drawing, which will be empty. - For Drawings whose source is internal to the project and whose Drawing status is up-dodate: their elements will be placed on identical layers in AutoCAD, subject to any layerconversion preference in the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. - For Drawings whose source is internal to the project, but whose Drawing status is not up-todate (i.e. it is a manual-update drawing detached from the model): their elements will be placed on separate AutoCAD layers whose name is combined out of the Drawings name and ID. - If the Drawings originated in external projects: their elements will be placed on a default layer in AutoCAD named Drawings and Figures. Paper Space with Cropped Views content: Drawing elements manually drawn on the Layout will be saved into the Paper Space of the resulting AutoCAD drawing. The image of the Layout will be reconstructed in the Paper Space of the AutoCAD drawing. Drawings placed on the Layout will first become cropped by their placement polygon on the Layout (meaning only those elements and part of elements inside of the cropped area will be exported), and then saved in DXF/DWG format. Paper Space with Full Views content: Drawing elements drawn on the Layout will be saved into the Paper Space of the resulting AutoCAD drawing. The image of the Layout will be reconstructed in the Paper Space of the AutoCAD drawing. Drawings placed on the Layout will be saved in their entirety in DXF/DWG format. In case of the latter two choices, the Place Drawings into field will become enabled, where you can choose how placed Drawings should be saved. There are two choices: Single DXF/DWG file: All drawings (either cropped or in Full depending on the value of the Save Layout into field) are saved into a single DXF/DWG file. They will be placed side by side in the Model Space of the file, and View Ports will be created in the Paper Space of this resulting AutoCAD drawing so in Paper Space they will look like the Layout in ArchiCAD. Linked XREF drawings: A DXF/DWG file will be saved. In this file there will be placement references to XREF files. All files will be saved in other separate DXF/DWG files and these
1721
files will be placed in the first DXF/DWG file as XREFs. They will be placed side by side in the Model Space of the first file, and View Ports will be created in the Paper Space of this resulting AutoCAD drawing so in Paper Space they will look like the Layout in ArchiCAD. To the right of this field there are two buttons. Click the left button to open a Dialog, where you can define a folder path relative to the location of the folder where the AutoCAD drawings will be saved. Click OK to close this Dialog. The other button will let you delete the relative path you entered in the previous dialog. Click on it and the path will be cleared without having to enter the Dialog. If there is no relative path defined for the XREF files, they will be saved into the same folder where the parent AutoCAD drawing is saved.
Saving Floor Plan

The following options are available only when saving Floor Plans: Convert Complex Elements to Blocks: With this option, you will convert complex elements to blocks that are recognized by AutoCAD, so you do not have to explode complex ArchiCAD elements. Prepare File for Smart Merge: if you work with a consultant, you may have to supply extra data for the DXF/DWG file. This option enables/disables Smart Merge. Note: This option is disabled if the plan is still unnamed. Important: To use Smart Merge, save the Project first. For more information on Smart Merge, see Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge). Explode complex ArchiCAD Elements: Use this if you are exporting DXF files from ArchiCAD to a program which cannot process blocks. This option allows you to export data that these programs are able to process. Note: This option doesn't affect the way library part instances (windows, doors, objects and lights) are exported. These objects always go into blocks.
Saving Zones as
The Save Zones as option allows you to save Zones two ways: Stamp only, or Stamp and Fill.
Saving 3D Data
The following options are available only when saving 3D Data: Omit Polygon Edges: The color of polygon edges in the 3D window of ArchiCAD is usually different from the color of surfaces. If you want to reproduce this look in AutoCAD, leave this checkbox empty. If you check the checkbox, the lines representing the edges wont get exported. Export File with Simplified Data Structure: The effect of this option is similar to the Explode Complex ArchiCAD Elements option all the data goes into the entity section, instead of blocks.
1722
Attributes
There are five groups dedicated to different attributes: Layers, Pens and Colors, Line Types, Fills, and Font-Style Conversion. Each group consists of a Method set and/or one or more conversion Dictionary sets. The Method set contains options to define the actual attribute. The Dictionary set contains a list of ArchiCAD attributes and their AutoCAD counterparts. Dictionaries are listed in the Attributes tree as conversion dialogs (i.e. Pen-color conversion). During Save, an ArchiCAD attribute found in the dictionary is renamed to its AutoCAD counterpart, and vice versa during Open. Attributes not found in the dictionary remain unchanged. All the Dictionaries function in the same way: Click New to create a new entry. Click Edit or double-click on an existing entry brings up the same dialog to modify the entry. Select one or more items and click Delete to remove them from the dictionary. If you set up a dictionary, the entered attribute pairs will appear on the corresponding panel of the Translator. The creation of dictionary items is performed in dialog boxes listing the available choices. Note on Attribute Names: ArchiCAD supports attribute names of essentially any number of unicode characters. AutoCAD 2000 and later versions allow almost any character attribute names. Names can contain up to 255 characters. (Character lengths are halved for Japanese, Chinese and Korean versions). Note on Colors and Fonts: While ArchiCAD pens can be set to any colors you like, AutoCAD versions have set pen colors that cannot be changed. In AutoCAD 2004 and later versions, it is possible to define further pen colors by specifying RGB values for them. These pens will have a pen index number of 256 or higher in these programs. Font names are stored differently in DXF/DWG files and in ArchiCAD. Even when one-byone font matching is possible, a dictionary is necessary. (On a PC, ArchiCAD supports all available fonts including those installed by AutoCAD.) Symbol line types are stored differently in ArchiCAD and in AutoCAD. Due to these differences, some of ArchiCADs symbol line types wont look the same in AutoCAD. There are two solutions to this problem: Redesign the problematic line type until the disturbing differences disappear. Set up a template file containing an acceptable substitution for it. The following sections describe the method and dictionary (conversion) options for each of the five attribute groups.
1723
Attribute Purge
When saving an ArchiCAD file as DWG, only those ArchiCAD attributes will be included which are actually used in the project. This is an automatic process, reducing file size. If you are using a DWG template file, all attributes from the template file will be saved as part of the DWG project, regardless of whether they are used or not. To purge unused attributes which originate from the template file, click the Purge all unused Attributes checkbox in the Miscellaneous tab page.
1724
Layers
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. You can convert layers in the DXF/DWG file by ArchiCAD layers, Pen Numbers or Element Types, or by combining layers with Pen Numbers. In case of ArchiCAD Layers and Element Types, you can not define Pen-based layer names conversion, in the other three, you can. In addition, you can save either all layers or only visible ones and choose specific layers for Windows and Doors (in ArchiCAD, they are automatically placed on the same layer as their host Walls), all three Fill Categories and Skin Separator Lines. Note: The Visible Layers Only option of the Save elements on field works for Drawings only if you save the Drawing file separately. If you save a Layout as a DXF/DWG file, all layers (both visible and hidden) of that Layouts Drawings will be saved.
Methods
The options on the Methods tab are relevant for Save operations.
Create Layers According to

ArchiCAD Layers: Create layers in the DXF/DWG file based on the layers used in ArchiCAD. The layers will carry their hidden and locked status with them. Note: Pen-based layer names conversion is not available with this option, Custom Layer names take precedence. When you choose this option, the Layer name conversion dictionary will be used to replace some of the layer names. Pen Numbers: This option places elements having the same color in a common layer. The Custom tags to Pen Numbers area has a Prefix field and a Postfix field. You can fill out these to specify the format of the created Layer names. The resulting Layer name will follow the following format: <Prefix>Pen No.<Postfix>. For example, if Prefix=AA_ and Postfix=_PEN, then all elements drawn using Pen 23 with be converted to Layer AA_23_PEN in the resulting AutoCAD drawing. Note 1: When you choose this option, the Pen-based layer names dictionary will be used to replace some of the layer names. Note 2: Custom Layer names are not available with this option. Element types: Places common element types into a corresponding layer, such as a WALLS layer. Note: There is no conversion dictionary associated with this layer creation method. Layer or declared Pen Number: Creates AutoCAD layers according to ArchiCAD Layers, but definitions in Pen-based layer names conversion dictionary take precedence over ArchiCAD Layer conversion. Within ArchiCAD Layer conversion, Custom Layers take precedence over normal Layer conversions. Layer extended by Pen Number: Creates AutoCAD Layer according to ArchiCAD Layers, but out of one ArchiCAD Layer it may create several Layers in the resulting AutoCAD drawing, because it will place elements located on the same Layer but using different Pens to
1725
different Layers in AutoCAD. The names of Layers will be created by the following pattern: <ArchiCADLayer>_<Prefix>Pen No.<Postfix>. Note 1: When you choose this option, the Pen-based layer names dictionary will be used to replace some of the <Prefix>Pen No.<Postfix> portion of the Layer names.
Save Elements on
All layers: Save elements regardless of whether they are on hidden layers or visible ones. Visible Layers only: Elements on hidden layers are omitted.
Custom Layers
These fields allow you to assign Windows, Doors, Drafting Fills, Cover Fills, Cut Fills and Skin Separator Lines of Walls to separate layers, instead of remaining on the same layer as the construction element they belong to. Windows: If you enter a layer name into the Windows edit field, all the Windows will be part of that layer instead of the layer of the Wall containing those Windows. If you clear it, Windows will go to their default layers (the layers of the Walls containing them). The same rules apply to Doors. Drafting Fills will go to the layer specified in the Drafting Fills edit field. Cover Fills: Fills (if any) belonging to Slabs, Roofs, Meshes and Zones and Fills having the Cover Fill category will go to the layer specified in the Cover Fills edit field. Cut Fills showing cut surfaces or sections of construction elements and Fills having the Cut Fill category will go to the layer specified in the Cut Fills edit field. Skin Separator Lines of cut composite structures, plus Lines having the Skin Separator Line category will go to the layer specified in the Skin Separator Lines edit field. Contours of cut construction elements and composite structures (they belong to the Cut Line category) and Lines having the Drafting Line category will remain on the layer they were in. In case of a Column: if there is no veneer, the contour of the Column belongs to the Cut Line category. If there is a veneer, the contour of the Column belongs to the Cut Line category, and the lines between the core and the veneer belong to the Skin Separator Line category and will be saved accordingly. In case of Fills: the contour of a Fill (if any) belonging to the Cut Fill category will belong to the Cut Line category. Contours of other Fill categories will belong to the Drafting Line category. Window Markers Door Markers Zone Background (any visible zone cover fills) Zone Outline Zone Stamp (geometry of zone stamp) Zone Texts (textual content of zone stamp)
1726
The Custom Layer names you define will work even if they do not exist in the ArchiCAD project. If you want your Custom Layer name to include the source layer name of the wall containing the element: click Insert Source Layer. Example: The Wall containing Windows is on the layer: EXTERIOR WALLS If you enter in the Windows DXF/DWG Layer field the following: WINDOW_ON_ and then click Insert Source Layer, the Windows field shows: WINDOW_ON_<Source Layer>
Then the resulting layer name will be: WINDOW_ON_EXTERIOR_WALLS Do not create empty Layers: If you check this checkbox, only those layers that have elements in them in the DXF/DWG file will be exported. If you leave it unchecked, every layer gets exported.
Pen-based Layer Names

If you save a DXF/DWG file with the Create Layers according to option set to Pen Numbers, the export file will contain a layer with the name PEN_<n> where <n> is a pencolor index. AutoCAD users may prefer the layer name to state the actual color name (i.e. PEN_BLUE). These options can be set here. Pen-based layer names conversion is very similar to Layer name conversion the only difference is that you have a standard ArchiCAD pen selection control instead of the layer name pop-up. You can write only valid pen numbers in the ArchiCAD pen field.
Layer name Conversion

To create a dictionary item in the layer-name conversion dictionary, click on the New button and assign the layers in the dialog box. Note: A problem may arise when you convert both Exterior Walls and Interior Walls to WALLS in AutoCAD. When converting wall layers back to ArchiCAD, the dictionary will not distinguish between the two types of ArchiCAD wall layers. Pick a valid ArchiCAD layer from the pop-up under the edit field in the layer conversion dialog. Press OK to add the item to the dictionary. To modify an existing item, just double-click on it, modify it, and write it back to the dictionary. To delete one or more items from the dictionary, select them and click Delete.
1727
Pens & Colors

These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. ArchiCAD Pen Colors are configurable, while AutoCADs pen number association to colors cannot be modified. You can convert ArchiCAD Pens to AutoCAD Colors by searching for the best color match or set up a conversion dictionary. To convert by pen index numbers, use the default translator entitled Keep Pen Index Number. (Choose this option from the pop-up translator list at the top of the DXF-DWG Translation Setup dialog box.) Creating, editing and deleting items in the pen-color conversion dictionary is similar to Layer name conversion. The differences are: On both sides you deal with pen/color indexes. You have a standard ArchiCAD pen selection control next to the edit field for the ArchiCAD pen index. There is a custom control to pick AutoCAD colors (AutoCAD colors cannot be altered). You can even pick the symbolic AutoCAD colors called BYLAYER and BYBLOCK (they will appear as 0 and 256 in the edit field and in the dictionary item). You have a Pen weight parameter. When you load something using this option the ArchiCAD pen in question will have the weight prescribed here instead of the standard 0.18 mm.
Window Background Pen

The Fill Background pen color palette has a Window Background Pen option: the pen color marked will produce a fill background color (with number -1) that is identical to the current window background color. If the background pen is set to window background (-1), any background fill (whose foreground is 0%) will be converted to an AutoCAD Wipeout. A Patch objects background fill color is assigned the window background pen color (-1): as a result, the patch will be displayed correctly when the background color changes. When the Patch is converted to AutoCAD, its background is transformed to an AutoCAD wipeout (WPOut) without a frame, and will be displayed correctly. Note: If you are using an AutoCAD version preceding AutoCAD 2004, Wipeout is available as part of Express Tools. Wipeout is integrated into AutoCAD 2004.
Pen Methods
In AutoCAD 2004 and later versions it possible to create pen colors that are not specified by the pen index number, but an RGB (red, green, blue) value. In AutoCAD 2004 and later versions, these new pen colors get a pen index of 256 or higher. 1728
All AutoCAD pens with a pen index number of 256 or higher will have their pen index changed to 255 in ArchiCAD. A note reminds you of this in the Dialog.
Searching for the Best Color Match

When you open a DXF/DWG file, the pen table of ArchiCAD is set to the AutoCAD colors. The pen numbers will be the same as the AutoCAD color indexes in the DXF/DWG file. When you perform any other Open operation in which pens should not be altered (Merge, Attach XREF, Open Object, etc.), every AutoCAD color will be mapped to the ArchiCAD pen with the most similar color (RGB) components. When you perform any kind of Save operation, every ArchiCAD pen will be mapped to the AutoCAD color with the most similar color (RGB) components. Note: A round-trip will not necessarily result in the same colors as the original. For example, if ArchiCAD pen 25 finds AutoCAD color 236 the closest match, it is possible that AutoCAD color 236 will find ArchiCAD pen 32 the closest match instead of 25. Grayish pastel zone-fill colors always end up a pure light-gray. When the ArchiCAD Plan is set to be saved in AutoCAD 2004 or later format, there are two choices for matching ArchiCAD and AutoCAD pens. The first one is the best matching Standard AutoCAD color. If this radio button is selected, the program searches through the AutoCAD color table to find which AutoCAD color matches the ArchiCAD pen color best and assign it accordingly. The second one is RGB color if no exactly matching Standard AutoCAD color exists. If this radio button is checked, the program searches through the AutoCAD color table to find an exact match for the pen color just as with the other radio button. But in case it does not find one, it will save the RGB value of the ArchiCAD Pen and assigns to it a pen index number of 256 or higher in the AutoCAD drawing.
Set All Elements Colors and Lineweights to BYLAYER

This option is used when performing Save. It overrides the Convert ArchiCAD Pens to AutoCAD Colors by setting during Save, but not during Open. When it is on, every saved entity will have the color BYLAYER. When the AutoCAD user changes the color attached to a layer, everything on that layer will change its color accordingly.
1729
Do not export ArchiCAD penweights

When this checkbox is checked, penweights of ArchiCAD Pens will not be exported to the resulting AutoCAD drawing. The following table shows how ArchiCAD penweights are converted to AutoCAD penweights when this checkbox is not checked and penweights are exported. Conversion of Pen weights from ArchiCAD to AutoCAD ArchiCAD (mm) 0 -0.05 -0.09 -0.13 -0.15 -0.18 -0.20 -0.25 AutoCAD (mm) 0 0.05 0.09 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.20 0.25 ArchiCAD (mm) -0.30 -0.35 -0.40 -0.50 -0.53 -0.60 -0.70 -0.80 AutoCAD (mm) 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50 0.53 0.60 0.70 0.80 ArchiCAD (mm) -0.90 -1.00 -1.06 -1.20 -1.40 -1.58 -2.00 2.00-100 AutoCAD (mm) 0.90 1.00 1.06 1.20 1.40 1.58 2.00 2.11
Pen-Color Conversion
ArchiCAD Pen-AutoCAD Color pairs defined in the Pen-color conversion dictionary will take precedence over the automatic conversion methods set in Convert ArchiCAD Pens to AutoCAD Colors by setting in Pen Methods.
1730
Line Types
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. When saving files, you can either set up a line type conversion table or choose to convert all ArchiCAD line types to a single type in AutoCAD named BYLAYER. Note that symbol line types are stored differently in ArchiCAD and in AutoCAD. Due to these differences, some of ArchiCADs symbol line types will not look the same in AutoCAD.
Methods
Set All Elements Line Types to BYLAYER: This checkbox is available only during Save. It overrides the effect of the Linetype-linetype conversion dictionary. When this check-box is checked, every saved entity will have line type BYLAYER. When the AutoCAD user changes the line type attached to a layer, everything on that layer will change its line type accordingly. Keep Existing Line Types on Open: If you check this checkbox, ArchiCAD will keep line types currently defined and also import line types defined in the imported DXF/DWF file. In this case, if the DXF/DWG file contains line types with the same name as line types existing in the currently open ArchiCAD Project, the line types of the DXF/DWF file will not be imported. If this checkbox is not checked, all line types from the DXF/DWG file will be imported, and none of the existing ArchiCAD line types will be kept. LTScale value in output field: Set the LTScale to the desired value. The LTScale variable used in DWG files are correctly interpreted when opening or merging DWG files in ArchiCAD. New line types will be created as needed, regardless of the length of the original line pattern.
Linetype-Linetype Conversion
This conversion dictionary works exactly the same way as the layer-layer conversion except that it deals with line types. The only condition restricting its use is the option Set all Elements Line Types to BYLAYER. You can pick the requested line type name from the pop-up list. Its name will appear in the ArchiCAD line type field. In the AutoCAD line type field, type the name of the line type you would like this ArchiCAD line type to be converted to in the resulting DXF/DWG drawing. Or vice-versa: from this line type, ArchiCAD will create a line type specified in the ArchiCAD line type field when opening DXF/DWG files.
1731
Fills
ArchiCAD fill patterns can be saved as solid fills. You can also export fill backgrounds as additional polygons (as this feature is not supported by AutoCAD).
Methods
In this popup menu you can choose a method how ArchiCAD fills will be exported to AutoCAD. Export all Fills as is: This option will recreate ArchiCAD fills in AutoCAD. Export all Fills as SOLID: This option will convert all fill patterns to solid fills. Export all Symbol Fills as SOLID: This option will convert all symbol fill patterns to solid fills. Export Fill Backgrounds as Additional Solid Hatches: ArchiCAD fill patterns have a separate background fill; AutoCAD fills, in contrast, are all transparent between the pattern lines. If you want the exported file to look like the original ArchiCAD fill, check this option. Note: Export Fills as SOLID disables this option. The results of this choice: Background Fill, Non-Transparent Background: When an background fill with a nontransparent color is exported, it will be exported as a solid fill whose color is that of the background (plus the border if it exists). Background Fill, Transparent Background: no fill will be exported (only the border if it exists). Foreground Fill: Exported as-is; background has no effect. Vectorial Fill, Non-Transparent Background: a foreground fill with the background color is exported first; then, a pattern fill with the foreground color is exported as a Hatch entity (and the border if it exists). If the Hatch lines reach a certain level of density, then it becomes a solid. Vectorial Fill, Transparent Background: Only the pattern fill with the foreground color is exported (and of course the border if necessary). Symbol fill: Has no AutoCAD equivalent; the symbol pattern is generated into a Block. If it has a background in ArchiCAD, this background will become a Hatch in Autocad. Gradient: Exported as solid. Image: Exported as solid. Explode gradient fills: Gradient fills in your project will be exploded into separate components. If your Gradient fill had a transparent background, it will also be a separate component. Use the Fill Conversion Table: Check this box to convert Fills to hatches using the Fill Conversion table. Click on the Fill-Hatch Conversion table to define correspondences.
1732
Fill-Hatch Conversion Table

Click New to define each new correspondence in the Edit Fill-Hatch Conversion dialog box.
This requires that you have selected an AutoCAD template file in the Save Options page of the DXF-DWG Translation Dialog Box, and the template file includes at least one placed instance of the desired hatch. Choose from among the available hatch patterns using the drop-down menu below AutoCAD Hatch Pattern. Enter a Hatch Scale in which to display the converted fill.
1733
Font-Style Conversion
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. Font names are stored differently in DXF/DWG files and in ArchiCAD. Even when one-by-one font matching is possible, a dictionary is necessary. (On Windows, ArchiCAD supports all available fonts including those installed by AutoCAD). During Save, texts having the font specified on the ArchiCAD side of a dictionary item will be exported in the font specified on the AutoCAD side. If the slant parameter is 15 (15 degrees) or greater, the exported text will be in italics. Usually, an italic style has an oblique angle of 75 degrees. Unless a template file is selected, the style will use the AutoCAD counterpart of the ArchiCAD font. (A font conversion file specifies the best match, regardless of the platform ArchiCAD is running on). During Open, a text having a font that is listed in the dictionary will be converted according to the dictionary specification. The slant parameter is handled the same way as during Save. You can pick the requested font name from the pop-up list. Its name will appear in the ArchiCAD font field. In the AutoCAD style field, type the name of the style you would like this ArchiCAD font to be converted to in the resulting DXF/DWG drawing. Or vice-versa: after opening DXF/ DWG files, text elements using the style in AutoCAD will be displayed in ArchiCAD using the font specified in the ArchiCAD font field. In the Oblique angle field you can specify the angle of the font in ArchiCAD.
1734
Miscellaneous
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. These settings concern character conversion including the use of national characters not in the English alphabet, font substitution rules for missing specifications and binary DXF. Replace Missing Fonts with: If you get a DXF/DWG file containing a style/font specification that does not exist in any of your style/font and font/font dictionaries, you can define a default font here. Allow national characters in layer, linetype, block names: If the recipient AutoCAD works in the same national environment as your ArchiCAD, you can check this checkbox. Write binary DXF: This compressed version of DXF takes up about half the space of the text DXF format. Note: if you really want the data to be compact, it is suggested that you write to DWG format. Convert Splines into Polylines: Check this box to convert Splines into Polylines in ArchiCAD. ArchiCAD will approximate the AutoCAD Spline using a series of connected straight line segments (that is, a Polyline). This may be useful when in some rare cases, the converted ArchiCAD Spline still looks a bit different from its AutoCAD counterpart. If you leave this box unchecked, AutoCAD Splines are converted into ArchiCAD Splines. Purge all unused Attributes: If you are using a DWG template file, all attributes from the template file will be saved as part of the DWG project by default, regardless of whether they are used or not. To purge unused attributes which originate from the template file, click this checkbox. Note: Unused attributes from the ArchiCAD project will be purged automatically.
1735
Custom Functions
These options are part of the DXF/DWG Translation Setup. Custom Functions contains add-ons for both Open Extras and Save Extras operations. Several functions are loaded by default; you need only turn them on or off using the checkboxes. To change the order in which they are executed, you can drag and drop them to new locations within their element groups. A Path area displays the location of the add-on. If you add further functions or delete any of them, you must press the Reload Functions button to refresh the function list. Custom function files are located in your ArchiCAD folder, under Add-Ons > Import/ Export.
1736
Merge DXF-DWG
Use File > File Special > Merge, and enter the desired DXF or DWG file name in the directory dialog box. See also Data Exchange for general information on DXF/DWG. There are two possible routes you may take here. Since the DXF-DWG file may contain both Model Space and Paper Space information, and since ArchiCAD Project Files contain both Model Views and a Layout Book, you need to decide which elements should be merged.
Choose the Merge content of Model space into current View radio button if you want the Model Space portion of the DXF-DWG file merged into your Project file. If Model Space is merged, the Top View of AutoCAD elements located in the Model Space of the merged DXFDWG file will be generated, and these Top Views will be placed into the ArchiCAD Model View as 2D ArchiCAD elements. For more information, see Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box. Choose the Append Paper Space(s) to Layout Book radio button if you want the Paper Space(s) defined in the DXF-DWG file merged appended to the Layout Book of your Project file. If you choose the latter option, click the Append Options button to set two DXF-DWG Import options of the Translation Setup. The Import Options for Elements on Paper Space dialog will come up. Note that this button will be available only if the DXF/DWG file to be merged contains Paper Space information.
Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box Import Options for Elements on Paper Space Smart Merge Options
1737
Merge DXF-DWG Model Space Dialog Box

To access this dialog box, first use File > File Special > Merge, then enter the name of the DXF or DWG file to merge. In the appearing DXF-DWG Merge Options dialog box, choose the first option (Merge Content of Model Space) and click OK. This brings up the Merge DXF-DWG Model Space dialog box. Use these controls define where and how you want the file to be placed on the ArchiCAD floor plan.
Insertion point: In the X and Y field, you can enter the exact coordinates of the location of the lower left corner of the enclosing rectangle or of the Drawing origin. Alternatively, you can check the Specify On-Screen box to enter these coordinates by clicking on the Floor Plan. Scale: Either specify a scale factor in both X and Y directions, or check the Specify OnScreen box to define scale on the screen. Note: If you specify scale factors, the drawings bounding box will be scaled to the appropriate size. If not, you will be able to stretch the bounding box just as if you were stretching an ArchiCAD object. It is possible to input or specify negative or positive values for scale factors. By specifying negative values you can achieve mirroring effects. Rotation: You can define an angle by which the whole placed drawing will be rotated around its insertion point, or check the Specify On-Screen box to define rotation manually, on the screen. Note: If you specify a rotation angle, the drawing is rotated and then drawn. If not, you can rotate the bounding box until you input the value with a mouse click or coordinate input. Anchor Point: Use these controls to define by which point of the bounding box to place the drawing. Drawings own origin: the Global Origin (0;0 coordinate) of the attached drawing will be located at the coordinates specified by you on screen or in this Dialog. 1738
Drawings own anchor point: the attached drawings own anchor point (if any) will be located at the coordinates specified. Bounding box node: ArchiCAD calculates the size of the bounding box of the attached drawing. You choose any of the 9 significant points of the bounding box, and that position of the drawing will be located at the coordinates specified for placement. Place on Story: Use this drop-down list to choose the story onto which to place the drawing. Before the actual placement, ArchiCAD will switch to that story. Import Model Space content as GDL Object: Check this box to import the model content as a single GDL Object. Translator: This field displays the currently selected DXF/DWG Translator to be used during the conversion of the attached AutoCAD drawing. Then choose the Merge command.You may select any of the currently available Translators from the drop-down list (the default translator, For editable import, is generally appropriate). To modify the Translator Settings before executing the merge, click the Settings button to access the Translator Dialog. For more information, see DXF/DWG Translation Setup. Description: This field shows a short explanation and note about the currently selected Translator so you can decide if it fits your needs.
1739
Import Options for Elements on Paper Space

To access this dialog box, first use File > File Special > Merge, then enter the name of the DXF or DWG file to merge. In the appearing Merge DXF-DWG dialog box, choose the second option (Append Paper Spaces to Layout Book), then click the Append Options button.
This brings up the Import Options for Elements on Paper Space dialog box.
Translate AutoCAD Blocks as: Just as in the Open Options portion of the Translation Setup Dialog, you have three choices: 2D Elements Grouped 2D Elements Library Parts For more information, see Open Options. Convert AutoCAD Leaders to Labels: Check this box if you wish this conversion performed during the Merge process. If you leave this box unchecked, AutoCAD Leaders will be converted to simple ArchiCAD 2D elements. This checkbox will not be available (it will be greyed) if the ArchiCAD Add-On providing this functionality is not loaded. This checkbox is also available in the Translation Setup Dialog, in the Custom Functions > Open Extras area. Click the OK button to accept the settings changes you made in this Dialog or click Cancel to leave the settings as they were before. If Paper Space is merged, Paper Space definitions will be converted to Layouts in the Layout Book of ArchiCAD. A new Master Layout will also be created in case the DXF-DWG drawing contains Paper Space size definitions not already available in the Project file.
1740
The content of Viewports within the DXF-DWG file will be converted into Drawings when merged into ArchiCAD. These Drawings will be placed onto their appropriate Layout according to their Viewport definition in AutoCAD. These Drawings are not editable entities; they will appear in the Drawing Manager of ArchiCAD, with a status of embedded.
If elements were drawn in Paper Space of the DXF-DWG file, these elements will be converted into ArchiCAD elements and will be placed directly into the Layout they belong to.
1741
Smart Merge Options

To access this dialog box, use File > File Special > Smart Merge Options. Use these controls to configure the Smart Merge process for DXF/DWG files. For more information, see Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge). You can choose an existing configuration, or create a new one. The configuration files (.mcf) must be located in the folder of the Add-On. You can also duplicate, rename, or clear these configuration files with the appropriate buttons. You can save your configurations for your different needs into different files. When you merge a DXF/DWG file, ArchiCAD first looks for the .mcf file defined in the #MERGECONFIG section of the DXF-DWG Config.xml file. If this section is not used, then ArchiCAD looks for the dxf.mcf configuration file and the default.mcf file, successively. If none of these exist or if you want to select another .mcf file, you can always do so in the File > File Special > Smart Merge Options dialog box. A configuration set tells you what will happen when you merge a DXF/DWG drawing into the plan. The Merge process affects only visible and unlocked elements, so if you want to avoid changing any elements you should hide or lock them. You can study or edit the details of the configuration set, by clicking the small arrow next to Edit rules for current configuration text. The rules in the list are editable; the maximum number of rules is 16. A rule is made of a condition part and one or more actions. If an element coming from the DXF/DWG drawing meets a condition of a rule, the actions of that rule will be executed on it. Those elements that do not meet any of the conditions in the list are ignored.
Add or Remove Rules

The New Rule button adds a new but empty rule to the end of the list. The condition and the actions for this rule will be undefined. A rule becomes valid if the condition is fully defined and at least one action is set. You can remove a rule entirely by selecting its line and clicking the Delete Rule button. (Separator lines are not selectable.)
Editing a Rule
If you want to edit a condition, you have to click that line in the list, then choose another type of condition in the displayed pop-up window. To edit an action, click the row with the action you want to change, and select another enabled action from the pop-up. If you want to delete an action from a rule, select it and click the Delete Action button. A rule must have at least one action, thus you cannot delete the last one. The Add Action button inserts an action after the selected one. At first it will not be defined, so you must set a valid value for it. You have to read the actions sequentially, because there are cases when the execution order is irrelevant (e.g. you get different results if you first duplicate a wall in its original position and then move the duplicated original item or if you first move the original item and then duplicate it in the new position). Usually the actions are applied to the elements on the ArchiCAD plan, but 1742
not always. The operations following a duplicate element action are applied to the replica. The actions following the Outline from Merged file action are applied to the Outlined drawing stored in the DXF/DWG file. For more information on Outlined drawing, read the next section: More Information on Smart Merge.
More Information on Smart Merge

To understand how Merge works, lets have a look at what happens in detail: In ArchiCAD: You may add new elements. Even if you create them by copying existing elements, they are still new, as they get new unique IDs. You may change elements created earlier. That is, you may drag them, stretch them, or even just alter a material parameter. When you insert or change a window or door in a wall, it means the wall will change, because its modification date will change. This means that when merging the DWG/DXF file back into ArchiCAD, your only option will be to display the Outlined drawing next to the original ArchiCAD wall model element. You may delete anything. What the AutoCAD-user consultant can do with your DWG file: He/she can add new elements. He/she can move, rotate or mirror items you exported. He can even stretch them, but it is not recommended: the Merge function processes only size-preserving transformations. He/she can delete these elements as well and he can duplicate them. But how do we know that an item of the drawing (Autodesk terminology calls it entity) is something we exported or the other user created; and how do we know what he/she did to items of the former category? Autodesk provides means to add custom data (called extended entity data) to each entity. This allows us to save ArchiCAD-specific information along with the image of each of the elements we export. These elements can be simple, that is, something that can be represented by one AutoCAD entity (e.g. a circle); or complex (e.g. a wall that is drawn as at least 2 lines and 1 hatch). The complex elements have to be joined together in blocks (something like Library Parts in ArchiCAD) in order to handle them as units. Merge needs the original, unchanged element present in the plan in order to incorporate the changes the AutoCAD user made on it. This means that only minimal information will be stored: The unique (ArchiCAD) ID and type of the element The three coordinates that AutoCAD (or the other program) transforms if the entity is moved, rotated or stretched; if the other program is not AutoCAD, it must be done similarly The AutoCAD ID of the layer of the element, so that ArchiCAD can detect if the AutoCAD user moved the element to another layer The AutoCAD ID of the originally exported element to separate the original from the duplicates; this is what happens in the Merge process to the different elements Elements created on the Floor Plan after exporting the DWG: no action
1743
Entities added by the AutoCAD user (the duplicates of the ArchiCAD-generated elements not included): you will most likely want to keep them, so they are added to the plan. As to elements exported to the drawing (which may or may not have been modified by the other program): the problem here is that nothing prevents you and the AutoCAD user from simultaneously modifying/deleting these elements. The situation can be described by a matrix like this: 1 A B C D where: 1: the ArchiCAD user leaves the element unchanged 2: the ArchiCAD user modifies the element 3: the ArchiCAD user deletes the element A: the AutoCAD user leaves the element unchanged B: the AutoCAD user modifies the element C: the AutoCAD user copies the element D: the AutoCAD user deletes the element the case 1/A is simple enough: no one modified the element so it remains unchanged; 1/B: the original state of the element can be retrieved from the plan so there is no problem applying the changes; 1/C: like 1/B just applied to the copy of the original element; 1/D: the element gets deleted. But if you have modified (2) or deleted (3) an element, the results may be very different. If you moved a wall the AutoCAD user left in place (2/A) but mounted tubes on it: now the tubes will appear in the middle of nowhere. Or both of you moved an element (2/B): your move has been completed, but you do not know how to apply his movement because the original position is not preserved in the plan. The only way to deal with this problem is this: the AutoCAD drawing contains the image of the element reflecting the intended changes. This image (the Outline) can be drawn directly in the Floor Plan so at least you can see what the AutoCAD user meant to do. You can then decide what to do manually. Note: If an element was scaled in AutoCAD, the Merge Add-On will outline the drawing, and scaled elements will appear in ArchiCAD as single lines, arcs and fills. 3/D is the only simple thing: both of you meant to delete the element; since you have already done it, you have nothing to do. 1744
1/A
3/B
Please bear in mind that Merge is configurable; the above mentioned solutions are just suggestions. Many other possibilities exist: You can move the original element to another layer. You can move the element coming from the AutoCAD drawing to another layer. You can ask ArchiCAD to request confirmation at any point of an action sequence. This means that ArchiCAD will zoom to the element in question so you can examine the changes and decide on Merge Actions. The available actions are: Put Element on <layer> layer: this action puts the Floor Plan element to the layer specified in the DXF/DWG file Put Element on Deleted layer Put Element on Edited layer Put Element on Copied layer: these actions put the element on a special layer created by the Add-On. This is useful when you would like to separate elements edited by the AutoCAD user. Duplicate Element: creates a copy of the element Transform Element: executes the transformations applied to the element in the DXF/DWG file (dragging, rotating, mirroring or even changing layers if needed). Note that the last change is only carried out if the Put Element on layer action is also active. Size changing operations are ignored. Delete Element: removes the element from the plan Outline from Merged File: this action should be set when you want to put the Outlined drawing of the element on the plan, or when no other action can be chosen. This is the case when the original element was changed or deleted in ArchiCAD. This means the element will be generated from the AutoCAD entities as a set of 2D ArchiCAD elements.
1745
Mark-Up Tools Palette

The Mark-Up Palette opens when you choose the Document > Mark-Up Tools command. The palette contains the Entries that mark elements of your project with a color highlight for correcting mistakes or managing design suggestions. For general information on this function, see Project Mark-Up. The palette includes three panels in single-user mode and a fourth one that only appears when you are working on a Teamwork Project: Mark-Up Tools, Mark-up Entries, Tag and Discussion and Teamwork.
Mark-Up Tools Panel
Active Entry: you can choose which of the Entries defined on the Mark-Up Entries panel will be used to house your next Corrections and Highlights. Note: Only Entries created on the current Story or drawing window (Section/Elevation/IE, 3D Document, Detail/Worksheet) can be activated. Corrections: Click this button to start or stop drawing Corrections. New elements you draw when this button is pushed will be added to the Active Mark-Up Entry. ArchiCAD will select the Freehand Spline tool, but you can choose any other tool to make Corrections. Note: To add freehand redlining, use the Freehand Geometry Method of the Spline tool. Correction Color: Displays the Correction Color of the active Mark-Up Entry. Turn into Corrections: Click to convert selected construction elements into Corrections and insert them into the Active Mark-Up Entry. Remove Corrections: Click to remove selected Correction elements from Active Mark-Up Entry and revert to their original settings. Highlight Color: Displays the Highlight Color of the Active Mark-Up Entry. Highlight Elements: Click to Highlight selected plan elements and register them in the Active Mark-Up Entry. Highlighting is available whenever the palette is shown and an Entry is active, independently of the state of the Corrections button.
1746
Remove Highlight: Click to remove Highlight from the selected plan elements. This will revert the elements to their original settings. The Zoom and Select area contains tools that allow you to work on all the elements of the Active Mark-Up Entry at the same time. If you click the Focus on Elements button:
ArchiCAD will fit all the elements that belong to the Active Entry into the current window. If you click the Select Elements button:
ArchiCAD will select all the elements that belong to the Active Entry (without fitting them in the window).
Markup Entries Panel
On the Mark-Up Entries panel, you can create new Entries, rename, delete, show/hide and sort existing ones, assign them to a Mark-Up Style and read information about them. Entries are listed in the middle of the panel. Modify the name or style of any selected entry in the fields below. Add Entry: Click to add a new Mark-Up Entry.
1747
This brings up a dialog box:
If a Mark-Up Entry was selected in the Mark-Up Entries panel when you created a new one, the second set of radio buttons of this dialog box allows you to link the new Entry to the selected one by choosing Create Response to. Using this option, you can create hierarchical threads of Mark-Up Entries and sort Entries by thread. Instead of creating an entry from scratch, you can choose to import a DWF file created in Project Reviewer for redlining the published Project. For more information, see Project Reviewer. When choosing Start New Mark Up Thread, linked Mark-Up Entries are listed in a hierarchical view. You can either create the link on creating the Entry as response to a selected one, or by dragging a selected Entry on top of another one in this view. Delete Entry: Click to delete the selected Mark-Up entries. Correction elements that belong to them will be also deleted. Highlighted elements in these Entries will revert to their original settings.
Sort by: Choose a criterion for sorting your Mark-Up entries. You can sort Entries by Name, Date, Style, Thread and View (Story). Name: Rename the selected Mark-Up entry here. Style: Choose a Mark-Up Style to assign it to the selected Mark-Up entries. To customize Mark-Up styles, open the Mark-Up Styles dialog box from the Options menu. Where: Displays the location of the Selected Mark-Up entry. The Created/Modified field displays the date and time of creation of the selected Entry. You can change it with the pop-up arrow to display last Modification. Show Report of All Entries: Click to generate a simple report listing all the Mark-Up entries for the currently opened Project. You can hide Entries in the project by clicking the open Eye icon next to the Entry name. To make them visible again, click the closed Eye icon.
1748
Tag and Discussion Panel
On the Tag and Discussion panel, you can add a Text Tag to the active Mark-Up Entry. Fields in this panel are active if you have selected an entry from the Mark-Up Entries panel. Place on Plan: Click to display your remarks in a Tag text on the drawing. Use the Show On Plan checkbox afterwards to show or hide Tag text. The style of the Tag Text is determined by the current default settings of the Text tool and can be edited as a simple Text block. Once placed, the Place on Plan button is replaced by the Show on Plan. Use this to switch the visibility of the Tag on and off. Show Discussion: Click to see all comments in a printable window. This text will appear in the Markup Discussion window together with all other comments added to the same Entry. Add Comment: Click to add a Comment to the discussion. Your comment will appear in the discussion window along with your system login or team member name.
Teamwork Panel
For information on using Mark-Up in Teamwork, see Teamwork and Project Mark-Up.
1749
Mark-Up Styles Dialog Box

For more information, see Project Mark-Up. Mark-up Styles are project attributes, which can be defined and edited in Options > Attributes > Mark-Up Styles.
Style Panel: This panel lists the currently defined Mark-Up Style names of the Correction Elements. The styles are: Multiple Mark-Up Conflict: automatic style which cannot be manually selected for Mark-Up Entries. It is used by ArchiCAD to indicate that more than one Mark-Up Entry was used to highlight the elements that appear with this color. This style cannot be deleted. Revision: this style cannot be deleted, but can be renamed. In Progress: this style can be both deleted and renamed. Closed: this style can be both deleted and renamed. Approved: this style can be both deleted and renamed. Remarks: this style can be both deleted and renamed. Next to each Mark-Up style name there are two color boxes. The first box displays the pencolor of the Correction Elements, the second displays the pencolor of the Highlighted Elements. Note: You can only set pencolors for the Correction and Highlighted Elements in the Style Attributes Panel (below). To create a new Mark-Up style, click the New button and type a name in the appearing dialog box. To rename the existing Mark-Up style, click the Rename button and type the new name in the text field. To delete the undesired Mark-Up style, click the Delete button. Style Attributes Panel: This panel displays the Style Attributes of the Style selected in the list at the top. Choose separate pencolors for Corrected and Highlighted elements that belong to the selected Mark-Up Style. 1750
Project Reviewer Environment

For an overview of this function, see Project Reviewer. Project Reviewer requires a Java 1.3.1 (or higher) and JavaScript-capable web browser. To use the Reviewer applet, you need one of the following web browsers (just click the corresponding hyperlink to download and install).
Windows
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer Required Version 5.X, 6.X or higher (6.X recommended) with installed Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.3.1 or higher (1.5.X recommended) 6.X, 7.X, 8.X or higher (8.X recommended) with installed Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.3.1 or higher (1.5.X recommended) 1.X or higher with installed Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.3.1 or higher (1.5.X recommended) 1.X or higher (1.7+ recommended) with installed Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.3.1 or higher (1.5.X recommended) 7.X, 8.X or higher with installed Sun Java Runtime Environment (JRE) 1.3.1 or higher (1.5.X recommended)
Netscape Communicator
Firefox Mozilla
Opera
MacOS X
Browser Apple Safari Microsoft Internet Explorer for Macintosh Netscape Communciator for Macintosh Firefox Mozilla Required version 1.X, 2.X or higher (1.2 or 2.0 recommended) 5.X or higher (5.2 recommended) 6.X, 7.X or higher (7.X recommended) 1.X or higher 1.X or higher (1.7+ recommended)
If the Java environment is not fully implemented, the Save, Print and Send mail functions will not be available.
1751
Project Reviewer Window

If the View tab is active in the bottom section of the Reviewer window, you can display and mark up the selected view. The toolbar contains a number of standard commands.
Clicking the first icon (Save) saves the file youre working on. Clicking the second icon (FTP) creates a redline file that is inserted into the file structure on the left. Clicking the third icon (Print) will print the viewed file. The zooming and panning controls are placed in two groups. With the first two icons, you simply need to click to fit the view in the window and return to the initial view, respectively. The second group of icons correspond to the standard zoom in pan commands: click an icon and then manually define the percentage of original for the new view. The two arrow-like icons allow you to go to the previous and next view respectively. The second to last icon opens a panel allowing you to display the layers saved with the file. The last icon is a switch enabling a second toolbar containing redlining tools. The Project Reviewers redlining palette allows you to add to the DWF file simple elements (lines, polylines, pointers, ellipses, cloud shapes, text and labels), to select, delete and group placed redlining elements and to define a number of redlining options.
Redlining options include color, font type and size and an optional info text.
Note: The info text assigned to single redline elements will also appear in ArchiCADs Project Mark-Up commands Mark-Up Info field. If you have grouped redline elements, only the comment assigned to the group will appear in ArchiCAD.
1752
Clicking the E-mail tab opens a standard email message dialog box. You can send the annotated DWF file back to its originator who can incorporate it into his design by importing it.
In the email panel, enter sender and recipient details (To: and Cc: fields), and the subject and text of your email. In a panel below the text panel, the selected element from the files and folders panel appears. This is attached automatically, but you can attach any other file to the email if you wish, by clicking on the attachment (paperclip) button. You can also attach items from the list on the left by right-clicking on them.
1753
1754
Tool Settings Dialog Boxes

Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes Wall Tool Settings Door/Window Tool Settings Drawing Settings Skylight Tool Settings Roof Tool Settings Beam Tool Settings Column Tool Settings Slab Tool Settings Stair Tool Settings StairMaker Settings Mesh Tool Settings Zone Tool Settings Curtain Wall Settings Object/Lamp Tool Settings Dimension Tool Settings Dimension Text Settings Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On) Text Tool Settings Label Tool Settings Fill Tool Settings Line Tool Settings Arc/Circle Tool Settings Polyline Tool Settings Drawing Settings Section Tool Settings
1755
Elevation Tool Settings Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings Worksheet Tool Settings Detail Tool Settings Grid Tool Settings Wall End Tool Settings Spline Tool Settings Hotspot Tool Settings Figure Tool Settings Camera/VR Tool Settings
1756
Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes

Tool settings dialog boxes can be accessed from the Toolbox, the Info Box palette, or from context menus. They contain the settings that define the appearance and parameters of the elements drawn using the tools. There are several ways to open a tools settings dialog box: Double-click the tool icon in the Toolbox. Click the tool icon in the Info Box. With an element selected, choose Edit > Element Settings > (Tool) Settings. Click an element with the right mouse button (MacOS: Ctrl key), and choose the (Tool) Selection Settings command from the appearing Context menu. The title bar of the dialog box displays whether you are viewing Default settings or those of Selected elements. The information at right of a tool settings dialog box alerts you to the status of the current settings in the box: Default: These settings will be used as the default for new elements. Selected: These settings are applied to the currently selected elements (the number of selected elements is displayed). Editable: Displays the number of selected elements which are also editable.
Favorites Button in Tool Settings

The Favorites button in the top left corner of all Tool Settings dialog boxes (except Camera) opens a list of the favorite settings saved for that tool only. Click the Favorites button to open the Apply Favorites dialog box. Choose the desired Favorite and click Apply. ArchiCAD comes with predefined Favorite settings for each tool, and you can define your own Favorites. For more information, see Favorites.
Panel Visibility in Tool Settings

The settings for each tool are organized into several panels that can be opened or closed individually by clicking the caption of the panel. You can also choose to show or hide any of the panels, if you prefer. When you open new panels, some visible panels may shut automatically, and/or the dialog box will move upward on the screen to prevent an overcrowded or too-large dialog box. To turn off these automatic functions, set the checkboxes in Options > Work Environment > Dialog Boxes and Palettes.
1757
Navigating Within Tool Settings Panels

A few keyboard shortcuts make it easy to navigate in any of the Tool Settings dialog boxes: To open and close the unfoldable settings groups within a particular panel, use the right- and left-arrow keys. To move from one setting field to the next within a particular panel, use the up- and downarrow keys. As you move onto the next field, the edit field is already highlighted, so you can type in values directly. To activate/deactivate a checkbox in the current field, use the Spacebar. To open the pop-up menu indicated by an arrow icon (such as a Fill Type or Pen Color chooser), press Alt + Down Arrow. Press ESC to close. To exit a settings list within a particular panel, press TAB. To jump to the next panel or control, press TAB. To jump to the preview panel/control, use Shift+TAB.
IFC 2x2 and 2X3 Panels in Tool Settings

IFC stands for Industry Foundation Classes. The Settings dialog box of many construction elements and object-type elements (Wall, Column, Beam, Window, Door, Object, Stair, Slab and Roof) can be customized to include a panel called IFC 2x2 or 2x3 (depending on which one you need). IFC is an add-on automatically loaded with ArchiCAD 13. Note: By default, the Work Environment does not include the IFC Panels in Tool Settings dialog box. To make these panels visible, you must customize your Tool Settings dialog boxes to include them. See Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization. To read more about IFC, download the IFC manual from http://www.graphisoft.com/support/ifc/ downloads/
Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings

The Tool Settings dialog box of the Wall, Column, Beam, Roof and Slab can be customized to include a panel called Structural Property. Note: By default, the Work Environment does not include the Structural Property panel in Tool Settings dialog box. To make this panel visible, you must customize your Tool Settings dialog boxes to include them. See Tool Settings Dialog Box Customization. The Structural Property is limited to the Structural Function options: define the elements structural property as either Load-bearing or Non-Load Bearing.
Layer Definition in Tool Settings

At the bottom of each Tool Settings dialog box, the current Layer choice is displayed in a dropdown list. To change the current elements layer, choose a different layer in this pop-up menu. For more information, see Layers.
1758
Listing and Labeling Panels

This Panel is found in the Settings dialog boxes of all the design and documenting Tools, and controls the handling of the current Tool in calculations. For more information on calculations, see Calculation. ID: Type an ID in this box for tracking this element in Quantity Calculations. The ID field serves to identify and group elements in list views. The text string within this field cannot exceed 15 characters. Any character can be used. If a number is included anywhere in the 15 characters, ArchiCAD will add one to this number for each new element drawn, provided that the Auto ID Increase checkbox is enabled in the Options > Work Environment > More Options dialog box. Each new element will have a unique ID. If elements are duplicated or multiplied, the IDs of the replicas will remain the same as those of the originals. If you paste elements into a Project, you may have elements with conflicting IDs. ArchiCAD does not automatically exclude ID conflicts. It is up to the user to designate different IDs for elements that may be in conflict. IDs can be customized both before creating elements and after selecting a number of existing ones, by using the Element ID Manager command in the Document > Schedules and Lists menu. For more information, see ID Management. Note: All construction elements also have a globally unique, automatically generated ID which is conserved throughout the life of the Project. You can use this identifier for labeling or in lists. Label (Element): Check this box to add an associative label to the element. Uncheck it to remove the label. The Label Settings button then becomes active Label Settings Button: Click this button to open the Label Settings dialog box. Only the associative label for this tool will be editable. For more information, see Label Tool Settings. The rest of the controls in this panel refer to listing properties of ArchiCADs Calculation function. For more information on the Calculation function, see Calculation and the ArchiCAD 13/ Graphisoft Documentation/Calculation Guide.pdf. Link Properties: Use this control to link a Property Object to the element for calculations. By Criteria: Select this control to assign variables to special conjunction of conditions like fill, pencolor, element type, etc. Matching Priorities: This field displays the property items whose criteria matches the current attribute set. Individually: Check this box to assign additional information, such as strengthened reinforcement, to selected items, or to create an assignment outside of the norm of the criteria; the Choose button becomes active. Use this to link a single Property Object to this element. (To link multiple Property Objects, use the By Criteria option.)
1759
Choose: Click this button if you plan to create an assignment. Start defining it directly in the appearing Link Properties dialog box. For Walls, Columns and Fills only, the Listing and Labeling panel contains some additional controls. For more information, see Wall Listing and Labeling Panel, Column Listing and Labeling Panel and Fill Listing and Labeling Panel.
1760
Wall Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For general information, see Walls.
Wall Geometry and Positioning Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the geometry and complexity of the wall element. Wall height: Enter a value for the total height of the Wall Relative base height: Enter the elevation value of the Wall. By default, this is measured from the current story level. (In the 3D window, this value is measured from the User Origin by default.) If you prefer, you can set this height value relative to the Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up.) Absolute base height [to Project Zero]: Enter the elevation value of the Wall from the reference level. (Reference Levels - Project Zero by default - are defined in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North.)
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Walls Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Wall. If you change a walls elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story.
Reference Line Location

Click one of these three icons to define whether the Walls reference line should be located at left or right side of the wall (relative to the direction the wall is being drawn), or in the center. Note: Reference Line controls are not relevant and not available for Polygon Walls. If using a left or right reference line, enter an offset value if you want to locate the reference line some distance within the edge of the wall. (No offset is available if the reference line is in the center.)
Wall Shape
Click one of these three icons to define the wall as straight, trapezoidal or polygonal. (Wall Shape controls are available only if Wall Complexity control in this panel is set to Straight.)
1761
Wall Thickness
Enter a value for the wall thickness. The thickness of a trapezoidal wall changes continuously along its length. If you are defining trapezoidal wall, two wall thickness fields are active: enter a thickness value for each end of the wall. The thickness of a composite wall is the total value of the individual skins as set in Options > Element Attributes > Composites. If you are using a composite wall (chosen in the Structure section of the Wall Floor Plan and Section Panel), the thickness field is consequently not editable here. Thickness does not apply to polygonal walls; the field cannot be edited. The thickness of a slanted wall is its thickness perpendicular to its slant vector (as indicated by the icon in the Info Box):
The thickness of a double-slanted wall equals the width of the wall base.
PolyWall Corners Can Change

This checkbox is only visible when the chosen geometry method is Polygonal Wall. It controls the display of wall contours when connecting such a wall to other, plain walls. For more information, see Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall).
Wall Complexity
The Wall Complexity icons give you a choice of wall geometry: Straight, Slanted, DoubleSlanted, or Complex. (Wall Complexity controls are not applicable and not available for Trapezoid Walls and Polygonal Walls.) For a slanted or double-slanted wall, enter the value for the slant(s) in degrees. For a double-slanted wall, enter the thickness of the wall base in the Wall Thickness field. For more information, see Create a Slanted or Double-Slanted Wall. For more information on complex (profile) walls, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile.
Wall Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Choose an option to define which stories will display the wall. All Relevant Stories: A multi-story wall will be displayed and editable on all stories which it intersects. Multi-story walls will be correctly joined with other elements on all stories where the multi-story wall is present. Home Story Only: This wall will be displayed only on its home story. (See Set Home Story.)
1762
Floor Plan Display

Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of Wall (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the Walls overhead part (i.e. the part of the Wall that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Projected: shows cut part of Wall, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Three additional abstract display options are available: Symbolic Cut: Available only for simple straight Walls. The whole floor plan projection of a simple straight Wall will be displayed as cut, using its cut line and cut fill attributes, regardless of the Walls vertical position. This option is available only if the Show on Stories control is set to Current/Home Story only. The Floor Plan Cut plane settings do not affect the display of such a Wall. Outlines Only: the entire Walls outline is shown using its uncut attributes. Overhead All: the entire Walls outline is shown using its overhead attributes. The Show Projection pop-up contains three options: Entire Element: The Wall will be displayed on all relevant stories. Note: If you have set the walls Floor Plan display to Symbolic Cut, Entire Element is the only available projection option. to Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the Wall on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it.) If you choose this option, then you can set the desired range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this Wall in either direction) in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. to Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the Wall above this limit. If you choose this option, go to Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings to set the Absolute Display Limit. For details, see Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box. The rest of the Floor Plan and Section Panel contains controls to let you customize the parameters of the wall element. Structure: Use the Cut Fill pop-up in this section to choose a fill which best represents the walls structure. The choice of fills includes Vectorial & Symbol fills, and Composite Structures. Polygonal walls cannot have composite structures, only plain fill patterns. Trapezoid walls can have composite structures. For more information, see Fill Types and Composite Structures. Note: Composite Structures are defined at Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and their Use With parameter must include Walls if they are to appear in the Wall Settings fill pop-up. Note: If you chose a Profile-type wall structure in the Geometry and Positioning Panel, the pop-up will show Profile attributes defined for the Wall element.
1763
For more information on complex elements, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. Wall Priority: Use this slider to define the priority of this wall in intersections (in both 2D and 3D). For more information, see Wall-Wall Intersections. Note: If you are using a Composite wall, each skin of a composite wall will be assigned this uniform priority for intersections. However, you have the option to also check Enable skin priorities for the display of intersections in 2D windows. This means that - for 2D intersections - this composite wall will use the Wall Priorities defined for each skin in Options > Element Attributes > Composites (instead of the uniform Wall priority of this dialog box). Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors of cut lines (including separator lines of composite walls), cut fills, and the background of cut fills. These attributes will be displayed for cut surfaces both in Section and on the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Note: If you are using a Composite Wall, you may prefer to use the fill/line settings set for this wall type in Options > Element Attributes > Composites: check the Apply Structures Settings box for the settings you want to inherit from the composite definition. Outlines: Use these settings to define line types and pen colors to element outlines that fall above (Overhead) and/or below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Overhead Lines will be displayed if the Floor Plan Display pop-up is set to Projected with Overhead. Wall End Lines: This pop-up gives you four ways to display a freestanding wall on the Floor Plan. The options let you show or hide one or both end lines of the wall. (The end line is the contour line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the wall.)
Wall Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the wall. Use the three fill pop-up buttons to assign materials to the surfaces of the walls two sides and all four edges. The left and right sides are defined depending on the direction of the walls reference line. For information on assigning materials to a Polygon wall, see Create a Polygon Wall (PolyWall). For a complex Wall, only the edge material control is available.
Click the chain icon to assign the last material chosen to all surfaces. Deselecting the chain icon will restore the materials that you originally set for each separate wall surface. For more information, see Materials.
1764
Wall is trimmed by one or more roofs: If this message is activated, it means that the currently selected wall (already placed in the plan) was trimmed by a roof using the Trim to Roof command. In this case, the Undo Roof Trim button is also activated. Click to restore the original height of the selected wall. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof. Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected wall (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected wall. For more information, see Align 3D Texture. Wall is connected to one or more Curtain Walls: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected wall is connected to a Curtain Wall. In this case, the Disconnect all Curtain Walls button is also activated. Click to break all connections of this wall to Curtain Walls. For more information, see Disconnect Walls from Curtain Walls.
Log Details Dialog Box

The Log Details button opens a dialog box for defining the display of walls constructed from logs. The following options can be found here: Log height: In this edit field, you can enter the height of a log. If the value is 0, no logs will be displayed. Note: ArchiCAD calculates the number of logs from wall and log heights. Start with half log: If this checkbox is active, the wall will start with a half-height log at the bottom. Log Shape: You can select one of these four radio buttons to define the Log Shape for the wall. Click the Square logs radio button to use square logs for both side flat wall. Click the Cambered on Reference Side radio button to use one side cambered logs for the one side flat wall. The flat surface of wall is on the opposite side of the wall reference line. Click the Cambered on other than Reference Side radio button to use one side cambered logs for the one side flat wall. The flat surface of wall is on the same side as the side of wall reference line. Click the Cambered on Both Sides radio button to use normal logs for both side straight wall. Log Radius: You can choose from two options by clicking the radio buttons - the wall can be built from round logs or from slightly chamfered square logs. Click the Use Centerpoint of the Log radio button to use centerpoint of Log as the centerpoint for Log radius. Click the Use Middlepoint of the opposite Log radio button to use middlepoint of opposite side of Log as the centerpoint for Log radius.
1765
Material of Horizontal Edges: Select one of the radio buttons to define material on the horizontal edges of the wall. Select one of these three radio buttons to define how to use the material settings of the wall settings dialog box for the Log wall. As in Wall Settings: Click this radio button to use normal wall materials for Log walls materials, which are defined in the wall settings dialog box. Override with Reference Side Material: Click this radio button to use Reference side material for horizontal surfaces of Log walls instead of appropriate wall material. Override with Opposite Side Material: Click this radio button to use Opposite side material for horizontal surfaces of Log walls instead of appropriate wall material. Align Texture to Wall Edges: By enabling this checkbox, wall texture mapping will be aligned to the wall in order to avoid having a fragmented log texture.
Wall Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels. For Walls and Columns only, some additional controls are also available: Relation to Zones: Click this field to define the relationship of the Wall to Zones. This field defines whether the new Wall is a Zone delimiter, an element to subtract from the Zones area or to be ignored when calculating Zones. Zone Boundary: This option means that a wall located inside a zone will not be included in the zone area. In every case, including slanted or complex walls, the zone boundary is drawn at the base of the wall. Multi-story elements in automatic display mode can serve as zone boundaries on any story on which they exist, not just their home story. Reduce Zone Area Only means that the 2D zone will encompass the wall, but the wall area will not be included in the zone area. (Zone Volume, however, will include the wall.) Reduce Zone Volume means that when calculating the zones 3D volume, the volume will not include the volume of any wall located inside the zone. No Effect On Zones means that the wall has no effect on the zone; the zone area and volume will include the area covered by the wall.
Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume Relation to Zones Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings
1766
Door/Window Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For details, see Doors/Windows. The Door and Window tools have similar characteristics and settings and they are analogous to the Corner Window tool settings dialogs. There are nine panels in the Door and Window Settings dialog box: Preview and Positioning Parameters Custom Settings Note: Custom Settings are available only for GDL objects having a user interface script. Floor Plan and Section Model Reveal Dimension Marker Marker Custom Settings Listing and Labeling.
Door/Window Preview and Positioning Panel

Use the navigation buttons to go the previous and next element in the active library set without having to use the browser area.
Click the black arrow next to the name of the Door/Window to access the Show in library command. Click this to return the browser part of this dialog box (on the left) to a state in which it shows the position of the current Door/Window in the library hierarchy. Copy name: The name of the Object is not editable here. However, if you click the Copy name command, you can then paste the object name as a text item anywhere. Use the fields to enter the following values for the Door/Window: Width: Enter Width of the opening here. Height: Enter Height of the opening here. Sill/Header Value: Enter the height of the Door or Window Sill or Header from the anchor position (this is defined in the Anchor field at right). Reveal Depth: Enter a value to specify an offset for the opening away from the face of the wall. You will define the Reveal orientation when you place the window: click with the eyeball cursor during Door/Window input to define the Reveal orientation.
1767
The Flip button is only active when modifying the opening side of a placed Door or Window while keeping the frame in place. Empty Opening: Click this icon to clear the current Library Part choice and automatically use an Empty Hole for the Door or Window opening. Anchor Point: Choose either Center or Side as a geometry method for placing the Door/Window. When placing a door or a window by the Side method, the special Double Eyeball cursor appears and, as you move the mouse, it will flip the outline of the opening from one side to the other, prompting you to click when you are satisfied with the openings position. For more information, see Placing Doors or Windows and Insertion Points for Doors or Windows. Anchor: Choose an option for anchoring the position of the opening within the wall: to wall or story, by sill height or header. For details, see Anchoring Sill or Header Heights. If you position an opening relative to a given story, then changing the base position of the wall will change the height value of the openings within it. Note: The physical size of Wall holes can be larger than their nominal size, depending on local standards. Opening Plane: This control is relevant if your door/window is placed into a slanted wall. Associated to Wall: The plane of the door/window will follow the plane of the wall. Vertical: The door/window will be placed vertically regardless of the plane of the wall it is placed into. For more information, see Setting the Window/Door Plane in Slanted or Complex Walls, and Anchoring Sill or Header Heights. On the right-hand side of the panel, the Preview Area displays the 2D symbol, the hidden line front view, the hidden line axonometry, the 3D shaded axonometry, the predefined preview picture or the optional information notes of the selected Window or Door, depending on the button you switch ON. Move the cursor inside the Preview Area and the cursor will change to a flip arrow, allowing you (in the 2D Symbol or 3D views) to alternately view each side of your Library Part. For more information, see Creating an Empty Opening.
1768
Door/Window Parameters Panel

This panel displays the list of parameters defined for the Door/Window.
Click any of the parameters to select it and to modify the value of the variable. Fill and pencolors for Floor Plan display can be defined either in this Parameters panel (using the 2D Representation controls), or else overwritten by entering custom fills and pens in the Floor Plan and Section panel below.
Door/Window Custom Settings Panel

Some Doors and Windows include a user interface script, which enables the setting of many additional parameters. For these Doors and Windows, the Custom Settings Panel is enabled (and is given a relevant panel name, such as Fixed Window Settings).
Click on the button at top to access a menu of parameter types. Choosing any of these parameter categories will display the relevant settings and allow you to adjust them.
1769
Door/Window Floor Plan and Section Panel

On the Floor Plan, Doors and Windows are, by default, represented by standard symbols. The Floor Plan Display list has the following four options: Symbolic (default setting) Projected Projected with Overhead Overhead All For more information, see Floor Plan Display of Doors/Windows. The rest of the controls define the line types and pen colors of Symbol lines and Outlines (both Uncut and Overhead), and Cut Lines and Fills for the Window or Door. By default, the Enable Objects (Attribute) checkbox is active: fills and pens will be displayed according to the settings for this Window/Door in the Parameters panel of this dialog box.
However, to override these parameters, uncheck the Enable Objects checkbox and set custom display options.
Door/Window Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the Door/Window. You can define the Material choices for the Door or Window. In addition to the Surface Material options for the door or window defined in the pop-up menu, several different materials for individual parts of the door or window can be specified in the GDL description using the additional parameters of the opening. Checking the Use Objects Materials checkbox will ignore the set material and will apply the same material that was used when creating the Library Part. Wall Opening Material: The surface materials of the host Wall can be applied to the opening in two ways. If you choose the Same as Wall Edge option, ArchiCAD will apply the material of the walls edge to the openings edges. If you choose the Same as Wall Side option, the external and internal wall surface materials will be applied to the openings edges, with the reveal depth as the division line between them. For curved walls, the materials can change either along a straight line or a curve. Straight Line: Click this button to change opening edge material along a straight line. Curved Line: Click this button to change opening edge material along an arc. Door/Window is trimmed by one or more roofs: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected Door/Window (already placed in the plan) was trimmed by a roof with the Trim to Roof command.
1770
In this case, the Undo Roof Trim button is also activated. Click to restore the original height of the selected door/window. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof.
Door/Window Reveal Panel

For Doors/Windows that are not part of the standard ArchiCAD library, use these controls to customize the various elements of the reveal, such as the Head Depth, Sill/Threshold Depth, left and right Jamb Depth and Reveal Depth. Note: Reveal parameters for standard Doors/Windows can be set in the Custom Settings panel of this dialog box. Note: For composite walls, ArchiCAD does not turn the skin opposite the reveal inside the opening, if the reveal depth is less than the remainder of the walls thickness.
Door/Window Dimension Marker Panel

The Dimension Marker panel features the customizable Dimensioning options of the Window and Door tools. To show or hide door/window markers on the plan, use the Door/Window Options in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. For more information, see Model View Options for Construction Elements. Dimension Markers are essentially parametric GDL objects permanently linked to the opening. The dimension units of Door/Window markers, and the dimension units of sill heights displayed in Door/Window markers, can be customized in Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions. For more information, see Dimensions Preferences. From the pop-up list, choose a predefined Marker or browse for a different marker object. The preview window gives you feedback on the selected Markers appearance. Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255). Use Symbol colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use pencolor used when the elements 2D symbol was created. Subfloor Thickness: Use this control if you want the Door/Window marker to indicate a sill height value which takes into account the height difference between the floor level and the bottom of the wall (for example, due to carpeting or parquet flooring). This value will then be calculated as part of the sill value shown in the Door/Window marker. This value will not affect the positioning of the Door/Window. See also Sill Height Using Subfloor Thickness. Font Type: Click this pop-up field to select a font type. Font Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding. Font Size: Enter a font size. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Height: Enter the height of the marker here. 1771
Window/Door Custom Marker Settings Panel

The Marker Settings panel contains options for the Library Part type dimension marker. The panel is active only if an eligible Marker has been selected in the Dimension Marker panel.
Window/Door Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels. For more information on Doors/Windows, see Doors/Windows.
1772
Skylight Tool Settings

The panels of the Skylight Tool Settings dialog box are similar to those of the Door/Window, Corner Window, Stair and Object/Lamp tools. For a detailed description, see Object/Lamp Tool Settings. For more information on Skylights, see Skylights.
1773
Roof Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Roof tool is for drawing and editing roofs with extremely flexible characteristics. Various geometry methods (Polygon, Rectangle, Rotated Rectangle, Polyroof, Dome method and Barrel Vaulted) allow you to model any shape of roof structures. For more information, see Roofs.
Roof Geometry and Positioning Panel

Relative Base Height: Enter a value here for the elevation of the pivot line. By default, this is measured from the current story level. (In the 3D window, this value is measured from the User Origin.) If you prefer, you can set this height value relative to the Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up. Absolute Base Height [to Project Zero]: Enter a value here for the elevation of the pivot line from the Reference level. (Click the pop-up arrow to change the Reference level, if needed). Reference levels are defined at Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. Roof Slant Angle: Enter a value for the slope of the roof. Note: The unit of the angle can be defined as degrees, in percentages, or in the amount of roof rise per 12 feet or 12 inches of horizontal run. Click the arrow icon next to the Roof Slope field to display these unit choices. The roof slant angle is typically positive, but it can also be a negative value, in which case the resulting roof is reversed: the side of the pivot line that you click while drawing the roof (see description below) will slope downward.
Roof Pane Thickness: There are two relevant measurements: Vertical Eaves Height: Enter a value for the Eaves height of the Roof (measured vertically).
Roof Thickness: Enter a value for the thickness of the roof pane (measured perpendicularly to the face of the roof). If a composite structure is used for the Roof, these two fields cannot be modified, as the Roofs thickness is then determined by that of the Composite as defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites.
1774
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Roofs Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Roof. If you change a roofs elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story.
Roof Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Choose an option to define which stories will display the roof. All relevant stories: A multi-story roof will be displayed and editable on each story it intersects. Multi-story roofs will be correctly joined with other elements on all stories where the multi-story roof is present. Home Story only: The outline of the entire multi-story roof will be displayed and editable on its home story only. Note: If you have not yet placed the element, this control is called Current Story Only. All Stories: The outline of the entire roof will be displayed (using its uncut and overhead line settings) on every story of the project, with overhead attributes. Other options are to display the roof on its Home story plus one story up and/or down. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to show the Roof on any other combination of stories. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the roofs outline and its fill. Note: Fills can only be displayed on stories where the outline is also visible; these will be cover fills. For more information, see Show On Stories. Floor Plan Display: This pop-up contains five options for displaying the element. Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (i.e, as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Two additional abstract display options are available: Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. Show Projection: This pop-up contains three options: Entire Element: The element will be displayed on all relevant stories.
1775
to Relative Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it.) If you choose this option, then you can set the desired range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. to Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. If you choose this option, then go to Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings to set the Absolute Display Limit for this element. For details, see Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box. The rest of the Floor Plan and Section Panel contains several unfoldable sections listing controls to let you customize the parameters of the roof element before placing it. Structure: Use the Fill pop-up in this section to choose a fill which best represents the roof structure. The choice of fills includes Vectorial & Symbol fills, and Composite Structures. For more information, see Fill Types and Composite Structures. Note: Composite Structures are defined at Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and their Use With parameter must include Roofs if they are to appear in the Roof Settings fill pop-up. Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors of cut lines (including separator lines of composite roofs), cut fills, and the background of cut fills. These attributes will be displayed for cut surfaces both in Section and on the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Note: If you are using a Composite Roof, you may prefer to use the fill/line settings set for this roof type in Options > Element Attributes > Composites: check the Apply Structures Settings box for the settings you want to inherit from the composite definition. Outlines: Use these settings to define line types and pen colors to element outlines that fall above (Overhead) and/or below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Overhead Lines will be displayed if the Floor Plan Display pop-up is set to Projected with Overhead. Cover Fills: Check this box to display a cover fill using the fill and pen settings chosen here. Choose a fill type from the pop-up palette. Note: Only those Fills defined as Cover Fills in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types are available here. Choose pencolors for the cover fill pattern and for its background. Cover Fill Orientation: This control defines the orientation of the fill pattern. Select the control, then choose an orientation definition from the pop-up opened with the black arrow: Link to Fill Origin: If you choose this option, then the cover fill will show a fill handle when you place the roof on the Floor Plan. You can then manipulate the fill orientation by selecting and moving the fill handle. (Use the Move Sub-Element command from the pet palette.) Note: Roof cover fills appear on the Floor Plan only if you have chosen Outline Only in the Floor Plan Display Options, since that shows the roofs top view. Note: Fill handles are only displayed if you have enabled View > On-Screen View Options > Fill Handles. 1776
Link to Project Origin: The fill pattern will start at the Project Origin, and the part of the pattern that falls within the Fills boundary will be displayed. No fill handle appears. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching. Alternatively, check the Align with Slope checkbox: this option will align the fill pattern with the pivot line of the roof, and the fill handle will not be visible in the 2D window. (If you are using a Polyroof or Dome construction method, fills will be aligned with the slope by default.) Distort with Slope: Check this box to distort the cover fill. This effect stimulates the effect of a sloped roof as seen from above on the Floor Plan. Use Fill of Surface Material: Check this box if you want your cover fill to resemble the surface material (vectorial 3D hatch) assigned to this roof in the Model panel.
Roof Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the roof. Chain icon: Use the three pop-up controls to assign materials to the top, sides (eaves) and bottom of the roof. Deselecting the chain icon will restore the originally set materials to the roofs surfaces. If you select the roof and change any of its side materials (see Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material), a yellow icon appears alongside the default material setting to indicate that one or more edge materials has been changed from this default. For more information on Materials, see Materials. Note: The top-side material, if it is a vectorial hatching, can also be applied as a cover fill for the Roof (by checking the Use Fill of Surface Material box in Floor Plan and Section panel of Roof Settings). Moreover, if the cover fill has a customized fill origin (via Link to Fill Origin option), the 3D Model will reflect that fill orientation too. The Roof Edge Angle setting defines the base and fascia boards of a roof. They can be set to be either vertical or perpendicular to the elevation of the roof plane.
The Custom button is only active if a custom edge angle has been applied in the Roof Edge dialog box. See Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material. Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected roof (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected roof. For more information, see Align 3D Texture.
1777
Custom Material defined for certain edges. This message is activated if you have assigned a custom material to one or more sides of the roof or the edges of any of its holes. In this case, the Reset Side Materials button is also activated. Click to restore the default side material to all edges of the selected roof and any holes it contains. See Set Custom Roof Edge Angle and Material.
Roof Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels.
1778
Beam Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Beam tool is used for easy definition of beam structures. See Beams for more information.
Beam Geometry and Positioning Panel

Beam Height: Enter a value for the height of the beam. Relative Height: Enter the beams height as measured from the reference level to the beams reference axis. By default, the reference level is the current story level (or, in the 3D window, the User Origin.) If you prefer, you can set the beams height value relative to its Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up. (The Home Story, in turn, is defined in the Home Story pop-up below.) The reference axis runs in the middle of the Beams upper face. Absolute Height: Enter the beams height as measured from a Reference level (such as Project Zero) to its reference axis. (Click the arrow to define a different Reference level.) Note: For slanted beams, these elevations refer to the starting point of the beams reference line. For profile beams, too, these height values refer to the height of the reference axis.
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Beams Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Beam. If you change a Beams elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story. Rectangular or Profile: Click one of the two icons to choose either a standard beam with a rectangular cross-section, or else a profile (complex cross-section) beam.
For more information on creating a complex (profile) beam, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. See also Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile. If you chose a standard (rectangular cross-section) beam, enter a value for the width of the standard beam. Enter a value to offset the Reference Axis from the middle of Beam. By default, the reference axis runs in the middle of the Beams upper face.
1779
However, you can define an offset for special purposes, and the reference axis can even be located outside the Beams contour.
Horizontal or Inclined: Click one of the two icons to create either a horizontal beam or an inclined beam.
If you choose the inclined or a profile beam, enter an inclination value in degrees into the appropriate field (angle of inclined standard beam, or rotation angle of complex beam.)
Beam Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Choose an option to define which stories will display the beam. All Relevant Stories: A beam will be displayed and editable on all stories which it intersects. Beams will be correctly joined with other elements on all stories where it is present. Home Story Only: This beam will be displayed only on its home story. Other options are to display the beam on All Stories; or its Home story plus one story up and/or down. The Floor Plan Display pop-up contains five options for displaying the element. Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Two additional abstract display options are available: Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. The Show Projection pop-up contains three options: Entire Element: The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. to Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it.) If you choose this option, then you can set the desired range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. to Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. If you choose this option, then go to Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings to set the Absolute Display Limit for this element. For details, see Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box.
1780
The rest of the Floor Plan and Section Panel contains several unfoldable sections listing controls to let you customize the parameters of the beam element before placing it. Structure: Use the Fill pop-up in this section to choose a fill which best represents the beams structure. For more information, see Fill Types. Note: If you chose a Profile-type beam structure in the Geometry and Positioning Panel, the pop-up will show Profile attributes defined for the beam element. For more information on complex elements, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. Beam Priority: Use this slider to set the intersection priority of this beam. For more information, see Beams and Other Elements. Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors of cut lines, cut fills, and the background of cut fills. These attributes will be displayed for cut surfaces both in Section and on the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Outlines: Use these settings to define line types and pen colors to element outlines that fall above (Overhead) and/or below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Overhead Lines will be displayed if the Floor Plan Display pop-up is set to Projected with Overhead. Symbols: Use these controls to define settings for the beams symbolic components. Beam End Lines: These options let you show or hide one or both end lines of the beam. (The end line is the contour line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the beam.) Show Center line: Check this box to display the beams centerline in the 2D window. If you check the Show Center line box, then choose a line type and pen color for the center line.
Beam Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the beam. Assign a Material to all five surfaces of the Beam: the left side, top, right side, bottom and both ends. (A Complex Beam can only be assigned a material at the ends; the rest of the controls are grey.) Note: Left side is defined by the left hand, looking from the first point to the next point of the Reference Axis of the Beam. Clicking the chain icon next to the Material names will assign the last material chosen to all surfaces of the Beam. Deselecting the chain icon will restore the materials that you originally set for each separate surface. For more information, see Materials. Beam is trimmed by one or more roofs: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected beam (already placed in the plan) was trimmed by a roof using Trim to Roof. In this case, the Undo Roof Trim button is also activated. Click to restore the original height of the selected beam. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof.
1781
Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected beam (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected beam. For more information, see Align 3D Texture.
Beam Hole Panel

Shape: Click one of the two icons to define either a rectangular or a circular Hole shape. Contours on Plan: Click one of the two icons to select between alternative floor plan symbols for Hole (show outline of the Hole, or show its axis only.) Size: Enter the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the Hole. For a circular hole, you will enter a diameter. Position: Enter a value to set the distance of the center of the Hole from the top surface of the Beam. For a detailed description, see Create a Hole in a Beam.
Listing and Labeling Panels Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings
1782
Column Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. Columns are made up of two components: a load bearing core, and an optional veneer section. Both have independent fill pattern and pencolor settings. For more information, see Columns.
Column Geometry and Positioning Panel

Column Height: Enter the height of the column. Relative Base height: Enter the Columns height as measured from the reference level. By default, the reference level is the current story level (or, in the 3D window, the User Origin.) If you prefer, you can set the columns height value relative to its Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up. Absolute Base height [to Project Zero]: Enter the elevation of the column base as measured from the Reference level. (Click the arrow pop-up to define a different Reference level.) Rotation angle: Enter a value in degrees to rotate the columns cross section around its own axis.
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Columns Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Column. If you change a Columns elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story.
Column Geometry Methods

Rectangular Circular Profiled Click one of three Geometry Method icons to define the cross-section of the column: either rectangular, circular or profile.
For more information on creating a complex (profile) column, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. See also Use Standard Steel Column or Beam Profile.
1783
If you choose rectangular or circular, enter values for the size of the core in the fields to the right. (For a rectangular, enter horizontal and vertical values. For a circular column, enter a diameter.) If you choose a Profiled Column, enter the profiles horizontal and vertical dimensions. Note: The horizontal and vertical dimensions of Columns with a rectangular cross-section can differ. Use the chain icon next to them to constrain them to the same value. Wrapping Method: Not available for Profile (Complex) Columns. Click one of two icons to define the column wrapping method: either freestanding or wrapped by walls.
For a detailed description, see Columns and Other Elements. Veneer: Not available for Profile (Complex) Columns. Check this box if you want the column to include a veneer around it. If you have checked the veneer checkbox, enter a value in the field to the right to define the veneer thickness. This thickness is uniform all around the core.
Vertical or Slanted: Click one of these two icons to create either a vertical or a slanted column. If you choose the slanted column, enter the slant value in degrees into the Slant angle field to the right. Note: A column cannot be horizontal; you must enter a number between 1 and 90 degrees. Anchor Point of Core: Click one of the nine positioning buttons to define the point on the column which will be positioned with the cursor when you click to place the column. Note: For a profiled column, the anchor point will be the profile origin. For more information, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile.
Column Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Choose an option to define which stories will display the column. All Relevant Stories: A multi-story column will be displayed and editable on all stories which it intersects. Multi-story columns will be correctly joined with other elements on all stories where the multi-story column is present. Home Story Only: This column will be displayed only on its home story. The Floor Plan Display pop-up contains options for displaying the element. Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of element (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the elements overhead part (i.e. the part of the element that is above the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Projected: shows cut part of element, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. 1784
Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut with the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Three additional abstract display options are available: Symbolic Cut: Available only for vertical (simple or complex) columns. The whole floor plan projection of a vertical (simple or complex) column will be displayed as cut, using its cut line and cut fill attributes, regardless of the columns vertical position. This option is available only if the Show on Stories control is set to Current/Home Story only. The Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of such a column. Outlines Only: the entire elements outline is shown using its uncut attributes. Overhead All: the entire elements outline is shown using its overhead attributes. The Show Projection pop-up contains three options: Entire Element: The element will be displayed on all relevant stories. Note: Entire element is the only available projection option for simple straight columns which are set to Symbolic Cut in their Floor Plan display. Floor Plan Cut Plane settings do not affect the display of these columns. to Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the element on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it.) If you choose this option, then you can set the desired range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this element in either direction) in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. to Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the element above this limit. If you choose this option, then go to Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings to set the Absolute Display Limit for this element. For more information, see Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box. The rest of the Floor Plan and Section Panel contains several unfoldable sections listing controls to let you customize the parameters of the column element before placing it. Core Structure: Use the Fill pop-up in this section to choose a fill which best represents the column structure. For more information on Fills, see Fill Types. Note: If you chose a Profile-type column structure in the Geometry and Positioning Panel, the pop-up will show Profile attributes defined for the Column element. For more information on complex elements, see Place a Wall/Column/Beam with a Complex Profile. Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors separately for the columns core and veneer (if any). There are separate controls for cut lines, cut fills, and the background of cut fills. Outlines: Use these settings to define line types and pen colors to element outlines that fall above (Overhead) and/or below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Overhead Lines will be displayed if the Floor Plan Display pop-up is set to Projected with Overhead. For more information, see Floor Plan Cut Plane (Global Setting) and Define Range of Elements Projected Display (Show Projection). Floor Plan Symbol: Use the controls in this section to define settings for the columns Floor Plan (Crossing) symbol.
1785
Cross Type: Choose this parameter, then activate its arrow pop-up to choose one of four crossing symbols: Plain (no cross), Slash, X, and Crosshair. Note: For a profiled column, only the Plain and crosshair symbols are available. The crosshair symbolizes the columns axis and will revolve along with the column cross section. Enter a Column Cross Line Pen color. If you have chosen Crosshair, you have two additional settings: Distance From Center: Enter the distance of each crosshair line from the columns centerpoint. Length Outside Column: Enter the length by which the crosshair line should extend past the edge of the column. Although the crosshair is a a graphic symbol and not part of the model, the crosshair will be resized (together with the column itself) if you change the drawings scale. To show or hide the crossing symbol of columns on the Floor Plan, check/uncheck the Show Column Symbol box in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options > Options for Construction Elements.
Column Model Panel

This panel of Column Settings controls the Model attributes, that is, the display of the Column in the 3D Window, and of uncut Columns in Section windows. Use the pop-up to select a Material for the column surface. Note: For Columns placed with the Wrapped method, the Material choice you make here is overridden by the surface Materials of the Walls that they intersect. Column is trimmed by one or more roofs: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected column (already placed in the plan) was trimmed by a roof using the Trim to Roof command. In this case, the Undo Roof Trim button is also activated. Click to restore the original height of the selected column. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof. Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected column (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected column. For more information, see Align 3D Texture.
Column Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels. For Walls and Columns only, the following controls are also available: Relation to Zones: Click this pop-up field to define the relationship of the Column to Zones. The list defines whether the new Column is a Zone delimiter, an element to subtract from the Zones area or to be ignored when calculating Zones. Zone Boundary (not available for slanted columns): This option means that a vertical column located inside a zone will not be included when the zone area or zone volume is
1786
calculated. The zone boundary is drawn at the base of the column. Multi-story elements in automatic display mode can serve as zone boundaries on any story on which they exist, not just their home story. Reduce Zone Area Only means that the2D zone will encompass the column, but the column area will not be included in the zone area. (Zone Volume, however, will include the column.) Reduce Zone Volume means that when calculating the zones 3D volume, the volume will not include the volume of any column located inside the zone. The 2D Zone will not include the Column area either. No Effect On Zones means that the column has no effect on the zone; the zone area and volume will include the area covered by the column.
Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume Relation to Zones Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings
1787
Slab Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Slab tool is used for drawing and editing slabs, the basic horizontal building blocks of the Virtual Building. For more information, see Slabs.
Slab Geometry and Positioning Panel

Slab Thickness: Enter a value for the slabs thickness. Note: If the structure of the slab is a composite, then the slabs thickness is defined in Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and equals the sum of the skins thicknesses. A composite slabs thickness cannot be edited in Slab Settings; you must go to Options > Element Attributes > Composites. If you want to edit the slab thickness in Slab Settings, choose a non-composite slab structure. Relative Base height: Enter a value for the elevation of the top of the slab. By default, this is measured from the current story level. (In the 3D window, this value is measured from the User Origin.) If you prefer, you can set the slabs height value relative to its Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up. Absolute Base height [to Project Zero]: Enter a value for the elevation of the top of the slab from the Reference level. (Click the arrow to define a different Reference level.) Note: Slab elevation is measured to the top surface of the Slab. By default, this value is set to coincide with the zero level of the current/home story. This means that the elevation of the bottom surface of the slab is obtained by subtracting the thickness from the value shown in the elevation field.
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Slabs Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Slab. If you change a Slabs elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story.
1788
Slab Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Use the pop-up list to set the stories on which to show the Slab. Home Story only: The outline of the entire slab will be displayed and editable on its home story only. Note: If you have not yet placed the element, this control is called Current Story Only. All Stories: The outline of the entire slab will be displayed on every story of the project. Other options are to display the slab on its Home story plus one story up and/or down. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to show the slab on any other combination of stories. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the slab outline and its fill. Note: Fills can only be displayed on stories where the outline is also visible. Note: The line type of slabs displayed on remote stories is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. For more information, see Show On Stories. The rest of the controls of this panel to define the appearance of the Slabs fill on the Floor Plan (using an optional cover fill) and of cut Slab surfaces in Section windows. Different pen colors can be chosen for the Slabs outline, its fill and the background of the fill. Structure: Use the Fill pop-up in this section to choose a fill which best represents the slab structure. The choice of fills includes Vectorial & Symbol fills, and Composite Structures. For more information, see Fill Types and Composite Structures. Note: Composite Structures are defined at Options > Element Attributes > Composites, and their Use With parameter must include Slab if they are to appear in the Slab Settings fill pop-up. Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors of cut lines (including separator lines of composite slabs), cut fills, and the background of cut fills. These attributes will be displayed for cut slab surfaces in Section. Note: If you are using a Composite Slab, you may prefer to use the fill/line settings set for this slab type in Options > Element Attributes > Composites: check the Apply Structures Settings box for the settings you want to inherit from the composite definition. For more information, see Composite Structures. Outlines: These settings apply to the line type and pen color of slab outlines that fall below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Cover Fills: Check this box to display a cover fill using the fill and pen settings chosen here. Choose a fill type from the pop-up palette. Note: Only those Fills defined as Cover Fills in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types are available here. Choose pencolors for the cover fill pattern and for its background.
1789
Use Fill of Surface Material: Check this box if you want your cover fill to resemble the surface material (vectorial hatch) assigned to this slab in the Model panel. (In this case, the Fill selection control will be greyed.) Cover Fill Orientation: This control defines the orientation of the fill pattern. Select the control, then choose an orientation definition from the pop-up opened with the black arrow: Link to Fill Origin: If you choose this option, then the cover fill will show a fill handle when you place the slab on the Floor Plan. You can then manipulate the fill orientation by selecting and moving the fill handle. (Use the Move Sub-Element command from the pet palette.) Note: Fill handles are only displayed if you have enabled View > On-Screen View Options > Fill Handles. Link to Project Origin: The fill pattern will start at the Project Origin, and the part of the pattern that falls within the Fills boundary will be displayed. No fill handle appears. Distorted Fill: The Fill pattern can be distorted by altering the lengths and directions of its double fill handle. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching.
Slab Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the slab. Use the three pop-up controls to assign materials to the top, sides and bottom of the slab. Note: The top-side material, if it is a vectorial hatching, can also be applied as a cover fill for the Slab (by checking the Use Fill of Surface Material box in Floor Plan & Section panel of Slab Settings). Moreover, if the cover fill has a customized fill origin (via Link to Fill Origin option), the 3D Model will reflect that fill orientation too. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching. Chain icon: Click the chain icon assign the same Material to all three surfaces simultaneously. Deselecting the chain icon will restore the originally set materials to the slabs surfaces. If you select the slab and change any of its side materials (see Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material), a yellow icon appears alongside the default material setting to indicate that one or more edge materials has been changed from this default. For more information, see Materials.
Slab Edge: The Slab edge angle set to perpendicular by default, as indicated by the icon.
The Various button is only active if a custom edge angle has been applied in the Slab Edge dialog box.
1790
Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected slab (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected slab. For more information, see Align 3D Texture. Custom Material defined for certain edges. This message is activated if you have assigned a custom material to one or more sides of the slab or the edges of any of its holes. In this case, the Reset Side Materials button is also activated. Click to restore the default side material to all edges of the selected slab and any holes it contains. See Set Custom Slab Edge Angle and Material.
Slab Listing and Labeling Panel Structural Property Panel in Tool Settings
1791
Stair Tool Settings

The Stair tool is used to place stair type library parts into the Project.
Place and edit these GDL object-type stairs using the Stair Settings dialog box. For more information, see Stairs (Predefined Stair Objects). Also, custom stairs placed with the StairMaker function can be - in part - edited from the Stair Settings dialog box. See Stair 2D Symbol and 3D Attributes Panel. The Stair tools Settings dialog box includes many of the same panels as that of the Object and Lamp tools: Preview and Positioning, Parameters, Floor Plan and Section, Model, and Listing and Labeling. These settings apply to stair objects placed directly from the Stair Settings dialog box, similarly to other objects. For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes.
Stair Preview and Positioning Panel

Settings in the Stair Preview and Positioning Panel are identical to those in the Object/Lamp Preview and Positioning Panel. For Stairs only, an additional control is also available on its Preview and Positioning panel. If the available stair objects in the loaded library do not fit your needs, you can use the Create New Stair command of the StairMaker add-on (loaded with ArchiCAD) to customize and place another stair type. Click the button above the preview to access the Create Stair command.
Note: You can also access this function using the File > Libraries and Objects > New With > StairMaker command. For more information on the Create New Stair command, see StairMaker Add-On.
Stair Parameters Panel

See also Displaying Stairs on the Floor Plan.
1792
Stair Custom Settings Panel

Custom Settings are available only for Stairs having a user interface script.
Stair 2D Symbol, Arrowhead, Batten, Flight and Railing Types Panel

Click the upper black arrow to pop-up the parameter categories:
2D Symbol Types: Choose one of the available 2D Symbol types using the sketches for assistance. The range of choices depends on whether you have chosen "Scale Sensitive" or "Custom" as the 2D Detail Level option.
Using the upper black arrow again, go to the Arrowhead Start and End Symbol Styles tab page. Here you can choose an arrow head and start symbol for the 2D Symbol of your Stair.
1793
In the next two tab pages you can chose from the wide range of available Railing Types independently for the left and right sides of the stair.
For StairMaker Stairs, this panel is called 2D Display and 3D Attributes. (see below)
Stair 2D Symbol and 3D Attributes Panel

This panel is available in Stair Settings when creating or editing a custom Stair created with StairMaker. For more information, see Custom Stairs with StairMaker. Click the title button to pop-up the parameter categories:
2D Symbol Types: Choose one of the available 2D Symbol types using the sketches for assistance. The range of choices depends on whether you have chosen Scale Sensitive or Custom as the 2D Detail Level option.
1794
In the next tab page, choose 2D Symbol Attributes for the chosen 2D Symbol:
The Visible Structure is the part of the Stair below the Break Mark. The Invisible Structure is the part of the Stair above the Break Mark, or any part of the structure that is hidden. Choose a Background Fill for the body of the stairs 2D symbol. In the next tab page, choose options for displaying the Walking Line Symbol: Walking Line Pen, Walking Line Type; and Fill colors for the shaded parts of the Walking Line Start and End Symbols.
The Text Display tab page provides options for placing standard textual items on your stair:
Turn Readable Text option on if you want texts to be readable from the bottom and from the right, independent of the Stairs position. Show Numbering will number all the treads in the stair. You can set the number with which to start the numbering, as well as text size and pen. 1795
Up and Down Text gives you the option of displaying the words Up or Down at the beginning of the walking line.
If you check Rise and Run Text, the Stair will display the number of Rises and the number of Treads together with their dimensions. Use the Format parameter to choose between different standards to display Rise and Run Text. Choose Custom Text to enter any text. Enter Text Size and Text Pen for the Rise and Run Text.
The Description option allows you to place any text along with the Stair. The next tab page, Rail and Carriage on Symbol, allows you to turn the symbolic display of railings and carriages on and off. With railings, you can display the rail axis in addition to or instead of the railing.
1796
The Story Sensitivity and 2D Above Home Story tab page controls the appearance of the stair on stories above and below the stairs home story.
Note: Stairs are shown on remote stories according to the options set in the Show on Stories control, in the Floor Plan and Section panel of this dialog box. If this control is set to Home Story Only, then the options affecting the stairs Story Sensitive display are irrelevant. Story Sensitive Symbol: Check this box if you want to set different display options for the stair on remote stories. (If this box is unchecked, then the stair appears on all stories in a uniform manner.) Line Type Below Home Story: Choose a Line Type for displaying the stairs on stories below the home story. 2D Above Home Story: Check the boxes to determine which parts of the Stair should be displayed on stories above its home story: Breakline: Show or hide breakline Show 2D Under Break Mark Show 2D Above Break Mark Show Treads Choose a Line Type, Line Pen and Walking Line Type to set the appearance of the Stairs lines on stories above its home story. On the 3D Attributes page, set materials for the stairs 3D display. You will set separate materials for the stair structure and for the tread.
1797
Stair Structure 3D Pen and Materials: Set a pen color for the stair contours when displayed in hidden or wireframe mode. Use the pop-ups to choose materials for the upper, bottom, side and riser surfaces of the stair structure when displayed in shaded mode. To set the same material for all four surfaces, click the Link Materials checkbox. Tread 3D Pen and Materials: Set a pen color for the tread contours when displayed in hidden or wireframe mode. Use the pop-ups to choose materials for the top, front and riser surfaces of the stair treads when displayed in shaded mode. To set the same material for all three surfaces, click the Link Materials checkbox.
Stair Floor Plan and Section Panel

Floor Plan and Section panel of Stairs are quite similar to those presented for the Window and Door type elements. For information, see Door/Window Tool Settings.
Stair Model Panel

For more information, see Object/Lamp Model Panel.
Stair Listing and Labeling Panel

For more information, see Listing and Labeling Panels.
1798
StairMaker Settings
For information on using StairMaker to make custom stairs, see Custom Stair Based on a Standard Stair Type.
Stair/Slope Geometry and Flight Settings Tab Page
The parameters are separated in three or four sections, depending on the stair type chosen: Geometry Settings, Flight Settings, Winder Settings and Tread Settings. Depending on the parameters you set in these fields, the stairs preview symbol (seen at top right in the dialog box) will change accordingly. Many of the parameters you enter can be optionally locked by clicking the lock icon. If you do not lock these parameters, modifications on subsequent tab pages may cause StairMaker to automatically recalculate these values. Locked parameters will not be modified and StairMaker will ensure that subsequent options you set are compatible with these parameters. If parameters need changing, StairMaker will skip locked parameters and look for the next value in the hierarchy. If editing is not possible without changing a locked parameter or if too many parameters are locked, an alert will appear.
Geometry Settings
Enter numerical values to set the geometry of the stair. These parameters vary depending on the type of stair you are creating, and the icon will indicate which parameter is which. These parameters may include: total height, flight width, full length, or lengths of lower and upper parts of the stair, or length of middle part, landing length, length of the walking line, for spiral stair with newel: initial and sweep angles.
1799
Flight Settings
Enter values to set the parameters that define the flight. These parameters may include: number of risers, form and the number of the treads in the winder range (in the case of certain stair types), dimensions of the landings, value of the arrival offset, closing angle of the flights, surface material setting for newel post, lower and upper offsets of winders, for U-return stairs, and winder types (normal or radial), turning angle (for C-Run stairs), size of narrowest tread along the inside, offset of the walking line, winder type.
Winder Settings:
Number of threads in winder Distance between the two flights (U stair) Offset(s) of risers in winders from the corner(s) of the stair
Tread Settings
Enter values in these fields to define the geometry of the Treads or (if you are editing a Slope) the angle of the Slope. To the right of these fields, the longitudinal section of the stair is shown, giving you instant feedback on your changes. Set Riser Geometry: It is easier and more comfortable to climb the stairs if the sum of twice the riser and the run (2*Riser + Run parameter) is within the range of 60 to 63 cm, or 24 to 25 inches. To ensure this condition, you can define a range of values for the (2*Riser) + Run parameter in the Tread Settings section. (2*Riser)+Run> Enter the minimum step value here. (2*Riser)+Run< Enter the maximum step value here. (2*Riser)+Run= The last parameter is not editable. It only shows the current value of the (2*Riser) + Run parameter. Every time you modify a parameter, StairMaker checks that the (2*Riser) + Run parameter is still in the appropriate range. Enter the run value here. To lock this parameter, click on the lock button.
1800
Enter the riser value here. To lock this parameter, click on the lock button.
Locked parameters will not be modified. If parameters need changing, StairMaker will skip locked parameters and look for the next value in the hierarchy. If editing is not possible without changing a locked parameter or if too many parameters are locked, an alert will appear. Optional top tread at floor level: Use the buttons at the bottom of the Flight Settings section to add an optional top tread to the stair. It may either have the same depth as the stairs other treads, or you can customize an extra tread depth.
Click the button on the right to add a top tread to the floor level. A top tread is added to the stair at top floor level. If you leave the extra tread depth fields value at zero, the top tread at floor level will have the same depth as the other treads. To change the top treads depth, enter a positive value.
Check Stair: Click this button to detect any conflicts that would prevent StairMaker from generating the stair.
Defining Slopes
The Slope editing window is quite similar to the Stair editing window, but irrelevant symbols and parameter fields are dimmed and the others are transformed into slope setting functions. In the Tread Settings section, a new element is the field where the angle of the slope can be set.
In the Structure tab page, the available structure types for the slopes correspond to the structureGeometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker) types for stairs. For more information, see Geometry and Flight Settings (StairMaker).
Stair Structure & Landing Tab Page
1801
Structure
The content of this tab page changes according to the construction type of the stair. These changes will also appear in the stair geometry tab page and in the parameters of the stair. The following 3D alternatives are offered: Solid Stair with Treads Stair with Carriages Stair with Stringers Treads only Solid Stair
Enter the parameters relevant to the stair structure you have chosen: Enter the stair slab thickness here:
If your stair has carriages, enter the carriage width thickness here:
If you are making a stair with stringers, enter the side holder offset here.
The upper and lower slabs should be set to exactly join the Floor Plan Symbol within ArchiCAD, no matter which 3D alternative is selected in StairMaker, and even if a top tread at floor level is added to the stair. Use the fields (pictured here) to enter values for the thicknesses of the stairs upper connecting structure and its lower connecting structure. Each thickness has two components: subfloor and finish.
If you do not use any separate slab for subfloor + finish in your design, set the subfloor + finish thickness to zero. StairMaker automatically adjusts the stair parameters to these slab specifications. 1802
Landing
If your stair has one or more landings, enter values for one or both landing thicknesses in the Landing section of this tab page. Clean Intersections: Click this button to open the Clean Up Bottom Surface dialog box. Use these options to create clean intersections at the bottom of the stair between the runs and landings. Choose one of the first two radio buttons, depending on whether you want to adjust the landing thickness or the stair slab thickness: Adjust Landing Thickness to Stair Slab Thickness, Adjust Stair Slab Thickness to Landing Thickness. Calculating Risers from Upper and Lower Landings The other set of radio buttons will affect the stairs geometry: it determines how the number of risers (as set in Geometry, Flights and Tread Settings tab page) will be counted: either from the bottom of the stairs upwards (Start Calculation from Downstairs) or from the upper landing downwards (Start Calculation from Upstairs). StairMaker recalculates the parameters with the new values, and the 2D symbol of the stair will be updated. Note: The U Return with Two Landings stair type has two landings; your settings will affect the lower landing and StairMaker will apply them automatically on the upper one.
Attributes
Define the pencolor used for the Stairs contour and the Materials of each of the Stairs sides in the 3D Window and PhotoRendering. Check Stair: Click this button to detect any conflicts that would prevent StairMaker from generating the stair For more information, see Structure and Landing (StairMaker).
Tread Settings Tab Page
Note: If you have chosen a Solid Stair or Solid Slope in the Stair Structure & Landing tab page, the Tread Parameters tab page is not available.
1803
Enter values in the input fields of the Tread section of the tab page to define the exact parameters of the stairs tread:
The input fields from top to bottom: define nosing on the front of the stair, define the thickness of the tread, define the thickness of the nosing at the right side and at the left side of the tread, define the thickness of the risers. Attributes: Define a Pen Color for the treads 3D contours. Use the materials pop-up palettes to define a separate material for each surface of the tread: the top, the front and the riser. To assign the same material to each surface, click the lock icon. Check Stair: Click this button to detect any conflicts that would prevent StairMaker from generating the stair. For more information, see Tread Settings (StairMaker).
Railing Settings Tab Page
Use the content of this tab page to set type, location and parameters for your stair railings. The settings displayed on the screen are always those relevant to the selected railing and any changes in the values of the parameters will only affect the selected railing. Click one of the three Railing segmenting buttons at the top of the dialog box to set whether the railing settings should apply to. The mode chosen here is also in effect when setting the post.
All Stair-Rail Side mode: both sides of the entire stair. If you select this option, all segments in the stair preview will be selected, and your parameter settings will affect railings for the
1804
whole of the stair. A single railing type will be used for the whole stair with the same offset and parameter value for each segment. When switching to this mode from either of the other two (One Side mode or One Segment mode) each flight inherits the stair-rail and post settings of the lower starting flights first lefthand segment. One Side mode: one side of the entire stair. If you select this option, the left and right stairrails can be set independently. The left stair-rail is selected by default as displayed in the preview of the stairs. To switch to the right stair-rail, move the cursor to the other side of the stairs until it takes the form of a stair-rail, then click it. When switching to this mode from All Stair-Rail mode, both sides inherit the settings chosen in the previous mode. When switching to this mode from One Segment mode, the whole flight inherits the settings of the lower starting segment. One Segment mode: a selected segment. Clicking the third icon allows you to define a railing for each flight (segment) independently. By default, the first segment of the left railing is selected. To select another segment, simply click it. Different offset values can be used for each segment. In this case, the elements of the stair-rail belonging to different segments will not fit each other automatically. Positive or negative upper and lower overhang can be defined manually for each railing segment. When switching to this mode from either of the other two (All Stair-Rail mode or One Side mode), all stair-rails inherit the previous settings. The overhang values of the stair-rails will be identical to those calculated automatically in the previous mode. In the preview area that displays the floor plan of the stairs, each segment of the railing is represented by a line that shows where the centerline of the railing lies. To switch off a railing, first select it, then choose the No Railing option from the Railing type list. A thin line will indicate the place of the stair-rail. Railing Setting: Choose types and parameters for the selected railing from this pop-up menu. The content of the list window depends on the available definitions. The railing preview area (above the stair-rail type list) shows a small image of the selected railing type.
Location
These controls define the direction of the railings offset with respect to the edge of the stair (inside the stair or outside the stair), as well as the value of the offset.
Parameters
Enter a value for the distance from the stair to the top of the railing (Top Height):
Enter a value for the distance from the stair to the bottom of the railing (Bottom Height):
1805
Enter a value for the railings overhang at the stair bottom (Lower Overhang):
Enter a value for the railings overhang at the top of the stair (Upper Overhang):
Note: In One Segment mode, the lower and upper overhang relates to the current segment, while in the other two modes they apply to the lower overhang of the bottom segment and the upper overhang of the top segment.
Additional Parameters
These apply to the chosen railing type.
Post Setting
Use these controls to define the posts of the railing. If the selected type does not contain posts, this section will be dimmed. Choose one of the four radio buttons to define the post placement. No Posts: Click this button to eliminate all posts from the railing. Closest to: Click this button to enter a value for the approximate distance between each neighboring post. On every Tread: Click this button to place posts on every tread (on landings, approximate distance will be used). Number: Click this button to set the number of posts. Snap to Corner: Check this box to place a post at each of the segment ends, in addition to posts placed according to the rule defined by the chosen radio buttons. Enter a value for offset of the posts above the railing.
Enter a value for offset of the posts below the stair.
Enter a value for the distance to offset of the first and the last posts from the ends of the railing.
Click this button to select the position of the posts relative to the centerline of the stair-rail.
1806
Enter a value for the side offset of the post here.
Modify Post Location: After placing posts automatically according to your settings, you can modify the location of any single post by double clicking on the post on the selected stair-rail segment in the preview. A dialog box appears, where the position of the post can be set up numerically. Check Stair: Click this button to detect any conflicts that would prevent StairMaker from generating the stair. For more information, see Tread Settings (StairMaker).
Symbol Settings Tab Page

Use this tab page to define the appearance of the Stair symbol in the projects 2D windows. For more information, see Symbol Settings (StairMaker).
2D Detail Level
Click the black arrow to choose a Detail level preference for the Stair Symbol:
Scale Sensitive: Choose Scale Sensitive for the amount of detail shown in the 2D symbol to be scale-dependent. Custom: Choose this if you want the Stair symbol to remain the same regardless of window scale. The preview window in 2D Detail Level shows graphical symbols of many types. Choose the desired symbol type with which to display your Stair.
Walking Line Start Symbol

Choose the preferred symbol style to mark the start of your Walking Line (or None, for no symbol).
Walking Line End Symbol

Choose the preferred symbol style (arrowhead) to mark the end of your Walking Line (or None, for no symbol).
Rail Symbol Type

Choose the preferred symbol style to represent the Stair railing. Check Stair: Click this button to detect any conflicts that would prevent StairMaker from generating the stair.
1807
Attributes
2D Symbol: Choose a Line Pen and Line Type with which to display the 2D symbol of the Stair, for both the Visible and the Invisible Structure. The Visible Structure is the part of the Stair below the Break Mark. The Invisible Structure is the part of the Stair above the Break Mark., as well as stair parts that are hidden by other parts of the structure. Break Mark Type: Choose either Straight or Zig-Zag to display the Break Mark. Background Fill Type: Choose a Background Fill for the body of the stairs 2D symbol. Choose a Fill Pen and a Fill Background Pen for this Fill. Choose either On or Off to control the display of the Fill above the Break Mark. Show Walking Line: Choose either On or Off to control the display of the Walking Line on the Stairs 2D symbol. If you turn it on, choose a pen color and line type for the Walking Line. Walking Line Start Symbol: Choose a Fill type for the Walking Line Start Symbol. (The Symbol itself is chosen on the left side of this tab page.) Walking Line End Symbol: Choose a Fill type for the Walking Line End Symbol. (The Symbol itself is chosen on the left side of this tab page.) If the Walking Line is repeated within the Stair (if you have multiple End symbols), the Fill Pen Above control lets you set a separate Fill for the Walking Line End Symbols that fall above the Break Mark. Text Display Turn Readable Text option on if you want texts to be readable from the bottom and from the right, independent of the Stairs position. Turn Show Numbering on or off to control the display of numbering on all the treads in the stair. Start From: Enter a number with which to start the numbering, as well as the Text Size and Text Pen. Up and Down Text gives you the option of displaying the words Up or Down at the beginning of the walking line, or else no such text. Turn Rise and Run Text on or off to control the display of Rise and Run information on the Stair Symbol. If you turn it on, the Stair will display the number of Rises and the number of Treads together with their dimensions. Use the Format parameter to choose between different standards to display Rise and Run Text. Choose Custom Text to enter any text. Enter Text Size and Text Pen for the Rise and Run Text. Description: Click this parameter to enable an empty text input field next to the parameter. Type any text you wish to appear on the Stairs 2D Symbol. Set Text Size and Text Pen in the following two attributes. Show Rail on Floor Plan: Choose either On or Off to control the display of the Stairs Rail on the Floor Plan. (The Rail Symbol itself is chosen on the left side of this tab page.) If you choose On, set the following attributes: Line Type and Pen of the Rail Line Type and Pen of the Post (if the Railing has Posts) Show Rail Axis: Choose either On or Off to control the display of the Railing Axis on the Floor Plan. If you choose On, set the Line Type and Pen for the Rail Axis. 1808
Show Carriage on Floor Plan: Choose either On or Off to control the display of the Stairs Carriage on the Floor Plan. If you choose On, set a Line Type and Pen for the Carriage. Story Sensitive: Choose either On or Off to determine whether the Stair Symbol should vary according to which story is visible. Note: Stairs are shown on remote stories according to the options set in the Show on Stories control, in the Floor Plan and Section panel of this dialog box. If this control is set to Home Story Only, then the options affecting the stairs Story Sensitive display are irrelevant. If you set Story Sensitive to Off, then the stair appears on all stories in a uniform manner. If you set Story Sensitive to On, set the following attributes: Line Type Below Home Story: Choose a Line Type for displaying the stairs on stories below the home story. 2D Above Home Story: Check the boxes to determine how to display the Stair on stories above its home story: Breakline: Set on or off to show or hide the Stairs breakline on stories above the home story Show 2D Under Break Mark: Set on or off Show 2D Above Break Mark: Set on or off Show Treads: Set on or off to show or hide Treads on the Stair Symbol on stories above the Home Story. Line Type: Set the Line Type for the Stair symbol on stories above the Home Story Line Pen: Set the Line Pen for the Stair symbol on stories above the Home Story Walking Line Type: Set the Walking Line Type for the Stair symbol on stories above the Home Story
Stair Listing Settings Tab Page
Each element and property of the stair can be listed with the Document > Schedules and Lists menu commands. Stairs will be listed as library parts. The list can be set up individually in ArchiCAD; however, if you wish to list a part of the stair, be sure that the box beside it (in this tab page) is checked. For more information, see Calculation.
1809
Mesh Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Mesh tool is for creating surfaces, skirted surfaces and solid bodies by defining the elevation of its relevant nodes and interpolating between them.
For more information, see Meshes.
Mesh Geometry and Positioning Panel

1) Mesh Height: Set the depth (if any) to which the mesh will extend below the reference plane. (The resulting Bottom (b) mesh dimension will be displayed as a negative value in the Info Box.)
2) Set the elevation of the Mesh Reference Plane: Relative Base Height: Set the mesh height as measured from the reference plane. By default, this reference level is the current story level. If you prefer, you can set the mesh height value relative to its Home Story instead, by choosing To Home Story from the arrow pop-up. Absolute Base height [to Project Zero]: Enter the Mesh height as measured from the Reference level. (Click the arrow pop-up to define a different Reference level.) (The resulting Top (t) mesh dimension will be displayed in the Info Box.) Choose a Mesh geometry option: Click this radio button to create simple superficies with the Mesh tool.
Click this radio button to create skirted superficies with the Mesh tool.
Click this radio button to create solid bodies with the Mesh tool.
Home Story
Choose one of the following Home Story settings: Current: The Meshs Home Story will be the Current Story. Select Home Story: Click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Mesh.
1810
If you change a Meshs elevation so that its reference line is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story.
Mesh Floor Plan and Section Panel

Show on Stories: Use the pop-up list to set the stories on which to show the Mesh. Home Story only: The outline of the entire Mesh will be displayed and editable on its home story only. Note: If you have not yet placed the element, this control is called Current Story Only. All Stories: The outline of the entire Mesh will be displayed on every story of the project. Other options are to display the Mesh on its Home story plus one story up and/or down. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to show the Mesh on any other combination of stories. The Show on Stories: Custom Settings dialog box appears, where you can set separate story display options for the slab outline and its fill. Note: Fills can only be displayed on stories where the outline is also visible. Note: The line type of Meshes displayed on remote stories is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. For more information, see Show On Stories. The rest of the controls define the appearance of the Meshs cut surfaces, outline and fill pattern on the Floor Plan and in Section windows. Different pen colors can be chosen for the outline of the cut surface, the body hatch, the background of the hatch, and for the ridges. Note: These settings only apply to solid bodies, not to simple or skirted superficies. Cut Surfaces: In this section, set the line type and pen colors of cut lines, cut fills, and the background of cut fills. These attributes will be displayed for cut mesh surfaces in Section. Note: The line type of meshes displayed on remote stories is set in Options > Project Preferences > Construction Elements. Outlines: These settings apply to the display of mesh outlines that fall below (Uncut) the Floor Plan Cut Plane. Ridge Selection: Define whether to Show all Ridges or Show User-Defined Ridges (i.e., only those that you have defined when drawing the Mesh.) Ridge Pen: Use the pop-up to assign a pencolor to both user-defined and generated ridges. Cover Fills: Check this box to display a cover fill using the fill and pen settings chosen here. Choose a fill type from the pop-up menu. Note: Only those Fills defined as Cover Fills in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types are available here. Choose pencolors for the cover fill pattern and for its background. For more information, see Fill Types.
1811
Cover Fill Orientation: This control defines the orientation of the fill pattern. Select the control, then choose an orientation definition from the pop-up opened with the black arrow: Link to Fill Origin: If you choose this option, then the cover fill will show a fill handle when you place the mesh on the Floor Plan. You can then manipulate the fill orientation by selecting and moving the fill handle. (Use the Move Sub-Element command from the pet palette.) Note: Fill handles are only displayed if you have enabled View > On-Screen View Options > Fill Handles. Link to Project Origin: The fill pattern will start at the Project Origin, and the part of the pattern that falls within the Fills boundary will be displayed. No fill handle appears. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching.
Mesh Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the mesh. Use the three pop-up controls to assign materials to the top, sides and bottom of the mesh. Depending on the construction method (simple superficies, skirted superficies, solid body), only some or all controls will be available Chain icon: Click the chain icon assign the same Material to all three surfaces simultaneously. Deselecting the chain icon will restore the originally set materials to the slabs surfaces. For more information on Materials, see Materials. Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it means that the currently selected roof (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected beam. For more information, see Align 3D Texture. You can also control the appearance of the generated ridges (either sharp or smooth) in the 3D model. All Ridges Sharp: Show the mesh in the PhotoRendering window with sharply connecting triangles. User Defined Sharp: Show the mesh with sharply connecting User Defined Ridges in the PhotoRendering window, and with smoothly connecting surfaces everywhere else. All Ridges Smooth: Show the mesh in the PhotoRendering window with smoothly connecting surfaces. If you choose All Ridges Smooth, only user-defined ridges will appear in 3D view. For more information, see Create a Mesh.
Mesh Listing and Labeling Panel

1812
Zone Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. Zones are 3D elements, with accurate floor plan representation that consults of zone fills and zone stamps.
For more information, see Zones.
Zone Name and Positioning Panel

Zone Category: Choose a Zone category defined in Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories. Their definition includes the Category name, code, color and zone stamp, and a set of parameters. For a detailed description, see Zone Categories. Zone Name and Number (No.): Enter name and number values in these fields for each Zone individually. The Zone Name and Number serve to identify the Zone Stamp on the Floor Plan. Zone Height: Enter a value for the height of the Zone body measured from the Zones bottom elevation. Zone Level: Enter a value for the reference level of the Zone, measured from the Storys elevation. Subfloor Thickness: This measures the elevation of the bottom of the Zone body (measured from the Zone Level). Geometry Methods: Click one of the icons to choose the Manual, Inner Edge or Reference Line method for creating a zone.
For more information, see Creating Zones. Zone Polygon: These radio buttons are only active if the zone is defined by the reference line construction method.
The chosen option will determine the display of the zone boundary with respect to the reference line. If you choose the Net option, the zone polygon will not be displayed beyond the inner edge of the boundary walls. Select the Gross radio button if you want the full zone polygon displayed.
1813
See the following figures for the difference, with Clean Wall & Beam Intersections (View > On-Screen View Options) turned off and then on.
Zone Stamp Angle

Enter a rotation angle for the Zone Stamp. Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates).
Fixed Angle: To keep the Zone Stamp Angle fixed relative to the screen, even if you rotate the view (see Oriented View), check the Fixed Angle checkbox. To allow the Zone Stamp to rotated along with the view, leave the checkbox empty. For more information on Zone Stamps, see Zone Stamp Panel.
Zone Floor Plan Panel

The Floor Plan panel defines the appearance of the Zones fill on the Floor Plan. Zone Fill Outline: Click the button if you want your Zone fill to have an outline.
1814
Choose a Line Type and an outline color from the Line Type and Pencolor pop-up palettes. Zone (Cover) Fill Pattern: Click the button to choose a cover Fill pattern and background from the Fill type pop-up palette.
Note: Only those Fills defined as Cover Fills in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types dialog box are available here. They will be displayed on your plan according to the setting chosen in the Cover Fills category in Document > Set Model View > Model View Options. For more information, see Line Types, Fill Types and Model View Options Override Fill Display. Use Fill of surface Material checkbox: this means the Zone fill on the Floor Plan will display the same top-side hatching material as you set for the Zones 3D display in the Zones Model panel. For details, see Zone Model Panel. Note: Checking this box also affects the display of the 3D Model: if you have assigned a custom fill orientation with Link to Fill Origin (see below), the 3D fill display will reflect it. Link Fill Orientation: Select one of the two radio buttons to choose a method for displaying the vectorial cover fill: Link to Project Origin: The fill pattern will start at the Project Origin, and the part of the pattern that falls within the Fills boundary will be displayed. No fill handle appears. Link to Fill Origin: If you choose this option, then the cover fill will show a fill handle when you place the zone on the Floor Plan. You can then manipulate the fill orientation by selecting and moving the fill handle. (Use the Move Sub-Element command from the pet palette.) Notes: Zone cover fills appear on the Floor Plan only if you have checked the Cover fill background box in Document > Model View > Model View Options > Zone Background. For more information, see Model View Options Override Fill Display. Fill handles are only displayed if you have enabled View > On-Screen View Options > Fill Handles. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching.
Zone Stamp Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the format of the text of the Zone Stamp. The first field displays the name of the Zone Stamp. You cannot assign a different zone stamp here; the zone stamp shown is the one associated with the Zone Category you chose in the Name and Positioning Panel. Note: The Zone Stamp assigned to each Zone Category is determined by the settings in Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories. For more information, see Zone Categories. Font Type: Click this field to select a font for the Zone Stamp Text. Font Script: Click this pop-up menu to select a font encoding for the Zone Stamp Text.
1815
Zone Stamp Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here. Font size: Enter a font size for the Zone Stamp text. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to use the colors defined for this Zone Stamp in Options > Element Attributes > Zone Categories. For more information, see Zone Categories. Parameters: To customize the current Zone Stamp parameters, change any of these parameters. Depending on the Zone Stamps GDL script, the contents of the parameter list may vary accordingly. These parameters have an effect both on the appearance and the contents of the zone stamp. The parameter list allows you to switch on and off the display of parameters in the Zone Stamp, as reflected in the preview. Note: Customization of the Zone Stamp parameters will be lost if you change the Category of the Zone. In this case, the parameters of the stamp will revert to the values stored with the Zone Category attributes. A preview window provides feedback on the Zone Stamp as it will appear in the Floor Plan. See also Moving Zone Stamps.
Zone Custom Settings Panel

The Custom Settings panel can contain additional graphic choices linked to the active Zone Stamp. This panel is active only if the selected Zone Stamp, a parametric object, has been assigned a script. For more information, see Parametric Objects.
Zone Model Panel

The Model panel controls the 3D appearance of Zones, including Material choices and trimming options. Choose a material for displaying the Zone in shaded and PhotoRendered 3D views. For more information, see 3D Display of Zone Spaces. Use this Material on All Zone Surfaces: Click this option to display the all zone surfaces of the 3D zone shape in the single material you selected with the pop-up above. Inherit Boundary Wall and Trimming Element Materials: Click this option to have individual surface polygons of the zone inherit the materials of the corresponding surfaces of boundary walls and any elements that you trimmed the Zone with. Zone is Trimmed by one or more Elements: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected zone (already placed in the plan) has trimmed by a roof, slab, and/or beam using the Trim Zone command. In this case, the Undo Top Trim and Undo Bottom Trim buttons are also activated. Click to restore the original upper or lower part of the selected zone. For more information, see Trim Zone to Another Element.
Zone Area Calculation Panel

Use the controls in this panel to view the measured area of the Zone and refine the calculated values. 1816
Measured Net Area: This field shows the net zone area. For automatically recognized zones, this is the zone area within the boundary walls. For manually drawn zones, this is the zone area within the zone perimeter. Area Subtraction: These fields provide information on how the zones net area has been calculated. They show how much of the zones original area was reduced by each element: Freestanding Walls and Columns within the zone area: The space occupied by Walls and Columns can be partly or entirely subtracted from the zone area, using controls in their own settings dialog boxes. For more information, see Wall Listing and Labeling Panel and Column Listing and Labeling Panel. Fills: From the total zone area, you can subtract part of the surface occupied by Fills, as set in the Fills own settings dialog box. Low ceilings: If the zone is cut by a roof, the zone area can be reduced accordingly, depending on the settings in Options > Project Preferences > Zones. For more information, see Zones Preferences. The Reduced Area field displays the value obtained by subtracting the Wall/Column, Fill and Low Ceiling reduction values from the Measured Value. Click the Reduce by checkbox if you want to manually reduce the Reduced Area by any given percentage (enter the desired percentage value in the input field). The result of this reduction is the Calculated Area. Note: In order to activate the reduction defined in the selected Zones Settings dialog box, you must first execute the Design > Update Zones command. For more information, see Updating Zones. Calculated Area: This field displays the final calculated Zone Area, taking into account all of the Area Subtraction and reduction definitions. Measured Area: This field displays the value you will see in calculations.
Zone Listing and Labeling Panel

1817
Curtain Wall Settings

For an overview, see Curtain Wall: A System Tool.
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct) Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window
1818
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Geometry and Positioning Panel

Nominal thickness: Enter the nominal thickness of the Curtain Wall. This is the distance from the Reference Surface to the theoretical opposite side of the Curtain Wall - as defined by you. The Nominal thickness value is used by elements connected to the Curtain Wall: adjoining zones will extend to the nominal thickness of the Curtain Wall connecting walls will also, by default, extend to the nominal thickness of the Curtain Wall. See also Connect Wall to Curtain Wall. Home Story: Choose a Home Story for the Curtain Wall: Select Home Story: Choose the current story (listed as the topmost option in the drop-down list), or click Select Story to bring up a list of stories in the current project. Choose a story to which to link the Curtain Wall. If you change a Curtain Walls elevation so that its lowest vertical is moved to a different story, you have the option to make the Home Story change to match the elements new location: see Set Home Story by Elevation. For more information, see Set Home Story. The rest of the controls on this panel are only editable in Curtain Wall Selection Settings for an already placed Curtain Wall. (To define these values when placing a new Curtain Wall, you will use the Place Curtain Wall dialog box that appears when you start drawing the Curtain Wall. See Create a Curtain Wall.) For a Curtain Wall with a horizontal Reference Line:
Curtain Wall Height Relative Base Height Absolute Base Height Reference Line Offset Slant Angle 1819
For a Curtain Wall with a non-horizontal Reference Line:
Length of extrusion (measured in the plane of the Curtain Wall, in the direction of extrusion) Height of the Curtain Wall's lowest point Offset of Reference Line from lower edge (measured in the plane of the Curtain Wall, in the direction of extrusion
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Offset to Reference Surface Panel

Use these controls (the four editable fields) and consult the image to define the offsets between the Reference Surface and the Boundary, Mullion and Transom Frames the offset (Panel offset) between the Reference Surface and the Base Surface on which the panels are placed The four editable offset values here are interrelated; changing one will change all the rest.
The frame depths of each of the three frame classes are defined on the Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom), and are not editable here.
1820
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Floor Plan and Section Panel
Use these controls to define the appearance of the Curtain Wall: its Floor Plan Display; its Cut Elements (appearance of cut frames and cut panels); and its Outlines. Floor Plan Display Show on Stories: Choose an option to define which stories will display the wall. All Relevant Stories: A multi-story Curtain Wall will be displayed and editable on all stories which it intersects. Multi-story Curtain Walls will be correctly joined with other elements on all stories where the multi-story Curtain Wall is present. Home Story Only: This Curtain Wall will be displayed on its home story only. Floor Plan Display Note: The Symbolic option for Floor Plan Display is recommended for regular, vertical Curtain Walls. For other geometries, the Projected options will work better.
Projected with Overhead: shows cut part of Curtain Wall (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the Curtain Walls overhead part (the part above the Floor Plan Cut Plane), and its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. Projected: shows cut part of Curtain Wall, plus its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. Cut Only: displays only the cut part, as cut by the Floor Plan Cut Plane. 1821
Three additional abstract display options are available: Symbolic: Frame and Panel elements are depicted using symbolic display. Shows cut part of Curtain Wall (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the Curtain Walls uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. In Symbolic mode, Accessories and Junctions are not shown at all on the Floor Plan. In Symbolic mode, only the Frame centerlines are displayed. Symbolic with Overhead: Frame and Panel elements are depicted using symbolic display. Shows cut part of Curtain Wall (i.e., as cut at the level of the Floor Plan Cut Plane), plus the Curtain Walls overhead part (the part above the Floor Plan Cut Plane), and its uncut (downward) part in 3D-like form. In Symbolic with Overhead mode, Accessories and Junctions are not shown at all on the Floor Plan. In Symbolic with Overhead mode, only the Frame centerlines are displayed. Outlines Only: the entire Curtain Walls outline plus Frame centerlines are shown using uncut attributes. Overhead All: the entire Curtain Walls outline plus Frame centerlines are shown using overhead attributes. The Show Projection pop-up contains three options: Entire Element: The Curtain Wall will be displayed on all relevant stories. Note: If you have set the Curtain Walls Floor Plan display to Symbolic, Entire Element is the only available projection option. to Floor Plan Range: Choose to show the Curtain Wall on a range of stories (the current story, plus a given number of stories above and below it). If you choose this option, then you can set the desired range (i.e. the number of stories on which to show this Curtain Wall in either direction) in Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings. to Absolute Display Limit: Set a fixed lower limit (by default, this is Project Zero), then show all parts of the Curtain Wall above this limit. If you choose this option, go to Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings to set the Absolute Display Limit. For details, see Floor Plan Cut Plane Settings Dialog Box. Cut Elements Enable Frame Types Attributes: If you are using a GDL-type frame, checking this box means that the pens defined in the GDL object will be used to display the cut frames of your Curtain Wall. Frame Cut Lines: Click to select a Line Type for the Frames Cut Lines. Frame Cut Line Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Frames Cut Lines Frame Cut Fills: Click to select a Fill Type for the Frames Cut Surfaces Frame Cut Fill Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Fill pattern used on the Frames Cut Surfaces. Frame Cut Fill Background Pens: Click to select a Pen for the background of the Fill used on the Frames Cut Surfaces. 1822
Enable Panel Types Attributes: If you are using a GDL-type panel, checking this box means that the pens defined in the GDL object will be used to display the cut panels in your Curtain Wall. Panel Cut Lines: Click to select a Line Type for the Panels Cut Lines. Panel Cut Line Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Line Type used on the Panels Cut Surfaces. Panel Cut Fills: Click to select a Fill Type for the Panels Cut Surfaces Panel Cut Fill Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Fill pattern used on the Panels Cut Surfaces Panel Cut Fill Background Pens: Click to select a Pen for the background of the Fill used on the Panels Cut Surfaces. Outlines Uncut Lines: Click to select a Line Type for the Uncut Lines of the Curtain Wall. Uncut Line Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Uncut Lines of the Curtain Wall. Overhead Lines: Click to select a Line Type for the Overhead Lines of the Curtain Wall. Overhead Line Pens: Click to select a Pen for the Overhead Lines of the Curtain Wall.
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Model Panel

Undo Connections: Click this to undo connections between this Curtain Wall and any connected walls.
Note: Walls and Curtain Walls are connected if at least one Wall and one Curtain Wall is selected, and you have executed the Design > Curtain Wall > Connect wall command. See Connect Wall to Curtain Wall. If the Curtain Wall is not connected to any Walls, this control is grey.
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Member Placement Panel

Use the controls on this panel to define how to place Junctions on your Curtain Wall, the direction of Mullion Frames, and where the Boundary Frame should be positioned relative to the grid. Note: The Curtain Wall grid is defined as part of the Scheme, on the Scheme page of this dialog box. Place Junctions: Click One by one to place Junctions individually using the Junction tool. (Individual Junctions can be placed in Edit mode only, after you have placed and selected a Curtain Wall.) Click At all Gridpoints to place a Junction at all points of the grid when the Curtain Wall is created, or at all gridpoints of a selected Curtain Wall. Junctions are placed automatically at all gridpoints if: You have chosen All Gridpoints, and A valid Junction object is defined on the Junction page of Curtain Wall Settings.
1823
Boundary Frame position: The Boundary Frame (whose other parameters are set in the Boundary Frame page of this dialog box) are placed along the edge of the grid - that is, along the Curtain Wall boundary. By default, the Boundary Frame is placed so that the frames centerline coincides with the grid line (Center on Grid). To offset the Boundary Frame: Click Inside Grid to place the Boundary Frame so that it is inside the boundary grid line. Click Outside Grid to place the Boundary Frame so that it lines up against the outside of the boundary grid line.
Place Mullion Frames at:

This control lets you define which direction the Mullion Frame will run with reference to the Curtain Wall grid. The Curtain Wall grid has a primary and a secondary gridline direction; you must associate the Mullion frames with one of these directions. Primary Gridlines: The Mullion Frame will be the frame that coincides with the primary grid. Secondary Gridlines: The Mullion Frame will be the frame that coincides with the secondary grid. The Transom frames, then, will be associated with the other gridline direction. The Boundary frame always runs along the Boundary polygons. (The properties of these Frame classes - Boundary, Mullion Transom - are defined on the corresponding pages of Curtain Wall Settings.) Important: The parameters of the Curtain Walls primary and secondary grid are defined by you on the Scheme page of this dialog box. There is no relation between the Curtain Wall grid and ArchiCADs grid system.
Curtain Wall Settings: System Page: Listing and Labeling Panel

Relation to Zones: Click this field to define the relationship of the Curtain Wall to Zones. This field defines whether the new Curtain Wall is a Zone delimiter, an element to subtract from the Zones area or to be ignored when calculating Zones. Zone Boundary: This option means that a Curtain Wall located inside a zone will not be included in the zone area. In every case, including slanted Curtain Walls, the zone boundary is drawn at the base of the Curtain Wall. Multi-story elements in automatic display mode can serve as zone boundaries on any story on which they exist, not just their home story. Reduce Zone Area Only means that the 2D zone will encompass the Curtain Wall, but the Curtain Wall area will not be included in the zone area. (Zone Volume, however, will include the Curtain Wall.) Reduce Zone Volume means that when calculating the zones 3D volume, the volume will not include the volume of any Curtain Wall located inside the zone. No Effect On Zones means that the Curtain Wall has no effect on the zone; the zone area and volume will include the area covered by the Curtain Wall. For more information, see Calculating Zone Area and Zone Volume. See also Relation to Zones. 1824
Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page

The controls in this dialog box define the grid pattern and grid properties. In Curtain Wall System Settings, the Scheme page sets the System-level default settings for Schemes. Scheme Tool Settings contains identical controls. Scheme Tool Settings is available in Curtain Wall Edit mode only. Use the Class pop-up to apply System-level Scheme settings to the selected Curtain Wall. If you customize any parameters in Scheme Tool Settings, the Class pop-up will show Custom.
Curtain Wall Settings: Scheme Page: Grid Pattern and Preview Panel
Use these controls to define the pattern of the Curtain Wall grid, in its primary and secondary directions. This grid will determine the size and arrangement of the Curtain Wall panels. Primary Gridlines: Use these controls to define the grid pattern in the Primary direction. Important: The Primary grid direction of any Curtain Wall is determined when you first create the Curtain Wall: the primary direction will always be perpendicular to the input vector. For example, if you create a Curtain Wall that is extruded from a polyline, the primary grid direction for each Curtain Wall segment is the direction perpendicular to the polyline segment. If you create an arced Curtain Wall, the primary grid direction is the same direction as the Curtain Wall surface created by extruding it from the input arc. Each panel field in the primary direction is given an alphabetical ID (A, B, ...)
1825
Enter a value for the length of the panel field in the primary direction. Notice how the Preview image changes accordingly. To create a new panel field, click the Plus sign next to the Size field. To delete a panel field, select it in the list, then click the black Minus sign.
Total size: This item gives you feedback on the total length of the grid pattern in its primary direction. Secondary Gridlines: Use these controls to define the grid pattern in the Secondary direction. Important: The Secondary grid direction by default is perpendicular to the Primary grid direction (i.e. rotated 90 degrees). However, you can set a rotation angle (20 to 160 degrees) for the Secondary gridlines, relative to the primary gridlines. Rotation: Enter a Rotation value for the Secondary Gridlines relative to the Primary Gridlines. Note: Even if you alter the Rotation angle, this will not be reflected in the Preview window, but it will be applied to the Curtain Wall. Each panel field in the secondary direction is given a numerical ID (1, 2, ...) Enter a value for the length of each panel field in the secondary direction. Notice how the Preview image changes accordingly. To create a new panel field, click the Plus sign next to the Size field. To delete a panel field, select it in the list, then click the black Minus sign. Total size: This item gives you feedback on the total length of the gridline pattern in its secondary direction.
1826
The Preview window gives you a preview of your grid pattern and the alternating panel classes. Use the Preview window to define the panel class associated to each panel in the pattern. Clicking on any panel in the preview window toggles the panel between grey and white. White means the panel will belong to the Main class. Grey means the panel will belong to the Distinct class. The properties of these panel classes (Main, Distinct) are defined in the Panel (Distinct and Main) dialog boxes of Curtain Wall System Settings.
Pattern position
Use this control to determine where the grid/panel pattern (defined above) should begin on the segment(s) of the Curtain Wall. For a Curtain Wall with a plane or cylindrical base surface, the Segment is the first vector or arc you draw when defining the surface. For a Curtain Wall based on an extruded profile, each segment of the polyline is considered separately: the pattern position chosen here will be applied separately to each of the Curtain Wall segments. Choose one of the following Pattern position options. Custom Origin: This option will enable you to graphically move the grid pattern in its primary direction, after you have placed and selected the Curtain Wall. The next four options will lock the origin of the grid pattern to a specific reference point on the Curtain Wall. (Only the Primary grid is locked; the Secondary grid will remain editable.) Start with Segment: The grid pattern will begin at the start of the segment. Start from Center: The grid pattern will begin at the center of the segment, and will be distributed in two directions, on each side of this center. (This option means that the center of the Curtain Wall will always have a gridline running through it.) Align to Center: The center of the grid pattern will be placed at the center of the segment. End with Segment: The grid pattern will begin at the endpoint of the segment.
1827
Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages (Boundary, Mullion, Transom)

Each Frame Class (Boundary, Mullion, Transom) has separate settings. In Curtain Wall System Settings, the Frame pages set the System-level default settings for each Frame class. Click Uniform Frame Classes to apply the settings of the current Frame Page to the other two classes of Frames. Frame Tool Settings contains nearly identical controls. Frame Tool Settings is available in Curtain Wall Edit mode only. Use the Class pop-up to apply System-level Frame settings to the selected Curtain Wall, or to adjust the parameters of Boundary, Mullion or Transom Frames in this Curtain Wall. If you customize any parameters in Frame Tool Settings, the Class pop-up will show Custom.
1828
Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages: Frame Type and Geometry Panel
Choose a Frame Type from the pop-up list. There are two predefined, generic Frame Types in ArchiCAD: Generic frame Butt-Glazed Frame The geometric parameters below vary depending on the Frame type you have chosen.
a: Width of Frame Profile b: Depth of Frame Profile h: Distance between inner edge of Frame Profile and the Base Surface. (Panels are placed on the Base Surface along the Panels centerline.) d: the length of the panels extrusion into the Frame Profile. w: width of the slot where the Panels connect to the Frame Profile.
Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages: Custom Settings Panel

This panel is used if the Frame is a GDL object that uses a custom interface script.
Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages: Model Panel

Apply materials to define the 3D display of this Curtain Wall's frames. If the Frame type is a GDL object, the material defined in the GDL object will be used to display this frame class in your Curtain Wall.
1829
Curtain Wall Settings: Frame Pages: Listing and Labeling Panel

Contains the ID if the Frame available for listing and labeling purposes.
1830
Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Settings (Main, Distinct)

In Curtain Wall System Settings, the Panel pages set the System-level default settings for each Panel class (Main, Distinct). Click Uniform Panel Classes to apply the settings of the current Panel Page to the other Panel class. Panel Tool Settings contains nearly identical controls. Panel Tool Settings is available in Curtain Wall Edit mode only. Use the Class pop-up to apply System-level Panel settings to the selected Curtain Wall, or to adjust the parameters of Distinct or Main panels in this Curtain Wall. If you customize any parameters in Frame Tool Settings, the Class pop-up will show Custom.
Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Pages: Panel Type and Geometry

Choose a Panel Type for this class of panels in your curtain wall: Predefined Generic panel. The Generic Panel will always be centered on the Base Surface: half of its thickness will be outside, and the other half inside. GDL object (e.g. cw panel 13). A Generic Panels the only geometric parameter is the Panel Thickness. A GDL-type Panel has a wide array of parameters which vary depending on the object.
1831
The Panel Thickness parameter, in the parameter list, is the panels overall thickness. A separate Clamping Thickness (the thickness of the part of the panel which is extruded into the Frame Profile) can be set in the separate Panel Thickness field below the parameter window.
Some of the GDL-based panels are designed to behave like doors and windows: for example, the one entitled cw door 2 13. See Place a Door- or Window-Type Panel. The object named cw custom panel 13 is the one you should use if you have saved a handdrawn Custom Component as a CW Panel-type Object.
For a description of this easy way to draw and save custom components as GDL objects for specific purposes, see Custom Components.
Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Pages: Custom Settings Panel

This panel is used if the Panel is a GDL object that uses a custom interface script.
Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Pages: Model

Apply materials to define the 3D display of the Curtain Walls panels belonging to this class. If the Panel type is a GDL object, the material defined in the GDL object will be used to display this panel class in your Curtain Wall.
Curtain Wall Settings: Panel Pages: Listing and Labeling Panel

Contains the ID if the Panel available for listing and labeling purposes.
1832
Curtain Wall Settings: Junctions

In Curtain Wall System Settings, the Junctions page sets the System-level default settings for Junctions. Junction Tool Settings contains identical controls. Junction Tool Settings is available in Curtain Wall Edit mode only. Use the Class pop-up to apply System-level Junction settings. If you customize any parameters in Junction Tool Settings, the Class pop-up will show Custom.
Junction Type Panel

Choose a Junction object from the pop-up. Below you can set parameters which vary depending on the Junction type. A preview helps you visualize the end result. Junctions will be displayed on each model view in accordance with the settings defined in their scripts. Note: Junctions are not displayed at all on the Floor Plan if the Floor Plan Display is set to Symbolic or Symbolic with Overhead. Click the Flip button to move the selected Junction to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall.
1833
Curtain Wall Settings: Accessory Settings

In Curtain Wall System Settings, the Accessory page sets the System-level default settings for Accessories placed on an existing Curtain Wall. Accessory Tool Settings contains identical controls. Accessory Tool Settings is available in Curtain Wall Edit mode only. Use the Class pop-up to apply System-level Accessory settings. If you customize any parameters in Accessory Tool Settings, the Class pop-up will show Custom. Choose an Accessory Type from the pop-up. All Accessories are GDL Objects and will use the display settings defined in their scripts. The parameter set varies depending on the Accessory type you have chosen. A preview helps you visualize the end result. Accessories will be displayed on each model view in accordance with the settings defined in their scripts. Note: Accessories are not displayed at all on the Floor Plan if the Floor Plan Display is set to Symbolic or Symbolic with Overhead. Click the Flip button (Accessory Tool Settings or Info Box) to move the selected Accessory to the opposite side of the Curtain Wall.
1834
Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Floor Plan and 3D Window

For general information, see Create a Single Flat Curtain Wall on the Floor Plan. This dialog box appears during Curtain Wall input in the Floor Plan or 3D Window, after you draw a Reference Line. (It does not appear if you use the Boundary input method.) This dialog box appears as part of the input process only. To later change the height of a placed Curtain Wall, use graphical editing methods in Curtain Wall Edit mode. Use this dialog box to define the total height of the Curtain Wall measured from the Reference Line. Choose one of the three icons, each representing a different method for defining the Curtain Wall height. Enter top and bottom elevation values of the Curtain Wall. From the pop-up, choose one of four Reference Levels for defining both top and bottom elevation values (Current Story (in Floor Plan) To Reference Line (in 3D Window), Project Zero, any other Reference Level.)
Enter the total height of the Curtain Wall measured from top of Curtain Wall. Use the pop-up to define the origin from which to measure the top height value.
1835
Enter the total height of the Curtain Wall measured from bottom of Curtain Wall. Use the pop-up to define the origin from which to measure the bottom height value.
Enter a slant angle for the Curtain Wall: the angle between the input plane and the Base Surface at its inner side. Note: This field is grey for a curved Curtain Wall, which is always vertical. Click OK to close the dialog. The Curtain Wall is placed.
1836
Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box: Section Window

For general information, see Positioning Curtain Wall in Section View. This dialog box appears during Curtain Wall input in the Section, Elevation or Interior Elevation window, after you draw a Reference Line. (It does not appear if you use the Boundary input method.) This dialog box appears as part of the input process only. To later change the height of a placed Curtain Wall, use graphical editing methods in Curtain Wall Edit mode. Use one of the four positioning methods (click one of the four icons) to define Curtain Wall position relative to the Section line. To freely position the beginning of the extrusion by offsetting the starting point from the input plane: choose the first method. The first field is the absolute length of the extrusion; the third field is its offset from the input plane. (The sum of the two values is shown in the middle field.)
To begin extruding the Curtain Wall away from you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the second method and enter the length of extrusion. There is no offset (the Curtain Wall begins right at the input plane). To begin extruding the Curtain Wall toward you, at exactly the input plane (Section line): choose the fourth method and enter the length of extrusion.
1837
To place the midpoint of the extrusion vector at the input plane, choose the third option. Enter the total extrusion length in the first field below.
1838
Object/Lamp Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Object/Lamp tool is used to place and edit general object type library parts into the project.
An object adds a floor plan symbol to the plan, and appears in Sections/Elevations/IEs, the 3D window, 3D Document, and in quantity calculations. There are six panels in the Object and Lamp Settings dialog box: Preview and Positioning, Parameters, Custom Settings, Floor Plan and Section, Model, and Listing and Labeling. See also Object Settings of Library Part Elements. Note: Custom Settings are available only for GDL objects having a user interface script.
Object/Lamp Preview and Positioning Panel

Use the navigation buttons to go the previous and next element in the active library set without having to use the browser area.
Click the black arrow next to the name of the Object to access the Show in library command. Click this to return the browser part of this dialog box (on the left) to a state in which it shows the position of the current object in the library hierarchy. Copy name: The name of the Object is not editable here. However, if you click the Copy name command, you can then paste the object name as a text item.
Use the fields to enter the following values for the Object: Relative Base Height: Enter a value to define the objects base elevation relative to the Current Story or the objects Home Story. Absolute Base Height: Enter a value to define the objects absolute base elevation, measured to Project Zero or to any other custom-defined Reference Level. See also Reference Levels. Dimensions 1 and 2: enter the two orthogonal size values (e.g. length and width) of the object.
1839
Click the chain icon to keep these values proportionally constant. Height: Enter the objects height. Enter a rotation angle for the object, if any. Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates). Check the Mirror Library Part box to mirror the chosen Library Part when placing it, or to mirror a selected object. (View the preview after checking this box to see how the object will be placed.)
On the right-hand side of the panel, the Preview Area displays the 2D symbol, the hidden line front view, the hidden line axonometry, the 3D shaded axonometry, the predefined preview picture or the optional information notes of the selected Object or Lamp. Use the buttons next to the Preview Area to choose a view. Move the cursor inside the Preview Area and the cursor will change to a rotate arrow, allowing you (with successive clicks) to rotate the 2D Symbol or 3D View of your Library Part. Objects can be positioned by their hotspots, defined in the 2D symbol of the Library Part. One Hotspot is initially defined as the primary hotspot. This hotspot is marked with a highlighted rectangle, and it will act as the default insertion point and anchor point for the Object. The other hotspots are displayed as Xs. Click any of them if you wish to use it as an insertion/ anchor point instead of the default primary hotspot. Home Story: Choose a Home Story for the Object: by default, it is the Current Story, but you can click Select Story instead and choose any other Story as the Home Story.
For more information, see Set Home Story. 1840

Object/Lamp Parameters Panel

This panel displays the list of parameters defined in the Library Part.
Click any of the parameters to select it and to modify the value of the variable. Some parameters related to Lamp type Library Parts are unique: Click the icons at the top of the parameter list to turn the Lamp ON or OFF in PhotoRendering.
You can set the light sources color by double-clicking the Color field, and choosing color in the standard Windows or MacOS color editing dialog box. The intensity of the light can be set with the slider. Maximum brightness is at the right end.
Type a number between 0 and 100 to define the light intensity percentage. Note: Whether Lamps will be actually used in PhotoRendering depends on the general setting made in Document > Creative Imaging > PhotoRendering Settings > Effects. For information on using Lamps with the LightWorks photorendering engine, see Expert LightWorks Options.
Object Floor Plan and Section Panel

Use this panel to define the display of the Object in Floor Plan and Section views. Show on Stories: Use this pop-up (where available) to control the stories on which objects will be displayed: on its home story only, or in outline form on other stories as well.
1841
Uniquely among ArchiCAD elements, the Object/Lamp can be set to be shown One Story Up or One Story Down only.
For more information, see Show On Stories. Enable Objects Linetypes Enable Objects Pens Enable Objects Attributes These checkboxes in the Floor Plan Display Panel allow you display the object using the relevant parameters (Linetypes, pens, fills) which have already been defined for the object, and which are listed in objects Parameter list (See the Parameters panel, above.) If no such parameter is defined (for example, if no line type is listed in the objects parameter list), then checking the box will have no effect; the object will be displayed using the attributes defined in the Floor Plan and Section panel. The Custom Settings and Listing and Labeling panels of Objects/Lamps and Stairs are similar to those presented for the Window and Door type elements. Note: Custom Settings are available only for GDL objects having a user interface script. For more information, see Door/Window Tool Settings and Listing and Labeling Panels.
Object/Lamp Model Panel

This panel controls the 3D display of the Object/Lamp and Stair elements. Use the pop-up to select a Material for the Object. Use Objects Materials: Check this to display the object using the materials (if any) defined for the object its Parameter list (See the Parameters panel, above.) Object/Lamp is trimmed by one or more roofs: If this message is activated, it indicates that the currently selected Object (already placed in the plan) was trimmed by a roof using Trim to Roof. In this case, the Undo Roof Trim button is also activated. Click to restore the original height of the selected object. For more information, see Trim Element to Roof. Custom Texture defined in the 3D window: If this message is activated, it means that the currently selected object (already placed in the plan) has been assigned a custom 3D texture. In this case, the Reset Texture button is also activated. Click to restore the origin of the Texture of the selected object. For more information, see Align 3D Texture. 1842
Dimension Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. There are four variations of the Dimension Tool: Linear, Level, Angle and Radial Dimensions. Each has its own dedicated tool in the Toolbox.
Linear Dimension Tool Settings Radial Dimension Tool Settings Angle Dimension Tool Settings Level Dimension Tool Settings Elevation Dimensioning Settings
For more information, see Dimensioning.
1843
Linear Dimension Tool Settings

Dimension Type and Font Panel
Dimension Type: Define the Dimension type you want to use. Click this radio button to select the Linear method for Dimensioning.
Click this radio button to select the Cumulative method for Dimensioning.
Click this radio button to select the Base-line method for Dimensioning.
Click this radio button to select the Elevation Dimensioning.
Elevation Dimensioning includes additional special settings. See specific settings at Elevation Dimensioning Settings. Click here to pop-up an Arrowhead selection palette for the Dimension Line. The last arrowhead type is special, as it results in a double Dimension Line enclosing the values. With this marker, value position settings are not effective.
Enable the Static Dimension checkbox to create static dimensions that are not associated with any of the elements in the Project. Witness Line: Click one of the radio buttons to define the Witness Line type you want to use. Dimension without Witness Lines
Dimension with Witness Lines sized to the Arrowhead Marker height (the witness line length will automatically be fitted to the marker and thus implicitly to the appropriate text size).
Dimension with Custom (extended) Witness Lines (set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel)
1844
Dimension with Dynamic Witness Lines (these adhere to the element being dimensioned, and are set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel).
Arrowhead for Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Arrowhead marker. Hint: For thicker Dimension Arrowheads, use a Pencolor with a heavier Penweight (defined in Options/Pens & Colors). Dimension Line Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension Line. Font Type: Click this pop-up field to select a font for the Dimension Text. To the right, select a Pencolor and Pen weight for the Dimension Text. Font Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Font Size: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Placement of Dimension Text: Click here to place the Dimension Text above the Dimension Line.
Click here to interrupt the dimension line with the dimension text.
Horizontal: Check this box to display dimension text horizontally. (This is the default setting when the 3D Document window is active.) For dimensions whose text is set to Horizontal, the text will remain horizontal with respect to the screen regardless of any rotation of the view. (See Oriented View.) Click here to place the Dimension Text below the Dimension Line.
For more information, see Linear Dimensions.
1845
Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel

This panel is similar to those of the Linear Dimension tool and Angle Dimension tool. For other settings of these tools, see Angle Dimension Tool Settings. Marker Size: Enter the height of the Arrowhead marker here. Dynamic Witness Line Gap: Enter the element-Witness Line gap value here for the Dynamic Witness Line. Custom Witness Line Length: Enter the length of the Custom Witness Line here.
Dimension Details Panel

The Dimension Details panel contains options for the dimensioning of Windows and Doors and composite Walls. Note: These controls are in addition to the options available through the Dimension Marker panel of the Door/Window Settings dialog boxes and works for both smaller and larger sizes for German type reveals. Display the Height of Openings as well: Check this box if you want the dimension marker to display the openings height value along with the width. If you check this box, choose one of the three radio buttons at right to define how to display the Height value: Always with Oversize: Include the openings vertical oversize, if any, in the Height value. Always without Oversize: Do not include any oversize when calculating the displayed Height value. Determined by Width: If the dimensioned Width includes an oversize, show Height with its Oversize. If the dimensioned Width does not include an oversize, do not include any oversize in the displayed Height value. Dimension only the Core Only of Composite and Complex Walls: Check this box to dimension core thickness only for composite and complex (profile) walls.
1846
Elevation Dimensioning Settings

For more information on this function, see Elevation Dimensions. If the Construction Method you have chosen (in the Dimension Type and Font Panel of Linear Dimension Tool Settings) is Elevation Dimensioning, the options change accordingly.
Marker Type: Click the pop-up to choose a Marker/Dimension text arrangement for the Elevation Dimension.
Click one of these icons to choose a direction for the Elevation Dimension Marker.
Click one of these icons to choose proportions for the Elevation Dimension Marker.
Click one of these buttons to choose outline or solid Marker.
Choose a Dimension Origin from the pop-up list. The choices are: Project Zero a Reference Level defined in Options > Project Preferences > Levels and Project North. Current User Origin: this option only appears for selected Elevation Dimension chains and indicates that the User Origin has been changed since the dimension chain was placed and the dimension chain has not been updated. Enable the Static Dimension checkbox to create static dimensions that are not associated with any of the elements in the Project. Witness Line: Define the Witness Line type you want to use. Click this radio button to choose a Dimension without Witness Lines.
1847
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Witness Lines sized to the Arrowhead Marker height (the witness line length will automatically be fitted to the marker and thus implicitly to the appropriate text size).
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Custom (extended) Witness Lines (set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel).
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Dynamic Witness Lines which adhere to the element being dimensioned (set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel).
Marker Pen Pencolor/Penweight of Dimension markers: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension marker. Dimension line Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/ Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension Line. Text Font: Click this pop-up field to select a font for the Dimension Text. Font Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Text Height: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly.
1848
Radial Dimension Tool Settings

The Radial Dimension tool can display the value of the radius of a curved element (Wall, Slab, Roof, Mesh, Fill, Circle, Arc). For more information on this function, see Radial Dimensions.
Radial Dimension Type and Font Panel

Dimension Type: Specify the type of the radial dimension here. Click here for dimensions with centerpoints. When you select this type, and place a radial dimension on the plan, the centerpoint of the arc will automatically be marked by a crosshair.
Click here for dimensions without centerpoints.
Pointer Line & Text: Specify dimension text position for the radial dimension here. Click here for line angle oriented dimension text (continuous with the dimension line).
Click here for horizontally oriented dimension text.
Click here for vertically oriented dimension text.
Enter a value for Marker Size. Click here to display a Pointer Type selection palette for the Dimension Line. The last pointer type is special, as it results in a double Dimension Line enclosing the values. With this marker, value position settings are not effective.
Prefix: Enter an optional prefix for the dimension text here. Arrowhead Marker Pencolor/Penweight: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension marker.
1849
Pencolor/Penweight Dimension line: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension Line. Text Font: Click this pop-up menu to select a font for the Dimension Text. Choose a Pencolor for the Dimension text. Text Script: Click this pop-up menu to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Font Size: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Placement of Dimension Text: Click here to place the Dimension Text above the Dimension Line.
Click here to place the Dimension Text below the Dimension Line.
1850
Angle Dimension Tool Settings

The Angle Dimension tool allows you to place angle values between line and/or linear element edge pairs. Angular dimensions are semi-automatic and fully associative. For more information on this function, see Angle Dimensions.
Angle Dimension Type and Font Panel

Dimension Types: Click here to dimension the acute angle.
Click here to dimension the obtuse angle.
For details on how angle dimensions are calculated, see Angle Dimensions. Number Orientation: Click here to select horizontal dimension text placement method.
Click here to select perpendicular dimension text placement method. The dimensioning value is always placed in a radial direction.
Click here to select parallel dimension text placement method. Dimension text will be parallel to the tangent of the curve next to it.
Witness Line: Define the Witness Line type you want to use. Click this radio button to choose a Dimension without Witness Lines.
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Witness Lines sized to the Arrowhead Marker height (the witness line length will automatically be fitted to the marker and thus implicitly to the appropriate text size).
1851
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Custom (extended) Witness Lines (set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel).
Click this radio button to choose a Dimension with Dynamic Witness Lines which adhere to the element being dimensioned (set in the Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel).
Click here to display an Pointer Type selection palette for the Dimension.
Arrowhead Pen - Pencolor/Penweight of Dimension marker: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension marker. Dimension line Pen: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension Line. Text Font: Click this pop-up field to select a font for the Dimension Text. Text Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Text Height: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Placement of Dimension Text: Click here to place the Dimension Text above the Dimension Line.
Click here to place the Dimension Text below the Dimension Line.
Angle Dimension Marker and Witness Lines Options

This panel is similar to those of the Linear Dimension tool and Angle Dimension tool. For more information, see Dimension Marker and Witness Line Options Panel.
1852
Level Dimension Tool Settings

The Level Dimension tool allows you to create the associative point level elevation markers common to architecture and site planning.
This tool works primarily with slabs and roofs placing standard and associative elevation readings on them. For more information on this function, see Level Dimensions.
Level Dimension Type and Font Panel

Enter a height for the Level Dimension Marker.
Marker Type: Click the pop-up to enter a Marker type for the Level Dimension. Rotation angle: Enter a rotation angle for the Level Dimension Marker. The text will rotate with it, maintaining its original relationship to the marker symbol. Label Frame: Check this box to place a frame around the Level Dimension Text. The frame is automatically sized to fit the text and cannot be independently edited. Static Level: Check this box to create a Level Dimension which is not associated with any of the elements in the Project. Marker Pen: Type a Pencolor/Penweight number (1-255) here for the Dimension marker. Font: Click this pop-up field to select a font for the Dimension Text. Text Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Text Height: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Choose a pencolor and pen weight for the text. [1.25] Click this button to display an indicator (-) only with negative Elevation Dimension values. [+ 1.25] Click this button to display an indicator (- or +) with all Elevation Dimension values. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters.
1853
Dimension Text Settings

The Dimension Text Settings dialog box is available when only a dimension text element is selected. To modify dimension text settings, select a dimension text, then do one of the following: click the Text icon in the Info Box double-click the Dimension Tool icon in the Toolbox click the Edit > Dimension Text Settings command. (This command is only available when a Dimension Text is selected.) The unit and accuracy of the dimension value can be set separately for each type of dimension value (e.g. length, angle, area) at Dimensions Preferences (Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions.)
Dimension Text Content Panel
Measured Value: Click this button to revert to the Dimensions Measured Value (as opposed to a Custom Text). The first text field displays the normal text. The second text field contains superscript, if any. Note: To undo changes of all modified dimension text items at once, open the Options > Project Preferences > Dimensions dialog box and check the Revert All Custom Text to Measured Value checkbox. Enter optional Custom Text, maximum 56 characters, into the corresponding field. You can add an optional superscript, maximum seven characters. Note: Once you enter a Custom text to replace a measured value, the dimension is no longer associative. Add an Autotext by choosing from the pop-up list. Note: The Autotext option is available for level and elevation dimensions only. Autotext means that the Dimension text will display the current value of the chosen Autotext reference: for example, if you choose to 1st Reference Level, the Dimension Text will display the elevation dimension to that level. You can add any custom text to the editable text field below the pop-up. The field below gives you a preview of what you will see on the plan. Choosing the Autotexts in quotation marks (1st Reference Level) will display this text itself, not its value.
1854
Dimension Text Settings Panel
The Settings panel lets you set the font size, style, angle, and orientation of the selected dimension text. Font: Select a font for the Dimension Text. Text Script: Click this pop-up field to select a font encoding for the Dimension Text. Note: Dimension text does not support unicode characters. Text Height: Enter a font size for the Dimension Text here. Note: Fractional sizes are allowed, but may be rounded. Text Rotation Angle: Enter an angle for the text rotation, if any. Enter a rotation angle, if any, for the dimension text. Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates) Text Format: If desired, check the Bold, Italic, or Underline boxes to format the dimension text accordingly. Choose a pencolor and pen weight for the text. Opaque: Check this box to set a background color for your dimension text block and activate the pencolor selection settings at right: open the pop-up menu to choose a color. The pen of this Fill may also be set to 0 (Transparent) or -1 (Window Background). Henceforth your text editor will also have this background color. Frame: Check this box if you want the dimension text block frame to be visible. Checking the box activates the pencolor selection settings at right: open the pop-up palette to choose a color for the frame. To reset the position of a selected, rotated text item, check the Revert to Automatic Position box at the bottom of the dialog box.
1855
Convert Dimensions Dialog Box (Add-On)

Use Document > Document Extras > Secondary Dimensions > Convert Dimensions to open this dialog box. For general information, see Secondary Dimensions (Add-On).
Convert Dimensions
Convert to: Choose the desired dimension unit from the list. Depending on the chosen unit, additional display options for the dimension unit appear below. Choose the desired display option.
Decimals: Enter the number of decimal places to include in each dimension. Hide Zero Wholes: Check this box to suppress whole zero values: Example: 0.25 meters is displayed as 25 25 meters is displayed as 25.00 Hide Zero Decimals: Check this box to hide any zeros at the end of the decimal dimension, regardless of the number of decimal places you set in the Decimals popup above. You cannot use the Hide Zero Decimals options concurrently with Hide Zero Wholes.
Display of Zero Feet & Inches: This section has four pairs of radio buttons. For each pair, choose the option you prefer for displaying dimensions that measure either zero feet or zero inches.
1856
Text Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Text tool offers multiline texts, full-scale font options, multiple styles and justification in any direction.
For details, see Text Blocks.
Text Style Panel

Format settings in this panel are uniformly applied to all text in this placed text block. Font Type: Use the Font pop-up field to choose from available fonts loaded on your computer. Font Script: Use the pop-up field at the right to choose a Font Encoding standard (Font Script in the Info Box) available on your computer (Windows only). For more information, see Note on Font Encoding in ArchiCAD. Font Height: Enter the height of the text line here. The unit of measurement depends upon your Working Units settings, and on the Scalability option (either Fixed or Scaled) set in the Text Block Formatting Panel. Pencolor: Choose a pencolor for the text. Text Format: Check one or more of the following checkboxes to apply formats to all text in the text box. Bold Italic Underline Strikethrough Alignment: Choose either Left, Right, Center or Justify to align the text in the text box. Leading (or Line spacing) is set to 100 percent as a default. Leading is a measure of the vertical space between lines, measured from the baseline of one text line to the baseline of the previous line. To increase or decrease leading, type in any new value, or use the arrows to adjust the value in increments of 25 percent. Width factor: Modify the original text box width by entering a percentage value. The length of your text lines will be adjusted accordingly (i.e., if you increase the text box width factor, the length of your text lines will also increase). Spacing factor: Modify the original text box width by entering a percentage value. The character spacing of your text will be adjusted accordingly (i.e., if you increase the text box spacing scale, the spaces between the characters will also increase).
Note on Font Encoding in ArchiCAD

Text block and label elements in ArchiCAD are now unicode-based. All encoding systems are supported when you print, plot, edit or display Text Blocks or labels, or convert them to DXF/
1857
DWG format. However, even though Texts and Labels support unicode characters, certain other ArchiCAD functions do not: text saved with a GDL object, text operations performed by Add-Ons: Spell Check, Search & Replace, text in listing windows, dimension text, text typed in text fields of dialog boxes or palettes. Because of these limitations, it is wise to select the appropriate font encoding system for your Text Blocks and Labels to ensure accurate display and output in other contexts. (For each language version of ArchiCAD, the default font encoding system is generally the right one.)
Text Block Formatting Panel

Settings in this panel define the overall appearance of the Text Block as a whole:
Text Block Angle: Enter a rotation angle for the Text Block. Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates).
Fixed Angle: To keep the Text Block Angle fixed relative to the screen, even if you rotate the view (see Oriented View), check the Fixed Angle checkbox. To allow the Text Block to rotated along with the view, leave the checkbox empty. Text Wrapping: As its icon suggests, this checkbox locks the width of a placed text block (including those placed as non-breaking text blocks) so that if you add text that would extend beyond the text block margin, it will wrap to the next line. Note: If you leave this box unchecked, the text block size is determined by the length of the text it contains. Anchor Point: Click one of the nine buttons in the Anchor Point icon: this point represents the part of the text block that will be anchored when you click to position the text block. The Anchor Point will remain fixed even if you change the size of the text block (for example, by editing font sizes). A Text Block with a non-fixed angle will rotate along with the oriented view; in this case, the Text Block will rotate around the Anchor Point you set here.
1858
Opaque: Check this box to set a background color for your text block and activate the pencolor selection settings at right: open the pop-up menu to choose a color. The pen of this Fill may also be set to 0 (Transparent) or -1 (Window Background). Henceforth your text editor will also have this background color. Frame: Check this box if you want the text block frame to be visible. Checking the box activates the pencolor selection settings at right: open the pop-up palette to choose a color for the frame. Offset: Enter a value to offset the frame or opaque background from the bounding box of the Text Block. Scalability: Set your text size to either Scaled or Fixed: If you choose Scaled, then text size will be automatically adjusted if you change the scale of the model. In this case, text size is given in model units, just like any other model element in the project. If you choose Fixed, text size will remain constant regardless of changes in the scale of the model. In this case, text size is given in paper units.
1859
Label Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. See also Labels. Double-click the Label tool in the Toolbox or click the Label Settings button in any Tools Listing and Labeling panel to open the Label Settings dialog box.
Labels attached to multi-story elements will be displayed only on the elements home story.
Label Content and Preview Panel

The Content and Preview panel defines the labeling options for elements. A preview is available if you have selected a symbol label. On the left, the element types eligible for labeling are listed. You can set a default labeling format for each element type.
These defaults are applied every time you place an associative label on that element type. See Placing Associative Labels. If you choose Independent Label instead of an element, then the default content chosen here will be used every time you place an independent label.
1860
Select an element type, or choose Independent Label, for which you wish to set the Label style and content. (You can select multiple element types here; this way the same default content will be used for each of these elements.) Choose the Label format from a pop-up list on the right. The options (for labels associated to elements) are: Text:. If you choose this option, ArchiCAD will place the Default Text defined in the Label Text Label Panel. ID: If you choose this option, the Label will contain the ID of the associated element. Changing the ID field of the selected element will update the Label, too. Unique ID:. Each ArchiCAD element has a globally unique, automatically generated ID which is conserved throughout the life of the Project. If you choose this option, the Label will contain this unique ID; however, this unique ID is not accessible or editable by the user. Load Other Label followed by the names of the available Label Symbols in the current Library. With the Load Other Label command, you can use Labels that are not currently loaded. The options for the Independent Label are the same, except that ID and Unique ID are not available. Below the pop-up, the Preview Area shows the Symbol Label you have chosen from the Library. The Preview is available for Symbol Labels only.
Label Text Style Panel

The Text Style panel of the dialog box contains the same controls as described for the Text Tool at Text Style Panel. The Label Tool Text Style panel contains two additional checkboxes: Label Frame: Check or uncheck the checkbox to display your Label text box with or without a frame. Opaque: Check this box if you want a background color for your label that differs from the screens background color. Checking the box activates the pencolor selection settings at right: open the pop-up palette to choose a color.
Label Pointer Panel

This panel concerns the Pointer of the Label. Define a Line type and Pencolor for the Pointer. Choose whether the pointer should have a straight or a curved pointer line. Choose where the pointer line should connect with the label: in the middle, at the top or at the bottom; or at the bottom with the text underlined.
1861
Enter the size of the Arrowhead points (imperial units) or mm (metric units). Choose a pencolor and style for the Arrowhead. Note: Symbol Labels (with options chosen in the Symbol Label panel) can override the color and Arrowhead settings made here. Hide Arrowhead from: Check this box if you wish to hide the Pointers Arrowhead if the window scale exceeds a certain value. Enter this minimum scale value for hiding the arrowhead in the field to the right.
Label Symbol Label Panel

The Symbol Label panel of Label Settings is only active if you have selected a Symbol Label (including Object Label) on the Content and Preview panel. It shows options for the Symbol Labels size and other parameters. Symbol Labels can have any number of parameters listed on the left. Click any of these parameters to select it and to modify the value of variable. Check the box to the right of the selected parameter to switch it on, or leave it empty to switch the parameter off. On the right, enter the width and height of the Label. Enter the Labels placement angle. Use symbol color: Display the Symbol Label using the color defined in its GDL script. (If you prefer to use the color you define in the Label Settings Pointer panel, leave this unchecked.) Use symbol arrow: Display the Symbol Label using the arrowhead style defined in its GDL script. (If you prefer to use the style you define in the Label Settings Pointer panel, leave this unchecked.).
Label Custom Settings Panel

As for all other GDL Object type element, the Custom Settings panel is only active if the chosen Label object contains a user interface script.
Label Text Label Panel

Use the Text Label panel to enter a default text and define the Labels orientation relative to the associated element. This panel is only available if you have chosen a Text-type Label on the Content and Preview panel. If you save any Label settings as a Favorite, the text entered in the Default Text field will be saved as part of the Favorite; this way you can use the favorites to place Labels with predefined texts. Mark one of these buttons to define Label Orientation: Note: This option is available for all types of Labels except Independent. The Parallel method always places the Labels parallel to the labeled elements.
1862
The Vertical method always places the Labels vertically. The text is read from bottom to top.
The Horizontal method always places the Labels horizontally.
The Custom method places the Labels at the angle you define in the edit field next to it. To fix the angle regardless of subsequent rotation of the element, check the Fixed Angle checkbox. If Fixed Angle is checked, you can also check the Optimize Position box. This means that ArchiCAD will reposition the Labels arrow if it ends up in an awkward position after the Label is moved or if the view is rotated. (See also Text in Oriented View.)
1863
Fill Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For details, see Fills.
Fill General Settings Panel

This panel controls the appearance of the Fill in the Floor Plan. These Fill settings will also be used if you draw a Fill in a Section/Elevation/IE or Detail/Worksheet window.
Fill Outline
Push the button if you want your Fill to have an outline.
Choose a Line Type and an outline color from the Line Type and Pen Color pop-up palettes.
Fill Pattern
1) Choose the fill pattern that will be used to display the Fill. The Fills available here are all simple Fill types (composite structures are not available); and all are defined as Drafting fills. (set in Options > Element Attributes > Fill Types). 2) Choose a color for the Fill pattern.
3) Choose a color for the Fill background.
For the fill background, you can also choose the transparent option or the Window Background color (located at the end of the Pen Color palette).
Note: The fill background color you may be overridden by project-wide settings for Model View Options, using the options in the Model View Options Override Fill Display panel. 1864
Show Area Text

The Show Area Text checkbox allows you to show an associative area text with the Fill. If this box is checked, you will place (as part of the fill drafting process) a dimension-text element displaying the Fills area on the plan. Note: To format Area Text, use the Dimension Text Settings dialog box.
Construction Method
Click one of the radio buttons to set the orientation of the fills vectorial hatching (if any). Note: Vectorial hatching is displayed only if you have switched to in View > On-Screen View Options > Vectorial Hatching. If you choose Project Origin, the pattern will start at the Origin and the part of the pattern that falls within the Fills boundary will be displayed.
1865
If you choose Fill Origin, then after you draw the fill polygon, the fill handle icon appears. Use this to draw the desired fill orientation vector. Then click to place the vectorial fill.
If you choose Use Distorted Fill, the fill will include two fill handles that can be manipulated to achieve a distorted effect to simulate the real geometric situation of the fill components. For more information, see Set Orientation of Vectorial Hatching. A fourth option is the Radial Distorted Fill construction method, with which you can graphically adjust the vectors radial distortion. This is available only for a selected symbol Fill and only if: the symbol fill was used as a skin of a composite structure; and
1866
the skins Fill Orientation was defined as Fit to Skin in the Composite Structures Dialog Box; and you have selected this symbol fill after exploding a curved composite wall. See Explode into Current View. Note: The use of many radial distorted fills in your project may decrease project performance. Here is a curved composite wall with a symbol fill (orientation: Fit to Skin) as one of the skins, after the composite wall has been exploded. Each fill can now be selected separately. The symbol fill displays a fill handle and the Distorted Radial Fill construction method is available. Adjust the fill handle to adjust the fills distortion or the patterns origin as needed.
Fill Advanced Settings Panel

See also Fill Category: Advanced Settings for a Drafting Fill. Choose a Fill Category for the selected fill. Drafting Fill: By default, all Fills drawn with the Fill tool are in the Drafting Fill Category. You might prefer to designate the hand-drawn Fill as a Cover or a Cut fill: Cover Fill: The Cover Fill category is assigned to the fills of Slabs, Roofs, and Meshes on the floor plan. Cover fills can be optionally placed onto their own layer during DXF/DWG conversion functions. Cut Fill: The Cut Fill category is assigned to the fills of the Cut Surface of the Elements. Cut fills can be optionally placed onto their own layer during DXF/DWG conversion functions.
1867
Fill Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels. For Fills only some additional controls are also available: Check the Subtract from Zones checkbox to subtract default or selected Fill elements from the Zones. Type a number (1-100) in the percentage field to define the percentage of the Fill elements area that you want to subtract from the Zones in percentage.
1868
Line Tool Settings

Note: Many of the controls described here are identical to those of the Info Boxes and Settings Dialog boxes of the Arc/Circle, Polyline, and Spline Tools. Lines are the simplest drafting element in ArchiCAD.
For details, see Lines. For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Uniform Settings for Line Tools checkbox allows you to apply the settings made in this dialog box to all line-type tools: Line, Arc/Circle, Spline, Polyline.
Line General Settings Panel

The General Settings panel is similar to those of the Line, Arc/Circle, Polyline and Spline tools. Select a Line type from the pop-up selection palette. Type a Pen number (1-255) for the Line. Click the color for a Pencolor selection palette for the Line. Check the Zone Boundary box to allow lines to delimit Zones when using the Automatic Recognition Methods of the Zone tool. Use the Arrowhead icons to choose a Line with no arrowheads, or a Line with an arrowhead at start, at end or at both ends. Enter a height value for the Arrowhead marker. Type a Pen number (1-255) for the Arrowhead marker. Click for a Pencolor selection palette for the Arrowhead marker. Click the Arrowhead pop-up icon for selection of marker types. The last arrowhead type is special, as it doubles the line with arrows at both ends. Using a line like this, the cursor will snap to the invisible axis line between the two visible lines. If you begin to draft an open element with Arrowheads and decide to close it either while drafting or later, the Arrowheads will simply disappear. If you later convert a closed element to an open one, for example a Circle to an Arc, you can select it, open the settings dialog box and add Arrowheads to it.
Line Advanced Settings Panel

The Advanced Settings panel is identical to those of the Line, Arc/Circle, Polyline and Spline tools. Use this panel to assign a category to a selected line. You can then use line categories to fine-tune display options and export settings for lines depending on their category. ArchiCAD has three line categories:
1869
Drafting line: Simple 2D drafting line. Lines drawn with the Line tool will be in this category by default. Cut line: Contour line of a 3D element on a cutting plane. Note: You can choose to display Cut lines in boldface: In View > On-Screen View Options enable the Bold Cut Lines option. Skin Separator Line: Separator line between skins of composite structures, including walls, columns, slabs and roofs. Line categories can be useful if, for example, you have exploded a composite wall into its constituent lines and fills. By default, in the Line Tools Advanced Settings Panel, all the contour lines are put into the Cut line category, while all the skin separator lines are put into the Skin Separator category. All other lines are placed into the Drafting category by default. However, if you draw lines by hand into a Detail/Worksheet, Patch, or Section/Elevation/IE Window, you can assign categories to these lines according to their function in the plan. This way, when assigning a display option, even hand-drawn lines can be considered Cut lines or Skin Separator lines. Assigning line categories can also be useful if you save your file in DXF/DWG format: the Translation Setup dialog box allows you to define a separate layer onto which Skin Separator lines can be exported.
1870
Arc/Circle Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Arc/Circle tool is used to draw any circular or elliptic element needed in your design.
For more information, see Drawing Circular Arcs and Full Circles. The Geometry methods are: Centerpoint, Three Points, Tangent Point for circles, Diagonal, Semi-Diagonal and Ellipse Radii for ellipses.
Arc/Circle General Settings Panel

The General Settings panel is similar to those of the Line, Arc/Circle, Polyline and Spline tools. See description at Line General Settings Panel. For Arc/Circles only: Circles and Ellipses are closed elements with no starting point or endpoint to receive an Arrowhead, and therefore do not support them.
Arc/Circle Advanced Settings Panel

See description at Line Advanced Settings Panel.
1871
Polyline Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Polyline tool creates a single element by drawing a series of segments.
Geometry methods are: Polyline, Rectangle and Rotated Rectangle. For more information on Polylines, see Drawing Polylines and Chained Lines.
Polyline General Settings Panel

The General Settings panel is similar to those of the Line, Arc/Circle, Polyline and Spline tools. See description at Line General Settings Panel.
Polyline Advanced Settings Panel

1872
Drawing Settings
For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Drawing Tool allows you to control and manage drawings placed into the project. Drawings can be placed either into Model views (except 3D or Schedule views) or onto Layouts.
Drawings in Model Views Drawings in the Layout Book

Double-clicking the Drawing tool opens the Drawing Settings dialog box, which contains four panels: Identification, Properties, Frame, and Title. At the bottom of the dialog box, as for all tools, the current layer choice is displayed in a pop-up menu.
Drawing Identification Panel

Drawing ID: Assign an ID to the placed drawing. Note: For a Drawing placed in a model view, this field is empty. By Layout: If you choose this option, the Drawings ID depends on the Layout Settings of the Layout on which the Drawing is placed. In Layout Settings, consult the IDs of Drawings on this Layout tab page. By View ID: The Drawing ID will be equivalent to the ID of its source View, if any. Custom: Enter a custom Drawing ID in the text field to the right. Include Drawing in ID sequence: Check this box to include your drawing in the ID sequence, even if it is a custom ID. Drawing Name: Choose a method for assigning a Name to this Drawing. If the source of the placed drawing is an ArchiCAD view, the following choices are available: By View: Name only By View: ID + Name Custom If the source of the placed Drawing is an external file, the following choices are available: By Source file Custom Source File: This field displays the file path of the placed Drawing, if it is an externally linked file. Click the folder icon to choose to display the file path as absolute or relative.
If the Drawing source is a view placed from the current ArchiCAD project, the source file is shown as Internal.
1873
ArchiCAD view: This field appears if the Drawing source is an ArchiCAD view (internal or external), and it displays the views file path. Page No.: This field appears if the Drawing source is a multi-page document (e.g. a PDF file), and it displays the page number used for the placed Drawing. Update Type: Choose a radio button to determine the update method for this Drawing. Auto: This means that the drawing placed on the layout will be updated automatically when the layout is activated. If a drawing comes from a different source than the currently opened project file, then ArchiCAD will check whether it requires updating or not. Manual: This means that the drawing is frozen in the state its source view or file was in when placed on the layout. This can be useful if you wish to keep the drawings untouched until they are approved or you are ready to move on to the next stage in your work. To update the drawing or modify its source, use the Drawing Manager Palette. The Last Updated and Update Status fields provide feedback on the current update status of this drawing. For more information, see Managing and Updating Placed Drawings. Store Drawing in the Project File: This box is checked by default. If it is not checked, then the Drawings external source files (if any) must be made available if you open the project in a different location.
Drawing Properties Panel

The first four fields - Width, Height, Magnification, and Drawing Scale - are interrelated (as indicated by the lock icon). A change in any of the fields will result in corresponding changes in the other three fields, so that the drawings proportions remain fixed. Use these fields to set the size of the placed Drawing in either measurement units or as a percent of its original size (the Magnification). Note: If desired, you can use one of two automatic Magnification options: Fit to Layout, or (if the Drawing is placed in a grid) Fit to Grid Cell.
Drawing Scale: By default, this field indicates the scale of the drawing as defined in its ArchiCAD source view. Note: For Drawings placed on Model Views, and for placed Images and PDF documents, no scale is shown. Instead, the drawings Resolution (in dpi) is indicated. If you want to rescale the Drawing on the Layout (instead of using the original scale of the source view), choose a predefined scale factor from the Drawing Scale pop-up, or enter any other custom scale. (The Width/Height/Magnification values will change to reflect the new Drawing scale.) Note: If your source drawing size, as defined in Master Layout Settings, is larger than the paper size you choose here, ArchiCAD will automatically resize the drawings output size to make it fit on the page. 1874
Customizing the Drawing scale has no effect on the scale of objects within the drawing; it is equivalent to a graphical resizing of the Drawing, like the effect of magnifying a document with a copy machine. Your customized Drawing Scale is distinct from its Original Scale. Separate Autotext entries and Title parameters are available for Drawing Scale and Original Scale: if you place an Autotext for Drawing Scale on a Layout or Master Layout, the Drawing Scales of every Drawing on that Layout are displayed. See Autotext. Original Scale: This field provides feedback on the scale of the drawings source view. Anchor Point: The Anchor point is used as the point by which the drawing is placed onto the layout (the Anchor is the point at which the cursor is attached to the drawing as you maneuver it into place on the Layout).This same Anchor Point will serve as the drawings fixed point in case its elements are modified (e.g. stretched) in its source view. You have two ways of defining the Drawings anchor point. Select one or the other: Use Drawings internal origin as anchor: Check this box to use the Drawings origin as an anchor point after placing it. Anchor Point: Click one of the nine points to use as an anchor point.
Angle: Enter a rotation angle in degrees for the Drawing position, if desired. For Drawings placed on the Floor Plan, Detail, Worksheet, or in a 3D Document, the Angle field includes an additional control:
Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates).
Pen Set
In Drawing Default Settings, you can define the assignment of pen sets to newly placed Drawings: By View: the placed Drawing uses the pen set assigned to the Drawings source view. (Pen sets can be assigned to a view in View Settings.) If the Pen Set of the source project changes, the drawing's pen set will change accordingly after an update. In Drawing Selection Settings, the placed Drawing will use the By View pen set - that of its source view - by default.
1875
By Source File: if the placed drawings source is an external vectorial file, this source files pen set is used by default. To assign another pen set to a placed drawing or as the default pen set for newly placed drawings, click the Pen Set drop-down menu and choose a different pen set.
To see the pens used by the Drawings source view, click the View Drawings own Pen Set button.
You can edit the pen set here, if desired. After editing, click the Add to Projects Pen Sets button. Click Store Drawings Pen Set as to save the edited Pen Set under a new name among the projects pen sets. Click Overwrite following Pen Set, then choose a Pen Set to overwrite and replace among the projects pen sets.
1876
Colors
By default, the Drawing will display the colors as defined in the pen set you have chosen. However, a further override options is available: instead of the chosen pen sets colors, use Greyscale or Black & White as a uniform color setting, for this drawing only. Note: When printing a layout, you have the option to choose black and white output regardless of the color setting in Drawing Settings, by activating the Black and White checkbox in Print Layout Settings. See Print Layout. Transparent Background: Check this box to ensure that the Drawing is displayed with a transparent background.
On-Screen Preview
Choose a format for the on-screen display of this Drawing on the Layout. With large projects, your choice here can affect project rebuild speed: With large Layout Books, your choice here can affect navigation speed significantly: Full Precision (drawing shown with full details, always rebuilt) Quick Preview (faster navigation; Drawing rebuilt only upon explicit Rebuild of the Layout, or when a Drawing update occurs) No Preview (fastest navigation). If you choose Quick Preview, the text Quick Preview will be displayed. The drawing content is an accurate vectorial preview, but you may lose certain details: certain dashed line types and fills will be shown as solid. If you choose No Preview, the Drawing frame will be shown with the text No Preview in place of the Drawing content. (You may prefer this option to reduce redraw time if you are working on a Layout with multiple drawings, and you do not need to see this Drawings content as you work.). This preview display option is an on-screen effect only and does not affect output.
Drawing Frame Panel

Frames behavior: These radio buttons indicate the status of the drawing frame. By default, the frame fits the placed drawing. However, you can select any edge of the drawing and use the usual pet palette editing commands to modify the frame into any shape. In this case, the Manually resized frame button is activated. To reset the frame to fit the drawing, click Fit Frame to Drawing. Split Drawing among Multiple Layouts: This checkbox is active and applicable only if the selected Drawing is created from a Schedule or Index view. If this box is checked, such Drawings will be split into multiple Layouts, if the contents cannot be fit onto a single Layout page. See Split Schedule into Multiple Layouts. Add Printable Border: Check this box to add a printable border for your drawing. Use the controls below to choose a line type and pen color for this border.
1877
Border Offset: Enter an offset value for the printable border. Note: This control is active only if you check the Add Printable Border checkbox.
Drawing Title Panel

See also Drawing Titles. Note: Drawing Titles can be applied only to Drawings which are placed on Layouts. Drawings in Model Views do not have Drawing Titles. Choose a predefined drawing title type from the pop-up list. Note: You can also create a custom Title Type. (See Create a New Title Type.) For the graphical (non-text) elements of the drawing title, choose a pen color. For the text of the drawing title, choose a font style, font size, pen color and font encoding (script) style. Note: You can further customize pens and formats in the Titles Parameter window in the lower part of this panel. Flip Title: Check this box to flip (mirror) the title graphically. Uniform Symbol Pens: Check this box to ensure that all graphic (non-text) elements of the title will uniformly show the color as set in the pencolor control of the panel (regardless of any other pens chosen in the titles Parameter list window.) Uniform Text Format: Check this box to ensure that all text elements in the title will uniformly follow the text format as set in the text formatting buttons (Bold, Italic, Underline) of this panel. If you check this box, title text will follow this format regardless of any other text formats set up in the titles Parameter list window. Titles Preview Area: The window at right shows a symbolic preview of the Title in one of two formats. Click one of the two buttons to display a preview: Show Preview of the Titles position to the Drawing: Click the upper button (Layout icon) to display a preview of the Titles position relative to the Drawing.
Show Preview of the Title: Click the lower icon (with a T) to display a preview of the Title only. Back Reference: Click this button to access the Back Reference dialog box. If the current drawing is based on a source marker, then this dialog box will list any Layout whose Drawing displays the source marker of the current drawing. (Or which would display the source marker if the Drawing Frame hadnt been manually altered.). First check the Enable Back Reference box, then choose one or more of the Layouts whose ID you wish to display. (Check Select All available if you want the Drawing Title to display the IDs of all Layouts listed here.) Click OK to close the dialog box and return to Drawing Settings.
1878
The Drawing Title Preview shows an Autotext in the place where the Drawing Title will contain the Layout ID information. Note: The Back Reference feature works only with Drawing Titles whose parameter for Show Back References is set to On. Parameter list window: Lists the parameters of the drawing title (such as position, width and height of the drawing title, and its textual content, such as Name, ID and Scale.). Click on any parameter to modify it according to your preference. Position: Use this parameter to assign the Titles position as relative to either the Layout or to the Drawing, then set the Titles side and alignment. Rotation: If the Title position is set to Layout, you can turn the Rotate with Position on or off. If it is on, the Title will be rotated along with the Layout, keeping its original position relative to the Layout. If the Title position is set to Drawing, you have three Rotation options: - Rotate with position: if this is on, the Title will be rotated along with Drawing, keeping its original position relative to the Drawing. - Rotate with drawing: if this is on (and the Rotate with position is Off), the Title will be rotated with the Drawing, but you can set a custom angle for the Title. If both parameters are turned off, the Title will not rotate at all if you rotate the Drawing. For more information, see Drawings in Model Views.
1879
Section Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For more information, see Sections.
Section General Panel

Reference ID: An ID is assigned by default; you can change it by typing any other value into the field. This field can contain up to 256 characters; the ID will serves to identify the Section in the project window and in the Navigator. The Name field can contain up to 256 characters. This name appears in the Navigator palette and the title bar of the Section window. Note: If you place a Linked or Independent marker that does not generate a viewpoint, the ID/ Name fields are grey.
To Place a New Section Marker (Section Default Settings)

Use the next pop-ups to define what you want to create with the Section tool: If you choose Create New Section Viewpoint: its Marker Reference can contain either the Section viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Navigator Project Map; or the first placed drawing of the Section viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Layout Book hierarchy If you choose Place Linked Marker: its Marker Reference can contain information from of any of the following: a selected viewpoint a selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint the first placed drawing of the selected view If you choose Place Unlinked Marker: the Marker Reference will not contain any linked information; you can define a custom text (First Text Row/Second Text Row parameters) in the Marker Panel below. Reference to: shows the path (location in the Navigator hierarchy) of the chosen reference item.
To Redefine a Placed Section Marker (when a placed Section line or Marker is selected):
The pop-up fields give you feedback on the current status of the selected Marker (either Source Marker, Linked Marker, or Unlinked Marker). Use the pop-ups to change the status as needed.
1880
To redefine the Marker Reference: Choose from among the pop-up choices, or click the Browse button to select the viewpoint/view/drawing whose Navigator path you wish to display in the Marker. The available choices vary depending on the Marker status (Source Marker, Linked Marker or Unlinked Marker). For an Unlinked Marker, you can define a custom text (First Text Row/Second Text Row parameters) in the Marker Panel below.
Section Status (for Source Section markers only)

Choose an option to define the status of the link between the Section and the Floor Plan. Auto-rebuild Model: A Section with Auto-rebuild status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen if the Floor Plan has changed. Manual-rebuild Model: A Section with Manual-rebuild status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the View > Refresh > Rebuild from Model command. Drawing: In a Section of Drawing status, the elements will be exploded into 2D drawing elements which are not linked to the Floor Plan and will not be automatically rebuilt from the model. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model.
Show on Stories (for Source Section markers only)

This pop-up list allows you to choose the stories on which to display the section marker and lines. If you have selected the Infinite radio button under Vertical Range, choose either All stories or Home story only. Note: The Home Story is the story onto which you place the Section. If you have selected the Limited radio button under Vertical Range and entered height values, two additional options are active. Entirely in Range: The section marker and line will appear on all stories that are entirely in the vertical range defined in the height value fields. At Least Partly in Range: The section marker and line will appear on all stories that are at least partly included in the vertical range defined in the height value fields.
Horizontal Range (for Source Section markers only)

The horizontal range defines the depth of the Floor Plan section that will be included in the Section window. Choose a radio button to define the horizontal range: Infinite: All elements behind the Section Line will be shown in the Section window, provided that they are not hidden by other elements. Limited: Only the elements between the Section Line and the limit line will be shown in the Section window. (The limit line is defined when you click with the Eyeball cursor after you finish drawing the Section line.) Note: The limit line is a display-only Marker item, and is not shown on the Layout. See Display of Marker Range Lines. Zero Depth: Only elements actually cut by the Section Line will be shown. 1881
Vertical Range (for Source Section markers only)

The vertical range defines the height of the Floor Plan section that will be included in the Section window. Infinite: The Section will include the entire height of the project. Limited: The Section is confined to a limited vertical range. If you click this button, enter elevation values for the upper and lower limits of the Section. (Click the black arrow to choose the reference for the elevation values: to Home Story, or to Project Zero.) Elements above and below these limits will not appear in the Section window.
Section Marker Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the appearance of the Section line, Section marker and its components. Select a Line Type and Penweight/Pencolors for the Section Line and ID. Note: The Section Depth (limit) line (which is defined when you create a Section of Limited Horizontal range) is an on-screen-only Marker Range item, whose line type and color are set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Continuous: Choose this option for a continuous section line. Segmented: Choose this option if you want to display only certain parts of the Section Line. Use the checkboxes at right to define which segments to display: - first segment - internal segments at breaks - last segment Length: For a segmented Section Line, enter a value to control how much of each segment to display at the points where the segments meet, as well as at the beginning and end of the Section Line. Choose if you want to place the Marker Head in the Middle or at the Ends of the section marker. Use the checkmarks to enable or disable the Markers at either or both ends of the Section Line.
Note that if both Markers are disabled, you cannot disable all of the segments. Select Marker Type pop-up: Select a parametric marker from this list. The chosen markers 2D Symbol appears in the preview window. 1882
Marker format: Choose a pencolor, penweight, font, font encoding, text size, height, and text style to format the marker. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use Pencolor used when the element's 2D symbol was created. The parameters of the corresponding GDL Object appear in the parameter list fields. Note: Many parameters in this list, such as the options for First Text Row and Second Text Row, can also be set using a graphical interface in the Section Marker Head panel; the settings are identical.
Section Marker Head Panel

Choose from the available Marker Heads for the parametric, GDL Object type markers. These options vary depending on the Markers loaded in your library. Fill type: If you choose a Marker Head that includes a fill, this control is active. Choose the desired fill type for the Marker Head. Pen: Choose a pen for the Marker Text. First Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers first row of text. The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel. For example, if you chose Marker Reference to: first placed drawing, then the First Text Row will show Referred Drawing, and the Drawing ID checkbox below is active. Refer to the preview window of the Marker Panel to see how your choices affect the Marker. Second Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers second row of text. The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel.
Section Model Display Panel

This panel is available for defining only those Sections based on a Source marker. See Create a Section Viewpoint. Use these controls to define how to display the contents of the Section Viewpoint.
CUT ELEMENTS
Cut elements are those cut by the Section plane. Uniform Pen for Cut Elements: Check this box to use a single set of pens for all the cut elements in this section. (If you dont check this box, cut elements in section will use the pen settings of the individual elements). Then define the pen using the following controls: Cut Line Pen Cut Fill Pen Cut Fill Background Pen These settings apply to all the cut elements in this section.
1883
UNCUT ELEMENTS
Choose attributes for uncut elements displayed in this Section. Uncut elements are those which appear in the Section window but are not cut by the Section plane. Fill Uncut Surfaces with: Use this control to define the fill of uncut surfaces displayed in this Section. Applying a fill means that you will be able to quick-select these surfaces in the Section.
Uniform Pencolor: Choose a pencolor to apply to the fills of all uncut surfaces in this Section To display Material colors in Section view (on uncut parts of the Section only), choose one of the two following options: Elements Own Material Colors (Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this Section using the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. Elements Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this Section using the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface. Nothing (no color applied to uncut surfaces) Note: Using the Fill Uncut Surface option may increase rebuild time for large models. If this is a problem, choose Nothing. Uniform Pen for Uncut Elements: Check this box to use a single pencolor for all uncut elements in this Section. The color chooser control below is then activated; choose the desired color. This color will also be used for fill contours. If you leave the box unchecked, then uncut elements will be displayed with their original pens. Vectorial 3D Hatching: Check this box to activate vectorial 3D hatch patterns in this Section. Transparency: Check this box to give see-through Materials (e.g. glass) a transparent effect in this Section.
1884
SUN AND SHADOWS

Viewpoint Sun Settings: Choose one of two sun positions relative to the Section Line: As in 3D Window: Use this option to inherit the sun position set up in the 3D Projection or 3D Perspective Settings dialog box. See also 3D Window. Custom: Use the Sun Azimuth/Sun Altitude controls below to define a custom sun position for this Section by typing the desired values into the corresponding field. Note: These custom values will apply to this Section only and are calculated differently from the values set in the 3D Projection/Perspective Settings dialog box. The Azimuth value is an angle value in degrees. The line that is at a right angle to the Section line represents zero degrees. As I increase the azimuth by increasing this angle value, the sun moves toward the right - meaning the shadows start to lengthen to the left of the shadowcasting surfaces. If you do not want the visible side of the building to be overshadowed, you should use an Azimuth value between -90 and +90 degrees. Note: The sun position can be defined individually for every Section viewpoint. Vectorial Sun Shadow: Check this box to activate Vectorial Sun Shadow. Controls defining the Vectorial Sun Shadow become accessible.
Shadows work independently of vectorial 3D Hatching patterns. Shadow Polygons: This control is available if you have activated the Vectorial Sun Shadow checkbox. In Section views, shadows have no contours; however, the fill polygons are freely customizable. Choose the Fill type, Fill pen and Fill background pen using the corresponding pop-up palettes. Note: You cannot choose a custom fill for the shadow if your uncut surface fills are set to use Own Material Colors - Shaded.
1885
MARKED DISTANT AREA

Check this box to divide the view displayed in the Section Window into a closer and farther area. If you check the box, use the appearing controls to define a unique set of colors, fills and effects for the Distant Area to indicate that they are at a longer distance from the Section Line.
Note: You can set separate Sun Shadow Polygons for the Marked Distant Area. (The Suns Azimuth and Altitude settings are the same as those set up in the Sun and Shadows panel.) When choosing the Fill Uncut Surfaces with option for the Marked Distant Area, your available choices might be limited depending on what you chose above in the Uncut Elements section: if you set the Uncut Elements to Own Material Colors - Shaded, then the nonShaded option is not available for the Distant Area, either. The limit where close ends and distant begins depends on how you created the Section. For a Section with an Infinite horizontal range, the secondary distant line is displayed at the place where you clicked with the Eyeball cursor when defining the Section line and orientation. For a Section with Limited horizontal range, the secondary distant line will be placed by default halfway between the Section line and the limit line (Zero Depth sections cannot include a distant area.) The secondary distant line, like the Section limit line, is an on-screen-only element. You can change its line type/color in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
BOUNDARY CONTOURS
See also Boundary Contours for an illustration of this feature.
Boundary Display: Choose one of these options to display, override or hide the contours of elements at the boundary of this section. Uncut Contours: Boundary Contours will be displayed using the Uncut pen chosen for these elements in their own Settings dialog boxes. No Contours: Boundary Contours are hidden. Override Contours: Choose a custom Line Type and Pen with which to display the Boundary Contours.
1886
Section Story Levels Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the display of Story Level lines and Story Handle Markers on this Section. Show Story Levels: This pop-up list allows you to choose how to display story lines on this section. Display only: Story lines will appear only on-screen, but will not be displayed in the output. Display and Output: Story lines will appear both on screen and on the printed output. None: Story lines will not be displayed on this Section. For more information, see Story Level Lines. Choose a line type and pencolor for the story level lines. Markers & Story Level Lines: The left and right check boxes determine whether to display the left and right Story Markers.
The center checkbox determines whether to display the Story Level Line itself. Note: You cannot uncheck this box if the Offset values of the Story Handle Markers are both set to zero. Use the Design > Edit Story Levels command to adjust story levels in this Section window. Offset to Section Boundary: Enter a value for the offset of the Story Level line beyond the limits of the Section (defined by the Section Line drawn on the Floor Plan). Story Marker pop-up: Choose the default Marker or another loaded Marker object. Choose a font type, encoding, font size and marker size for the components (text and symbol) of the chosen Story Marker. Set a text style (Bold, Italic, Underline) as necessary. View the Marker appearance in the Preview window. Use Symbol Colors: Story Markers are parametric GDL Objects. Their parameters can be adjusted in the parameter window in this panel. The list includes separate parameters for the color of the Text font and for the contour line of the Story Marker. (These are the Symbol Colors.) By default, the Use Symbol Colors box is checked in the Story Levels Panel of Section Settings. However, you can override these parameters by uncloaking the box, then set a separate uniform color for the Story Markers in this Section:
If the object definition contains a script, the Story Handle Custom Settings panel is activated.
1887
Section Story Handle Marker Custom Settings Panel

This panel is active if the Story Level Marker type (selected in the Story Levels Panel) contains a relevant GDL script.
Section Grid Tool Panel

Use this panel to determine which Grid elements should be visible on the Section. (These controls are identical in the Grid Tool Panels of Elevation, and Interior Elevation Settings.) Show Grid Elements: Check this if you would like to see the Grid Elements on the selected Section. Next, there are two sets of filtering criteria for display of Grid elements on this Section: You can filter the Grid elements by Story, and/or you can filter them by Name. For both filtering criteria, the default choice is All. To narrow the displayed Grid elements: Show Grid Elements by Stories: Click Selected to narrow the set of displayed Grid elements by Story: click Select stories to choose the stories whose Grid elements you want to display. (If a Grid element is visible on the selected stories, then it will be visible on this Section as well.) Show Grid Elements by Name: Click Selected to narrow the set of displayed Grid elements by Name: click Select elements to select individual elements. Note: These two filtering criteria are related as an AND statement: if you set filters both by Story and by Name, then the Section will display only those Grid elements which fit the both the Story criteria AND the Name criteria. You can dimension the Grid elements on this Section using one or both of two different dimension types: Dimension lines: Check this to place a dimension between each grid line on this Section. Enter the vertical location of this dimension chain and set the reference level. Total Dimension: Check this to place a dimension line between the two grid lines on the far left and far right end of this Section. Enter the vertical location of this dimension chain and set the reference level. These dimension lines will use the default dimension settings. When a new Grid line is inserted on the Floor Plan and it appears on the Section, then it will be included in the dimension chain. Auto-stagger Grid Markers if they overlap: Check this to automatically stagger Grid markers sideways to avoid overlapping, if the markers would otherwise overlap. Show non-perpendicular Grid Elements: By default, the Section will display only those Grid elements that are perpendicular to the Section line and are located within the Section's depth. (This means that, by default, no Grid elements that are curved on the Floor Plan will be displayed on a Section.) Check this to show Grid elements which are not perpendicular to the Section line, but which intersect the Section on the Floor Plan. These Grid lines, including curved Grid lines, will appear on this Section at the intersection point with the Section line.
1888
Elevation Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For details, see Elevations.
Elevation General Panel

Reference ID: An ID is assigned by default; you can change it by typing any other value into the field. This field can contain up to 256 characters; the ID will serves to identify the Elevation in the project window and in the Navigator. The Name field can contain up to 256 characters. This name appears in the Navigator palette and the title bar of the Elevation window. Note: If you place a Linked or Independent marker that does not generate a viewpoint, the ID/ Name fields are grey.
To Place a New Elevation Marker (Elevation Default Settings)

Use the next pop-ups to define what you want to create with the Elevation tool: If you choose Create New Elevation Viewpoint: its Marker Reference can contain either the Elevation viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Navigator Project Map; or the first placed drawing of the Elevation viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Layout Book hierarchy If you choose Place Linked Marker: its Marker Reference can contain information from of any of the following: a selected viewpoint a selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint the first placed drawing of the selected view If you choose Place Unlinked Marker: the Marker Reference will not contain any linked information; you can define custom text in the Marker Panel below. Reference to: shows the path (location in the Navigator hierarchy) of the chosen reference item.
To Redefine a Placed Elevation Marker (when a placed Elevation line or Marker is selected)
The pop-up fields give you feedback on the current status of the selected Marker (either Source Marker, Linked Marker, or Unlinked Marker). Use the pop-ups to change the status as needed.
1889
To redefine the Marker Reference: Choose from among the pop-up choices, or click the Browse button to select the viewpoint/view/drawing whose Navigator path you wish to display in the Marker. The available choices vary depending on the Marker status (Source Marker, Linked Marker or Unlinked Marker). For an Unlinked Marker, enter custom text in the Marker Panel below.
Elevation Status (for Source Elevation markers only)

Choose an option to define the status of the link between the Interior Elevation and the Floor Plan. Auto-rebuild Model: An Elevation with Auto-rebuild status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen if the Floor Plan has changed. Manual-rebuild Model: An Elevation with Manual-rebuild status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the Rebuild Elevations/Rebuild from Model command of the View menu. Drawing: In an Elevation of Drawing status, elements will be exploded into 2D drawing elements which are not linked to the Floor Plan and will not be automatically rebuilt from the model. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model.
Show on Stories (for Source Elevation markers only)

This pop-up list allows you to choose the stories on which to display the Elevation marker and lines. If you have selected the Infinite radio button under Vertical Range, choose either All stories or Home story only. Note: The Home Story is the story onto which you place the Elevation. If you have selected the Limited radio button under Vertical Range and entered height values, two additional options are active. Entirely in Range: The Elevation marker and line will appear on all stories that are entirely in the vertical range defined in the height value fields. At Least Partly in Range: The Elevation marker and line will appear on all stories that are at least partly included in the vertical range defined in the height value fields.
Horizontal Range (for Source Elevation markers only)

The horizontal range defines the depth of the Floor Plan Elevation that will be included in the Elevation window. Choose a radio button to define the horizontal range: Infinite: All elements behind the Elevation Line will be shown in the Elevation window, provided that they are not hidden by other elements. Limited: Only the elements between the Elevation Line and the limit line will be shown in the Elevation window. (The limit (depth) line is defined when you click with the Eyeball cursor after you finish drawing the Elevation line.) See Display of Marker Range Lines.
1890
Vertical Range (for Source Elevation markers only)

The vertical range defines the height of the Floor Plan Elevation that will be included in the Elevation window. Infinite: The Elevation will include the entire height of the project. Limited: The Elevation is confined to a limited vertical range. If you click this button, enter elevation values for the upper and lower limits of the Elevation. (Click the black arrow to choose the reference for the elevation values: to Home Story, or to Project Zero.) Elements above and below these limits will not appear in the Elevation window.
Elevation Marker Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the appearance of the Elevation line, Elevation marker and its components. Select a Line Type and Penweight/Pencolors for the Elevation Line and ID. Note: The Elevation Limit line (which is defined when you create a Elevation of Limited Horizontal range) is an on-screen-only Marker Range item, whose line type and color are set in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options. Length: For a segmented Elevation Line, enter a value to control how much of each segment to display at the points where the segments meet, as well as at the beginning and end of the Elevation Line. Use the checkmarks to enable or disable the Markers at either or both ends of the Elevation Line.
Select Marker Type pop-up: Select a parametric marker from this list. The chosen markers 2D Symbol appears in the preview window. Marker format: Choose a pencolor, penweight, font, font encoding, text size, height, and text style to format the marker. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use Pencolor used when the elements 2D symbol was created. The parameters of the corresponding GDL Object appear in the parameter list fields. Note: Many parameters in this list - such as First Text Row, Second Text Row - can also be set using a graphical interface in the Elevation Marker Head panel; the settings are identical.
Elevation Marker Head Panel

Choose from the available Marker Heads for the parametric, GDL Object type markers. These options vary depending on the Markers loaded in your library. Fill type: If you choose a Marker Head that includes a fill, this control is active. Choose the desired fill type for the Marker Head. Pen: Choose a pen for the Marker Text. First Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers first row of text. The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel.
1891
For example, if you chose Marker Reference to: first placed drawing, then the First Text Row will show Referred Drawing, and the Drawing ID checkbox below is active. Refer to the preview window of the Marker Panel to see how your choices affect the Marker. Second Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers second row of text. The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel.
Elevation Model Display Panel (for Source Elevation markers only)

Use these controls to define how to display the contents of the Elevation Viewpoint. CUT ELEMENTS Uniform Pen for Cut Elements: Check this box to use a single set of pens for all the cut elements in this Elevation. (If you dont check this box, cut elements in Elevation will use the pen settings of the individual elements). Then define the pen using the following controls: Cut Line Pen Cut Fill Pen Cut Fill Background Pen These settings apply to all the cut elements in this Elevation. UNCUT ELEMENTS Choose pen attributes for uncut elements displayed in this Elevation. Fill Uncut Surfaces with: Use this control to define the fill of uncut surfaces displayed in this Elevation. Applying a fill means that you will be able to quick-select these surfaces in the Elevation. You have four options:
Uniform Pencolor: Choose a pencolor to apply to the fills of all uncut surfaces in this Elevation. To display Material colors in Elevation view (on uncut parts of the Elevation only), choose one of the two following options: Elements Own Material Colors (Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this Elevation using the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. Elements Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this Elevation using the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface. Nothing (no color applied to uncut surfaces) Note: Using the Fill Uncut Surface option may increase rebuild time for large models. If this is a problem, choose Nothing. 1892
Uniform Pen for Uncut Elements: Check this box to use a single pencolor for all uncut elements in this Elevation. The color chooser control below is then activated; choose the desired color. This color will also be used for fill contours. If you leave the box unchecked, then uncut elements will be displayed with their original pens. Vectorial 3D Hatching: Check this box to activate vectorial 3D hatch patterns in this Elevation. See the following figures for differences between Elevation views with and without vectorial 3D hatches. Transparency: Check this box to give see-through Materials (e.g. glass) a transparent effect in this Elevation. SUN AND SHADOWS Viewpoint Sun Settings: Choose one of two sun positions relative to the Elevation Line: As in 3D Window: Use this option to inherit the sun position set up in the 3D Projection or 3D Perspective Settings dialog box. See also 3D Window. Custom: Use the Sun Azimuth/Sun Altitude controls below to define a custom sun position for this Elevation by typing the desired values into the corresponding field. Note: These custom values will apply to this Elevation only and are calculated differently from the values set in the 3D Projection/Perspective Settings dialog box. The Azimuth value is an angle value in degrees. The line that is at a right angle to the Elevation line represents zero degrees. As I increase the azimuth by increasing this angle value, the sun moves toward the right - meaning the shadows start to lengthen to the left of the shadow-casting surfaces. If you do not want the visible side of the building to be overshadowed, you should use an Azimuth value between -90 and +90 degrees. Note: The sun position can be defined individually for every Elevation viewpoint. Vectorial Sun Shadows: Check this box to activate the controls related to Vectorial Sun Shadows. Shadows work independently of vectorial 3D Hatching patterns. Shadow Polygons: In Elevation views, shadows have no contours; however, the fill polygons are freely customizable. Choose the fill type, Fill pen and Fill background pen using the corresponding pop-up palettes. Note: You cannot choose a custom fill as a shadow if your uncut surface fills are set to use Own Material Colors - Shaded. MARKED DISTANT AREA: Check this box to divide the view displayed in the Elevation Window into a closer and farther area. If you check the box, use the appearing controls to define a unique set of colors, fills and effects for the Distant Area to indicate that they are at a longer distance from the Elevation Line. Note: You can set separate Sun Shadow Polygons for the Marked Distant Area. (The Suns Azimuth and Altitude settings are the same as those set up in the Sun and Shadows panel.) When choosing the Fill Uncut Surfaces with option for the Marked Distant Area, your available choices might be limited depending on what you chose above in the Uncut Elements
1893
section: if you set the Uncut Elements to Own Material Colors - Shaded, then the nonShaded option is not available for the Distant Area, either. The limit where close ends and distant begins depends on how you created the Elevation. For a Elevation with an Infinite horizontal range, the secondary distant line is displayed at the place where you clicked with the Eyeball cursor when defining the Elevation line and orientation. For a Elevation with Limited horizontal range, the secondary distant line will be placed by default halfway between the Elevation line and the limit line The secondary distant line, like the Elevation limit line, is an on-screen-only element. You can change its line type/color in Options > Work Environment > On-Screen Options.
Elevation Story Levels Panel (for Source markers only)

Use the controls in this panel to define the display of Story Level lines and Story Handle Markers on this Elevation. Show Story Levels: This pop-up list allows you to choose how to display story lines on this Elevation. Display only: Story lines will appear only on-screen, but will not be displayed in the output. Display and Output: Story lines will appear both on screen and on the printed output. None: Story lines will not be displayed on this Elevation. For information on Story Level Lines, see Story Level Lines. Choose a line type and pencolor for the story level lines. Markers & Story Level Lines: The left and right check boxes determine whether to display the left and right Story Markers. The center checkbox determines whether to display the Story Level Line itself. Note: You cannot uncheck this box if the Offset values of the Story Handle Markers are both set to zero. Use the Design > Edit Story Levels command to adjust story levels in this window. Offset to Elevation Boundary: Enter a value for the offset of the Story Level line beyond the limits of the Elevation (defined by the Elevation Line drawn on the Floor Plan). Story Marker pop-up: Choose the default Marker or another loaded Marker object. Choose a font type, encoding, font size and marker size for the components (text and symbol) of the chosen Story Marker. Set a text style (Bold, Italic, Underline) as necessary. Use Symbol Colors: Story Markers are parametric GDL Objects. Their parameters can be adjusted in the parameter window in this panel. The list includes separate parameters for the color of the Text font and for the contour line of the Story Marker. (These are the Symbol Colors.) By default, the Use Symbol Colors box is checked in the Story Levels Panel of Elevation Settings. However, you can override these parameters by unchecking the box, then set a separate uniform color for the Story Markers in this Elevation. If the object definition contains a script, the Story Handle Custom Settings panel is activated.
1894
Elevation Story Handle Marker Custom Settings Panel

Elevation Grid Tool Panel

See Section Grid Tool Panel.
1895
Interior Elevation (IE) Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For details, see Interior Elevations (IE).
Interior Elevation General Panel

Settings in this panel depend on whether the selected Interior Elevation (IE) is the whole IE Group, or one of its viewpoints. If nothing is selected, the default settings are those of an IE Group.
For an IE Group:
Reference ID: Enter any customized ID, if desired, or click the Autotext button to choose an Autotext reference as part of the ID. Name: Enter any customized Name, if desired, or click the Autotext button to choose an Autotext reference as part of the Name.
For an individual IE viewpoint:
Reference ID/Name: To inherit the ID or Name defined in the parent IE Groups settings, leave the pop-up on By IE Group. Any Autotext defined in the parent IE Groups ID/Name settings will be interpreted individually for each viewpoint in the group. To enter any other ID/Name for this viewpoint, switch the pop-up to Custom and enter the desired text. Marker Reference to: Choose an item whose information you want to display in the IE marker: the Interior Elevation viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Navigator Project Map; or the first placed drawing of the Interior Elevation viewpoint, identifying it by its location in the Layout Book hierarchy Reference to: shows the path (location in the Navigator hierarchy) of the chosen reference item. To redefine the Marker Reference: Choose from among the pop-up choices (either viewpoint or first placed drawing of the viewpoint).
1896
Interior Elevation Status

Choose an option to define the status of the link between the Elevation and the Floor Plan. Auto-rebuild Model: An Interior Elevation with Auto-rebuild status will be automatically rebuilt every time it is opened or brought to the front of the screen if the Floor Plan has changed. Manual-rebuild Model: An Interior Elevation with Manual-rebuild status is not rebuilt automatically. It can be rebuilt from the model only by using the Rebuild Elevations/Rebuild from Model command of the View menu. Drawing: In an Interior Elevation of Drawing status, elements will be exploded into 2D drawing elements which are not linked to the Floor Plan and will not be automatically rebuilt from the model. You can, however, update the drawing to reflect recent changes made to the model.
Show on Stories
This pop-up list allows you to choose the stories on which to display the Interior Elevation markers and lines. If you have selected the Infinite radio button under Vertical Range, choose either All stories or Home story only. Note: The Home Story is the story onto which you place the Interior Elevation. If you have selected the Limited radio button under Vertical Range and entered height values, two additional options are active. Entirely in Range: The Elevation marker and line will appear on all stories that are entirely in the vertical range defined in the height value fields. At Least Partly in Range: The Elevation marker and line will appear on all stories that are at least partly included in the vertical range defined in the height value fields.
Vertical Range
The vertical range defines the height of the Floor Plan Elevation that will be included in the Interior Elevation window. Infinite: The Elevation will include the entire height of the project. Limited: The Elevation is confined to a limited vertical range. If you click this button, enter elevation values for the upper and lower limits of the Interior Elevation. Elements above and below these limits will not appear in the Interior Elevation.
Use the pop-up to define whether this vertical range should be measured from Project Zero, or from the Interior Elevations Home Story (the story onto which it was placed).
1897
Detect and Fit to Zones: The Interior Elevation will use the Zone height (if it detects any zones in the Interior Elevation limit) as the IE viewpoints vertical range. If you want this zone calculation to take any Solid Operations into account, you should also check the Consider Solid Operations box.
Interior Elevation Marker Panel

Marker Placement: Use this control if you are creating a Group of IE viewpoints. Choose one of these options: Individually for Each Viewpoint: You will place as many markers as viewpoints you are creating in the Group. One common Marker for the IE Group: You will place a single marker for the entire group of viewpoints. Select Marker Type pop-up: Select a parametric marker from this list. The chosen markers 2D Symbol appears in the preview window. Marker format: Choose a pencolor, penweight, font, text size, height, and text style to format the marker. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use Pencolor used when the element's 2D symbol was created. The parameters of the corresponding GDL Object appear in the parameter list fields. Use the parameter fields to define custom text for Drawing ID and Layout Number, if you wish. Note: Many parameters in this list can also be set using a graphical interface in the Marker Head panel; the settings are identical.
Interior Elevation Marker Head Panel

Choose from the available Marker Heads for the parametric, GDL Object type markers. These options vary depending on the Markers loaded in your library. Note: In Interior Elevation Selection Settings, this panel is only available if the Marker Placement option (in the Marker panel of this Settings dialog box) was set to Individually for each Viewpoint when the Interior Elevation viewpoint was created. Otherwise, this panel is grey. Fill type: If you choose a Marker Head that includes a fill, this control is active. Choose the desired fill type for the Marker Head. Pen: Choose a pen for the Marker Text. First Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers first row of text (or Inner Text, if you have chosen a single IE marker). The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel. For example, if you chose Marker Reference to: first placed drawing, then the First Text Row will show Referred Drawing, and the Drawing ID checkbox below is active. Refer to the preview window of the Marker Panel to see how your choices affect the Marker. Second Text Row: Use these controls to define the Markers second row of text (or Outer Text, if you have chosen a single IE marker). The options available depend on the type of marker reference you defined in the General Panel. 1898
Interior Elevation Model Display Panel

Use these controls to define how to display the contents of the Elevation Viewpoint. CUT ELEMENTS Uniform Pen for Cut Elements: Check this box to use a single set of pens for all the cut elements in this Elevation. (If you dont check this box, cut elements in Elevation will use the pen settings of the individual elements). Then define the pen using the following controls: Cut Line Pen Cut Fill Pen Cut Fill Background Pen These settings apply to all the cut elements in this Elevation. Hide Cut Elements: Check this box if you do not want elements that are cut by the Interior Elevation Line to be displayed in your Interior Elevation viewpoint. If you check this box, the Cut Fill and Cut Line options below will not be available. UNCUT ELEMENTS Choose pen attributes for uncut elements displayed in this IE. Fill Uncut Surfaces with: Use this control to define the fill of uncut surfaces displayed in this Elevation. Applying a fill means that you will be able to quick-select these surfaces in the IE.
Uniform Pencolor: Choose a pencolor to apply to the fills of all uncut surfaces in this IE. To display Material colors in Interior Elevation view (on uncut parts of the IE only), choose one of the two following options: Elements Own Material Colors (Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this IE using the elements own material colors. The display colors will reflect shading effects. Elements Own Material Colors (Non-Shaded): Choose this option to display uncut fills in this IE using the elements own material colors. The display colors will not reflect any shading effects; each material color will be uniform over the whole surface. Nothing (no color applied to uncut surfaces) Note: Using the Fill Uncut Surface option may increase rebuild time for large models. If this is a problem, choose Nothing. Uniform Pen for Uncut Elements: Check this box to use a single pencolor for all uncut elements in this IE. The color chooser control below is then activated; choose the desired color. This color will also be used for fill contours. If you leave the box unchecked, then uncut elements will be displayed with their original pens. Vectorial 3D Hatching: Check this box to activate vectorial 3D hatch patterns in this Interior Elevation.
1899
Transparency: Check this box to give see-through Materials (e.g. glass) a transparent effect in this Interior Elevation. Exclude View Blocking Walls: Check this box if you do not want intervening walls to be displayed in your Interior Elevation viewpoint. SUN AND SHADOWS Viewpoint Sun Settings: Choose one of two sun positions relative to the Elevation Line: As in 3D Window: Use this option to inherit the sun position set up in the 3D Projection or 3D Perspective Settings dialog box. See also 3D Window. Custom: Use the Sun Azimuth/Sun Altitude controls below to define a custom sun position for this Elevation by typing the desired value into the corresponding field. Azimuth values are limited so that the sun is always behind the Elevation line. Otherwise the visible side of the building would be overshadowed. Note: The sun position can be activated individually for every Elevation window. Vectorial Sun Shadows: Check this box to activate the controls related to Vectorial Sun Shadows. Shadows work independently of vectorial 3D Hatching patterns. Shadow Polygons: In Interior Elevations, shadows have no contours; however, the fill polygons are freely customizable. Choose the fill type, Fill pen and Fill background pen using the corresponding pop-up palettes. Note: You cannot choose a custom fill as a shadow if your uncut surface fills are set to use Own Material Colors.
Interior Elevation Story Levels Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the display of Story Level lines and Story Handle Markers on this Elevation. Show Story Levels: This pop-up list allows you to choose how to display story lines on this Elevation. Display only: Story lines will appear only on-screen, but will not be displayed in the output. Display and Output: Story lines will appear both on screen and on the printed output. None: Story lines will not be displayed on this Elevation. For information on Story Level Lines, see Story Level Lines. Choose a line type and pencolor for the story level lines. Markers & Story Level Lines: The left and right check boxes determine whether to display the left and right Story Markers. The center checkbox determines whether to display the Story Level Line itself. Note: You cannot uncheck this box if the Offset values of the Story Handle Markers are both set to zero. Use the Design > Edit Story Levels command to adjust story levels in this window. Offset to IE Boundary: Enter a value for the offset of the Story Level line beyond the limits of the IE (defined by the Interior Elevation Line drawn on the Floor Plan).
1900
Story Marker pop-up: Choose the default Marker or another loaded Marker object. Choose a font type, encoding, font size and marker size for the components (text and symbol) of the chosen Story Marker. Story Markers are parametric GDL Objects. Their parameters can be adjusted in the parameter window in this panel. If the object definition contains a script, the Story Handle Custom Settings panel is activated.
Interior Elevation Story Handle Marker Custom Settings Panel

Interior Elevation Grid Tool Panel

See Section Grid Tool Panel.
1901
Worksheet Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For details, see Worksheets.
Worksheet General Panel

Reference ID: This editable field contains the ID of the generated Worksheet viewpoint. The ID serves to identify the Worksheet in the project window and in the Navigator. Name: Enter a Name for the Worksheet Drawing if desired. This name appears in the Navigator palette and the title bar of the Worksheet window. Note: If you place a Linked or Independent marker that does not generate a viewpoint, the ID/ Name fields are grey. Use the next pop-ups to either place a new Worksheet Marker (Worksheet Default Settings) or redefine the selected Worksheet Marker:
To Place a New Worksheet Marker (Worksheet Default Settings)

If you choose Create New Worksheet Viewpoint: select one of the items about which the Worksheet Marker should display information: the Worksheet viewpoint or the first placed drawing of the Worksheet viewpoint If you choose Place Linked Marker: select one of the items about which the Worksheet Marker should display information: a selected viewpoint a selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint the first placed drawing of the selected view If you choose Place Unlinked Marker: the Worksheet Marker will not contain any linked information; you can define a custom Drawing ID/Layout ID in the Marker Panel below. Reference to: shows the path (location in the Navigator hierarchy) of the chosen reference item. Copy construction elements only: If this box is checked, only 2D lines/fills and construction elements from the model view will be exploded and copied into the Worksheet viewpoint (without dimensions/annotations). For information on annotation elements cut by the Worksheet boundary, see Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary.
1902
To Redefine a Placed Worksheet Marker (when a placed Section line or Marker is selected)
The pop-up fields give you feedback on the current status of the selected Marker (either Source Marker, Linked Marker, or Unlinked Marker). Use the pop-ups to change the status as needed. To redefine the Marker information: Choose from among the pop-up choices, or click the Browse button to select the viewpoint/view/drawing whose information you wish to display in the Marker. The available choices vary depending on the Marker status (Source Marker, Linked Marker or Unlinked Marker). For an Unlinked Marker, enter a custom text in the Marker Panel below.
Worksheet Marker Panel

Select Marker Type pop-up: Select a parametric Worksheet marker from this list. The chosen markers 2D Symbol and the parameters of the corresponding GDL Object appear in the preview and list fields respectively. The marker may include custom settings, as seen in the next panel. Marker formatting: Choose a pencolor, penweight, font, font encoding, text size, height, and text style to format the marker. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use Pencolor used when the element's 2D symbol was created. Marker Angle: Use these radio buttons to set the desired Marker angle: either horizontal (default), or custom (enter the desired placement angle.) On the right, a preview area shows you how the Marker will look when placed. Worksheet Markers are parametric GDL Objects. If you have chosen a Marker in the pop-up on top of the panel, the relevant editable parameters will be listed in the parameter window.
Worksheet Marker Head/Marker Styles Panel

Use these controls further specify the appearance and content of the Parametric Marker object (chosen in Marker panel above). Available options depend on the Marker object. Note that changes made to the Marker information (First Text Row /Second Text Row) are previewed in the Marker panel above.
1903
Detail Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For more information on this tool, see Details.
Detail General Panel

Reference ID: This editable field contains the ID of the generated Detail viewpoint. The ID serves to identify the Detail in the project window and in the Navigator. Name: Enter a Name for the Detail Drawing if desired. This name appears in the Navigator palette and the title bar of the Detail window. Note: If you place a Linked or Independent marker that does not generate a viewpoint, the ID/ Name fields are grey. Use the next pop-ups to either place a new Detail Marker (Detail Default Settings) or redefine the selected Detail Marker:
To Place a New Detail Marker (Detail Default Settings)

If you choose Create New Detail Viewpoint: select one of the items about which the Detail Marker should display information: the Detail viewpoint or the first placed drawing of the Detail viewpoint If you choose Place Linked Marker: select one of the items about which the Detail Marker should display information: a selected viewpoint a selected drawing the first placed drawing of the selected viewpoint the first placed drawing of the selected view If you choose Place Unlinked Marker: the Detail Marker will not contain any linked information; you can define a custom text in the Marker Panel below. Reference to: shows the path (location in the Navigator hierarchy) of the chosen reference item. Copy construction elements only: If this box is checked, only 2D lines/fills and construction elements from the model view will be exploded and copied into the Detail viewpoint (without dimensions/annotations). For information on annotation elements cut by the Detail boundary, see Annotations, Dimensions and Markers Cut by the Boundary.
1904
To Redefine a Placed Detail Marker (when a placed Section line or Marker is selected)
The pop-up fields give you feedback on the current status of the selected Marker (either Source Marker, Linked Marker, or Unlinked Marker). Use the pop-ups to change the status as needed. To redefine the Marker information: Choose from among the pop-up choices, or click the Browse button to select the viewpoint/view/drawing whose information you wish to display in the Marker. The available choices vary depending on the Marker status (Source Marker, Linked Marker or Unlinked Marker). For an Unlinked Marker, enter a custom text in the Marker Panel below.
Detail Marker Panel

Select Marker Type pop-up: Select a parametric detail marker from this list. The chosen markers 2D Symbol and the parameters of the corresponding GDL Object appear in the preview and list fields respectively. The marker may include custom settings, as seen in the next panel. Marker formatting: Choose a pencolor, penweight, font, font encoding, text size, height, and text style to format the marker. Use Symbol Colors: Check this box to ignore Pencolor setting above and use Pencolor used when the element's 2D symbol was created. Marker Angle: Use these radio buttons to set the desired Marker angle: either horizontal (default), or custom (enter the desired placement angle.) On the right, a preview area shows you how the Marker will look when placed. Detail Markers are parametric GDL Objects. If you have chosen a Marker in the pop-up on top of the panel, the relevant editable parameters will be listed in the parameter window. The Marker Head panel contains controls for the Detail Markers 2D Symbol.
Detail Marker Head/Marker Styles Panel

Use these controls further specify the appearance and content of the Parametric Marker object (chosen in Marker panel above). Available options depend on the Marker object. Note that changes made to the Marker information (First Text Row/Second Text Row) are previewed in the Marker panel above.
1905
Grid Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For general information on the Grid tool function, see The Grid Tool.
Grid Tool Floor Plan Panel

Use the controls in this panel to define the Floor Plan attributes of the grid element. Grid Line: Select the desired representation of the grid line. It can be Hidden, Segmented or Full. If you select Segmented, enter Segment Length in the field to the right. Select a Line Type and pen color for this Grid Element. Show on Story: From the dropdown list, select where you would like to see the Grid Element. Current Story Only: The roof will be shown only on the current story. One Story Up and/or Down: The Grid element will be shown on the current story, plus one story up and/or down. All Stories: The Grid element will be shown on every story of the project. Custom: Choose this option if you wish to set any other combination of stories. The Selected Stories dialog box appears.
(Once you set these Custom Settings, use the Edit Custom option to edit them.) Markers: Select either, both or none of the two checkboxes to indicate the display of markers on either end of the Grid line. Staggering: When you stagger grid markers sideways, a given grid line segment will be staggered together with the markers. Set the default value of this staggering length here.
Grid Tool Section/Elevation Panel

This description applies to the display of Grid elements in both Section and Elevation windows. Use the controls in this panel to define the Section attributes of the Grid element. General/Custom: Use this pop-up to apply either the General settings to the selected Grid element, or to set Custom settings for the selected Grid element in this Section only. Every Grid element has one General section settings and any number of Custom Section settings.
1906
A Grid element using General section settings will be displayed identically in every Section that it appears in. Custom settings for selected Grid elements are available only if you open Grid Element Settings from a Section window. Custom settings for a Grid element are applied only in the current Section window. Thus, the same Grid element can be displayed in different ways, depending on which Section it is in. If you apply Custom settings to a Grid element in one Section, then when opening the same Grid element in another Section, it will be displayed using its original settings, because Custom settings apply to a given Grid element only in a single Section window. However, you can use the Copy from... command to copy those Custom attributes from the other Section, and use them for the Grid element in the current Section, too.
Grid Line: Select the desired representation of the grid line. It can be Hidden, Segmented or Full. If you select Segmented, enter Segment Length in the field to the right. Select a Line Type and pen color for this Grid Element. Markers: Select either, both or none of the two checkboxes to indicate the display of markers on either end of the Grid line. In the two fields to the right, enter the height level of each Grid line marker as displayed in Sections, and choose a reference level (default: Project Zero) for measuring this height level. Staggering: When you stagger grid markers sideways, a given grid line segment will be staggered together with the markers. Set the default value of this staggering length here.
Grid Tool Naming Rules Panel

Use this panel to define the logic by which each placed Grid element is named. Generate names automatically: Select this option to auto increase the name every time you place a Grid element. Start at: This field shows the next name value to be assigned to the next placed Grid element. Prefix: a static text displayed in front of each auto generated name. Suffix: a static text displayed following each auto generated text Style: Choose a style for the auto generated Grid element names: either numbers (1,2,3,...), letters (A,B,C,... or a,b,c,... ), or Roman numbers (I,II,III,IV,...) A preview of the next name value to be assigned to the next placed Grid element is visible in the field next to Custom.
1907
Custom: Click this button to override the auto generated name and to assign any other name to the Grid element.
Grid Tool Marker Panel

Use this panel to define the appearance of the Grid elements markers. Font Type: Use the Font pop-up field to choose from available fonts loaded on your computer. Font Script: Use the pop-up field below to choose a Font Encoding standard (Font Script in the Info Box) available on your computer (Windows only). For more information, see Note on Font Encoding in ArchiCAD. Font Size: Enter the height of the marker text. The unit of measurement depends upon your working units (Options > Project Preferences > Working Units). Marker Size: Enter the height of the marker here Text Format: Check one or more of the following checkboxes to apply formats to marker text. Bold Italic Underline In the parameter window, set the following parameters for the Marker object: Marker Pen and Text Pen: Click this item, then click the black arrow to pop-up the pen selection palette. Select the desired pen colors for the marker element and for its text. Marker Shape: Click this item, the click the black arrow to pop-up a list of available marker shapes. Choose one. Connect Grid Line to: Click this item, the click the black arrow to pop-up a list of available choices of where to connect the grid line to the marker. (Not available for circular marker shape).
Grid Tool 3D View Panel

Use this panel to control whether and how the Grid Element appears in the 3D window. 3D Documents created from a 3D window showing Grid elements will also display Grid elements. Display in 3D view: Check this box to display the Grid element in the 3D window. If this box is not checked, all other controls in this panel are greyed. Vertical position: Enter the vertical position of the Grid Element in 3D. Click the black pop-up arrow to choose a reference level from which to measure its vertical position. Show as line: Check this box to display Grid elements as line only in the 3D window. If you check this option, Grid elements will not be visible in renderings, and the rest of the Grid line controls in this panel are greyed. Unchecking this option means that Grid lines will be displayed in 3D with materials and a physical cross-section, and will be displayed in renderings. Grid Line Material: Set the material of the Grid line's body. Grid Line cross-section: Select between circular and rectangular cross sections and set their size Marker Text Material: Set the marker text's material Text Follows View: Check this box to rotate the marker texts to always face the viewpoint. Note: This option is effective only in perspective views.
1908
Wall End Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. For more information, see Wall Ends. The Wall End tool is used for placing wall end items onto walls by clicking one end of a wall.
The Wall End Settings Dialog Box is analogous to the Object Settings dialogs. For more information, see Object Settings of Library Part Elements.
Wall End Preview Panel

On the right-hand side of the panel, the Preview Area displays the 2D symbol, the hidden line front view, the hidden line axonometry, the 3D shaded axonometry, the predefined preview picture or the optional information notes of the selected Wall End, depending on the button you switch ON.
Wall End Parameters Panel

In the Parameters panel, you can adjust the size, thickness, and (where applicable) fills and colors of the wall end. The Fit to wall height checkbox is checked by default. If you uncheck it, you can use the settings below to enter any value for the height of the wall end and for the distance of the wall end from the base of the wall. The Cut Depth parameter tells you how much of the wall, in the Floor Plan view, is cut by the wall end.
Wall End Thickness Panel

Where applicable, the Thickness panel contains a preview to assist in setting the wall ends thickness. Depending on its type, a Wall End can be set to automatically inherit the walls skin fills, or you can custom-set the Wall End fills instead. For wall end objects with turning skins, you can set which wall fills should turn together with the wall end. As with other objects, you can also set many of these parameters in the Info Box or by using the wall ends editing hotspots.
Wall End Listing and Labeling Panel

See Listing and Labeling Panels.
1909
Spline Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. Geometry methods are: Natural Splines, Bzier Splines and Free-hand.
For more information, see Drawing Splines.
Spline General Settings Panel

The General Settings panel is similar to those of the Line, Arc/Circle, Polyline and Spline tools. See description at Line General Settings Panel. For Splines only, use the two pairs of control buttons to define the type of spline: either a natural Spline or a Bzier curve. either an open-ended or a closed spline.
Spline Advanced Settings Panel

1910
Hotspot Tool Settings

Hotspots are drafting aids to mark important nodes anywhere on screen.
To add Hotspots to your plan, activate the Hotspot Tool and click. Note: Hotspots do not appear on the printed and plotted outputs. For more information, see Hotspots.
Hotspot Color Panel

Click the Color drop-down menu to either type a Pencolor number (1-255) for the Hotspot in the text field or choose the appropriate color from the pop-up palette. For more information on other options of this dialog box, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes.
1911
Figure Tool Settings

For a description of generic settings common to all tools in the Toolbox, see Working in Tool Settings Dialog Boxes. The Figure tool is a dedicated tool for placing and manipulating images. Figures are embedded images in the project file.
Images files of various formats (BMP, PICT, TIFF, JPEG, etc.) can be directly imported from within the Figure Settings dialog box. For more information, see Figures.
Figure Preview and Positioning Panel

You have two options for obtaining image files: Click the Open button to browse the directory system for image files. Click the Paste button to use the contents of the Clipboard. (If the Clipboard contains image information, it will be used directly. If the contents is text, it will be first converted to bitmap.) Note: You can also insert a cropped view of any image file into your ArchiCAD plan. With your ArchiCAD project file open, open any image format file. Click and drag (the Marquee tool is the only available tool) to select the desired image area, then copy it to the clipboard. Close the image file, then paste the clipboard contents into the open project. You can modify it like any other figure. The Preview area displays the image. The Name field below displays the imported files name, or Pasted Image # if the figure was inserted from the Clipboard. Click in the field to rename the image if needed. This does not affect the original files name. Figure Size: Use these fields to give accurate dimensions to scanned site plans or measured layouts. Enter a value for the horizontal size of the inserted image in default length unit. Enter a value for the horizontal size of the inserted image in default length unit. The Keep Proportions checkbox below allows you to fix image proportions if appropriate. Hint: Dimensions are often distorted when drawings or images are scanned. Uncheck the Keep Proportions box to unlink the dimensions and adjust figure width and height independently if you want to make sure that dimensions are correct. This is especially important when inserting existing site plans, survey plans or layouts into ArchiCAD Projects. Resolution: Adjust resolution of the inserted figure if necessary for specific print output quality: Enter a horizontal resolution in dpi. Enter a vertical resolution value in dpi. Note: Figure size and image resolution are interdependent. By increasing image size, you decrease resolution, and vice versa.
1912
Use the Restore Original Values button to reset the image default parameters for figure size and resolution. Insert Figure using 1 to 1 pixel correspondence with screen resolution: Every time you insert the selected image with this option, one pixel of the selected image will correspond to one pixel of the screen. The figure size upon insertion will depend on the current zoom level of the screen. Check Transparent to show elements that are located underneath the Figures white pixels, according to the current display order. Check the Mirror icons to insert the figure flipped horizontally. Rotation Angle: Enter a rotation angle for the Figure. Click the black arrow and choose either Relative to Orientation (the angle will be measured relative to the Oriented View) Absolute to Coordinate System (the angle will be measured from the (0,0) point of the project coordinates). Click an Anchor point button to define the positioning point of the Figure.
Figure Image Format Panel

Use the Storage Format field to change the format in which the file is saved within the project file: click on the preferred format and choose OK. The control to the right of Storage Format displays the color resolution of the image. The controls below display the horizontal and vertical image size in pixels. Use the Save as button to save a copy of the selected image file in a different format as an external file. The field next to the disc icon displays the file size of the selected image in kilobytes.
1913
Camera/VR Tool Settings

The Camera tool is used to define the settings of individual perspective views, the Fly-Through path, Virtual Reality panoramic scenes, a path for VR scenes and navigable VR object movies.
For more information, see Cameras. The Camera/VR Settings palette and the Floor Plan are simultaneously active, so you can alter the settings, the camera locations and orientations without repeatedly opening and closing the window.
The Camera/VR Settings dialog box has three tab pages:
Camera VR Object Settings VR Scene Settings

Note: If the Camera/VR Settings is switched to VR Scenes, no placed Cameras or VR Objects will be visible on the Floor Plan. Choose the appropriate camera mode from Camera/VR Settings to make theses visible again. The following dialog boxes are also accessible from these tab pages:
Set Cities Sun
1914
Camera
Camera is a tab page of the Camera/VR Tool Settings dialog box. Click New to add a new path to the project to start a new collection of 3D projections. The Add New Path dialog box opens. Here you can: Enter the name of the new Path. Add Copy of Current Path: Check this box to duplicate the current set of projections while you define a new one. Click Rename to rename the current path, then type the new name in the dialog box and click OK or select a path in the pop-up list. If you have already defined one or more camera paths, choose the desired camera path from the pop-up menu. Click Delete to delete the current path. The path name will be removed from the list and all its cameras will be deleted. Camera: To select a particular camera from the current camera path, use the up/down arrows to scroll through the camera numbers, or enter the camera number from the keyboard. Wait here: This number refers to the number of still frames (time units) during which the flythrough motion will remain frozen at the given camera before moving on to the next one. Enter the number of still frames to be included in the Fly-Through Path for the selected Camera. Click Smooth Path at Cameras to smooth the path between the selected cameras. This action smooths the Bzier camera path and restore the tangent line defining the path to its original position if you have modified it. Enter parameter values for the current camera: Camera Z: Enter a value to specify Camera height from Project Zero. Target Z: Enter a value to specify Target height from Project Zero. Distance: Enter a value to specify the horizontal viewing distance between Camera and Target. Azimuth: Enter a value to specify Camera Azimuth to Target. View Cone: Enter a value to specify the opening angle of the Camera View Cone. Roll Angle: Enter a value here to specify Camera Roll Angle. Sun Altitude: Enter a value here to specify Sun Altitude used in shaded or rendered images. Sun Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Sun Azimuth used in shaded or rendered images. Note: If you adjust the Project North value, the sun azimuth value here will change accordingly. Use the Pencolor/Penweight controls to specify a pen color for the selected camera. (To modify the color of the path line, use the Path button for opening the Path Options dialog box.) Sun... : Click this button to access the Sun dialog box.
1915
Path Options
Path Name: rename the current Path if desired.
Motion Controls
Camera: Choose radio buttons to set the shape of the Camera Path: Polygon: Click this button to place In-between Frames along a straight line between Key Frames (Polygonal Animation Path). Bzier: Click this button to place in-between Frames along a Bzier curve between Key Frames (Bzier Animation Path). Note: Bzier makes for smoother animations, while Polygon paths are somewhat jumpier. Open: Click this button for an open-ended Path Loop. Hint: The first and last Key Frames of an Animation Path can also be coincident. Closed: Click this button for a continuous-loop Path. Hint: Use this to create smooth endless loop Animations. The Target option defines the shape of the target point path during the Fly-Through animation. Polygon: This option will place the target points of the in-between frames on the straight line that connects the two consecutive key target points. Smooth: This option will place Targets along a smooth curve between Key Targets. Note: Smooth is available only if you have specified Bzier for the camera motion. Hint: Use Polygon target motion if your camera moves a lot but the target stands stills or moves just a little. This is the case when you fly around a building but keep the same spot in sight. In other cases, try both methods to see which one suits you better.
Motion Resolution
Each 3D Projection you add to the path is considered a keyframe. ArchiCAD can interpolate between keyframes to create In-between views which produce a smoother animation. Cameras on the path: Shows the total number of Cameras in the current Polygonal or closed loop Bzier Path. In-between frames: Enter the number of in-between Frames between each Key Frame here. A larger number of in-between frames makes a smoother animation Path, but uses more memory and hard disk storage space. Total frames: Shows the total number of Key and in-between Frames.
1916
Display Options
Choose the format in which to display the frames of the current Path: (Cameras are never displayed in printed output.) None: Since Cameras cannot be assigned to Layers, choosing None in Display Options here is the only way you can hide them on the Floor Plan. Camera only Camera & Path Everything: the location of the in-between frames will also be shown. Choose which frames to display: Click the Cameras radio button to specify a range of keyframes to be displayed. Click All to display all frames of the path This setting will be used as a default in the Create Fly-Through dialog box: only the visible part of the path will be processed. Enter a Pencolor for the line of the camera path. For more information, see Fly-Through. Click OK to confirm Path Options and return to the Camera Settings dialog.
1917
VR Object Settings
VR Object Settings is a tab page of the Camera/VR Tool Settings dialog box. To access these settings, choose the VR Object option (either open the VR Object tab of the Camera Settings dialog box, or choose VR Object from the Cameras Info Box.).
Click New to define a new VR Object. Enter an object name and click OK to confirm. Click Rename to rename the current VR Object. Click Delete to delete the current VR Object. Click the pop-up field to select an existing VR Object to be displayed on the floor plan. Enter parameter values numerically for the default or selected VR Objects: Radius: Enter a value here to specify VR Object Radius. Center Z: Enter a value to specify VR Object Center height from Project Zero. View Cone: Enter a value to specify the angle of the Camera View Cone. Parallels: Enter a value to specify the number of Parallels on the VR Object. Meridians: Enter a value to specify the number of Meridians on the VR Object. Lowest View: Enter a value to specify the Lowest View angle of the VR Object. Highest View: Enter a value here to specify the Highest View angle of the VR Object. Sun moves with Viewer: Check this box to fix the position of the Sun relative to the Viewer axis. Sun Altitude: Enter a value to specify Sun Altitude used in shaded or rendered images. Sun Azimuth: Enter a value to specify Sun Azimuth used in shaded or rendered images. Mark the appropriate button to look outside or inside the VR Object
Look Outside: Mark this button to Look Outside the VR Object. Look Inside: Mark this button to Look Inside the VR Object. Define a Pencolor/Penweight number for the VR Object Camera. The Sun button opens the Sun dialog box. Click Apply to apply new Settings to the selected VR Object. You do not need to close the dialog box to see your changes appear. Note: If the Camera/VR Settings is switched to VR Scenes, no placed Cameras or VR Objects will be visible on the Floor Plan. Choose the appropriate camera mode from Camera/VR Settings to make theses visible again.
1918
Create VR Object
To access this dialog box, choose the VR Object Geometry method from the Camera Tool Info Box and place a VR Object. Then go to Document > Creative Imaging > Create VR Object. Select one of the available VR engines from the pop-up list. Note: VR engines are Add-Ons located in your Add-Ons folder. Source: Select the source window of the VR Movie: either 3D Window or PhotoRendering Window. Rebuild Model for Each Frame: If you check this box, ArchiCAD rebuilds the project after each frame and creates a new view from the rebuild model. Note: This option is useful if parametrized library elements may change frame by frame. Result: Specify the output of the VR Movie using the following controls: Use the pop-up field to specify the color resolution. When using QuickTime compression methods, enable the Image Compression checkbox to use the compression method you have specified. (Click Set to open Compression Settings.) Note: Apple and GRAPHISOFT recommend using the Cinepak compression method. Enable the Dithering checkbox to simulate photorealistic image colors in images with lower bit depths by dithering the colors in the available palette enable a Dithering effect. Note: This option is not available if a vectorized 2D file format is selected in the file format pop-up list. For more information, see VR Objects.
1919
VR Scene Settings
Note: VR Scenes can be generated only if you are using the 32-bit version of ArchiCAD. To access these settings, choose the VR Scene option (either open the VR Object tab of the Camera Settings dialog box, or choose VR Scene from the Cameras Info Box.).
Note: If the Camera/VR Settings is switched to VR Scenes, no placed Cameras or VR Objects will be visible on the Floor Plan. Choose the appropriate camera mode from Camera/VR Settings to make theses visible again. Click New to define a new VR Scene. Enter an object name and click OK to confirm. Rename: Click to rename the current VR Scene. Delete: Click to delete the current VR Scene. Click the pop-up list to select an existing VR Scene to be displayed on the floor plan. Note: Only the VR Cameras belonging to the Scene currently selected in the dialog box will appear on the Floor Plan. Enter parameter values numerically for the default or selected VR Scenes: Panorama name: Enter the new name in the box. Panoramic Camera Z: Enter a value to specify Panoramic Camera height from Project Zero. Sun Altitude: Enter a value to specify Sun Altitude used in shaded or rendered images. Sun Azimuth: Enter a value here to specify Sun Azimuth used in shaded or rendered images. Define a Pencolor/Penweight number for the Panoramic Camera. The Sun button opens the Sun dialog box. Click Apply to apply new Settings to the selected VR Object.
1920
Create VR Scene
To access this dialog box, choose the VR Scene Geometry method from the Camera Tool Info Box and place a VR Scene. Then go to Document > Creative Imaging > Create VR Scene. Use the top pop-up list to select one of the VR engines located in ArchiCAD's Add-Ons folder. Use the next pop-up list to select a format in which to save the VR to your hard disk. Choose from one of three formats: VR Scene (default): Allows you to save all the panoramas defined on the Floor Plan, together with a control file containing the navigation data. To properly view the scene in QTVR Player, you need to open this control file. VR Panoramas: Allows you to save the panoramas defined on the Floor Plan without a control file. You can view any of the panoramas in QTVR Player individually, but you will not be able to navigate between them. VR Pictures: Allows you to save pictures of your panoramas that you can then edit as bitmap images. These files cannot be viewed in QTVR Player. After editing the files (modifying the background, adding extra elements), you must use Apples QTVR tools in order to manually create a file viewable in QTVR Player. Size: Specify parameters for the VR scene using the following controls. All sizes are measured in pixels. Image height: Enter the image height for the VR scene. Note: ArchiCAD will automatically round off numbers to be divisible by 96. Image length: Displays the image length of the VR scene. Note: This value is calculated using the image height and view cone you specified. Window Size in VR Player: Specify a horizontal and a vertical window display size for the VR player here. Keep Proportions: Check this box to maintain the proportions of the horizontal and vertical sizes of the VR player window and ensure that your image is not distorted. View Cone: Enter a View Cone angle value in this box. Initial Zoom: Enter an initial Zooming angle value in this box as the default setting for the panoramic view. This initial zoom factor cannot be greater than the View Cone. Note: Set the desired effects of your VR panoramas using the controls in the PhotoRendering Settings dialog box. Set Image Compression: When using QuickTime compression methods, click this button to open a dialog and set image compression method. Set Hotspot Compression: When using QuickTime compression methods, click this button to open a dialog and set hotspot compression method. Note: This option compresses the control image created with VR Scene where transition points (hotspots) are stored. Make movie self-contained: Check this box to create a self-contained movie. Note: In a self-contained movie all necessary elements (images and control files) are merged into a single file. Self-contained QuickTime movies can be used on Windows.
1921
Rebuild Model for Each Panorama: If this box is checked, ArchiCAD rebuilds the model after each panorama and creates a new view from the rebuilt model. Note: This option is useful if parametrized library elements may change frame by frame. For more information, see VR Scenes.
1922
Create Fly-Through
Access this dialog box from Document > Creative Imaging > Create Fly-Through. The Create Fly-Through command will only be active if you have at least one Preset Parallel Projection or an animation path with at least two Cameras. The name of this command changes according to the type of camera currently selected in the Camera > VR Settings dialog box (Camera, VR Object, VR Scene). The Fly-Through dialog box allows you to set the source and results of the Fly-Through. For general information on this feature, see Fly-Through. Source: Use the controls below to specify source window parameters. Click 3D Window to use the 3D Window as the image source and preview window. Note: To select wireframe, hidden line or shaded images, use the View > 3D View Mode submenu. Click PhotoRendering Window to use the PhotoRendering Window as the image source and preview window. Note: Use this option to save photorealistic bitmapped images. Define the route of the Fly-Through: Click Preset Parallel Projections to create animated transitions between parallel projections. Note: This option is not available if fewer than two pre-set projections are defined. Click Perspective from Camera Path to create a fly-through animation along the current Perspective Path. The name of the current Perspective Path is shown below. Note: This option is not available if fewer than two cameras are defined. Define the content of the Fly-Through: Click Keyframes only to image key frames without any in-between frames. Click With inbetween frames to image in-between frames as well. Click All Frames to image all animation frames in the current Path. Click Frames from to specify a range of animation frames (first and last) for imaging from the current Path. Note: The numbers shown by default are the first and last frames in the entire animation. Rebuild Model for Each Frame: If you check this option, ArchiCAD rebuilds the project after each frame and creates a new view from the rebuilt model. Note: This option lets you create additional animation effects, provided that your project contains any Library Parts whose appearance changes with every frame. This can be achieved if the Library Part parameter is set to change along with the frame number. Result: Use the controls below to specify the format of the Fly-Through process. Use the first pop-up field to select a file format for the images saved to the hard disk. Use the pop-up field to specify the color resolution. Note: Images with higher color depths (i.e., 32-bit color) require more hard disk space.
1923
Remove Redundant Lines: Check this box to remove overlapping lines from the image(s) saved to the hard disk. Note: This takes more time but the image(s) will require less hard disk space and will plot/ print faster. This option is not available if a bitmapped file format is selected in the file format pop-up menu or the current rendering method is not wireframe or block mode. When using QuickTime compression methods, the Image Compression checkbox is enabled. (Click Set to open Compression Settings and specify a compression method and color depth settings.) See Compression Settings. Enable the Dithering checkbox to simulate photorealistic image colors in images with lower bit depths by dithering the colors in the available palette. Note: This option is not available if a vectorized 2D file format is selected in the file format pop-up field.
Rescale
Click this button to modify the scale of the compressed images. Frame rate: If you are saving the Fly-Through in Video Movie File format, enter a frame rate value here. Show: Click this button to process the Fly-Through and preview the images without saving them to the hard disk. You can save the resulting animation afterwards by clicking Save. Hint: To preview only a short sequence of frames, adjust the Frames from radio button option to preview a short sequence of frames. For more information, see Defining Fly-Throughs.
Compression Settings
Compression type: Use the pull-down list specify a compression method. The Motion controls will be enabled or disabled depending on the chosen compression type. Enter values for: Frames per second Key frame insertion rate Data rate limit (in KByte/second) In the Compressor section of the dialog box: Depth: Specify the color depth settings. (Millions of Colors; 256 Greys; 256 Colors) Note: For some methods, the color depth choices will be restricted to Color or grayscale. For some compression types, an additional Options button appears with additional settings.
1924
Create Sun Study

All the projections in a Sun Study will be generated in accordance with the current parallel projection or perspective view defined in the 3D Projection Settings dialog box. Geographical data for the location of the model and Sun parameters can be set in the Sun dialog box. For more information, see Sun and Set Cities. Source: 3D Window: Click this button to use the 3D Window as the image source and preview window. Note: To select wireframe, hidden line or shaded images, use the View > 3D View Mode submenu. PhotoRendering Window: Click this button to use the PhotoRendering Window as the image source and preview window. Note: For saving photorealistic bitmapped images. Date: Enter the day to begin the sun study. Use the pop-up menu to select the month and type the day in the edit box, or use the arrows to advance up or down. Choose the length of your sun study: either From Sunrise to Sunset, or enter a specific time span, in hours and minutes. Interval: Enter the interval, in minutes, between sun study images here. Type the number of minutes in the edit box, or use the arrows to advance up or down. Click All Frames to image all animation frames in the current Path. Click Frames from to specify a range of animation frames (first and last) for imaging from the current Path. Note: The numbers shown by default are the first and last frames in the entire animation. Rebuild Model for Each Frame: If you check this option, ArchiCAD rebuilds the project after each frame and creates a new view from the rebuilt model. Note: This option lets you create additional animation effects, provided that your project contains any Library Parts whose appearance changes with every frame. This can be achieved if the Library Part parameter is set to change along with the frame number. Result: Use the controls below to specify the format of the Sun Study. Use the first pop-up field to select a file format for the images saved to the hard disk. Use the pop-up field to specify the color resolution. Note: Images with higher color depths (i.e., 32-bit color) require more hard disk space. Remove Redundant Lines: Check this box to remove overlapping lines from the image(s) saved to the hard disk. This option is not available if a bitmapped file format is selected in the file format pop-up field or the current rendering method is not wireframe or block mode. Note: This takes more time but the image(s) will require less hard disk space and will plot/ print faster.
1925
When using QuickTime compression methods, enable the Image Compression checkbox use the compression method you have specified. (Click Set to open Compression Settings and specify a compression method and color depth settings.) Note: Depending on the compression method, the color depth choices will be restricted to Color or grayscale. See Compression Settings. Enable the Dithering checkbox to simulate photorealistic image colors in images with lower bit depths by dithering the colors in the available palette. Note: This option is not available if a vectorized 2D file format is selected in the file format pop-up menu. Rescale: Click this button to modify the scale of the compressed images. Frame rate: If you are saving the Sun Study in Video Movie File format, enter a frame rate value here. Show: Click this button to process the Sun Study and preview the images without saving them to the hard disk. You can save the resulting animation afterwards by clicking Save. Hint: To preview only a short sequence of frames, adjust the Frames from radio button option to preview a short sequence of frames.
1926
Index
Index
.prf 218 .twlink 1219, 1220, 1246 .twportable 1224 2D Drawing Antialiasing 1489 2D Lines file format 120 2D Navigator Preview 1441 2D/3D Documents Panel 1653 3D Cutaway Sections 538 How to Create a 3D Cutaway 538 3D and Calculation Process Check Controls 1485 3D Cutting Planes 538 ~ Dialog Box 1600 3D Document 582 Create 585 Dimensions 1059 Model Display 594 Redefine 588 3D Document Settings 1590 3D Engines 531 Internal 3D engine 531 OpenGL engine 531 3D Intersection Priorities 1524 3D Navigation 262 3D Navigation Extras 537 Add current projection 537 Edit pre-set projections 537 Go to the previous/Go to the next 537 Horizontal View 537 Insert a new camera after the selected one 537 Look to 537 perpendicular 537 Modify the selected 537 Put a camera into the path 537 Reset Roll Angle 537 Revert view to the selected 537 3D Navigator Preview 1442 3D Only Panel 1653 3D Projections 535 ~ Settings 535 Add Current Projection 536 axonometric 535
How to Store a 3D Projection 536 How to Switch Between Axonometric and Perspective Views 535 parallel 535 perspectives 535 Place a Camera into the path 536 Save Current View 536 Settings 1601 3D Studio File 121, 128 3D View Modes 534 Hidden Line 534 Shading 534 Wireframe 534 3D Visualization toolbar 1389 3D Window 520 3D Cutaway Sections 538 3D Engines 531 3D Navigation Extras 537 3D Navigator Preview Palette 535 3D Projections 535 3D View Modes 534 Commands Related to ~ 520 Default Display in ~ 527 Elements in a Marqueed ~ 525 Filter Elements in ~ 528 Marquee Effect 525 Open the ~ 520 Outside Marquee 525 Projections 535 Rebuild Controls 1484 Save Contents of ~ as a View 530 Settings 1596 Show All in ~ 522 Show Marquee Area in ~ 525 Show Selection in ~ 523 Show Stored Selection in 3D 524 source of 3D Document 587 Stories to Show in ~ 528 Trim Elements to Marquee 525 Trim Elements to Story 497 3D Zone Shape 770 3Dconnexion Enabler 270 1927
Index
A
About this BIM Server 1217 Absolute Display Limit 515 Absolute to Coordinate System 1814, 1840, 1855, 1858, 1875, 1913 Across All Stories 250 Active Layer 163 Actual Size 148 Add automatic dimensions 642 Add bounded area 579 Add Fill to Boundary 832 Add More Servers 1246 Add New Fill 1006 Add Profile to the Project Catalog 709 Add Shortcut 278, 1175 Add Teamwork Comment 1324 Add to Polygon 422 Add-On Manager 1567 Add-Ons 143 anchor point in ArchiCAD menus 144 Adjust 430 Administrator Rights 1231 Advanced Redraw Options 1489 Advanced Settings (Server Monitor) 1218 air space 1546 Air Space Fill Type 1521 Align 3D Texture 184 Align dimension line 1074 Align Elements 402 Align to Surface 378, 1445 Align View 1419 Align with Marker Line 257 Align with Slope 1013 Align with Symbol 256 All Edges 754 All elements on unlocked and visible layers 1284 All Stories 1340, 1343 All with original Color 1291 Alpha Channel Effects 1557, 1694 Always Horizontal 256 Always Readable 254 Anchor of Door/Window 1768 Anchor Point for Doors/Windows 915, 1768 1928
for Drawing 1875 Angle Bisector Constraint 376 Angle Dimensions 1069, 1851 Annotation 1046 Autotext 1046 Dimensions 1046 Labels 1046 Texts 1046 The Grid Tool 1046 Antialiasing 1489, 1689 Any Direction 1054, 1059 Any Plane 1059 Append Options 1737 Apply Favorites 216 Apply Format Options to 1646 Apply Schemes of Profile 241 Apply Settings to All References 475 Apply to All Corners 433 Apply to selection 705 Arc Length 1054 ArchiCAD Layer 152, 1530 ArchiCAD Project file formats 120 ArchiCAD Sounds 1488 Archive Files 136 files format 120 Options 124 Arcs 1025, 1030 Arc/Circle Tool Settings 1871 editing ~ 1029 Area Text 1016 Array Values 1632 Arrow tool 305, 307, 308 Artlantis 1389 Ask for Review 1323 Assign Elements 1310 At all Grid points 851 Attribute Manager 190 Attribute Purge 1724 Attributes 150 Composite Structures 167 conversion for AutoCAD 1723 Fill Types 166, 1536 Layers 151 Line Types 164, 1533 Mark-Up Styles 1750
Index
Materials 179 Pens & Colors 171 Zone Categories 766 Attributes of GDL Objects 192 Auto ID Increase 1204, 1487 AutoCAD Hatch Pattern 1733 Autogroup 453 Auto-Hide Navigator/Organizer 277 Automatic Dimensioning 1081 Exterior 1081 Interior 1084 Automatic Dimensions 642 Automatic Pen Color Visibility Adjustment 177, 1491 Autosave 390, 1493 Autotext 1106 in Dimension Text 1854 Keywords 1111 Reference Drawing 1110 Auxiliary Grid 354 Available Sections 708
BIM Server Preferences 1218 Bind XREF 1709 Bold Cut Lines 165 Book Settings 1655 bpn 120 Break Hotlink of Selected Module 1353 Browse for a server link file 1246 Browse for Embedded Objects 197 Browse Project 294 Browse Teamwork Project 294 Built-In Criteria Sets 1284 By Elevation 400, 509 By Limit Lines 578 BYLAYER 1731
C
Cache Folder 1498 Calculation 1192 Components 1193 Descriptors 1193 Displaying Lists 1199 List Types 1197 Properties 1193 Property Objects 1193 Setup 1196 Sources 1193 Units and Rules 1518 Calculation Rules 1520 Camera mode 270 Camera/VR Tool Settings 1914 Cameras 1390 ~ Path Options 1390 Fly-Through 1411 Perspective ~ 1390 VR Objects 1413 VR Scenes 1415 Cancel Edit System 821 Cancel Operations 391 cap 840 Capture elements profile 702 Capture Window for 3D Document 585 Category (Teamwork Project) 1254 chain icon 182 Chamfer 432 Change Hotlink 1355 1929
B
Back Reference 1148, 1878 Background fill 1002 Background images 194 Backspace Key 391 Backup 120 Copy 1494 Files 135 Beam 689 ~ Tool Settings 1779 center line 1781 Complex Profiles 699 Create a Hole in a Beam 694 display 1585 Display on Floor Plan 691 end lines 1781 Geometry 1779 Hole 1782 modifying holes 695 Priority 688, 697, 1781 Reference Axis 690 BIM Server Libraries 196 BIM Server Manager 1221
Index
Character Map 1100, 1450 Character Palette 1100, 1450 Check for Updates 208, 1496 Check Markers Palette 622 Check Script 1638 Choose Hotlink 1341 Choose Story (Hotlinked Module) 1343 Circles 1025 ~ Tool Settings 1871 Cities 1418, 1609 Clamping Thickness 1832 Clicked Edge 754 Clone Folder 284 Close Parentheses 636 CodeMeter 138 Colored Workspaces 1290 Column ~ Tool Settings 1783 and Other Elements 688 and Wall relationship 688 Complex Profiles 699 creating 685 crossing symbol 1785 in 3D 683 in composite Walls 682, 686 modifying slanted 416 Priority 688 Slanted 1784 Symbol display 1585 Unwrapped 681 Wrapped 682 Column dimensioning 1084 Command Layout Schemes 237 Comments 1255 Company Standard Schemes 237 Complex Profiles see Profiles 699 Component Lists (Interactive Schedule) 627 Component Type 1546 Components Custom 902 for Calculation 1193 of Profile (complex) element 1564 Composite Fills 1003 Composite Structures 167 Dialog Box 1544 1930
Edit Selected Item 1545 Edit Skin and Line Structure 1544 Composite Trapezoid Wall 664 Consider Solid Operations 1898 Construction Elements Beam 689 Columns 680 Curtain Wall 779 Mesh 756 Roof 712 Slab 750 Wall 654 Zone 765 Construction Elements Preferences 1524 Construction Grid 353 Continue a Polyline 1038 Contours 1596 Contours Off 1597 Contours On 1597 Control Box 230, 1444 Cursor Snap Variants 1445 Magic Wand 1445 Relative Construction Methods 1444 Special Snap Points 1446 Suspend Groups switch 1445 Convert AutoCAD Leaders to Labels 1740 Convert Dimensions 1080 Convert Linked Libraries (Teamwork) 1248 Convert Pictures to Format 1718 Coordinates Palette 230 Copy 388 Copy Cell Pattern 843 Copy Dialog Box 1576 Copy name 1839 Copy Settings 327 Core 170 Corner Windows 921 Cover Fill 1867 Create a New Project 112 Create Common Frames 845 Create Detail/Worksheet Boundary 1487 Create New Story 1573 Create Patch 889 Create Server Link for Client 1219 Create Stair 930, 1792 Criteria invalid 636
Index
Criteria Sets in Teamwork 1287 Crop image to Zoom 1180 Current Zoom 1653 Cursor 316 Projection Mode of ~ 372 Cursor Snap Range 386 Cursor Snap Variants 372, 1445 Curtain Wall 779 3D Input Plane 802 Accessories 786 Add a New Gridline 829 Add Boundary 834 and Zones 861 Base Surface 783 Boundary 784 Chained 789 Commands 782 Create 787 curved 789 Custom Component 906 Cylindrical 802 Disconnect Walls 860 Display 804 Edit Boundary 830 Edit Grid 825 Edit Mode 818 Edit Mode Display Palette 822 Edit Reference Line 836 Frame 785 Frame Cap 906 Frame classes 838, 839 Frame Intersections 844 Free Rotate 867 Grid 784 Junction 786 Label all Members 868 Member Labels 1118 Members 783 Model View Options 817 Multiselect Panels and Frames 823 Nominal thickness 1819 Overview 781 Panel 786 Panel classes 846, 1831 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box 1835, 1837
Position in Section 792, 797 Reference Line 783 Reference Surface 783 Scheme 785 Selection Grip 823 Slanted 789 Split 861 System Settings 1818 Tool Settings 818 Curtain Wall Options 1585 Curtain Wall Reference Line 836 Curtain Wall Settings 1818 Accessories 1834 Floor Plan display 1821 Frame Pages 1828 Grid Pattern and Preview 1823 Junctions 1833 Member Placement 1823 Panel Settings 1831 Positioning 1819 Scheme Page 1823 System Page 1819 Custom Components 902 Custom Edge Settings in Profile Editor 705, 1565 Custom Properties (Teamwork) 1241 Custom Settings 873 Custom Text 1854 Custom Texture 186 Cut 388 Cut Fill 1004, 1867 Cut Fills - as in Settings 1592 Cut line 1022, 1870 Cut Surface Material 1592
D
Data Exchange 1362 Data Safety 1493 Decompose Polyline 1039 Default Project Folder 1218 Delete 390 Delete File after Import 1224 Delete from Server 1226 Descriptors ~ in Calculation functions 1193 1931
Index
Deselecting Elements 322 Design Layers in Profile Manager 1564 Details 595 ~ Tool Settings 1904 Boundary 602 Contents of ~ Window 598 Define Reference for Linked Marker 557 Define Reference for Source Marker 545 Independent 600 Linked Detail Marker 599 Marker 596 Unlinked Marker 558 updating 604 Viewpoint 597 Detect and Fit to Zones 1898 Dialog Boxes and Palettes (Work Environment options) 1475 Dimension Chain 1052 editing 1071 Dimension core only 1084 Dimension each skin 1084 Dimension External Geometry 1083 Dimension Grid System 1098 dimension line 1052 dimension points 1052 Dimension Structures 1083 Dimension Text 1076 Horizontal 1076, 1845 Dimension Text Settings 1077, 1854 dimension unit 1052 dimension values 1052 Dimensioning Standards 1049 Dimensions ~ of Curved Elements 1057 ~ Tool Settings 1843 3D Document 1059 Angle 1069 associative ~ in Sections/Elevations 1079 Automatic Exterior ~ 1081 Automatic Interior ~ 1084 Elevation 1063 Level 1067 Linear 1054 Radial 1066 reference points 1052 Secondary (Add-On) 1080 1932
Static 1053 Text Rotation Angle 1855 Text Settings 1854 Witness Line 1075 Dimensions Preferences 1516 Accuracy 1517 Extra Accuracy 1517 Hide Zero Decimals 1856 Rounding 1517 Disable unrelated Controls 189 Disabled (Teamwork) 1229 Discovery 1246 Discovery Port 1219 Display in 3D view 1090 Display Order 456 Custom Stacking Order 456 Distort with Slope 1013 Distorted Fills 1012 Distribute 1096, 1097 Distribute Elements 408 Do not include this Layout (Subset) in ID sequence 1159 Do not launch new instance of ArchiCAD 1488 Documentation 993 Door/Window ~ Tool Settings 1767 Dimension Marker 1771 Parameters 1769 Reveal 1771 Doors and Windows in Polygonal/Complex/Slanted Walls 911 placing 915 saving custom shapes from the Project File 898 saving rectangular shapes from the Project File 896 Draft 1596 Drafting Elements 994 Arcs, Circles 1025 Elliptical Arcs, Ellipses 1030 Fills 995 Line Type Elements 1021 Drafting Fill 1867 Drafting line 1022, 1870
Index
Drag & Drop 447 Drawings 447 DWG/DXF Objects 448 Floor Plan Elements 448 GDL Object Files 447 Pictures 447 Text 447 Dragging Elements 395 Drag a Copy 442 Drawing ~ Tool Settings 1873 Border 1877 Frame 1877 IDs 1161 own Pen Set 1876 Properties 1432 Scale 1112, 1874 Status 1665 Title 1147, 1878 Title Type 1147 Updating 1150 Drawing and Layout IDs 1155 Drawing Manager 1150, 1665 Drawing Scale 149 Drawing Title Reference 1148 Duplicate Project 1225 Duplicate Role 1235 Duplicating Elements 441 DWF files 1181 DXF/DWG Add-On 1362 DXF/DWG Conversion 1362 Attributes 1723 Drawing Unit 1716 Entity Conversion 1366 Fills (Save Methods) 1732 Layers 1725 Line Types 1731 Miscellaneous Options 1735 Open Options 1717 Opening Blocks as Library Parts 1365 Opening DWG/DXF Files 1363 Pens & Colors 1727 Save Layout options 1721 Save Options 1720 Template File 1720
Translation Setup dialog box 1713 Window Background Pen 1728 DXF/DWG Translation Setup 1363, 1713
E
Edge Curve/Straighten 438 Edge Angle 754 Edge settings 754 Edge Type 732 Edit Custom Role 1260 Edit Elements by Stories 1571 Edit Length of Witness Line 1075 Edit Menu in Text windows 1124 Edit Selected Item 1545 Edit Selection Set 328 Dialog Box 328 Edit Story Levels 502 Edit System 820 Electric 1588 ElectricImage File 129 Element Attributes see Attributes 150 Element ID Manager 1204 Element Information Work Environment customization 1478 Element Information Highlight 314 Element Information Palette 1201 Element Information Pop-up 315, 1478 Element Lists (Interactive Schedule) 627 Element Origin 1547 Element Preview 641 Element Snap 380 Elevate command 400 Elevation 301 ~ Tool Settings 1889 create ~ Viewpoint 542 Create Independent ~ Viewpoint 559 Define Reference for Linked Marker 557 Define Reference for Source Marker 545 Display of Elements 548 Display of Lines and Markers 563 Distant Area 544 Horizontal/Vertical Range 544 1933
Index
moving Marker 566 Place a Linked ~ Marker 555 Unlinked Marker 558 window status 547 Elevation Dimensioning 1847 Elevation Dimensions 1054 ~ and Hotlinked Modules 1064 Elevation of Elements and Gravity 368 and Reference Levels 303 Elevation Tool 565 Ellipses 1030 convert to Circle 1032 Email sending from Publisher 1439 email options 1486 Embed 3D content 1191 Embedded Library 196 Embedded Objects 199 Empty Opening 1768 Enable all informational messages 264 Enable Back Reference 1149, 1878 Enable Objects Attributes 1842 Enable Objects checkbox 1770 Enable Objects Linetypes 1842 Enable Objects Pens 1842 Enable partial open 1719 Enable Product 138 Enable Skin Priorities 672 Enabled (Teamwork) 1229 Enhanced connections for Walls and Beams 676 Entire Original Structure 985 Entire Structure Display 473 Esc Key 391 Everyone (Teamwork) 1257 Exclude View Blocking Walls 581, 1900 Explode into Current View 439, 1146 Explore Model 264 Export Log 1256 Export Project 1226 Extract Boundary to Fill 832
F
Favorite Text Settings 1104 Favorites 210, 1757 ~ Options 212, 217 Palette 217 Preferences 211, 214, 217, 218 Favorites Preferences 214 Figure Handle 1043 Figures 1043 ~ Tool Settings 1912 placing ~ 1043 File > Close 119 File > New 116, 117, 118 File > Open 120 File Compression 132 File Types Recognized by ArchiCAD 120 Fill Categories 1004 Cover Fill 1004 Drafting Fill 1004 Fill Consolidation 488 Settings 1582 Fill Cut Surfaces with 1592 Fill Handles 1011, 1017 Fill Orientation 1546 Fill Origin 1866 Fill Tool Settings 1864 Advanced Settings 1867 Fill Types 166, 1536 Available 1002 Fill Uncut Surfaces (3D Document Settings) 1593 Fill Uncut Surfaces (Section/Elevation/IE Settings) 1884 Fillet/Chamfer 432 Fill-Hatch Conversion 1733 Fills 995 Background display 1586 Display Modes 1007 Distorted 1866 fill handle arrow 1012 freehand 1001 Gradient 1017 Opacity 1002 Show Area Text 1016, 1865 Filter Elements in 3D 528, 1595
1934
Index
Find & Replace in Text type windows 1124 Find & Select 323 Find and Select 323 Find Library Part 876 Find Linked Markers 621 Find Selection 1124 Finish 170 Finish Edit System 821 Fit Frame to Drawing 1877 Fit in Window 258, 1653 Fit to Grid Cell 1874 Fit to Layout 1874 Fit to Skin 1547, 1867 Fixed Angle 254, 255 Flip 854, 857, 1833, 1834 Floor Plan Cut Plane 504 ~ Settings 1574 Floor Plan Display 512 Floor Plan Display pop-up 512 Floor Plan Window 493 Fly-Through 1411 Create Fly-Through 1923 options 1604 Font Encoding 1857 Force User to Leave a Project 1264 Foreground Fill 1002 Format Options (Interactive Schedule) 1645 Formatting Palette 1450 Fragments in 2D Symbol of GDL object 1635 Frame classes 785 Free Rotate 867 From File 1341 From Teamwork Project 1341 Full Screen 492 & Hide All Palettes 492
G
Gable Walls 670 GDL 1626 GDL Master Window 1627 2D Script 1634 Comments 1635 Debugger 1639 Interface Script 1635
Master Script 1634 Parameter Script 1634 Property Script 1634 GDL Objects Custom Attributes 192 Drag & Drop 447 Model View Options 975, 1588 see also Parametric Objects 869 GDL objects 194 GDL Web Control 196, 874 Get Current Windows Settings 290, 1652 Global Unique Identifier (GUID) 209 Go to Layout 1132 Go To Line 1125 Go To Story 496 Goodies 144 Gradient Fills 1003, 1017 Graphic Reports (Calculation) 1196 Gravity 368 Gray out Unowned Workspace 1291 Grid 784 Grid Marker 1089 Grid Snap 355 Grid System 1088, 1096 Dimension 1098 Place object/column/beam 1097 Grid Tool 1086 edit Grid Element 1095 Grid Element components 1089 Stagger Markers 1095 Visibility 1090 Grids 353 & Background Dialog Box 1578 Construction 353 printing 1168 rotated 354 Snap 353 Grouping 452 Enable/Suspend Groups 1445 Suspend Groups 452 Ungroup 453 Groups and Layers 453 GUID 209 Guide Lines 356 Lock to 373 On/Off 1444 1935
Index
Options 1444 Settings 1482
IE see Interior Elevation 567 IFC 708 IFC 2X2 and 2X3 1758 IFCXML 121, 127 Ignore zoom when opening this view 1653 Image file formats 121 Image Fills 1003, 1018 Imaging and Calculation options (Work Environment) 1484 Import Drawing/Layout 1142 from ArchiCAD Project 1659 Import Project from File 1224 Import Viewports as Embedded Drawings 1718 Importing PDF files 1145 Include 1352 Independent Details 600 Independent Elevation 559 Independent Section 559 Independent Worksheet 611 Individually Linked Stories 1343 Info Box 222 customization 1506 Info Tag 315, 1478 Inject Parameters 449 Insert Above 1569 Insert Below 1569 Insert Source Layer 1727 Insert/Merge Dimension Point 1072, 1073 insulation 1546 Insulation Fill Type 1521 Interactive Schedule 626 Define 633 Editing and Updating 632 file formats 127 Format 639 Format Options 1645 Restructure to Fit Layout 643 Scheme Settings Dialog Box 1642 Sort Fields 637 Interior Elevation (IE) 567 ~ and Zone Shape 580 Create Multiple ~ Viewpoints 571 Create Single ~ Viewpoint 570 Define Reference for Source Marker 545
H
Hairline 165, 1550 Handle 1589 Hardware Acceleration Level 1489 Hatch Scale 1733 Header/Footer Settings (Print dialog box) 1675 Headline Settings 1646 Hide Arrowhead from 1862 Hide Cut Elements 581, 1899 Hide Door Handles 1589 Hide Knobs 1589 Hide Object Accessories 1589 Hide Taps 1589 Hide Zero Decimals 1517 Hide Zero Wholes 1517, 1856 Hide Zone Stamp 769, 1587 Highlight contours of related element(s) when placing or editing element 1062 Highlight my reservation 1290 Hinge 1589 Horizontal 1076 horizontal range 578 Hotlink ~ Manager Dialog Box 1701 Update (Work Environment) 1494 Hotlinked Modules see Modules 1334 Hotspots 1041 ~ Tool Settings 1911 Hotspots for Doors and Windows 1589 HPGL File 121 HTML Output Options 1496
I
ID Management 1204 ID Numbers changing 1204 customizing format 1206 internal unique ~ 1204 ID of Items in this Subset 1159 i-Drop 1364 1936
Index
Display of Elements 581 Editing ~ Limit Line 577 Editing ~ viewpoints 576 Horizontal and Vertical Range 578 IDs and Names 573 updating 560 window status 547 Internal Rendering Engine 1393, 1692 Intersection Auto ~ 675 of Walls 671 Two Elements 431 intersection priority 671
J
Join 1265 JPEG 2000 125
K
Keep Drawing primitives on elements original layers 439 Keyboard Shortcuts 229 Knobs 1589
L
Label All Members 868 Labels 1113 associative 1113 independent 1113 member 1118 Symbol 1114, 1862 Text Label 1862 Tool Settings 1860 Lamp Tool Settings unique parameters 1841 Lamps and HVAC Floor Plan Symbols 1588 Last Reservation Results 1294 Launch a new instance of ArchiCAD 117 Layer Combinations 157 Layer Intersection Group 160 Layer Settings 152, 1529 Layers 151 ~ Combinations 157 ~ Intersection Group 160
~ Settings Dialog Box 1529 lock/unlock 155, 1530 Quick Layers 155 show/hide 155, 1530 sort in Layer Settings 1531 Layout 1132 ~ Settings 1658 Create New 1133 Flat Layout Order 1157 IDs 1155 Importing PDF files 1145 Master Layouts 1134 Modifying Drawings 1146 Multiple Drawings 1144 Numbering 1156 Placing Drawings 1139 Properties 1431 Unit 1513 Use Hierarchy 1157 Layout Book 292, 1128, 1431 Components 1128 Drawings in 1138 Properties 1431 Publisher 1172 Tree by Masters 1129 Tree by Subsets 1129, 1133 Layouting 1126 Work Environment 1127 Leading 1451, 1857 Leave 1265 Level Dimensions 1067, 1853 editing text 1067 Library 193 ~ Loading Report 205, 1463 Container (.lcf) 207 Library Folder 1214 Library Manager Dialog Box 195 Library Parts duplicates 209 locating 875 missing 205 see also Parametric Objects 869 Library parts 194 Library Path Too Long 1326 License Borrowing 138 License Information 138 1937
Index
Lightscape File 130 LightWorks ~ Rendering Engine 1689 Effects 1689 Environment 1690 Options 1394, 1397 Shaders 1395, 1400, 1558, 1690 LightWorks Rendering Engine 1392 Line spacing 1857 Line Types 164, 1533 Line Types of Construction Elements Displayed Across Stories 511 Line Weight 165 Linear Dimensions 1054, 1844 Lines 1021 ~ Tool Settings 1869 Advanced Settings 1869 categories 1022 chained 1037 Line Weight Display 165 Polylines 1037 Line-type elements 1021 Unify 1040 Linework Consolidation 486 Settings 1580 Link Materials 182 Link to Fill Origin 1011 Link to original Model View 1152, 1166 Linked Libraries 196 List Window save options 127 Listing and Labeling Panel 1759 Listing Templates 194 Load Image 1019 Load Settings from Archives 1558 Lock Elements 153 Lock/Unlock Project (Teamwork) 1254 Locking Elements 455 Log Wall 669 Log Details Dialog Box 1765
M
MacOS Print and Plot 1682 Magic Wand 459 ~ Settings 465 1938
Magnet 318 mail service port 1486 Make Backup Copy 135 Manage Server Libraries 1327 Managing Projects Archive Files 136 Merging Files 141 Opening Projects through a Network 140 Template Files 133 Use a Template 116 Use Latest Project Settings 113, 117 Marker Head at the Ends 1882 Marker Head in the Middle 1882 Marker Range (On-Screen View Option) 979 Markers 613 Find Linked 621 Managing 613 Navigation 620 Range Lines 615 Source ~ Highlight 616 Mark-Up 1380 ~ Styles Dialog Box 1750 ~ Tools Palette 1746 and Teamwork 1388 Publishing and Retrieving 1386 show/hide Entry 1384 Marquee 331 Area Definition Options 334 Copy Cropped Image with 341 Effect in 3D 1595 Geometry methods 334 removing 338 stretching elements with 424 Master Layout 1134 apply to Layout 1134 Create New 1135 Grid for Drawing IDs 1161 Set as Default 1134 Settings 1661 title blocks 1136 Match with Internal Engine 1561 Materials 179 ~ Settings Dialog Box 1551 Assign 182 Bump Mapping 1557 create or modify 180
Index
display in 3D 183 display in Renderings 189 display in Section/Elevation/3DD windows 187 Emission value 1552 Exposure to Light 1552 LightWorks Shader Archives 1560 LightWorks Shaders 1558 Reflection 1552 Texture 1555 Textures 1551 Vectorial Hatching 1554 Matrix 444 Measure Tool 352 Measured Value 1854 Member Labels 1118 Member labels 1113 Memory Usage 1490 Menus 224 customization 1510 Merge 141 a DXF/DWG file 1369 ArchiCAD files 141 dimension chains 1073 PDFs into a single file 1179 Merge DXF-DWG 141 Merge to one DWG file. 1179 Mesh 756 ~ Tool Settings 1810 create a hole 764 Geometry 759 Mesh Point Height dialog box 761 New Mesh Points Dialog Box 762 MicroStation Design File 122, 126 Minimal Space 885 Mini-Navigator 247, 496 Mirror Dimension 1074 Mirror Library Part 1840 Mirroring Elements 398 Mirror a Copy 442 Missing Objects 205 Model Pictures 1392 Model Size 148 Model View Options 974 Combinations 976 Fill Display 975
for Construction Elements 975 for GDL Objects 975, 1588 Model View Options for Curtain Walls 817 Model Views 490 Modify Angle 416 Modify Wall 677 Modifying Element Sizes 412 Modular Frame 840, 906 Module 1334, 1339, 1700 Apply offset/rotation of most recently broken hotlinked ~ 1348 Break Link, Edit Elements, Replace Hotlink 1347 Breaking Hotlinks 1353 Choose Hotlink 1706 Deleting Modules from the Floor Plan 1353 Edit in Separate ArchiCAD 1346 Edit Parameters of Placed 1342 file format 120 File from Clipboard format 1340 Hotlink Manager Dialog Box 1701 Hotlink Options 1494 Managing Hotlinks 1351 Master Layer 1705 multiplatform issues 1357 Nested 1352 Place ~ 1341, 1705 Replace selection with this hotlinked module file 1348 restoring missing Hotlinks 1355 Save File as 1339 Save Selected Elements as 1340 Settings 1707 updating 1354 Module File 1339 Module File from Clipboard 124 Modules Source File Data Interpretation 1336 Mouse Constraints 369, 370 ~ and Methods (Work Environment options) 1481 Move node 436 Move Polygon Node 420 Move Sub-Element 1011 Moving Elements 393 1939
Index
Multiplying Elements 444 My Criteria Sets 1284, 1304
O
Object Depository 874 Object mode 270 Object Settings Dialog Box 1839 Object Settings of Library Part Elements 872 Objects see Parametric Objects 869 Objects On Line 874 Offset and Multiple Offset 377 Offset Dimension Plane 1061 One by one 851 One Story Up/One Story Down 1842 On-Screen View Options 978 Bold Cut Lines 979 Clean Wall & Beam Intersections 978 Drawing Frames (Show/Hide) 979 Highlight Source Markers 979 Marker Range 979 Master Items on Layout (Show/Hide) 979 Roof Pivot Lines 978 Show/Hide Drafting & Editing Aids 979 True Weight/Hairline 978 Vectorial Hatching 979 Walls & Beams Reference Lines 978 Opacity 1006, 1540 Open Archive Project 137 through a Network 140 Open a Solo Project 118 Open Debugger 1639 Open GL Options 1599 Open Parentheses 636 Opening Plane 1768 Operators in Solid Operations 965 Optimize Position 255 Optional Content 1226 Orbit (3D Navigation) 266 Organizer Palette 277 controls 1435 Oriented View 251 Original Scale 149, 1112 Origins 296 Edit 297
N
Navigation 246 Between ArchiCAD Windows 247 model display speed in 2D 1489 Pan 259 Navigation in 3D 262 Commands 263 Explore Model 264 Orbit 266 Navigator 271 Color Codes 279 controls 1427 display of ~ 274 Layout Book 1128 opening windows from 275 Organizer Palette 277 Project Map 280 Project Workflow 276 View Map 283 Navigator Palette 271 Navigator Preview (2D) 260 controls 1441 Navigator Preview (3D) 267 controls 1442 Network opening projects from 140 New Create new project 116 New 3D Document 585 New and Reset All 116 New Favorite 212, 213 New Hotlink 1341 New Message 1320 New Project 116 New Project Settings 1225 New User Settings 1229 No pending elements 1316 Nodes 435 Editing 436 North 1418, 1514, 1528, 1608 Nudge 354, 1578, 1579
1940
Index
Project ~ 297 User ~ 297 Other Elements 1291 Outlines Only 513 Output Color 1168 Overall Dimension 1083 Overhead All 513 Override Cover Fills 1586 Override Cut Fills 1586 Override Drafting Fills 1586 Override Fill Display 1014 Override Zone Fills 767
P
Palette Schemes 237 Palettes 230 Docking ~ 231 Palette group 231 Palette Schemes 230 Snapping ~ (MacOS Only) 232 Pan 259 Panel fixed 846 Panel classes 786 Panel offset 1820 Panel Thickness 1832 Paper Size 148 Parallel Projections 1602 ~ Settings 1602 Parameter Transfer 449, 886 between Objects 886 Parametric Objects 869 Corner Windows 921 Custom Components 902 Doors and Windows 909 GDL Script Window 1627 Interface Script 1635 Parameter Transfer Between Objects 886 placing 878 Saving 2D Symbols as Library Parts 892 saving 3D Models as objects 893 Saving Custom Shape Doors and Windows from the Project File 898 Saving Library Parts from the Project File 891
Saving Rectangular Doors and Windows from the Project File 896 Scripting Custom Objects 900 Skylights 922 Stairs 924 stretching 883 Wall Ends 923 Partial Open 1719 Partial Structure Display 980 Paste 388 Paste Options Dialog Box 1668 Patch Object 889 PDF Format Options 1179 PDF Output 1183 Pen Sets 172 Pens & Colors 171, 1548 Pen Weights 1549 Perspective Projection Settings 1605 Pet Palettes 392 Movement 1476 PhotoRendering 1392 Alpha Channel 1694 Antialiasing 1692 Background Picture 1693 engines 1688 Fog effect 1692 Internal Rendering Engine 1393 LightWorks Rendering Engine 1392 Settings 1688 Transparency 1692 Pick Up Parameters 449 Pick Up Settings 326 pivot line 713 Place Curtain Wall 789, 790, 796, 800 Place Curtain Wall Dialog Box 1835 Section Window 1837 Place Curtain Wall on Section 797 Place Drawing 278 Place External Drawing 1045, 1142 Plot 1170 2D Document 1680 Connection Options 1677 Layout 1681 Setup 1676 PlotFlow 1678 PlotWare 1170 1941
Index
PMK 1165, 1179 Polygons adding shapes to 422 Move Node 420 Offset Edges 421 Reshape 420 subtracting ~ shapes 422 Polyline Tool Settings 1872 Polylines 1037 and Chained Lines 1037 Continue 1038 Decompose a 1039 Open closed 1040 Unify into ~ 1040 PolyWall Corners 676, 1762 PolyWall Corners Can Change 676 Port Settings (Teamwork) 1215 Preferences see Project Preferences 146 Pre-Set Projections 1604 Add current Projection 1604 Set to Current Projection 1604 Print 1168 2D Document 1669 Layout 1673 Printer/Plotter Settings for MacOS 1682 Priority 1545 Profiles (Complex Elements) 699 Creating or Editing 702 Merge Parallel Elements 706 Profile Manager Dialog Box 1563 Store or Apply 705 Profiles (Work Environment) 241 ~ Options 1471 Apply a Profile 241 Default ~ in ArchiCAD 11 242 Project Administrator 1231 Project Backup Options 1261 Project Backup Schedule 1261 Project Category (Teamwork) 1241 Project Chooser 277, 294, 1428 Project Data Folder 1214 Project Indexes 648 Index Schemes 1650 Index Settings Dialog Box 1650 Project Info 1456 1942
Project Log 1255, 1324 Project Map 280, 1429 Project Mark-Up see Mark-Up 1380 Project North 1528, 1608 Project Notes 282, 1458 Project Origin 297, 1547, 1865 Project Preferences 146 Calculation Units 1518 Zones Preferences 1522 Project Preview 1459 Project Reviewer 1373 ~ & Mark-Up 1381, 1386 ~ Environment 1373, 1751 Project Settings 1253 Project Settings (Teamwork) 1253 Projected with Overhead 512 Projections in 3D 535 Property Objects 1193 Public Criteria Sets 1284, 1304 Public Sets 1302 Publisher 1172 and Mark-Up 1386 and Project Reviewer 1181 Viewing and Redlining DWF files 1181 Publisher Set ~ Properties Dialog Box 1437 Controls 1433 defining 1175 Print/Plot Options 1178 Publishing Properties 1177 Publisher Set Chooser and Manager 1433 Publisher Work Environment Options) 1486 Purge all unused Attributes 1360, 1724 1735 Purge all unused attributes 1368
Q
QTVR Player 1414 Quick Layers Palette 155 Quick Options 147, 157, 291 Quick Selection 306 Click and Drag with ~ 306
Index
R
Radial Dimensions 1849 Radial Distorted Fill 1866 Radial Distortion 1547 Rafter Settings 1611 Blocking 1615 Collar Beams 1616 Eaves Purlin 1615 Hip Rafter 1613 Multiple Rafters 1612 Plate Beam 1615 Purlin 1614 Tie Beams 1616 Trimmer 1615 Valley Rafter 1613 Railings 1804 Railings (StairMaker) 946 Readable 254, 256 Readable Text 1795, 1808 Realistic 1588 Rebuild summary of ~ commands 562 Recent Project 115 recent project 118 Redefine 3D Projections 1591 Redefine Boundary from Fill 832 Redefine Filter Elements 1591 Redefine the 3D Document 587 Reduce Zone Area Only 775 Reduce Zone Volume 776 Reference See Trace Reference 466 Reference Levels 303 Reference Line of Wall 655, 1761 Reference Surface 783 Reflected Ceiling Plan 1588 Refresh 562 Regular Sloped Mesh Dialog Box 1813 Relation to Zones 775, 861, 1786 Relative Coordinates in Tracker 347 Relative Floor Plan Range 514 Relative to Orientation 1814, 1840, 1855, 1858, 1875, 1913 Release and Comment 1297, 1324
Release Selected and Comment 1313 Relink 1355 Reload 197, 199, 200, 201 Reload Project from Server 1270 Relocate 1356 Remove guide line 364 Replace Linked Libraries with Server Libraries automatically 1249 Replace selection with this hotlinked module file 1340 Replace with 1251 Report Window 282, 1460 Requested by me 1291 Reservation Results 1294 Reserve Clone Settings 1299 Reserve free items 1298 Reserve with free items 1298, 1300 Reset Orientation 252 Resize (Enlarge or Reduce) Elements 426 Restructure Table 643 Return 139 Reveal Depth 1767 Revert to Automatic Position 1077 Role 1232 Role Settings 1233 Roles 1232 Rollback 1263 Roof 712 ~ Edge Angle 1777 ~ Pivot Lines (Show/Hide) 978 ~ Tool Settings 1774 Barrel-Vaulted 722 Create Hole 727 Dome-Shaped 721 draw on Floor Plan 715 drawing in 3D 718 Geometry 713 Level Lines 729 Trim Element to 736 Roof Edge 730 Roof Elevations 728 Roof Insulation Fill Type 1521 Roof Pivot Lines 713 Roof Wizard 749 ~ Dialog Box 1616 RoofMaker 744 1943
Index
~ Toolbox 745 Settings 1611 Rotate Dimension 1074 Rotate Orientation 252 Shortcut 257 Rotating Elements 397 Rotate a Copy 442 Round-Trip Conversion (Smart Merge) 1370 Ruler 351
S
Save as DWG/DXF Files 1366 Save Current Default Settings 212 Save Current Settings as Favorite 213 Save Last Selections 212 Save Navigator Preview Data 1487 Save Selection as Module 1340 Save view 278 Save view and place on Layout 1139 Scale 147 Model Size vs. Paper Size Elements 148 Schedules 281 Schematic 817 Scheme 785 Scheme (Work Environment) ~ Options 1473 Apply ~ 240 Scheme Settings Dialog Box (Interactive Schedule) 1642 Search and Replace Text 1122, 1448 Secondary Dimensions 1080 Section ~ Tool Settings 1880 ~ Window Rebuild Control 1484 adjusting or breaking ~ lines 564 create ~ Viewpoint 542 Create Independent ~ Viewpoint 559 Define Reference for Linked Marker 557 Define Reference for Source Marker 545 Depth and Distant Area Limit 544 Display of Elements 548 Display of Lines and Markers 563 Distant Area 544 Horizontal/Vertical Range 544 1944
Place a Linked ~ Marker 555 Unlinked Marker 558 updating 560 window status 547 Select All available 1878 Select in 3D 632 Select on Floor Plan 632 Select Story 508 Selected Polygon 754, 755 Selection ~ Dots 311 Add Elements to ~ 307 Area Shape Options for ~ Rectangle/ Polygon 308 Highlight 313 Marquee ~ and Stories 334 of multiple elements using polygon 307 of Overlapping Elements 309 Quick ~ 306 Select All 305, 333 using Marquee 331 Selection and Element Information (Work Environment) 1477 Selections Palette 329 Send an email 1439 Send and Comment 1324 Send New Mail 1320 Send Password by Email 1229 Server Administrator 1214, 1231 Server Link File 1246 Server Manager 1221 Server Monitor 1217 Set Cities 1418 Set Home Story by Elevation 445, 509 Set up Server Manually 1246 Setup Work Environment 117 SGI Image file format 125 Share this Project 1245 Share without Opening 1252 Shortcut Collision 1501 Shortcuts 229 ~ and Window Types 1502 print list 1502 Schemes 237 Show 3D Elements in Wireframe 154 Show Conflict 1294
Index
Show Favorites of Active Tool Only 211, 217 Show Grid Elements 1090 Show in library 872, 1767, 1839 Show Main Palettes Only 230 Show Minimal Space 1588 Show New Message Alert in Teamwork 1488 Show on Stories 510 Show Opening Lines 1589 Show Pattern Unit 1015, 1539, 1541 Show Projection 514 Show Reservation by Users 1291 Show Section Line on Stories 1881, 1890, 1897 Show Selection/Marquee in 3D 337, 523 Show Stored Selection in 3D 524 Show Story Levels 1887, 1894, 1900 Show Successful 1294 Show the log file (Publisher) 1486 Show/Hide Elements 153 Shut down BIM Server services and exit 1218 SHX Fonts 1368 Side Material 755 Sketch Rendering Engine 1393, 1697 Skin Pattern 1546 Skin Priority 1546 Skin Separator Line 1022, 1870 Skin Thickness 1546 Skip 1352 Skip Nested Modules 1352, 1706 Skylights 922 ~ Tool Settings 1773 SkyObject 1397 Slab 750 ~ Tool Settings 1788 creating 752 holes 753 Slopes 1801 Smart Merge 1370, 1722 Snap Grid 353 Snapping to Existing Elements 380 Solid Element Operations 964, 1461 Solid Fill 1002 Sort Elements 1205 Sounds 1488 Source Markers see also Create a Section Viewpoint 542
Show/Hide Highlight 979 Special Align 407 Special Distribute 411 Special Folders (Work Environment) 1498 Special Snap Points 382, 1446 Spell Checker 1123 Splines Add new node to ~ 1035 Bzier 1033 drawing 1033 editing 1035 freehand geometry method 1036 Modify ~ Path 1035 Move tangent handle 1033 Natural 1033 natural 1033 Tool Settings 1910 unify 1035 Split 428 Split Curtain Wall 861 Split Drawing among Multiple Layouts 645, 1877 Splitting Elements 428 Split and Adjust Shortcut 430 Stacking Order 456 Bring Forward 457 Bring to Front 457 Reset Default Order 457 Send Backward 457 Send to Back 457 Staggering 1089 Stair 2D Symbol Attributes 1795 Invisible Structure 1795, 1808 Scale Sensitive 926, 1807 Show Numbering 1795, 1808 Walking Line Symbol 1795 StairMaker 929 Settings 1799 Stairs 924 ~ Tool Settings 1792 2D Symbol Types 1794 based on Manually Drawn Elements 930 Create New Stair 930 Create Stair Using Selection 955 Custom using Standard Stair Type 930 1945
Index
Custom with StairMaker 928 displaying 925 StairMaker Settings 1799 Standard 257 Start ArchiCAD 112 Start Local Server 1246 Start Server 1217 Status (Teamwork Backup) 1262 Stop Server 1217 store projections 536 Stories 494 ~ to Show in 3D 1595 Create a New Story 499 Display in 3D 497 Display in Section/Elevation/IE 498 Edit Elements by Stories 1571 Navigate Among ~ 496 Story Level Lines 501 Story Settings Dialog Box 1569 Stories on Section 1887, 1894, 1900 Story Editing Mode palette 502 Stretch angular 1027 Beams 418 Ellipse 1028 Height 425 Lines or Arcs 1024 Objects 883 radial 1027 Slanted Columns 416 Slanted Walls 416 Walls 414 with Marquee 424 Stretch height 416 Stretch height with fixed angle 416 Stretch slanted height 416 Stretch Trapezoid Wall 415 Strikethrough 1451 Strokes 1541 Structural Function 1758 Structural Properties Panel 1758 Structure Display in View Settings 1652 Subfloor Thickness 1771 Subscript 1451 Subset 1946
Properties 1431 Subsets 1137 ~ Settings Dialog Box 1656 Subtract Fill from Boundary 832 Subtract from Polygon 423 Subtype Hierarchy 1627 Dialog Box 1641 Sun ~ dialog box 1607 position in projections 1603 Sun cursor 320 Sun Study 1418 SunObject 1398 Superscript 1451 Surveyors unit 1514 Symbol Fills 1003 Symbolic Cut 512 Symbolic with Overhead 512, 817
T
Taps 1589 Teamwork Comments & Log 1255 Teamwork Data 1275 Teamwork Data Folder 1275, 1499 Teamwork Discovery Port 1497 Teamwork Portable Project 1226 Teamwork Project Settings 1253 Teamwork Support Package 1333 Teamwork Toolbar 1274 Template Files 133 Template Folder 1499 Temporary Folder 1498 Text ~ Editor 1100, 1451 ~ Tool Settings 1857 Drag & Drop ~ 447 see also Text Blocks 1099 Text Blocks 1099 Alignment of text 1857 Applying Favorite Text Settings 1104 breaking ~ 1100 Formatting 1102 Formatting Palette and Text Editor Controls 1450 Indents and Tabs 1452
Index
Insert Symbol 1450 Leading 1857 Line spacing 1857 non-breaking ~ 1101 placing ~ 1100 Resizing Text 1103 Spacing factor 1857 Text Editor 1451 Width factor 1857 Text Formatting ~ of Individual characters and paragraphs 1105 ~ Palette 1100, 1115 of Text Block Components 1105 Text Formatting Palette default position 1476 Text Orientation on Symbol 256 Text Window Find dialog box 1124 Textbox Handles 1099 Text-Type Windows 1124 Textures 181 3D Alignment 184 Reset 186 save with archive file 1556 Title block 1136 Drawing 1147 Type 1147 Title Block 1136 title blocks 1136 Title Type 1148 title type 1878 Tool Group Options 1504 Tool Schemes 237 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes 1757 Tool Settings Dialog Boxes (Work Environment options) 1505 Toolbars 226 menus in 1507 sticky pop-up menu 1508 Toolbox 220 customize 220, 1503 Top Direction 850 Trace & Reference Palette 1453 Choose 472
Color/Visibility Options 475 Compare with Active 479 Displace 482 Display Order 480 Intensity 481 Make Fills and Zones Transparent 480 Move 476 printing 1168 Related Commands 469 Show/Hide 471 Splitter 481 Switch ~ with Active 477 Update 478 Trace & Reference Palette 469 Trace Options 469 Tracker 345 Coordinate Input 348 Defining Tracker Coordinates 347 Expert Options 350 Parameters 346 Tracker and Coordinate Input (Work Environment) 1479 Translate AutoCAD Blocks as 1740 Translucency 1002 Transparency (3D Document Model Display) 1594 Transparency (Alpha Channel effect) 1557 Transparency in Shading 533 Transparency in Shading (3D Window) 1597 Transparent background 1586 Trim to Roof 736 Trim Zone 774 Trimming Elements 434 True Line Weight 165, 1549 TrussMaker 959, 1620 editing trusses 961 in Section/Elevation Windows 962 on the Floor Plan 960 twportable 1226 twsupport 1333
U
U3D 1189 U3D File 131 Unavailable Libraries 204 1947
Index
Undo/Redo 390 Undo Limit 1494 Uniform Frame Classes 813, 1828, 1831 Uniform Panel Classes 814 Unify Line-type elements 1040 Unique ID 1861 Unlinked Marker 558 unlinked marker 541 Unlock 455 Update Auto-rebuild Model viewpoints continuously 1487 Update Zones 777 Update Zones dialog box 777 Upload 1250 Upload to Internet 1178 Use a Template 113 Use Material Defined in 3D Cutting Planes 1592 Use Objects Materials 1842 Use Skin End Lines 1546 Use Skin Separator Line 1546 Use symbol arrow 1862 Use symbol color 1862 Use with 1545 User Colors 1292 User Preference Schemes 237 User Property (Teamwork) 1241 User Settings (Teamwork) 1229 Users and Roles 1248, 1257, 1259
View Map 283 Clone Folder 284 Controls 1430 Viewpoint 280 Virtual Reality 1413 Virtual Trace 466 Visualization 1389 Visualization Extras 1410 VR Objects 1413 ~ Settings 1918 VR Scenes 1415 ~ Settings 1920 VR/Camera Tool Settings 1914 VRML File 130
W
Wall 654 ~ Tool Settings 1909 chained 661 Complex Profiles 699 curved 658 direction 655 Display 656 Gable 670 Geometry 1761 height 1761 Intersections 671 Log 669 Modify Wall 655 modifying slanted ~ 416 Polygon 666 Priority 671, 1764 rectangular 663 Reference Lines 655 Relation to Zones 1766, 1824 Slanted 668 Trapezoid 664 Wall Air skin Fill Type 1521 Wall End Lines 1764 Wall Ends 923 ~ Tool Settings 1909 Wall Insulation skin Fill Type 1521 WaveFront File 127 Web Options (Work Environment) 1496 Window Background Color 1586
V
Various 755 Vectorial 3D Hatching 1594, 1597 Vectorial Fill 1002 Vectorial Hatching 180, 1008 orientation 1865 Vectorial Sun Shadows 1597 Vertical displacement 445 vertical range 578 View 283 modify ~ settings 290 Properties 1430 save 289 Settings 287, 1652 Settings and Storing Options 1435 1948
Index
WindowLight 1399 Windows see Doors and Windows 909 Windows Enhanced Metafile 121, 125 Windows Metafile 125 Wireframe 154 Witness Line 1052 modifying 1075 Options 1846 type 1844 Work Environment 235 ~ Dialog Box 235 Apply a Scheme 240 Creating an Office-Standard ~ 240 Profiles 241 Scheme Options 1473 store customized Scheme 239 Work Environment Dialog Box 1470 Working Units & Levels 1513 Worksheet 605 Boundary 602 Contents 609 Create ~ with Model Source 608 Define Reference for Linked Marker 557 Define Reference for Source Marker 545 Independent 611 Unlinked Marker 558 vs. Detail 607
X
XREF Management Dialog Box 1708 XREFs 1358 and Layer Structure 1359 in Round-Trip Communication 1361 X-Y Only 1054, 1059
Z
Z-Buffer Rendering Engine 1393, 1696 Zone Area 775 Zone Categories 1562 Zone Lists 1198 Zones 765 ~ Tool Settings 1813 creating 771 displaying in 3D 770 Trim to Another Element 774 updating 777 Zone Area Calculation 1816 Zone Background display 1587 Zone Boundary 775 Zone Categories 766 Zone Fill 1815 Zone Polygons 1813 Zone Stamp 769 Zone Volume 775 Zones Preferences 1522 Zoom 248 Zoomed Area 1653 Zooming 1653
1949
Index
1950

AC13 Help

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

AC13 Help

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Printable PDF version

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Migration Guide for ArchiCAD 13 _________________________________ 75

Configuration __________________________________________________ 111

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Interaction ____________________________________________________ 245

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Virtual Building ________________________________________________ 489

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Documentation _________________________________________________ 993

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Collaboration _________________________________________________ 1209

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Visualization __________________________________________________ 1389

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

User Interface Reference ________________________________________ 1425

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Index ________________________________________________________ 1927

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Finding a Help Topic

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Go to the next page in the Help

Go to the previous page in the Help

Go back to the Help page you were before

Locate the current Help topic in the Table of Contents

Print out the current Help topic

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

Access Drop-Down text

Access Related Topics

For More Information

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

Getting Help on ArchiCAD 13

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Collaboration Next Generation Teamwork Solution

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

On-Demand Reservation System

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Task-Oriented Instant Team Communication

ArchiCAD 13 Reference Guide

ArchiCAD 13 New Features

Remote Project Management